Γ 


B 4 98 444 


Ere 
He 
τῷ 
ἐν 
δεν 
δ: 
τὰ 
ἘΞ! 


ΤΠ 


' 
7: 
= 
Ξ 
2 
os = 
= 
3 
ΕΒ 
a 
: 


MAs hy 


ΜΑΙ 


shan ett 416 Ui Ble Sete Titel st: 


LIBRARY 


OF THE 


LINIVERSITY ‘OF CALIFORNIA. 


* Class thoes S 


Re, i \ 


ἀξ ‘oe: f 


A :-GRAMMAR 


Ξ - / 
Ξ eS 
~ ; A 


OF 


Per ||: AND TONIC GREEK 


BY 


FRANK COLE BABBITT, PxH.D. (Harvarp) 


PROFESSOR OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE AND LITERATURE 
- IN TRINITY COLLEGE, HARTFORD 


NEW YORK -:- CINCINNATI -:. CHICAGO 
AMERICAN BOOK COMPANY 


7 


Ν 


Ἁ. -- 


7 
sae 


\ / 


‘ 


FREDERICK DEFOREST ALLEN 


On August 4, 1897, occurred the sudden death of FREDERICK 
DeForest ALLEN, Ph.D., Professor of Classical Philology in 
Harvard University. Of the loss which classical scholarship 
has suffered by his death I need not speak here. His thor- 
oughness and accuracy, his intrepid regard for the truth, and 
his keen, unbiased judgment are well known both to his 
former pupils and to the larger world which has read his 
published writings. 

Shortly before his death he invited me to join with him in 
compiling a small Greek Grammar. During the two weeks 
immediately preceding his death we had worked together as far 
as the third declension, and had discussed somewhat the general 
plan of the book. After his death the publishers expressed a 
desire that I should complete the work which had been thus 
begun —a desire with which I could not refuse to comply. 
The task has been one of sadness and of joy: of sadness, 
because at every turn I missed the strong counsel of a con- 
summate scholar; of joy, at the thought that I might thus, 
even in some slight measure, help to perpetuate the memory 
of a man whose name will always stand for what is highest 
and best in scholarship. 

To the memory of FrEpERICK DEForEst ALLEN this book 


is affectionately inscribed. PENEPRAI 
UJ ιν ΓπΠΑΙ 


Copyrient, 1902, BY 


FRANK COLE BABBITT. 


AT. AND ION, GREFK. 
Wie Pek 


PREFACE JAA th 


THIS grammar has for its purpose to state the essential 
facts and principles of the Greek language in concise 
form, with only so much discussion as may reasonably be 
demanded for a clear understanding of the subject. 

While in recent years the ability to read a language 
has rightly come to be regarded as the proper test of a 
real knowledge of it, this point of view, so far from be- 
littling the study of formal grammar, more than ever 
insists that a thorough knowledge of the essentials of the 
grammar is the most important part of the equipment of 
him who would read a language with ease. By essen- 
tials is meant no antiquated lore about the vocative of 
Geos or of ἀδελῴόος, but the recurrent facts of inflection 
and ‘syntax,—nominative ypa, genitive yepas, and so 
forth, — with such side lights as can be brought to bear 
to make these facts easier of acquisition and comprehen- 
sion. A considerable experience in elementary teaching 
has convinced me that explanations are extremely useful, 
even to very young pupils; and I am persuaded that an 
occasional appeal to the reason rather than to the sheer 
memory of the pupil will not always prove futile. 

The work was begun in collaboration with the late Pro- 
fessor Frederick de Forest Allen, and, in justice to his 
memory, it is proper to state that pages 153-36 and 40-46 
stand practically as they were composed by Professor 
Allen and myself working together. For the remainder 
I am solely responsible, 


9 
v 


101646 


4 PREFACE 


It was the intention at the beginning to prepare a 
grammar for use in the secondary schools. As the work 
progressed, however, I found that, with but a slight in- 
crease of bulk, it would be possible to include also as 
much grammatical information as is usually required by 
students in college. With these additions, this work 
meets the needs of secondary schools, and at the same 
time is sufficient for all ordinary demands of the college 
course. 

The book incorporates the results of the more recent 
philological studies. The doctrine of the Ablaut is stated 
untechnically, and it is given proper prominence in inflec- 
tion and word formation. Due regard is paid to the fact 
that analogy plays an important part in language, and 
that the context is not to be neglected in determining 
the exact significance of mode and tense. 

Ionic forms are given in footnotes instead of being 
combined with Attic forms, and this arrangement is fol- 
lowed also in the Syntax and the verb list; the reason for 
so doing is apparent to anybody who has ever taught 
Greek prose composition. 

Contract forms are given in the contracted form fol- 
lowed by the uncontracted form (which is often purely 
theoretical) in parentheses, and it is hoped that pupils will 
realize that the Attic Greeks said ποιῶ, and not ποιέω. 

In the examples under Inflection and Word Formation 
the letter or syllable to which attention is directed is 
made prominent by full-faced type; in the Syntax the 
same result is accomplished hy spacing the word. 

The paradigms have been written to conform to our 
present knowledge, although some matter has been re- 
tained solely because it has become so engrafted in cur- 
rent texts that it could not be omitted. 


PREFACE 5 


So, also, in the matter of Homeric forms, I have, I trust, 
given due consideration to the vulgate. A few things I 
have omitted entirely; others I have recorded for the 
reason given in the preceding paragraph. Yet I am 
convinced that if our schools should adopt a fairly con- 
servative text of the Homeric poems like that of Cauer, 
from which assimilated verbs and forms like Αἰόλου. oT HL, 
and the like, have been banished, it would lighten the 
task of instruction, and the time given to explaining 
unnecessary forms could be better devoted to other 
purposes. 

In selecting examples to illustrate the chapter on Syn- 
tax, I have given preference to those from authors and 
works commonly read at the earler stages of the pupil’s 
progress. By printing the examples in the same type as 
the rest of the matter, the number of pages in the chapter 
on Syntax has been considerably increased, but the gain 
in clearness, and in the prominence of the examples, more 
than offsets the apparent increase in bulk. 

In the treatment of Syntax I have been conservative, 
although I have allowed myself some license in changing 
the conventional arrangement of the material. 

In addition to the books mentioned on pages 6 and 7, 
I have found helpful also the two well-known grammars 
of this country, as well as those of Sonnenschein, Kaegi, 
Lattmann-Miller, and Hahne’s Gtriechische Syntaz. 

Space does not permit me to enumerate all the friends 
who by advice or suggestion have given me help, but I 
desire in particular to express my gratitude to Professor 
George Edwin Howes of the University of Vermont, who 
has read at least twice every portion of the proofs. To 
his scholarship and sound common sense I am indebted 
for many helpful suggestions and corrections. Likewise 


0 PREFACE 


to Professor Clifford H. Moore and Mr. William Fen- 
wick Harris of Harvard University, who have also read 
the proofs, I am indebted for numerous corrections and 
helpful suggestions. Others whom I should like to men- 
tion also by name I am obliged to include in a general 
acknowledgment. 

I shall be grateful for corrections and suggestions from 
any source. 

FRANK COLE BABBITT. 


HARTFORD, CONNECTICUT, 
March, 1901. 


No conscientious teacher will find answered in this 
book all of the many perplexing questions which will 
arise in his mind. ‘The following list contains the titles 
of the most important modern works on Greek Grammar, 
in which such questions are fully discussed (and some- 
times answered): 


Ktuner, R. Ausfiihrliche Grammatik der griechischen Sprache. 3te 
Auflage in neuer Bearbeitung besorgt von Friedrich Blass. Han- 
nover, 1890-1898. ὅνο. 

Teil I. 1,2. Elementar- und Formenlehre. S. xxiii + 645, xi + 
652. Teil 11. 1. Satzlehre. In neuer Bearbeitung besorgt von 
3ernhard Gerth. S. ix + 666. 


(The most comprehensive work on Greek grammar. A model of 
careful and accurate scholarship. Thoroughly conservative.) 


Meyer, Gustay. Griechische Grammatik. 38te Auflage. S. xviii + 
115. Leipzig, 1896. 8vo. (Bibliothek indogermanischer Gram- 
matiken. Bd. 111.) 

(Deals with the sounds and inflections only,from the point of view 
of Comparative Grammar. Full, accurate, and moderately conserva- 
tive.) 


PREFACE 7 


BruGMANN, Karu. Griechische Grammatik. (Lautlehre, Stamm- 
bildungs- und Flexionslehre und Syntax.) 96 Auflage. S. xix + 
632. Miinchen, 1900. 8vo. (Jn Miiller, I. von. Handbuch der 
Klassischen Altertums-Wissenschaft. Bd. 11. Abt. 1.) 

(Written from the point of view of Comparative Grammar. Briefer 
than Meyer, and more radical.) 


MEISTERHANS, K. Grammatik der attischen Inschriften. 5te Auflage. 
S. XIV. + 288. Berlin, 1900. 8vo. 
(Deals with inscriptions only. Most of the results are embodied 
in Kihner-Blass. ) 


GILDERSLEEVE, B. L. Syntax of Classical Greek from Homer to 
Demosthenes. Pt. I. N. Y., 1900. 8vo. 
(Clear and accurate in statement, and remarkable for the excellent 
collection and arrangement of examples.) 


Goopwin, Wa. Watson. Syntax of the Moods and Tenses of the 
Greek Verb. Rewritten and enlarged. pp. xxxii + 464 - 8. 
Boston, U.S.A., 1890. 8vo. 

(Deals fully and thoroughly with the syntax of the verb.) 


Buiass, Frrepricu. Pronunciation of Ancient Greek. Tr. from the 
3d German ed. by W. J. Purton. Cambridge, Eng., 1890. ὅνο. 
(A careful collection and consideration of the evidence relating to 

the pronunciation of ancient Greek.) 


SmytuH, Hersert Werr. The Sounds and Inflections of the Greek 
} 


| Dialects. Jonic. pp. xxviii + 668. Oxford, 1894. ὅνο. 
(Thoroughly aceurate and reliable. Contains a full treatment of 

the dialect of Herodotus.) 

Van Leeuwen, J. Enchiridium Dictionis Epicae. pp. xxii + 606. 

Lugd. Batavorum, 1892-1894. 8vo. 


(Entirely radical, but invaluable for the very full collection of 
material which it contains. ) 


Monro, ἢ. B. A Grammar of the Homeric Dialect. 2d ed. pp. 
xxiv + 436. Oxford, 1891. 8vo. 


(Deals more particularly with Homeric syntax. Accurate, reliable, 
but very conservative.) 


CONTENTS 


INTRODUCTION 


The Greek Language 


WRITING AND SOUND 


Alphabet . ὃ 

Vowels. : : 

Diphthongs 

Breathings 

Consonants : 

Interchange of Vowels 

Contraction of Vowels 

Omission of Vowels. 

Consonant Changes . 

Consonants with Vowels . 

Rejection or Transfer of Aspi- 
ration . 

Hiatus (Crasis and Elision) 

Movable Consonants 

Final Consonants. 

Syllables and Quantity 


Accent 
Proclitics and Enclitics. 
Punctuation 
INFLECTION 
Nouns ; ; 
Case Endings 
Substantives 


First Declension 
Second Declension 
Attic Second Declension 
Third Declension . 
Consonant Stems 
Vowel Stems 
Irregular Declension 
Adjectives 
First and Second Declensions 
Third Declension . 4 
First and ‘Third Declensions 
Irregular Declension 
Declension of Participles 
Comparison of Adjectives 
Adverbs 
Pronouns . 
Numerals . 


PAGE 


11 


PAGE 
VERBS 96 
Voice : Ξ : 5 ες 90 
Mode : 5 : : Ἐς )0/ 
Tense 98 
Person and Number. 100 
Personal Endings =, LOW 
Inflection (-» Form and -μι 
Form) 102 
Augment . 105 
Reduplication 108 
Accent of the Verb . 110 
Formation of Tense Stems 110 
The Present System 113 
The First Aorist System 118 


The Second Aorist System . 120 


The Future System 123 
The First Perfect System 124 
The Second Perfect System . 125 


The Pluperfects Active . 126 


The Perfect Middle System . 127 
The Future Perfect 729 

The First Aorist Passive Sys- 
tem . 129 

The Second Aorist Passive 130 
The Futures Passive . 13 


_ The Verbal Adjectives . 5 bY 
Synopsis of radevw . 


oo 

Paradigms of -w Verbs 135 
Paradigms of -u Verbs . 145 
Second Perfect without Suffix . 151 
Irregular Verbs in -μι 152 

FORMATION OF WORDS 
Derivative Words 158 
Formation of Substantiv es 161 
Formation of Adjectives 166 
Formation of Adverbs . 168 
Formation of Verbs 169 
Compound Words 71] 
Meaning of Compound Words 174 
SYNTAX 
The Sentence 175 


Agreement ἥ ξ 
Syntax of Substantiv: Csceer . 180 
The Cases : 
The Nominative and Vocative . 183 
The Accusative Ε 3 : 
Direct Object : : 


CONTENTS 9 
PAGE PAGE 
The Cognate Accusative . 184] Final Clauses 294 
Adverbial Uses of the Ac- Purpose. 294 
cusative . 186 Object Clauses 296 
Two Accusativ es with One Clauses of Fearing 297 
Verb 188 Result 298 
The Genitive Ξ 190 Causal Clauses 299 
The True Genitive 191 Conditions 300 
The Partitive Genitive 193 Concessive Clauses 9511 
The Ablative Genitive . 197 Relativeand Temporal Clauses 511 
The Dative 202 | The Infinitive 315 
The True Dative . : 202) Subject of the Infinitive 315 
Dative of the Indirect Ob- Uses of the Infinitive 317 
ject : 205 The Infinitive asa Substan- 
The Dative of Inter est 204 tive 918 
The Locative Dative 206 The Infinitive in Indirect 
The Instrumental Dative 207 Discourse 323 
Place and Time (Summary ) 211 | The Participle . 324 
Prepositions with the Cases 212 The Attributive Participle 324 
Use and Meanings of the The Circumstantial Participle 325 
Prepositions : 213 Genitive and Accusative 
Improper Prepositions . 224 Absolute 330 
Syntax of Adjectives 295}. he Supplementary Participle 332 
Syntax of Adverbs : 229 not in Indirect Discourse . 332 
The Adverbs οὐ and μή 230 in Indirect Discourse 334 
The Adverb ἄν . 232 | The Verbal Adjectives 336 
Conjunctions . . 234 | Indirect Discourse 338 
The Definite Article, ὁ, a τό 235 vs 
Position of the Article . 238 APPENDICES 
Syntax of Pronouns . 241} A. Versification . d47 
Personal and Reflexive . 243 Trochaic Rhythms . 852 
The Intensive Pronoun αὐτός 245 Tambic Rhythms 353 
Possessive Pronouns 247 Dactylic Rhythms . 355 
Demonstrative Pronouns 248 Anapaestic Rhythms . 357 
Relative Pronouns 249 Lyric Rhythms 359 
Interrogative Pronouns. 252 Lyric Rhythms in 3 Time 360 
Indefinite Pronouns 255 Dactylo - Epitritic 
ἄλλος and ἕτερος. 253 Rhythms . 9604 
Syntax of the Verb . 254 Other Lyric Rhy thms . 865 
Agreement of Verbs . 255'B. Table of Vowel Contractions 867 
The Voices . 257, C. The Pronunciation of Greek 
Use of the Tenses 263 | Proper Namesin English 908 
The Tenses of the Indicative 264 D. Some Additional Grammati- 
Tenses of Other Modes. 272 cal Terms : . 909 
Uses of the Finite Modes . 277|E. Weights, Measures, and 
Statements 281 Time. 372 
Questions 286 | F. List of Verbs x77 
Direct uestions 286 
Indir ae Questions . 290 INDICES 
Commands and Exhortations 291 English 422 
Wishes . 292 | Greek 437 


10 


LIST 


acc. = accusative. 
act. = active, actively. 
adj. = adjective. 
advb. = adverb. 
aor. = aorist. 

ef. = compare. 

D = dual. 

dat. = dative. 

decl. = declension. 
e.g. = for example. 
encl. = enclitic. 
etc. = and so forth. 
f., ff. = following. 
fem. = feminine. 


fut. = future. 
gen. = genitive. 


ABBREVIATIONS 


Aesch. = Aeschylus. 

Ag. = Agamemnon. 

Pr. = Prometheus. 

Aeschin. = Aeschines. 

Ar. = Aristophanes. 

Ach. = Acharnenses. 

Ey. = Equites. 

Nub. = Nubes. 

Ran. = Ranae. 

V. = Vespae. 

Dem. = Demosthenes. 

Hin.) == tomers A.B, Τὸ 
etc. are used in refer- 
ring to the books of 
the Iliad, and a, 6, y, 
etc. in referring to the 
books of the Odyssey. | 


Hdt. = Herodotus. 
Hes. = Hesiod. 
O.D. = Opera et Dies. 


ABBREVIATIONS 
OF ABBREVIATIONS 


i.e. = that is. 
impf. = imperfect. 
impy. = imperative. 


indic. = indicative. 
infin. = infinitive. 
κτλ. = καὶ τὰ λοιπά (and 


the rest). 
lit. = literal, literally. 
mase. = masculine. 
mid. = middle. 
Mss. = manuscripts. 
neut. = neuter. 
nom. = nominative. 
opt. = optative. 
P= plural: 
partic. = participle. 


pass. = passive. 
pers. = person. 
perf., pf. = perfect. 
plur., pl. = plural. 
plupf. = pluperfect. 
pres. = present. 
q.v. = which see. 
se. = scilicet. 

S., sing. = singular. 
subj. = subjunctive. 
viz. = namely. 

voc. = vocative. 


section, sec- 


USED IN CITING EXAMPLES FROM 


GREEK AUTHORS 


E. = Euripides. 

Alc. = Alcestis. 

And. = Andromache. 

El. = Electra. 

Hec. = Hecuba. 

Hel. = Helena. 

HF .= Hercules Furens. 

Hipp. = Hippolytus. 

1.1. = Iphigenia Tau- 
rica. 

Med. = Medea. 

Supp. = Supplices. 

Tro. = Troades. 

Isoc. = Isocrates. 

Lys. = Lysias. 

PIF— lato: 

Ap. = Apology. 

Crit. — Crito: 


| Go. = Gorgias. 


Leg. = Leges. 


Menex. = Menexenus. 

Phaed. = Phaedo. 

Phaedr. = Phaedrus. 

Rep. = Republic. 

S. = Sophocles. 

Aj = Ayan. 

Ant. = Antigone. 

El. = Electra. 

O.T. = Oedipus Tyran- 
nus. 

Th. = Thucydides, 

Xn. = Xenophon. 

A. = Anabasis. 

Ages. = Agesilaus. 

Oy. = Cyropaedia. 

Hell. = Hellenica. 

Hier. = Hiero. 

Mem. = Memorabilia. 

Oec. = Oeconomicus. 

Symp. = Symposium. 


GREEK GRAMMAR 


¥ } INTRODUCTION 


THE GREEK LANGUAGE 


GREEK is the language of a people inhabiting not 
only the mainland of Greece, but also the islands of the 
Aegean Sea and the adjacent shores, together with a small 
part of Italy. The Greeks called themselves Hellenes 
(EXAnves), but the Romans called them Graec?, and hence 
the English word Greek. 

The Greek language belongs to the Indo-European 
group of languages, and is related to Sanskrit, Latin, 
Persian, Slavonic, Celtic, and Germanic. Hence comes 
the relation which exists between many English and 
Greek words. A greater number of English words, 
however, are derived directly from Greek words. For 
exainple, English know is the same as Greek yi-yvo-cKo, 
but the English words gnomie and arithmetic are derived 
from the Greek γνωμικός and ἀριθμητική. 

For over twenty-five hundred years Greek has been 
spoken and written, — with such changes as are inevitable 
in the growth and development of any language, — but 
the masterpieces of Greek literature were written some 
centuries before the Christian era. In the neighborhood 
of 400 B.c. Greek may be said to have reached its highest 
development, and it is customary to take the language of 
that time as a sort of standard. 

In ancient times the Greek people did not all speak 
their language just alike, but each little country had its 

11 


liye INTRODUCTION : 


own dialect, which often differed considerably from the 
dialect of a neighboring country only a few miles away. 
All the dialects may be roughly divided into three dif- 
ferent groups; namely, Aeolic, Doric, and Jonic.' To the 
Ionic group belongs the Jonie dialect proper, together with 
the dialect of Attica, which is known as Aftze. 

In the Tonic dialect were written, among other things, 
the poems of Homer and Hesiod, and the history of He- 
_rodotus. In the Attic dialect were written nearly all the 
other great: works of Greek Hterature which haye come 
down to us, and which, either directly, ortirrough the 
medium of their Latin imitations, have influenced to such 
a vast extent the literature of the world. The dramatic 
poets Aeschylus, Sophocles, Euripides, and Aristophanes, 
the historians Thucydides and Xenophon, the orators 
Lysias and Demosthenes, and the philosopher, Plato, all 
wrote in the Attic dialect. 

Attic, the most elegant and refined of all the Greek 
dialects, finally superseded the others in literary use. At 
the same time it began to lose some of its earlier purity 
and refinements, and after about 330 B.c. it is known as 
the κοινή or Common Greek. From this Common Greek 
there was evolved in the long course of years, with a con- 
siderable admixture of foreign elements, the present lan- 
guage of the Greek people, Romaic or Modern Greek. 

Modern Greek differs so considerably from Ancient 
Greek, that, although a knowledge of it is helpful, yet 
one can soonest learn to comprehend the great works of 
Greek literature by studying directly the language of 
Ancient Greece. 


This grammar deals only with the Attie and Ionie 
oD 
dialects of Ancient Greek. 


_—e 


WRITING AND SOUND 
ALPHABET 

1. Greek is written with the following twenty-four 
letters : Hack 

Form NAME EQUIVALENT 

A a arpa alpha a 

B38 βῆτα beta b 

| ν γάμμα gamma g 

A ὃ δέλτα delta d 

Ho ε ei (€ Widor) ev (epsilon) ὄ 

Wer sG, ζῆτα zeta j; Ζ 

Hn ATA eta 6 
-Θ 64 θῆτα theta th 

a i ἰῶτα ota i 

K « κάππα kappa ce, k 

NX λάβδα (AauBba) labda (lambda) ] 

M p μῦ mii m 

Ney vo ni n 

BS é Ect (ξῖ) met (αἱ) x 

O.. 0 ov (ὃ μικρον)Ὶ ou (Omicron) ὔ 

ΤΠ στ πεῖ (70) pet (pr) p 

Pep po rho E 

ον iy σίγμα sigma 5 

τος Ei ταῦ tau t 

τ αν ὃ (ὃ ψιλον) ii (iipsilon) y 

Φ ¢ het (di) phei (phi) ph 

Niet yet (x0) chet (chi) ch 

Meal wet (Wi) pset (pst) ps 

OF ὦ ὦ (ὦ μέγα) 0 (6mega) 0 


1. The names in parentheses came into use in the ΜΞ εἰς 
Ages, but are now commonly employed. 


15 


14 VOWELS 


2. Sigma at the end of a word has the form ¢; in any 
other place the form o« Thus στάσις faction. 


2. The letter F, ¢, called vaw or digamma, early ceased 
to be used in Attic and Ionic Greek. It had the sound of 
English w, and stood in the alphabet between ε and € For 
other obsolete letters see § 156. 


VOWELS 


3. The vowels ε and o are always short, 7 and ὦ are 
always long. The vowels a, ἐς v, are short in some words 
and long in others. In this grammar they are marked 
a, τ, v, when long. The unmarked a, 1, v, are, therefore, 
understood to be short. 

The mark of length is omitted over circumflexed vowels 
(§ 58). 

4. The Attic sounds of the vowels, at about 400 B.c., 
are believed to have been nearly as follows: 

Lone VOWELS SHORT VOWELS 
as @ in par. as ὦ in papa. 
as δ in French féte. as e in pet. 

as ὃ in machine. as 7@ in pit. 
® as 0 in prone. as o in obey. 
vas @ in French sér. as win French butte. 


eS} SF 
SO ese) 


2a. Vau, although not written in the received text of the Homeric 
poems, must, from evidence of the metre and of early inscriptions, have 
been a live sound when these poems were composed. Thus it appears to 
have been sounded at the beginning of about forty words, the most impor- 
tant of which are: ἄστυ town, ἄναξ lord, ἁνδάνω please, εἴκοσι twenty (ct. 
Lat. viginti), ἕο, of, ἕ himself, ἕξ six, root ἐπ- (ἔπος word, εἶπον said), 
ἔργον work, root éo- (ἕννυμι clothe, ἐσθής clothing; ct. Lat. vestis), ἔτος 
year (cf. Lat. vetus), ἡδύς sweet (see ὃ 96 4), root ἐδ- (ἰδεῖν see, οἶδα know ; 
cf. Lat. vid-ere), οἶκος house (cf. Lat. vicus), οἶνος wine (cf. Lat. vinum), 
ὅς, ἥ, ὅν his. See also § 36 a and ὃ 172, 2. 


DIPHTHONGS 15 


1. The sounds of ὕ and v are midway between English 00 
and ee. ‘They are exemplified also in the German i, as in 
Fiisse, Briicke. 

DIPHTHONGS 

5. A diphthong is a combination of two vowels in one 
syllable. The latter vowel is always or v. The diph- 
thongs are 

aL, εἰς OL, UL, αὖ, εὖ, OV, 
ᾧ, Ds Qs nv. 


1. In the diphthongs ἃ, y, @, the ¢ is written below the 
first vowel, and is called dota subscript. When, however, 
the first vowel is written as a capital letter, ὁ stands on the 
line: thus *“Audns Hades. The ancients always wrote ¢ in 
these diphthongs on the line. 


6. The sounds of the principal diphthongs, at about 
400 B.c., were very nearly as follows: 


at like az in aisle. av like ou in our. 
ec like ez in rein. ev like ew in feud. 
oe like οἱ in tol. ov like ow in you. 


vt like wz in quit. 


1. In a, ῃ: », the ¢ was originally sounded. But later 
(about 100 B.c.) it became silent, and these diphthongs 
have since been pronounced like simple a, 7, ὦ. 

2. The sound of nv cannot be exemplified from English, 
but may be represented as éh-o0, pronounced quickly to- 
gether. 

3. In the earliest times, the diphthongs e and ov had, 
in some words at least, actual double sounds, such as their 
composition would indicate, and differed in pronunciation 


5a. In Jonic (Herodotus) a diphthong wv occurs ; thus wirés for ὁ αὐτός 
the same. This diphthong wv is almost unknown in Attic Greek. 


16 DIAERESIS 


from the apparent diphthongs e and ov, which arise from 
contraction of ε-ε, 0-0, 0-Ε, or €-0 (see ὃ 18, 8 and 5) or from 
compensative lengthening (see §16). Thus, εἰ in γένει is 
made up of e+ (see ὃ 18, 1 and § 106), but in θείς for 
Ἔθεντς (see ὃ 10, 1) e is merely lengthened from e. In 
early inscriptions the real diphthongs εἰ and ov were 
written EI and OT, while the apparent diphthongs were 
written with simple E and O. Later (soon after 400 B.c.) 
both kinds of diphthongs came to be pronounced and 
written alike. 
DIAERESIS 

7. The mark of diaeresis (") is sometimes written over 
an e or v, to show that it does not combine with the 
preceding vowel to form a diphthong: thus βοΐ, pro- 
nounced in two syllables, 60-%. 


BREATHINGS 


8. A vowel at the beginning of a word always has a 
breathing, either rough or smooth. 

The rough breathing (ἡ) shows that the vowel was pro- 
nounced with the sound of ἢ preceding. Thus, ἑπτά seven 
is pronounced heptd. 

The smooth breathing (’) shows that the vowel was 
pronounced with no sound of ἡ. Thus, ἀπό from is pro- 
nounced apé. 

1. The mark of breathing is written over small letters 
and in front of capitals: thus ἀληθής true, ᾿Αρκάς Ar- 
cadian. 

2. In a diphthong, however, the breathing is written 
over the second vowel: thus Αἰνείας Aeneas, αὐτός self. 


8a. Ionic sometimes has a smooth breathing where Attic has the 
rough; thus ἠέλιος sun, Attic ἥλιος ; οὖρος boundary, Attic ὅρος. 


CONSONANTS 17 


ΝΌΤΕ. -- But in the diphthongs a, 7, ῳ, the breathing never stands 
over the 1, even when this is written on the line: thus “Audys Hades, 
wdn song. 

9. The consonant p at the beginning of a word always 
has the rough breathing (p): thus ῥήτωρ orator (Lat. 
rhetor). 


10. It happens also that all words beginning with the 
letter v have the rough breathing. 


CONSONANTS 
11. The consonants were thus pronounced: 
B like ὁ in dad. Θ like th in hothouse, later 
vy * g im go (see also like th in thin. 
Suit 1): Ν οἰ AY 0 
ὃ “ς do indo. p “ m in mix. 
πὸ» ADpin. Hay iN OW. 
pet oe invkes. pp) in Fed. (see: also 
eo ἡ ἰὴ top. ΜΠ ΩΣ 
@ “* ἢ πὶ uphill, later Gm 8. 506. 
like phin graphic. ¢ “ English ad, later like 
x ‘* kh in inkhorn, later English z. 
like ch in German fe PS 7 sigue 
machen. wy “ps in gypsum. 


1. Gamma (γ) before x, y, vy, & represented the sound 
of n in ink, and is called gamma nasal: thus ἀγκών (pro- 
nounced ankén) elbow, ἄγγελος (pronounced dngelos) mes- 
senger. 

2. Rho (p) at the beginning of a word had a sound 
somewhat like fv (compare ὃ 9). 

Nore. — In Greek every consonant was sounded. Thus κτίσις a 
founding, φθίσις decay, ψεῦδος falsehood, were pronounced respectively 
ktisis, phthisis, pseudos. 

BABBITT’S GR. GRAM. —Z 


18 INTERCHANGE OF VOWELS 


12. The consonants may be divided into three classes, 
Semivowels, Mutes, and Double Consonants. 

1. The semivowels are, A, “, v, p, σς and y-nasal (8 11, 1). 

Of these 


o is called a Sibilant, 
A, #, v, and p are called Liquids, 
#, v, and y-nasal (ὃ 11, 1) are called Nasals. 


2. ‘The mutes may be classified as follows : 


SMOOTH MIDDLE RouGH 
LABIAL T B φ 
LINGUAL τρ ὃ θ 
PALATAL K oy ie 


Those in the same horizontal line are said to be Cog- 
nate, because they are produced by the same organ of 
speech Clips, tongue, or palate). Those in the same per- 
pendicular line are said to be Co-ordinate, because they 
have the same degree of aspiration (or vocalization). 

3. The double consonants are ¢ & w. Of these, & is 
written for xo, yo, or yo, and Ψ' for wo, Bo, or do. 4 


INTERCHANGE OF VOWELS 


13. In the inflection and formation of words, short 
and long vowels of similar sound often interchange: thus 
δέδο-μεν we give, δίδω-μι 7 give; λιμήν harbor, λιμέν-ος of a 
harbor. 


Note. — The long vowel corresponding to a is often 7 (see § 15). 


13 a. In Homer a long vowel or a diphthong sometimes stands for a 
short vowel, especially in words which would otherwise be excluded from 
the verse: thus ἠγάθεος very holy for ἀγάθεος, οὐλόμενος accursed for ὁλό- 
μενος. 


INTERCHANGE OF VOWELS 19 


1. The corresponding short and long forms may be 
seen from the following table: 


SHORT a € t (a) υ 


Lone aor ἢ n t @ υ 


14. The same root or suffix often appears with a different 
short vowel, as, for example, λέγτω speak, AéOy-os speech ; 
Av-o-wev we loose, Av-e-Te you loose. ‘Three different forms 
of this appearance are recognized, but the same root or 
suffix does not always present all three forms. 

These forms are, (1) with ος (2) with ες (3) with no vowel. 
Thus ποτ-οανός able to fly, πέτ-ομαι fly, ἐ-π τ-όμην flew. 

1. But in case the third form (without the vowel) 
brings together a combination of consonants hard to pro- 
nounce, there is developed from the adjacent consonants in 
pronunciation a vowel sound, a. Thus, instead of *é-rp φ-ην, 
we have ἐτράφην was nourished, so that the series (of § 14) 
becomes (1) 0, (2) ε, (3) a: thus τέτροφ-α have nourished, 
τρέφ-ω nourish, ἐπτράφ-ην was nourished. (Compare English 
sing, sang, sung, and German sterben, starb, gestorben. ) 

Note. — An a sometimes appears as the vowel-equivalent of v: 
thus πάθος (for *zvOos) experience, suffering. 

2. In combination with ὁ or v the vowels ε and ο, of 
course, make the corresponding diphthongs, so that we 
seem to have, on the one hand, an interchange of (1) οἱ; 
(2) et, and (3) ¢, and on the other, an interchange of (1) ov 
(rare), (2) ev, and (3) v; but it will be seen at once that 
this apparent “interchange” is really the same phenome- 
non which has been described above (ὃ 14): thus 


λέλοιπ-α have left λείπ-ω leave ἔνλιπ-ον left 
σπουδ-ἡ haste σπεύδω hasten 


φεύγ-ω fice, é-pvuy-ov fled 


20 COMPENSATIVE LENGTHENING 


3. The following table and examples may serve to make 
this principle clearer : 


ie 2 3. 

ο ε = 

ο ε (α) 

οἱ εἰ -- Ὁ 

ου €U =U 
φόρ-ος tribute φέρ-ω bear 8i- p-os chariot 
τρόπ-ος turning τρέπ-ω turn ἐ-τραπ-όμην turned 

πέποιθ-α trust πείθ-ω persuade 7 ιθ-ανός persuasive 
*yo(v)-7 ($ 21) ἐ-χεί(υ)-α (§ 21) €-x v-Onv was poured 
a pouring poured 


15. In Attic, original a becomes 7 unless it is preceded 
by 6,4, orp. Thus, original (Doric) φάμα report becomes 
φήμη; but yeved generation, copia wisdom, πρᾶγμα deed 
retain a. 

1. But ἃ arising from contraction (ὃ 18) or compensa- 
tive lengthening (§ 16) remains unchanged. 


COMPENSATIVE LENGTHENING 


16. A short vowel is sometimes lengthened, to make up 
for the loss of a following consonant. Thus, for *wedrav-s 
we have μέλα-ς black. 

1. In this process, e becomes εἰ (not 7), and o becomes 
ov (not @). Thus, *@evt-s gives θείς having placed, *dovr-s 
gives dovs having given. 


INTERCHANGE OF QUANTITY 


17. The combinations ao and no often change to ew, and 
na to ea. Thus, vads temple becomes νεώς, βασιλῆα king 
becomes βασιλέα. 


15 a. Ionic regularly has ἢ for original a, even after ε, ες, and p: thus 
γενεή, σοφίη, πρῆγμα. Not so, however, in the cases covered by § 15, 1. 


CONTRACTION OF VOWELS 21 


CONTRACTION OF VOWELS 


18. Contraction unites into one long vowel or diphthong 
vowels which stand next each other in different syllables. 
The following are the most important rules for contrac- 
tion. (Many of them admit occasional exceptions, § 715.) 

1. A vowel v or ¢ unites with the preceding vowel to 
form a diphthong. Thus, yéve-t gives γένει, 7ev06-i gives 
πειθοῖ, πρω-ΐ gives πρῴ. 

2. Two like vowels unite in the common long. ‘Thus, 
γέρα-α gives γέρα, φιλέ-ητε gives φιλῆτε. 

3. But e€ gives εἰ, and o-o gives οὐ (ὃ 6,3). Thus, 
pire-e gives φίλει, πλό-ος Gives πλοῦς. 

4. Ano sound absorbs a, ες or ἡ. and becomes ὦ. Thus, 
ὁράτομεν Gives ὁρῶμεν, φιλέωσι gives φιλῶσι, δηλό-ητε gives 
δηλῶτε. 

5. But eo and o-e both give ov (§ 6,3). Thus, γένε-ος 
gives γένους, δήλο-ε gives δήλου. 

6. When a and ε or 7 come together, the first in order 
absorbs the second, and becomes long. Thus, yéve-a gives 
γένη, opa-nTe ives ὁρᾶτε. 


19. A vowel standing before a diphthong is often con- 
tracted with the first vowel of the diphthong. The last 
vowel of the diphthong is regularly retained in the con- 
tracted form, but the apparent diphthongs e and ov (§ 6, 3) 
are contracted like simple ε and o. Thus, τιμά-ει gives 
τιμᾷ (cf. ὃ 5,1), φιλέεει gives φιλεῖ, τεμάτ-οιμι Gives τεμῷμι. 
λύη-αι Gives λύῃ, but τεμά-ειν Gives τιμᾶν, τιμάτου Gives τιμῶ 
(since εἰ and ov here are not real diphthongs ; see ὃ 6, 3 


18a. In Ionic, contraction is much less frequent than in Attic. Thus, 
we have πλόος for Attic πλοῦς, γένεα for Attic γένη. Eo, eov, if contracted, 
give ev (ποιεῦμεν we do for mo€-ouev, ποιεῦσι they do for ποιέτουσι), but 
often remain uncontracted. 


22 OMISSION OF VOWELS 


1. But € or o is absorbed before οὐ. Thus, dir€-o1 gives 
φιλοῖ, δηλό-οι gives δηλοῖ. 

2. The contraction of both ὁ-εἰ and o-n gives o. Thus, 
δηλό-ει and δηλό-ῃ both contract into δηλοῖ: but δηλό-ειν 
gives δηλοῦν, since εἰ here is not a real diphthong (ὃ 6, 3). 

Notre 1.— When three successive vowels are contracted, the last 
two are first contracted, and with the resulting diphthong the first 
vowel is then contracted. Thus, ériudeo (for *eripae-co) you were 
being honored contracts first into ἐτιμάου, and this in turn contracts 
into ἐτιμῶ. 

Note 2.— Synizesis. — Sometimes in poetry two vowels, without 
being regularly contracted, were so far united in pronunciation as 
to form one syllable. Thus, πόλεως might be pronounced as a word 
of two syllables, -ew- sounding somewhat like -yd-. This is called 
synizesis (setting together). 


OMISSION OF VOWELS 


20. Between two consonants a short vowel is sometimes 
dropped. (This is called Syncope.) Thus ἔσται shall be, 
for ἔσεται ; ἦλθον came, for ἤλυθον. 


21. Between two vowels the vowels ὁ and v are some- 
times dropped. Thus, πλεί-ων more becomes πλέων ; * Bact- 
Aev-wv becomes βασιλέων of kings. 


CONSONANT CHANGES 


DOUBLED CONSONANTS 


22. Attic regularly has tr in place of Ionic oc. 
The Ionic form, however, is adopted by some of the 
Attic poets and earlier writers of prose. 


22 a. Doubled Consonants in Homer. — In Homer we frequently find 
a doubled consonant where Attic would have a single consonant: thus 
ἔλλαβε took (Attic ἔλαβε), ἀγάννιφος snowy, ἔδδεισε feared (Attic ἔδεισε). 


CONSONANT CHANGES 2a 


23. Whenever initial p, by inflection or composition, 
has a single vowel brought before it, the p is doubled: 
thus péw flow, ἔρρει was flowing. A diphthong, however, 
does not cause the p to be doubled: thus ev-poos fair- 


flowing. 


24. The po of earlier Attic later assimilates to pp. 
Thus, θάρσος courage later becomes θάρρος. 


MUTES BEFORE MUTES 


25. Before a lingual mute a labial or a palatal mute 
becomes codrdinate (see ὃ 12, 2). 

For example, *yeypad-rac becomes γέγραπται has been 
written, *erey-Tat becomes λέλεκται has been said, *édectr- 
θην becomes ἐλείφθην was left, *érpuB-Onv becomes ἐτρίφθην 
was rubbed. 


26. A lingual mute before another lingual mute is 
changed to o. Thus, *¢8-re becomes ἴστε you know, *érre8- 
Onv becomes ἐπείσθην was persuaded. 


MUTES BEFORE LIQUIDS 


97. 1. Before μὶ a labial mute becomes p. Thus, 
Ἐλελεύπ-μαι becomes λέλειμμαι have been left. 
2. Before μ a palatal mute becomes y. Thus, ἔπεπλεκ- 
; : 
μαι becomes πέπλεγμαι have been twisted. 
3. Before wa lingual mute becomes o. Thus, ἔπεπειθ- 
pat becomes πέπεισμαι have been persuaded. 


In many cases this doubling is to be explained by the assimilation of 
another consonant. Thus, ἀγάννιφος is for *dya-(o) pos and ἔδδεισε is for 
Ἀἐδ(ρ)εισε. 

In some words Homer has both the single and double forms: thus 
ὀπίσσω and ὀπίσω backward, ᾿Αχιλλεύς and ᾿Αχιλεύς Achilles. 


24. CONSONANT CHANGES 


MUTES BEFORE σ 


28. A labial mute before o unites with it to form > 
(cf. § 12,5). Thus, *Aett-cw becomes λείψω shall leave, 
*preB-s. becomes Pre vein, *ypad-cw becomes γράψω shall 
write. 


29. A palatal mute before o unites with it to form & 
(cf. $12, 3). Thus, *xopax-s becomes κόραξ raven, *proy-s 
becomes φλόξ flame, *Bnx-s becomes βήξ cough. 


30. A lingual mute before σ is dropped. Thus, *c@pat- 
ot becomes σώμασι bodies (dat. ), Ἐέλπιδ-σι becomes ἐλπίσι 
hopes (dat. ), *opvi8-cv becomes dpvice birds (dat.). 


N BEFORE OTHER CONSONANTS 


31. When v comes before a labial mute it changes to μ. 
Thus, *év-rrecpos becomes ἔμπειρος experienced, *év-pavys 
becomes ἐμφανής visible, *év-yruxos becomes ἔμψυχος living. 


32. When v comes before a palatal mute it changes to 
y-nasal. Thus, *cvv-yerns becomes συγγενής akin, *cvv-yew 
becomes συγχέω pour together. 


33. When v comes before A, mw, or p it is assimilated. 
Thus, *év-Xevr@ becomes ἐλλείπω leave in, *év-wevw becomes 
ἐμμένω abide, *cvv-pew becomes συρρέω flow together. 


34. When v comes before o it is dropped (likewise v7, 
vd, and vO; see ὃ 30) and the preceding vowel is lengthened 


30a. More properly a lingual mute before o is first assimilated to 
the σ. and the two sigmas later become one. In Homer we often find 
the older form with oo: thus ποσ-σί feet (dat.), Attic ποσί (from Ἐποδ-σι). 


DISAPPEARANCE OF σ 25 


in compensation (see 810). Thus, *wedav-s becomes μέλας 
black, *dvo-var becomes λύουσι they loose (ὃ 16,1). Cf. § 99. 


DISAPPEARANCE OF o 
35. When o comes between two consonants, it is regu- 
larly dropped, and when two sigmas are brought together 
by inflection one of them is dropped. Thus, *éorad-o6e 
becomes ἔσταλθε you have been sent, and ἔτειχεσ-σε becomes 
τείχεσι walls (dat. ). 


36. When o stands before a vowel at the beginning of 
a word, it is often changed to the rough breathing: thus 
ἵστημι set, for ἔσιστημι (Latin sisto). 


37. When o comes between two vowels, it is regularly 
dropped: thus γένεος (contracted γένους) of a race for 
*yeveo-os (Latin generis). 


CONSONANTS WITH VOWELS 
METATHESIS 
38. A vowel and a liquid are sometimes transposed. 
Thus θάρσος and θράσος boldness. 


1. Sometimes the vowel, standing after the liquid, has its 
long form (ὃ 13): Tép-ve cut, perfect TéTpy-Ka have cut. 


CONSONANTS BEFORE I 


39. The vowel ¢ (which may sometimes have the value 
of a consonant), following certain consonants, gives rise 
to several changes. Thus: : 


35 a. In Homer the older form with oo is frequently kept. Thus 
ἔπεσ-σι words (dat.), Attic ἔπεσι. 

86 a. At the beginning of several of the words enumerated in ὃ 2a, 
σ as well as vaw has been lost: thus in ἡδύς sweet, formerly *ofadus 
(cf. English sweet, Latin swa(d) vis); ὅς his, formerly *o fos (cf. Latin swus). 


20 CONSONANTS WITH VOWELS 


1. With «, y, 7, or @, an unites to form tr (Ionic ao, 
§ 22): thus φυλάττω guard, for ἔφυλακιιω; νῆττα duck, 
for *ynt-va ; θάττων quicker, for ἔταχ-ιων (ὃ 41). 

2. With y or 6 an « unites to form €: μείζων greater, 
for ἔμεγειων ; ἐλπίζω hope, for *ér7i6-L0. 

3. With A ane forms AX: βάλ-λω throw, for *Bah-vo. 

4. With ν or p, an ¢ goes over to the preceding vowel 
and unites with it by contraction : μαίνομαι am mad, for 
Ἔμαν-ιομαι. 


REJECTION OR TRANSFER OF ASPIRATION | 


40. The Greeks tried to avoid beginning two successive 
syllables with a rough mute (or a rough breathing). Thus, 
ἐτέθην and ἐτύ-θην (instead of *é-Be-Onv and *é-8v-Anv) 
are the aorists passive of τίθημι put and θύω sacrifice. 

For the imperative ending -@: (changed to -τι see ὃ 233, 
3; for the change of a rough mute to smooth in redupli- 
cation see ὃ 178. 


41. For the same reason, a few roots beginning with 6, 
and ending in ¢ or x, preserve the rough mute only at the 
beginning or the end. So, when, in the process of inflec- 
tion, the rough mute at the end disappears, the smooth 
mute at the beginning becomes rough. For example, 
Tpty-os hair, gen. sing., has for its nominative θρίξ ; τρέφω 
nourish has for its future θρέψω ; the root tad- becomes 
θαπ- in θάπ-τω bury. 


HIATUS 


42. Hiatus occurs when a word ending in a vowel is 
followed by a word beginning with a vowel. 


41a. In Ionic we sometimes find a transfer of aspiration: κιθών shirt, 
ἐνθαῦτα there, for Attic χιτών, ἐνταῦθα. 


ee ούΤς-υνΊΓυπνπευνυοἤἝἼυἝννἝ νυ ΣΝ 


CRASIS 27 


Hiatus was usually avoided in Greek by means of 
(1) Crasis, (2) Elision, or (8) the addition of a Movable 
Consonant. 


CRASIS 


43. Crasis (mingling) is the contraction of a vowel or 
diphthong at the end of a word with a vowel or diphthong 
at the beginning of the next word. It is indicated by the 
coronis (’ ) written over the contracted syllable. 

Crasis in general follows the rules for contraction 
(δὲ 18 and 19): thus τοὐναντίον the contrary for τὸ ἐναντίον, 
ἐγῷμαι I suppose for ἐγὼ οἶμαι, θοἰμάτιον the cloak for τὸ 
ἱμάτιον (cf. ὃ 44,4). But some exceptions occur: thus 
ταὐτό for τὸ αὐτό. 


Nore 1. -- ΠῚ the first word ends in a diphthong, its final vowel is 
dropped before contraction: thus κἄγαθός for καὶ ἀγαθός. 

Nore 2.— Synizesis between Two Words. — In poetry a crasis, not 
indicated in writing, sometimes occurs between two words, and is called 
synizesis (see ὃ 19, note 2). This happens only when the first word ends 
in a long vowel or diphthong: thus μὴ οὐ, pronounced as one syllable. 

Norte 3.— Apocope is the cutting off of a final short vowel before a 
consonant. Thus πάρ, κάτ, for παρά, κατά. It affects chiefly prepo- 
sitions, and is nearly confined to poetry. 


ELISION 


44. Elision is the cutting off of a short vowel at the end 
of a word when the next word begins with a vowel. In 
place of the missing vowel an apostrophe (’ ) is written: 
thus ἐπ᾽ ἐμοί in my power, for ἐπὶ ἐμοί; ἕπτ᾽ ἦσαν were 
seven, for ἑπτὰ ἦσαν. (Hor the accent of ἕπτ᾽ see ὃ 66.) 

1. Elision is most frequent in prepositions, conjunctions, 
and familiar adverbs: for example, the final vowel in 
γέ, δέ, παρά, ἀλλά, μάλα, τάχα, is frequently elided. 


28 MOVABLE CONSONANTS 


2. The vowel v is never elided, nor is τὸ in the dative of 
the third declension, nor the vowels of τά, τί, τό. 

3. In the formation of compound words, elision occurs, 
but without being indicated by the apostrophe: thus 
ἀπ-έχω keep away, from ἀπό and ἔχω; ἐπ-άνω on top, from 
ἐπί and ἄνω ; ἀπ-έβην went away, aorist of ἀπο-βαίνω. 

4. Whenever by elision a smooth mute and a rough 
breathing are brought together, the smooth mute becomes 
the cognate rough mute (§ 12,2): thus ἀφ᾽ ὧν from which, 
for ἀπὸ ὧν; καθ-ίημι let down, from κατά and ἵημι. 


MOVABLE CONSONANTS 


45. v Movable. — All words ending in -oz, all verbs of 
the third person singular ending in -e, and ἐστί is, when 
they stand before a word beginning with a vowel, or at 
the end of a clause, regularly add a ν αὖ the end. This v 
is called v movable: thus πέμπουσι tov ἄνδρα they send 
the man, but πέμπουσιν ἄνδρα they send a man; εἶδε τὴν 
θάλατταν he saw the sea, but εἶδεν ὄψιν he saw a vision. 


46. The adverb ov before a vowel with the smooth 
breathing becomes ov«: thus οὐκ εἶδον did not see. Before 
a vowel with the rough breathing it becomes ovy (cf. 
§ 44,4): so οὐχ εἱλόμην did not choose. 


47. The preposition ἐξ out of appears as ἐξ before words 
beginning with a vowel, and é« before words beginning 
with a consonant: thus ἐξ ἄστεως from town, but ἐκ τῆς 
πόλεως from the city. 


44a. Final a in the verb endings -war, -σαι, -rat, -σθαι, are occasionally 
elided in Homer; so also final οὐ in μοί and gol. 
44, 2a. Rarely Homer elides -ἰ in the dative singular of the third de- 
clension ; oftener in the dative plural. 
, 


44, 44. Herodotus retains the smooth mute: ἀπ᾽ ὧν, κατ-ίημι. 


EE 


FINAL CONSONANTS 29 


FINAL CONSONANTS 
48. The only consonants allowed to stand at the end of 
a Greek word are v, p, and s. 


Norr.— Observe that words ending in Ψ (= zs) or € (= xs) do not 
violate this rule. 


SYLLABLES 


49. In Greek, as in Latin, each single vowel or diph- 
thong makes a separate syllable. For example, ὑγίεια has 
four syllables. 


50. In dividing a word into syllables a single consonant 
or any combination of consonants that can begin a word 
is customarily written with the following vowel: thus 
i-xa-vos suitable, ὄνψο-μαι shall see, pa-Bdos wand, κά-μνω 
labor. 

Other combinations of consonants are divided: thus 
ἵπ-πος horse, ἐλ-πίς hope. 


51. The last syllable of a word is called the Ultima, the 
next to the last the Penult, and the one before the penult 
the Antepenult. 


QUANTITY OF SYLLABLES 


52. A syllable is long by Nature when it has a long 
vowel or adiphthong. Thus, in κρι-νοΐμην all the syllables 
are long. 


53. A syllable is long by Position (or Convention) when 
its vowel is followed by two consonants or a double con- 


52a. Epic Shortening, or Half Elision.—In Homer a diphthong or 
a long vowel at the end of a word is usually treated as a short syllable 
before a vowel at the beginning of the next word: thus δέχθαι ἄποινα, 
scanned _U U__vu; ἐγὼ ov, scanned ὦ... 


90 ACCENT 


sonant ($ 12,3). Thus, in ὄρ-τυξ quail both syllables are 
long by position. 

Of the two consonants one or both may be in the next 
word. Thus, in ἄλλος τόπος another place and ἄλλο στόμα 
another mouth the last syllable of the first word is long by 
position. 


Note. — Observe, however, that the quantity of the vowel is not 
affected by position. The e€ in λέξω is short, although the syllable in 
which it stands is long by “ position.” 


54. When a vowel naturally short is followed by a 
mute and a liquid (§ 12) the length of the syllable is 
Common, — that is, the syllable is used in verse either as 
long or short. Thus, in τέκνον child, τυφλός blind, τί χρή 
what is to be done? the first syllable is common. 


Norre.— The mute and the liquid must be in the same word; 
otherwise the syllable is long by position. 


ACCENT 


55. The Greek accent consisted in a raising of the 
pitch of the accented syllable. It was not ἃ stress 
accent like that of English. 


4 
53 a. In Homer even before a single liquid at the beginning of some 
words a syllable with a short vowel is long. 


ἀπὸ peydpowo (.. U UW _ wu) from the hall. 
ὄρεϊ vipderTt (YU . UU _ vu) snowy mountain (dat.). 


A good many of these instances are to be explained by the loss of 
another consonant. Thus νιφόεντι stands for Ἐ(σ)νιῴοεντι (cf. ὃ 22a). 
b. In Homer one of the consonants that make the preceding syllable 
long may be the unwritten vau (¢) (See ὃ 2a). So κακὸν ἔπος evil word 
= κακὸν Εέπος (ἡ. Uv). 
54a. In Homera mute and a liquid almost always make the preceding 
syllable long: thus τὰ πρῶτα. ων) the Jirst. 


ae ΡΨ» 


eo 


ACCENT 31 


56. In Greek there are three kinds of accent, — the 
Acute (), the Grave (\), and the Circumflex (7); 
the last being made up of the acute and the grave. 

1. Every syllable of a Greek word had an accent, but, as 
the grave accent is of such frequent occurrence (standing 
on every syllable which has not the acute or circumflex), 
it was not written except in the case mentioned under § 67. 

2. The marks of accent were not used in early times. 
They were invented about 200 B.c. for the help of for- 
eigners and of others who were studying the Greek 
language. 


57. The marks of accent are written over the vowel 
of the accented syllable. 

1. In case of a diphthong the accent stands over the 
second vowel, unless the second vowel is ¢ subscript: 
thus αὐτοῖς, αὐτούς : but αὐτῷ (cf. ὃ 8, 2 and. note). 

2. When both breathing and accent belong to the same 
vowel, the acute or the grave accent is written after the 
breathing: thus ὅλος whole, ds ἔσται who shall be. But 
the circumflex accent is written above the breathing: 
thus ἦγε was leading. 

3. When breathing and accent belong to a capital 
letter they are placed before it: thus “EAAnv Greek, 
Ἦλις Elis, “Avéns Hades (cf. ὃ 8, 1). 


RULES FOR ACCENT 


58. The circumflex accent can stand only on a syllable 
long by nature (§ 52); the acute may stand on a long or 
a short syllable. 


59. The circumflex accent may stand only on one of 
the last two syllables of a word; the acute may stand 
only on one of the last three syllables. 


32 RULES FOR ACCENT 


60. Moreover, if the last syllable is long by nature 
(δ 52), the circumflex may stand only on the last syable, 
and the acute only on one of the last two syllables. 


61. A long penult followed by a short final syllable 
must, if it has a written accent, have the circumflex. 


Norr.— Some further special rules of accent will be given under 
Inflection, but the position of the accents on Greek words must, in 
general, be learned by observation. 


62. [Examples of accented words are: 


Acute on the ultima (called oxytone ) ὁδός. 
ὦ ὦ ΑΒΗ (called paroxytone) ἀνθρώπων. 
« ἐς  antepenult (called proparoxytone) ἄνθρωπος. 
Circumflex on the ultima (called perispomenon) χωρῶν. 
4 “¢  penult (called properispomenon) γλῶττα. 


63. The diphthongs az and oz at the end of a word have 
the effect of short vowels on the accent, —except in the 
optative mood and in the adverb οἴκοι: thus χῶραι lands, 
ἄνθρωποι men; but παιδεύοι, optative of παιδεύω educate. 


64. Recessive Accent. — A word is commonly said to 
have Recessive Accent when the written accent stands 
as far from the end of the word as the laws of accent 
($$ 58-61) will allow. Thus, ἐλύθην was loosed, édvov was 
loosing, θέατρον theater, havé recessive accent. 


ACCENT OF CONTRACTED SYLLABLES 


65. When two syllables contract into one, in case either 
of the original syHables had a written accent (that. is, 
the acute or the circumflex), the syllable resulting from 
the contraction retains a written accent; otherwise it 


wey 


= βΦΝΝΣ ΎΥΣ  Ἃ 


ACCENT ΟΕ ELIDED WORDS 33 


has the unwritten grave (ὃ 56,1). Thus, tiva-e gives 
τιμᾷ, but tiwa-e gives Tina. 

1. If the first of the two syllables originally had the 
acute, the acute combines with the unwritten grave 
(ὃ 56,1) of the second syllable to form the circumflex. 
Thus, tiwa-@ (1.6. Tiwa-@) gives τιμῶ. 

2. But if the second of the two syllables had the acute, 
the syllable resulting from the contraction also has the 
acute (since it is plain that ‘ “ will not combine into Δ). 
Thus, éota-ds (i.e. ἑστὰ-ώς) gives ἑστώς. 


ACCENT OF ELIDED WORDS 


66. In elision (§ 44) oxytone (§ 62) prepositions and 
conjunctions lose their written accent: thus ἀλλ᾽ ἔφη but he 
said, for ἀλλὰ ἔφη ; other words retain it, but on the pre- 
ceding syllable: thus ἕπτ᾽ ἦσαν were seven, for ἑπτὰ ἧσαν. 


Nore. —In crasis (§ 45) the first of the two words loses its written 
accent. 


CHANGE OF ACUTE TO GRAVE 


67. Wherever a word having the acute accent on the 
last syllable is followed by another word in close con- 
nection, its acute changes to the grave: thus παρά 
beside, τόν the; but παρὰ τὸν βασιλέα to the side of the 


king. (or ris see § 148, 1.) 


68. Anastrophe. — A preposition of two syllables having 
the acute accent on the last syllable, when it follows the 
substantive with which it is used, or when it does the 
duty of a verb, shifts its written accent from the last 


68 a. In Homer (and lyric poetry) ἐν, εἰς, ἐξ, and ὡς, if they follow 


the words they modify, take an acute accent: thus κακῶν ἔξ from the 
base, θεὸς ws as a god. 


BABBITT’S GR. GRAM. —3 


34. PROCLITICS 


syllable to the first: thus τούτων πέρι about this; mapa, 
for πάρεστι, it is allowed. 


PROCLITICS 


69. A few words of one syllable attach themselves so 
closely to the following word that they lose their own 
written accent. They are called Proclitics (from προ- 
κλίνω lean forward). They are: 


The forms ὁ, ἡ, of, ai, of the article the ; 

The conjunctions εἰ if, ὡς, as; 

The prepositions ἐν in, εἰς (ἐς ) into, ἐξ (ἐκ, § 47) out of, ws to; 
The adverb ov (οὐκ, οὐχ. § 46) not. 

1. When, however, a proclitic stands at the end of a sen- 
tence, or is followed by an enclitic (§ 70, 3), it receives 
a written accent. Thus φής, ἢ οὔ; do you say yes or no? 
ov φημι I say no. 

ENCLITICS 


70. Some words of one or two syllables attach them- 


selves so closely to the preceding word that they give up 
their own written accent. ‘These words are called Enclitics 
(from ἐγκλίνω lean upon). They are: 


The pronouns μοῦ, μοί, μέ : σοῦ, σοί, σέ; οὗ, οἵ, €:and σφίσι. 
See however § 139, 2; 

The indefinite pronoun tis, τὸ in all its forms, and the in- 
definite adverbs ποῦ, πῇ, ποῖ, ποθέν, ποτέ, πῶ, πῶς ; 

The present indicative of εἰμί am and φημί say, except the 
second persons singular, eZ, φής. (For the accent of 
ἐστί see ὃ 262, 1); 

The particles γέ, τέ, τοί, πέρ. 


1. If the word preceding an enclitic has the acute 
accent on either of the last two syllables, or the circumflex 


j 
/ 


γρωυναννυνυ νυ ee νἀ ὐπἌἝὍοΕρὴυ 


ENCLITICS 35 


on the last syllable, its accent remains unchanged: thus 
ἀνήρ τις a man, λόγων τινῶν (δ 71,4) of some words, χωρῶν 
τινων of some lands. 

2. If the word preceding an enclitic has the acute 
accent on the antepenult, or the circumflex on the penult, 
it adds an acute accent on the last syllable: thus ἄνθρω- 
Tol τινες SOME MEN, YABTTA τις a tongue. 

3. A proclitic (§ 69) before an enclitic takes an acute 
accent: thus εἴ tis if anybody, ov φασι they deny (see 
§ 69, 1). 

4. If several enclitics follow each other, the last alone 
remains without written accent; each of the others re- 
ceives an acute accent from the following enclitic: thus 
εἴ πού τίς τινα [ἴδοι] if anybody [should see] anybody any- 
where. 


71. Accent of Enclitics Retained. — Enclitics retain their 
own accent: 


1. When they begin a sentence, as εἰσὶν ἄνδρες there are 
MEN 3 

2. When they are emphatic, as ἀλλὰ σὲ λέγω but you I 
mean 5 

3. When the vowel which would be affected by the 
enclitic has been elided (ὃ 44), as ταῦτ᾽ ἐστί, for 
ταῦτά ἐστι, this is; 

4. When an enclitic of two syllables follows a word 
which has the acute accent on the penult, as 
ἀνθρώπου τινός of a man. 


Nore. — Some words are so frequently combined with an enclitic 
that the combination comes to be regarded as one word. Thus, ὥστε so 
that (ὡς + Te), καίτοι although (καί + Tov), οὗτινος of whomsoever (οὗ + 
Tivos), are not exceptions to the rule of accent given in $$ 59 and 61. 


90 PUNCTUATION 


PUNCTUATION 


72. ‘The Greek marks of punctuation are the period (.), 
colon (+), comma (, ), and mark of interrogation (; ). 

The colon is a point above the line, and it takes the 
place of the English colon and semicolon. 


Nore. — The ancient Greeks seldom used any marks of punctua- 
tion, but wrote their words continuously. Thus EAOZENTHI 
BOYAHIKAITOIAHMOI = ἔδοξεν τῇ βουλῇ καὶ τῷ δήμῳ It was 
voted by the Senate and the People. 


ANCIENT GREEK WRITING ON STONE 
(Of the Fifth Century s.c.) 


> 7 - 
= 4 ce ~ 
3 ἂν ‘ 
¥ ; Ὡῃ # Φ ὶς τ 
4 f, Aut - Ὲ 
Ἃ o δ Ae ᾿ς 
ey ἘΣ eae 4 LP me 
τῶι ESN 5 wat “- ; 
Pn fore’ ~ Ee igs < 
ae Ves ay 
6S ait 2 
Her — ae 
ERA ASR σὰ 
f ων "2 
SS NRE 


CYNAIKOS | AFAOHSMN | HMATOAE 


γυναικὸς ἀγαθῆς μνῆμα τόδε 
a good wifes monument (is) this. 


INFLECTION 


73. Inflection is a change in the form of a word to indi- 
cate its relation to other words. 

1. In inflection a part of the word remains the same, 
and is called the Stem. Thus, the stem of ἄνθρωπος man is 
ἀνθρωπο-, and -s is the ending of the nominative case; in 
é-Ave he was loosing, λῦε- is a stem of the present system, 
and ἐ- is a prefix denoting past time. (See also ὃ 163.) 
Some words, in their inflection, show more than one form 
of stem. 

2. The inflection of Nouns (Substantives and Adjec- 
tives) and Pronouns is called Declension; the inflection 
of Verbs is called Conjugation. 


NOUNS 


(SUBSTANTIVES AND ADJECTIVES) 
74. Gender, Number, and Case. — There are in Greek 


Three GENDERS: Masculine, Feminine, and Neuter; 

Three NUMBERS: Singular, Dual, and Plural; 

Five Cases: Nominative, Genitive, Dative, Accusative, 
and Vocative. 


Nore 1.— The dual number refers to two objects. It has but two 
forms, one for the nominative, accusative, and vocative, the other for 
the genitive and dative. 

Nore 2.— The vocative in the plural is always like the nominative ; 
in the singular it is often so. 

Nore 3. — Neuter words always have the nominative and vocative 
like the accusative; in the plural these cases always end in -a (at 
least before contraction). 


7 


Ω 
ov 


38 NOUNS 


75. Declensions. — There are in Greek three declensions 
of nouns, classed according to the endings of the stems. 
The First Declension has stems ending in -a, the Second 
Declension has stems ending in -o. These two together 
are sometimes called the Vowel Declension. The Third 
Declension has mostly stems ending in a consonant (see 
§ 93) and is called the Consonant Declension. 


76. Case Endings. — The case endings of the vowel and 
the consonant declension have many points in common, as 
may be seen from the following table : — 


Vowe.t DECLENSION CoNSONANT DECLENSION 
MASC. FEM. NEUT. MASC. FEM. NEUT. 
Sing. Nom. -s none -ν -ς or none none 
Gens | to) -ς τιο τος τος 
Dat. ι τι τι -ι 
Ace. -ν -v -v Or -α none 
Voce. none -ν none none 
Dual N.A.V. none none -€ ~€ 
GD: τιν τιν τοιν τοῖν 
Plur. N.V. =U -α -€S τα 
Gen. των των των -ων 
Dat. τισι, -ἰς τισι, -ἰς -σι -σι 
Ace. -VS -a -vs OF -as -a 


76a. Homer sometimes uses also -#evy as an ending of the genitive 
singular: thus ἀπὸ Τροίηθεν from Troy, ἐξ ἁλόθεν out of the sea. 

b. For the dative plural of the consonant declension Homer uses also 
the ending -eoo.. (See ὃ 99a.) 

c. Epic Case Ending -di(v).— Epic poetry has a peculiar case end- 
ing, -φι(ν), which serves as genitive or dative either singular or plural: 
thus βίητφι with violence, am’ ὄχεσ-φι from the car, παρὰ ναῦ-φιν beside 
the ships. 


SUBSTANTIVES 39 


Note. —Locative Case.— There are in Greek some relies of a 
Locative Case, confined mostly to names of places. The ending of 
the locative in the singular is -c and in the plural -ov: thus Πυθοῖ at 
Pytho (Delphi), οἴκοι at home,” Apye at Argos, ᾿Αθήνησι at Athens. 


77. Accent in Declension.—1. The written accent of a 
noun, throughout its declension, remains on the same syl- 
lable as in the nominative singular, or as near that syllable 
as the general laws of accent will allow: thus ἄνθρωπος 
man, acc. sing. ἄνθρωπον, nom. plur. ἄνθρωποι, but gen. 
sing. ἀνθρώπου (ὃ 60), dat. plur. ἀνθρώποις; ὄνομα name, 
gen. sing. ὀνόματος (ὃ 59), gen. plur. ὀνομάτων (§ 60). 

2. In the genitive and dative of all numbers a long 
final syllable, if it has written accent, has the circumflex: 
thus ποταμός river, dat. sing. ποταμῷ ; πούς foot, gen. 
plur. ποδῶν. 


SUBSTANTIVES 
GENERAL RULES FOR GENDER 


78. 1. MASCULINE are names of Males, of Winds, of 
Rivers, and of Months. 

2. FEMININE are names of Females, and most names of 
Lands, Islands, Towns, Trees, and Abstract Ideas. 

3. NEUTER are most Diminutives (§ 283) and most 
names of Fruits. 


Note. — Common Gender. — Some names of beings may be used 
either as masculine or feminine, as occasion requires. Thus, παῖς 
child may be masculine or feminine, and may mean doy or girl. 


79. It is customary to indicate the gender of Greek 
words by means of the article (§ 144): o for masculine, 
ἡ for feminine, and τό for neuter. 


40 FIRST DECLENSION 


FIRST DECLENSION 
(THE -α DECLENSION) 
80. Words of the first declension are feminine or mas- 


culine. They have stems ending in a. In many of the 
forms this ὦ is shortened or disguised. 


A. FEMININES 


81. The feminines form two classes: (1) those ending 
in -a@ or -n, and (2) those ending in short -a. 
They are declined as follows: 
First Cass SECOND CLASS 


ἡ χώρα land. ἡ τιμή honor. 4 γέφυρα bridge. ἡ γλῶττα tongue. 
(stem x@pa-) (stem τῖμα-) (stem γεφῦρα-) (stem yAwrra-) 


SINGULAR SINGULAR 
Nom. χώρα τιμή γέφυρα γλῶττα 
Gen. χώρας τιμῆς γεφύρας γλώττης; 
Dat. χώρᾳ τιμῇ γεφύρᾳ γλώττῃ ἢ 
Acc. χώραν τιμή-ν γέφυρα-ν γλῶττα:ν 
Voc. χώρα τιμή γέφυρα γλῶττα 
DUAL DUAL 
N.A.V. χώρα Tipe yedupa γλώττα 
G.D. χώραιν τιμαῖν γεφύραιν γλώτταιν 
PLURAL PLURAL 

N.V. χῶραι τῖμαί γέφυραι γλῶτται 
Gen. χωρῶν τιμῶν γεφυρῶν γλωττῶν 
Dat. χώραις τιμαῖς γεφύραις γλώτταις 
Ace. χώρας τῖμᾶς γεφύρας γλώττας 


Other examples of the first class are: ἡμέρα day (gen. 
sing. ἡμέρας, nom. plur. ἡμέραι). σκιᾶ shadow (gen. sing. 
σκιᾶς, nom. plur. σκιαί), πύλη gate (gen. sing. πύλης, 
nom. plur. πύλαι). γνώμη judgment (gen. sing. γνώμης, 
nom. plur. γνῶμαι). 


i, ae 


FIRST DECLENSION 41 


Other examples of the second class are: μοῖρα fate 
gen. sing. μοίρᾶς, nom. plur. μοῖραι). δόξα opinion (gen. 
sing. δόξης, nom. plur. δόξαι), τράπεζα table (gen. sing. 
τραπέζης, nom. plur. τράπεζαι). 


82. Observe that the second class has short -a in the 
final syllable of three cases of the singular —nominative, 
accusative, and vocative. ‘The first class, on the other 
hand, has a long vowel (ἃ or 7) in the final syllable 
throughout the singular. 


83. All words of the first class originally ended in -a. 
This ἃ is retained if immediately preceded by e, ¢, or p 
(cf. § 15); thus ryeved., copia, ywopa. Otherwise it 15 
changed to ἡ throughout the singular: thus τιμή (for- 
merly τιμᾶ). 

1. In the genitive and dative singular of words of the 
second class, the use of @ or 7 is determined by the same 
rule: thus γεφύρας (because p precedes the a), but γλώττης. 


84. The Genitive Plural of the first declension always 
has the circumflex accent on the last syllable, because -ῶν 
is contracted from -d-ev (originally *-d-cov; cf. ὃ 37, and 
the Latin ending -arum in stellarum): thus χωρῶν for 
yopa-ov. 


Nore. — In the accusative plural -as is for -avs (ὃ 54). 


83 a. In Ionic long ἃ of the singular of the first declension is always 
changed to 7: e€.g., χώρη; yeren, σοφίη, μοίρης, for Attic χώρα, γεγεᾶ, σοφία, 
μοίρας (see ὃ 15a). 

84a. In the genitive plural Homer has the older form -dwy (πυλάων) 
and rarely the Ionic -έων (πυλέων). Cf. § 17. 

b. In the dative plural Ionic has -yor (γλώσσῃσι); Homer uses also, 
though rarely, -ἢς (πέτρῃς to rocks). 


42 FIRST DECLENSION 


B. MASCULINES 


85. The masculines have the case ending -ς in the 
nominative singular. They are declined as follows: 


ὁ veavias young man. ὁ πολίτης citizen. δ᾽ Ατρείδης son of Atreus. 


(stem veavia-) (stem πολῖτᾶ-) (stem ᾿Ατρειδα-) 
SINGULAR 
Nom.  veavia-s πολίτη-ς ᾿Ατρείδης 
Gen. νεανίου. πολίτου ᾿Ατρείδου 
Dat. νεανίᾳ πολίτῃ ᾿Ατρείδῃ 
Acc. veavia-v πολίτη-ν ᾿Ατρείδη-ν 
Voc. νεανία πολῖτα ᾿Ατρείδη 
DUAL 
N.A.V. νεανία πολίτα ᾿Ατρείδα 
G.D. νεανίαιν πολίταιν ᾿Ατρείδαιν 
PLURAL 

ΝΟΥ. νεανίαι πολῖται ᾿Ατρεῖδαι 
Gen. νεᾶἀνιῶν πολιτῶν ᾿Ατρειδῶν 
Dat. veaviats πολίταις ᾿Ατρείδαις 
Acc. veavias πολίτας ᾿Ατρείδας 


Other examples for declension are ταμίας steward (like 
νεανίας). στρατιώτης soldier (like πολίτης), κριτής judge 
(gen. sing. κριτοῦ, voc. κριτά, nom. plur. κριταί). Kpovidns 
son of Kronos (like ᾿Ατρείδης, but nom. plur. ἹΚρονίδαι). 


86. In the last syllable of the singular a is retained 
after εν 4, and p (8 15); otherwise it changes to ἡ. Com- 
pare § 83. 


87. The vocative singular of words in -ns, like ᾿Ατρείδης, 
ends in -y; but all words in -tyns, and compound nouns 


85 a. In some masculine words Homer has -ra for -της, e.g. ἱππότα = 
ἱππότης horseman (cf. Latin poeta, Greek ποιητής). 


FIRST DECLENSION 43 


and names of nationality in -ns have short -a in the voca- 
tive: thus πολῖτα, voc. of πολίτης citizen; σττοπῶλα, voc. 
of σ᾽τοπώλης grain seller; Ἰ]έρσα, voc. of Πέρσης Persian. 


Norr.— The ending -ov of the genitive singular is borrowed bodily 
from the second declension (cf. § 87 a). 


88. In some words -ea (or -aa) is contracted to - or -n. 
All cases then have the circumflex (ὃ 65, 1). Such words 
are declined as follows : 


ἡ μνᾶ mine! ἡ γῆ land. ὁ ‘Epps Hermes. 
(stem pva- for pvaa-) (stem yn-for yea or yao) (stem ‘Eppn- for ‘Eppea-) 
SINGULAR 
Nom. μνᾷ γῆ “Ἕιρμῆς 
Gen. μνᾶς γῆς Ἕιρμοῦ 
Dat. μνᾷ γῇ Ἑρμῇ 
Acc. μνᾶ-ν γῆτν Ἕιρμῆ-ν 
Voc. μνᾶ γῆ Ἕιρμῆ 
DUAL 
N.A.V. pva Sy Ob ta “Eppa 
G.D. μναῖν γαῖν Ἕιρμαῖν 
PLURAL 
N.Y. μναῖ γαῖ “Eppat 
Gen. μνῶν γῶν “Eppav 
Dat. μναῖς γαῖς “Eppais 
Ace. μνᾶς γᾶς “Eppas 


So also is declined Boppas (for Bopéas with irregular -pp-) 
north wind, in the singular only. 


87 a. In the genitive singular masculine, Homer has the earlier (and 
proper) form -ao (Arpeldao), and sometimes the Ionic form ’Arpeldew, the 
accent remaining as in the original form (see § 17). 

88 a. The Ionic generally has the uncontracted forms; thus Βορέης, 
‘Epuég for Attic Boppas, Ἑρμῇ- 


4 
SECOND DECLENSION 


44 i DECLENSION 
Γ 
ἶ 


89. Words of the Second Declension are nearly all 
masculine or neuter. The few feminines are declined 
like the masculines. The stems end in o. 

The nominative singular of masculines and feminines 
ends ἴῃ τὸς. The nominative, vocative, and accusative of 
neuters are alike, and they end in the singular in -ov, and 
in the plural in -a. 


90. Words of the second declension are inflected as 
follows : 


ὁ λόγος word. ὁ (or ἢ) ἄνθρωπος man. ἡἣ ὁδός road. τὸ δῶρον gift. 
(stem Aoyo-) (stem av@pwrro-) (stem 680-) (stem Swpo-) 


SINGULAR | 
Nom. λόγο-ς ἄνθρωπο-ς ὁδό-ς δῶρο-ν 
Gen. λόγου ἀνθρώπου ὁδοῦ δώρου 
Dat. λόγῳ ἀνθρώπῳ ὁδῷ δώρῳ 
Ace. λόγο-ν ἄνθρωπο-ν ὁδό-ν δῶρο-ν 
Voc. λόγε ἄνθρωπε ὁδέ δῶρο-ν 
DUAL 
N.A.V. λόγω ἀνθρώπω ὁδώ δώρω 
G.D. λόγοιν ἀνθρώποιν ὁδοῖν δώροιν 
PLURAL 
N.V. λόγοι ἄνθρωποι ὁδοί δῶρα 
Gen. λόγων ἀνθρώπων ὁδῶν δώρων 
Dat. λόγοις ἀνθρώποις ὁδοῖς δώροις 
Ace. λόγους ἀνθρώπους ὁδούς δῶρα 


90a. In the genitive singular Homer has τοῖο, -oo (rarely), and -ov : 
thus πολέμοιο, πολέμοο, πολέμου of war. 

b. In the genitive and dative dual Homer has -ouw» for Attic ow: thus 
ἵπποιιν, from ἵππος horse. 

c. In the dative plural Homer usually has -οισι; Herodotus always has 
it: thus ἀνθρώποισι to nen. 


SECOND DECLENSION 45 


: ΄ . rs 

So also are declined νόμος law (gen. sing. νόμου, nom. 
plur. νόμοι). κίνδυνος danger, ταῦρος bull (nom. plur. ταῦροι). 
ποταμός river, στρατηγός general, νῆσος (fem.) island, 
μέτρον measure, ἱμάτιον cloak. 


CONTRACT SUBSTANTIVES OF THE SECOND DECLENSION 


91. Words which have stems ending in -oo and -eo un- 
dergo contraction in accordance with the rules given in 
§§ 18 and 19. They are thus declined : 


τὸ ὀστοῦν Lone. 
< 3 
(stem ooteo-) 


ὁ νοῦς mind. 
(stem voo-) 


ὁ περίπλους voyage around, 
circumnavigation. 
(stem περιπλοο-) 


SINGULAR 


Nom. νοῦ-ς (vdo-s) περίπλου-ς (περίπλοο-ς) ὀστοῦ-ν (ὀστέο-ν) 
Gen. νοῦ (νόου) περίπλου (περιπλόου) ὀστοῦ (ὀστέου) 
Dat. νῷ (νόῳ) περίπλῳ (περιπλόῳ) ὀστῷ (ὀστέῳ) 
Acc. νοῦ-ν (νόο-ν) περίπλου-ν (περίπλοο-ν) ὀστοῦ-ν (ὀστέο-ν) 
Voc. νοῦ (νόε) περίπλου (περίπλοε) ὀστοῦ-ν (ὀστέο-ν) 
DUAL 
N.A.V. νώ (vow) περίπλω (περιπλόω) ὀστώ (ὀστέω) 
G.D. νοῖν (νόοιν) περίπλοιν (περιπλόοιν) ὀστοῖν (ὀστέοιν) 
PLURAL 
N.V. νοῖ (voor) περίπλοι (περίπλοοι) ὀστᾶ (ὀστέα) 
Gen. νῶν (νόων) περίπλων (περιπλόων) ὀστῶν (ὀστέων) 
Dat. νοῖς (νύοις) περίπλοις (περιπλόοις) ὀστοῖς (ὀστέοις) 
Ace. νοῦς (νόους) περίπλους (περιπλόους) ὀστᾶ (ὀστέα) 
So also are declined ὁ ῥοῦς (poos) stream, τὸ κανοῦν 


(κάνεον, cf. ὃ 118, 3) basket. 
1. Observe that the contraction of ὀστᾶ is contrary to 


the rule of § 18, 6. 


2. Observe that the nominative dual, if it has written 
accent on the last syllable, has the acute (contrary to 


§ 65, 1): thus νώ Crregularly from vow). 


40 SECOND DECLENSION 


3. Observe that contracted compounds have recessive 
accent (ὃ 64) in spite of the contraction: thus περίπλῳ 
(for περιπλόῳ), εὖνοι (for evvoor) kindly disposed. But 
the written accent almost never goes back of the syllable 
on which it stood in the nominative singular (§ 77): 
thus περίπλοι (not πέριπλοι). 


STEMS IN -w 
ATTIC SECOND DECLENSION 


92. To the second declension belong also a few words 
whose stems end in w. ‘They are thus declined : 


ὁ νεώς temple. (stem vew-) 


SINGULAR DUAL PLURAL 
Nom. νεώ-ς Nom. veo 
Gen. veo N.A.V. ved Gen. νεών 
Dat. ved G.D. νεῴν Dat. νεῴς 
Ace. νεώ-ν Ace. νεώς 
Voc. νεώς Voc. νεῴ 


So also λεώς people, κάλως cable. 

1. Observe that the genitive and dative, when they have 
written accent on the last syllable, take the acute, con- 
trary to § 77, 2. 

2. Many of these words were produced by an inter- 
change of quantity (ὃ 17), ao becoming ew: thus λεώς 
from λᾶός. In such words the long vowel at the end 
does not affect the position of the accent (cf. ὃ 60): thus 
Mevérews Menelaus (from Μενέλαος). 

3. Some words have no v in the accusative singular. 
Thus λαγώς hare has ace. sing. Aay® and Aayov; ἕως 
dawn has only ἕω. 


92 a. This form of declension is confined almost wholly to Attic. In 
Tonic most of these words follow the ordinary second declension. So, for 
Attic λεώς, νεώς, κάλως, λαγώς, Ionic has Adds, νηός, Kaos, λαγωός Or Aayés. 


THIRD DECLENSION 47 


THIRD DECLENSION 


93. Words of the Third (or Consonant) Declension 
have stems ending in a consonant, or in a vowel (« or v) 
which may sometimes be sounded as a consonant. A few 
stems appear to end in o (but_see §§ 112, 115). 

1. The stem of words of this declension may usually be 
found by dropping the ending -os of the genitive singular. 


94. Gender. — The gender of words of the third declen- 
sion must usually be learned by observation, but a few 
general rules may be given. 

1. Stems ending in a labial or a palatal mute are never 
neuter. 

2. MASCULINE are stems ending in ev, vt, τ (except 
those in -rn7-), 7, and p (except those in -ap-). 

8. FEMININE are stems ending in ty7, ὃ, 8, ¢ (with 
nom. in -t¢), and v (with nom. in -vs). 

4. NEUTER are stems ending in ap, ac, at, eo (with 
nom. in -os), and υ (with nom. in -v). 


FORMATION OF CASES 


95. Neuters.— Neuter words of the third declension 
regularly have the nominative, accusative, and vocative 
singular like the simple stem. A final 7 is dropped 
(§ 48): thus σῶμα (stem cwpar) body. 


96. Masculine and Feminine Nominative Singular. — 
Most masculine and feminine words of the third declen- 
sion form the nominative by adding -s to the stem. For 
the euphonic change which may follow, see §§ 28-30, 54: 
thus κλῖμαξ (for *«rAtwax-s) ladder (cf. Latin dux, ducis). 

1. But stems in -v-, -p-, -c-, and -ov7- regularly have in 
the nominative only the simple stem with a long vowel 


48 THIRD DECLENSION. —FORMATION OF CASES 


(ὃ 13): thus λιμήν Atpev-) harbor, ῥήτωρ (ῥητορ-) orator, 
Σωκράτης (Lwxpatec-) Socrates, λέων (Aeovt-) lion (ὃ 48). 
Norre.— Some of these words retain the long vowel of the nomi- 


native throughout their declension: thus Ἕλλην Greek, gen. Ἵλλη- 
vos, etc.; χειμών winter, gen. χειμῶνος, ete. 


97. Accusative Singular.— The accusative singular of 
masculine and feminine words adds -a to consonant stems 
and -ν to vowel stems: thus πούς foot (stem 7roéd-), accus. 
sing. πόδια ; but πόλις city (stem od), accus. sing. 
πόλιν. (Cf. § 14, 2 note.) 

1. But stems of more than one syllable ending’ in ¢7 or 
vo, without written accent on the last syllable, almost 
always drop the final mute and take the ending v: thus 
ἔρις strife (stem é€pi6-), accus. sing. ἔριν. 


98. Vocative Singular. — The vocative singular is regu- 
larly the mere stem: thus δαίμων divinity, voc. δαῖμον 
(stem datpov-); γέρων old man, voc. γέρον (stem γεροντ-. 
see § 48). 

1. But masculine and feminine words which form their 
nominative singular without ς (δ 96, 1), when they have 
written accent on the last syllable, and all other mute 
stems (except those in ~6-), use the nominative singular 
as vocative: thus ποιμήν (stem tromev-) shepherd, voc. 
ποιμήν ; φύλαξ (stem φυλακ-) watchman, voc. φύλαξ 
(but ἐλπίς (stem ἐλπιδ-), voc. ἐλπί). 


99. Dative Plural.— When » alone is dropped before 
the ending -ov of the dative plural (ὃ 34), the preceding 


99a. In the dative plural Homer has -σι(ν) and -eoou(v), sometimes 
-oo.(y) after vowels. Thus he has ποσσί (ἔποδ-σι), ποσί, and πόδεσσι with 
Jeet, νέκυ-σσι to corpses. Very rarely we find -eov: χείρ-εσι with hands. 

b. In the genitive and dative dual Homer has -ouv for Attic τοῖν. 
Thus ποδοῖεν of or with two feet. 


CONSONANT STEMS 49 


vowel remains unchanged, contrary to ὃ 34: thus ποιμέσι to 
shepherds, for ἔποιμεν-σι ; δαίμοσι to divinities, for ἔδαιμον-σι. 

1. But when v7 is dropped, the preceding vowel is 
lengthened: thus A€over to lions, for ἔλεοντ-σι ; πᾶσι to 
all, for ἔπαντ-σι. 


100. Special Rule of Accent.— Words with stems of one 
syllable in the third declension regularly have the written 
accent on the last syllable of the genitive and dative of all 
numbers. If the last syllable is long, it receives the cireum- 
flex (§ 77, 2): thus πούς foot, gen. sing. ποδός, gen. plur. 
ποδῶν, dat. plur. ποσί. 

Nore.— For exceptions see das (8 115, 5), dues (8 115, 7), οὖς 
(§ 115, 18), mats (§ 115,19), πᾶς (8 125, 2), Tpws (8 115, 23), and 
ὧν (§ 129, 3). 

CONSONANT STEMS 


101. Labial and Palatal Stems.— Stems ending in a 
labial or palatal mute are thus declined: 


ὁ φύλαξ ἡ φάλαγξ ἣ θρίξ ὁ κλώψ Hh φλέψ 
watchman. phalanc. hair. thief. vein. 
(stem dvAak-) (stem dadayy-) (stem tptx-) (stem κλωπ-) (stem 
Ξ PrcB-) 
SINGULAR 
Nom. φύλαξ φάλαγξ θρίξ κλώψ φλέψ 
θη. φύλακ-ος φάλαγγ-ος τριχ-ός κλωπ-ός φλεβ-ός 
Dat. φύλακοιι φάλαγγοι τριχ-ί κλωπ-ί φλεβ-( 
Acc. φύλακ-α φάλαγγ-α τρίχ-α κλῶπ-α φλέβ-α 
Voc. φύλαξ 'φάλαγξ θρίξ κλώψ φλέψ 
DUAL 
ΝΑΟΥ͂. φύλακ-ε φάλαγγ-ε τρίχ-ε κλῶπ-ε φλέβ-ε 
G.D. φυλάκοοιν φαλάγγ-οιν τριχ-οῖν κλωπ-οῖν φλεβ-οῖν 
PLURAL 
ΝΙΝ. φύλακ-ες φάλαγγ-ες τρίχ-ες κλῶπ-ες φλέβ-ες 
Gen. φυλάκ-ων φαλάγγ-ων TPLX-OV κλωπ-ῶν φλεβ-ῶν 
Dat. φύλαξι φάλαγξι θριξί κλωψί φλεψί 


Ace. ῴφύλακ-ας φάλαγγ-ας τρίχ-ας κλῶπ-ας φλέβ-ας 
BABBITT’S GR. GRAM. — 4 


δ0 THIRD DECLENSION 


So also are declined ὁ Αἰθίοψ (stem Al@tor-) Aethio- 
pian, ὁ χάλυψ' (stem χαλυβ-) steel, ἡ κλίμαξ (stem κλῖ- 
μακ-) ladder, ἡ μάστιξ (stem paotiy-) whip, ὁ ὄνυξ (stem 
ovux-) claw. 

1. For the € and wW in the nominative singular and 
dative plural see §§$ 28 and 29. For the vocative singu- 
lar see ὃ 98,1. For the change of @ to τ in θρίξ see ὃ 41. 

102. Lingual Stems. — Stems ending in a lingual mute 
are thus declined : 

MASCULINE AND FEMININE 


ὁ θής ἢ ἐλπίς ἣ ἔρις ἡ νύξ ὁ γέρων 
serf. hope. strife. night. old man. 
(stem @yr-) (stem ἐλπιδ--} (stem épid-) (stem vu«r-) (stem yepovt-) 


SINGULAR 
Nom. θής ἐλπίς ἔρις νύξ γέρων 
Gen. θητ-ός ἐλπίδ-ος ἔριδ-ος νυκτ-ός γέροντ-ος 
Dat. θητ-ί ἐλπίδ-ι ἔριδ-ι νυκτ-ί γέροντ-ι 
Acc. θῆτ-α ἐλπίδ-α ἔριν νύκτ-α γέροντ-α 
Voc. θής ἐλπί ἔρι νύξ γέρον 
DUAL 
N.A.V. θῆτ-ε ἐλπίδ-ε ἔριδ-ε νύκτ-ε γέροντ-ε 
G.D. θητ-οῖν ἐλπίδ-οιν ἐρίδ-οιν νυκτ-οῖν γερόντ-οιν 
PLURAL 
N.V. θβῆτ-ες ἐλπίδ-ες ἔριδ-ες νύκτ-ες γέροντ-ες 
ὅθ. θητ-ῶν ἐλπίδ-ων ἐρίδ-ων νυκτ-ῶν γερόντ-ων 
Dat. θησί ἐλπίσι ἔρισι νυξί γέρουσι 
Ace. θῆτ-ας ἐλπίδ- ας ἔριδας νύκτ-ας γέροντ-ας 


So also are declined ὁ ἔρως (stem ἐρωτ-}) love, ἡ ἐσθής 
(stem ἐσθητ-. gen. sing. ἐσθῆτος.) clothing, ἡ λαμπάς (stem 
λαμπαδ-, gen. sing. λαμπάδος) torch, ἡ χάρις (stem χαριτ-) 


102 a. In Ionic ἃ few stems in -ωτ- have forms without τ (cf. ὃ 103, 2 a). 
Thus χρώς skin, gen. sing. χροός, dat. χροΐ, acc. χρόα; ἱδρώς sweat, dat. 
sing. lope. 


CONSONANT STEMS 51 


favor, ὁ γίγας (stem yeyavt-) giant, ὁ λέων (stem λεοντ-) 
lion, 6 ὀδούς (stem ὀδοντ-, gen. sing. ὀδόντος.) tooth (the 
hominative singular is formed contrary to ὃ 96, 1). 

1. For the dropping of 7 (and v7), 6, or @ before o in 
the nominative singular and dative plural see ὃ 80. For 
the dative plural of stems in -ντ- (like γέρουσιν) see ὃ 99, 1. 
For the vocative singular see ὃ 98, 1. For the accusative 
singular of stems in -ἰτ- and -ἰδ- (χάριν, ἔριν) see ὃ 97, 1. 


103. NEUTER 


τὸ σῶμα body (stem σωματ-) 


SINGULAR DUAL PLURAL 
Nom. σῶμα Nom. σώματ-α 
Gen. σώματ-ος N.A.V. σώματ-ε Gen. σωμάτ-ων 
Dat. σώματ-ι G.D. σωμάτ-οιν Dat. σώμασι 
Acc. σῶμα Acc. σώματ-α 
Voc. σῶμα Voc. σώματ-α 


So also are declined στόμα (stem στοματ-Ὸ mouth, ὄνομα 
(stem dvopuat-) name, μέλι (stem pertT-) honey, γάλα (stem 
yanaxt-) milk (δ 48). 

1. A few words form their nominative from a stem in 
-p- (δ 73, 1): thus jap (gen. sing. ἤπατ-ος.) liver, ἣμαρ 
(gen. sing. ἤματ-ος) day (poetic). 

2. Four words, πέρας, πέρατος, end; τέρας, τέρατος. 
prodigy ; κέρας, κέρατος, horn; φῶς (contracted from 
φάος), φωτος, light, form their nominatives singular from 
a stem ending in o (ὃ 73,1). (for the full declension 
of κέρας see § 115, 10.) 


108, 2a. In Ionic κέρας and τέρας have no forms with τ. Thus, 
Homer has dat. sing. κέραι, nom. plur. xépa, gen. plur. κεράων, dat. plur. 
κέρασι and κεράεσσι. Herodotus changes a to e before a vowel (cf. § 100 0), 
but does not contract : thus répeos, κέρεϊ, κέρεα, κερέων. Of φῶς light Homer 
uses only the uncontracted form φάος (sometimes wrongly written φόως), 
dat. φάει, plur. φάεα. 


THIRD DECLENSION 


104. Liquid Stems. — Stems ending in a liquid are thus 
declined : 


ὁ λιμήν 
harbor. 


(stem Atpev-) 


ὁ δαίμων 
divinity. 


(stem δαιμον-) 


c > , 
ο ἀγὼν 
contest. 


(stem d&yav-) 


ὁ ῥήτωρ 
orator. 


(stem ῥητορ-) 


SINGULAR 
Nom λιμήν δαίμων ἀγών ῥήτωρ 
Gen λιμέν-ος δαίμον-ος ἀγῶν-ος ῥήτορ-ος 
Dat λιμέν-: δαίμον-ι ἀγῶν-ι ῥήτορ-ι 
Ace λιμέν-α Saipov-a ἀγῶν-α ῥήτορ-α 
γος λιμήν δαῖμον ἀγών ῥῆτορ 
DUAL 

N.A.V. λιμέν-ε δαίμον-ε ἀγῶν-ε ῥήτορ-ε 

ἌΣ λιμέν-οιν δαιμόν-οιν ἀγών-οιν ῥητόρ-οιν 

PLURAL 

N.V Atpév-es δαίμον-ες ἀγῶν-ες ῥήτορ-ες 
Gen λιμέν-ων δαιμόν-ων ἀγών-ων ῥητόρ-ων 
Dat λιμέσι δαίμοσι ἀγῶσι ῥήτορσι 
Acc λιμέν-ας δαίμον-ας ἀγῶν-ας ῥήτορ-ας 


So also are declined ὁ μήν (stem μην-) month, ὁ αἰών 
(stem alwv-) age, ὁ Kpatnp (stem Kpatnp-) mixing bowl, 
ὁ φώρ (stem φωρ-) thief, ὁ Onp (stem Onp-) wild beast. 

1. For the dative plural see § 99. : 

Notr.—In the vocative singular three words, σωτήρ savior, 
᾿Απόλλων Apollo, and ἸΠοσειδῶν Poseidon, have a short vowel (8 13) 
in the last syllable of the stem (contrary to § 98, 1) and throw the 


written accent back upon the first syllable: thus o@rep, “A7odXov, 
Πύσειδον (cf. § 105, 2). 


105. Five substantives of the third declension with 
stems ending in p show in their inflection two forms of 
the stem, one with ε, and the other with no vowel (or 
with a). See §§ 14 and 73, 1. 

These are: πατήρ father, μήτηρ mother, θυγάτηρ daugh- 
ter, γαστήρ belly, ἀνήρ man. In ἀνήρ, a δ is developed 


CONSONANT STEMS 


53 


between the ν and p whenever they come together. These 
words are thus declined : 


ὁ πατήρ father. 
(stem πατερ- or (stem μητερ- or 


ἣ μήτηρ mother. ἣ θυγάτηρ daughter. 
(stem θυγατερ- or 


ὁ ἀνήρ man. 
(stem avep- 


πατρ-) μητρ-) θυγατρ-) or ἀν(δ)ρ-) 
SINGULAR 
Nom. πατήρ μήτηρ θυγάτηρ ἀνήρ 
Gen. πατρ-ός μητρ-ός θυγατρ-ός ἀνδρ-ός 
Dat. πατρ-ί μητρ-ί θυγατρ-ί ἀνδρ-ί 
Ace πατέρ-α μητέρ-α θυγατέρ-α ἄνδρ-α 
Voc. πάτερ μῆτερ θύγατερ ἄνερ 
DUAL 
N.A.V. πατέρ-ε μητέρ-ε θυγατέρ-ε ἄνδρ-ε 
G.D. πατέρ-οιν μητέρ-οιν θυγατέρ-οιν ἀνδρ-οῖν 
PLURAL 
N.V. πατέρ-ες μητέρ-ες θυγατέρ-ες ἄνδρ-ες 
θη. πατέρ-ων μητέρ-ων θυγατέρ-ων ἀνδρ-ῶν 
Dat. πατρά-σι μητρά-σι θυγατρά-σι ἀνδρά-σι 
Acc. πατέρ-ας μητέρ-ας θυγατέρ-ας ἄνδρ-ας 


Like πατήρ is declined γαστήρ belly. (See also ὃ 115, 2.) 
1. Observe that in the genitive and dative the shorter 


forms take their written accent on the last syllable, after 
the analogy of stems of one syllable (δ 100): thus πατρός, 
ἀνδρῶν (but πατέρων, ἀνδράσι). 

2. Observe that the vocative singular of these words 
has recessive accent (cf. ὃ 104, note). 

3. For the a in the dative plural see § 14, 1. 


106. Stems in -o-.— Stems ending in o lose their final 
o whenever it comes between two vowels (κ 37) and the 
vowels thus brought together usually contract. 


105 a. In Homer the form of the stem with e is more frequently used 
than in Attic: thus πατέρος, πατέρι ; ἀνέρα, ἀνέρες, ete. (Attic πατρός, etc.). 
In, θυγάτηρ, however, we sometimes find θύγατρα, θύγατρες, and always 
θυγατρῶν. From ἀνήρ he has in the dative plural both ἀνδράσι and ἄνδρεσσι. 


54 THIRD DECLENSION 


Such stems are thus inflected : 


NEUTER 
τὸ γένος rice. ες τὸ γέρας prize. 
(stem γενοσ-, yever-) (stem yepac-) 
SINGULAR 
Nom. γένος γέρας 
Gen. γένους (*yeveo-os, γένε-ος) γέρως (*yepac-os, γέρα-ος) 
Dat. γένει (ἔγενεσ-ι, γένε-1) γέρᾳφ (Ἶγερασ-ι, γέρα 1) 
Acc. γένος γέρας 
Voc. γένος γέρας 
DUAL 


N.A.V. γένει (*yeveo-e, γένε-ε) 
G.D. γενοῖν (ἔγενεσ-οιν, yeve-ouv) 


PLURAL 
ΝΙΝ. γένη  (*yeveo-a, γένε-α) γέρα (ἔγερασ-α, γέρα-α) 
[4 x* ar 
Gen. ‘ wee ee oy) γερῶν (ἔγερασ-ων, γερά-ων) 
Dat. γένεσι ( γένεσ-σι) γέρασι ( γέρασ-σι) 
Ace. γένη (*yeveo-a, γένεα) γέρα (ἔγερασ-α, γέρα-α) 


So also are declined τὸ τεῖχος wall, τὸ ἄνθος flower, τὸ 
ἔτος year, TO γῆρας old age, To κέρας horn, wing (with other 
forms from a stem xepat-; see ὃ 115, 10). 

1. Observe that neuters ending in -os form their nomi- 
native, accusative, and vocative singular from the stem in 
-oo-. (See §$ 14 and 73, 1.) 


106 a. Homer and Herodotus regularly have the uncontracted forms. 
Thus, θάρσεος of courage, θάρσει with courage. The accusative plural 
κλέα, Which sometimes occurs in Homer, is probably for κλέε᾽. 

b. In the dative plural Homer has three different forms: thus βελέ- 
eso. (for ἔβελεσ-εσσι, ὃ 76 Ὁ), βέλεσ-σι, and βέλεσι (ὃ 35) from βέλος 
missile. 

c. In Homer and Herodotus words with stems in -ac- are usually 
uncontracted: thus γήραος of old age. A few words have ε instead of a 
in the stem, except in the nominative: thus οὖδας ground, gen. sing. 
ovdeos ; κῶας fleece, dat. plur. κώεσι. In the nominative and accusative 
plural Homer has -a short: thus déra cups. In the dative plural he has 
three forms, δεπά-εσσι (for ἔδεπασ-εσσ!, ὃ 37), δέπασ-σι, and δέπασι (ὃ 3d). 


—s 


CONSONANT STEMS 55 


2. In the nominative, accusative, and vocative plural 
of neuters in -os, -ea after e contracts into a. Thus χρέα 
for ypée-a (*xpeec-a) from χρέος debt, stem ypeec-. 


107. MASCULINE AND FEMININE 
Σωκράτης Socrates. 


(stem Zwxpatec-) 
Nom. Σωκράτης 


Gen. Σωκράτους (*ZwKpateo-os, Σξωκράτε-ος) 
Dat. Σωκράτει (*Zwxpareo-t, Swxpate-i) 
Ace. Σωκράτη (*wxpareo-a, Σωκράτε-α) 
γοο. Σώκρατες 


So also are declined Δημοσθένης Demosthenes, Διογένης 
Diogenes. 

1. Observe that the vocative singular of names like 
Σωκράτης has recessive accent. 


108. Proper names in -«Aens, of which the last part is 
the stem κλεεσ- (κλέος fame), are doubly contracted in 
the dative. Περικλῆς (stem ΠΕερικλεεσ-) Pericles is thus 
declined : 


= 

oes i Περικλῆς 

Gen. πΠερικλέους (πΠερικλεεσ-ος, Περικλέε-ος) 

Dat. Περικλεῖ (*IlepuxAeeo-t, Περικλέε-ϊ, ΠΕερικλέει) 
Ace. Tlepuwdéa = (* I epixAeeo-a, ΠΕρικλέε-α) 

Voc. Περίκλεις ((Περίκλεες) 


Περικλέης 


109. Stems in -οσ-. --- There is one stem in -οσ- (ἡ 
αἰδώς shame) which is thus inflected: nom. αἰδώς, gen. 
αἰδοῦς (*aidoc-os, aidd-os), dat. αἰδοῖ (*aidoc-~, αἰδό-ι). 
acc. αἰδῶ (*atdoc-a, aidd-a), voc. αἰδώς. The dual and 
plural are not found. 


108 a. In Homer proper names in -κλεῆς should probably have the 
uncontracted forms. Thus Ἡρακλέεος gen. sing. ‘Hpaxdéea ace. sing. of 
Ἡρακλέης Heracles, but these are usually written with 7, ‘Hpaxdfos, Ἡρακλῆα. 

109 a. In Ionic ἠώς dawn is declined like αἰδώς. 


δ0 THIRD DECLENSION 


VOWEL STEMS 


110. Stems in -t- and -v-.— Stems ending in ¢ or v are 
thus declined : 


ἢ πόλις city. ὁ πῆχυς forearm. τὸ ἄστυ ἑοιυη. ὁ ἰχθύς fish. 
(stem πολι-)} (stem πηχυ-) (stem ἀστυ-) (stem ἰχθυ-) 
SINGULAR 
Nom. πόλι-ς πῆχυ-ς ἄστυ ἰχθύ-ς 
Gen. πόλε-τως - πήχε-ως ἄστε-ως ἰχθύ-ος 
Dat. πόλει (πόλε-) πήχει (πήχε-) ἄστει (ἄστε-) ἰχθύ-ἰ 
Ace. πόλι-ν πῆχυ-ν ἄστυ ἰχθύ-ν 
Voc. πόλι πῆχυ ἄστυ ἰχθύ 
DUAL 
N.A.V. πόλει (πόλε-) πήχει (πήχε-) ἄστει (ἄστε-ε) ἰχθύ-ε 
G.D. πολέε-οιν πηχέ-οιν ᾿ ἀστέ-οιν ἰχθύ-οιν 
PLURAL 
N.V. πόλεις (πόλε-ες) πήχεις (πήχε-ες) ἄστη (ἄστε-α) ty Od-es 
Gen. πόλε-ων πήχε-ων ἄστε-ων ἰχθύ-ων 
Dat. πόλε-σι πήχε-σι ἄστε-σι ἰχθύ-σι 
Acc. πόλεις πήχεις ἄστη (ἄστε-α) ἰχθῦς 


1104. In Homer stems in -- are thus declined: sing. nom. πόλις, 
gen. πόλιος, dat. πόλϊ, rarely πόλει (Which doubtless stands for πόλιϊ), ace. 
πόλιν, voc. πόλι; plur. nom. πόλιες, gen. πολίων, dat. πολίεσσι (ὃ 76 b) or 
(rarely) πόλεσι (which perhaps stands for πόλισι), acc. πόλις and πόλιας. 

b. From πόλις Homer has also four forms with 7: sing. gen. πόληος, 
dat. πόληϊ ; plur. nom. πόληες, acc. πόληας. 

c. In Herodotus stems in -ἰ- are thus inflected: sing. πόλις, “πόλιος, 
πόλι (rarely πόλει), πόλιν, πόλι ; plur. πόλιες, πολίων, πόλισι, πόλις (rarely 
πόλιας). 

ἃ. In Ionic, words with stems in -v- regularly have the uncontracted 
forms: thus ἄστεϊ, ἄστεα, myxees, —except that Homer sometimes con- 
tracts the dative singular: thus wAnéut to a multitude. In the genitive 
singular Ionic has always -os (not -ws): thus πήχετ-ος, dore-os. ‘The geni- 
tive plural has its regular accent (cf. § 110, 2): thus πηχέων ἀστέων. 

e. In the accusative plural Homer has -vs or -vas, as the meter may 
demand: thus ἰχθῦς or ἰχθύας, 


VOWEL STEMS 57 


So also are declined ἡ δύναμις power, ὁ μάντις seer, ὁ πέ- 
Nexus axe (like πῆχυς). ὁ or ἡ σῦς hog (like ἰχθύς, gen. 
sing. ov-0s), βότρυς cluster of grapes (like ἐχθύς, but with 
short v). Most of these words are masculine or feminine ; 
the only neuter in frequent use is ἄστυ town. 


Norr.—It is probable that in words like πόλις and πῆχυς we 
have, as we have seen elsewhere (§ 105, 1), two forms of the same stem 
existing side by side, πολι- and πολει- (see §§ 14, 2 and 73,1). Thus 
the nominative is formed from the shorter stem (πόλι-ς, πῆχυ-ς), but 
the genitive was originally from the longer stem (*zroAet-os, Ἐπηχευ-ος). 
These latter forms, however, are not found, for the c or v at once went 
over into the corresponding consonant form (7 or ¢), and disappeared 
(§ 21). In compensation the preceding vowel was sometimes length- 
ened (8 16), and thus we have πόλητος (in Homer) and ἔπηχητος. 
Then, by an interchange of quantity (δ 17), we get the usual Attic 
forms πόλεως and πήχεως. Observe that the interchange of quantity 
does not affect the position of the accent (§ 60). 


1. Most stems in -v- keep the v throughout and are 
declined like ἐχθύς. Stems of one syllable have the 
circumflex accent in the nominative, accusative, and 
vocative. 

2. Proper names in -s usually retain the « of the stem 
throughout their inflection: thus Συέννεσις Syennesis, 
gen. Συεννέσι-ος, etc. So also is declined «is weevil, gen. 
Ktos, ete. 

3. Observe that the accent of the genitive plural is 
irregularly made like that of the genitive singular. 

4. The accusatives plural, πόλεις and πήχεις, are irregu- 
larly made like the nominatives plural. 


111. Stems ending in a diphthong lose the final vowel 
of the stem before all endings beginning with a vowel 
(§ 21). They are thus declined: 


58 THIRD DECLENSION 


ὁ βασιλεύς ὁ, ἣ βοῦς ἣ γραῦς ἣ ναῦς 
king. OL, COW. old woman. ship. 
(stem βασιλευ-) (stem βου) (stem ypav-) (stem vav-) 


SINGULAR 
Nom. βασιλεύ-ς Bot-s ypat-s vad-s 
Gen. βασιλέ-ως βο-ός Ypa-ds νε-ώς 
Dat. βασιλεῖ (Sacrd€-i) Bo-t ypa-t νη-ἴ 
Ace. βασιλέ-α ᾿ βοῦ-ν _ γραῦ-ν ναῦ-ν 
Voce. βασιλεῦ βοῦ γραῦ ναῦ 
DUAL 
N.A.V. βασιλῆ βό-ε γρᾶ-ε νῆ-ε 
G.D. βασιλέ-οιν βο-οῖν ypa-otv ve-otv 
PLURAL 

N.V. βασιλῆς later -eis (-Ees) βό-ες γρᾶ-ες νῆ-ες 
Gen. βασιλέ-ων βο-ῶν γρᾶτῶν νε-ῶν 
Dat. βασιλεῦ-σι βου-σί γραυ-σί ναυ-σί 
Ace. βασιλέ-ας βοῦς γραῦς ναῦς 


So also are declined ὁ ἱππεύς horseman, ὁ ἱερεύς priest, 
ὁ χοῦς three-quart measure (but w. acc. sing. χόα, acc. 
plur. yeas). 

Nore. — Many of the forms from stems in -ev- are to be explained 


similarly to those from πῆχυς and πόλις. Thus, the genitive singular 
βασιλέεως comes by an interchange of quantity (ὃ 17), from βασιλῆτος 


111 a. In Ionic, words with stems in -ev- regularly have the uncon- 
tracted form. Homer has ἡ instead of e wherever v has disappeared 
(§ 111 and note). Thus, βασιλῆος, βασιλῆϊ, etc. (but βασιλεύς, βασιλεῦσι). 
In proper names, however, he sometimes has ε, as in Πηλέος of Peleus 
(also ΠηλῆοΞς). 

b. For γραῦς and ναῦς Homer has γρηῦς and νηῦς. The latter he thus 
declines: sing. nom. νηῦς, gen. vnds or νεός, dat. νηΐ, acc. νῆα, νέα ; plur. 
nom. νῆες or νέες, gen. νηῶν or νεῶν, dat. νηυσί, νήεσσι or νέεσσι, acc. νῆας 
or νέας. Herodotus has sing. νηῦς, νηός or νεός, νηΐ, véa; plur. νέες, νεῶν, 
νηυσί, νέας. 

c. For the dative plural of βοῦς Homer has βουσί and βόεσσι, and for 
the accusative plural βοῦς and βόας (cf. ὃ 110 a and 6). 


: VOWEL STEMS 59 


(in Homer), and this, in turn, is for *BaotAng-os (§ 21). So also the 
accusatives singular and plural have -é-a and -é-as, for earlier τῆτα 
and -7-as. 


1. Observe that the nominative, accusative, and vocative 
dual (βασιλῆ). and the older form of the nominative 
plural (βασιλῆς). are contracted from βασιλῆτε and 
βασιλῆ-ες. (See note.) 

2. When the final -ev- of the stem fallow a vowel or 
diphthong, contraction usually takes place in the genitive 
and accusative. Thus, Πειραιεύς Petraeus usually has for 
its genitive Πειραιῶς (for Πειραιέως), and for its accusative 
Πειραιᾷ (for Πειραιέα). 


112. Stems: in -οι-. --- Stems ending in οὐ (found in the 
singular only) lose their final ὁ in all cases except the 
vocative (§ 21). They are thus declined: 


ε ΓΑ =! 
n πειθώ persuasion. 


(stem revBou-) ’ 


Nom. πειθώ 


Gen. πειθοῦς (πειθό-ος) 
Dat. πειθοῖ (πειθό-) 
Ace. πειθώ (πειθό-α) 
γοο. πειθοῖ 


So also are declined ἡ ἠχώ echo, ἡ Λητώ Leto. All 
words which follow this declension have their written 
accent on the last syllable. 


113. Stems in -w- (or ΦΕ). A few words of the third 
declension appear to have stems ending in ὦ, but this 
could not have been the original ending. Possibly 


112 a. Herodotus often has the accusative singular of o- stems in 
-ovv; thus ᾿Ιοῦν acc. of ᾿Ιώ Jo. 


00 IRREGULAR DECLENSION 


such stems ended originally in -w¢-. They are thus 
declined : 

ὁ ἥρως hero. 

(stem ἥρω: ?) ‘ 

SINGULAR DUAL PLURAL 

Nom. ἥρως Nom. ἥρω-ες, ἥρως 
Gen. ἥρω-ος N.A.V. ἥρω-ε Gen. ἡρώ-ων 
Dat. ἥρῳ (ἡρω-) (.1. ἥρώ-οιν Dat. ἥρω-σι 
Acc. ἥρω-α, ἥρω Acc. ἥρω-ας, ἥρως 
Voe. ἥρως Voc. ἥρω-ες, ἥρως 


So also are declined ὁ μήτρως mother’s brother, ὁ πάτρως 
father’s brother. 


SUBSTANTIVES OF PECULIAR OR IRREGULAR 
DECLENSION 


114. 1. The Greeks sometimes declined the same word 
in different ways, especially when two different stems 
would give the same nominative singular. Thus, the 
stems oxoto- and σκοτεσ- both give a nominative singu- 
lar σκότος darkness, genitive singular σκότου (2d decl.) 
or σκότους (3d decl.). So also stems of proper names in 
-ns, like Σωκρατεσ- (Nom. sing. Σωκράτης, gen. sing. Lw- 
κράτους, acc. sing. Σωκράτη). have sometimes an accusative 
singular in -nv (Σωκράτην), as if of the first declension. 

2. Again, certain cases may have been formed from stems 
of wholly different words: thus ὁ ὄνειρος dream (2d decl. 


113 a. Homer has only the uncontracted forms: thus ἥρωϊ, ἥρωσ 
(npw ), ἥρωες, ἥρωας. 

114, 2a. So Homer has ὁ δεσμός bond, plur. of δεσμοί and τὰ δέσματα. 
Πάτροκλος (gen. -ov, 2d decl.) has also forms from a stem Πατροκλεεσ-: 
thus gen. ΠΠατροκλέεος (Πατροκλῆος Ὁ), etc. (See ὃ 108 a.) 

From ἡνίοχο-ς charioteer, declined regularly, Homer has also ἡνιοχῆα, 
ἡνιοχῆες (stem ἡνιοχευ-, ὃ 111); ef. Αἰθίοπας and Αἰθιοπῆας, acc. plur. of 
Αἰθίοψ. 


IRREGULAR DECLENSION 61 


regular), but gen. sing. also ὀνείρατος, dat. ὀνείρατι, nom. 
plur. ὀνείρατα, gen. ὀνειράτων, dat. ὀνείρασι. See also ὃ 103, 
1 and 2. 

3. Again, words sometimes have different genders in 
the different numbers. ‘Thus, otros grain (masc.) has for 
its plural σῖτα (neuter); τὸ στάδιον stade has for its plural 
usually of στάδιοι. 


115. The peculiarities of substantives irregularly declined 
can best be learned from a lexicon, but some of the more 
important of these will be found in the following list : 

1. ὁ “Apys (stem *Apeo-) Ares, gen. Ἄρεως (poetic 
"Apeos), dat. Ἄρει, voc. “Apes. 

2. [ὁ, ἡ ἀρήν] (stem apev-, apv-, apva-) lamb, of the same 
kind of declension as πατήρ (ὃ 105): thus ἀρν-ός, ἀρν-ί, 
ἄρν-α, dpv-es, apva-ot. The nominative singular is supplied 
by apvos, 2d decl., regular. 

3. τὸ γόνυ knee (Lat. genw), nom. acc. voc. sing. All 
other cases are formed from stem yovat- (ὃ 73, 1): yo- 
vaT-0S, yovat-t, etc. 

4. ἡ γυνή woman. All other forms come from a stem 
γυναικ-: the genitives and datives have their written accent 
on the last syllable: gen. sing. γυναικός, dat. γυναικί, ace. 
γυναῖκα, voc. γύναι; dual yuvaixe, γυναικοῖν ; plur. γυναῖκες, 
γυναικῶν, γυναιξί, γυναῖκας. (Cf. 8 73, 1.) 

5. ἡ δᾷς (δᾷδ-) torch, 3d decl., regular, but the genitive 
plural δᾷδων is an exception to the rule of accent for stems 
of one syllable (§ 100). 

6. τὸ δόρυ spear, nom. acc. voc. sing. All other cases 


115, 1a. "Ἄρης: Homer has gen.” Apyos and ”Apeos, dat.” Apne and ” Apet, 
ace.” Apna; Herodotus, ” Apeos, ”Apec, ”Apea. 

115, 8a. γόνυ: Ionic and poetic γούνατος, γούνατι, γούνατα, γουνάτων, 
γούνασι. Epic also youvds, γουνί, "γοῦνα, γούνων, γούνεσσι (ὃ 76 b). 


62 SUBSTANTIVES OF PECULIAR 


from stem δορατ- (cf. γόνυ, ὃ 115, 3): δόρατ-ος, ddpat-t, ete. 
(cf. § 73,1). Poetic gen. δορός, dat. δορί and δόρει. 

7. ὁ δμώς (duw-) slave (poetic); 3d decl., regular, but 
the genitive plural (δμώων) is an exception to the rule 
of accent for stems of one syllable (§ 100). 

8. Ζεύς (cf. § 39,2) Zeus, gen. Διός, dat. Ari, acc. Δία, 
voc. Zev. 

9. TO Kapa (καρατ-. xpat-, ὃ 18, 1) head (poetic), gen. 
κρατ-ός, dat. κρατ-ί or Kapa, acc. Kapa (or even κρᾶτα). 
voc. κάρα: acc. plur. (rare) τοὺς κρῶτας. 

10. τὸ κέρας horn, wing, has forms from two different 
stems, κερασ- and κερατ-. See §103,2, and a. Sing. nom. 
acc. voc. κέρας, gen. Képat-os or κέρως (for *xepa(a)-os), 
dat. κέρατ-ι or κέρᾳ ; dual nom. acc. voc. κέρατε or Képa, 
gen. dat. cepatow or xépov; plur. nom. ace. voc. κέρατα 
or Képa, gen. κερἄᾶτων, dat. κέρασι. In the meaning wing, | 
forms from the stem κερασ- are usually employed. 

12. ὁ, ἡ κύων dog, voc. sing. κύον. All other cases from a 
stem κυν- : κυνός, κυνί, κύνα ; plur. κύνες, κυνῶν, κυσί, κύνας. 


115, 6 a. δόρυ: Tonic δούρατος, δούρατι, δούρατα, δουράτων, δούρασι. 
Epic also δουρός, δουρί, δοῦρε, δοῦρα, δούρων, δούρεσσι (ὃ 76 b). 

115, 88. Ζεύς: poetic also Ζηνός, Ζηνί, Ζῆνα. 

115,94. κάρᾶ: Homer has forms from four different stems, capyar-, 


καρητ-, and Kpaat-, Kpar. ENCE Aa 


N.A. κάρη also Kap 

Gen. καρήατος κάρητος κράατος κρᾶτός 

Dat. καρήατι κάρητι κρᾶατι κρᾶτί 
PLURAL 

N.A. καρήατα κάρα κρᾶατα κρᾶτα 

Gen. κρᾶτων 

Dat. Kpacl 


For the plural Homer usually has κάρηνα, καρήνων, from another word, 
τὸ κάρηνον. 

115, 11 a. In κόρυς (κορυθ-} helmet Homer sometimes has an accusative 
κόρυν (cf. § 115, 17). 


OR IRREGULAR DECLENSION 63 


13. ὁ Ads stone (poetic), contracted from λᾶα-ς, gen. 
Ad-os, dat. Aa-i, acc. Ada-v, Ad-v; plur. Ad-es, λά-ων, 
Ad-ecou Or λᾶ-εσι. 

14. 6, Υ μάρτυς (“aptup-) witness, gen. μάρτυρ-ος. etc., 
regular, except dat. plur. μάρτυσι. 

15. Οἰδίπους Oedipus, gen. Οἰδίποδος or Οἰδίπου (ὃ 114, 1), 
dat. Οἰδίποδι, ace. Οἰδίπουν, voc. Οἰδίπους or Οἰδίπου. 

16. ἡ ots sheep (stem οὐ- for ὀρι:, cf. Lat. ovis), sing. 
oi-s, oé-ds, οἰ-ἴ, ot-v; plur. οἶ-ες, οἰ-ὧν, οἰ-σί, οἷς. 

17. ὁ, ἡ Spvis (dpvid-) bird, declined regularly (§ 102), 
but ace. sing. both ὄρνεθα and ὄρνιν (δ 97, 1). 

18. τὸ οὖς ear, sing. nom. ace. voc. ods, all other forms 
from a stem @7- (contracted from ovat- (*0(f)at-), see 
§ 115, 18 a): thus ὠτ-ός, @7-¢; plur. ὦ-τα, ὦ-των, ὠσί. 
The genitive plural is an exception to the rule of accent 
for stems of one syllable (§ 100). 

19. ὁ, H παῖς (παιδ-}) child, gen. παιδός, etc., regular, 
but voc. sing. wat. The genitive and dative dual (zai- 
dow) and the genitive plural (παίδων) are exceptions to 
the rule of accent for stems of one syllable (8 100). 

20. ἣ Πνύξ Pnyx (Πνυκ-, Ivev-, ὃ 88), Πυκνός, Πυκνί, 
Πύκνα. 

21. ὁ πρεσβευτής (πρεσβευτα-) embassador, rare in the 
plural. Instead, the plural of the poetic πρέσβυς (πρεσβυ-) 
old man is commonly used: thus πρέσβεις, πρέσβεων, 
πρέσβεσι, πρέσβεις. 


115, 144. μάρτυς: Homer has always sing. μάρτυρος (2d decl.), plur. 
μάρτυροι. 

115, 15 a. Οἰδίπους: Homer has a genitive Οἰδιπόδαο; Herodotus, 
Οἰδιπόδεω. Doric forms found in the lyrics of tragedy are gen. Οἰδιπόδα, 
acc. Οἰδιπόδαν, voc. Οἰδιπόδα. 

115, 16 a. ois: Ionic usually leaves the stem uncontracted: thus dis, 
dios, etc. . 

115, 18 a. ods: Homer has gen. sing. οὔατος, plur. οὔατα, dat. οὔασι. 


64 ADJECTIVES 


22. TO πῦρ (stem πυρ-) fire, gen. πυρός, etc., 8d decl.; 
but plural ta πυρά watch-fires, dat. πυροῖς, 2d decl. 

23. ὁ Tpas (stem Tpw-) Trojan; the genitive plural 
(Τρώων) is an exception to the rule of accent for stems 
of one syllable (§ 100). 

24. τὸ ὕδωρ (vdaT-) watcr, gen. ὕδατος, etc. 

25. ὁ vids (vio- and sometimes vo-, ὃ 21) son, 2d decl., 
regular; also many 3d decl. forms from a stem viv- or 
vu (¢ being usually dropped between the two vowels, § 21). 
These are: sing. gen. u(i)éos, dat. v(é)et; dual υζ )εῖ, 
v(t )éoww; plur. v(t )eis, ν(ἱγέων, v(i)éor, υ(ἱλ)εῖς. 

26. ἡ χείρ (χειρ-) hand, 3d decl., regular, but dat. plur. 
χερσί, and sometimes dat. dual χεροῖν. 


ADJECTIVES 


116. The declension of adjectives in Greek is like that 
of substantives, and the general statements given under 
the three declensions of substantives will apply also to the 
declension of adjectives. 


FIRST AND SECOND DECLENSIONS 


(VOWEL DECLENSION ) 


117. Most adjectives of the first and second declensions 
have three endings, — masce. -os, fem. -a or -7 (δ 15), neut. 
τον (cf. 88 81 and 90). The masculine and neuter follow 


115, 25 a. vids: besides the stems vio- (2d decl.) and viv- (8d decl.), 
Homer has also a stem vi- which gives the following forms: sing. gen. υἷος, 
dat. υἷε, acc. via; dual vie; plur. nom. vies, dat. υἱάσι, acc. vias. Herod- 
otus has only the forms from υἱός (2d decl.), 

115, 20 4. χείρ: poetic χερός, χερί. Homer has dat. plur. χερσί, xel- 
ρεσσι, and (once) χείρεσι, 


FIRST AND SECOND DECLENSIONS 65 


the second declension; the feminine follows the first 
declension. They are inflected as follows: 


ἀγαθός good. φίλιος friendly. 
SINGULAR 

MASC. FEM. NEUT. MASC. FEM. NEUT. 
Nom. ἀἄγαθός ἀγαθή ἀγαθόν φίλιος φιλία’ φίλιον 
Gen. ἀγαθοῦ ἀγαθῆς ἀγαθοῦ φιλίυ φιλίας φιλίου 
Dat. ἀγαθῷ ἀγαθῇ ἀγαθῷ φιλίῳ φιλίᾳ φιλίῳ 
Acc. ἀγαθόν ἀγαθήν ἀγαθόν φίλιον φιλίαν φίλιον 
Voc. ἀγαθέ ἀγαθή ἀγαθόν φίλιε φιλία φίλιον 

DUAL 
N.A.V. ἀγαθώ ἀγαθά ἀγαθώ φιλίω φιλία φιλίω 
G.D. ἀγαθοῖν ἀγαθαῖν ἀγαθοῖν φιλίοινν φιλίαιν φιλίοιν 
PLURAL 

N.V. ἀγαθοί ἀγαθαί ἀγαθά φίλιοι φίλιαι φίλια 
Gen. ἀγαθῶν ἀγαθῶν ἀγαθῶν φιλίων φιλίων φιλίων 
Dat. ἀγαθοῖς ἀγαθαῖς ἀγαθοῖς φιλίοις φιλίαις φιλίοις 
Acc. ἀγαθούς ἀγαθάς ἀγαθά φιλίους φιλίας φίλια 


So also are declined σοφός, σοφή, σοφόν wise, μακρός, 
paxpa, μακρόν long, ἄξιος, ἀξία, ἄξιον worthy. 

1. Observe that the feminine always has a long vowel, 
either aor ἡ. After e, 4, or p the ἃ is retained, otherwise 
it is changed to ἡ (§ 83). After o an 7 follows, unless the 
o is preceded by p; then ἃ is employed: thus ὀγδόη (fem.) 
eighth, but ἀθρόα (fem.) collected. 

2. Observe that, in regard to accent, the feminine 
follows the masculine rather than its own nominative 
singular. Thus, φίλιαι nom. plur. and φιλίων gen. plur. 
(contrary to 88 ΤΊ and 84). 

3. In the dual the masculine forms are often used 
instead of the feminine. Thus, φίλω κόρα two dear girls. 


117, 1 a. Ionic has ἡ instead of a in the feminine (see ὃ 83a). In the 
genitive plural of the feminine Homer has -άων (sometimes -éwv), Herod- 
otus has -éwy (cf. § 84a). 

BABBITT’S GR. GRAM. —5 


00 


ADJECTIVES 


118. Many adjectives in -eos and -oos are contracted. 
They are thus declined : 


N.V. 
Gen. 
Dat. 
Ace. 


ΝΑ: 
G.D. 


N.V. 
Gen. 
Dat. 
Ace. 


χρυσοῦς (ypuaeos) golden. 


SINGULAR 
MASC. FEM. 
χρυσοῦς (χρύσεος) χρυσὴ (χρύσέα) 
χρυσοῦ (χρύσέου) χρυσῆς (χρυσέας) 
χρυσῷ (χρυσέῳ) χρυσῇ (χρύσέᾳ) 
χρυσοῦν (χρύσεον) χρυσῆν (χρύσέαν) 
DUAL 
χρυσώ (χρύσέω) χρυσᾶ (χρῦσέὰ) 
χρυσοῖν (χρυσέοιν) χρυσαῖν (χρῦσέαιν) 
PLURAL 
χρυσοῖ (χρύσεοι) χρυσαῖ (χρύσεαι) 
χρυσῶν (χρυσέων) χρυσῶν (χρύσέων) 
χρυσοῖς (χρυσέοις) χρυσαῖς (χρῦσέαις) 
χρυσοῦς (χρυσέους) χρυσᾶς (χρῦσέας) 


ἀργυροῦς (ἀργύρεος) silver. 


SINGULAR 
MASC. FEM. 
ἀργυροῦς (ἀργύρεος) apyupa (ἀργυρέα) 
ἀργυροῦ (ἀργυρέου) ἀργυρᾶς (ἀργυρέας) 
ἀργυρῷ (ἀργυρέῳ) ἀργυρᾷ (ἀργυρέᾳ) 
ἀργυροῦν (ἀργύρεον) ἀργυρᾶν (ἀργυρέαν) 


DUAL 


. ἀργυρώ (dpyupéw) ἀργυρᾶ (ἀργυρέα) 


ἀργυροῖν (ἀργυρέοιν) ἀργυραῖν (ἀργυρέαιν) 
PLURAL 

ἀργυροῖ (ἀργύρεοι) ἀργυραῖ (ἀργύρεαι) 

ἀργυρῶν (ἀργυρέων) ἀργυρῶν (ἀργυρέων) 

ἀργυροῖς (ἀργυρέοις) ἀργυραῖς (ἀργυρέαις) 

ἀργυροῦς (ἀργυρέους) ἀργυρᾶς (ἀργυρέᾶς) 


NEUT. 
χρυσοῦν (χρύσεον) 
χρυσοῦ (χρυσέου) 
χρυσῷ (χρυσέῳ) 
χρυσοῦν (χρύσεον) 


χρυσώ (χρῦσέω) 
χρυσοῖν (xpuccow) 


χρυσᾶ (χρὕσεα) 
χρυσῶν (χρυσέων) 
χρυσοῖς (χρύυσέοις) 
χρυσᾶ (χρύσεα) 


NEUT. 
ἀργυροῦν (ἀργύρεον) 
ἀργυροῦ (ἀργυρέου) 
ἀργυρῷ (ἀργυρέῳ) 
ἀργυροῦν (ἀργύρεον) 


ἀργυρώ (ἀργυρέω) 
ἀργυροῖν (ἀργυρέοιν) 


ἀργυρᾶ (ἀργύρεα) 
ἀργυρῶν (ἀργυρέων) 
ἀργυροῖς (ἀργυρέοις) 
ἀργυρᾶ (ἀργύρεα) 


FIRST AND 


ἁπλοῦς (dzAdos) simple. 


SECOND DECLENSIONS 67 


SINGULAR 
MASC. FEM. NEUT. 
N.V. ἁπλοῦς (ἀπλόο) ἁπλῆ (ἁπλέα) ἁπλοῦν (ἁπλόον) 
Gen. ἁπλοῦ (ἁπλόου) ἁπλῆς (ἁπλέας) ἁπλοῦ (ἁπλόου) 
Dat. ἁπλῷ (ἁπλόῳ) ἁπλῇ (ἁπλέᾳ) ἁπλῷ (ἁπλόῳ) 
Acc. ἁπλοῦν (ἁπλόον) ἁπλῆν («ἁπλέαν) ἁπλοῦν (πλόον) 
DUAL 
N.A.V.drkd (ἁπλόω) ἅπλᾶ (ἁπλέα) ἁπλώ (ἁπλόω) 
α.1). ἁπλοῖν (ἁπλόοιν) ἁπλαῖν (ἁπλέαιν) ἁπλοῖν (ἁπλόοιν) 
PLURAL 
ΝΥ. ἁπλοῖ (ἁπλόοι) ἁπλαῖ («ἁπλέαι) ἁπλᾶ (πλόα) 
Gen. ἁπλῶν (ἁπλόων) ἁπλῶν (ἁπλέων) ἁπλῶν (ἁπλόων) 
Dat. ἁπλοῖς (ἁπλόοις) ἁπλαῖς (ἁπλέαις) ἁπλοῖς (ἁπλόοις) 
Ace. ἁπλοῦς (ἁπλόους) ἁπλᾶς (ἁπλέας) ἁπλᾶ (adda) 


1. Observe that in contraction a short vowel before a 
is absorbed. Thus, χρύσέαις becomes χρυσαῖς and ἁπλόα 
ἁπλᾶ. In the feminine singular, however, this takes place 
only after p: apyupéa, ἀργυρᾶ, but ἁπλέα, ἁπλῆ (cf. § 83). 

2. Observe that adjectives in -oos form their contracted 
feminine from a stem in -ea-. 

3. Adjectives of material in -eos irregularly have their 
written accent on their contract syllables. Thus, χρύσεος, 
when contracted, becomes χρυσοῦς. For the accent of the 
nominative dual (ypuo) cf. ὃ 91, 2. 
ADJECTIVES OF TWO ENDINGS IN THE VOWEL 

DECLENSION 
119. By an adjective of two endings we mean one that 
‘uses the masculine form also for the feminine. ‘Thus, 
mase. and fem. ἥσυχος, neut. ἥσυχον quiet. 

Compound adjectives, as a rule, have only two endings: 
80 d-Aoyos, ἄ-λογον irrational, ev-vovs, εὔ-νουν well-disposed. 


They are thus declined: 


68 ADJECTIVES 


ἥσυχος guiel. ἵλεως propitious. 
SINGULAR 

MASC. & FEM. NEUT. - MASC. & FEM. NEUT. 

Nom. ἥσυχος ἥσυχον ἵλεως ἵλεων 

Gen. ἡσύχου ἡσύχου ἵλεω ἵλεω 

Dat. ἡσύχῳ ἡσύχῳ ἵλεῳ ἵλεῳ 
Ace. ἥσυχον ἥσυχον ἵλεων ἵλεων 
γοο. ἥσυχε ἥσυχον ἵλεως ἵλεων 

DUAL 

N.A.V. ἡσύχω ἡσύχω ἵλεω ἵλεω 

G.D. ἡσύχοιν ἡσύχοιν ἵλεῳν ἵλεῳν 
PLURAL 

N.V. ἥσυχοι ἥσυχα ἵλεῳ ἵλεα 
Gen. ἡσύχων ἡσύχων ἵλεων ἵλεων 
Dat. ἡσύχοις ἡσύχοις ἵλεῳς ἵλεῳς 

Ace. ἡσύχους ἥσυχα ἵλεως thea 


So also are declined βάρβαρος, βάρβαρον barbarian, 
ἐπί-φθονος, ἐπίφθονον envious, a-Texvos, ἄ-τεκνον childless : 
so also with contraction (see ὃ 91,3), εὔ-νους (ev-voos), 
εὔ-νουν well-disposed. 

1. For the accent of ἵλεως see ὃ 92, 2. 

One adjective, πλέως full, has a feminine πλέα. 


THIRD DECLENSION 
(CONSONANT DECLENSION ) 


120. Adjectives belonging wholly to the consonant 
declension have only two endings, the masculine being 
the same as the feminine. 

Most of these have stems ending in eo or ov. They 
are thus declined : 


1194. Homer has ἵλᾶος and πλεῖος for Attic ἵλεως and πλέως (see § 92, a). 
120a. Homer rarely, if ever, contracts adjectives in -ys. Thus, δυσμενέες, 
nom. plur. of δυσμενής hostile. 


THIRD DECLENSION 69 


ἀληθής true. εὐδαίμων happy 
SINGULAR 
MASC. & FEM. NEUT. MASC.&FEM. NEUT. 
Nom. ἀληθής ἀληθές εὐδαίμων εὔδαιμον 


Gen. ἀληθοῦς (ἀληθέεος) ἀληθοῦς (ἀληθέος) εὐδαίμονος εὐδαίμονος 
Dat. ἀληθεῖ (ἀληθέϊ) ἀληθεῖ (ἀληθέ) εὐδαίμονι εὐδαίμονι 


Ace. ἀληθὴ (ἀληθέα) ἀληθές εὐδαίμονα εὔδαιμον 
Voc. ἀληθές ἀληθές εὔδαιμον εὔδαιμον 
DUAL 


ΝΑΟΥ͂. ἀληθεῖ (ἀληθέε) ἀληθεῖ (ἀληθε-ε) εὐδαίμονε εὐδαίμονε 
G.D. ἀληθοῖν (ἀληθέοιν) ἀληθοῖν (ἀληθέτοιν)͵ εὐδαιμόνοιν εὐδαιμόνοιν 
PLURAL 
N.V. ἀληθεῖς (ἀληθέες) ἀληθῆ (ἀληθέα) εὐδαίμονες εὐδαίμονα 
Gen. ἀληθῶν (ἀληθέων) ἀληθῶν (ἀληθέων) εὐδαιμόνων εὐδαιμόνων 
Dat. ἀληθέσι ἀληθέσι εὐδαίμοσι εὐδαίμοσι 
Acc. ἀληθεῖς ἀληθῆ (ἀληθέα) εὐδαίμονας εὐδαίμονα 


So also are declined σαφής, σαφές clear; ἐνδεής, ἐνδεές 
needy (see ὃ 120,3); σώφρων, σῶφρον discreet ; ἄρρην, ἄρρεν 
male. For fuller information about stems in -eo- see 
δὲ 106-107. 

1. Observe that the accent of the neuter εὔδαιμον is 


recessive. 
2. Compound adjectives in -ys, without written accent 


on the last syllable, have recessive accent even in con- 
tracted forms: thus, masc. and fem. αὐτάρκης self-sufficient, 
neut. αὔταρκες. gen. plur. αὐτάρκων (instead of αὐταρκῶν 
from αὐταρκέ(σ)-ων. 

3. The contraction of ea following an e (and sometimes 
an tor v) gives ἃ (cf. § 118, 1): thus ἐνδεῶ for ἐνδεέ(σ)-α 
from ἐνδεής needy. 


121. Declension of Comparatives in -wv. — To this form 
of declension belong also comparatives in τῶν, which in 
some cases are often formed on a stem in -οσ- (§ 73, 1) 


τ0 ADJECTIVES 


(cf. Lat. mel-cdr-is for *mel-dds-is ), and so suffer contraction. 
They are thus declined : 
βελτίων Leiter. 


SINGULAR 
MASC. & FEM. NEUT. 
Nom. βελτίων βέλτιον 
Gen. βελτίον-ος βελτίον-ος 
Dat. βελτίον-ι βελτίον-ι 


( βελτίον-α, or 


eS ( βελτίω (for *BeXrio(c)-a) βέλτιον 
Voc. βέλτϊῖον βέλτιον 
DUAL 
N.A.V. βελτίον-ε βελτίον-ε 
G.D. βελτϊιόν-οιν βελτιόν-οιν 
PLURAL 
nv. $ βελτίον-ες, or ( βελτίον-α, or 
( βελτίους (for Ἐβελτιο(σ)-ες) ( βελτίω (for *BeATio(c)-a) 
Gen. βελτιόν-ων βελτιόν-ων 
Dat. βελτίοσι βελτίοσι 
ae βελτίον-ας, or 4 BeArtov-a, or 
( βελτίους ( βελτίω (for Ἐβελτῖο(σ)-α) 


So also are declined μείζων greater (neut. μεῖζον). 
καλλίων more beautiful, θάττων swifter. 

1. Observe that the neuter (βέλτιον) is recessive in accent. 

2. The accusative βελτίους (which should properly be 
βελτίως for BeAtio(c)-as) is imitated from the nominative. 


OTHER ADJECTIVES OF TWO ENDINGS IN THE 
CONSONANT DECLENSION 


Some other adjectives of two endings are made by 
compounding substantives with a prefix. Such, for exam- 
ple, are: 

εὔ-ελπις, εὔ-ελπι of good hope, gen. sing. εὐέλπιδ-ος, ace. 
sing. masc. and fem. εὔελπιν (ὃ 97, 1), ἀ-πάτωρ, ἄ-πατορ 
fatherless, gen. sing. ἀπάτορ-ος, etc. 


THREE ENDINGS OF FIRST AND THIRD DECLENSIONS 71 


ADJECTIVES OF THREE ENDINGS OF THE FIRST 
AND THIRD DECLENSIONS 


122. Adjectives of the consonant declension which have 
a separate form for the feminine always inflect the femi- 
nine like the second class of substantives of the first 
declension (§§ 81, 82). : 

1. The feminine is formed from the stem of the mas- 
culine by adding -ca, but the « regularly combines with 
the preceding letter (see ὃ 18, 1, and § 39). 

2. The genitive plural of the feminine always has the 
circumflex accent on the last syllable (§ 84). 


123. Stems in -v-. — Adjectives with stems ending in 


v are thus declined : 
ταχύς swift. 


SINGULAR 
MASC. FEM. NEUT. 

Nom. ταχύς ταχεῖα ταχύ 

Gen. ταχέος ταχείας ταχέος 

Dat. ταχεῖ (TAX) ταχείᾳ ταχεῖ (ταχέ-ἢ 
Ace. TAX VV ταχεῖαν ταχύ 

Voc. ταχύ ταχεῖα ταχύ 

DUAL 
N.A.V. ταχεῖ (ταχέε) ταχεία ταχεῖ (ταχέεε) 
G.D. πταχέοιν ταχείαιν ταχέοιν 
PLURAL 

Nom. ταχεῖς (ταχέες) ταχεῖαι ταχέα 
Gen. ταχέων ταχειῶν ταχέων 

Dat. TAXETL ταχείαις ταχέσι 

Ace. ταχεῖς ταχείας ταχέα 


1923 ἃ. For the feminine -e?a, -εἰᾶς, etc., Herodotus has -éa, -ἔης, én, -ἔαν, 
etc., and Homer sometimes has them: thus βαθέα, βαθέης, etc. (Attic 
βαθεῖα). In the accusative singular Homer sometimes has -éa for Attic 
-ὖν : thus εὐρέα πόντον broad sea. 


ΤΩ ADJECTIVES 


So also are declined γλυκύς sweet, βραδύς slow, εὐρύς 
wide. 

1. Observe that the genitive singular masculine and 
neuter ends in -os, and that the neuter plural is uncon- 
tracted. Compare the declension of πῆχυς and ἄστυ 
(S110). 


Norr.— The feminine ταχεῖα is for *raxev-ta (cf. § 14, 2 and 


§ 21). 


124. Stems in -av-. — Adjectives with stems ending in 


av are thus declined : 
μέλας black. 


SINGULAR 

MASC. FEM. NEUT. 
Nom. μέλας μέλαινα μέλαν 
Gen. μέλανος μελαίνης μέλανος 
Dat. μέλανι μελαίνῃ μέλανι 
Ace. μέλανα μέλαιναν μέλαν 
Voc. μέλαν μέλαινα μέλαν 

DUAL 
ΝΥ. μέλανε μελαίνα μέλανε 
G.D. μελάνοιν μελαίναιν μελάνοιν 
PLURAL 

N.V. μέλανες μέλαιναι μέλανα 
Gen. μελάνων μελαινῶν μελάνων 
Dat. peace μελαίναις μέλασι 
Acc. μέλανας μελαίνας μέλανα 


Like μέλας is declined only τάλας wretched. 
Nore. — The feminine μέλαινα is for ἔμελαν-ια (see 8 39,4). 


1. The nominative singular masculine is formed with s, 
contrary to § 96,1. Observe that the nominative singular 
masculine (μέλας) has long ἃ according to ὃ 34, while the 
short a of the dative plural (μέλασιν) is in accordance 
with § 99. . | 


THREE ENDINGS OF FIRST AND THIRD DECLENSIONS 73 


125. Stems in -vt-. — Stems in -vT- are thus declined: 


χαρίεις pleasing. πᾶς «all. 
SINGULAR 


MASC. FEM. NEUT. MASC. FEM. NEUT. 
Nom. χαρίεις χαρίεσσα χαρίεν πᾶς πᾶσα πᾶν 
Gen. χαρίεντος χαριέσσης χαρίεντος παντός πᾶσης παντός 
Dat. χαρίεντι χαριέσσῃ χαρίεντι παντί πάσῃ παντί 
Acc. χαρίεντα χαρίεσσαν χαρίεν πάντα πᾶσαν πᾶν 
Voc. χαρίεν χαρίεσσα χαρίεν πᾶν πᾶσα πᾶν 
DUAL 


N.A.V.xaplevte χαριέσσᾶὰ χαρίεντε 
G.D. χαριέντοιν χαριέσσαιν χαριέντοιν 


PLURAL 
N.V. χαρίεντες χαρίεσσαι χαρίεντα πάντες πᾶσαι πάντα 
Gen. χαριέντων χαριεσσῶν χαριέντων πάντων πασῶν πάντων 
Dat. χαρίεσι χαριέσσαις χαρίεσι πᾶσι πᾶσαις πᾶσι 
Ace. χαρίεντας χαριέσσας χαρίεντα πάντας πάσας “πάντα 


Like χαρίεις are inflected πτερόεις winged, φωνήεις voiced. 


Nore 1.— The feminine πᾶσα is for *zavt-ja, ἔπαντ-σα (§ 34), while 
χαρίεσσα (-erTa, see ὃ 125, 1) is for *xXaptet-ta (ὃ 39,1), from a shorter 
form of the stem (xapter-). The dative plural χαρίεσι (for ἔχαριετ-σι, 
§ 30) also comes from this stem. 

Nore 2.— The nominatives singular masculine χαρίεις and πᾶς are 
for *yaptevt-s and ἔπαντ-ς. See § 34. 


1. The feminine of adjectives like χαρίεις occurs only in 
poetic diction, and so the feminine χαρίεσσα has oo instead 
of tr (ὃ 22). The Attic prose form of this word would be 
χαρίεττα. 

2. Observe that the genitives and datives πάντων, πᾶσι 
are accented contrary to § 100. 

3. Observe that the neuter singular πᾶν irregularly has 
a, imitated from the masculine. 


74 ADJECTIVES 


ADJECTIVES OF ONE ENDING 


126. A few adjectives from their meaning have no 
neuter, and the masculine and feminine are inflected 
alike: so ἄ-παις childless, gen. sing. ἄπαιδ-ος, etc.; πένης 
poor, gen. sing. πένητ-ος, etc. 


ADJECTIVES OF IRREGULAR DECLENSION 


127. The irregular adjectives μέγας great (stems peya- 
and weyado-, ὃ 73, 1) and πολύς much, many (stems πολυ- 
and πολλο-, § 73, 1) are thus declined : 


μέγας great. πολύς much, many. 
SINGULAR 
MASC. FEM. NEUT. MASC. FEM. NEUT. 
Nom. μέγας μεγάλη μέγα πολύς πολλή πολύ 
Gen. μεγάλον μεγάλης μεγάλο πολλοῦ πολλῆς πολλοῦ 
Dat. μεγάλῳ μεγάλῃ μεγάλῳ πολλῷΏῷῦἷ πολλῇ πολλῷ 
Acc. μέγαν μεγάλην μέγα πολύν πολλήν πολύ 


Voc. μέγας μεγάλη μέγα 
DUAL 

N.A.V. μεγάλω μεγάλα μεγάλω 

G.D. μεγάλοιν μεγάλαιν μεγάλοιν 


PLURAL 
ΝΙΝ. μεγάλοι μεγάλαι μεγάλα πολλοί πολλαί πολλά 
Gen. μεγάλων μεγάλων μεγάλων πολλῶν πολλῶν πολλῶν 
Dat. μεγάλοις μεγάλαις μεγάλοις πολλοῖς πολλαῖς πολλοῖς 
Acc. μεγάλους μεγάλας μεγάλα πολλούς πολλᾶς πολλά 


ΝΌΤΕ. --- In πολύς two stems are to be seen (8 73,1), one with 
and one without o: thus (1) πολυ- and (2) zodvo-, 1.6. πολρο, and 
by assimilation πολλο. 


127 a. Herodotus has πολλός, πολλή, πολλόν, declined like ἀγαθός. 
Homer also frequently uses this form, as well as other 3d declension 
forms (not Attic), from the stem πολυ-: thus gen. sing. πολέος, nom. plur. 
πολέες, gen. πολέων, dat. πολέεσσι (ὃ 76D), πολέσσι, and πολέσι, ace. πολέας. 


DECLENSION OF PARTICIPLES 15 


128. Declension of πρᾷος. --- πρᾷος mild (stem πρᾷο-) 
forms its feminine and usually most of its plural from a 
stem mpav- (ὃ 73,1). Thus, nom. sing. fem. mpaeia (for 
Ἔπραευ-ια ; οἷ. ταχεῖα, ὃ 125, note), nom. plur. masc. πρᾷοι 
or πραεῖς, gen. plur. masc. πρᾷων or (usually) πρᾶέων, ete. 


DECLENSION OF PARTICIPLES 


129. All participles of the middle voice, together with 
the participle of the future passive, are inflected like 
ἀγαθός (ὃ 117). 

All other participles, namely, the participles of the 
active voice, together with the participle of the aorist 
passive, belong to the first and third declensions (§ 122). 
The stems of all of these, with the exception of the perfect 
active participle, end in vt. Such participles are thus 
declined : 


βουλεύων planning. (stem Bovdevovt-) dv being. (stem ovt-) 


SINGULAR 


MASC. FEM. NEUT. MASC. FEM. NEUT. 
Nom. βουλεύων βουλεύουσα βουλεῦον ὧν οὖσα ov 
θη. βουλεύοντος βουλευούσης βουλεύοντος ὄντος οὔσης ὄντος 
Dat. βουλεύοντι βουλευούσῃη βουλεύοντι ὄντι οὔσῃ ὀντι 
Acc. βουλεύοντα βουλεύουσαν βουλεῦον ὄντα οὖσαν ov 
Voc. βουλεύων βουλεύουσα βουλεῦον ὧν οὖσα ὄν 

DUAL 
N.A.V. βουλεύοντε βουλευούσα βουλεύοντε ὄντε οὔσα ὄντε 
G.D. βουλευόντοιν βουλενούσαιν βουλευόντοιν ὄντοιν οὔσαιν ὄντοιν 
PLURAL 


N.V. βουλεύοντες βουλεύουσαι βουλεύοντα ὄντες οὖσαι ὄντα 
θη. βουλευόντων βουλευουσῶν βουλευόντων ὄντων οὐσῶν ὄντων 
Dat. βουλεύουσι βουλευούσαις βουλεύουσι: οὖσι οὔσαις οὖσι 
Acc. βουλεύοντας βουλευούσας βουλεύοντα ὄντας οὔσας ὄντα 


76 DECLENSION OF PARTICIPLES 


διδούς giving (διδοντ-) δεικνύς showing (δεικνυντ-) 
SINGULAR 
MASC. FEM. NEUT. MASC. FEM. NEUT. 
Nom. διδούς διδοῦσα διδόν δεικνῦς δεικνῦσα δεικνύν 
Gen. διδόντος διδούσης διδόντος δεικνύντος δεικνύσης δεικνύντος 
Dat. διδόντι διδούσῃ διδόντι δεικνύντι δεικνύσῃ δεικνύντι 
Ace. διδόντα διδοῦσαν διδόν δεικνύντα δεικνῦσαν δεικνύν 
Voc. διδούς διδοῦσα διδόν δεικνύς δεικνῦσα δεικνύν 
DUAL 
N.A.V. διδόντε διδούσα διδόντε δεικνύντε δεικνύσα δεικνύντε 


G.D. διδόντοιν διδούσαιν διδόντοιν δεικνύντοιν δεικνῦσαιν δεικνύντοιν 


PLURAL 

ΝΥ, διδόντες διδοῦσαι διδόντα δεικνύντες δεικνῦσαι δεινύντα 
Gen. διδόντων διδουσῶν διδόντων δεικνύντων δεικνυσῶν δεικνύντων 
Dat. διδοῦσι διδούσαις διδοῦσι δεικνῦσι δεικνῦσαις δεικνῦσι 
Ace. διδόντας διδούσας διδόντα δεικνύντας δεικνύσας δεικνύντα 

Avoas having loosed (λυσαντ-) λυθείς loosed (λυθεντ-) 

SINGULAR 

MASC. FEM. NEUT. MASC. FEM. NEUT. 
Nom. λύσας λύσασα λῦσαν λυθείς λυθεῖσα λυθβθέν 
Gen. λύσαντος λυσάσης λύσαντος λυθέντος λυθείσης λυθέντος 
Dat. λύσαντι λυσάσῃ λύσαντι λυθέντι λυθείσῃ λλυθέντι 
Ace. λύσαντα λύσαᾶσαν λῦσαν λυθέντα λυθεῖσαν λυθέν͵ 
Voc. λῦσας λύσασα λῦσαν λυθείς λυθεῖσα λυθέν 

DUAL 

N.A.V. λύσαντε λυσάᾶσα λύσαντε λυθέντε λυθείσα λυθέντε 


G.D. λυσάντοιν λυσᾶσαιν λυσάντοιν λυθέντοιν λυθείσαιν λυθέντοιν 


PLURAL 
ΝΥ. λύσαντες. λύσᾶασαι λύσαντα λυθέντες λυθεῖσαι λυθέντα 
Gen. λυσάντων λυσασῶν λυσάντων λυθέντων λυθεισῶν λυθέντων 
Dat. λύσᾶσι λυῦυσᾶσαις λύσᾶσι λυθεῖσι λυθείσαις λυθεῖσι 
Ace. λύσαντας λυσάσας λύσαντα λυθέντας λυθείσας λυθέντα 


So also are declined παιδεύων educating (like βουλεύων). 

λιπών (2d aor.) having left Cike ov), ἑκών willing (like ov), 
΄ = . . ay = e Zz . . 

maoevoas having educated (like λύσας), ἱστᾶς erecting (like 


DECLENSION OF PARTICIPLES { 


λύσας). παιδευθείς educated (ike λυθείς). τιθείς putting (like 
λυθείς). 

1. Observe that all stems in -ovt-, except those οἵ -μι 
verbs (§ 170), form their nominative singular masculine 
without -s, according to § 96,1. All other stems in -ντ- 
form their nominative by adding -s. 

2. Observe that the accent of the neuter singular fol- 
lows that of the masculine (βουλεῦον, unlike εὔδαιμον, 
§ 120, 1). 

3. Observe that participles of one syllable keep their 
written accent on the first syllable in the genitive and 
dative, contrary to § 100. 

4. Observe that the vocative singular is like the nomi- 
native (cf. § 98, 1). 


130. The present participle of verbs in -ὦ (-da, -éw, and 
-dw) and the future participle of liquid verbs (δ 213) are 
contracted. ‘They are declined as follows: 


τιμῶν honoring (contracted from tizawv) 


SINGULAR 
MASC. FEM. NEUT. 
Nom. τιμῶν (-dwv) τιμῶσα (-dovoa)  Tipav (-ἀον) 
Gen. tipavtos (-ἄοντος) τιμώσης (-αούσης) τιμῶντος (-dovTos) 
Dat. tipavte (-άοντι) τιμώσῃ (-aovon)  Tipavte (-άοντι) 
Ace. tipavta (-ἄοντα)͵ τιμῶσαν (-ἄουσαν) Tipav (-aov) 
Voc. τῖμῶν (-dwv) τιμῶσα (-ἀουσα) τιμῶν (-dov) 
DUAL 
N.A.V. ripavte (-ἄοντε) τιμώσᾶ (-aovoa)  Tipavte (-dovTe) 


G.D.  tipdvtow (-advrow) tipdca (-αούσαιν) τιμώντοιν (-αόντοιν) 


PLURAL 
ΝΙΝ. τιμῶντες (-covres) τἴμῶσαι (-ἄουσαι) Tipevta (-άοντα) 
Gen. τἴμώντων (-αόντων) τῖμωσῶν (-αουσῶν) τἴμώντων (-αόντων) 
Dat. τιμῶσι (-ἄουσι) τῖμώσαις (-αούσαις) τιμῶσι (-ἀουσι) 
Acc. τἴμῶντας (-ἄοντας) τιμώσας (-αούσας) τιμῶντα (-άοντα) 


78 DECLENSION OF PARTICIPLES 


φιλῶν loving (contracted from φιλέων) 


SINGULAR 
MASC. FEM. NEUT. 
Nom. φιλῶν (-€wv) φιλοῦσα (-covta) φιλοῦν (-cov) 
Gen. ἀφιλοῦντος (-<ovTos) φιλούσης (-εούσης) φιλοῦντος (-<ovTos) 
Dat. φιλοῦντι (-έοντι) φιλούσῃ (-εούὔσῃ) φιλοῦντι (-έοντι) 
Acc. φιλοῦντα (-covra) φιλοῦσαν (-ἔουσαν) φιλοῦν (ς-έον) 
Voc. φιλῶν (-€wv) φιλοῦσα (-covca) φιλοῦν  (-€ov) 
DUAL 
N.A.V. φιλοῦντε (-ovTe) φιλούσα (-εοὐὔσα) φιλοῦντε (-€ovTe) 


G.D. φιλούντοιν (-eovrow) φιλούσαιν (-εούσαιν) φιλούντοιν (-εόντοιν) 


PLURAL 


ΝΙΝ. φιλοῦντες (-€ovTes) 
Gen. φιλούντων (-ἐοντων) 


Dat. φιλοῦσι 


Acc. φιλοῦντας (-ἔοντας) 
1. The present participle of δηλῶ (-ὁω), δηλῶν (for δη- 
Aowy), is inflected exactly like φιλῶν. 


forms do not 


131. Perfect Active Participles.— The stem of the perfect 
active participle ends in ot or oo (ὃ 73, 1). 


(-€ovor) 


occur. 


sion is as follows: 
λελυκώς having loosed (stem λελυκοτ-,λελυκοσ-) 


φιλοῦσαι (-έουσαι) 
φιλουσῶν (-εουσῶν) 
φιλούσαις (-εούσαις) 
φιλούσας (-εούσας) 


SINGULAR 
MASC. FEM. 
Nom. λελυκώς λελυκυῖα 
Gen λελυκότος λελυκυίας 
Dat. λελυκότι λελυκυίᾳ 
Ace λελυκότα λελυκυῖαν 
Voe λελυκώς λελυκυῖα 
DUAL 
N.A.V. λελυκότε λελυκυία 
G.D λελυκότοιν λελυκνίαιν 
PLURAL 

N.V λελυκότες λελυκυῖαι 
Gen λελυκότων λελυκυιῶν 
Dat. λελυκόσι λελυκυίαις 
Acc λελυκότας λελυκυίας 


φιλοῦντα (-έοντα) 
φιλούντων (-εόντων) 
φιλοῦσι 
φιλοῦντα (-έοντα) 


The uncontracted 


The declen- 


NEUT. 
λελυκός 
λελυκότος 
λελυκότι 
λελυκός 
λελυκός 


λελυκότε 
λελυκότοιν 


λελυκότα 
λελυκότων 
λελυκόσι 
λελυκότα 


(-ἐουσι) 


COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES 19 


So also are inflected πεπαιδευκώς, -κυῖα, -κός having 
educated; ἑστώς, ἑστῶσα, ἑστός standing (stem ἑστωτ- 
(éotwo-), contracted from ἑσταοτ-). 

Nore. — The neuter of ἑστώς is usually written ἑστός, probably to 


distinguish it from the masculine, since otherwise both would be 
ἑστώς. 


COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES 


132. Comparison by -tepos, -tatos.— Most adjectives 
form the comparative degree by adding -rvepos, -τερᾶ, -Tepov 
(declined like μακρός, § 117) to the masculine stem of the 
positive. The superlative is formed by adding -τατος, 
-ratn, -tatov (declined like ἀγαθός, ὃ 117) to the same 
stem. Thus: 


POSITIVE 
κοῦφος light 
πικρός bitter 
ὀξύς ~— sharp 
μέλας black 
σαφής clear 


CoMPARATIVE 
κουφό-τερος 
πικρό-τερος 
ὀξύ-τερος 
μελάν-τερος 
σαφέσ-τερος 


SUPERLATIVE 
/ 
κουφό-τατος 
πικροό-τατος 
ὦ ΄ 
ὀξύ-τατος 
Ul 

μελᾶάν-τατος 


/ 
σαφέσ-τατος 


χαρίεις pleasing χαριέσ-τερος (for *ya- χαριέσ-τατος 

ρίετ-τερος see § 20 

and ὃ 125, note 1) 

1. Stems in -o- lengthen the final o of the stem unless 
the preceding syllable is long (either by nature or posi- 
tion, 88 52,53). Thus: 


POSITIVE CoMPARATIVE SUPERLATIVE 
΄ Φ , , 
σοφὸς wise σοφώ-τερος σοφώ-τατος 
ἄξιος worthy ἀξιώ-τερος ἀξιώ-τατος 


2. A few words usually drop the final o of the stem: 
thus γεραιός old, comparative γεραίτερος ; φίλος friendly, 
comparative φίλτερος, superlative φίλτατος. 


8ὃ0 COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES 


133. Adjectives in τῶν and -ous (-oos) are compared as if 
their stems ended in ec: thus σώφρων discreet, compara- 
tive σωφρονέσ-τερος,. etc.; εὔνους well disposed, comparative 
evvovaTepos, etc. (for Ἐεύνοεσ-τερος). 


134. Comparison by -twv, -ιἰστος. — A few adjectives 
are compared by adding to the root of the positive the 
endings -ίων, -iov to form the comparative, and -ἰστος, 
-taTn, τἰστον to form the superlative. The superlative is 
declined like ἀγαθός (ὃ 117); for the declension of the 
comparative see $121. Thus: 


ῬΟΒΙΤΙΝῈ COMPARATIVE SUPERLATIVE 

no-v-s pleasant (cf. ἥδομαι ἡδίων ἥδιστος 
am pleased) 

Tax-v-s swift (cf. τάχ-ος θάττων (for ἔταχ-ίων, τάχοιστος 
swiftness) §§ 39, 1 and 41) 

pey-a-s great (cf. μέγ-εθος μείζων (for ἔμεγ-των, μέγιστος 
greatness) § 39, 2) 

€x6-po-s hostile(cf. ἔχθος “Ὁ ἐχθιίων ἔχθειστος 
hatred) 

αἰσχ-ρό-ς shameful (cf. αἶσχος αἰσχίων αἴσχ-ιστος 
shame ) 


135. Comparison by μᾶλλον, μάλιστα. --- Adjectives are 
sometimes compared by means of the adverbs μᾶλλον more 
and μάλιστα most. Thus, φίλος friendly, μᾶλλον φίλος 
more friendly, μάλιστα φίλος most friendly. 


134 a. In Epic poetry the comparative ending -wy has short «. 

b. In poetry the forms in -wy, -.cros occur much more frequently than 
in prose. Homer has several comparatives and superlatives that are not 
usual in Attic: thus κύδιστος most glorious, φέρτερος more excellent, 
ὁπλότερος younger ; all these will be found in the lexicon. 


ADVERBS 81 


136. Irregular Comparison. — The following list contains 
the most important adjectives of irregular comparison : 


POSITIVE 


ἀγαθός good 


κακός bad 


μῖκρός small 


πολύς much, 
many 

καλός beautiful 

ce 

ῥᾷδιος easy 

ἀλγεινός painful 


137. Form of Adverbs. 
are regularly derived from adjectives. 


CoMPARATIVE 


> , 
ἀμείνων 


βελτίων 

κρείττων 

λῴων 

κακίων 

χείρων (deterior) 

ἥττων (inferior) 

μικρότερος 

μείων 

ἐλάττων (ἴον *eXay- 
ιων, § 39,1) 

πλείων. πλέων (see 
δ 21) 

καλλίων 

ie 


ἀλγίων 


SUPERLATIVE 


ἄριστος (cf. ἀρ-ετή virtue) 
βέλτιστος 

κράτιστος (cf. κράτ-ος strength) 
λῴστος 

κάκιστος 

χείριστος 

ἥκιστα adv. least of all 


μικρότατος 

ἐλάχιστος 

πλεῖστος 

κάλλιστος (cf. kaAA-os beauty) 


ῥᾷστος 


ἄλγιστος (cf. ἄλγ-ος pain) 


ADVERBS 


Most Adverbs end in -as, and 


Their form is in 


all respects like the genitive plural, except that the last 
letter is s instead of ν. 
Their form can always be determined by substituting s 
for the final v of the genitive plural. 
Thus, σοφῶς wisely (σοφός wise, gen. plur. σοφῶν). 
πάντως wholly (πᾶς whole, gen. plur. πάντων), ταχέως 


quickly (ταχύς quick, gen. plur. ταχέων). σαφῶς clearly 
(σαφής clear, gen. plur. contracted (ὃ 120) σαφῶν). 


Note. — The adverb corresponding to ἀγαθός good is εὖ well. 


BABBITT’S GR. GRAM. — 6 


ee 


82 ADVERBS 


1. Besides the regularly formed adverbs many nouns 
(some of them obsolete) and some pronominal stems are 
used in certain cases adverbially. 

Thus, πολύ much (ὃ 336), σπουδῇ earnestly (§ 389), 
οἴκοι at home (see ὃ 76, note), πρῴ early, ἀμαχεί without 
a battle, ποῖ whither, ποῦ where (οἷ. ὃ 858), οὐδαμοῦ 
nowhere (cf. § 358). 

2. Certain-local endings of the nature of case-endings 
(ξ 76) are used to form adverbs of place. These are: -@%, 
Place Where, as in ἄλλο-θι elsewhere ; -Oev, Place Whence, 
as in olxo-Oev from home, πάντο-θεν from all sides; -6e, 
Place Whither, as in οἴκα-δε homeward, ᾿Αθήναζε (for 
᾿Αθήνας-δε) toward Athens. 


138. Comparison of Adverbs. — Adverbs in -ws employ 
for their comparative the neuter singular of the compara- 
tive of their adjective ; for their superlative they employ 
the neuter plural of the superlative. 

Thus, σοφῶς wisely, σοφώτερον more wisely, σοφώτατα 
most wisely; ῥᾳδίως easily, ῥᾷον more easily, ῥᾷστα most 
easily. 

1. Adverbs in -o have the comparative and superlative 
ending in τῷ. Thus, ἄνω above, ἀνωτέρω higher, ἀνωτάτω 
highest. 

2. The adverb μάλα very has for its comparative μᾶλλον 
(for μάλε-ιον, § 39,3), and for its superlative μάλιστα. 


137, 2a. The local endings are naturally much more frequent in 
Homer: thus οἴκοθι at home, οὐρανόθεν from heaven, ἡμετερόνδε to our 
(house), πόλινδε to the city, ete. 


PRONOUNS 83 


PRONOUNS 


139. The Personal Pronouns. — The pronouns of the 
first, second, and third person are thus declined : 


First PERSON SEcOND PERSON Turrp PERSON 


SINGULAR 


Nom. ἐγώ 1 σύ you him, her, it 
Gen. ἐμοῦ ; pou(enclitic) σοῦ; sov(enclitic) ov; ov (enclitic) 
Dat. ἐμοί ; μοι (enclitic) σοί; co(enclitic) οἷ; ot (enclitic) 
Acc. ἐμέ; pe (enclitic) σέ; σε (enclitic) ἕ; € (enclitic) 
Voe. ov 

DUAL 
N.A.(V.) vo we two σφώ you two 
G.D. νῷν σφῷν 

PLURAL 
Nom. ἡμεῖς we ὑμεῖς you σφεῖς they 
Gen. ἡμῶν ὑμῶν σφῶν 
Dat. ἡμῖν ὑμῖν σφίσι 
Ace. ἡμᾶς ὑμᾶς σφᾶς 
Voc. ὑμεῖς 


Notr.— The stems of the pronoun of the first person are (ἐ)με- 
(the nominative ἐγώ being of different formation), vw-, and ἥμε- 
(from dppe-); of the second person ov- (for τυ-), σε (for ἔτρε-) σφω-, 
and vpe- (from vppe-); of the third person € (originally ἔσρε- ὃ 36a), 
ἕε- (for *oece-), and ode. From the shorter stem rv- of the second 
-person comes only the nominative ov (cf. πολύς, § 127, note). From 
the longer form of the stem of the third person ἐε- (*ce¢e-) comes the 
Homeric form ἕέ, acc. 


1. The enclitic (δ 70) forms are used when there is no 
emphasis on the pronoun. Thus, δοκεῖ μοι it seems (to me). 
But when the pronoun is emphatic the forms with written 
accent (and in the first person the longer forms ἐμοῦ, etc.) 
are employed: thus εὐπτὲ καὶ ἐμοί tell even me. This is 
regularly the case when prepositions are used with 


84 PRONOUNS 


the pronouns: thus παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ from beside me, περὶ σοῦ 
about you. 

2. The pronoun of the third person οὗ, oi, ἕ, when used 
as a direct reflexive (§ 470), is never enclitic. 


139 a. Homer has the following forms of the personal pronouns: 


SINGULAR 
Nom. ἐγώ, ἐγών σύ, τύνη 
ἐμεῖο, ἐμέο, ἐμεῦ, σεῖο, σέο, σεῦ. εἶο, ἕο, €o (encl.), 
Gen. | peu (encl.), ἐμέθεν σευ (encl.), σέθεν ev, eb (encl.), 
ἕθεν, ἐθέν (encl.) 
Dat. ἐμοί, μοι (encl.) gol, τοι (encl.), τεΐν ἑοῖ, of, οἱ (encl.) 
Acc. ἐμέ, μὲ (encl.) σέ, σε (encl.) ἑέ, ἕ, μιν (encl.) 
DUAL 
N.A. νῶϊ, vd σφῶϊ, σφώ σφωέ (encl.) 
α.). νῶϊν σφῶϊν, σφῷν (662) σῴφωΐν (encl.) 
PLURAL 
Nom. ἡμεῖς, ἄμμες ὑμεῖς, ὕμμες 
Gen. (ἡμείων, ἡμέων ὑμείων, ὑμέων σφείων, σφέων, 
U σφεών (encl.), σφῶν 
Dat. oe ἄμμι(ν) ὑμῖν, ὕμμι(υ) σφίσι(ν), σφισί(ν) (encl.), 
σφιν (encl.) 
ΚΕ: ae ἄμμε ὑμέας, ὕμμε σφέας, σφεάς (encl.), 
σφέ (encl.) 


The fcrms of the plural in ἀμμ- and ὑμμ- are Aeolic in origin. 


b. In Herodotus the personal pronouns have the following inflection: 


SINGULAR 
Nom. ἐγώ σύ 
Gen. ἐμέο, ἐμεῦ, μευ (encl.) σέο, σεῦ, cev (encl.) εὖ (encl.) 
Dat. ἐμοί, μοι (encl.) σοί, τοι (encl.) οἱ (encl.) 
Acc. ἐμέ, με (encl.) σέ, σε (encl.) ἑ (encl.), μὲν (encl.) 
PLURAL 
Nom. ἡμεῖς ὑμεῖς σφεῖς 
Gen. ἡμέων ὑμέων σφέων, σῴφεων (encl.) 
Dat. ἡμῖν ὑμῖν σφίσι, σφισι (encl.) 
Ἄς, ae ὑμέας σφέας. σφεας (encl.), 
neut, σῴεα (encl.) 


PRONOUNS 85 


Nore 1.— The Tragedians for the accusative of the third personal 


pronoun use vy (encl.) and ode (encl.) for all genders both singular 
and plural. 

Note 2.— The genitive, dative, and accusative plural of the first 
and second persons sometimes throw their written accent to the first 
syllable (often shortening at the same time the final syllable): thus 
ἥμων, ἧμιν, ὗμας. 


140. The Intensive Pronoun avtés.— The pronoun αὐτός 
self, same is thus inflected : 


SINGULAR 

MASC. FEM. NEUT. 
Nom. αὐτός αὐτή αὐτό 
Gen. αὐτοῦ αὐτῆς αὐτοῦ 
Dat. αὐτῷ αὐτῇ αὐτῷ 
Acc. αὐτόν αὐτήν αὐτό 

DUAL 
ΝΑ. αὐτώ αὐτά αὐτώ 
G.D. αὐτοῖν αὐταῖν αὐτοῖν 
PLURAL 

Nom. αὐτοί αὐταί αὐτά 
Gen. αὐτῶν αὐτῶν αὐτῶν 
Dat. αὐτοῖς αὐταῖς αὐτοῖς 
Ace. αὐτούς αὐτάς αὐτά 


Like αὐτός is inflected also ἄλλος. ἄλλη, ἄλλο other. 
1. In Attic the oblique cases of αὐτός are usually employed 
instead of the pronoun of the third person οὗ, oi, & ete. 


141. Reflexive Pronouns. — The reflexive pronouns are 
formed from the stems of the personal pronouns com- 
pounded with αὐτός. From their meaning they can have 
no nominative case. The third person has also a neuter. 
In the plural both stems are declined together, yet the 


140 a. Herodotus has αὐτέων for the genitive plural feminine of αὐτός 
(cf. ὃ 84a). For the crasis wirds, see § 5a. 


86 PRONOUNS 


third person plural has also the compound form. They 
are thus declined : 


SINGULAR 
myself. thyself. himself, herself, itself. 
Gen. ἐμαυτοῦ, -ῆς σεαυτοῦ, -ἧς ἑαυτοῦ, -ῆς, -οῦ 
Dat. ἐμαυτῷ, - σεαυτῷ, -ἢ ἑαυτῷ, -ἢ, τῷ 
Acc. ἐμαυτόν, -ἦν σεαντόν, -ἦν ἑαυτόν, -ἦν, -ό 
PLURAL 
ourselves. yourselves. themselves. 
Gen. ἡμῶν αὐτῶν ὑμῶν αὐτῶν ἑαυτῶν 
or σφῶν αὐτῶν 
Dat. ἡμῖν αὐτοῖς, -αἷς ὑμῖν αὐτοῖς, -ats ἑαυτοῖς, -αἷς, -ots 
or σφίσιν αὐτοῖς, -ais 
Acc. ἡμᾶς αὐτούς, -as ὑμᾶς αὐτούς, -ἄς ἑαυτούς, -as, -ά 
Ε or σφᾶς αὐτούς, -as 


1. σεαυτοῦ and ἑαυτοῦ are often contracted: σαυτοῦ, 
σαυτῆς ; αὑτοῦ, αὑτῆς, etc. 


142. Reciprocal Pronoun. — The reciprogal pronoun, 


meaning one another, from its meaning has no singular 


number, and no nominative or vocative case. It is thus 


declined : : 
Stem ἀλληλο- (for ζἀλλ-αλλο-) 


DUAL 
MASC. FEM. NEUT. 
G.D. ἀλλήλοιν ἀλλήλαιν ἀλλήλοιν 
NCES ἀλλήλω λ λα ἀλλήλω 
PLURAL 
Gen. ἀλλήλων ἀλλήλων ἀλλήλων 
Dat. ἀλλήνοῖϊς ἀλλήλαις ἀλλήλοις 


Ace. ἀλλήλους ἀλλήλας ἄλληλα 


141 a. In Homer the personal pronouns alone are sometimes used 
reflexively ; often the reflexive meaning is made more clear by the addi- 
tion of αὐτός, but the two pronouns have not yet combined, as in Attic, 
into one word. Thus, Homer has ἐμέθεν αὐτῆς myself (gen. fem.), of αὐτῷ 
himself (dat.), αὐτὸν μιν himself (acc.), ete. 


PRONOUNS 87 


143. Possessive Pronouns. — The possessive pronouns 
are formed from the stems of the personal pronouns. 
They are: 


ἐμός ἐμή ἐμόν my, mine. ἡμέτερος -ἃ τον OUT, ours. 
σός σή σόν thy, thine. ὑμέτερος -ἃ -ον your, yours. 
ὅς Ἶ ὃν _ his (her, its) own. σῴφέτερος -a -ον their own. 


1. The possessive os is not used in Attic prose, but its 
place is taken by the genitive of αὐτός (δὲ 477-8). 

144. Demonstrative Pronouns. — The definite article 
0, 7, τό, is thus inflected : 


Stems το- and 6 (for σο-, § 36) 


SINGULAR 


MASC. FEM. NEUT. 
Nom. 6 ἣ τό 
Gen. τοῦ τῆς τοῦ 
Dat. τῷ τῇ τῷ 
Acc. τόν τήν τό 
DUAL 
N.A. τώ τώ τώ 
G.D. τοῖν τοῖν τοῖν 
PLURAL 
Nom. οἱ ai τά 
“θη. τῶν τῶν τῶν 
Dat. τοῖς ταῖς τοῖς 
Acc. TOUS Tas τά 


143 a. Beside the forms given above (ὃ 143) Homer has also τεός 
(Latin tuus) thy, éds his (her, its), duds our, ὑμός your, σφός their; also, 
from the dual stems vw-, σῴφω-, vwitepos belonging to us two, and σφωΐτερος 
belonging to you two. 

The possessive ὅς, é6s,in Homer appears sometimes to be used without 
reference to the third person, in the sense of own: thus ἧς γαίης (my) own 
land (gen.), δώμασι οἷσι (your) own house (dat.). 

144 a. Homer almost always uses ὁ, 7, τό, as a demonstrative pronoun. 

Beside the forms given above (8 144) Homer has also nom. sing. masce. 
és (found also in Attic in the phrases καὶ ὃς ἔφη and he said. and ἢ δ᾽ ὅς 


88 PRONOUNS 


145. The demonstrative pronouns ὅδε, ἥδε, τόδε this, and 
οὗτος, αὕτη, τοῦτο this, that, are thus declined : 


SINGULAR 

MASC. FEM. NEUT. MASC. FEM. NEUT. 
Nom. ὅδε ἧδε τόδε οὗτος αὕτη τοῦτο 
Gen. τοῦδε τῆσδε τοῦδε τούτου ταύτης τούτου 
Dat. τῷδε τῇδε τῷδε τούτῳ ταύτῃ τούτῳ 
Acc. τόνδε τήνδε τόδε τοῦτον ταύτην τοῦτο 

DUAL 
N.A. τώδε τώδε τώδε τούτω τούτω τούτω 
(.1). τοῖνδε τοῖνδε τοῖνδε τούτοιν τούτοιν τούτοιν 
PLURAL 

Nom. οἵδε aide τάδε οὗτοι αὗται ταῦτα 
Gen. τῶνδε τῶνδε τῶνδε τούτων τούτων τούτων 
Dat. τοῖσδε ταῖσδε τοῖσδε τούτοις ταύταις τούτοις 
Acc. τούσδε τᾶἄσδε τάδε τούτους ταύτας ταῦτα 


1. Observe that the use of ov or av in οὗτος depends 
on the character of the last syllable, ov being used to 
correspond to an o-sound, and av to correspond to an 
a (7 )-sound. 


146. ’Exeivos, ἐκείνη, ἐκεῖνο that, is declined like αὐτὸς 
(§ 140). 


147. The demonstrative pronouns are sometimes made 


Z 


more emphatic by adding -¢: thus οὑτοσί, tovrovt. In 


said he), gen. sing. masc. and neut. τοῖο (δ 90a), gen. and dat. dual rotiy 
(ἢ 90 b), nom. plur. mase. τοί, nom. plur. fem. ταί, gen. plur. fem. raw: 
(ὃ 84 4). dat. plur. masce. τοῖσι (δ 90 0), dat. plur. fem. τῇσι or τῇς (ὃ 84 b). 

144 Ὁ. Herodotus also uses ὁ, 7, τό, as a demonstrative pronoun, but not 
so frequently as Homer does. In the dative plural he has τοῖσι and τῇσι. 

145 a. For the dative plural of ὅδε Homer sometimes has τοίσδεσι or 
τοίσδεσσι, Herodotus has τοισίδε. 

146 a. For ἐκεῖνος Homer and other poets often haye κεῖνος ; Herodotus 
also uses both forms. 


PRONOUNS 89 


such case a preceding short vowel is dropped: thus ὁδί, 
ταυτί. 


148. Interrogative and Indefinite Pronouns. — The inter- 
rogative pronoun is τίς, τί who? what? ‘The indefinite 
Ce \ \ ype 1) r 
pronoun is tls, τὶ, enclitic (8 70), some, any. They are 

thus declined : 


INTERROGATIVE INDEFINITE 
SINGULAR 


MASC. & FEM. NEUT. MASC.& FEM. NEUT. 
Nom. tis τί τὶς τὶ 
Gen. τίνος, τοῦ τίνος, τοῦ τινός, τοῦ τινός, τοῦ 
Dat. τίνι, τῷ τίνι, τῷ τινί, τῷ τινί, τῷ 
Ace. τίνα τί τινά τὶ 

DUAL 
N.A. tive tive τινέ τινέ 
G.D. τίνοιν τίνοιν ; τινοῖν τινοῖν 
PLURAL 

Nom. tives τίνα τινές τινά 
Gen. τίνων τίνων τινῶν τινῶν 
Dat. τίσι τίσι τισί τισί 
Ace. τίνας τίνα τινάς τινά 


1. The acute accent of the interrogative, τίς, τί, never 
changes to the grave (§ 67). 


Nore 1.—The form ἄττα is sometimes used for the indefinite τινά. 

Note 2.—Aetya. Another indefinite pronoun, used in familiar 
speech, is δεῖνα “ Mr. what’s his name,” always with the article : ὁ (77,70) 
δεῖνα. Sometimes it is not declined, but when declined it is inflected 
as follows: ὃ δεῖνα, τοῦ δεῖνος, τῷ δεῖνι, τὸν δεῖνα, οἱ δεῖνες, τῶν δείνων, 
τοὺς δείνους. 


148 a. Of the interrogative and indefinite pronouns Homer and Herod- 
otus have the following additional forms: gen. sing. τέο, τεῦ, Teo, τευ; 
dat. sing. τέῳ, τεῳ. gen. plur. τέων, τεῶν, dat. plur. τέοισι, neut. plur. 
(Homer) ἄσσα (cf. ὃ 148 note 1 and ὃ 22). 


00 PRONOUNS 


149. Relative Pronouns. — The relative pronoun ὅς, 7), ὅ 
who, which, is thus inflected : 


SINGULAR 

MASC FEM. NEUT 
Nom. ὅς ἥ ὅ 
Gen. οὗ ἧς οὗ 
Dat. ᾧ n ® 
Acc. ὅν ἥν ὅ 

DUAL 
N.A. o @ ὦ 
G.D οἷν οἷν οἷν 
PLURAL 

Nom. οἵ ai a 
Gen. ὧν ὧν ὧν 
Dat. ois ais ois 
Ace. οὕς as & 


150. The indefinite relative pronoun, ὅστις, ἥτις, 6 τι 
(sometimes written 6, 71) whoever, whichever, is made by 
joining ὅς and tis, both parts being declined. 


149 a. Beside the forms given above (§ 149) Homer has also gen. sing. 
masc. and neut. ὅο (ὃ 90 a), often wrongly written dov, and fem. ἕης (!). 

In Homer the demonstrative pronoun, ὁ, ἡ, τό (δ 144 a), is often used 
as a relative referring to a definite antecedent (cf. English that). When 
so used the forms with r- (τοί, ταί, ὃ 144 a) are employed in the nomina- 
tive plural. 

b. Herodotus has from the relative the forms ὅς, 7, οἵ, and αἵ. For 
all other forms he employs the demonstrative [6, ἡ] τό, τοῦ, τῆς, ete. (cf. 
§ 149 a), except after certain prepositions (mostly prepositions of two 
syllables, of which the last syllable may suffer elision): thus μετ᾽ ἧς with 
whom, am ὧν from which (δ 44, 4a). 

150 a. Homer has several forms of the indefinite relative in which the 
stem ὁ- is not declined: thus sing. nom. ὅτις, neut. ὅττι, gen. ὅττεο, ὅττευ, 
and ὅτευ, dat. ὅτεῳ, acc. ὅτινα, neut. ὅττι; plur. gen. ὅτεων, dat. ὁτέοισι, 
acc. ὅτινας. For the neuter plural he uses ἅσσα, nom. and ace. 

b. Herodotus has gen. sing. ὅτευ, dat. sing. ὅτεῳ, gen. plur. ὅτεων, 
dat. plur. ὁτέοισι, neut. plur. nom. and ace. ἅσσα. 


PRONOUNS 91 


SINGULAR 
MASC. FEM. NEUT. 
uo oo a 
Nom. ὅστις ἥτις ὅ τι 
Gen. οὕτινος, ὅτου ἥστινος οὕτινος, ὅτου 
Dat. ᾧτινι, ὅτῳ ἧτινι ᾧτινι, ὅτῳ 
Ace. ὅντινα ἥντινα ὅ τι 
DUAL 
N.A. OTLVE ὧτινε ὧτινε 
G.D. οἵντινοιν οἵντινοιν οἵντινοιν 
PLURAL 
Nom. οἵτινες αἵτινες ἅτινα 
Gen. ὧντινων ὅτων ὧντινων ὧντινων ὅτων 
᾽ ᾽ 
Dat. οἴστισι, OTOLS αἴστισι οἵστισι, ὅτοις 
ε a 
Ace. οὕστινας ἅστινας ἅτινα 


1. The shorter forms ὅτου, ὅτῳ are more common than 
οὗτινος, ᾧτινι. 


Nore. — The indefinite τὶς may be added also to other relatives to 
make them more indefinite: thus ὁποῖός tus of whatsoever kind. 


151. Correlation of Pronouns. —In Greek certain pro- 
nominal adjectives and adverbs show a regular correspon- 
dence in form and meaning. Thus the interrogative form 
begins with 7zro-, the indefinite has the same form but is 
enclitic, the demonstrative has to-, and the relative o- or 
(general relative) ovo-. This may best be seen from the 
following list: 


151 a. Homer often doubles the π᾿ of the general relatives: thus ὁπποῖος, 
ὁππότε, etc. (Attic ὁποῖος, ὁπότε). 

b. Herodotus has κ instead of π at the beginning of interrogative and 
indefinite pronominal adjectives and adverbs: thus kécos, κοῖος, κοῦ, κόθεν, 
κῶς, κοτέ, etc. (Attic πόσος, ποῖος, etc.); so also in the general relatives he 
has x for 7: thus ὁκόσος, ὁκοῖος, ὅκου. ὁκόθεν, ὅκως, etc. (Attic ὁπόσος, ὁποῖος; 
etc.). 


02 PRONOUNS 


INTERROGATIVE INDEFINITE DEMONSTRATIVE RELATIVE 
(enclitic) 
ADJECTIVES 
πόσος how ποσός of some (τόσος) ) . ὅσος Ὶ as great 
5 , ε ΄ i 
great. size. τοσόσδε great. ὁπόσος ἡ as. 
τοσοῦτος 
ποῖος of what ποιός of some (τοῖος) aes οἷος | of such 
kind. kind. τοιόσδε ἐδ ὁποῖος Ϊ kind as. 
τοιοῦτος 
πηλίκος of τηλίκος | of this ἡλίκος } of such 
what age. τηλικόσδε Fine ὁπηλίκος ) age as. 
τηλικοῦτος 
ADVERBS 
mov where. ποῦ somewhere. ov, ὅπου where. 
πόθεν whence. ποθέν from [τόθεν (poetic) ὅθεν, ὁπόθεν 
some place. thence] whence. 
ποῖ whither. ποῖ to some οἱ, ὅποι whither. 
place. 
/ ΄ . ὧν, i ε ΄ὔ 
πότε when. ποτέ sometime. τότε then. OTE, ὁπότε when. 
πηνίκα at (τηνίκα) : ἡνίκα, ὁπηνίκα, αἱ 
i Ἶ ἼΤΩ at thigcis Tr: 
what time. τηνικάδε . which time. 
i time. 
τηνικαῦτα 
πῇ which way. πῇ someway. τῇτδε this way. 4, Orn which way. 
πῶς how. πῶς somehow. [rus (poetic) thus.] ὡς, ὅπως as. 


1. Observe that some correlative forms are lacking, 
having been supplanted by other words. Thus, ἐνθάδε or 
ἐνταῦθα is the usual word for here; ὧδε and οὕτως thus 
have crowded out the earlier (Epic and poetic) Tas. 


Nortr.— The indefinite relative pronouns, adjectives, and adverbs 
may be made more indefinite by adding οὖν, δή, or δή ποτε" thus 
ὅστις οὖν (or ὁστισοῦν), ὁστισ-δή-ποτε, OY even ὁστισ-δη-ποτ-οῦν who- 
so-ever. 


NUMERALS 95 


larly like adjectives in -os (ὃ 117). The cardinal num- 
bers from 1 to 4 are declined as follows : 


one two three four 
N. εἷς pla ἕν N.A. δύο N. τρεῖς τρία τέτταρες τέτταρα 
G. ἑνός μιᾶς ἑνός G.D. δυοῖν G. τριῶν τριῶν τεττάρων τεττάρων 
DD. ot eT sometimes D ἢ ’ , , 
. ei μιᾷ ἑν alee aged . τρισί τρισί τέτταρσι, τέτταρσι 
Α. ἕνα μίαν ἕν indeclinably = A. τρεῖς τρία τέτταρας τέτταρα 


1. Like εἷς are declined οὐδείς and μηδείς no one. These 
are sometimes declined also in the plural: thus οὐδένες, 
’ / 5 / > / 
οὐδένων, οὐδέσι, οὐδένας. 


156. Notation. — Observe that in notation the letters 
of the alphabet Cnecluding the three obsolete letters, 
$= Ff vau (ὃ 2a), G=9 koppa, and A sampi) are employed 
in order, the first nine for units, the second nine for tens, 
and the remaining nine for hundreds. For thousands the 
same characters are used again but with the stroke wnder 
the letter: thus avza’= 1481. 


Note.— The books of Homer are usually numbered by using the 
letters of the ordinary alphabet consecutively, the capitals being 
employed for the Iliad and the small letters for the Odyssey. Thus, 
K stands for Book 10 of the Iliad, A for Book 11 of the Odyssey. 


90 VERBS 


VERBS 


157. The verb distinguishes in its inflection Voice, 
Mode, Person, Number, and Tense. 

1. By its Voice it indicates whether the subject acts 
(active), acts for himself (middle), or is acted upon 
(passive). 

2. By its Mode it indicates the manner in which the 
action is thought of: for example, as a fact or as a 
possibility. 

3. By its Person it indicates whether its subject is the 
speaker, or some second person spoken to, or some third 
person or thing spoken of. 

4. By its Number it indicates how many persons or 
things are concerned in its action. 

5. By its Tense it indicates the time of the action. 


VOICE’ 


158. The Greek verb has three voices, Active, Middle, 
and Passive (see § 236). 

1. The passive voice has a separate form of inflection 
only in the aorist and future; elsewhere the middle form 
is used both for the middle and passive. 

2. Many verbs, from their meaning, are used only in 
the active. 

3. Deponent Verbs. — Likewise many verbs have only a 
middle (or passive) form. Such verbs are called Depo- 
nent. Those which have the middle form throughout 
are called Middle Deponents; those which have the 
passive form for the aorist (and future) are called Passive 
Deponents. 


MODE 97 


MODE 


159. Greek has four modes: the Indicative (the mode 
of fact), the Subjunctive and Optative (the modes of 
possibility), and the Imperative (the mode of command). 
These modes are called the Finite Modes. 

1. Beside the four finite modes are the Infinitive and Par- 
ticiple, which are properly verbal nouns (although some- 
times called modes). ‘The infinitive represents the action 
of the verb as a substantive: thus εἶναι to be, the act of 
being. The participle represents the action of the verb 
as an adjective: thus ὁ παρὼν καιρός the present occasion. 

2. To these must be added the Verbal Adjectives in -τὸς 
and -réos, of which the former denotes what has been or 
may be done (thus λυτός loosed or loosable), and the lat- 
ter, what needs doing (thus λυτέος needing to be loosed). 


160. Mode Suffix. — The subjunctive and the optative 
have a special mode suffix. The subjunctive has a long 
vowel -o- or -η- ; the optative has -t- or -ἰη-. 

1. The use of ὦ or ἡ is determined by the same rules 
as that of o and ε (§ 169). The mode sign -c- is regularly 
used in the singular active of -μὲ verbs and contract verbs ; 
elsewhere -i- is used. In the third plural of the optative 
-le- appears as the mode sign. 

Norr.—In the singular active of contract verbs -- very rarely is 
found as mode sign, while in classical Greek -1y- was probably never 
used in ‘the optative dual or plural of any verbs. (See also ὃ 199, 
note, and § 233, note.) 

2. Verbs whose stem ends in a vowel usually contract 
the mode suffix with the final vowel of the stem (S$ 170, 
2-3; 200, 1; 211, 1-2; 233, 1-2). 


160 a. Homer often forms the subjunctive with a short vowel (ὁ or e), 
especially in the aorist ; never, however, in the present of -w verbs (ὃ 169). 
BABBITT’S GR. GRAM. —7 


98> Ἕ ἀξ ΤΣ VERBS 


TENSE 


161. Greek has seven tenses : 


Present, Imperfect,. 
Future, Aorist, 
Perfect, Pluperfect, Future Perfect. 
Notr.— The Greek aorist corresponds closely to the English past 


tense: thus ἐποίησα did. The other tenses correspond to the same 
tenses in English or Latin. 


1. The tenses of the indicative are divided into: 

(1) Primary (or Principal) tenses, expressing present 
or future time: the present, future, perfect, and future 
perfect. 

(2) Secondary (or Past) tenses, expressing past time : 
the imperfect, aorist, and pluperfect. 


TENSE SYSTEMS 


162. The various forms of the Greek verb group them- 
selves into certain ‘Tense Systems, each of which is formed 
onacommon Tense Stem. The tense systems of the Greek 
verb are as follows: 


the Present system including the Present and Imperfect, 
the Future system “ Future Active and Middle, 

the First Aorist system “ 1st Aorist Active and Middle, 
the Second Aorist system ‘“ 2d Aorist Active and Middle, 
the First Perfect system “ 1st Perf. and 1st Plup. Act., 
the Second Perfect system “ 2d Perf. and 2d Plup. Act., 
the Perfect Middle system “ Perf., Plup., and Fut. Perf. Mid., 
the First Passive system “ 1st Aor. and 1st Fut. Pass., 

the Second Passive system “ 2d Aor. and 2d Fut. Pass. 


1. The tenses called second differ from the correspond- 
ing first tenses in form, but they usually have like meaning, 


TENSE 99 


unless, as rarely happens, the same verb has both first and 
second forms of the same tense in use at the same time. 
(See § 207, note 3.) 

2. Principal Parts. —'The “principal parts” of a verb 
are the first person singular indicative of every system 
used in it. Thus, 

παιδεύω educate, παιδεύσω, ἐπαίδευσα, πεπαίδευκα., πε- 
παίδευμαι, ἐπαιδεύθην. See ὃ 236. 

λείπω leave, λείψω, ἔλιπον, λέλοιπα, λέλειμμαι, ἐλείφθην. 

βούλομαι wish, βουλήσομαι, βεβούλημαι, ἐβουλήθην (pas- 
sive deponent, ὃ 158, 8). 

γίγνομαι become, γενήσομαι, ἐγενόμην, γεγένημαι (middle 
deponent, § 158, 3). 


163. Theme. — That part of the Greek verb which is 
common to all its forms is called the Theme (or by some 
the Verb Stem). From this theme the various tense-stems 
are formed: thus κελεύω order, theme xedev-, present stem 
Kerev2:, future stem KeAevo?:, aorist stem Kerevoa-, etc. 

For the formation of the various tense-systems see 
δὲ 186-234. 

1. According as the verb theme ends in a vowel, a mute, 
or a liquid (§ 12),-verbs are classed as Vowel Verbs, Mute 
Verbs, or Liquid Verbs. 


164. Irregular Verbs. —Sometimes, when two or more 
verbs happen to coincide in meaning, each is used only in 
certain tenses, usually in such a way as to supplement 
each other. 

Thus, τρέχω run is used only in the present system ; 
in the other tenses another verb from the theme dpap- 
corresponds in meaning to τρέχω ; so δραμοῦμαι shall run, 
ἔδραμον ran, ete. In the same way, corresponding in 


100 VERBS 


meaning to ὁρῶ see (theme opa-), we have ὄψομαι shall see 


(theme 67-), and εἶδον saw (theme é6-). Such verbs are 
often called Irregular Verbs. 


165. Primitive and Denominative Verbs. — A Primitive 
verb forms its tense stems from a root; a Denominative 
verb from a longer theme, originally a noun stem (§ 269). 

Thus, τίω (root 7-) give what is due is a primitive verb, 
while τιμῶ (-dw) honor is a denominative verb, derived 
from a noun, tiu7 honor. 


Note.— Most primitive verbs have themes of one syllable. (See 
§ 270, note.) 


PERSON AND NUMBER 


166. There are three persons: First, Second, and 
Third. 

The Greek verb, like the Greek noun, has three num- 
bers (§ 74): Singular, Dual, and Plural. 

In the inflection of the verb, the person and number 
are shown by certain endings, attached to the tense stem, 
which are called Personal Endings. 

1. The active and the middle voice have each a different 
set of personal endings. 

The passive voice has no endings of its own, but in the 
aorist it employs the ending of the active, and in the 
future those of the middle. 

2. The indicative mood has two sets of endings in each 
voice, one for primary tenses and the other for secondary 
tenses (§ 161, 1). 

3. The subjunctive mood employs the same endings as 
the primary tenses of the indicative. 

4. The optative mood has the same endings as the 
secondary tenses of the indicative. 


a 


PERSON AND NUMBER 101 


167. The forms of the personal endings may be seen 
from the following table: 


Active Middle 
INDICATIVE INDICATIVE INDICATIVE INDICATIVE 
(primary tenses) (secondary tenses) (primary tenses) (secondary tenses) 
AND AND AND AND 
SUBJUNCTIVE OPTATIVE SUBJUNCTIVE OPTATIVE 
Sing. 1. -μι -v -μαι -μὴν 
2. -ς (for -σι), -σθα,-θα -ς, -σθα -σαι -σο 
3. -ot (for -τι) -ται -TO 
Dual 2. -rov -TOV -σθον -σθον 
Ὁ. -TOV -τὴν -σθον -σθην 
Plur. 1. -pev (for -μες) -pev -μεθα τμεθα 
2. -τε -τε -σθε -σθε 
9. -νσῖι (for -ντὸ τν, τσαν -νται -ντο 
Active Middle 
IMPERATIVE 
Sing. 2. None or -θι -σο 
3. -τω -σθω 
Dual 2. -TOV -σθον 
ὃ. -των -σθων 
Plur. 2. -τε -σθε 
ὃ. -ντων -σθων 
INFINITIVE 
(-evar) -ev, -ναι -σθαι 
PARTICIPLE 
-vt- (perfect -ot- and -oc-) -μενο- 


For the declension of participles see 88 129-131. 


VERBALS 


το- and -τεο- 


Nore 1.— For the first person dual the first person plural is almost 
always used. A special ending, -μεθον, in the middle, is rarely found. 

Note 2.— The poets often have -μεσθα for -μεθα : thus ἐλαυνόμεσθα 
we are being driven. 


102 VERBS 


Notre 3.— The present third plural active of -we verbs has the 
ending -avov: thus τιθέασι they put (for *r-Oe-avor), ἱστᾶσι they erect 
(for *t-ora-avor). 

Nore 4.— An ending of the third plural imperative rarely found 
is -rwoav (middle -σθωσαν) : thus ἔττωσαν let them go. In later Greek 
this ending often occurs. 


INFLECTION 


168. There are in Greek two slightly different ways of 
inflecting verbs, called respectively (from the ending of the 
first person singular active) the τῷ form and the -pe form. 


169. The -w Form of Inflection. —In the τω form of 
inflection the stem ends in the variable vowel Ὁ (§ 14). 
Before μὶ or v, and in the optative mode, o is employed, 
elsewhere ες thus λύομεν we loose, λύετε you loose, ioLmeEY 
optative ; so also λύουσι, for *Avover, they loose. 

1. To the -ὦ form of inflection belong all futures and 
the present, the imperfect, and the second aorist with 
variable vowel (§ 210). 


167 a. In Homer -σθα is more frequent than in Attic: thus τίθη-σθα, 
from τίθημι put; φῆ-σθα, from φημί say; so sometimes in the subjunc- 
tive: ἐθέλη-σθα (Attic ἐθέλῃς). from ἐθέλω wish. ἣ 

b. Homer sometimes has -tov for -τὴν and -σθον for -σθην in the third 
person dual of secondary tenses. 

c. Homer often has -ν for -cay as an ending of the third plural 
active, before which the preceding vowel is always short: thus ἔβα-ν 
they went, ἔφα-ν théy said, ἔτραφε-ν they were reared (Attic ἔβη-σαν, 
épn-cav, ἐτράφη-σαν). 

ἃ. Tonic often has the endings -arat, -ατος for -vrat, -vro (cf. § 14, 2, note). 
In the optative these endings are always found; often in the perfect and 
pluperfect indicative, and sometimes in the present and imperfect of -μι 
verbs : thus Bovdol-aro (Attic Bovdo-vro), from βούλομαι wish ; τετράφ-αται 
(ὃ 226 a), from τρέφω nourish ; τιθέ-αται (Attic τίθε-νται). from τίθημι put. 

6. For an ending of the infinitive Homer has also -weva or (usually 
before vowels) -uev (for the accent see ὃ 185, 1 a): thus πεμπέ-μεναι or 
πεμπέ-μεν, aS well as πέμπειν to send. 


FORMS OF INFLECTION (GENERAL) 103 


170. The -μι Form of Inflection. — In the -με form of 
inflection (which is older than the -@ form) the endings 
are added directly to the stem without the variable 
vowel ¢. The endings retain more nearly their original 
form than in the -@ form of inflection. 

1. A final vowel of the stem usually has its long form 
in the singular of the indicative active; elsewhere the 
short form: thus té@yn-we 7 put, τίθε-μεν we put; ἵστη-μι 
1 cause to stand, ἵστα-μεν we cause to stand. 

2. In the subjunctive a final a, e, or o of the stem is 
contracted with the mode suffix: thus 166, τιθῆῇς, etc., 
for τιθέω, τιθέῃς. In contraction, an (an) gives ἡ (n) and 
on gives » (contrary to ὃ 18,6 and ὃ 19, 2): thus ἱστῆται 
for ἱστάηται and διδῷς for διδόῃς. 

3. In the optative the « of the mode suffix contracts 
with the final vowel of the stem (§ 160, 2): thus τιθείην, 
τιθεῖμεν, from τίθημι put. 

4. In a few forms -ws verbs have the inflection of con- 
tract verbs in -é or -όω : thus regularly impf. act. ἐδίδουν, 
ἐδίδους, ἐδίδου, from δίδωμι give, and ἐτίθεις, ἐτίθει, from 
τίθημι put ; so also impy. δίδου, τίθει. Sometimes also 2d 
sing. τιθεῖς, and opt. τιθοῖτο, τιθοῖντο, θοῖτο. 


NOTES ON THE PERSONAL ENDINGS 


Nore 1. Primary Endings of the Active. — The endings - and -σι 
(for -τι are found only in -μὲ verbs. In tenses of tie -w inflection the 
first person singular active of primary tenses ends in -w (Avw loose). 


170 a. Homer often retains the endings -μὲ (1st per.) and -o« (3d per.) in 
the subjunctive: thus ἐθέλωμι, ἐθέλησι (Attic ἐθέλω, ἐθέλῃ. from ἐθέλω wish. 

b. In the third plural Homer often has -ν for -σαν (ὃ 167 c); the 
‘preceding vowel is always short: thus ξύν-ιε-ν they gave heed, @pa-v they 
said (Attic Evy-te-cav, ἔφη-σαν). 

170, 4 a. In Ionic, -μι verbs follow the contract system of inflection in 
a few more forms than in Attic: thus διδοῖς, διδοῖ, τιθεῖ, ἵει, 


10. VERBS 


The second person singular was probably originally *Ave-o1, which. 
became *Aveu (ὃ 37), and later -; was added from the secondary tenses, 
making Aves, to distinguish this form from the third singular λύει, 
for Ave-ou (originally *Ave-tt, § 37). 

In -νσι, the primary ending of the third person plural active, ν is 
regularly dropped before σ (ὃ 34), and the preceding vowel is length- 
ened: thus λύουσι they loose is for *Avo-ver (-v7t), λελύκᾶσι they have 
loosed is for *Ae-AvKa-vor, τιθέασι they put is for ἔτιθειανσι (§ 167, 
note 5). 

In the second singular of the imperative an ending -s is sometimes 
found: thus σχές from ἔχω have, δός from δίδωμι, give. 

Nore 2. Secondary Endings of the Active.—Of the secondary 
endings, -ν (3d plural) belongs regularly to the -w form of inflection, 
and -oav to the -μι form. ‘The first person singular active of the 
optative mode uses the primary ending -ws when the mode sign is -t- 
(ὃ 160, 1): thus λύοιμι, λύσαιμι. 

Nore 3. The Endings of the Middle. — In the endings -σαι and -σο 
of the second person singular middle the o is regularly dropped (8 37), 
and the vowels contracted. Thus, from Avw loose we have pres. indic. 
Avy or λύει (for *Ave-car), pres. subj. Avy (for *Ady-car), imperf. indie. 
ἐλύου (for *€Ave-co), aor. indic. ἐλύσω (for *€Avoa-co). 

In the optative the o is dropped, but the vowels do not contract : 
thus λύοι-ο for *Avol-co. In the present and imperfect of the -y verbs, 
the o of these endings is usually retained: thus τίθε-σαι, ἐτίθε-σο, 
from τίθημι put. 

Nore 4.— If we place side by side the presents indicative of early 
Greek (Doric) φα-μί (Attic φη-μί) say and Latin inquam, we shall 
see how closely the present endings of Greek and Latin agree. 


SINGULAR PLURAL 
1. φα-μί inqua-m φα-μές inqui-mus 
2. φα-σί inqui-s φα-τέ inqui-tis 
3. φα-τί inqui-t φα-ντί inqui-unt 


170 c. (note 3). In Ionic the second person middle drops the σ of the 
ending, but the vowels usually remain uncontracted: thus λύσεαι, ἐλύεο, 
ἐλύσαο, etc., from vw Joose. Herodotus contracts -nac to -y, and some- 
times -eo to -ev: thus πείθῃ (2d pers. subj. mid.), from πείθω persuade ; 
avéxev (impy. mid.), from ἀνέχω hold up, 


AUGMENT 105 


AUGMENT 


171. The augment is the sign of past time. It belongs 
therefore only to the past or secondary tenses of the 
indicative; namely, imperfect, aorist, and pluperfect. 
The augment has two forms, Syllabic and ‘Temporal. 


172. Syllabic Augment. — Verbs beginning with a con- 
sonant augment by prefixing e-. Such augment is called 
syllabic, since it increases the number of syllables in the 
word: thus Advw loose, imperf. €-Avov was loosing; γράφω 
write, aor. €-ypawa wrote ; pluperf. €-ye-ypadn had written. 

1. Words beginning with p double it after the augment 
(8 25): thus ἔ-ρρέπτον, imperfect of ῥίπτω throw. 

2. A few verbs which originally began with a con- 
sonant, but which now begin with a vowel, still have 
syllabic augment. The most common of these are: 


ἄγνυῦμι break, aor. ἔαξα (for *é-paga). 
ἁνδάνω please, aor. €-adov (for *é-ofador). 
av-oiyw open, impf. av-éwyov (for *dv-e-fovyor). 
ἐῶ (-dw) permit, impf. εἴων (for ξέσεραον 3). 
ἐθίζω accustom, impf. εἴθιζον (for ἐἐσρεθιζον). 
ἐλίττω roll, aor. εἴλιξα (for *é-peduéa). 
ἕλκω draw, imp. εἷλκον (for *é-ceAKov). 
ἕπομαι follow, impf. εἱπόμην (for *é-ceropny). 
ἐργάζομαι work, impf. εἰργαζόμην (for *é-pepyalopnv). 
ἕρπω creep, impf. εἷρπον (for *é-cepzor). 


171 a. In Homer and in lyric poetry the augment is often omitted: 
thus βῆν went, dace drove, ἔχε held (Attic ἔβην, ἤλασε, εἶχε). 

b. In Herodotus the temporal augment is often omitted ; the syllabic 
augment only in the pluperfect and in iteratives (§ 191 b). 

172, 1a. In Homer other liquids besides p may be doubled after the 
syllabic augment: thus ἔλλαβε took, ἔμμαθε learned (cf. ὃ 22 ἃ). 


106 VERBS 


ἑστιῶ (-dw), entertain, impf. εἱστίων (for Ἐἐ-ρεστιαον). 


ἔχω have, hold, impf. εἶχον (for *é-ceyxor). 
inpe let go, aor. (dual) εἷτον (for *é-ce-rov). 
ὁρῶ (-dw) see, impf. ἑώρων (for *é-fopaor). 
ὠθῶ (-€o) push, impf. ἐώθουν (for *é-¢wheov). 
ὠνοῦμαι (-ἔομαι) buy, impf. ἐωνούμην (for *e-pwveouny). 
(€d-) take, aor. εἷλον (for *é-ceXov ?). 
(€6-) seat, aor. εἷσα (δ 30) (for *é-06-ca). 
(ἰδ. see, aor. εἶδον (for ξἐ ειδον). 


Nore 1.— Observe that ὁρῶ (-dw) and ἀνοίγω, in addition to the 
syllabic augment, lengthen the first vowel of the stem. 

Nore 2.— The consonants at the beginning of most of these words 
may still be seen in other languages. For example, with ἐθίζω, ἕλκω, 
ἕπομαι, €6-, ἰδ-, may be compared Latin suesco, sulcus, sequor, sedeo, 
video. 


173. Temporal Augment. — Verbs beginning with a 
vowel augment by lengthening the first vowel. Such 
augment is called temporal, since it usually increases the 
time occupied in pronouncing the syllable: thus ἤλαυνον, 
imperf. from ἐλαύνω drive; ὥμοσα. aor. from ὄμνυμι swear; 
ἱκέτευον, impf. from ἱκετεύω supplicate. The vowels aand a 
become ἡ: thus ἦγον, impf. from ἄγω lead; ἤθλουν, impf. 
from ἀθλῶ (-éw) contend. The other long vowels remain 
unchanged: thus ἡγούμην, impf. from ἡγοῦμαι (-ἔομαι) 
lead. 

1. Diphthongs lengthen the first vowel: thus ἤσθανό- 
μην, inpf. from αἰσθάνομαι perceive; ἤκαζον, impf. from 
εἰκάζω guess; ᾧκτιρον, impf. from οἰκτίρω pity; ηὕρισκον. 
impf. from εὑρίσκω find. But ov-, and e- when it is an 
apparent diphthong (ὃ 6, 3), remain unchanged: thus 
οὔταζον, impf. of οὐτάζω wound, εἶκον, impf. of εἴκω 


yield. 


φωνῶ 


AUGMENT 107 


174. Augment of Compound Verbs. — Verbs compounded 
with a preposition take their augment after the preposi- 
tion: thus εἰσ-έφερον impf. of εἰσ-φέρω bring in; προσ-ἢγον 
impf. of προσ-άγω lead to. 

1. But sometimes compounds, of which the simple verb 
is not commonly used, are augmented at the beginning, 
as if they were not compounds at all: thus ἤμφίεσα, aor. of 
ἀμφι-ἐννῦμι clothe: so often ἐκαθήμην, impt. of κάθ-ημαι sit. 


175. Denominative verbs formed from nouns already 
compounded take their augment at the beginning. Thus, 
the imperfect of οἰκοδομῶ (-€w) build (from οἰκο- δόμος house- 
builder) is ὠκοδόμουν ; the imperfect of ἐναντιοῦμαι (-dopac) 
oppose (from ἐναντίος opposite) is ἠναντιούμην. 

1. But since there are so many verbs compounded with 
prepositions, some confusion arises in the case of verbs 
derived from compound nouns whose first part is a prepo- 
sition. Thus, the imperfect of ἐπιστατῶ (-éw) oversee is 
ἐπεστάτουν, and of κατηγορῶ (-€) accuse is κατηγόρουν, 
although both of these are denominative verbs, derived 
respectively from ἐπιστάτης overseer and κατήγορος accuser. 

Notr.— A few verbs even have two augments, one before and one 
after the preposition: thus ἀν-έχομαι endure, imperfect ἠν-ειχόμην. 

176. Augment of the Pluperfect. — The pluperfect takes 
no augment except the syllabic: thus €AeAvKen (perf. 
λέλυκα). pluperfect of Ad@ loose. When the perfect stem 
begins with a vowel, the pluperfect has no augment: thus 
ἐστάλκη (perf. ἔσταλκα), pluperfect of στέλλω send ; 
εἰλήφη (perf. εἴληφα), from λαμβάνω take ; ὠφελήκη (perf. 
apérAnka), from ὠφελῶ (-€w) help. 

Note. — But verbs with “Attic Reduplication” (§ 179) regularly 
take augment in the pluperfect: thus qxyKon, plup. of ἀκήκοα have heard. 


176 a. In Herodotus the Attic reduplication is never augmented, 


108 VERBS 


REDUPLICATION 


177. Reduplication belongs regularly to the perfect 
system (including the pluperfect and future perfect), 
where it denotes completed action. It is sometimes found 
in the present and the second aorist systems. It consists 
in doubling the sound at the beginning of the word. 


178. Reduplication of the Perfect. — In the perfect, verbs 
beginning with a consonant repeat that consonant with e: 
thus λύτω loose, perf. λέλυκα. A rough mute in redupli- 
cation is changed to the corresponding smooth (§ 40): 
thus θύω sacrifice, perf. τέθυκα. 

1. In verbs beginning with two consonants (except a 
mute and a liquid), a double consonant, or p, the redupli- 
cation consists of e merely: thus ἔ-ψευσμαι, perf. of 
ψεύδομαι lie; ἔτσταλκα, perf. of στέλλω send ; E-ppida (δ 23), 
pert. of ῥίπτω throw; but γέγραφα, perf. of γράφω write. 


Notre. — But yv- is usually reduplicated in the perfect by means 


of ε: thus ἔγνωκα, perf. of γι-γνώσκω know. 


2. Five verbs reduplicate with e-. These are: 


λαμβάνω take, perf. εἴληφα. 
λαγχάνω get by lot, © εἴτληχα. 
λέγω (only in composition) collect, * εἴςλοχα. 
(μερ-) “ς εἵμαρται it is fated. 
(€p-, pn-) say “ες εἴξρηκα. 


ΝΟΤΕ. -- The explanation of this reduplication is very uncertain. 
See, however, εἴρω and μείρομαι in the Verb List, § 729. 


3. Verbs beginning with a short vowel reduplicate by 
lengthening the vowel; a diphthong lengthens the first 


> 


vowel ; a long vowel remains unchanged: thus ἦχα, pert. 


REDUPLICATION 109 


of ἄγω lead; ἥρηκα, of aipa (-éw) take; ὠφέληκα, of 
ὠφελῶ (-€w) help. 


179. ‘Attic Reduplication.”— A few verbs beginning 
with a, ¢, or o, followed by a single consonant, reduplicate 
by repeating the first vowel and consonant, and length- 
ening the first vowel of the theme: thus ἀλ-ήλιφα, ἀλ- 
ἤλιμμαι, perf. of ἀλείφω anoint; ἐλ-ήλακα, ἐλ-ήλαμαι, 
of ἐλαύνω drive; op-opvxa, ὀρ-ώρυγμαι, of ὀρύττω dig. 


180. Reduplication with e- before a Vowel. — ‘The appar- 
ently vowel verbs, mentioned in ὃ 172, 2, which originally 
began with a consonant reduplicate regularly, but the 
disappearance of the consonant leaves only e- (which is 
often contracted with the following vowel): thus éaya 
(originally *fefaya), perf. of ayvope break; eixa (for 
* ae f “ Aypayer 

σε-σεκα). pert. of tnpe send, etc. 


181. Reduplication of Compound Verbs. — In compound 
verbs, and in verbs derived from compound nouns, the 
reduplication has the same place as the augment (S$ 174— 
175): thus ἀπο-κέτκκρικα, perf. of ἀπο-κρίνω separate ; 
κε-χειροτόνηκα. pert. of χειρο-τονῶ (-€w) elect. 


182. Reduplication of the Present. — A few verbs redu- 
plicate in the present (88 193, 3; 197, 1) by repeating the 
first consonant with ¢: thus γυι-γνώσκω know, τί-θημι put. 

183. Reduplication of the Second Aorist. — Sometimes 


in Attic (often in Homer) the second aorist is formed by 
reduplication. See ὃ 208, 1 and a. 


179 a. In Homer the ‘‘ Attic’’? reduplication is found in more verbs 
than in Attic, sometimes without lengthening the first vowel of the theme: 
thus ἐρ-έριπτο, from ἐρείπω overthrow (δ 219, note2). Cf. in Attic ἤγαγον 
(infin. ἀγ-αγεῖν), 2d aor. of ἄγω lead. 


110 VERBS 


ACCENT OF THE VERB 


184. The accent of verbs (both simple and compound) 
is regularly recessive (§ 64). 

1. But in compound verbs the written accent cannot 
recede beyond the augment: thus πάρειμι be present, raph 
was present. 


185. Infinitives, participles, and verbal adjectives, since 
they are in reality nouns (§ 159, 1 and 2), do not come 
under the rule of accent for verbs. 

1. The accent of the infinitive and participle in each 
tense and voice must usually be learned by observation ; 
but present and future infinitives and participles of the τῷ 
form (§ 169, 1) are recessive in accent, and all infinitives 
in -vat take their written accent on the penult. 

2. The verbal adjective in -τός takes its written accent 
on the final syllable: thus λυτός, AUTH, λυτόν loosed, gen. 
λυτοῦ, etc. ‘The verbal adjective in -τέος always has the 
acute accent on the penult: thus λυτέος, λυτέα, λυτέον 
needing to be loosed, gen. λυτέου, ete. 

Norte. — Contract verbs (δ 199) are not an exception to the rule of 
§ 184, since their accent in the uncontracted form was recessive. Some 


other apparent exceptions in accent are to be explained by contraction. 
See 88 200, 1; 210, 1-2; 233, 1-2. 


FORMATION OF TENSE STEMS 


186. The various tense stems are formed from the theme 
by means of a tense suffix (or prefix, sometimes both). 
In primitive verbs (§ 165) we usually find also a variation 


185, 1a. The epic infinitive in -wevac or -uev (§ 167 6) always has its 
written accent on the syllable preceding the ending: thus δόμεναι to give, 
ἀγέμεν to lead. 


FORMATION OF TENSE STEMS 111 


in the vowel of the theme (§§ 15-14): thus pres. τήκτ-ω 
melt, aor. pass. €-Tak-nv; πέττ-ομαι fly, 2d aor. ἐπτοιόμην ; 
λείπ-ω leave, perf. λέλοιπ-α, 2d aor. ἔ-λιπ-ον. 

1. Verbs which show a variation between long and 
short vowels (ἢ 13) usually have the short vowel in the 
second aorist ; elsewhere the long form: thus τήκ-ω, THE@, 
etc. melt, but-2d aor. pass. éTa«-nv. 

2. Verbs which show the vowel variation 0, ε, α) (ὃ 14) 
regularly have in the second aorist, and often in the 
perfect middle (cf. § 224, note), the form with no vowel 
or with a (ὃ 14, 1), in the second perfect the form with 0, 
and elsewhere the form with e. Examples are: 


PRESENT FUTURE 2p PERFECT 2p AORIST 
κλέπ-τω steal κλέψω κέ κλοφ-α ἐκλάπ-ην 
(ἀπο-) κτείνω kill κτεν-ὦ ἔκτον-α (Epic) ἔκταν-ον 
(for *xrev-ww, ὃ 39, 4) 

λείπω leave λείψω λέλοιπ-α ἔνλιπ-ον 
(8 14,2 

φθείρω destroy φθερ-ὦ ἔτφθορ-α ἐ-φθάρ-ην 


(for ἔφθερ-:ιω, § 39, 4) 


PERFECT MIDDLE 

ἔφθαρ-μαι 

187. Vowel Verbs. —In most verbs whose theme ends 
in a vowel, this vowel is long outside of the present 
system. After ες ἐς or p, an a becomes a, otherwise ἡ (δ 15): 
thus τιμῶ (-4@) honor, τιμήσω, ἐτίμησα, τε-τίμηκα, τε- 
τίμημαι. ἐτιμήθην ; φιλῶ (-éw) love, φιλήσω. ἐφίλησα. etc.; 
δηλῶ (-ὀω) show, δηλώσω. ἐδήλωσα, etc.; ἐῶ (-ἄων permit, 
ἐάσω, etc.; δρῶ (-ἀω) do, δρἄσω. ete. 


188. But some apparently vowel verbs had originally 
themes ending in a consonant. Such verbs naturally pre- 


{10 VERBS 


serve the short vowel throughout all their tenses, and, by 
analogy, some real vowel verbs do the same: thus τελῶ 
(-€@, for ἔτελεσ-ιω, cf. τέλος end) finish, fut. τελῶ, aor. ἐτέ. 
Neca, perf. τε-τέλεκα. etC.: γελῶ (-dw), γελάσομαι., ἐγέλασα. 

1. A few verbs have the short vowel only in certain 
tenses: thus aipo (-€w), αἱρήσω, etc., but aor. pass. ἡρέθην. 


189. Most verbs which keep the short vowel in all their 
tenses (§ 188), and, by analogy, some others, have in the 
perfect middle and aorist passive (and verbals, § 235) 
ao at the end of the theme: thus τελῶ (-éw) finish, 
perf. mid. τετέλεσ-μαι, aor. pass. ἐτελέσ-θην; so also 
ἀκούω hear has ἤκουσμαι and ἠκούσθην ; κελεύω order has 
κεκέλευσμαι and ἐκελεύσθην. 

Nortr.— As most of these verbs originally had themes ending in σ 


or a lingual mute (88 26; 27,3), there is nothing strange about the o 
in the perfect middle and aorist passive. 


190. ε in Tense Formation. -- Some verbs vary between 
themes with e(7) and themes without ¢(7). Usually 
both themes are not found together in the same tense, but 
even this sometimes happens: thus βούλομαι (βουλ-} wish, 
fut. βουλήσομαι (Bovre-), aor. ἐβουλήθην; μένω (jev-) 
remain, perf. μεμένηκα (peve-); αἰσθάνομαι (αἰσθ-) per- 
ceive, fut. αἰσθήσομαι (aicbe-), aor. ἠσθόμην (αἰσθ-Ὁ) ; 
δοκῶ (-m) (doxe-), fut. δόξω (dox-). No rules in this 
matter can be laid down, but the eccentricities of such 
verbs may be learned from the Verb List, § 729. 


191a. @ in Tense Formation. — In Homer, and sometimes in the Attic 
poets (very rarely in prose), a few verbs have forms from a present (or 
aorist) stem made with the suffix -@- (-e#2 or -a@): thus ἐ-διώκ-αθο-ν 
(διώκω pursue), μετ-ε-κί-αθο-ν (κίω go), φλεγ-έθω (φλέγω burn), ἔ-σχ-εθο-ν 
(ἔχω hold). 

191 b. Iterative ἘΌΓΠ5. --- [πὰ Homer and Herodotus iterative forms 


THE PRESENT SYSTEM aS 


THE PRESENT SYSTEM 
(PRESENT AND IMPERFECT) 


192. Verbs may be divided into five classes, according 
to the way in which they form their present stem. These 
classes are: (1) the simple class, (2) the 7 class, 
(8) the ¢ class, G4) the v class, (5) the ox class. 


193. The Simple Class. — The simple class employs for 
the present stem the simple theme, with or without the 
variable vowel (§ 169). Verbs with the variable vowel 
show τῷ in the first person singular of the present indica- 
tive active: thus λέγω (theme Aey-, present stem Ney”). 
Verbs without the variable vowel are -we verbs (δ 170): 
thus φημί say (theme φη-. da-, present stem φη-, φα-). 

1. Primitive verbs whose themes show the interchange 
of long and short vowels (ὃ 15) usually have in the present 
the form with the long vowel (ὃ 186, 1): thus τήκω melt 
(theme τηκ- and tax-), λύω loose (theme λῦ-, Av-). The -we 
verbs, however, have the long vowel only in the singular 
of the indicative active (see ὃ 170, 1). 

2. Primitive verbs whose themes show the vowel varia- 
tion 0, €(a) (8 14), usually have in the present the form 
with e (or e or ev, ὃ 14,2): thus πέμπω send (theme πεμπ-: 
πομπ-: present stem eure), λείτω leave (theme Rocz, 
λείπ-:. λίπ-,: present stem λείπ), φεύγω flee (theme devy-, 
guy-, present stem devy2:). See ὃ 186, 2. 


of the imperfect and aorist are found, to denote a repeated past action. 
They are formed by adding the iterative suffix -ox2: to the tense stem of 
the imperfect or aorist: thus μένε-σκο-ν kept remaining (μένω remain), 
ποιέε-σκο-ν kept doing (ποιῶ (-éw) do), φύγε-σκο-ν used to flee, aorist 
(φεύγω flee). These forms are inflected like the imperfect, and seldom 
have an augment (δ 171 a-b). 

BABBITT’S GR. GRAM. —8 


114 VERBS 


Nore. — Here belong also the verbs πλέω sail, yew pour, θέω run, 
véw swim, πνέω breathe, pew flow, whose themes end in -ev- (for ἔπλευ-ω, 
*yxev-w, etc. See ὃ 21). 

3. A few verbs, mostly -με verbs, have reduplication in 
the present system (ὃ 182): thus τέθημι (θε-. An-) put, 
γίγνομαι (yov-, yev-, yv-) become. (Cf. Latin gi-gno.) 


194. The τ Class. — Some verbs, with stems in π΄ 8, or 
¢, form the present tense stem by adding -7% to the theme 
(cf. Latin flec-to): thus τύπ-τω strike (theme tu7-, present 
stem Turt?:), καλύπ-τω cover (theme καλυβ-. ὃ 25), σκάπ-τω 
dig (theme σκαφ-. ὃ 25). 


195. The t Class. — Many mute and liquid verbs form 
their present stem by adding the suffix -2: to the theme 
(cf. Latin fac-to), but this suffix almost always combines 
in some way with the preceding letters. See § 39, and 
ef. § 292. 

1. With «, y, 7, 0, the « unites to form rz (Ionic aa, 
§ 22): thus κηρύττω proclaim (theme κηρῦκ-, present stem 
Knpotte:) for *cnpiKk-tw: ταράττω disturb (theme tapayx-) for 
*rapay-iw. (see § 39, 1.) 

2. With y and ὃ the ¢ unites to form ζ (δ 39, 2): thus 
σφάζω slay (theme σφαγ-) for *apay-tw: παίζω play (theme 
mato-) for ἔπαιδ-οιω. 

Note 1.— Themes in -yy- lose the first y: thus κλάζω (theme 
kAayy-) for *xAwyy-to. 

Notre 2.—In a number of verbs γι seems to combine into tr: 
thus τάττω arrange (theme tay-, cf. tay-ds commander), but a good 


many of these words can be shown to have had parallel themes in -x-, 
and these probably influenced the rest. 


195,2a. This form of the present in - sometimes gives rise to 
uncertainty about the aorist and future. In Homer verbs in -f@ not 
infrequently have & in the aorist and future: thus rodeulfw (πολεμιδ-), 
πολεμίξω, ἐπολέμιξα. 


THE PRESENT SYSTEM 115 


3. With ἃ the ¢ assimilates to form AA (8 39,3): thus 
ἀγγέλλω (theme ayyeA-) for *ayyer-vw. 

4. With v and p the ἐ goes over to the preceding vowel 
and unites with it by contraction (ὃ 39,4): thus φαίνω show 
(theme ¢av-) for ἔφαν-ιω : κρίνω distinguish (theme xpiv-) 
for *xpw-tw: σπείρω sow (theme o7ep-) for ἔσπερ-ιω. 


Notre. — A few apparently vowel verbs form their present with 
this suffix: thus καίω (for *xag-t-w, theme καυ-, ὃ 21) burn, κλαίω (for 
Ἔκλαρ-ω, theme kAav-, ὃ 21) weep. 


196. The v Class. — A number of verbs form their 
present stem by adding to the theme a suffix containing ν 
(οἵ. Latin cer-n-o). 

1. Suffix -v2.— Some verbs add v& alone: thus τέμ-νω 
cut (theme τεμ-). 

2. Suffix -ave.— A good many verbs add -avé: thus 
αἰσθ-άνομαι perceive (theme αἰσθ-). 

If the last syllable of the theme is short, a sympathetic 
nasal (v with a lingual, w with a labial, y with a palatal) 
appears in the theme: thus μανθ-άνω learn (theme paé-), 
AapB-avw take (theme λαβ-), Aayx-avw get by lot (theme 
λαχ-). 

3. Suffix -va-, -νη- (§ 110, 1).—A very few verbs, mostly 
poetic, take a suffix -va-, -vn-; thus πέρ-νη-μι sell (πέρ-να- 
μεν we sell, theme περ-). 

4. Suffix -vee. — A few verbs take a suffix -ve?= (§ 190): 
thus ἱκ-νοῦ-μαι (-véo-wat) arrive (theme ik-). 

5. Sufix -vv-. Several verbs have a suffix -vu-: thus 
δείκ-νῦ-μι show (theme detx-). 


Nore. — After a vowel this suffix appears as -vvv-, but in most of 
these cases the extra y comes from the assimilation of another con- 
sonant in which the theme originally ended: thus ἕννυμι clothe (theme 
originally ¢eo-, cf. Latin vestis) for *eo-vupu. 


110 VERBS 


197. The ox Class. — Several verbs form their present 
stem by adding to the theme -o«2 or -ἰσκε: (cf. Latin 
gno-sco); (regularly, vowel themes take -σκεξ, and consonant 
themes -toxe.): thus ἀρέσκω please (theme ape-), εὑρ-ίσκω 
find (theme εὑρ-). 

1. Some of these verbs have also reduplication in the 
present system (ὃ 182): thus γιτγνώ-σκω know (theme γνω-). 


INFLECTION OF THE PRESENT AND IMPERFECT 


198. The -w Form. — For the paradigm see ὃ 237; for 
an explanation of some of the forms see § 170, notes 1-3. 


199. Contract Verbs. — Verbs in ὦ (-da, -éw, -όω) contract 
the final vowel of the stem with the variable vowel ©; 
for the paradigms see $$ 248-260. 

1. In the optative, contract verbs almost always have 
-n- for the mode sign in the singular and ~- in the dual 
and plural. 


Nore. — Rarely -t- is found as mode sign in the singular, while -ἰη- 
seldom, if ever, appears in the dual and plural (cf. § 160, note). 


199 a. Contract Verbs in Homer. — In Homer verbs in -éw and -déw are 
sometimes contracted as in Attic, but often remain uncontracted: thus 
τελέει and τελεῖται, from τελῶ (-éw) finish, ναιετάω dwell, μενοινᾷς, from 
μενοινῷ (-dw) be eager. Rarely verbs in -dw have the inflection of verbs 
in -έω : thus μενοίνεον (from μενοινῶ (-dw) be eager). Cf. § 199 6. 

b. ‘ AsstmiILaTrion.’’ — Verbs in -dw, when uncontracted, not infre- 
quently have the regular uncontracted form, as stated in § 199 a, but 
more often they show in the manuscripts a peculiar assimilation, an o 
sound prevailing over an adjacent a sound, and an a sound over an e sound: 
thus ὁρόω for dpdw, ὁράᾳς for ὁράεις (ὁρῶ (-dw) see). A long syllable in 
the original form is represented by a long vowel (or improper diphthong) 
in the assimilated form: thus ὁρόωντες for dpdovres, dpdwuc for ὁράοιμι, 
ὁρόωσα for dpdovca. Two long vowels in succession are regularly avoided, 
unless they are necessary to preserve the meter: thus ἡβώοντες (not 
ἡβώωντες) for ἡβἄοντες, ἡβώοιμι (ποὺ HBdwur) for ἡβάοιμι; but μενοινώω 


INFLECTION OF THE PRESENT AND IMPERFECT 117 


2. Verbs of two syllables in -ἔω (originally -εύω, ὃ 193, 
note) contract only when the contraction will give εἰ: 
otherwise they remain uncontracted: thus πλέω sail, 
πλεῖς. πλεῖ, πλεῖτον, πλεῖτον, πλέομεν, πλεῖτε, πλέουσι. 


Nore. — But δῶ (for δέω, *deiw) bind is contracted throughout, 
and ξέω (for *eow) scrape is usually contracted throughout. 


3. A few verbs seem to have stems in -7-, and so 
have ἢ wherever the ordinary contract verbs have a: 
thus ζῶ live, Sys, ζῇ, ζῆτον, ζῶμεν, ζῆτε, ζῶσι ; subj. ζῶ, 
tps, etc.; opt. ζῴην, ζῴης, etc.; impv. ζῆ, ete.; infin. ζῆν ; 
parte. ζῶν. The most common of these verbs are ζῶ 
live and χρῶμαι use; for the others see the Verb List, 
§ 729. 


for pevowaw, ἡβώωσα for ἡβᾶἄουσα, since otherwise the original quantities 
would not be preserved. 

199 c. Verbs in -dw hardly ever remain uncontracted, but if uncon- 
tracted they show an ‘‘assimilation’’ precisely as if they were verbs in 
-dw: thus ἀρόωσι for dpdovar (ἀρῶ (-dw) plow). 

Nore. — There can be little doubt that these ‘‘ assimilated ’’ forms are 
spurious forms dating from Alexandrine times, produced from the con- 
tracted forms ὁρῶ, ὁρᾷς, etc., which were the only forms of such verbs in 
use at the time. Observe that the ‘‘ assimilated’? form has exactly the 
same quantities as the uncontracted form, and the latter can be every- 
where restored to the text. 

ἃ. Axroric Forms. — Homer sometimes treats contract verbs in -éw 
as if they were - μὲ verbs like τίθημι: thus φορῆ-ναι, φορή-μεναι (cf. § 200 a), 
infinitive from φορῶ (-éw) bear, ἀπειλή-την (cf. § 200 a), imperfect dual 
from ἀπειλῶ (-éw) threaten. 

e. Contract Verbs in Herodotus. — Verbs in -dw in Herodotus are 
often contracted as in Attic, but sometimes when the a comes before 
an o sound it is changed to e, and the form then remains uncontracted: 
thus opéw, ὁρέωσι, ὁρέοντες, Attic ὁρῶ (-dw), etc. see. 

Verbs in -έω are usually uncontracted except when the ε is preceded 
by a vowel; then eo and eov usually contract into ev (ὃ 18a): thus ποιεῦσι, 
ἐποίευν (for Attic ποιοῦσι, ἐποίουν). from ποιῶ (-éw) do. 

Verbs in -όω are regularly contracted as in Attic. 


118 VERBS 


200. The -μι Form. —For the paradigms see 88 251- 
254. Observe that the end vowel of the stem is long 
in the singular of the indicative active (δ 170, 1); else- 
where short. 

1. In the subjunctive and optative the mode sign is 
regularly contracted with the final vowel of the theme 
(ὃ 170, 2-3); thus 7675 (subj.) for τιθέῃς, τιθείην (opt. ) 
for τιθε-ίην, from τίθημι put. 

Nore. — Three deponent verbs, δύναμαι can, ἐπίσταμαι understand, 
κρέμαμαι hang, are accented in the subjunctive and optative as if 
uncontracted: δύνωμαι, ἐπίστωμαι, κρέμωμαι ; opt. 3d sing. δύναιτο, 
ἐπίσταιτο, κρέμαιτο. 


THE FIRST AORIST SYSTEM 


. (ACTIVE AND MIDDLE) 


201. The first aorist stem is formed by adding -ca- to 
the theme: thus παιδεύω educate (theme tracdev-), aor. 
ἐ-παίδευ-σα (aorist stem παιδευσα-). 


200 a. Homer sometimes has the end vowel of -u verbs long in forms 
other than those of the singular of the indicative active: thus τιθή-μεναι, 
infinitive active of τέθημι put. 

b. Homer and Herodotus have in the third plural τιθεῖσι, διδοῦσι. etc., 
for * ride-vor,  διδο-νσι, etc. (the accent is irregular) ; but regular forms 
iaov, from εἶμι go (δ 261), and ἔᾶσι, from εἰμί be (ὃ 262 a). 

c. Homer sometimes has -# in the imperative: thus δίδωθι give. 
Herodotus in the third plural of the middle has forms with -ara:, -aro 
(Attic -vrat, -ντος ὃ 167 d): τιθέαται ἐτιθέατο. 

201 a. In Homer the first aorist (and future, § 212) of a good many 
verbs has oo, but in nearly all such cases the theme of the verb originally 
ended in o or a lingual mute (cf. § 50 a): thus ἐ-τέλεσ-σα, from τελῶ (έω) 
Jinish (theme τελεσ-, cf. τέλος end) ; ἐ-κόμισ-σα (for *€-Koud-ca), from 
κομίζω carry (theme κομιδ-}. 

b. Homer has forms of the first aorist with a variable vowel 2% 
instead of a: thus ἐβήσετο went, from Baivw; ἷξον came, from ἵκω ; ἄξετε 
lead (impy.), from ἄγω. 


THE FIRST AORIST SYSTEM 119 


1. The theme of primitive verbs usually appears in the 
first aorist with ε or with the long vowel (see § 186, 1-2): 
thus étpeyra turned, ἔτηξα melted. 


202. Vowel Verbs. — Most vowel verbs show a long 
vowel before the aorist suffix (δ 187): thus ἐῶ (-dw) allow, 
aor. eld-ca (ὃ 15); τιμῶ (-dw) honor, aor. ἐ-τίμη-σα 
(§ 15); ποιῶ (-ἐω) do, aor. ἐ-ποίη-σα; δηλῶ (-όω) 
show, aor. ἐ-δήλω-σα. For some apparent exceptions see 


ὁ 188. 


203. Mute Verbs. — A labial or palatal mute at the 
end of the stem combines with the o of the suffix, and 
forms w or & (see 88 28 and 29): thus ἔ-κοψα, from κόπτω 
cut (κοπ-}: ἔγραψα. from γράφω write (ypad-); ἐ-φύλαξα, 
from φυλάττω guard (φυλακ-}); ἔ-σφαξα, from σφάζω slay 
(σφαγ-). 

A lingual mute is dropped before the o of the suffix 
(§ 30): thus ἔ-πεισα, from πείθω persuade (πειθ-}: ἔ-σπεισα 
(see ὃ 34), from σπένδω pour (σπενδ-). 


204. Liquid Verbs. — Liquid verbs lose the o of the 
aorist suffix, and in compensation (§ 16) lengthen the 
preceding vowel: thus φαίνω show (theme dav-), aor. 
ἔφηνα ; στέλλω send (theme o7edr-), aor. ἔστειλα ; κρίνω 
distinguish (theme «xpw-), aor. ἔκρινα. 

Nore 1.— The o of the suffix was first assimilated to the liquid, 
and later, when the two liquids became one, the preceding vowel was 
lengthened in compensation (§ 16). Thus, *é€ev-ca became ἔμεννα 
(which is the Aeolic form), and finally ἔμεινα. 

Note 2. — After ὁ or p the lengthened form of a is always a; after 
other letters ἢ sometimes appears, contrary to ὃ 15, 1: thus περαίνω 
(περαν-) finish, aor. ἐπέρανα; so also Kepdaivw (κερδαν-) gain, aor. 
ἐκέρδανα, but φαίνω (pav-) show, aor. ἔφηνα. 


204 a. Homer sometimes keeps σ in the aorist after a liquid: thus 
ἦρ-σα, from dpapickw (dap-) fit; ἔ-κερ-σα, from κείρω (Kep-) shear, 


190 VERBS 


205. Three verbs — δίδωμι (60-, δω-) give, nue (é-, ἡ-) 
send, τίθημι (θε-. On-) put—form the singular of their 
aorists active with the suffix -«a: thus ἔδωκα, ἧκα, 
ἔθηκα. See ὃ 211, 8. Very rarely this form intrudes 
elsewhere: thus sometimes ἔδωκαν (= é-d0-cav, 3d plur.) 
they gave. 


INFLECTION OF THE FIRST AORIST 


206. The first aorist middle differs from the active only 
in the personal endings: thus active ἐ-παίδευ-σα, middle 
ἐ-παιδευ-σά-μην. or the paradigms see ὃ 240. 

Nore. — In the third singular of the indicative active -a changes to 


-ε: ἐπαίδευσε. The imperatives παίδευσον, παίδευσαι, and the infinitive 
παιδεῦσαι, are irregular, and cannot be satisfactorily explained. 


THE SECOND AORIST SYSTEM 
(ACTIVE AND MIDDLE) 


207. A considerable number of primitive verbs form 
their aorists without any suffix, and employ only the 
simple theme of the verb. These aorists fall into two 
classes, — those with, and those without the variable 
vowel. 

1. Consonant themes are inflected with the variable 
vowels 2; vowel themes follow the -w form of inflection. 

Nore 1.— A very few second aorists go over to the inflection of 
the first aorist: so ἔχεα (€yeva) poured (for *éyev-v, § 14, 1, note). 

Nore 2.— The stem of the second aorist always differs from the 


present stem, since otherwise its forms would be confused with those 
of the imperfect. 


207 a. In Homer the second aorist is found much more frequently 
than in Attic, and consonant themes are often inflected in the middle 
without the variable vowel : thus ἐ-δέγ-μην, from déy-oua receive ; 
from μείγ-νῦ-μι mix. Liquid themes sometimes undergo metathesis (ὃ 38) : 


thus βλῆ-το was hit, from βάλλω (theme βαλ-). 


wv 
ἔ-μικ-το, 


THE SECOND AORIST SYSTEM 121 


Nore 3.— Few verbs have both a first and a second aorist in use 
at the same time. In such case, however, the two aorists always 
differ in meaning, the first aorist being transitive, and the second 
intransitive: thus ἔστησε caused to stand, erected, ἔστην stood. 


208. Second Aorist of the -w Form. — The second aorist 
of the -» form has regularly that form of the stem with 
no vowel or with a (see §§ 14; 186, 2): thus ἐ-πτ-όμην, 
from πέττομαι fly; ἐ-τραπ-όμην, from τρέπ-ω turn; so also 
ἔτλιπ-ον, from λείπτ-ω leave (ὃ 14, 2); Eguy-ov, from φεύγ-ω 
flee (§ 14, 2 

1. The verb ἄγω lead has a reduplicated (§ 185) second 
aorist ἤγαγον (infin. ay-ay-etv, ὃ 179); so also εἶπον said, 
probably for *é-¢e-¢em-ov (from root fe7-). 


209. Second Aorist of the -μι Form. —In the second 
aorist of the -we form the stem is the simple theme of the 
verb: thus ἔ-στη-ν (στα-, otn-) stood, ἔ-δο-μεν (δο-, dw-) 
gave (1st person plural). 


INFLECTION OF THE SECOND AORIST 


210. The -» Form. — The second aorist of the -w form 
is inflected with the variable vowel &. For the paradigm 
see § 241. 

Nortr.— The following imperatives active of the second aorist 
have irregular accent: εἰπέ say, ἐλθέ come, εὑρέ find, ἰδέ see, λαβέ take ; 
but not when compounded: thus ἄπ-ελθε be off! 

211. The -μι Form. — In the -we form the endings are 
attached directly to the stem, the final vowel of which is 
long in the indicative, infinitive, and imperative (except 


208, 1a. In Homer reduplicated second aorists are rather frequent: 
thus ἐ-πέ-φραδ-ον, from φράζω declare, πέ-πιθ-ον, from πείθω persuade, 
mé-pv-ov slew (cf. φόν-ος murder), ete. 

210 a. In Homer the same verb sometimes has forms with and without 
the variable vowel: thus ἔκλυο-ν heard, imperative κλῦ-θι. 


122 VERBS 


the impv. 3d plur.): thus ἔστην stood, ἔβην went, infin. 
βῆναι, but opt. βαίην, 3d plur. impy. βάντων. 

1. The subjunctive contracts a final a, e, or o of the 
theme with the ὦ or 7 of the mode sign (§ 170, 2): thus 
θῇς for θέ-ῃς (τίθημι put), δῶ for δότω (δίδωμι give). 

2. In the optative the e of the mode sign contracts with 
the final vowel of the theme (δ 170, 3): thus θείην, θεῖμεν 
(τίθημι put). 

Nore. — But two deponent verbs, ἐπριάμην bought (§ 257) and 
ὠνήμην received profit, are accented as if uncontracted (cf. § 200, note), 


3. Three verbs, δίδωμι give, ἵημι send, τίθημι put, keep the 
vowel of their stems short throughout the second aorist ; in 
the singular of the indicative active they have forms with 
-κα (§ 205); and in the infinitive and imperative they are 
slightly peculiar. For their conjugation see 88 255, 256, 260. 


211 a. Properly, in the second aorist, as in the present, of -uc verbs, 
the long form should be found only in the singular of the indicative active 
(see § 200). So we should have sing. ἔβην, ἔβης, ἔβη, dual ἔβἄτον, etc., 
plur. ἔβἄμεν, etc. But in Attic the long vowel of the singular has crowded 
into the dual and plural, except in δίδωμι, inu, τίθημι. In Homer, as 
might be expected, we sometimes find forms with the short vowel: thus 
βάτην they (two) went, ἔ-χυ-το was poured (€xeva). 

211, 1 a. In Homer the subjunctive of the second aorist of - form is 
usually uncontracted: thus 6é-wuev, a¢-&n. But in such case the root 
vowel usually appears in its long form: thus θή-ῃ (Attic θῇς, for θέ-ῃ 9), 
 δώτη-σι Or δώ-ῃ (Attic δῷ, for 54-7). Before the endings -rov, -μεν, -τε 
of the active, and in most forms of the middle, the mode vowel is then 
short (δ 160 a): thus στή-ε-τον, δώτ-ο-μεν, βλή-ε-ται (from βάλλω throw), 
φθι-ό-μεσθα (from φθίνω waste away). 

211, 1b. In Herodotus -aw and -ew remain uncontracted in the sub- 
junctive, -aw as elsewhere becoming -ew (δ 199 6): thus στέ-ω-μεν (for 
στά-ω-μεν, Attic στῶμεν). 

211, 2 a. In Attic no second aorist optative of themes in -v- or -ι- 
happens to occur. In Homer such an optative is sometimes found: thus 
δύη (for *dun), δῦμεν (for *dumev), from δύω enter, φθίμην (for *POuunv), 
φθῖτο (for *POuro) from φθίνω waste away, perish. 


Ἐ 
᾿ 


THE FUTURE SYSTEM 1238 


THE FUTURE SYSTEM 
(ACTIVE AND MIDDLE) 


212. The stem of the future is, in general, the same as 
that of the first aorist (§ 201), except that the variable 
vowel ἐξ appears in the suffix instead of a: thus παιδεύ-ω 
educate, aor. ἐ-παίδευ-σα, fut. παιδεύ-σω (stem παιδευσξς:). 

1. Some few verbs in -@ (-é) and -afm drop the o of 
the future and contract. This happens only when the 
o of the tense sign is preceded by a short vowel (a or e) 
which in turn is preceded by a short syllable: thus τελῶ 
(-€@) finish, fut. τελῶ (for TeArA€-cw, τελέω): βιβάξω make 
go, fut. βιβῶ for (βιβά-σω, BiBaw); so also ἐχῶ (for ἐλά-σω). 
future of ἐλαύνω drive. ‘These futures are usually reck- 
oned among the Attic futures of § 215. 


ο 


213. Liquid Verbs. — Liquid verbs form their futures 
with the suffix -ew (for -eow, ὃ 37); the εἰ is contracted 
with the following vowel, as in the present of φιλῶ (-é), 
§§ 199, 249: thus φαίνω show (theme ¢dav-), fut. φανῶ, 
for φανέω. 

Nore. — Thee here is probably a mere help vowel, generated in the 


pronunciation of a liquid before o: thus *@av-cw (regularly formed 
like Av-cw) soon became *davecw, then davew, and finally φανῶ. 


214. Doric Future. — A few verbs form their future with 
a suffix -σεξ, which undergoes the regular contraction. 
This is found only in verbs which employ the future middle 
in an active meaning; such verbs have also the regular 
future in -σομαι: thus πνέω breathe, fut. πνευσοῦμαι or 


πνεύσομαι; φεύγω flee, fut. φευξοῦμαι or φεύξομαι. ‘Vhis 


213 a. A few liquid verbs in Homer and the Attic poets have a future 
in -ow (cf. ὃ 204 a): thus ὄρνυμι rouse, fut. ὄρσω. 


124 VERBS 


is the regular form of the future in the Doric dialect, and 
so it is usually called the Doric Future. 


215. Attic Future. — Verbs in -ἰζω also. take the future 
suffix -oe?, but drop the o between the two vowels (ὃ 37), 
which then contract: thus νομίζω think, fut. νομιῶ (for 
*pouicew, *vouiew). ‘This is usually called the Attic Future. 


216. Four or five verbs have no future suffix, so that 
their future tense has the form of a present: thus ἔδομαι 
shall eat, πίομαι shall drink. 


Note.— These forms are really old subjunctives with a short mode 
sign (δ 160 a), which have come to be used as futures (cf. § 555, note). 


INFLECTION OF THE FUTURE 


217. The future belongs to the -w form of inflection ; 
for the paradigms see $§ 238-259. 


THE FIRST PERFECT SYSTEM (ACTIVE) 
(PERFECT AND PLUPERFECT) 


218. The stem of the first perfect is formed by redu- 
plicating (8 178) the theme and adding the suffix -κα: 
thus A€-Av-xa, from λύω loose. 

1. A lingual mute is dropped before -ca: thus πέ-πει-κα. 
from πείθ-ω persuade. A v either disappears or is changed 
to y-nasal: thus κέ-κρι-κα, from κρίνω distinguish, but πέ- 
φαγ-κα, from φαίνω show. 

2. Vowel verbs usually have a long vowel (ὃ 187) 
before the suffix -ca: thus τε-τέμη-κα, from τιμῶ (-dw) 
honor ; πε-ποίη-κα. from ποιῶ (-€w) do. 

3. Some liquid themes undergo metathesis (§ 38), and 
so are treated as vowel themes (δ 163, 1): thus βέ-βλη-κα, 


218 a. In Homer the first perfect is found only in yowel verbs. 


THE SECOND PERFECT SYSTEM (ACTIVE) 125 


from βάλλω (Bad-) throw; κέ-κμη-κα, from κάμνω (Kap-) 
labor. 

4. Stems of one syllable with the vowel variation 9, ¢, (a) 
(ὃ 14, 1) have in the first perfect the form with a, — 
borrowed, probably, from the perfect middle (§ 224, 1, 
note): thus ἔσταλκα, from στέλλω (oTEA-, oTAA-) send ; 


ἔφθαρκα, from φθείρω (φθορ-, φθερ-. POap-) destroy. 


THE SECOND PERFECT SYSTEM (ACTIVE) 
(PERFECT AND PLUPERFECT) 


219. The stem of the second perfect (confined almost 
wholly to primitive verbs) is formed by reduplicating 
(8 178) the theme, and adding the suffix’-a@: thus yé- 
ypad-a, from γράφω (ypad-) write. 

1. Most stems ending in z, 8, «, or y change the last 
letter into the corresponding rough mute (§ 12, 2): thus 
_ βέιβλαφ-α, from βλάπτω (AraB-) injure; ἦχ-α, from ἄγω 
(ay-) lead. 

2. Verbs whose themes show the variation of long and 
short vowels (§ 15) have in the second perfect the long 
vowel (ὃ 186, 1): thus τέ-τηκ-α, from τήκω (THK-, τακ-}) 
melt. 


219 a. Properly in the perfect system (which really belongs to the -μι 
form of inflection) we should have in the singular of the indicative active 
the form of the theme with o, and elsewhere the form with no vowel or 
with a (δ 14). (Compare the inflection of οἶδα, ὃ 259.) Many peculiar 
forms in Homer are made clear by this simple fact: thus ἐΐκτην, from 
ἔοικα am like; ἐπέπιθμεν, from πέ-ποιθ-α trust ; γεγάτην (for ἔγε-γν-τὴν, 
§ 14, 1, note), from yé-yov-a have become ; πέ-πασθε (for ἔπε-παθ-τε, ὃ 26), 
from πέ-πονθ-α have suffered. So also πε-φυγ-μένος, perfect middle parti- 
ciple of φεύγω flee. So also in Attic τέττραμ-μαι, τέ-θραμ-μαι, ἔ-στραμ-μαι, 
etc. (§ 224, 1, note). 

219, 1a. Homer never makes rough a labial or palatal mute in the 
perfect active. 


126 VERBS 


3. Verbs whose themes show the vowel variation 0, ε, 
(a) (8 14) have in the second perfect the form with o 
(or ot) (ὃ 186, 2): thus té-tpod-a, from τρέφω (tpod-, 
τρεφ-, tpad-) nourish; λέ-λοιπ-α, from λείπω (λοιπ-, 
λείπ-. λιπ-}) leave. 

Nore 1.— Themes with the variation ov, ev, υ (8 14,2) should also 


have (0) ov in the second perfect, but the only example of this regu- 
lar forin is the Epic εἰλήλουθα have come. All others have ev, as 


πέφευγ-α, from φεύγω (φευγ-, φυγ-) flee. 

Nore 2.— Verbs with Attic reduplication (8 179) regularly have 
the short form of the root: thus ἀλ-ήλιφ-α, from ἀλείφω anoint. 

220. A few second perfects are formed without any 
suffix, the endings being added directly to the redupli- 
cated theme: thus ἕστα-μεν we stand, te-Ova-vat to be 
dead. Such forms are never found in the singular of 
the indicative (cf. 88 219 a and 258). 


INFLECTION OF THE PERFECTS ACTIVE 
(First anp SEconp) 

221. The first and second perfect systems are alike in 
their inflection. For the paradigms see §§ 242-243. 

Nore.—In the third singular of the indicative active τὰ changes 
to -e: πεπαίδευκε (cf. § 206, note). 

1. For the subjunctive and optative the perfect parti- 
ciple with the corresponding form of εἰμί am is very often 
used: thus πεπαιδευκὼς ὦ, πεπαιδευκὼς εἴην (cf. ὃ 227). 

2. The imperative is hardly ever found except in per- 
fects with present meaning: thus ἕσταθι stand. 


THE PLUPERFECTS ACTIVE 
(FIRST AND SECOND PLUPERFECTS) 


222. The stem of the pluperfect active is the same 
as that of the perfect active, with the substitution of ε or 


THE PERFECT MIDDLE SYSTEM eG 


n for the a of the suffix: thus Ist perf. XéAvea, Ist plup. 
ἐ-λε-λύ-κη ; 2d perf. γέγραφα, 2d plup. ἐ-γε-γράφ-η. 


INFLECTION OF THE PLUPERFECTS. ACTIVE 
(First AND SECOND) 
223. For the inflection of the pluperfects active see the 
paradigms §§ 242-243. For the augment see ὃ 176. 


THE PERFECT MIDDLE SYSTEM 
PERFECT, PLUPERFECT, AND FUTURE PERFECT 

224. The stem of the perfect middle is the reduplicated 
theme, to which the endings are attached directly: thus 
χέ-λυ-μαι, from Ave loose. 

1. The perfect middle in general agrees with the first 
perfect active in vowel changes of the theme and the 
retention or rejection of v. Examples are: 


τε-τίμη- μαι, from τιμῶ (-dw) honor. 
πε-ποίη-μαι, from ποιῶ (-éw), do. 
πέπεισ-μαι (ὃ 27, 3), from πείθ-ω persuade. 
é-oTar-pat, from στέλλω (στελ-. σταλ-} send. 
κέ-κρι-μαι, from κρίνω (κριν-} distinguish. 


βέ-βλη-μαι (8 38,1), from βάλλω (Bar-) throw. 


Nore. — Properly the perfect middle of primitive verbs with the 
vowel variation 0, ε; (a) (δὲ 14, 1 and 186, 2), should have the form of 
the theme with no vowel or a: thus τέθθραμ-μαι (τρέφω nourish), Te 
τραμεμαι (τρέπω turn), ἔτστραμ-μαι (στρέφω (urn), Eomap-par (σπείρω 
(σπερ-) sow), τέτα-μαι (for ἔτειτν-μαι (ὃ 14, 1, note), from τείνω 
(τεν-) stretch), πέπυσ-μαι (πυνθάνομαι (πευθ-, πυθ-)} learn); but the 
form of the theme with ε has often intruded: thus πέπεμ:μαι (πέμπ- 
send), πέπεισ-μαι (πείθ-ω persuade). — 

For o at the end of the stem in the perfect middle of some verbs 
see § 189. 


222 a. Ionic usually has the uncontracted forms -ea, -ea-s, -ee in the 
singular of the pluperfect : thus πεποίθεα trusted, ndee(v) knew. 


128 VERBS 


INFLECTION OF THE PERFECT AND PLUPERFECT MIDDLE 


225. 1. The inflection of the perfect middle system of 
vowel verbs may be seen in § 244. In mute or liquid 
verbs the final consonant of the theme before the personal 
endings is subject to the euphonic changes mentioned in 
δξ 25-31 and 35. ‘These may be seen from the paradigms 
§ 247. 

2. When the o at the end of the perfect middle stem 
of some verbs (8 189) comes before o in ἃ personal 
ending, the two sigmas are reduced to one (§ 35): thus 
τε-τέλεσ-μαι. τε-τέλεσαι (for ἔτε-τελεσ-σαι). from τελῶ (-€w) 
finish; see 8 211. 


226. In the third person plural of the indicative middle 
consonant stems employ the perfect participle with εἰσί 
they are for the perfect, and with ἦσαν they were for the 
pluperfect, since the endings -vtaz, -vto are regularly used 
only after a vowel: thus ἠγμένοι εἰσί, they have been led. 


227. The perfect middle subjunctive and optative (like 
the third plural of the indicative) are periphrastic. They 
are made by combining the perfect participle with the 
subjunctive and optative of εἰμί am (cf. Latin amatus sim, 
amatus essem); thus πεπαιδευμένος ὦ, πεπαιδευμένος εἴην. 


226 a. In Ionic the endings -αται, -ατο (Attic -νται, -ντο, § 107 d), are 
employed in the third plural with consonant themes, and sometimes even 
with vowel themes; before these endings 7, 8, x, y, are usually changed 
to the corresponding rough mutes: thus τε-τάχ-αται, ἐ-τε-τάχ-ατο, from 
τάττω (ταγ-) arrange (Attic τεταγμένοι εἰσί, τεταγμένοι ἦσαν). So also 
βε-βλή-ατο, from βάλλω (Bad-) throw. Herodotus is very fond of these 
endings, and uses them often with vowel verbs (the vowel before them 
being always made short): thus olké-ara (Attic ᾧκη-νται), from οἰκῶ 
(-ἐω) inhabit. 


THE FIRST AORIST PASSIVE SYSTEM 129 


Note. — A few perfects middle that have a present meaning form 
their subjunctive and optative directly from the stem: so μέμνημαι 
remember, from μιμνησκω remind ; subj. μεμνῶμαι, opt. μεμνημην or 
μεμνῴμην, 2d pers. μεμνῇτ-ο, for ἔμε:μνη-ι-(σ)ο, etc. 


THE FUTURE PERFECT 


228. The stem of the future perfect is formed by adding 
-oe. to the stem of the perfect middle. A vowel before 
-o@ is always long, although in the perfect middle it may 
have been short: thus Ae-Avd-co-wae (perf. mid. é-Av-par) 
from λύω loose; δε-δή-σο-μαι (perf. mid. déde-par) from 


δῶ (δέω) bind. 
INFLECTION OF THE FUTURE PERFECT 


229. The future perfect is inflected with the middle 
endings. It differs from the future middle only in having 
reduplication. Its meaning is almost always passive. 
For the paradigm see § 244. 


230. Future Perfect Active. — Most verbs form their 
future perfects active periphrastically by combining the 
perfect participle with ἔσομαι shall be: thus ye-ypadas 
ἔσομαι shall have written (cf. in Latin the corresponding 
passive form scriptus ero). But two perfects with present 
meaning, in frequent use, have developed a special future 
perfect active. These are τέθνηκα am dead ((ἀπο)θνήσκω 
die), fut. perf. τεθνήξω shall be dead; and ἕστηκα stand 
(ἴστημι set up), fut. perf. ἑστήξω shall stand. 


THE FIRST AORIST PASSIVE SYSTEM 


231. The stem of the first aorist passive is formed by 
adding to the theme of the verb the suffix -@e-, the ε of 
which appears as 7 in the indicative, infinitive, and imper- 

BABBITT’S GR. GRAM. — 9 


180 VERBS 


ative (except the 84 plur. impy., cf. ὃ 211): thus ἐ-λύ-θη-ν, 
from Ave loose. 

1. Before the @ of the suffix a labial or palatal mute 
(7, B, κι y) becomes codrdinate (§ 25); a lingual mute 
becomes σ (ὃ 26): thus ἐπράᾶχ-θη-ν (rpay-), from πράττω 
do; ἐ-λείφ-θη-ν (AecTT-), from λείπω leave ; ἐπείσ-θη-ν (πειθ-). 
from πείθω persuade. 

2. Vowel verbs show a vowel of the same length as in 
the perfect middle: thus ἐπτεμή-θη-ν (perf. mid. τε-τέμη-μαι). 
from τιμῶ (-dw) honor; ἐ-δό-θη-ν (perf. mid. δέ-δο- μαι), 
from δίδωμι give; é-«pl-On-v, perf. mid. κέκρι-μαι, from 
κρίνω distinguish. 

3. For the o before the suffix of some verbs (ἐτελέσθην, 
ἠκούσθην, etc.) see ὃ 189. 

4. Primitive verbs whose themes show the vowel varia- 
tion o, ε, (α) (ὃ 14) usually have in the first aorist passive 
the form with e: thus ἐ-τρέφ-θη-ν, from τρέπω (τροτ-. 
τρεπ-. Tpamr-) turn; ἐ-λείφ- θην, from λείπω (λοιπ-, AevT-, 
λιπ-}) leave. 


SECOND AORIST PASSIVE 


232. The stem of the second aorist passive is formed 
by adding the suffix -e- to the theme of the verb. This e 
appears as 7 in the indicative, infinitive, and imperative 
(except the 5d plur. impvy., cf. § 211): thus ἐ-φάν-η-ν, from 
φαίνω (pav-) show. 

1. Primitive verbs whose themes show the variation 
between a short and a long vowel (§ 13) have in the 
second aorist passive the form with the short vowei 
(8 186, 1): thus ἐ-τάκ-η-ν, from τήκ-ω (τηκ-, TaK-) 
melt. 

2. Primitive verbs whose themes show the vowel varia- 
tion o, ἐ, () (ὃ 14) have in the second aorist passive 


aga 


THE FUTURES PASSIVE {9} 


the form with a (§ 186, 2): thus ἐ-στάλ-η-ν, from στέλλω 
(στελ-, oTar-) send. 


INFLECTION OF THE AORISTS PASSIVE 
(First anp Seconp) 

233. The first and second aorists passive are alike in 
their inflection. They take the active endings (§ 166, 1), 
and closely resemble the second aorist of the -με form. 
For the paradigms see $$ 245-246. 

1. The subjunctive contracts the e of the passive suffix 
with the or ἡ of the mode sign (δ 160, 2): thus λυθῶ 
for λυ-θέ-ω (Ave loose). 

2. The optative has for mode sign -ἰη- in the singular 
and ¢ in the plural (§ 160, 1). The ¢ of the mode sign 
is contracted with the e of the suffix (§ 160, 2): thus 
λυθείην, λυθεῖμεν (AVw loose). 

Nore. —In the dual and plural -ἰη- sometimes is found as the 
mode sign, but there is little doubt that this is due to errors of 
copyists, who were influenced by the analogy of the singular. 

3. The imperative ending -&% in the first aorist passive 
becomes -7e to avoid rough mutes at the beginning of two 
successive syllables (ὃ 40): thus λύθη-τι (for Ἐλυθη-θι). 


THE FUTURES PASSIVE 
(FIRST AND SECOND FUTURES PASSIVE) 


234. The stem of the future passive is formed by 
adding -o% to the stem of the aorist passive (cf. §$ 212; 


233 a. In the third plural indicative Homer often has the ending -ν 
for -cav, always with a short vowel preceding (§ 167 c) : thus ἔ-τραφ-ε-ν 
were reared, Attic ἐ-τράφ-η-σαν. 

233, 1 a. In Homer the subjunctive of the second aorist passive has 
the same peculiar form as the second aorist active of the -u form (see 
§ 211,1a): thus φανή-ῃ (Attic φανῇ, for davé-y) from φαίνω show, δαμή-ετε 
(δ 160 a) from δάμνημι subdue. 


Poa VERBS 


228): thus λυθή-σο-μαι (aor. pass. €-AVOn-v), from λύω 
loose; φανή-σο-μαι (aor. pass. €-pavn-v), from φαίνω show. 

1. The future passive is inflected like the future middle. 
For the paradigms see §§ 245; 246, 1. 


VERBAL ADJECTIVES 


235. The stems of the verbal adjectives are formed by 
adding -το- and -τεο- to the theme, which usually has the 
same form as in the first aorist passive, except that a rough 
mute is made codrdinate before the 7 of the suffix (§ 25): 
thus, 


Aorist Passive VERBALS 
λύω Loose €-AV-Onv λυ-τός. λυ-τέος 
τιμῶ (-aw) honor ἐ-τιμήτθην τιμη-τος, τιμη-τέος 
πείθω persuade ἐ-πείσ-θην πεισ-τός, πεισ-τέος 
κρίνω distinguish ἐ-κρί-θην Kpl-T0S, κρι-τέος 
τάττω arrange (ταγ-) ἐ τάχ-θην TAK-TOS, τακ-τέος 
τρέφω nourish ἐ-θρέφ.ιθην θρεπ-τός, θρεπ-τέος 


1. The verbal adjectives belong to the first and second 
declensions of adjectives (Autos, -7, -όν ; λυτέος, -ἄ, -ov). 
See § 117. For the accent see ὃ 185, 2. 

2. The verbal in -τός expresses what has been done or 
may be done; that in -réos what needs doing: thus λυτός 
loosed or loosable ; λυτέος needing to be loosed. 


236. The meanings of the different persons, numbers, 
modes, tenses, and voices, may be seen from the following 
paradigm and synopsis of παιδεύω educate. ‘The meanings 
of the subjunctive and optative have no brief equivalent in 
English, and they must be learned from the chapter on 
Syntax. 


SYNOPSIS OF παιδεύω 


PRESENT INDICATIVE 


SYNOPSIS OF THE 


ACTIVE 


DUAL 


παιδεύετον ἣ 


( you (two) 


educate 

᾿ they (two 
παιδεύετον ] υί ) 
educate 


13: 


OF παιδεύω educate 


PLURAL 


παιδεύομεν we educate 


παιδεύετε YOU educate 


mavdevovorthey educate 


VERB παιδεύω educate 


THE PRESENT AND IMPERFECT 


SINGULAR 
1. παιδεύω 7 educate 
2. παιδεύεις you educate 
3. παιδεύει he educates 
Active 
παιδεύω 7 edu- 
cate (or am 
5 educating 
Indic. 9) 
ἐπαίδευον J was 
(educating 
Subj. παιδεύω 
Opt. ππαιδεύοιμι 
Impyv. παίδευε educate 
Infin. παιδεύειν to edu- 
cate 
Partic. παιδεύων edu- 
cating 
Indic. παιδεύσω shall 
educate 
Opt. παιδεύσοιμι 
Infin. παιδεύσειν to be 


about to edu- 
cale 

Partic. παιδεύσων about 
to educate 


Middle 


παιδεύομαι 7 educate for 
myself, get educated 
(or am getting edu- 
cated) 

ἐπαιδευόμην 7 was get- 
ting educated 

παιδεύωμαι 

παιδευοίμην 

παιδεύου get educated 

παιδεύεσθαι to get edu- 
cated 

παιδευόμενος getting 
educated 


THE FUTURE 


παιδεύσομαι 7 shall get 
educated 

παιδευσοίμην 

παιδεύσεσθαι to be about 
to get educated 


παιδευσόμενος about to 
get educated 


Passive 
The present middle is 
used also as passive 
(§ 158, 1) 


παιδευθήσομαι 7 shall 
be educated 

παιδευθησοίμην 

παιδευθήσεσθαι to be 
about to be educated 


παιδευθησόμενος about 
to be educated 


134 VERBS 
SYNOPSIS OF παιδεύω educate (continued) 
THE AORISTS 
Active Middle Passive 
Indic. ἐπαίδευσα Tedu- ἐπαιδευσάμην I got edu-| ἐπαιδεύθην was edu- 
cated cated cated 
Subj. παιδεύσω παιδεύσωμαι παιδευθῶ 
Opt. παιδεύσαιμι παιδευσαίμην παιδευθείην 
Impy. παίδευσον edu-| παίδευσαι get educated | παιδεύθητι be educated 
cate 
Infin. παιδεῦσαι to παιδεύσασθαι to get edu-| mavsev0qAvar to be edu- 
educate cated cated 
Partic. mavsevods hav-| παιδευσάμενος having παιδευθείς having been 
ing educated got educated educated 
THE PERFECT AND PLUPERFECT 
πεπαίδευκα | πεπαίδευμαι 7 have got| The perfect middle is 
Indi have educated, (oram, ὃ 534) educated used also as passive 
το τ ἐπεπαιδεύκη [[ἐπεπαιδεύμην J had got (§ 158, 1) 
had educated (orwas, ὃ. 894) educated 
5.0]. πεπαιδεύκω | πεπαιδευμένος ὦ 
Opt. πεπαιδεύκοιμι πεπαιδευμένος εἴην 
Πηρν. [πεπαίδευκε] ᾿πεπαίδευσο be educated 
Infin. πεπαιδευκέναι to | πεπαιδεῦσθαι to have got 
have educated | (orto be, ὃ 534) educated 
Partic. πεπαιδευκώς ᾿ πεπαιδευμένος having 
having edu-| got educated, or simply 
cated educated (§ 554) 
THE FUTURE PERFECT 
Active. See § 230. (Middle and) Passive. See § 229. 
Indic. πεπαιδευκὼς ἔσομαι 7 shall πεπαιδεύσομαι 7 shall have (got or) 
have educated been educated, ox shall be edu- 
cated (cf. § 538) 
Opt. πεπαιδευκὼς ἐσοίμην πεπαιδευσοίμην 
Infin. πεπαιδευκὼς ἔσεσθαι to be πεπαιδεύσεσθαι to be about to have 
about to have educated etc. (got or) been educated 
Partic. πεπαιδευσόμενος about to have (got 


VERBAL 


or) been educated 


ADJECTIVES 


παιδευτός educated or capable of being educated 
παιδευτέος needing to be educated 


237. 


Indicative. 


Ἐν Π πα πὐξυ θθνειν ος 
τὸ ὧι μα 


Subjunctive. 
μι CO 


bo 


co 


ἘΘν πα 


[Ὁ] 


- 
bo 


Optative. 
ὧϑ 


Ne 


Imperative. 


art: 


Note. 


PARADIGMS 


τω VERBS 


Present System 


παιδεύ-ω, educate 


ACTIVE 


Present 


παιδεύω 
παιδεύεις 
παιδεύει 
παιδεύε-τον 
παιδεύε-τον 
παιδεύο-μεν 
παιδεύε-τε 
παιδεύουσι 


παιδεύω 
παιδεύῃς 
παιδεύῃ 
παιδεύη-τον 
παιδεύη-τον 
παιδεύω-μεν 
παιδεύη-τε 


παιδεύωσι 
ι 
ve 
παιδεύοι-μι 


παιδεύοι-ς 
παιδεύοι 
παιδεύοι-τον 
παιδευοί-την 
παιδεύοι-μεν 
παιδεύοι-τε 
παιδεύβιε-ν 


παίδευε 
παιδευέ-τω 
παιδεύε-τον 
παιδευέ-των 
παιδεύε-τε 


3 παιδευό-ντων 


παιδεύειν 


παιδεύων, 
τουσα, -ον 


‘Imperfect 
ἐ-παίδευο-ν 
ἐ-παίδευε-ς 

> 72 
ἐ-παίδευε 
ἐ-παιδεύε-τον 
> , 
ἐ-παιδευέ-την 
ἐ-παιδεύο-μεν 
» ΄ 
ἐ-παιδεύε-τε 

> , 
ἐ-παίδευο-ν 


MippL¥ (Passive) 


Present 
παιδεύο-μαι 
παιδεύῃ; OF -εἰ 
παιδεύε-ται 
παιδεύε-σθον 
παιδεύε-σθον 
παιδευό-μεθα 
παιδεύε-σθε 
παιδεύο-νται 


παιδεύω-μαι 
παιδεύῃ 
παιδεύη-ται 
παιδεύη-σθον 
παιδεύη-σθον 
παιδευώ-μεθα 
παιδεύη-σθε 
παιδεύω-νται 


παιδενυοί-μην 
παιδεύοι-ο 
παιδεύοι-το 
παιδεύοι-σθον 
παιδευοί-σθην 
παιδενοί-μεθα 
παιδεύοι-σθε 
παιδεύοι-ντο 


παιδεύου 
παιδευέ-σθω 
παιδεύε-σθον 
παιδευέ-σθων 
παιδεύε-σθε 
παιδευέ-σθων 


παιδεύε-σθαι 


παιδευό-μενο-ς, 


τῇ; τον 


Imperfect 
> ’ 
ἐ-παιδευό-μην 
ἐ-παιδεύου 
ἐ-παιδεύε-το 
ἐ-παιδεύε-σθον 
ἐ-παιδευέ-σθην 
» " 
ἐ-παιδευό-μεθα 
ἐ-παιδεύε-σθε 
ἐ-παιδεύο-ντο 


— For an explanation of some of the forms see § 170, notes 1-3. 


190 ' PARADIGMS OF -@w VERBS 


Future System. 


238. Vowel Verbs. 239. Liquid Verbs. 
παιδεύ-ω educate. φαίνω (φαν-) show. 
ACTIVE. MIDDLE. ACTIVE. MiIppie. 
Future. Future (contracted). 
(S. 1 παιδεύσω παιδεύσο-μαι φανῶ (-éw) φανοῦμαι (-έο-) 
2 παιδεύσεις παιδεύσῃ ον -εἰ φανεῖς (-έει) φανῇ or-et (ἔῃ οὐ -έει) 
9 παιδεύσει παιδεύσε-ται φφανεῖ (-έει) φανεῖται (-ée-) 


D.2 παιδεύσε-τον παιδεύσε-σθον φανεῖ-τον (-έε-) φανεῖσθον (-έε-) 
3 παιδεύσε-τον παιδεύσε-σθον φανεῖ-τον {(-έε-) φανεῖσθον (-έε-) 

P. 1 παιδεύσο-μεν παιδευσό-μεθα φανοῦ-μεν (-έο-) φανούμεθα (-εό-) 
2 παιδεύσε-τε παιδεύσε-σθε φανεῖ-τε (-έε-) φανεῖσθε (-έε-) 

ἰ ὃ παιδεύσουσι παιδεύσο-νται φανοῦσι (-έου-) φανοῦνται (-έο-) 


Indicative. 


No No 
Subjunctive Subjunctive 


S. 1 παιδεύσοι-μι παιδευσοί-μην davoin-v (-εοίην) φανοί-μην (-εοί-) 

2 παιδεύσοι-ς παιδεύσοι-ο φανοίη-ς (-εοίης) φανοῖ-ο (έοιο) 
Ps 3 παιδεύσοι παιδεύσοι-το davoin(-eoin) φανοῖ-το (-έοι-) 
Ξ | D.2 παιδεύσοι-τον παιδεύσοι-σθον φανοῖ-τον (-έοι-) φανοῖ-σθον (-έοι-) 
Ξ 3 παιδευσοί-την παιδευσοί-σθην φανοί-την (-εοί-) φανοί-σθην (-εοί-) 
© | P. 1 παιδεύσοι-μεν παιδευσοί-μεθα φανοῖ-μεν (-έοι-) φανοί-μεθα (-εοί-) 

 παιδεύσοι-τε παιδεύσοι-σθε φανοῖ-τε (-έοι-) φανοῖ-σθε (-έοι-) 

3 παιδεύσοιετν παιδεύσοιτ-ντο φανοῖε-ν (-έοι-) φανοῖ-ντο (-έοι-) 

No No 
Imperative ‘ Imperative 
Infin. παιδεύσεν παιδεύσετσθαι φανεῖν (-έειν) φανεῖ-σθαι (-έε-) 
Part. παιδεύσων, παιδευσό-μενος, φανῶν (-έων), davov-pevos (-c6-), 
τουσα, -ον τῇ; τον -otvoa, -οῦν τῇ. τον 


Norn. — For an explanation of some of the forms see § 170, notes 1-8. 


Optative. 


Subjunctive. 
a A ε----- 
ἘΣ ἘΞ 


Imperative. 


‘as 
3 
ἘΠῚ 
= . 
on) 
oO 
= 
SP. 


PARADIGMS OF -@ VERBS 


13 


240. First Aorist System. 241. Second Aorist System. 


παιδεύ-ω educate. 


ACTIVE. 


MIpDLE. 


1st Aorist. 


ἐ-παίδευσα 

ἐ-παίδευσα-ς 

-παίδευσε 
αιδεύσα-τον 


-π 

LA 
-παιδευσά-την 
ἐ-π 


αιδεύσα-μεν 
ἐ-παιδεύσα-τε 
ἐ-παίδευσα-ν 
παιδεύσω 
παιδεύσῃς 
παιδεύσῃ 
παιδεύση-τον 
παιδεύση-τον 
παιδεύσω-μεν 
παιδεύση-τε 
παιδεύσωσι 


παιδεύσαι-μι 


» A 
ἐ-παιδευσά-μην 
ἐ-παιδεύσω 
ἐ-παιδεύσα-το 
ἐ-παιδεύσα-σθον 
> lA 
ἐ-παιδευσά-σθην 
» ΄ 
ἐ-παιδευσά-μεθα 
> ΄ 
ἐ-παιδεύσα-σθε 
ἐ-παιδεύσα-ντο 


παιδεύσω-μαι 
παιδεύσῃ 
παιδεύση-ται 
παιδεύση-σθον 
παιδεύση-σθον 
παιδευσώ-μεθα 
παιδεύση-σθε 
παιδεύσω-νται 


παιδευσαί-μην 


παιδεύσειας. -σαις παιδεύσαι-ο 


παιδεύσειε, -σαι 


παιδεύσαι-τον 
παιδευσαί-την 
παιδεύσαι-μεν 
παιδεύσαι-τε 


παιδεύσαι-το 
παιδεύσαι-σθον 
παιδευσαί-σθην 
παιδευσαί-μεθα 
παιδεύσαι-σθε 


παιδεύσειαν, -αιε-ν παιδεύσαι-ντο 


παίδευσον 
παιδευσά-τω 
παιδεύσα-τον 
παιδευσά-των 


᾿ 
2 παιδεύσα-τε 


παιδευσά-ντων 
παιδεῦσαι 


παιδεύσας, 
-σᾶσα, -σαν 


παίδευσαι 
παιδευσά-σθω 
παιδεύσα-σθον 
παιδευσά-σθων 
παιδεύσα-σθε 
παιδευσά-σθων 


παιδεύσα-σθαι 


παιδευσά-μενος, 
τῇ; τὸν 


λείπω (Aour-, λειπ-, λιπ-, § 14, 2 


ACTIVE. MIpDLE. 
2d Aorist. 
ἔλιπον ἐ-ςλιπό-μην 
€-Autre-s ἐ-λίπου 
ἔνλιπε ἐ-λίπε-το 
ἐ-λίπεττον ἐ-λίπε-σθον 


ἐ-λιπέ-την 
ἐ-λίπο-μεν 
ἐ-λίπε-τε 
ἔλλιπο-ν 
λίπω 
λίπῃς 
λίπῃ 
λίπη-τον 
λίπη-τον 
λίπω-μεν 
λίπη-τε 
λίπωσι 
λίποι-μι 
λίποι-ς 
λίποι 
λίποι-τον 
λιποί-την 
λίποι-μεν 
λίποι-τε 
λίποιε-ν 
λίπε 
λιπέ-τω 
λίπε-τον 
λιπέ-των 
λίπε-τε 
λιπό-ντων 
λιπεῖν 


λιπών, 


τοῦσα, -όν 


λίπη-ται 
λίπη-σθον 
λίπη-σθον 
λιπώ-μεθα 
λίπη-σθε 
λίπω-νται 
λιποί-μην 
λίποι-ο 
λίποι-το 
λίποι-σθον 
λιποί-σθην 
λιποί-μεθα 
λίποι-σθε 
λίποι-ντο 


λιποῦ 
λιπέ-σθω 
λίπε-σθον 
λιπέ-σθων 
λίπε-σθε 
λιπέσθων 
λιπέ-σθαι 


λιπό-μενος, 
τῇ; τον 


Nore. --- For an explanation of some of the forms see ὃ 170, notes 1-3. 
The first aorist infinitive active παιδεῦσαι is irregular in accent (ὃ 185). 
In the second aorist the 2d singular of the imperative middle, the intinitives 
active and middle, and the participle active are irregular in accent (§ 185). 


138 PARADIGMS OF -@ VERBS 


242. First Perfect System. 


παιδεύ-ω educate. 
ACTIVE. 

Ist Perfect. 

πε-παίδευκα 


Ist Pluperfect. 
1 ἐ-πε-παιδεύκη 
2 πε-παίδευκα-ς ἐ-πε-παιδεύκη-ς 


243. Second Perfect System. 
λείπω (λοιπ-, λειπ-, λιπ-, § 14, 2) 


leave. 
ACTIVE. 
2d Perfect. 2d Pluperfect. 


λέλοιπα ἐ-λελοίπη 


λέλοιπα-ς ἐ-λελοίπη-ς 


ῷ 3 πε-παίδευκε ἐ-πε-παιδεύκει(ν) λέλοιπε ἐ-λελοίπει(ν) 
Ξ 1.2 πε-παιδεύκα-τον ἐ-πε-παιδεύκε-τον λελοίπα-τον ἐ-λελοίπε-τον 
Ξ Ὁ. πε-παιδεύκα-τον ἐ-πε-παιδευκέ- την λελοίπα-τον ἐ-λελοιπέ-την 
& | P. 1 πε-παιδεύκα-μεν ἐ-πε-παιδεύκε-μεν λελοίπα-μεν ἐ-λελοίπε-μεν 
2 πε-παιδεύκα-τε ἐ-πε-παιδεύκε-τε λελοίπα-τε ἐ-λελοίπε-τε 
ὃ πε-παιδεύκασι ἐ-πε-παιδεύκε-σαν λελοίπασι ἐ-λελοίπε-σαν 
S. 1 πε-παιδεύκω (See also λελοίπω (See also 
: 2 πε-παιδεύκης ὃ 221, 1.) λελοίπῃἘς ὃ 221, 1.) 
᾿Ξ 9. πε-παιδεύκῃ λελοίπῃ 
5 | D.2 πε-παιδεύκη-τον λελοίπη-τον 
Ξ Ι Ὁ πε-παιδεύκη-τον λελοίπη-τον 
= | P.1 πε-παιδεύκω-μεν λελοίπω-μεν 
Ο 
2 πε-παιδεύκη-τε λελοίπη-τε 
| 58 .πε-παιδεύκωσι λελοίπωσι 
S. 1 πε-παιδεύκοι-μι or -οίητν (See also λελοίποι-μι or -οίη-ν (See 
 πε-παιδεύκοι-ς “᾿ -oin-s ὃ 221,1.) λελοίποι-ς ‘+ -οίη-ς also 
᾿ 9. πε-παιδεύκοι ‘* -οίη λελοίποι “ -οη ὃ 221, 
2 | D.2 πε-παιδεύκοι-τον λελοίποι-τον iS) 
= 5 πε-παιδευκοί-την λελοιποί-την 
© | P. 1 πε-παιδεύκοι-μεν λελοίποι-μεν 
|  πε-παιδεύκοι-τε λελοίποι-τε 
ἰ[.- 38 πε-παιδεύκοιε-ν λελοίποιε-ν 
S. 2 [πε-παίδευκε (See also [λέλουπε (See also 
2 3 πε-παιδευκέττω ὃ 221, 2.) λελοιπέ-τω ὃ 221, 2.) 
Ξ 1). 2 πε-παιδεύκε-τον λελοίπε-τον 
ῷ | 9. πε-παιδευκέ-των λελοιπέ-των 
= | P. 2 πε-παιδεύκε-τε λελοίπε-τε 
2 3 πε-παιδευκό-ντων] λελοιπό-ντων] 
Infin. πε-παιδευκέ-ναι λελοιπέ-ναι 
Part. πε-παιδευκώς, -κυῖα, -κός λελοιπώς, -υἷα, -ός 


Note. — For an explanation of some of the forms see ὃ 170, notes 1-3. 
The infinitive and participle active are irregular in accent (§ 185). 


PARADIGMS OF -ω VERBS 


1389 


244. Perfect Middle System 


Perfect 
S. 1 πε-παίδευ-μαι 
2 qme-mratdev-car 


3 πε-παίδευ-ται 
D.2 πε-παίδευ-σθον 


Indicative. 


P. 1 πε-παιδεύ-μεθα 
2 πε-παίδευ-σθε 
πε-παίδευ-νται 


co 


| 
3 πε-παίδευ-σθον 
| 
( 


eo 


3 


ςς 


Optative. 
Re ae RN PS 
Ὁ p 

cob oo τὸ μὰ 


2 πε-παιδευμένω (-α, -w) 


Pe 

παιδεύ-ω educate 

MIppLeE (Passive) 
Pluperfect 

ἐ-πε-παιδεύ-μην 
ἐ-πε-παίδευ-σο 
ἐ-πε-παίδευ-το 

> , 
ἐ-πε-παίδευ-σθον 

> ΄ 
ἐ-πε-παιδεύ-σθην 

> A 
ἐ-πε-παιδεύ-μεθα 
ἐ-πε-παίδευ-σθε 
ἐ-πε-παίδευ-ντο 


(5. 1 πε-παιδευμένος (-ἡ; -ov) ὦ 
: | 9 ec ἧς 
o ‘ A 
iB | 3 rf 0 
Ὁ | D.2 πε-παιδευμένω (-α, -ὦ) ἦτον 
ΞῚ 9 τ ἦτον 
2 > a a 
ΕΞ P. 1 πε-παιδευμένοι (-αι, -α) ὦμεν 
Ἶ 2 te ἦτε 
3 BC ὦσι 


πε-παιδευμένος (-η: -ον) εἴην 


εἴης 

εἴη 

εἶτον ΟΥ εἴητον 
εἴτην ““ εἰήτην 


P. 1 πε-παιδευμένοι (-at, -α) εἶμεν ““ εἴημεν 


2 ςς 


9 ςς 


S. 2 πε-παίδευ-σο 


gv 9. πε-παιδεύ-σθω 
Ξ D.2 πε-παίδευ-σθον 
H 9 A 
® 9. πε-παιδεύ-σθων 
»ὕἝ 
Ξ. ΙΗ P. 2 πε-παίδευ-σθε 
-- 

8 πε-παιδεύ-σθων 
Infin. πε-παιδεῦ-σθαι 
Part. 


εἶτε 
elev 


‘* εἴητε 
‘* εἴησαν 


πε-παιδευ-μένος, -ἡ; τον 


Future Perfect 
πεπαιδεύσο-μαι 
πεπαιδεύσῃ ΟἿ᾽ -εἰ 
πεπαιδεύσε-ται 
πεπαιδεύσε-σθον 
πεπαιδεύσε-σθον 
πεπαιδευσό-μεθα 
πεπαιδεύσε-σθε 
πεπαιδεύσο-νται 


No 
Subjunctive 


πεπαιδευσοί-μην 
πεπαιδεύσοι-ο 
πεπαιδεύσοι-το 
πεπαιδεύσοι-σθον 
πεπαιδευσοί-σθην 
πεπαιδευσοί-μεθα 
πεπαιδεύσοι-σθε 
πεπαιδεύσοι-ντο 


No 
Imperative 


πεπαιδεύσε-σθαι 


πεπαιδευσό-μενος, -ἡ; -OV 


Nore. — The infinitive and participle of the perfect middle are irregu- 


lar in accent (§ 185). 


140 


Indiéative. 


—~\ — 


Subjunctive. 


Optative. 
Bh py 2 ER ἘΠῚ τ 


Imperative. 


1. 


Norr. — For an explanation of some of the forms see 
For the accent of the aorist subjunctive and optative see 


S. 


D. 


les 


1 


Co bo 


co bo 


Co bo μα 


ww bw μα 


Oo br to we CO 


co bo 


bo eR 


a 


PARADIGMS OF -@ VERBS 


245. First Passive System 


παιδεύ-ω educate 


1st Aorist 
ἐ-παιδεύθη-ν 
ἐ-παιδεύθη-ς 
ἐ-παιδεύθη 
ἐ-παιδεύθη-τον 
ἐ-παιδευθή-την 
ἐ-παιδεύθη-μεν 
ἐ-παιδεύθη-τε 
ἐ-παιδεύθη-σαν 
παιδευθῶ 
παιδευθῇς 
παιδευθῇ 
παιδευθῆ τον 
παιδευθῆ-τον 
παιδευθῶ-μεν 
παιδευθῆ-τε 
παιδευθῶσι 
παιδευθείη-ν 
παιδευθείη-ς 
παιδευθείη 


παιδευθεῖ-τον [-είητον] 
παιδευθεί-την [-ειἰήτην] 
παιδευθεῖ-μεν | -είημεν]) 


παιδευθεῖ-τε [-είητε] 


παιδευθεῖε-ν [-εἰησαν] 


παιδεύθη-τι 
παιδευθή-τω 
παιδεύθη-τον 
παιδευθή-των 
παιδεύθη-τε 
παιδευθέ-ντων 


παιδευθῆ-ναι 


παιδευθείς, 
-εἶσα, -έν 


Ist Future 
παιδευθήσο-μαι 
παιδευθήσῃ OF -εἰ 
παιδευθήσε-ται 
παιδευθήσε-σθον 
παιδευθήσε-σθον 
παιδευθησό-μεθα 
παιδευθήσε-σθε 
παιδευθήσο-νται 


Νο 
Subjunctive 


παιδευθησοί-μην 
παιδευθήσοι-ο 
παιδευθήσοι-το 
παιδευθήσοι-σθον 
παιδευθησοί-σθην 
παιδευθησοί-μεθα 
παιδευθήσοι-σθε 
παιδευθήσοι-ντο 


No 
Imperative 


παιδευθήσε-σθαι 


παιδευθησό-μενος. 
τῇ; τον 


246. Second Passive System 
φαίνω (pav-) appear 


2d Aorist 


φανεῖ-τον [-einTov | 
φανεί-την [-εἰήτην] 
φανεῖ-μεν [-είημεν] 
φανεῖ-τε [-είητε] 
φανεῖε-ν [-εἴησαν] 


φάνη-θι 
φανή-τω 
φάνη-τον 
φανή-των 
φάνη-τε 
φανέ-ντων 
φανῆ-ναι 


φανείς, 
-εἶσα. -έν 


The future passive of φαίνω (φανήσομαι) is inflected exactly like 
παιδευθήσομαι. 


§ 170, notes 1-3. 
§ 233, 1-2. The 


infinitive and participle of the aorist are irregular in accent (§ 185). 


PARADIGMS OF -@w VERBS 147 


247. In the perfect and pluperfect middle of stems end- 
ing inaconsonant various euphonic changes occur (δ 225). 
λείπω (λειπ-, § 14,2) ἄγω (ay-) πείθω (πειθ-, ὃ 14,2) φαίνω (dar-) 


leave. lead. persuade. show. 
PERFECT INDICATIVE. 
S. 1 λέλειμ-μαι ἦγ-μαι πέ-πεισ-μαι πέ-φασ-μαι 
2 λέλειψαι ἦξαι πέ-πεισαι [πέτφαν-σαι] 
3 λέλειπ-ται ἦκ-ται πέ-πεισ-ται πέ-τφαν-ται 
D.2 λέλειφ-θον ἦχ-θον πέ-πεισθον πέτφαν-θον 
3 λέλειφ-θον ἤχ-θον πέ-πεισθον πέ-φαν-θον 
P. 1 λε-λείμ-μεθα ἤγ-μεθα πε-πείσ-μεθα πε-φάσ-μεθα 
2 λέλειφ-θε ἤχεθε πέ-πεισθε πέ-φαν-θε 
3 λεελειμ-μένοι εἰσί πηγ-μένοι εἰσί πε-πεισ- μένοι εἰσί πε-φασ-μένοι εἰσί 
PLUPERFECT INDICATIVE. 
S. 1 €Ae-Acip-pnv ἤγ-μην ἐ-πε-πείσ-μην ἐ-πε-φάσ-μην 
2 ἐπλέτλειψο ἦξο ἐ-πέ-πεισο [ἐ-πέ φαν-σο] 
3 ἐλέλειπ-το ἦκ-το ἐ-πέ-πεισ-το ἐ-πέτφαν-το 
1). 2 ἐςτλέλειφ-θον ἦχ-θον ἐ πέ-πεισθον ἐ-πέφφαν-θον 
3 ἐ-λε-λείφ-θην ἤχ-θην ἐ-πε-πείσθην ἐ-πε-φάν-θην 
. 1 ἐλε-λείμ-μεθα ἤγ-μεθα ἐ-πε-πείσ-μεθα ἐ-πε-τφάσ-μεθα 
2 ἐλέτλειφ-θε ἦχοθε ἐ-πέ-πεισθε ἐ-πέφαν-θε 
3 λε-λειμ-μένοι ἦσαν ἠγ-μένοι ἦσαν πε-πεισ-μένοι ἦσαν πε-φασ- μένοι ἦσαν 
PERFECT SUBJUNCTIVE AND OPTATIVE. 
λε-λειμ-μένος ὦ ἠγ-μένος ὦ πε-πεισ-μένος ὦ πε-φασ-μένος ὦ 
λε-λειμ-μένος εἴην ἠγ-μένος εἴην πε-πεισ-μένος εἴην πε-φασ-μένος εἴην 
PERFECT IMPERATIVE. 
. 2 λέλειψο neo πέ-πεισο [πέτφαν-σο] 
9. λε-λείφ-θω ἤχ-θω πε-πείσθω πε-φάν-θω 
1). 2 λέλειφ-θον ἦχ-θον πέ-πεισθον πέ-φαν-θον 
9. λε-λείφ-θων ἤχ-θων πε-πείσθων πε-φάν-θων 
Ῥ. 2 λέλειφ-θε ἦχεθε πέ-πεισθε πέ-φαν-θε 
3 λε-λείφ-θων ἤχ-θων πε-πείσθων πε-φάν-θων 
PERFECT INFINITIVE AND PARTICIPLE. 
λε-λεῖφ-θαι ἦχ-θαι πε-πεῖσ-θαι πε-φάν-θαι 
λε-λειμ-μένος ἠγ-μένος πε-πεισ-μένος πε-φασ-μένος 


1. Like λέλειμμαι are inflected all stems of the perfect middle ending 
in a labial mute. But stems in -u7- lose the 7 before all endings begin- 
ning with w: thus πέπεμμαι (for ἔπε-πεμπ-μαι), πέπεμψαι, etc., from πέμπω 
(areurr-) send. 

2. Like ἦγμαι are inflected all stems of the perfect middle ending in a 
palatal mute. But stems in -yy- or -yx- lose a final mute before all end- 
ings beginning with w: thus ἐλήλεγ-μαι (for Ἐἐληλεγχ-μαι), from ἐλέγχω 
(édeyx-) convict (§ 179). 

3. Like πέπεισμαι are inflected all stems of the perfect middle ending 
in o or a lingual mute, 


Indicative. 


Subjunctive. 


Optative. 
——$—SSSS eS 


Imperative. 


N ) 


wow be 


Infin. 


Part. 


bo co bo 


nN 


to bo Co bw Co 


co 


bo μ᾿ 


DDoreonmw wh μα ee) 


iJ) 


co bo Co 


PARADIGMS OF -w VERBS 


Present System of Contract Verbs in -aw 


τιμῶ (τιμά-ω), honor 


ACTIVE 


Present Imperfect 
ἐτίμω-ν (-aov) 
τιμᾷς (-ders) ἐτίμα-ς (-aes) 
τιμᾷ (-άει) ἐτίμα (-αε) 
τιμᾶ-τον (-de-) ἐτιμᾶ-τον (-de-) 
τιμᾶ-τον (-de-) ἐτιμά-την (-aé-) 
τιμῶ-μεν (-do-) ἐττμῶ-μεν (-do-) 
τιμᾶ-τε (-de-) 
τιμῶσι (-άου-) ἐτίμων (-αον) 


τιμῶ (-ἀω) 


ἐτιμᾶ-τε (-άε-) 


τιμῶ (-dw) 

τῖμᾷς (-dns) 
τιμᾷ (-ἀῃ) 
τιμᾶ-τον (-ἀητον) 
τιμᾶ-τον (-ἀητον) 
τιμῶ-μεν (-άωμεν) 
τιμᾶ-τε (-ἀητε) 
τιμῶσι (-άωσι) 


τιμῴη-ν(-αοί.) [τμῷομι (-dor-)] 
τιμῴη-ς (-αοί-) [Tings (-dovs) | 
Tipe (-aol-) [Tipe (-dor)]} 
τιμῷ-τον (-ἀοιτον) 

τιμῴ-την (-αοίτην) 

τιμῷ-μεν (-ἀοιμεν) 

τιμῷ-τε (-άοιτε) 

TIp@e-v (-dover) 


τίμα (-ae) 

τιμά-τω (-aéTw) 
τιμᾶ-τον (-άετον) 
Tipa-tev (-αέτων) 
τιμᾶ-τε (-άετε) 
τιμώ-ντων (-αόντων) 


τιμᾶν (-άειν) 


τιμῶν (-ἀων), -ὥσα, -ὥν 


Mippie (Passive) 


Present Imperfect 


ἐτιμώ-μην (-a0-) 
ἐτιμῶ (-dov) 
ἐτῖμᾶ-το (-de-) 
ἐτιμᾶ-σθον (-de-) 
ἐτιμά-σθην (-aé-) 
ἐττμώ-μεθα (-ad-) 
ἐτιμᾶ-σθε (-de-) 
é 


τιμῶ-μαι (-cdo-) 
τιμᾷ (-ἀῃ or -ἀει) 
τιμᾶ-ται (-de-) 
τιμᾶ-σθον (-de-) 
τιμᾶ-σθον (-de-) 
τιμώ-μεθα (-αό-) 
τιμᾶ-σθε (-41ε-) 
τιμῶ-νται (-do-) 


τιμῶ-ντο (-do-) 
τιμῶ-μαι (-άωμαι) 

τιμᾷ (-ἀῃ) 

τιμᾶ-ται (-άηται) 

τιμᾶ-σθον (-άησθον) 

τιμᾶ-σθον (-άησθον) 

τιμώ-μεθα (-αώμεθα) 

τιμᾶ-σθε (-άησθε) 

τιμῶ-νται (-άωνται) 


τιμῴ-μην (-aolunv) 
τιμῷ-ο (-ἀοιο) 
τιμῷ-το (-άοιτο) 
τιμῷ-σθον (-ἀοισθον) 
τιμῴ-σθην (-αοίσθην) 
τιμῴ-μεθα (-αοίμεθα) 
τιμῷ-σθε (-ἀοισθε) 
τιμῷ-ντο (-άοιντο) 


τιμῶ (-ἀου) 
τιμά-σθω (-αέσθω) 
τιμᾶ-σθον (-άεσθον) 
τιμά-σθων (-αέσθων) 
τιμᾶ-σθε (-άεσθε) 
τιμά-σθων (-αέσθων) 


τιμᾶ-σθαι (-άεσθαι) 


τιμώ-μενος (-ad), -η, -ον 


249. 


PARADIGMS OF -@ VERBS 143 


Present System of Contract Verbs in -ew 


φιλῶ (φιλέ-ω) love 
ACTIVE Mrpp.e (Passive) 


Present Imperfect Present Imperfect 


(S. 1 φιλῶ (-éw) ἐφίλου-ν (-cov) φιλοῦ-μαι (-έο-) ἐφιλού-μην (-€6-) 


Indicative. 


= 


Subjunctive. 


Optative. 


Imperative. 
/ 


eee 
mM 


— 
— 


rg 


- 


"Ὁ 


Infin. 


Part: 


2 φιλεῖς (-ders) ἐφίλει-ς (~ees) φιλεῖ (-έῃ or -έει) ἐφιλοῦ (-έου) 
9. φιλεῖ (-έει) ἐφίλει {(-εε) φιλεῖ-ται (-έε-) ἐφιλεῖ-το (-έε-) 


. 2 φιλεῖ-τον (-έε-) ἐφιλεῖ-τον (-έε-) φιλεῖ-σθον (-έε-) ἐφιλεῖ-σθον (-έε-) 


3 φιλεῖ-τον (-έε-) ἐφιλεί-την (-εέ-) φιλεῖ-σθον (-έε-) ἐφιλεί-σθην (-εέ-) 


. 1 φιλοῦ-μεν (-ἐο-) ἐφιλοῦ-μεν (-έο-) φιλού-μεθα (-εό-) ἐφιλού-μεθα (-εό-) 


2 φιλεῖ-τε (-έε-) ἐφιλεῖ-τε (-ἐε-) φιλεῖ-σθε (-έε-) ἐφιλεῖ-σθε (-έε-) 
3 φιλοῦσι (-ἐου-) ἐφίλουν (-cov) φιλοῦ-νται (-έο-) ἐφιλοῦ-ντο (-έο-) 


. 1 φιλῶ (- day φιλῶ-μαι (-έωμαι) 
2 φιλῇς (-έῃς) φιλῇ (-€7) 
3 φιλῇ (-én) φιλῆ-ται (-ἔηται) 
2 φιλῆ-τον (-έητον) φιλῆ-σθον (-έησθον) 
3 φιλῆ-τον (-έητον) φιλῆ-σθον (-έησθον) 
. 1 φιλῶ-μεν (-έωμεν) φιλώ-μεθα (-εώμεθα) 
2 φιλῆ-τε (-énTe) φιλῆ-σθε (-έησθε) 
3 φιλῶσι (-έωσι) φιλῶ-νται (-έωνται) 


. 1 φιλοίη-ν (-εοί-) [φιλοῖ-μι (-ἐοι-)}] φιλοί-μην (-εοίμην) 


2 φιλοίη-ς (-εοί-) [φιλοῖ-ς (-ἔοις)] φιλοῖ-ο (-έοιο) 
3 φιλοίη (-εοί-) [φιλοῖ (-έοι)}}] φιλοῖ-το (-έοιτο) 


2 φιλοῖ-τον (-έοιτον) φιλοῖ-σθον (-έοισθον) 
3 φιλοί-την (-εοίτην) φιλοί-σθην (-εοίσθην) 
1 φιλοῖ-μεν (-έοιμεν) φιλοί-μεθα (-εοίμεθα) 
2 φιλοῖ-τε (-έοιτε) φιλοῖ-σθε (-έοισθε) 
3 φιλοῖε-ν (-ἐοιεν) φιλοῖ-ντο (-έοιντο) 
. 2 φίλει (-εε) φιλοῦ (-έου) 
9. φιλεί-τω (-εέτω) φιλεί-σθω (-εέσθω) 
2 φιλεῖ-τον (-έετον) φιλεῖ-σθον (-έεσθον) 
8 φιλεί-των (-εέτων) φιλεί-σθων (-εέσθων) 
. 2 φιλεῖ-τε (-έετε) φιλεῖ-σθε (-έεσθε) 
3 φιλού-ντων(-εόντων) φιλεί-σθων (-εέσθων) 
φιλεῖν (-έειν) φιλεῖ-σθαι (-έεσθαι) 


φιλῶν (-έων), -οὔσα, -οῦν φιλού-μενος (-εό-), -ἡ; -ov 


144 PARADIGMS OF -w VERBS 


250. Present System of Contract Verbs in -ow 


δηλῶ (δηλό-ω) manifest 
ACTIVE MIDDLE (PASSIVE) 


Present Imperfect Present Imperfect 
S. 1 δηλῶ (-dw) ἐδήλου-ν (-oov) δηλοῦ-μαι (-όο-) ἐδηλού-μην (-06-) 
2 δηλοῖς (-ders) ἐδήλου-ς (-οες) δηλοῖ (-όῃ or -όει) ἐδηλοῦ (-dov) 
9. δηλοῖ (-όει) ἐδήλου (-οε) δηλοῦ-ται (-όε-) ἐδηλοῦ-το (-όε-) 
1). 2 δηλοῦ-τον(-όε-) ἐδηλοῦ-τον (-όε-) δηλοῦ-σθον (-όε-) ἐδηλοῦ-σθον (-de-) 
| 3 δηλοῦ-τον(-όε-) ἐδηλού-την (-οέ-) δηλοῦ-σθον (-de-) ἐδηλού-σθην (-οέ-) 
| P. 1 δηλοῦ-μεν (-όο-) ἐδηλοῦ-μεν (-όο-) δηλού-μεθα (-06-) ἐδηλού-μεθα (-06-) 
ὶ 


Indicative. 


2 δηλοῦ-τε (-de-) ἐδηλοῦ-τε (-de-) δηλοῦ-σθε (-de-) ἐδηλοῦ-σθε (-de-) 
3 δηλοῦσι (-dov-) ἐδήλουν (-oov) δηλοῦ-νται (-όο-) ἐδηλοῦ-ντο (-όο-) 


( 5. 1 δηλῶ (-όω) δηλῶ-μαι (-όωμαι) 
| 2 δηλοῖς (-όῃς) δηλοῖ (-όῃ) 
£ 3 δηλοῖ (-6ῃ) δηλῶ-ται (-ὀηται) 
Ξ | D. 2 δηλῶ-τον (-όητον) δηλῶ-σθον (-όησθον) 
= 3 δηλῶ-τον (-όητον) δηλῶ-σθον (-όησθον) 
= P. 1 δηλῶ-μεν (-όωμεν) δηλώ-μεθα (-οώμεθα) 
᾿ 2 δηλῶ-τε (-όητε) δηλῶ-σθε (-όησθε) 
3 δηλῶσι (-dwor) δηλῶ-νται (-όωνται) 
S. 1 δηλοίη-ν (-οοί-) [δηλοῖ-μι (-όοι-)] δηλοί-μην (-οοίμην) 
| 2 δηλοίη-ς (-o0f-) [δηλοῖ-ς (-όοις})}] δηλοῖ-ο (-όοιο) 
ὡ | 9. δηλοίη (-ool-) [δηλοῖ (-doc)] δηλοῖ-το (-do:T0) 
-& | D. 2 δηλοῖ-τον (-ὀοιτον) δηλοῖ-σθον (-όοισθον) 
Ξ ᾿ 3 δηλοί-την (-οοίτην) δηλοί-σθην (-οοίσθην) 
S | P. 1 δηλοῖ-μεν (-όοιμεν) δηλοί-μεθα (-οοίμεθα) 
| 2 δηλοῖ-τε (-όοιτε) δηλοῖ-σθε (-όοισθε) 
3 δηλοῖε-ν (-dorev) δηλοῖ-ντο (-όοιντο) 
S. 2 δήλου (-οε) δηλοῦ (-dov) 
© | 3 δηλού-τω (-οέτω) δηλού-σθω (-οέσθω) 
= 1). 2 δηλοῦ-τον (-όετον) δηλοῦ-σθον (-όεσθον) 
ΡΙ 3 δηλού-των (-οέτων) δηλού-σθων (-οέσθων) 
Ξ | BP. 2 δηλοῦ-τε (-dere) δηλοῦ-σθε (-όεσθε) 
| 3 δηλούντων (-οὀόντων) δηλού-σθων (-οέσθων) 
Infin. δηλοῦν (-όειν) δηλοῦ-σθαι (-όεσθαι) 


Part. δηλῶν (-dwr), -οῦσα, -odv ϑηλού-μενος (-06-), -n, τον 


251. 
S.1 
2 
ἘΣ 8 
= : 
2 ; D2 
= | 3 
S| P.1 
2 
3 
5. 1 
: 2 
ἘΠῚ Ὁ 
Ξ 109 
Ξ 3 
Ξ 12) ἢ 
Ξ 2 
3 
St 
2 
g|_° 
=| Dio 
Ξ ΓΡῚ 
“2 
lees) 
"(5.2 
Φ 8 
Ξ | D.2 
oO 8 
= | P.2 
—_— 
3 
TInfin 
Part 


PARADIGMS OF -μι VERBS 145 


Present System. 


τίθημι (θε-, On) put. 


ACTIVE. 

Present. Imperfect. 
τί-θη-μι ἐ-τί-θη-ν 
τί-θη-ς, τιθεῖς ἐ-τί-θεις 
τί-θη-σι ἐ-τί-θει 
τί-θε-τον ἐ-τί-θε-τον 
τίτθε-τον ἐ-τι-θέ-την 
τί-θε-μεν ἐ-τί-θε-μεν 
τί-θε-τε ἐ-τί.θε-τε 
τι-θέιασι ἐ-τί-θε-σαν 
τι-θῶ 
τι-θῇ-ς 
τι-θῇ 
τι-θῆ-τον 
τι-θῆ-τον 
τι-θῶ-μεν 
τι-θῆ-τε 
τι-θῶ-σι 
τι-θείη-ν 
τι-θείη-ς 
τι-θείη 


τι-θεῖ-τον [τι-θείη-τον] 
τι-θεί-την [τι-θειή-την] 
τι-θεῖ-μεν [τι-θείη-μεν] 
τί-θεῖ-τε [τι-θείη-τε] 

τι-θεῖετν [τι-θείη-σαν] 
τί-θει 

τι-θέ-τω 

τί-θε-τον 

τι-θέττων 

τί-θε-τε 

τι-θέντντων 

τι-θένναι 


τι-θείς, -εἶσα, -έν 


MIDDLE (Passive). 


Present. Imperfect. 
τί-θε-μαι ἐ-τι-θέ-μην 
τί-θε-σαι ἐ-τί-θε-σο 
τί-θε-ται ἐ-τί-θε-το 
τί-θε-σθον ἐ-τί-θε-σθον 
τί-θε-σθον ἐ-τι-θέ-σθην 
τι-θέ-μεθα ἐ-τι-θέιμεθα 
τί-θε-σθε ἐ-τί-θε-σθε 
τί-θε-νται ἐ-τί-θε-ντο 
τι-θῶ-μαι 
τι-θῇ 
τι-θῆ-ται 
τι-θῆ-σθον 
τι-θῆ-σθον 
τι-θώ-μεθα 
τι-θῆ-σθε 


τι-θῶ-νται 


τι-θεί-μην or τι-θοί-μην 
τι-θεῖ-ο τι-θοῖ-ο 
τι-θεῖ-το τι-θοῖ-το 
τι-θεῖ-σθον τι-θοῖ-σθον 
τι-θεί-σθην 
τι-θεί-μεθα 


τι-θεῖ-σθε 


τι-θοί-σθην 
τι-θοί-μεθα 
τι-θοῖ-σθε 
τι-θεῖ-ντο τι-θοῖ-ντο 
τί-θε-σο 

τι-θέ-σθω 

τί-θε-σθον 

τι-θέ-σθων 

τί-θε-σθε 

τι-θέ-σθων 

τί-θε-σθαι 


τι-θέ-μενος, -ἡ; -ov 


ΝΟΤΕ. --- For an explanation of some of the forms see § 170, notes 1-3. 


For the contraction in the subjunctive and optative see § 200, 1. 


For 


the third person plural of the present indicative active see § 167, note 3. 
-The infinitive and participle active are irregular in accent (ὃ 185). For 
τιθεῖς, ἐτίθεις, ἐτίθει, τίθει, and the optative τιθοίμην, see § 170, 4. 


BABBITT’S GR. GRAM. — 10 


146 PARADIGMS OF -μι VERBS 


252. Present System. 
δίδωμι (δο-, dw-) give. 
ACTIVE. MIDDLE (PASSIVE). 
Present. Imperfect. Present. Imperfect. 
(S. 1 δί-δω-μι ἐ-δί-δουν δί-δο-μαι ἐ-δι-δό-μην 
| 3 δίδω-ς ἐ-δί-δους δί-δο-σαι ἐδί-δο-σο 
ῳ | 3 δί-δω-σι ἐ-δί-δου δί-δο-ται ἐ-δί-δο-το 
= | D.2 δί-δο-τον ἐ-δί-δο-τον δί-δο-σθον ἐ-δί-δο-σθον 
= | 3 δί-δο-τον ἐ-δι-δό-την δί-δο-σθον ἐ-δι-δό-σθην 
& | P. 1 δί-δο-μεν ἐ-δί-δο-μεν δι-δό-μεθα ἐ-δι-δό-μεθα 
2 δί-δο-τε ἐ-δί-δο-τε δί-δο-σθε ἐ-δί-δο-σθε 
3 δι-δό-ασι ἐ-δί-δο-σαν δί-δο-νται ἐ-δί-δο-ντο 
S. 1 δι-δῶ δι-δῶ-μαι 
ἔ 2 δι-δῷ-ς δι-δῷ 
£ 3 δι-δῷ δι-δῶ-ται 
8 | D. 2 δι-δῶ-τον δι-δῶ-σθον 
= 3 δι-δῶ-τον δι-δῶ-σθον 
Ξ P. 1 δι-δῶ-μεν δι-δώ-μεθα 
2 δι-δῶ-τε δι-δῶ-σθε 
9. δι-δῶ-σι δι-δῶ-νται 
S. 1 δι-δοίη-ν δι-δοί-μην 
2 δι-δοίη-ς δι-δοῖ-ο 
3 3 δι-δοίη δι-δοῖ-το 
& | D.2 δι-δοῖ-τον [δι-δοίη-τον] δι-δοῖ-σθον 
Ξ 3 δι-δοί-την [δι-δοιή-την] δι-δοί-σθην 
© | P. 1 δι-δοῖ-μεν [δι-δοίη-μεν] δι-δοί-μεθα 
2 δι-δοῖ-τε [δι-δοίη-τε] δι-δοῖ-σθε 
3 δι-δοῖειν [δι-δοίη-σαν] δι-δοῖ-ντο 
S. 2 δί-δου δί-δο-σο 
2 3 δι-δό-τω δι-δό-σθω 
= | D.2 δί-δο-τον δί-δο-σθον 
© 3 δι-δό-των δι-δό-σθων 
= | P. 2 δί:δο-τε δί-δο-σθε 
δὰ | 38 δι-δόνντων δι-δό-σθων 
Infin. δι-δό-ναι δί-δο-σθαι 
amt. δι-δούς, -otoa, -όν δι-δό-μενος, -n, -ov 


Nore. — For an explanation of some of the forms see § 170, notes 1-8. 
For the contraction in the subjunctive and optative see § 200, 1. For 
the third person plural of the present indicative active see ὃ 167, note 3. 
The infinitive and participle active are irregular in accent (§ 185). For 
ἐδίδουν, ἐδίδους, ἐδίδου, and δίδου, see ὃ 170, 4. 


253. 


΄, 
ζ 


Indicative. 
—_————— SO ———————— ῳἕν 
[49] 


S. 
o 
42 
2 D. 
ΞΡ 
| ; 
| 
(S. 
g | 
ἘΠ.) 
2 y 
~_ 
2 
Ξ R 
“ 
ὡ 
ἘΞ 
Ξ 1. 
Φ 
Q, 
Ξ Ῥ. 
Infin. 
Part. 


- 


Co τ Re © we CO 


bo owe 


Qo bo 


9 ὧο ' μὶ whe 


co 


Φο Ὁ wh κα 


ow hm cw bw 


PARADIGMS OF -μι VERBS 


Present System. 


ἵστημι (στα-, στη-) set. 


ACTIVE. 
Present. Imperfect. 
ἵ-στη-μι ἕτστη-ν 
ἵ-στη-ς t-ory-s 
i-oty-ot t-ory 
t-oTa-Tov t-ota-tov 
t-oTa-tev ἵ-στά-την 
ἵτστα-μεν ἵτστα-μεν 
ἵτστα-τε t-ora-te 
ἱ-στᾶσι t-ora-cav 
ἱ-στῶ 
ἱ-στῇ-ς 
ἱ-στῇ 
ἱ-στῆ-τον 
ἱ-στῆ-τον 
ἱ-στῶ-μεν 
ἱ-στῆ-τε 
ἱ-στῶ-σι 
ἱ-σταίη-ν 
ἱ-σταίη-ς 
ἱ-σταίη 
ἱ-σταῖ-τον [ἱ-σταίη-τον] 
ἱ-σταί-την [ἱ-σταιή-την] 
ἱ-σταῖ-μεν [ἱ-σταίη-μεν] 
ἱ-σταῖ-τε [ἱ-σταίη-τε] 
ἱ-σταῖετν [ἱ-σταίη-σαν] 
ἵστη 
ἱ-στά-τω 
ἵτ-στα-τον 
ἱ-στά-των 
ἵτστα-τε 
ἱ-στά-ντων 
ἱ-στά-ναι 


«ε τῷ a , 
ἱ-στᾶς, -Aoa, -av 


147 


MIpDLE (PAssIve). 


Present. 
{-oTa-par 
ἵ-στα-σαι 
ἵ-στα-ται 
" 
ἵ-στα-σθον 
᾿ 
ἵ-στα-σθον 
e ΄ 
ἱ-στά-μεθα 
t-ora-obe 
ἵ-στα-νται 


΄ 
-στά-σθων 
ἵ-στα-σθε 
ε tA 
ἱ-στά-σθων 


t-ora-cbar 


Imperfect. 
ἵ-στά-μην 


ἵ-στα-σο 


a 


-στα-το 
-στα-σθον 


hoe εἰς et 


-στά-σθην 
ἱ-στά-μεθα 
ἵἕτστα-σθε 
ἵτστα-ντο 


ἱ-στά-μενος, -ἡ. τον 


Norte. — For an explanation of some of the forms see § 170, notes 1-3. 
For the contraction in the subjunctive and optative see ὃ 200, 1. For 
the third person plural of the present indicative active see § 167, note 3. 

The infinitive and participle active are irregular in accent (§ 185). 


148 


254. 


S. 1 
2 


[ 

is 
v 

| D. 2 


-- 


Indicative. 


Subjunctive. 


Optative. 


5. 2 
© 3 
= * 
Ξ D.2 
H Ὁ 
τς v 
Ξ: 1}. 
-- 


PARADIGMS OF -μι VERBS 


Present System 


δείκνυμι (δεικ-, present stem δεικνυ-, § 196, 5) show 


ACTIVE 
Present Imperfect 
δείκνυ-μι ἐ-δείκνυ-ν 
δείκνυ-ς ἐ-δείκνυ-ς 
δείκνυ-σι ἐ-δείκνυ 
δείκνυ-τον ἐ-δείκνυ-τον 
δείκνυ-τον ἐ-δεικνύ-την 


δείκνυ-μεν 
δείκνυ-τε 
-δείκνυ-σαν 


ΓΙ 


δεικνύ-ἅσι 


δεικνύω 
δεικνύῃς 
δεικνύῃ etc., 
from 

δεικνύω show, 
inflected like 
παιδεύω, ὃ 237. 


δεικνύοιμι 
δεικνύοις 
δεικνύοι etc., 
from 

δεικνύω show. 
inflected like 
παιδεύω, ὃ 257. 


δείκνυ 
δεικνύ-τω 
δείκνυ-τον 
δεικνύ-των 


2 δείκνυ-τε 


δεικνύ-ντων 
, 
δεικνύ-ναι 


“- yh 
δεικνῦς, -ῦσα. -ὕν 


MIDDLE (Passive) 


Present 
δείκνυ-μαι 
δείκνυ-σαι 
δείκνυ-ται 
δείκνυ-σθον 
δείκνυ-σθον 
δεικνύ-μεθα 


Imperfect 
ἐ-δεικνύ-μην 
> , 
ἐ-δείκνυ-σο 
ἐ-δείκνυ-το 
ἐ-δείκνυ-σθον 
ἐ-δεικνύ-σθην 
ἐ-δεικνύ-μεθα 


δείκνυ-σθε ἐ-δείκνυ-σθε 


δείκνυ-νται ἐ-δείκνυ-ντο 


δεικνύωμαι 
δεικνύῃ 
δεικνύηται etc., 
from 

δεικνύω show, 
inflected like 


παιδεύω, ὃ 237. 


ὺ 


δεικννοίμην 
δεικνύοιο 
δεικνύοιτο etc., 
from 

δεικνύω show 
inflected like 
παιδεύω, ὃ 237. 


δείκνυ-σο 
δεικνύ-σθω 
δείκνυ-σθον 
δεικνύ-σθων 
δείκνυ-σθε 
δεικνύ-σθων 


δείκνυ-σθαι 


δεικνύ-μενος. -ἡ. -ον 


ΝΟΤΕ. — For an explanation of some of the forms see ὃ 170, notes 1-3. 
For the third person plural of the present indicative active see § 167, note 3. 
The infinitive and participle active are irregular in accent (§ 185). 


PARADIGMS OF -μι VERBS 149 


255. Second Aorist System 256. 
τίθημι (θε-, θη-) put δίδωμι (δο-, dw-) give 
ACTIVE MIDDLE ACTIVE MIppLE 
S. 1 (ἔθηκα) ἐ-θέμμην (ἔδωκα) ἐ-δό-μην 
2 (ἔθηκας) ἔ-τθου (ἔδωκας) ἔ-δου 
5 3 (€Onke) ἔ-θε-το (ἔδωκε) ἔ-δο-το 
= | D.2 ἔθε-τον ἔ-θε-σθον €-80-Tov ἔ-δο-σθον 
= 3 ἐθέ-την ἐ-θέ-σθην ἐ-δό-την ἐ-δό-σθην 
oS al €-Oe-pev €-0é-peba ἔ-δο-μεν ἐ-δό-μεθα 
2 ἔτθε-τε ἔ-θε-σθε ἔ-δο-τε ἔ-δο-σθε 
ι 98 ἔθεσαν ἔξθε-ντο ἔ-δο-σαν ἔτδο-ντο 
S. 1 θῶ θῶ-μαι δῶ δῶ-μαι 
ἢ | 2 θῇ-ς θῇ δῷ-ς δῷ 
᾿Ξ 3 θῇ θῆ-ται δῷ δῶ-ται 
Θ | D. 2 θῆ-τον θῆ-σθον δῶ-τον δῶ-σθον 
Ξ 3 θῆ-τον θῆ-σθον δῶ-τον δῶ-σθον 
E P. 1 0@-pev θώ-μεθα δῶ-μεν δώ-μεθα 
2 θῆ-τε θῆ-σθε δῶ-τε δῶ-σθε 
3 θῶ-σι θῶ-νται δῶ-σι δῶ-νται 
S. 1 θείη-ν θεί-μην δοίη-ν δοί-μην 
| 2 θείη-ς θεῖ-ο δοίη-ς δοῖ-ο 
3 | 3 θείη θεῖ-το, θοῖτο δοίη δοῖ-το 
Ξ 1. 2 θεῖ-τον [θείη-τον] θεῖ-σθον δοῖ-τον [δοίη-τον] δοῖ-σθον 
Ξ ᾿ 3 θεί-την [θειή-την] θεί-σθην δοί-την [δοιή-την] δοί-σθην 
© | P. 1 θεῖ-μεν [θείη-μεν] θεί-μεθα, θοίμεθα δοῖ-μεν [δοίη-μεν] δοί-μεθα 
2 θεῖ-τε [θείη-τε] θεῖ-σθε, θοῖσθε δοῖ-τε [δοίη-τε] δοῖ-σθε 
9. θεῖετν [θείη-σαν] θεῖ-ντο, θοῖντο Sote-v [δοίη-σαν] δοῖ-ντο 
(S. 2 θές θοῦ δό-ς δοῦ 
2 3 θέτω θέςσθω δό-τω δό-σθω 
Ἔ | D.2 θέτον θέ-σθον δό-τον δό-σθον 
2 3 θέτων 0é-cbwv δό-των δό-σθων 
Ξ Ρ. 2 θέ-τε θέ-σθε δό-τε δό-σθε 
| 38 θέντων θέ-σθων δό-ντων δό-σθων 
Infin θεῖ-ναι θέσθαι δοῦ-ναι δό-σθαι 
Part. θείς, θεῖσα, θέμενος, Sots, δοῦσα, δό-μενος, 
θέ-ν τῇ; τον δό-ν -1, τον 


Nore. — For an explanation of some of the forms see § 170, notes 1-3. 
For the contraction in the subjunctive and optative see § 211, 1-2. For 
the singular of the indicative active see §§ 205 and 211, 3. 


160 PARADIGMS OF -μι VERBS 


257. Second Aorist System 
ἵστημι (στα-, στη-) set δύ-ω enter ἐπριάμην bought 
ACTIVE ACTIVE MIDDLE 
S. 1 ἔστη-ν stood €-5u-v ἐπριά-μην 
2 ἔστη-ς ἔ-δυ-ς ἐπρίω 
2 9 ἔστη ἔδυ ἐπρία-το 
| D.2 ἔστη-τον ἔ-δυ-τον ἐπρία-σθον 
Ξ 3 ἐ-στή-την ἐ-δύ-την ἐπριά-σθην 
& | P. 1 ἔστη-μεν ἔ-τδυ-μεν ἐπριά-μεθα 
2 ἔ-τστη-τε ἔ-δυ-τε ἐπρία-σθε 
9 ἔστη-σαν ἔτδυ-σαν ἐπρία-ντο 
S. 1 στῶ δύω πρίω-μαι 
ἢ 2 στῇ-ς δύῃς πρίῃ 
£ 3 στῇ δύῃ πρίη-ται 
8 D.2 στῆ-τον δύητον πρίη-σθον 
γᾷ Ω a ΄ , 
= Ph at RIT pia GFE 
Ξ P. 1 στῶ-μεν δύωμεν πριώ-μεθα 
= 2 otf-Te δύητε πρίη-σθε 
ἰ 38 στῶ-σι δύωσι πρίω-νται 
S. 1 σταίη-ν πριαί-μην 
2 σταίη-ς πρίαι-ο 
3 Ὁ σταίη No optative πρίαι-το 
Ξ | D.2 σταῖ-τον [σταίη-τον] is found in πρίαι-σθον 
= | 3 σταί-την [ σταιή-την] Attic. Cf. πριαί-σθην 
© | P. 1 σταῖ-μεν [σταίη-μεν] § 211, 2a. πριαί-μεθα 
| 2 otai-te [σταίη-τε] πρίαι-σθε 
3 otaie-v [otain-cav] πρίαι-ντο 
S. 2 στῆθι δῦ-θι πρίω 
o G Pe a Aas 
Ξ 9 στή-τω δύ-τω πριά-σθω 
= | D.2 orf-rov δῦ-τον πρία-σθον 
Φ 9 στή-των δύ-των πριά-σθων 
ΞΡ. 2 orf-re δῦ-τε πρία-σθε 
3 στά-ντων δύ-ντων πριά-σθων 
Infin. στῆ-ναι δῦτναι πρία-σθαι 
Part. oTas, στᾶσα, στά-ν Sus, δῦσα, δύ-ν πριά-μενος 
Nore. — For an explanation of some of the forms see § 170, notes 1-3. 


For the contraction in the subjunctive and optative of ἔστην see ὃ 211, 1-2. 
The subjunctive and optative of ἐπριάμην are accented as if uncontracted 


(§ 211, 2, note). 


PARADIGMS OF μὲ VERBS 151 


258. Second Perfect System without Suffix (§ 220) 


SEecoND PERFECT ACTIVE 


Indicative 


S. 1 (€orynka) stand 


2 (ἕστηκας) 
3 (ἕστηκε) 


9 
τῷ 


éoTa-Tov 
€é-oTa-Tov 
ἕςστα-μεν 
ἕςστα-τε 
ἑ-στᾶσι 


oh καὶ Co 


Infinitive 
é-oTd-var 


ἵστημι (στα-; στη-) set 


Subjunctive 
ἑστῶ. etc. 


(like στῶ, ὃ 257) 


Optative 
éortain-v, etc. 


(like σταίην. ὃ 257) 


Imperative 


5. 2 ἕἔσταθι 
Ω 
v 


éora-Tw, etc. 


Participle 


SECOND PLUPERFECT ACTIVE 


Indicative 
ε LA Ἂ 
(εἱστήκη) 
(εἱστήκης) 
ε ᾿ 
(εἱστήκει) 
ἕ-στα-τον 
ἑἕἙ-στά-την 
@ora-pev 
€-oTa-te 
ἕστα-σαν 


ἑἙστώς, ἑ-στῶσα, ἑ-στός (ὃ 151, note) 


i Ὁ Q 
259. Οἶδα (for ἔξοιδα (δ 2a), stem οἰδ-, εἰδ-, ἐἰδ-, § 14, 2), 
a perfect with present meaning, is formed without reduphi- 
cation. Its inflection (somewhat irregular) is as follows: 


Indicative Subjunctive Optative 


S. 1 οἷδα 
2 οἶσθα 
3 olde 
D.2 ἴστον 
3 ἴστον 
1. ἴσμεν 
2 ἴστε 
9 ἴσασι 
Infinitive 
εἰδέναι 


Second PERFECT 


εἰδῶ 
εἰδῇς 
εἰδῇ 
εἰδῆτον 
εἰδῆτον 
εἰδῶμεν 
εἰδῆτε 
εἰδῶσι 


Imperative 
εἰδείην 
εἰδείης ἴσθι 
εἰδείη ἴστω 
εἰδεῖτον ἴστον 
εἰδείτην ἴστων 


εἰδεῖμεν [-είημεν] 
εἰδεῖτε [-εἴητε] ἴστε 
εἰδεῖεν [-einoav] ἴστων 


Participle 


SECOND PLUPERFECT 
Indicative 
ἤδη [ἤδειν] 
ἤδησθα 
ἤδει(ν) 
ἧστον 
ἤστην 
ἧσμεν 
ἦστε 
ἧσαν, ἤδεσαν 


εἰδώς. εἰδυῖα, εἰδός ; gen. εἰδότος. etc. (§ 131) 


259 a. Ionic occasionally has other (regular) forms from the stem 
oida-: thus οἶδας. οἴδαμεν. οἴδασι. 
b. Homer has perf. Ist plur. ἔδμεν ; pluperf. ἤδεα, ἤδησθα (ἠείδηΞ), 
noee or ἤδει (Heider), 3d plur. ἔσαν: subj. Ist sing. eidéw, εἰδῶ, idéw; plur. 
εἴδομεν (δ 160 a), εἴδετε (δ 160 a), εἰδῶσε: infin. ἔδμεναι, ἔδμεν (δ 167 e): fem. 
Future εἴσομαι and εἰδήσομαι. 
ec. Herodotus has Ist plur. ἔδμεν : pluperf. Ist sing. ἤδεα, 3d sing. Adee, 
2d plur. 7déare ; future εἰδήσω. 


participle ἰδυῖα. 


152 IRREGULAR VERBS IN -μι 


260. Ἵημι (theme €-, 7-) send is inflected nearly like 
τίθημι (S§ 251, 255). The present and second aorist sys- 
tems are inflected as follows: 


ACTIVE Mippie (Passive) 
PRESENT IMPERFECT PRESENT IMPERFECT 
Indicative Subjunctive Indicative Indicative Subjunctive Indicative 
S 1. type ta tyv ἵεμαι ἰῶμαι ἱέμην 
2 ἴης; tets tgs feus ἵεσαι iq ἵεσο 
5. thor iq, etc. fer ἵεται ἰῆται, etc. ἵετο 
1.2 ἵετον ΝῊ τε ἵετον ἵεσθον One ἵεσθον 
8. ἵετον ἱέτην ἵεσθον Ae ἱέσθην 
ἱείην ϊτείμην 
P. 1 ἵεμεν ἱείης ἵεμεν ἱέμεθα teto ἱέμεθα 
2 tere ἱείη ere ἵεσθε ἱεῖτο ἵεσθε 
3. ἴασι tetrov ἵεσαν ἵενται ἱεῖσθον ἵεντο 
ἱείτην ἱείσθην 
Imperative aetna Imperative pepe 
ἵει ἵεσο 
térw, etc. tér Ow, ete. 
Infinitive Participle Infinitive Participle 
ἱέναι tels, ἱεῖσα, ἱέν ἵεσθαι ἱέμενος, -ἡ. -ov 
SECOND AORIST SECOND AORIST 
Indicative Subjunctive Indicative Subjunctive 
S. 1 (aKa) ὦ εἵμην ὧμαι 
2 (ἥκας) ἧς εἶσο 7 
3 (Ke) ἡ, ete. εἶτο ἦται, etc. 
1).2. εἶτον Optative. εἶσθον Optative. 
9. εἵτην a εἵσθην τ 
εἵην εἵμην 
15} } εἶμεν eins εἵμεθα elo 
2 ire ein εἶσθε εἶτο 
9. εἶσαν εἶτον εἶντο εἶσθον 
εἵτην εἵἴσθην 
[ε vo 
Imperative Beate: Imperative efivebayiet: 
és ov 


ἕτω, ete. 
Infinitive Participle 


εἶναι els, εἶσα, ἕν 


ἕσθω, etc. 
Infinitive 
éo Bar 


Participle 
ἕμενος, -1, τον 


IRREGULAR VERBS IN -μι 153 


In the optative, forms of the -w inflection (ἴοιτε, ἴοιεν, ofro) are some- 
times found (§ 170, 4). 

The future of ἕημι is now; perfect εἶκα, εἶμαι; aorist passive εἴθην. The 
aorists and the perfect hardly ever occur except in compounds. 


261. Εἶμι (theme é-, εἰ- ; Latin eo, ire) go has only the 
present system. 


PRESENT. IMPERFECT 

Indicative Subjunctive Optative Imperative Indicative. 
5.1. εἶμι ἴω ἴοιμι, ἰοίην qo [ἤειν] 

2 εἶ ἴῃς ἴοις ἴθι ἤεισθα [εις] 

9. εἶσι ἴῃ ἴοι ἴτω met [ἤειν] 
D. 2 ἵτον ἴητον ἴοιτον ἴτον Tov 

9. trov ἴητον ἰοίτην ἴτων ἤτην 
P.1 ἴμεν ἴωμεν ἴοιμεν nev 

2 tre inte ἴοιτε Ure Te 

9. ἴασι ἴωσι ἴοιεν ἰόντων, ἴτωσαν ἧσαν, ἤεσαν 
Infinitive Participle Verbal Adjectives 


ἰέναι ἰών, ἰοῦσα, tov; gen. ἰόντος, ἰούσης, etc. ἰτός, ἰτέος (ἰτητέος, 
from ἰτῶ (-ἀω) go 
1. Compounds of εἶμε have recessive accent in the pres- 
ent except in the infinitive and participle: thus πάρειμι 
approach, πάρει, etc. Imperf. παρῇα (ὃ 184, 1), ete., but 
infin. παριέναι, participle παριών. 
2. The present indicative of εἶμι, in prose (and almost 
always in poetry), has a future meaning shall go (cf. ὃ 524, 
note). 


260 a. Homer almost always has ἕημι with short +. For ἵει (3d singular) 
and ἱεῖσι (3d plural) see §§ 170, 4 a, and 200 Ὁ. In the aorist indicative 
he has ἧκα and ἕηκα (with irregular augment). In the aorist subjunctive he 
has ἕῃ and 7y (cf. § 211, 1a). For the imperfect indicative 1st singular 
the Mss. give tev, but this must be a mistake for ἕἴην. 

261 a. Homer has also present indicative 2d sing. εἶσθα. Imperfect 
Ist sing. jia, ἤϊον; 3d sing. ἤϊε, je, te; 3d dual ἔτην, Ist plur. jouer; 
3d plur. ἤϊσαν, ἔσαν, niov. Subjunctive 2d sing. ἔῃσθα ; 3d sing. ἔῃσι; 
Ist plur. ἴομεν (§ 160 a). Optative 3d sing. fein. Infinitive ἔμεναι, ἔμεν 
(8 167 e). Future εἴσομαι. 

b. Herodotus has impf. Ist sing. qia; 3d sing. ἤϊε, 3d plur. ἤϊσαν. 


154 


IRREGULAR VERBS IN -μι 


262. Eipi (theme éo-; Latin es-se) be 
present and future systems. 


has only the 


PRESENT. IMPERFECT 
Indicative Subjunctive Optative Imperative Indicative 
S. 1 eipl ὦ εἴην ἢ; ἣν 
2 εἶ ns εἴης ἴσθι ἦσθα 
8. ἐστί 1 εἴη ἔστω ἣν 
1).2 ἐστόν "TOV εἶτον, εἴητον ἔστον ἧστον 
ἢ uy 
Ὁ ἐστόν ἦτον εἴτην, εἰῆτην ἔστων ἤστην 
> > ’ > > 1g “5 
P. 1 ἐσμέν ὦμεν εἶμεν, εἴημεν NEV 
2 ἐστέ ἣτε εἶτε, εἴητε ἔστε ATE, ἦστε 
9. εἰσί ὦσι εἶεν, ἴησαν ἔστων, ἔστωσαν ἦσαν 


Infin. εἶναι Partic. ὦν, οὖσα, ὄν, gen. ὄντος, οὔσης, etc. (§ 129) 


Fourure indicative ἔσομαι, etc. (8d sing. ἔσται (ὃ 20)); optative ἐσοίμην, 
ete.; infinitive ἔσεσθαι; participle ἐσόμενος, -7, -ov. 

Norr.— The present indicative εἰμί is for *éo-ye (8. 16); εἶ is for *eot 
(originally ἐσ-σί) ; ἐσ-τί retains the original ending τι. The sub- 
junctive ὦ is for ἔω, from *éo-w; the optative εἴην is for *éo-uy-v. The 
infinitive εἶναι is for *éo-vat; the participle ὧν is for ἐών, from *éo-wv. 

1. All forms of the present indicative, except the second 
person singular εἶ, are enclitic (ὃ 70). But the third person 


262 a. Homer has 

Present indicative 2d sing. ἐσσί, eis; 1st plur. εἰμέν ; 3d plur. εἰσί, ἔασι. 

Imperfect Ist sing. 7a, ἔα, ἔον (3); 2d sing. ἔησθα, ἦσθα ; 3d sing. ἦεν, 
ἔην, nny, ἣν; 3d plur. ἦσαν, ἔσαν. Iterative ἔσκον (δ 191 b). 

Subjunctive 1st sing. ἔω, -elw; 3d sing. ἔῃσι, nov, ἔῃ, εἴῃ (2); 3d plur. 
ἔωσι. 

Optative also ous, ἔοι. 

Infinitive also ἔμμεναι (for *€o-wevar), ἔμεναι, ἔμμεν, ἔμεν (δ 167 6). 

Participle ἐών, ἐοῦσα, ἐόν, etc. 

Future also ἔσ-σομαι, etc.; dd sing. ἔσ-σεται, ἔσεται (§ 35), ἔσται (8 20), 
and (Doric future, ὃ 214) ἐσσεῖται. 

b. Herodotus has 

Present indicative 2d sing. eis; 1st pl. εἰμέν. 

Imperfect ἔα ; 2d sing. €as; 2d plur. ἔατε. Iterative ἔσκον (191 b). 
Optative (once) ἐν-έοι. Participle ἐών, 


Imperative ἔσσο (middle). 


Subjunctive ἔω, ἔωσι. 


IRREGULAR VERBS IN -μι᾿ 


singular ἐστί takes its written accent on the first syllable 
(ἔστι): 
When it stands at the beginning of a sentence; as 
ἔστι δὲ τίς οὗτος ; but who ἐξ this? 
When it expresses existence or possibility ; as σοὶ μὲν 
ἔστιν ἰδεῖν it is possible for you to see ; 
When it follows the conjunctions εἰ, καί, or ἀλλά, or 
the adverbs οὐκ. μή. or ὡς ; as οὐκ ἔστιν ἐξ not. 
Nore. — In composition the participle is accented as in the simple 
verb: thus zap-dév present. In the subjunctive and optative, zap- 


(for -€w, § 170, 2), παρ-εἶμεν, etc., the accent is not irregular. See 
§§ 170, 2-5 and 185, note. 


263. Φημί (φα-, φη- ; Latin fa-ri) say is inflected in the 
present system as follows : 


PRESENT IMPERFECT 
Indicative Subjunctive Indicative 
5.1 φημί φῶ, φῇς, φῇ, etc. ἔφην 
2 φῇς (like στῶ, ὃ 257) ἔφησθα or ἔφης 
3 ot ἔφη 
on : Optative ᾿ 
D. 2 φατόν ; ‘ ἔφατον 
3 ae φαίην, pains, etc. Seer 
: (like σταίην, ὃ 257) : 
1B φαμέν ἔφαμεν 
2 φατέ Imperative. ἔφατε 
3 φασί φάθι or φαθί, φάτω, etc. ἔφασαν 
Infinitive Participle Verbal Adjectives 
φάναι as, φᾶσα, dav, but in Attic ᾧφατός. φατέος 


φάσκων is used instead. 


The future is φήσω, etc.; aorist ἔφησα, etc. 


1. All forms of the present indicative, except the second 
person singular dys, are enclitic (ὃ 70). 


263 a. Homer has subj. 5d sing. φήῃ (ὃ 211, 1a). For ἔφαν (imperfect 
od plural) see §167c. He often uses the middle forms of φημί, which are 
seldom or never found in Attic: thus imperf. ἐφάμην, ἔφατο ; impv. φάο, 
φάσθω, etc.; infin. φάσθαι ; participle φάμενος. 

b. Herodotus often uses the middle participle φάμενος. 


156 IRREGULAR VERBS IN -μι 


264. Ketpar (xe-) lie, am laid (regularly used as the 
perfect passive of τίθημι put). 


PRESENT IMPERFECT 
Indicative Subjunctive Indicative 
Ss. 1 κεῖμαι κέωμαι, κέῃ, ἐκείμην 
2 κεῖσαι κέηται, etc. ἔκεισο 
3 κεῖται ἔκειτο, 
1): κεῖσθον URES st ἔκεισθον 
3 Keto Pov pagel we? ἐκείσθην 
κέοιτο, etc. 
125 1 κείμεθα ἐκείμεθα 
2 κεῖσθε Imperative. ἔκεισθε 
9 κεῖνται κεῖσο, κείσθω, etc. ἔκειντο 
Infinitive Participle 
κεῖσθαι (so also in composition : κείμενος 


κατακεῖσθα, contrary to ὃ 184) 


The future is κείσομαι, etc., reguiar. 


265. μαι (ἡσ-) sit retains the o of its stem only before 
the endings -7ae and -το. It is found only in the present 
system : 


PRESENT IMPERFECT 
Indicative Indicative 
ἦ-μαι, ἦσαι, ἧσ-ται ; ἦσθον, ἦσθον ἡἥτ-μην, ἦσο, ἦσ-το 
ἥμεθα, ἦσθε, ἥ-νται ἦσθον, ἥσθην 
Imperative Infinitive Participle H-pe0a, ἦσθε, ἧ-ντο 
moo, ἥσθω, etc. ἦσθαι ἥτ-μενος 


The subjunctive and optative of the simple verb are 
not found. 


264 a. Homer has pres. indic. 5d plur. κεῖνται, κέαται (δ 167 d), κείαται, 
κέονται ; impf. dd plur. ἔκειντο, κέατο (ὃ 167d), κείατο ; subj. 3d sing. κῆται, 
iterative 5d sing. (§ 191 b) ἐκέ-σκετο. 

b. Herodotus usually has -ee- for e- in the 3d sing. (xéerac); sometimes 
perhaps in ἔκειτο, κεῖσθαι (ἐκέετο, κέεσθαι). He always has κέαται (= κεῖνται) 
and ἐκέατο (= ἔκειντο). See ὃ 167 d. ' 

265 a. For the 3d plur. Homer has ἥαται (εἴαται in some editions), 
ἕαται, and ἥατο (εἴατο in some editions), gato (Attic Avra, WvTo). He- 
rodotus always has ἕαται, aro. See § 167 ἃ. 


IRREGULAR VERBS IN -μὶ 157 


1. For ἧμαι, Attic almost always uses the compound 
κάθ-ημαι (properly sit down), which loses the o of its stem 
everywhere except in the form καθῆστο of the imperfect. 
It is inflected as follows: 


PRESENT IMPERFECT 
Indicative Subjunctive Indicative 
S. 1. κάθημαι καθῶμαι, καθῇ, ἐκαθήμην or καθήμην 
2 κάθησαι καθῆται, etc. ἐκάθησο καθῆσο 
9. κάθηται : ἐκάθητο καθῆστο 
D.2 κάθησθον OUISE γος, Ἂ ἐκάθησθον καθῆσθον 
5. κάθησθον καθοίμην, καθοῖσ; ἐκαθήσθην καθήσθην 
καθοῖτο, etc. 
Ρ. 1 καθήμεθα ἐκαθήμεθα καθήμεθα 
2 κάθησθε Imperative. ἐκάθησθε καθῆσθε 
9. κάθηνται κάθησο. καθήσθω, etc. ἐκάθηντο καθῆντο 
Infinitive Participle 
καθῆσθαι καθήμενος 


For the augment (ἐκαθήμην) see § 174, 1. 


266. "Hy (cf. Latin a-io) say, is used only in present 
Ist singular ue and imperfect 1st and 3d singular ἦν, ἢ 


oy 


(ἣν δ᾽ ἐγώ said I, ἢ δ᾽ ὅς said he). 


267. Χρή it zs necessary is really a substantive with 
which ἐστί is, is to be supplied (8 308). Outside of the 
present indicative it unites (cf. § 43, note 2) with the 
forms of εἰμί into a single word: so impf. χρῆν Cfor χρὴ 
ἣν). and even with augment éyphv! subj. χρῇ (for χρὴ ἢ): 
opt. χρείη (for χρὴ ein); infin. χρῆναι (for χρὴ εἶναι); 
partic. χρεών, indeclinable (for χρὴ dv, § 17). 


FORMATION OF WORDS 


268. Words are formed in two ways: (1) by Derivation 
and (2) by Composition. 

1. Derived words are formed by means of suffixes 
(which are not themselves separate words) either from 
roots or from the stems of other words. Thus, dé«-n right 
(from the root dux-), déa-vos just (from the stem δικα-}) are 
derived words. 

2. Compound words are formed by combining two or 
more words or stems of words into one. Thus, ἑἱππό-δαμος 
horse-tamer, μεγά-θῦμος great-hearted, are compound words. 
Of course derived words may be formed from stems of 
compound words. Thus, οἰκοδομῷ (-éo) build a house, 
from οἰκο-δόμος house-builder, is a derived word. 


DERIVATIVE WORDS 


269. Primitive and Denominative Words. — A Primitive 
Word is formed directly from a root by means of a suffix ; 
a Denominative Word is formed from the stem of a noun. 
Thus, Gvy-d-v yoke is a primitive word, being formed from 
the root Gvy- by means of the suffix -o-. From the stem 

158 


DERIVATIVE WORDS 159 


of fuyov (fvyo-) is formed the denominative verb ζυγῶ 
(-0w) yoke, join together. 


Nore. — Less correctly the term Primitive Word is sometimes 
applied to a word formed by means of a suffix from the theme of 
a verb. 


270. Roots. — The root of a word, like the perfume of 
a flower, has no separate, tangible existence. It merely 
suggests the meaning of a word or group of words. Only 
when united with inflectional endings (and usually a 
suffix as well) does it receive definite form and meaning, 
and become a full-blown word. 


Nore. — Roots consist usually of only one syllable. From roots 
stems are formed by means of suffixes, and from stems words are 
formed by means of inflectional endings. (Very few words are formed 
directly from roots without any suffix.) Thus: 


λέγω speak 
λόγος speech 


dey- 


Root Χοὺς 


Stems λεγε: Words 
Aoyo- 


271. Word-Groups. — The same root often appears in 
many different words which are formed from it in various 
ways. Such words are commonly said to form a Word- 
Group. 

Thus, from the root ypad- are derived (directly or 
indirectly) 


ypad-w mark, write, γραμ-μή (for ἔγραφ-μη. ὃ 27, 1) 
ypag-7 writing, line, 
‘ypad-evs painter, ypau-pa letter, 
ypag-is style, pencil, γραμ-ματεύς clerk, secretary, 
γραφ-ικός suited for writing γραμ-ματεύω be secretary, 

or painting, γραμ-ματική grammar, 


γραμ-ματεῖον writing tablet. 


100 DERIVATIVE WORDS 


From the root οὐκ- are derived (directly or indirectly) 


oix-os dwelling, οἰκ-ειότης relationship, friend- 
οἰκ-ίᾳ house, ship, 


οἰκ-ίον, οἰκ-ίσκος, οἰκ-ίδιον οἰκ-ειῶ (-ow) make one’s own, 
(diminutives, ὃ 285) lit- οἰκ-είωσις making one’s own, 
tle house, appropriation, 

οἰκ-ἔτης house-slave (masc.), οἰκ-ῶ (-€w) dwell, 

οἰκ-έτις house-slave (fem.), οἰκ-ητός inhabited, 


οἰκ-ετικός pertaining to οἴκ-ησις habitation, 
house-slaves, οἴκ-ημα dwelling place, 

oix-elos belonging to the οἰκ-ήτωρ inhabitant, 
household, οἰκ-ίζω colonize, 


οἰκ-ιστής colonist. 
These examples are enough to show the importance, for 
a ready understanding of Greek, of a thorough knowledge 
of derivation. 


272. Changes of Roots in Derivation. —In the formation 
of words from roots, Greek has a very clear method of 
differentiation by means of the vowel variation (0, ες («)), 
spoken of in ὃ 14: thus Aé€y-w speak, λόγ-ος speech; 
λείπ-ω leave, λοιπ-ός left; amevd-w hasten, σπουδ-ή haste. 
See below, $§ 277, 1-3 and 280, 1. 


273. Changes of Stems in Derivation. — When suffixes 
are added to stems the usual euphonic changes take place ; 
— that is, vowels thus brought together usually contract, 
and consonants, and consonants and vowels, undergo the 
changes described in δὲ 25-39. Examples are: 

ἀρχαῖος old (for *apya-to-s), βασιλεία kingdom (for 
*Baotrev-ta, ὃ 21), ἀλήθεια truth (for *arnPeo-ra, ὃ 37), 
ὄμμα eye (for ἔόπ-μα, ὃ 27,1), ὄψις look, vision (for *ot-ous, 
§ 28), δικαστής judge (for Ἐδικαδ-της, ὃ 26), ἐλπίζω hope 
(ἴον *éd7r6-Lw, § 39, 2). 


FORMATION OF SUBSTANTIVES 161 


274. A noun stem may vary its final vowel before the 
suffix, or, before a suffix beginning with a vowel, may 
drop it altogether (cf. ὃ 44,35): thus οἰκέ-της house-slave, 
from οἶκος (stem otxo-) house; ovpav-tos heavenly, frome 
οὐρανός (stem ovpavo-) heaven. 


Nore. — Before a suffix beginning with a consonant the end vowel 
of a stem usually, but not always, has its long form (8 13): thus 
ποίη-σις a making, ποιῶ (-éw) make. 


275. Formation by Analogy. — In Greek, as in other 
languages, many words were formed by analogy. Thus, 
ἱππεύ-ω be a horseman is formed from ὑππεύ-ς horseman; 
but since ὑππ- is common to more words (ἵππτ-ος, ὑἱπποικός, 
etc.) than is ἑππεὺ-, the letters -εύω came to be felt as a sort 
of suffix, which formed ἑππεύω from im-, and so could be 
used to form other denominative verbs from various stems: 
thus δουλ-εύω be a slave (δοῦλο-ς slave), βουλ-εύω plan 
(βουλή plan), παιδ-εύω educate (mais, παιδ-ός child). 

In the formation of verbs analogy plays a great part, 
and the important verb endings of this sort are given 
in § 292. 

So also sometimes in the formation of nouns, endings 
such as -avos and -eos, for -a-vo-s and -e-o-s, formed by 
adding the suffix -co- to a stem ending in a- or e- (ev-, ec-) 
(see ὃ 287, 5, ᾿Αθηναῖος, οἰκεῖος, Pacideios), are used in 
similar fashion: thus σκοτ-αῖος (σκότος) dark, ἀνδρ-εῖος 
(ἀνήρ, avdp-ds) brave (for examples of such formations see 


$§ 283, 1; 284, 1; 287, δ). 


FORMATION OF SUBSTANTIVES 


276. A very few substantives are formed from roots 
without any suffix: thus φλόξ (φλογ-) flame (φλέγ-ω burn). 


BABBITT’S GR. GRAM. — 11 


162 DERIVATIVE WORDS 


277. The following are the most important suffixes in 
the formation of substantives : 
1. -o-. Masculine in -ός (agent) and -os, neuter in -ον. 
(Roots with the vowel variation 0, ε, («) (8 14), usually show o.) 


Tpop-o-s nurse (τρέφτ-ω nourish) πομπ-όςς escort (πέμπ-ω send, es- 


Noy-o-s speech (A€y-w speal) cort) 
€py-o-v work (ῥέζω (ῥεγ-, ἐργ-,» ῥότοςς stream (pew flow) 
§ 38) do) lvy-o-v yoke (Cevy-vipu yoke) 


2. -a-. Nominative in - or -7; all feminine. 
(Roots with the vowel variation ο, ¢, (a) (§ 14), regularly show o.) 
τροφ-ἡ nurture (τρέφ-ω nourish)  op-a bearing (φέρ-ω hear) 
λοιβ-ἡ pouring (λείβ-ω pour) arove-y haste (σπεύδιω hasten) 
3. -eo-. Nominative in -os (§ 106, 1): neuter. 


(Roots with the vowel variation 0, ε, («) (δ 14), regularly show e.) 


yév-os race (γίγνομαι (yov-, yev-, Levdy-os pair (ζεύγ-νῦμι (Levy-, 


yv-) be born) Cvy-) yoke, join) 
eld-os form (οἰδ-, €id-, ἰδ- see) etp-os width (εὐρύς wide) 
278. AGENT 


1. -ev-. Nominative in -evs: masculine. 


γραφ-εύ-ς painter (γράφ-ω write, ἱππ-εύ-ς horseman (ἵππος horse) 


paint) ἱερ-εύ-ς priest (ἱερός sacred) 
oo ΑΝ ἢ ; 
2. -tynp-. Nominative in -τήρ : masculine. 
σω-τήρ savior (σῴζω save) δο-τήρ giver (δίδωμι (δο-, dw-) 
give) 


3. -top-. Nominative in -rwp: masculine. 


ῥή-τωρ orator (ép-, pe-, py- speak-) οἰκή-τωρ dweller (οἰκῶ (-éw) dwell) 


FORMATION OF SUBSTANTIVES 163 


-ta-. Nominative in -τῆς : masculine. 
4.} -τιδ-- Nominative in -tis:  ) 


DY eg oe feminine. 
-τριδ-. Nominative in -τρίς : 1 


οἰκέ-τη-ς (6), οἰκέ-τις (ἡ) house- αὐλη-τή-ς (Ὁ). αὐλη-τρίς (ἡ) 
slave (οἶκο-ς house) flute-player (αὐλῶ (-€w) play 
πολί-τη-ς (δ). πολῖ-τις (ἡ) citizen the flute) 
(πόλι-ς city) 


279. ACTION 


1. -τι-- Nominative in -τίς : feminine. 


πίσ-τι-ς faith (πείθω (ποιθ-, πειθ-, πιθ-}) persuade, § 26) 


bo 


-σι- (weakened from -t-). Nominative in -ovs: feminine. 

κρί-σι-ς judgment (κρίνω judge) πρᾶξι-ς action (πράττω (πρᾶγ-) 
act, § 28) 

3. -ova-. Nominative in -ova: feminine. 


γυμνα-σία exercise (γυμνάζω (γυμ- δοκιμα-σία examination (δοκιμάζω 
vad-) train, § 30) (δοκιμαδ-}) examine, καὶ 30) 


280. RESULT OF ACTION 


1. -ματ-. Nominative in -μα : neuter. A great many 
substantives are formed from verb stems by 
this suffix. 


(Roots with the vowel variation o, ες («) (ὃ 14), regularly have e.) 
mpay-pa deed (xpattw (rpay-) ῥεῦ-μα stream (pew (pov-, pev-, 
do) pu-) flow) 
2. -o-. Nominative in -μός : masculine. 


ὀδυρ-μό-ς wailing (ὀδύρ-ομαι λογισ-μό-ς calculation (λογίζο- 
wail) μαι (Aoyt6-) calculate) 


104 DERIVATIVE WORDS 


Φ9 


-pa-. Nominative in - μὴ : feminine. 

γνώ-μη opinion (γι-γνώ-σκω know) γραμ-μή line (ypad-w mark, 
§ 27, 1) 
Sea 


281. MEANS OR INSTRUMENT 


-tpo-. Nominative in -tpov: neuter (cf. Latin elaus- 
tru-m ). 
ἄρο-τρον plow (ἀρῶ (-ow) plow) φέρε-τρον bier (φέρω carry) 


282. QUALITY (ABSTRACT SUBSTANTIVES) 


-ca-. Nominative in -/a: feminine (cf. Latin memor-ia). 
This suffix (cf. § 287, 5) is the one most 
frequently employed to form abstract sub- 


stantives. 
σοφ-ία wisdom (σοφό-ς wise) παιδεία (for ἔπαιδευ-ιὰ, § 21) ed- 
εὐδαιμον-ία happiness (εὐδαίμων ucation (παιδεύ-ω educate) 


happy) 
-ta-. Nominative in -ca: feminine (mostly from adjec- 
tives in -7). 
ἀλήθεια (*aAnbeo-ta, § 37) truth εὔνοια (cf. § 133) good will (εὔνους 
(ἀληθής (ἀληθεσ-) true) well-disposed) 


This suffix forms also a few concrete feminines corre- 
sponding to masculines: thus 


σώτειρα (for ἔσωτερ-ια, ὃ 39,4) ἱέρεια (for *tepev-ta, ὃ 21) priestess 
savior (fem.) (σω-τήρ savior, (iep-ev-s priest, § 278, 1) 
§ 278, 2) 
-tynT-. Nominative in -rns: feminine (cf. Latin veritas, 
-tdt-is). 


ταχύ-της swiftness (ταχύ-ς swift) νεό-της youth (νέο-ς young) 


FORMATION OF SUBSTANTIVES 165 


4. -cvva-. Nominative in -σύνη : feminine. 


ἃ 
δικαιο-σύνη justice (δίκαιο-ς σωφρο-σύνη discretion (σώφρων, 
just) discreet, § 34) 
283. DIMINUTIVES 


(Often used as pet names.) 
1. τιὸ (-16-t0-, -ap-to-, ὃ 275). Nominative in -cov: neuter. 


παιδ-ίοτν παιδ-άριο-ν little child οἰκ-ίδιο-ν little house (οἶκο-ς 


(παῖς (aatd-) child) house) 


2. -ἰσκο-. -ucka-. Nominative in -ίσκος (masc.) or -ἰσκὴ 


(fem.). 
οἰκ-ίσκο-ς little house (οἶκο-ς παιδ-ίσκο-ς little boy (παῖς (παιδ-) 
house) παιδ-ίσκη little girl J child) 
284. PLACE (OR MEANS) 
1. -to-. From substantives in -ryp (ὃ 278, 2, mostly obso- 


lete) and -evs (§ 278, i. Nominative in 
-τήριον and -εῖον (for *-ev-cov, ὃ 21): neuter. 
δικαστήρ-ιο-ν courthouse (δικασ- κουρεῖον barber shop (κουρ-εύ-ς 
Typ (= δικαστής) judge) barber) 
δεσμωτήρ-ιο-ν prison (δεσμωττηῃρ Θησεῖον temple of Theseus (@n- 
= δεσμώτης prisoner) σεύ-ς Theseus) 


So, by analogy (see § 275), 


onp-etov signal (cf. σῆμα sign) μουσ-εῖον seat of the muses (cf. 
μοῦσα muse) 


2. -wv-. Nominative in -ών : masculine (place only). 


ἀνδρ-ών men’s room (ἀνήρ (avép-) ἱππ-ών stable (ἵππο-ς horse) 
man) 


166 DERIVATIVE WORDS 


= 


1 


to 


285. PATRONYMICS (descendant of ) 


ee Nominative in -ééns: masculine. 
-L8-. Nominative in -%: feminine. 


MASCULINE FEMININE 
Τανταλ-ίδη-ς son of Tantalus Τανταλ-ίς from Τάνταλο-ς 
Δανα-ΐδη-ς son of Danaus Aava-is from Aavao-s 
Πηλε-ίδη-ς (§ 21) son of Peleus from IInAev-s 


jena Nominative in -aéns: masculine. 
-a§-. Nominative in -as: feminine. 


MASCULINE FEMININE 

Βορε-άδη-ς son of Boreas Bope-as from Bopéa-s 
Θεστι-άδης son of Thestius Θεστι-άς from Θέστιο-ς 
2836. GENTILE OR PLACE NAMES 


ee Nominative in -evs (ef. § 278, 1): masculine. 
-§-. Nominative in -ἰς (cf. 8 285, 1): feminine. 
MASCULINE FEMININE 


Meyap-ev-s a Megarian Meyap-is (Méyapa Megara) 


foe Nominative in -7ns (cf. ὃ 278, 4): masculine. 
-τιδ--. Nominative in -τίς (cf. § 278, 4): feminine. 


MASCULINE FEMININE 
Teyea-tn-s a Tegean Τεγεᾶ-τις (Teyéa Tegea) 


FORMATION OF ADJECTIVES 


287. The following are the most important suffixes 


forming adjectives : 


le 


-v-. Nominative in -vs, -e@a, -ὐ (ὃ 123) (from roots only). 


no-v-s sweet (cf. ἥδ-ομαι am ταχ-ύ-ς swift (cf. τάχ-ος swift- 
pleased) ᾿ ness) 


FORMATION OF ADJECTIVES 167 
-εσ-- Nominative in -7s, -ἐς (ἢ 120) (mostly compounds). 


σαφ-ής clear (σαφ-) ψευδ-ής false (cf. ψεύδ-ομαι lie) 
-wov-. Nominative in -μων, -μον (ὃ 120). 
μνή-μων mindful (cf. μι-μνησκω remind) 


-o-. Nominative in -os, -a (-7), τον (§ 117). 


λοιπ-ό-ς remaining (cf. λείπτ-ω (λοιπ-, λειπ-, λιπ-) leave) 


τιο-. Nominative in -vos, -/a, -cov (sometimes -tos, -Lov, 
§ 119). This is the most common adjective- 


suffix. 
οὐράν-ιοςς heavenly (ovpavo-s οἰκεῖος (for *oixe-to-s, § 274) do- 
heaven) mestic (οἶκο-ς house) 
πλούσ-ιο-ς (for ἔπλουτ-ιο-ς) βασίλειος (for Ἐβασιλευ-ιο-ς, 8.21) 
wealthy (πλοῦτο-ς wealth) kingly (βασιλεύ-ς king) 
᾿Αθηναῖος (for *A@nva-to-s) σωτήρ-ιο-ς (cf. § 283, 1) preserv- 
Athenian (᾿ Αθῆναι Athens) ing (σωτήρ savior) 


So, by analogy (see § 275), 


. , 
σκοτ-αῖος in darkness (σκότος ἀνδρ-εῖος manly (ἀνήρ, dvdp-os 
darkness) man) 


-iko- (-ko-). Nominative in -«os, -«7, -κόν. Next to -to-, 

this is the most frequent adjective-suffix. 
μουσ-ικό-ς musical (μοῦσα muse) σκεπτ-ικό-ς reflective (σκεπτό-ςς, 
φυσ-ικό-ς natural (φύσι-ς nature) verbal of σκέπ-τομαι investi- 
πολεμεοικό-ς warlike (πόλεμο-ς war) gale) 


-vo-. Nominative in -νός, -vn, -vov. 


dei-v0-s terrible (cf. €-de-ca feared) στυγ-νό-ς hated (cf. στυγ-ὦ (-€w) 
ἀλγεινό-ς (for *éAyeo-vo-s) pain- hate) 
Sul (ἄλγος pain) 


168 DERIVATIVE WORDS 


8. -po- (-epo-, -vpo-). Nominative in -pds, -pa, -pdv. 
ἐχθ-ρό-ς hateful (ct.€x6-oshatred) βλαβ-ερό-ς injurious (cf. βλαβ-ή 
λαμπ-ρό-ς bright (cf. λάμπ-ω injury) 
shine) €x-vpo-s secure (cf. ἔχ-ω hold) 
9. -λο- (-ελο-, -adeo-). Nominative in -Xos, -Ay, -Aov (-adéos, 
-αλέα, -αλέον). 
δει-λό-ς timid (cf. ἔτδει-σα feared) εἴκ-ελο-ς like (cf. εἰκ-ώς like) 
σιωπη-λό-ς silent (σιωπή silence) κερδ-αλέο-ς shrewd (cf. κέρδ-ος 
gain) 


288. MATERIAL OR SOURCE 


1. -o- (for -co-, the same as -to- in ὃ 287, 5). 


χρυσοῦς golden, for χρύσε-ος, xpvoe-to-s (Homer), from χρῦσό-ς gold. 


2. -.vo-. Nominative in -tvos, -ίνη, -wwov (cf. ὃ 287, 7). 


λίθ-ινο-ς of stone (λίθο-ς stone) ἀνθρώπ-ινο-ς human (ἄνθρωπο-ς 
man) 
289. FULLNESS OR ABUNDANCE 


1. -evt- (for earlier -fevt-). Nominative in -es, -eooa, -ev 
(mostly poetic). 


χαρί-εις graceful (xapt-s grace) ἀνεμό-εις windy (ἄνεμο-ς wind) 


FORMATION OF ADVERBS 


290. Beside the adverbs regularly formed from adjectives 
(8 157) and from pronominal stems (ὃ 187, 1), and the 
nouns used adverbially (8 157, 1), adverbs are formed 
also by means of certain endings approaching the nature of 
suffixes (cf. 8 137, 2). Of these the more important are: 


1. -δόν. 


σχε-δόν nearly (cf. ἔχω (*oex-, ὁμοθυμ-α-δόν with one accord 
σχε-; ὃ 38) hold) 


. FORMATION OF VERBS 169 


2. -δην. 
Ba-Snv on foot (cf. βαίνω (Ba-)  KpvB-dnv secretly (οἴ. κρύπτω 
go) (kpuB-) hide) 
3. -TE. 
ἄλλο-τε at another time (ἄλλο-τς πάντο-τε at all times (πᾶς all) 
other) 
4. -QKLS. 
TeTp-akis four times (τέτταρες πολλ-άκις many times (πολλοί 
four) many ) 


Norte.— Some adverbs end also in -a: thus μάλα very, τάχα quickly. 


FORMATION OF VERBS 
291. Primitive verbs (such as φη-μί or A€y-w say) are 
formed directly from roots (ὃ 165), while denominative 
J δ 
verbs are formed from the stems of nouns. 


292. The Suffix -.e.— The suffix by which nearly all 
denominative verbs were originally formed is -c2 (or more 
properly 72), but between vowels the ¢ disappeared (§ 21), 
and with consonants it combined to form other letters 
(8 39). Thus arose several classes of denominative verbs, 
their form depending on the form of the noun from which 
they were derived, then by analogy (§ 275) the endings 
of these verbs were used to form other similar verbs from 
various noun stems. The most important of these classes 
(as seen in the present indicative) are given below : 


1. (-6-w). Fromstemsin-o- By analogy (ὃ 275) -όω. 


mostly causative ). ᾿ ὶ ΕΞ 
( ) ) ζημιῶ (Cypt-ow) punish (ζημία 


dy AG (δηλό-ω) make plain, from penalty) 
δῆλο-ς plain ἀνδρῶ (avdp-ow) make a man 
of (ἀνήρ, ἀνδρ-ός man) 


1 


bo 


0 DERIVATIVE WORDS 


(-€-w). From stems in -o- 
(see ὃ 274) and -eo-. 
οἰκῶ (oike-w) dwell, from οἶκο-ς 

house 
τελῶ(τελέ-ω, for ἔτελεσ-ιω, 537) 


Jinish, from τέλος (TeA€Eo-) end 
(-4-w). From stems in -a- 
(a becomes ἃ from anal- 
ogy with -é@ and -όω). 
τιμῶ (τιμά-ω) honor, from τιμή 
(τιμᾶ-) honor 
(-εὐ-ω). 
-€U-. 


From stems in 


βασιλεύ-ω be king, from βασι- 
λεύ-ς king 

(-ττ-ω). From stems in 
-K-, -X-, -T-, -θ- (see 
§ 195, 1). 

κηρὕττ-ω proclaim, from κῆρυξ 
(κηρυκ-) herald 


(-t-w) (-ἰζω, -afw). From 
stems in -6- or -y- (see 
§ 195, 2). 


ἐλπίζω hope, from ἐλπίς 
(ἐλπιδ-) hope 
λιθάζεω stone, from λιθάς 


(Av6a6-) stone 


nBaw be in one’s prime (see ὃ 199 b), 


By analogy (§ 275) -éo. 


ἐπιχειρὼ (ἐπιχειρ-έω) attempt 
(xelp hand) 

ἀλγῶ (ἀλγ-έω) be pained (ἄλγος 
pain), fut. ἀλγήσω, cf. § 188. 


By analogy (δ 275) -ao. 


yo® (yo-aw) lament (γόος wail- 
ing) 
ἀντιῶ (avTi-aw) meet (ἀντίος 


opposite) 


By analogy (ὃ 275) -εύω. 


τοξ-εύω shoot with the bow 


(τόξον bow) 


By analogy (ὃ 275) -ἰζω and 


-alo. 
τειχ-ίζω fortify (τεῖχος wall) 
μηδ-ίζω favor the Medes (Μῆδος 
Mede) 
δικά- ζω judge (δίκη right) 
ἑτοιμ-ἀζω make ready (ἕτοιμος 
ready) 


292, 2a. From stems in -εσ- Homer often has the older form of the 
verb in -elw: thus τελείω (for *redeo-w) finish. 
292. 3a. Homer has ἃ in some verbs in -dw; thus μενοινάω be eager, 


COMPOUND WORDS ina 


7. (-Ad-w). From stems in 
-λ- (see § 195, 5). 
ayyéAA-w announce, from ἄγγε- 
Nos messenger 


A ον (for ikea ee By analogy (§ 275) -αίνω. 

-ip-o (for -ρ-ἰω) κερδ-αίνω gain (κέρδος gain) 
stems in -v- (especially χαλεπ-αίνω am angry (χαλεπός 
-av-) and -p- (see § 195, hard) 
4). 

μελαίν-ω blacken, from μέλας 
(peAav-) black 

τεκμαίρ-ομαι determine from 


signs, from τέκμαρ sign 


Norr. — Many verbs in -μαίνω are formed from substantives in -ya 
(gen. -pat-os) which originally had stems in -yav- (compare Latin 
Ω ΜΝ > 4 a = ’ 5 
no-men with Greek ovo-pa, ὀνό-ματ-ος, name): thus σημαίνω (for 
*onpuav-tw) indicate, from σῆμα, σήματ-ος sign. 


9. (-dv-w) (suffix -w%, cf. By analogy (δ 275) -dve. 


§ 196, 1). From ad- ἀλγ-ὕνω pain (ἄλγος pain) 

jective stems in -v-. peyad-vvw make great (μέγας, 
yov-v-w sweeten, from ἡδύ-ς great) 

sweet 


293. Desideratives. — Verbs expressing a desire to do 
something are usually formed by the ending -σείω : thus 
γελα-σείω desire to laugh (γελῶ (-dw) laugh). 


. COMPOUND WORDS 


FORMATION OF COMPOUND WoRpDs 


294. Compound words are formed by combining two 
or more separate words, or stems of words, into one word. 
Their accent is usually recessive (ὃ 64): thus μακρό-βιος 


172 COMPOUND WORDS 


(μακρο-ς + Bios) long-lived, προ-βουλή (mpo+Bovrn) fore- 
thought. 

1. The compound word thus formed often follows the 
inflection of its last part, as in the examples above, or it 
may go over into a different form of inflection: thus 
φιλό-τιίμος (τιμή) honor-loving, eb-yevns (γένος) well-born, 
θεο-φιλής (φίλος) dear to the gods, πολυ-πράγμων (πρᾶγμα, 
mpayuat-os) greatly active, meddlesome, ev-ppav (φρήν) 
glad-hearted. 


295. When the first part of a compound word is an 
inflected word, only its stem is used: thus Aoyo-ypados 
(Adyo-s) speech-writer, πείθ-αρχος (πείθ-ω) obedient to 
command. 
~ 1. A final short vowel (a or o) is elided if the second 
part began with a vowel (but see ὃ 2a): thus χορ-ηγός 
(χορό-ς) chorus-leader (but θεο-ειδής (θεος - ρεἶδος, § 2) 
god-like. 

2. Stems other than -o- stems, when used to form the 
first part of a compound word, have a strong tendency to 
take the form of -o- stems: thus λυρο-ποιός (λύραν lyre- 
maker, πατρο-κτόνος (πατήρ, tatp-os) father-slayer, par- 
ricide, φυσιο-λόγος (φύσι-ς ) natural philosopher, ἰχθυο-πώλης 
(ὐχθύ-ς) fish-seller. 

Nore. — Sometimes other letters (usually ες ἐς or oc) appear between 
the parts of a compound word: thus δακέ-θυμος soul-consuming, aty-t- 
Boros grazed by goats, δει-σι-δαίμων god-fearing. This seldom happens 
except when the first part of the compound is a verb stem, and such 
compounds are usually to be explained as formations from earlier 
(mostly verbal) noun stems which ended in this way. Analogy (§ 275) 
also probably played some part in such formations. 5 


296. In compound nouns a, ¢, or o, at the beginning of 
the last part often becomes long (7 or ), unless the syl- 
lable in which it stands is already long by position (ὃ 58): 


FORMATION OF COMPOUND WORDS is 


thus στρατ-ηγός (ἄγω) army-leader, general, av-dvupos 
(ὄνομα) nameless (cf. ὃ 132, 1). 


297. Apparent Compounds. — Sometimes words often 
used together come to be written as one word (cf. § 71, 
note): thus Διόσ-κοροι sons of Zeus (i.e. the Dioscuri, 
Castor and Pollux), ἀπο-πέμπω send away. Such words, 
although they are usually classed among compound words, 
are not real compounds, but only apparent. 


298. Compound Verbs. — Verbs can be compounded (see 
§ 297) only with prepositions (which were originally ad- 
verbs modifying the verb): thus ἐπι- βάλλω throw on. 

ΝΟΤΕ. --- Τὸ must be noticed that in denominative verbs formed 
from compound nouns the verb is not compounded. Thus, πείθομαι 


means obey, but disobey is not ἔἀ-πειθομαι but ἀπειθῶ (-€w), a denomi- 
native verb formed from ἀ-πειθής disobedient. 


299. Inseparable Prefixes. — Certain words used to form - 
the first part of compound words have no separate exist- 
ence. ‘The most important are: 


1. ἀν- (before a consonant a-, usually called alpha priva- 
tive) not, like Latin in-, English wn-: thus ἀν-αιδής 
shameless, a-Qeos godless. 

ἀ- conjunctive: thus a-Aoyos bed-fellow. 

δυσ- (the opposite of εὖ well), ill, difficult: thus dve- 
motos ill-starred, δυσ-χερής hard to handle. 

4. ἣμι- half-: thus ἡμέξθεος demigod. 


τὸ 


298 a. In Homer, and often in other writers, this adverbial use of the 
prepositions can be clearly seen, for the preposition is often separated by 
one or more words from the verb which it modifies: thus καὶ ἐπὲ κνέφας 
#AGe and darkness came on (A 475), ἀνὰ δὲ κρείων ᾿Αγαμέμνων | ἔστη 
and lordly Agamemnon stood up (B 100). This is often improperly called 
Tmesis (cutting). 

299 a. The poets have also vy- not and dp.-, ἐρι-, fa- intensive: thus 
νή-ποινος unpunished, ἐρι-κυδής very famous. 


174 MEANING OF COMPOUND WORDS 


MEANING OF COMPOUND WorDpDsS 


300. The meaning of most compound words is at once 
evident from the meaning of their parts. 

In nearly all of them the first part limits or determines 
the meaning of the second part: thus ψευδό-μαντις false 
prophet, ὁμό-δουλος fellow-slave, ἄ-γραφος unwritten, ἀμφι- 
θέατρον round theater, χειρο-ποίητος hand-made, ἀργυρό-τοξος 
silver-bowed = having a silver bow, γλαυκ-ῶπις bright-eyed. 

1. Observe that compound nouns may be either sub- 
stantives or adjectives, and that often a verbal element 
in a compound word may have either an active or a 
passive meaning: thus compare Aoyo-ypa dos speech-writer 
with a-ypadgos unwritten. 


Nore. — In compound words whose last part is a verbal formed 
by the suffix -o- the written accent regularly stands on that part of 
the word which indicates the agent (or instrument) : thus μητρο-κτόνος 
mother-slayer, matricide, μητρό-κτονος mother-slain, i.e. slain by a mother ; 
λιθο- βόλος stone-throwing, λιθό- βολος struck by stones. When the written 
accent is on the last part of the word, it stands on the penult if that 
is short, otherwise on the ultima: thus Aoyo-ypados speech-writer, but 
λογο-ποιός speech-maker, στρατ-ηγός army-leader, general. 


SYNTAX 


301. Syntax (σύνταξις arrangement) treats of the re- 
lations of words to one another. 


302. Attributive and Predicate. — An attributive word, 
it is taken for granted, modifies another word ; a predi- 
cate word is stated to modify another word. Thus, in 
ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἀνήρ the good man, ἀγαθός is an Attributive 
adjective; in ὁ ἀνὴρ ἀγαθός ἐστιν the man is good, ἀγαθός 
is a Predicate adjective. 

In Greek, attributive and predicate words are usually 
distinguished by their position with reference to the 
article (see $$ 451 and 453). 

1. An attributive may be an adjective, a limiting 
genitive (§§ 348-355), an adverb with adjective force 
(§ 429, 1), or a prepositional phrase. 


THE SENTENCE 


303. A sentence expresses a thought, and contains a 
Subject and a Predicate. 


304. The Subject. — The subject must be a substantive, 
or some word or words having the value of a substantive : 
thus ὁ παῖς γράφει the child is writing, ἐγὼ γράφω I am 
writing, of τότε ἀνδρεῖοι ἦσαν the men of that time were 
brave, ἔφυγον. . . περὶ ὀκτακοσίους about eight hun- 
dred fled Xn. Hell. 6, 5, 10. 

175 


176 SYNTAX 


305. Subject not Expressed. — The subject is not usually 
expressed when it is clearly indicated by the verb ending or 
by the context: thus ἀκούω I hear, ἀκούσατε hear ye, ἐσάλ- 
muyée he (i.e. the trumpeter) sounded the trumpet Xn. A. 
1, 2,17. vee it G.e. Ζεὺς or ὁ Oeos) rains, pact they (i.e. 
people) say, τὸν λαμπτῆρα ἐγγὺς προσενεγκάτω let him 
(i.e. the servant) bring the light close Xn. Symp. 5, 2. 


Nore. — The origin of the so-called impersonal use of the verb 
(which is comparatively rare in Greek) is probably to be explained 
in this way (ὃ 305): thus δεῖ μάχης (the condition of affairs) needs 
a battle, παρεσκεύασταί μοι (things) have been made ready by me. 


306. The Predicate. — The predicate is a verb or some 
word or words equivalent to a verb: thus Δαρεῖος na θένει 
Darius was ill, Kipos βασιλεὺς ἣν Cyrus was king, Kipos 
ἀνδρεῖος ἣν Cyrus was brave. 


307. Copula.— When a verb lke εἰμί am, γίγνομαι 
become, φαίνομαι appear, etc., is used merely to connect a 
predicate noun with the subject, it is called a Copula (cf. 
ἣν in the last two examples above). 


308. Omission of the Verb. —The verb is sometimes 
omitted when it can be easily understood; especially the 
copula of the third person ἐστί is or εἰσί are: as ἐχθρῶν 
adwpa δῶρα foes gifts no gifts S. Aj. 665. ὥρα λέγειν (it’s) 
time to speak, τῷ νόμῳ πειστέον obedience (is) to be rendered 
to the law. τί ἄλλο οὗτοι ἢ ἐπεβούλευσαν ; what else (did) 
these men than plot against us? Th. 8, 39. 


Nore. —Omission of the copula of the first or second person is 
rarely found: ἐγὼ .. . ἕτοιμος 7 (am) ready Dem. 4, 29. σὺ αἴτιος 
you (are) to blame Xn. Symp. 6, 7. 


ee a a ee Ὁ ἃ 


THE SENTENCE a lr 


THE SIMPLE SENTENCE 


309. A simple sentence contains but one subject and 
one predicate, as Δαρεῖος ἠσθένει Darius was ill. 


310. Enlargement of the Simple Sentence. — The subject 
of a sentence may be enlarged by an attributive (δ 302, 1) 
or appositive (ὃ 317) τὸ Μένωνος στράτευμα ἀφίκετο 
Menon’s army arrived, Δαρεῖος ὁ βασιλεὺς ἠσθένει Darius 
the king was ill. 


311. The predicate of a sentence may be enlarged by 
an object (direct or indirect, $$ 329 and 375) or cognate 
accusative (8 331), or by adverbial words or phrases : 
thus τῇ στρατιᾷ ἀπέδωκε Kipos μισθόν Cyrus paid the 
army wages, ἐνίκησε THY μάχην he won the battle, εὖ 
λέγεις περὶ τούτων You speak well about this matter. 


THE COMPOUND SENTENCE 


312. A compound sentence consists of two or more 
codrdinate simple sentences: thus τόνδε πέμψομεν . 
σὺ δὲ θανῇ him we'll send, and you shall die EK. IT. 614. 

1. The subject or predicate of a compound sentence is 
not needlessly repeated: thus ὁ δὲ πείθεται καὶ συλλαμβά- 
νει Κῦρον he was persuaded (ὃ 525), and (he) arrested 
Cyrus Xn. A. 1, 1, 8. εἶχε τὸ μὲν δεξιὸν Μένων καὶ οἱ 
σὺν. αὐτῷ Menon occupied the right wing, and those with him 
(occupied it) Xn. A. 1, 2,15. σύ τε yap “EXAnv εἶ καὶ 
ἡμεῖς for you are a Greek, and (so are) we Xn. A. 2, 1, 16. 


Nortr. — Here belongs the phrase καὶ οὗτος and he, and this, com- 
monly found in the neuter plural καὶ ταῦτα and that too: thus Μένωνα 
δὲ οὐκ ἐζήτει, καὶ ταῦτα Tap ᾿Αριαίου ὧν τοῦ Μένωνος ξένου he did not 
ask for Menon, and that too (he didn’t do) although he was from Ariaeus, 
Menon’s guest-friend Xn. A. 2, 4, 15. 


BABBITT’S GR. GRAM.— 12 


178 SYNTAX 


THE COMPLEX SENTENCE 


313. A complex sentence consists of a main and a sub- 
ordinate sentence: thus καὶ βασιλεὺς μὲν δὴ, ἐπεὶ ἤκουσε 
Τισσαφέρνους τὸν Κύρου στόλον, ἀντιπαρεσκευάζετο and 
the King, of course, when he had heard from Tissaphernes of 
Cyrus's move, made counter-preparations Xn. A. 1, 2, 5. 
εἰ μὲν δὴ δίκαια ποιήσω οὐκ οἷδα Whether I shall do 
right I know not Xn. A. 1, 3, 5. Ἐπορευμην iva. . . 
ὠφελοίην αὐτόν LI marched to help him Xn. A. 1, 3, 4. 


Norr.— A complex sentence may include more than one subordi- 
nate sentence, and a subordinate sentence may in turn have other 
subordinate sentences dependent on it: thus 6 δ᾽ ὡς ἀπῆλθε... ., Bov- 
λεύεται ὅπως μήποτε ἔτι ἔσται ἐπὶ τῷ ἀδελφῴ, ἀλλὰ, ἢν δύνηται, Bact 
λεύσει ἀντ᾽ ἐκείνου when he came back . . ., he planned to be no longer in 
the power of his brother, but, if possible, to be king in his stead. Subor- 
dinated to the main sentence, βουλεύεται, are the sentences ὡς 
ἀπῆλθε, ὅπως... ἔσται, and... βασιλεύσει, while .. . βασιλεύσει 
has dependent on it another subordinate sentence, ἣν δύνηται Xn. A. 
1 a: 


AGREEMENT 


314. General Principles of Agreement. — The inflected 
parts of speech, in general, indicate their relations with 
other words by agreeing, so far as possible, in gender, 
number, case, and person, with the words they modify. 
So a word in apposition with another word stands in the 
same case (§ 317), an adjective agrees with its substan- 
tive in gender, number, and case (§ 420), a pronoun takes 
the number and gender (and sometimes the person) of 
its antecedent (§ 462), and a finite verb agrees with its 
subject in number and person (§ 495). 

Nore. — Observe that as verbs have no distinction of gender, so 


substantives (and some pronouns, § 462) have no distinction of person, 
and may be used with any person (although most frequently with the 


AGREEMENT 179 


third), as: Θεμιστοκλῆς ἥκω παρὰ o€ (1), Themistocles, have come to you 
Th. 1,137. εἰ βούλεσθέ μοι of τε στρατηγοὶ καὶ ot λοχαγοὶ ἐλθεῖν... 
if (you) generals and captains are willing to come and see me Xn. A. 2, 
5, 25. ὅς ye κελεύεις (you) who bid Xn. Mem. 2, 3, 15. 


315. Construction according to Sense.— A word not 
infrequently violates the formal rules of grammar by 
agreeing with the real gender or number of the word it 
modifies. 

So a collective substantive often has a verb or participle 
in the plural (§§ 521, 500); neuter words or circumlocu- 
tions (like Bin ‘Hpaxrnein mighty Heracles, lit. the might 
of Heracles) denoting persons often have participles or 
relative pronouns agreeing with their real gender (δὲ 422, 


464). 


316. Attraction. — Sometimes a word, owing to the in- 
fluence of other neighboring or preceding words, takes 
different number, gender, case, or mode, from that ex- 
pected, or even demanded, by the construction of the 
clause in which it stands; this is called Attraction. 

So an adjective standing with an infinitive may be at- 
tracted into the accusative, although the word it really 
modifies is in the genitive or dative (ὃ 631, 1); a pronoun 
may be attracted to the case of its antecedent (8 48+) 
or to the gender of its predicate substantive (ὃ 465); a 
verb may be attracted to the number of its predicate sub- 
stantive (§ 501) or to the mode or tense of another verb 
on which it depends (§ 590, notes 1 and 4). 


SYNTAX OF SUBSTANTIVES 


AGREEMENT OF SUBSTANTIVES 
APPOSITION 


317. A substantive used to describe another substantive 
word, if it denotes the same thing, agrees with it in case 
(Apposition) ; if possible, it agrees also in number and 
gender, but this cannot always be: thus Κῦρος ὁ Bacu- 
Nevs Cyrus, the king, Kipos καὶ Κροῖσος οἱ βασιλεῖς 
Cyrus and Croesus, the kings (cf. ὃ 421), ὁ Εὐφράτης 
ποταμός the river Huphrates, but Πέλται πόλιες οἰκουμένη 
Peltae an inhabited city. 


318. Apposition to a Sentence. — A substantive (in the 
nominative or accusative case) may stand in apposition to 
the thought expressed by a sentence. καὶ, τὸ μέγιστον, 
ἐφοβεῖτο ὅτι ὀφθήσεσθαι ἔμελλε and — most important of 
all—he was afraid because he was likely to be seen Xn. 
Cy. 3,1, 1. εὐδαιμονοίης. μισθὸν ἡδίστων λόγων happi- 
ness be yours —reward for sweetest words KE. El. 251. 

Nore.— A word in apposition with a sentence may acquire an 
adverbial force: thus δεύτερον αὖ Σολύμοισι μαχέσσατο and secondly 


317 a. In Homer the demonstrative ὃ (δέ) at the beginning of a sen- 
tence is often explained by an appositive further on: thus 7 δ᾽ ἀέκουσ᾽ dua 
τοῖσι γυνὴ κίεν and she unwilling with them went, the woman A 348. 
τὸ δ᾽ ὑπέρπτατο χάλκεον ἔγχος but it flew over (him), the brazen spear 
X 275. 

180 


AGREEMENT OF SUBSTANTIVES 181 


(lit. the second thing) he battled with the Solymi Z184. (For χάριν for 
the sake of see ὃ 336.) 


319. Partitive Apposition. — A word in apposition may 
describe only ὧν part the word to which it refers: thus 
οἰκίαι ai μὲν πολλαὶ ἐπεπτώκεσαν, ὀλίγαι δὲ περιῆσαν 
the houses mostly had fallen, but a few were still left Th. 1, 
89. οὗτοι. . . ἄλλος ἄλλα λέγει these say one one thing, 
another another Xn. A. 2, 1, 15. 


PREDICATE SUBSTANTIVE 


320. A substantive used asa predicate (cf. §§ 326, 341) 
agrees in case (often also in number and gender, cf. ὃ 317) 
with the word it describes: thus ἀνέρες ἔστε. φίλοι be men, 
my friends O 734. Δαρεῖος βασιλεὺς ἣν Darius was king. 
ἡ πόλις . . . φρούριον κατέστη the city turned itself into 
a fortress Th. 7, 28. αὐτὸν σατράπην ἐποίησε he made 
him satrap Xn. A. 1, 1, 2. τούτοις χρῶνται δορυφόροις 
these they use as body-guards Xn. Hier. 5, 3. 

Notrr.— Observe the difference between the construction of the 
predicate substantive and that of the direct object (§ 329). Words 
meaning be, become, appear, choose, regard, name, and the like, can 
have a predicate substantive. 


PECULIARITIES IN THE MEANING OF SUBSTANTIVES 


321. Collectives. — A collective substantive, while sin- 
gular in form, may really have a plural meaning (ef. 
§ 315): so (ἡ) ἵππος cavalry, δῆμος people, πλῆθος mul- 
titude, etc. Τροίᾶν ἑλόντες ᾿Αργείων στόλος the Argives’ 
army (which had) taken Troy Aesch. Ag. 5TT. 


322. Abstract for Concrete. — An abstract substantive 
is often used with concrete meaning (Antonomasia): thus 
μῖσος hateful thing (lit. hate), ὄλεθρος baneful person 


182 SYNTAX OF SUBSTANTIVES 


(lit. destruction), κήδευμα relative (lit. relationship) ; so, 
by a similar process, ta ὅπλα (lit. arms) = camp, ἰχθύες 
(lit. fish) = fish market, οἷο. 


THE CASES 


323. In earlier times Greek (or, at any rate, its parent 
language) possessed three other cases besides those in regu- 
lar classical use. These were: (1) Ablative (separation), 
(2) Instrumental (including accompaniment ), and (3) Loca- 
tive (place where). The ablative has become one with 
the genitive, and the instrumental has been absorbed by 
the dative. Of the locative some traces still remain (see 
§ 76, note), but most of its forms and functions have been 
absorbed by the dative. 


324. The Greeks had a keen sense of the finer shades 
of meaning conveyed by the different cases, and did not 
hesitate to use different constructions with the same 
word: thus ἀκούειν λόγου to hear a speech (ὃ 356), 
ἀκούειν λόγον to hear (the whole of) a speech (§ 356 
note 1), ἀκούειν λόγῳ to hearken (1.6. be obedient) to a 
speech (ὃ 376). 

1. Often a combination of words may demand the use 
of a certain case which no one of them alone could 
command : as ἐμαυτῇ διὰ λόγων ἀφικόμην (= ἐμαυτῇ δι- 
ελέχθην) I have held converse with myself (lit. come through 
words with myself) EK. Med. 872. 

2. So verbs compounded with a preposition are thereby 
(either with the help of the preposition alone, or from the 
general meaning of the compound) enabled to take a case 
which the simple verb could not command. (See 88 345, 
370, and 394.) 


THE NOMINATIVE CASE 183 


3. For practical purposes it becomes necessary to clas- 
sify these various usages, and in the following pages the 
various uses of the cases are given in detail, but in the 
use of the cases, as elsewhere, analogy is at work, and it 
must be remembered that not every use of a case can 
be put into the grammatical pigeon holes here provided. 
(As a rule, only the general principles are here stated, 
and the exact usage with any particular word is always to 
be learned from the lexicons. ) 


THE NOMINATIVE 


325. The subject of a finite verb is in the nominative 
case: thus ἠσθένει Aapetos Darius was ill, ὅστις adi 
κνοῖτο whosoever came, μη δεὶς νομισάτω let nobody think. 


326. A noun in the predicate (§ 520) agreeing with the 
subject of a finite verb is also in the nominative case: 
thus Κῦρος βασιλεὺς ἣν Cyrus was king. 


Nore.— The nominative is not infrequently used in address and 
exclamations where we might expect the vocative: thus Zed πάτερ 
Ἢ ἐέλιός θ᾽, ὃς πάντ᾽ ἐφορᾷς Father Zeus and the Sun who lookest on 
all things T 277, Κλέαρχε καὶ Πρόξενε καὶ of ἄλλοι οἱ παρόντες 
Ἕλληνες Clearchus, Proxenus, and you other Greeks here present Xn. 
A. 1, 5, 16, Οὗτος, τί πάσχεις Here you, what’s the matter? Ar. V. 1, 
Σ χέτλιος hard of heart! E 403. 


THE VOCATIVE 


327. The person (or thing) addressed stands in the 
vocative case, often preceded by ὦ: thus ἄνθρωπε, τί 
ποιεῖς man, what are you doing? Xn. Cy. 2, 2, 7. ὦ 
ἄνδρες Ἀθηναῖοι men of Athens. (Cf. ὃ 326, note.) 


184 THE ACCUSATIVE CASE 


THE ACCUSATIVE 


328. ‘The function of the Accusative is to modify closely 
and directly the meaning of the verb. 


DIRECT OBJECT 


329. The direct object of a transitive verb stands in 
the accusative case: thus tov ἄνδρα ὁρῶ 1 see the man 
Mn An. 123.926: 

1. Many verbs which are transitive in Greek have no 
transitive equivalent in English. The following are note- 
worthy: ὀμνύναι τοὺς θεούς to swear by the gods, Nav- 
θάνειν τινά to escape the notice of anybody, αἰδεῖσθαι or 
αἰσχύνεσθαί τινα to feel ashamed before anybody. 

2. On the other hand, many Greek intransitive verbs 
which are followed by a genitive or dative can be rendered 
into English by transitive verbs. See §$ 356 and 376. 


330. Circumlocutions equivalent to a transitive verb 
may, of course, take an object in the accusative (cf. ὃ 524, 
1): thus ἐπιστήμονες ἦσαν τὰ αλλ ον εἰ they under- 
stood their duties Xn. Cy. 3, 8, συνθήκας ἔξαρνος 
γίγνεται he denies the agreement one 2d, 1 ΠῚ|0 cork 6. 6.9 τῷ 
μετέωρα φροντιστής he is a student of things above Pl. Ap. 
18 b. So the verbs λέγω say and ποιῶ (-éw) do, with the 
help of an adverb or cognate accusative (ὃ 331), are enabled 
to take a direct object of the person: as εὖ or κακῶς λέγειν 
τινα to speak good or ill of anybody (ct. § 340). 


THE COGNATE ACCUSATIVE 


331. In Greek, almost any verb, intransitive or transi- 
tive, may be followed by an accusative of kindred meaning 
with the verb, to define it more closely: thus δρόμον 


THE COGNATE ACCUSATIVE 185 


δραμεῖν to run a race, ἀρίστην βουλὴν βουλεύειν to plan 
the best plan, 1 T4, ηὐτύχησαν τοῦτο τὸ εὐτύχημα they 
had this good luck Xn. A. 6, 8, 6, cuvédvye τὴν φυγὴν 
ταύτην he had his share in this banishment Pl. Ap. 21 a. 


332. Circumlocutions equivalent to a verb may, of 
course, take a cognate accusative (cf. ὃ 330): thus σοφὸς 
ὧν τὴν ἐκείνων σοφίαν being wise in their wisdom Pl. 


Ap. 22 e. 


333. The Greeks were very fond of the construction of 
the cognate accusative, and used it with astonishing free- 
dom. Often the kindred meaning of the accusative is 
only implied in the verb. ‘The following examples will 
serve better than explanation to make the matter clear: 
ζῶ βίον μοχθηρόν I live a grievous life S. El. 599. ἀπό- 
λωλε κακὸν μόρον he has perished (by) an evil fate, a 166. 
ἠγωνίζοντο. .. στάδιον they competed in foot-racing Xn. 
A. 4. 8,217. τὰ Λύκαια ἔθῦσε he celebrated by sacrifice the 
Lycaean (festival) Xn. A. 1, 2, 10. So ἕλκος οὐτάσαι 
to make a wound, ὁδὸν πορεύεσθαι to make a journey, 
πλεῖν θάλατταν to sail the sea, ἐξελαύνει... σταθμοὺς 
τρεῖς he marches three days’ journey, tip πνεῖν to breathe 
(forth) fire, πῦρ . . . δεδορκώς looking fire τ 446. ἡ βουλὴ 

ἔβλεψε νᾶπυ the Senate looked mustard Ar. Eq. 631. 
δεινός εἰμι ταύτην τὴν τέχνην I am clever at this business 


(cf. § 380) Xn. Cy. 8, 4, 18. 


334. A neuter adjective or pronoun is often used as a 
cognate accusative, since the substantive with which it 
would agree is already implied in the verb: thus οὐδὲν 
ψεύδεται he’s telling no lie (i.e. οὐδὲν ψεῦδος ψεύδεται) 
Ar. Ach. 561. τοῦτο ἠρώτα he asked this question (i.e. 
τοῦτο TO ἐρώτημα), μεγάλα ὠφελεῖν to help greatly, τί 


180 THE ACCUSATIVE CASE 


χρήσεται αὐτῷ what use will he make of him Ar. Ach. 935. 
τί κατάκειμαι ; why am I lying down? Xn. A. 8, 1, 18. 


335. Accusative of the Part Affected. — Closely allied 
with the cognate accusative is the accusative of the Part 
Affected, found mostly with passive and intransitive verbs 
(see § 335 a): thus βέβληαι κενεῶνα you are hit in the 
belly ἃ 284. τὰς φρένας ὑγιαίνειν to be sound in mind 
Hdt. ὃ, 88. ἀλγεῖν τοὺς πόδας to have gout Xn. Mem. 
1,6,6. τί τὸ δέρμ᾽ ἔπαθες what's the matter with your 


hide? (lit. what have you experienced in your skin?) Ay. 
Pax 140. 


336. Adverbial Uses of the Accusative. — From the free 
use in Greek of the cognate accusative (§ 333), there have 
arisen several adverbial uses of the accusative: thus 
τὴν ταχίστην (SC. ὁδόν) the shortest way (originally with a 
verb of motion), τοῦτον τὸν τρόπον in this manner, χάριν 
for the sake of (originally an accusative in apposition with 
a sentence, ὃ 318; e.g. ἐμὴν χάριν for my sake), δίκην 
in the fashion of, like (e.g. πώλου δίκην like a colt), ov 
. + + ἀρχήν not at all (i.e. not (to make) even the begin- 
ning), μέγα (μεγάλα) greatly, τὸ πολύ (τὰ πολλά) for the 
most part, πρῶτον at first, πρότερον formerly, τὸ λοιπόν for 
the future, τέλος finally, and a good many others whose 


335 a. “ΠΟΙ AND Parr’? Construction. — In Homer (and some- 
times also in other poets), an accusative of the part affected often follows 
an accusative of the direct object: as τὸν δ᾽ ἄορι πλῆξ᾽ αὐχένα hin, with 
his sword, he smote (in) the neck A 240. 7 σε πόδας νίψει she shall wash 
(for) you your feet + 356. This construction is often explained as 
‘‘nartitive apposition,’ but, since the word denoting the part appears 
in the corresponding passive construction in the accusative case (while 
the other accusative becomes a nominative, § 511), it can hardly be an 
appositive (see § 512). 


THE COGNATE ACCUSATIVE 187 


meanings will readily suggest themselves. Here belong 
also the comparative and superlative of adverbs in -ws 


138). 


337. Accusative of Specification. — The accusative case 
of certain much used words like ὄνομα name, ὕψος height, 
evpos width, μέγεθος size (perhaps originally cognate), very 
early came to be felt as adverbial, and soon other accusa- 
tives came to be used in the same way: thus ποταμὸς 
Κύδνος ὄνομα. εὗρος δύο πλέθρων a river, Cydnus by 
name, two plethra in width Xn. A. 1, 2, 25. πόδας ὠκὺς 
᾿Αχιλλεύς Achilles swift of foot, Hm. τυφλὸς τά τ᾽ ὦτα 
τόν Te νοῦν Ta T ὄμματ᾽ εἶ blind in ears, and mind, and 


eyes, art thou, S. O.T. 371. 


338. Accusative of Extent. — The accusative (modifying 
a verb) is used to denote the extent of time or space : 
thus ἔμεινεν ἡμέρας πέντε he remained five days Xn. A. 1, 
2,11. ἀπέχει ἡ Πλάταια τῶν Θηβῶν σταδίους ἑβδομή- 
κοντα Plataea is seventy stades from Thebes Th. 2, 5. 

Nore. — Many accusatives denoting extent can readily be seen to 
be cognate: thus ἐξελαύνει σταθμοὺς τρεῖς he marches (a march 
of) three days’ journey Xn. A. 1, 2,5. ἐβίω ἔτη ἕξ καὶ ἐνενήκοντα he 
lived (a life of) ninety-six years, Isaeus 6,18. From such verbs as these 
the usage came to be extended to other verbs. 


339. Accusative of Limit of Motion. — The limit of mo- 
tion in Greek is expressed by the accusative (in prose 
5 with the help of a preposition): thus he 

eis Κολοσσάς he marched to Colossae Xn. A. 1, 2, 


339 a. In Homer and other poets the accusative alone (without a prepo- 
sition) is often used to denote the limit of motion: thus κνίση δ᾽ οὐρανὸν 
ixe and the fragrance came to the heavens A317. μνηστῆρας ἀφίκετο 
she came to the suitors a 332. πέμψει yap “Apyos for he will take it 
to Argos E. I. T. 604. 


188 THE ACCUSATIVE CASE 


TWO ACCUSATIVES WITH ONE VERB 


340. Since the cognate accusative may be used with 
transitive verbs (§ 831), it follows that some verbs may 
tuke two accusatives, one of the object and the other 
cognate: thus τοσοῦτον ἔχθος ἐχθαίρω ce with such hatred 
do I hate thee ὃ. El. 1054. Μέλητός με ἐγράψατο τὴν 
γραφὴν ταύτην Meletus brought this indictment against me 
Pl. Ap. 19". Κῦρος τὸ στράτευμα κατένειμε δώδεκα 
μέρη Cyrus divided his army into twelve divisions Xn. 
Cy. 7, ὃ, 15. ταῦτα τοῦτον ἐποίησα this I did to him 
Hdt. 1, 115. τοὺς Κορινθίους πολλά τε Kal κακὰ 
ἔλεγε he said many bad things of the Corinthians Hat. 8, 61. 
Κῦρον αἰτεῖν πλοῖα to demand vessels of Cyrus Xn. A. 
1, 3, 11. πολλὰ διδάσκει pw ὁ πολὺς βίοτος long life 
teaches me many lessons KE. Hipp. 252. ἀναμνήσω ὑμᾶς καὶ 
Tous... κινδύνους Iwill remind you also of the dangers 
Xn. A. 3, 2, 11. adaipeicPar Trois . . . "EXAHVaS THY 
γῆν to deprive the Greeks of their land Xn. A. 1, 3, 4. 
τὴν μὲν θυγατέρα ἔκρυπτε τὸν θάνατον τοῦ ἀνδρός from 
his daughter he concealed her husband's death Lys. 32, 7. 

Among these verbs are those meaning to ask, teach, 
clothe, remind, conceal, deprive, say (anything) ef or do 
(anything) to (a person), and many others. 

1. When these verbs are used in the passive, the cognate 
accusative is retained in the same case (§ 512): thus 
τύπτεσθαι... πεντήκοντα πληγ ἄς to be struck fifty blows 
Aeschin. 1, 1389. μουσικὴν . . . παιδευθείς instructed 
in music Pl. Menex. 236 ἃ. τοῦτο οὐκ ἐψεύσθησαν in 
this they were not deceived Xn. A. 2, 2, 13. 


341. Predicate Accusative. — Verbs meaning to make, 
name, appoint, regard, and the like, may have a predicate 


— 


PARTICULAR USES OF THE ACCUSATIVE 189 


accusative agreeing with the object (δ 320): thus στρατη- 
yov αὐτὸν ἀπέδειξε he appointed him general Xu. A. 1, 1, 2. 
ἀύπνους ἄμμε τίθησθα you make us wakeful v 404. νόμιζε 
τὴν μὲν πατρίδα οἷκον regard your native land as your 
house Xn. Hier. 11, 14. 

1. This construction is exactly parallel with ὁ Κῦρος 
στρατηγὸς ἀπεδείχθη Cyrus was appointed general, and in 
the passive construction both accusatives become nomina- 
tives (§ 511). 


PARTICULAR USES OF THE ACCUSATIVE 


342. Subject of the Infinitive. — The subject of the 
infinitive stands in the accusative case (see ὃ 029). 


Nore. — Originally the accusative in this construction was probably 
a direct object, while the infinitive (a verbal substantive, § 628) was 
used to define the verb still further, but as the infinitive partook more 
and more of the functions of the verb, the origin of the construction 
was forgotten, and the accusative came to be used with great freedom 
as the subject of any infinitive. 


343. Accusative Absolute. — The participle of an im- 
personal verb (§ 305, note), having no grammatical con- 
nection with the rest of the sentence, stands in the 
Accusative Absolute (§ 658). 


Notrre.— No doubt the accusative absolute, like the genitive ab- 
solute (§ 369), owes its origin to a loosening of its grammatical 
connection with the rest of the sentence. So in a sentence like 
ῥεχθὲν δέ τε νήπιος ἔγνω even a fool can see a thing that’s been done 
P 32, or δεδογμένον δὲ αὐτοῖς εὐθὺς μὲν ἀδύνατα ἣν ἐπιχειρεῖν it was 
impossible to take up arms at once—a thing which had been voted by 
them (cf. § 318) Th. 1, 125, the participle came to be thought of as 
having little or no connection with the rest of the sentence (“when a 
thing has been done —even a fool can see it,” and “it having been voted 
hy them,” ete.), and so such participles came to be freely used as an 
independent construction. 


190 THE GENITIVE CASE 


344. Accusative of Swearing. — The accusative is used 
in oaths, regularly preceded by νή or μά: vy or ναὶ μά is 
always affirmative; οὐ μά or μά alone is negative: thus 
νὴ Ala by Zeus, vai pa Δία yes, by Zeus, οὐ μὰ Ala or 

\ / 
μὰ Δία no, by Zeus. 


345. Accusative with Compound Verbs. — Some verbs by 
being compounded with a preposition, which can be used 
with the accusative (§ 346), are thus enabled to take an 
accusative which they could not otherwise command (§ 324, 
2): thus éowdéovte τὸν ᾿Ιόνιον κόλπον (= πλέοντι ἐς TOV 

κόλπον. ὃ 398, note 1) to one sailing into the Ionian 
Gulf, Th. 1,24. τοῦτον διαβάς having crossed this [river ] 
Xn. A. 1, 2,6. ὑπέρβη λάινον οὐδόν he stepped over the 
threshold of stone, θ᾽ 80. 


346. Prepositions with the Accusative. — The use of the 
Accusative to express Extent (§ 338) or Limit of Motion 
(ὃ 339) is often made more clear and definite by the help 
of prepositions. The preposition εἰς into (as well as the 
improper preposition ὡς to), from its meaning, can be used 
only with the accusative ; so also in prose ava up. Other 
prepositions used sometimes with the accusative are audi 
about, διά through, éri towards, κατά down, μετά after, παρά 
to the side of, περί round about, rpos towards, ὑπέρ above, 
ὑπό under. For the details of their use see §§ 400-417. 


THE GENITIVE 


347. The uses of the genitive in Greek can be grouped 
under two heads: the true genitive and the ablative geni- 
tive (§ 361), but in many instances the two have become 
fused together, and not every use of the genitive can be 


ee 


THE TRUE GENITIVE (POSSESSIVE) 191 


surely referred to one or the other — in fact, many uses of 
the genitive are very hard to classify: thus δέπας οἴνου 
cup of wine may appear to some a partitive genitive (ὃ 555), 
to others a descriptive genitive (of material, § 352, and 
note); ταύτης τῆς γενεᾶς εἰμι Lam of this race may appear 
to some a descriptive genitive (§ 352), to others a genitive 
of source (8 365), to others still a partitive genitive (ὃ 855), 
and many other examples of a similar sort might be quoted. 


A. THE TRUE GENITIVE 
POSSESSIVE GENITIVE 

348. The genitive limiting a substantive may denote 
Possession or Belonging: thus οἰκίᾳ πατρός father’s house, 
κύματα τῆς θαλάττης waves of the sea, ‘EXévyn ἡ Δεός 
Helen the (daughter) of Zeus. 

1. The possessive genitive can stand equally well in 
the predicate: thus αἱ κῶμαι... Παρυσάτιδος ἦσαν 
the villages were Parysatis Xn. A. 1,4,9. νομίζει ὑμᾶς 
ἑαυτοῦ εἶναι he thinks you are his own Xn. A. 2, 1, 11. 
τῶν γὰρ μάχη νικώντων Kal TO ἄρχειν ἐστίν for to rule is 
also (the right) of those who conquer in battle Xn. A. 2,1, 4. 


Norr.— The possessive genitive is often used with the definite 
article when the substantive with which the article would agree can 
be easily supplied (see § 424): thus Πολέμαρχος ὃ Κεφάλου Pole- 
marchus the (son of) Cephalus, τὰ τῆς πόλεως the (affairs) of the 
State; so also εἰς τοῦ ἀδελφοῦ to my brother’s (i.e. to his house). 


2. The meaning of the possessive genitive is often made 
more clear by the addition of adjectives like ἴδιος one’s 
own, οἰκεῖος belonging to one’s house, ἱερός sacred (to): thus 
ἱερὸς ὁ χῶρος τῆς ᾿Αρτέμιδος the place is (a) sacred (place) 
of Artemis Xn. A. 5, ὃ, 18. 


192 THE GENITIVE CASE 


SUBJECTIVE GENITIVE 


349. A genitive limiting a substantive sometimes ex- 
presses the relation which would be expressed by the sub- 
ject of a verb: thus φόβος τῶν πολεμίων fear of the 
enemy (1.6. οἱ πολέμιοι φοβοῦνται the enemy are afraid), 
εὔνοια τῶν πολιτῶν good will of the citizens. 

Nore. — The line between the subjective and the possessive (§ 348) 
genitive is very hard to draw, for the two imperceptibly shade into 
each other. 


OBJECTIVE GENITIVE 


350. The genitive may express the relation which would 
be expressed by the object (direct or indirect) of a verb: 
thus φόβος τῶν πολεμίων fear of the enemy (i.e. φοβεῖ- 
Tal Tis TOUS πολεμίους Some one fears the enemy), εὔνοια 
τῶν πολιτῶν good will toward the citizens (i.e. εὐνοεῖ τις 
τοῖς πολίταις some one is well disposed toward the citizens), 
ἐπιθυμία τῆς σοφίας desire for wisdom, τούτων aitia the 
cause of this. 


351. Objective Genitive with Adjectives. — Adjectives 
kindred to verbs which take an object may be followed 
by an objective genitive ἐπιστήμων τῆς τέχνης under- 
standing the art Pl. Go. 448 b. ὀψιμαθὴς τῆς ἀδικίας 
late in learning injustice Pl. Rep. 409}. τούτων αἴτιος 


responsible for this Ar. Eq. 1550. 


DESCRIPTIVE GENITIVE 


352. The genitive may describe the substantive which 
it limits: thus παῖς δέκα ἐτῶν a boy of ten years, χιλίων 
δραχμῶν δίκη a thousand drachmae suit, ἀργυρίου μνᾶ a 
silver mina, ἅμαξαι σίτου wagon loads of grain, Τροίης 
πτολίεθρον city of Troy (poetic; cf. 8 317). 


— 


THE TRUE GENITIVE (PARTITIVE) 193 


Nore. — The descriptive genitive is often subdivided into genitive 
of measure, material, value, ete. 


1. The descriptive genitive often stands in the predicate 
(cf. ὃ 348, 1): thus ἣν ἐτῶν ὡς τριάκοντα he was about 
thirty years old Xn. A. 2, 6, 20. ἡ κρηπίς ἐστι λίθων 
μεγάλων the foundation is of large stones Hdt. 1, 93. 

Nore. — Here doubtless belongs the infinitive of purpose with τοῦ 
used by Thucydides and later writers ($ 639): as φρούριον ἐπ᾽ αὐτοῦ 
nv... τοῦ μὴ ἐσπλεῖν Μεγαρεῦσι pnd ἐκπλεῖν μηδέν on it there 
was a fort so that nothing should sail in or out for the Megarians, 
Th. 2, 93. 


353. Genitive of Value. — With words of valuing, buy- 
ing, selling, and the like, the genitive (perhaps originally 
a descriptive genitive, § 352) is used to denote the value 
or price: thus μείζονος αὐτὰ τιμῶνται they value them 
more highly Xn. Cy. 2,1,18. δραχμῆς πρίασθαι to buy 
for a drachma Pl. Ap. 26e. τῶν πόνων πωλοῦσιν ἡμῖν 
πάντα Tayal οἱ θεοί the gods sell all things to us at the price 
of toil Xn. Mem. 2, 1, 20 Grom Epicharmus). πόσου 
διδάσκει; πέντε μνῶν what is his price for instruction ? 


Five minae Pl. Ap. 20 Ὁ. 


Nore. — But if the price is regarded as the means of acquiring a 
thing, it stands in the dative (see § 387). 


1. The genitive of value may be made more clear by the 
help of adjectives like ἄξιος worthy, ἀνάξιος unworthy, av- 
τάξιος equivalent, etc.: thus ἄξιος πολλοῦ worth much, 
ἀνάξια ἐμοῦ (things) unworthy of me Pl. Ap. 88 e. 


PARTITIVE GENITIVE 7 


354. A word denoting anything of which only a part is 
considered, stands in the genitive case. 


BABBITT’S GR. GRAM.—13 


194 THE GENITIVE CASE 


355. Partitive Genitive with Substantives. — A substan- 
tive (or substantive pronoun) may be described by a geni- 
tive denoting the whole of which it is a part: thus τῶν 
πελταστῶν ἀνήρ a man of the peltasts Xn. A. 4, 8, 4. 
ἦλθον ἐξ ᾿Εφέσου τῆς ᾿Ιωνίᾶς they came from Ephesus (a 
part) of fonia Xn. A. 2, 2, 6. of ddovtes Ελλήνων 
those of the Greeks who were captured Hdt. 7,175. πολλοὶ 
τῶν στρατιωτῶν many of the soldiers, οὐδεὶς TOV TOXE- 
μίων no one of the enemy, εἰς τοσοῦτον τόλμης to sucha 
(point) of boldness Lys. 12, 22. 

1. Adjectives or adverbs of the superlative degree are 
often followed by a partitive genitive (§ 427, 1): thus 
βέλτιστος ἀνθρώπων best (man) of men. 


Here belong also poetical expressions like δῖα γυναικῶν divine 
among women § 305, ete. 


Norr. — The partitive genitive with substantives has commonly 
the predicate position (§ 454). 

2. The partitive genitive can stand equally well in the 
predicate: thus ἣν δὲ καὶ ὁ Σωκράτης τῶν ἀμφὶ Μίλητον 
στρατευομένων Socrates also was (one) of those engaged 
in military operations around Miletus Xn. A. 1, 2, 3. 
ἐμὲ. . . θὲς τῶν πεπεισμένων put me down as (one) 


of the converts Pl. Rep. 424 ¢. 


356. Partitive Genitive with Verbs. — Any verb whose 
action affects the object only in part is regularly followed 
by the genitive. Many verbs, from their meaning, are 
almost always so used, others only occasionally. Thus, 
verbs meaning to share, touch, take hold of, be full af, 
begin, aim at, hit, miss, taste of, smell of, enjoy, hear, remem- 
ber and forget, care for and neglect, spare, desire, exercise 
authority (in some respect) over, and the like, regularly 


THE TRUE GENITIVE (PARTITIVE) 195 


take the genitive: thus λαβόντας τοῦ βαρβαρικοῦ στρα- 
τοῦ taking (part) of the barbarian army Xn. A. 1, 5, 1. 
τῆς γῆς ἔτεμον they ravaged (some) of the country Th. 1, 30. 
δεῖ ὑμᾶς... TOV κινδύνων μετέχειν You must share the 
dangers Xn. Hell. 2,4, 9. συλλήψομαι δὲ τοῦδέ σοι κἀγὼ 
πόνου but I too will take part with you in this task E. Med. 
946. λάβε πέτρης, τῆς ἔχετο he seized hold of the rock, 
and to this he clung ε 428. τὰ ᾿Αναξαγόρου βιβλία γέμει 
τούτων τῶν λόγων Anaxagoras books are full of these 
subjects Pl. Ap. 26d. τοῦ λόγου δὲ ἤρχετο ὧδε and 
thus he began his speech Xn. A. 8, 2,7. παιδὸς ὀρέξατο 
he reached for his child Z 400. vixns τετυχήκαμεν we 
have met with victory Xn. Cy. 4,1, 2. λωτοῖο φαγών 
eating of lotus 1 102. ὀλίγοι. . . σΐτου ἐγεύσαντο few 
tasted of food Xn. A. 3, 1,3. δαιτὸς ὄνησο enjoy the 
banquet τ 68. τῆς κραυγῆς ἤσθοντο they perceived the 
shouting Xn. Hell. 4,4, 4. δέδοικα μὴ ἐπιλαθώμεθα τῆς 
οἴκαδε ὁδοῦ 1 fear lest we forget the homeward way Xn. 
A. 3, 2,25. σέθεν δ᾽ ἐγὼ οὐκ ἀλεγίζω but I care not for 
you A 180. τούτων τῶν μαθημάτων πάλαι ἐπιθυμῶ 
Ihave long been desirous of this learning Xn. Mem. 2, 6, 30. 
ἐκράτουν τῆς θαλάσσης they were masters of the sea Th. 
1, 30. Χειρίσοφος ἡγεῖτο τοῦ στρατεύματος Chiri- 
sophus led the army Xn. A. 4, 1, 6. 


Nore 1.— Of course, when these verbs affect the object as a whole, 
they take the accusative: thus od μετέλαβε τὸ πέμπτον μέρος τῶν 
ψήφων he did not get (as his share) the fifth part of the votes Pl. Ap. 36 a. 
θεοῦ ἔκλυεν αὐδήν he heard the voice of the god O 270. πίε οἶνον 
drink wine i347. ἔλαβον τῆς ζώνης τὸν Ορόνταν they seized Orontas 
by the girdle (i.e. they seized Orontas, but took hold of his girdle) Xn. 
A.1,6,10. ἣν τὴν γῆν αὐτῶν τέμωμεν if we ravage their land Th. 1, 81. 

Norte 2.— As partitive is to be explained the genitive with verbs 
of imploring (poetic): as ἐμὲ λισσέσκετο γούνων she besought me by 
(taking hold of) my knees I 451. 


196 THE GENITIVE CASE 


357. Partitive Genitive with Adjectives. — Adjectives 
(and sometimes their adverbs) of kindred meaning with 
verbs which take the partitive genitive (§ 356) may also 
be construed with the genitive. See also ὃ 351. (Usually 
such adjectives stand with a copula, thus forming a cir- 
cumlocution equivalent toa verb; cf. $550): thus μέτοχος 
σοφίας partaking of wisdom, μεστὸς κακῶν full of evil, 
λήθης ὧν πλέως being full of forgetfulness Pl. Rep. 486 c. 
ἐπιστήμης κενὸς void of knowledge (but ct. § 362, 2 and 
δ 347), πλούσιος φρονήσεως rich in wisdom, ὑπτήῆκοος τῶν 
γονέων obedient to his parents Pl. Rep. 105 ἃ. κακῶν 
ἄγευστος without taste of evil S. Ant. 582. ἀμνήμων κακῶν 
unmindful of evil EK. H. F. 1397 (but ef. § 351). 


358. (Partitive) Genitive of Place. — ‘The partitive geni- 
tive (in prose regularly with the help of a preposition or 
adverb, see §§ 398-418) is used to denote the place within 
some part of which an action takes place: thus ἐέναι τοῦ 
πρόσω to go (into any part of the county) ahead Xn. 
A.1,3,1. So also δεξιᾶς and ἀριστερᾶς (sc. χειρὸς) on the 
right and on the left (hand): τὸ δὲ ἀριστερῆς χερὸς 
ἕστηκε and it stands (on a portion of the ground) on the 
left Hdt. 5, 77. So περὶ τρόπιος about (part of) the keel, 
διὰ πεδίου through (part of) the plain, πέραν τοῦ ποτα- 


358 a. In Homer (and sometimes in other poets) the partitive genitive 
of place (without a preposition) is freely used: thus ἢ οὐκ "Apyeos fev; 
was he not (anywhere) in Argos? y 251. ἔρχονται πεδίοιο they are 
marching along (in) the plain B 801. ifev . . . τοίχου τοῦ ἑτέροιο he 
sat (in a part of the space) by the other wall 1219. ἑστίας μεσομφάλου 
ἕστηκεν ἤδη μῆλα already stand the victims at earth’s central shrine Aesch. 
Ag. 1056. 

b. In Homer (and sometimes in other poets) the partitive genitive of 
place is occasionally found with adjectives: as ἐναντίοι ἔσταν ᾿Αχαιῶν 
they took their stand over against the Achaeans A 214. More commonly 
such words are found with a dative (δὲ 3876 and 392), 


THE ABLATIVE GENITIVE 197 


μοῦ (in some part of the space) across the river, πλησίον 
τοῦ δεσμωτηρίου (in some part of the space) near the 
prison, etc. 

Here belong also the adverbs in -ov like ποῦ, οὐδαμοῦ, 
ebes, ($131.01). 


359. (Partitive) Genitive of Time.— The genitive is 
used to denote the time within some part of which an 
action takes place: thus βασιλεὺς οὐ μαχεῖται δέκα ἡμερῶν 
the king will not fight (at any time) within ten days Xn. 
A. 1, 7,18: so frequently ἡμέρας by day, νυκτός by night, 
χειμῶνος in the winter, ete. 


360. Partitive Genitive with Adverbs. — Adverbs of 
place and time (rarely others) may be used with a parti- 
tive genitive (see §§ 358, 559): thus ποῦ γῆς where on 
earth (Latin ubinam gentium). οὐδαμῇ Α ἐγύππτπου nowhere 


in Egypt, οὐχ opas ἵν᾽ εἶ κακοῦ you see not in what plight 
of ul you are ὃ. Aj. 386. πόρρω τοῦ βίου far on in life 
Pl. Ap.38c. ὀψὲ τῆς ἡ μέρας late in the day. πῶς ἔχεις 
δόξης; in what state of opinion are you? Pl. Rep. 456 d. 
Note. — The partitive genitive with adverbs is by some authors used 
very freely; as χρημάτων εὖ ἥκοντες being well off in money Hat. 5, 


62. ᾿Αθηναῖοι ὡς ποδῶν εἶχον τάχιστα ἐβοήθεον the Athenians, with all 
possible speed of foot, went to assist Hdt. 6, 110. 


B. THE ABLATIVE GENITIVE 


361. The genitive performs also the duties of the 
original ablative which it has absorbed (see ὃ 323). 


GENITIVE OF SEPARATION 


362. The ablative genitive is used with words denoting 
or implying separation: thus 


198 THE GENITIVE CASE 


1. With Verbs. — ἀπεῖχον τῆς “Ελλάδος. they were dis- 
tant from Greece Xn. A. 3,1, 2. ἡ νῆσος od πολὺ διέχει 
τῆς ἠπείρου the island is not far distant from the main- 
land Th. 3, 51. δυοῖν ἀδελφοῖν ἐστερήθημεν δύο of two 
brothers were we two bereft ὃ. Ant. 13. τούτους. . . οὐ 
παύσω τῆς ἀρχῆς L shall not depose these from office Xn. 
Cy. 8, 6, 8. οὐδὲν διοίσεις Χαιρεφῶντος you will not 
differ at all from Chaerephon Ar. Nub. 503. 

2. With Adjectives.—¢/rAwv ἀγαθῶν ἔρημοι destitute of 
good friends Xn. Mem. 4, 4, 24. ὀρφανὸς ἀνδρῶν bereft 
of men Lys. 2. 00. ἕτερον τὸ ἡδὺ τοῦ ἀγαθοῦ the pleasant 
is different from the good Pl. Go. 500 ἃ. 

3. With Adverbs. —yowpis τῆς δόξης apart from the 
reputation Pl. Ap. 35 ". ἄνευ πλοίων without boats Xn. 
A. 2, 2,3. πόρρω τῆς πόλεως far off from the city Xn. 
Hell. 4, 5, 14. διαφερόντως τῶν ἄλλων differently from 
the rest Xn. Hier. 7, 4. 

Nore. — Verbs of depriving sometimes take a genitive of separation 
instead of the accusative of § 340: thus τῶν ἄλλων ἀφαιρούμενοι 
χρήματα taking away property from the rest Xn. Mem. 1, 5, 3. πόσων 
ἀπεστέρησθε of how much have you been bereft! Dem. 8, 63. 


363. Genitive with Comparatives. — Adjectives and ad- 
verbs of the comparative degree may be followed by a geni- 
tive (of separation) of the thing compared (see § 426, 2): 
thus χρῦσὸς δὲ κρείσσων μῦρίων λόγων gold is more potent 
than unnumbered words E. Med. 965. ὑστέρῳ χρόνῳ 
τούτων at a time later than these (events) Hdt. 4, 166. 
[πονηρίᾳ] θᾶττον θανάτου θεῖ baseness runs swifter than 


death Pl. Ap. 39 a. 


362 a. In Homer (and sometimes in other poets) the genitive of 
separation (or source) is occasionally found (without a preposition) with 
simple verbs of motion: thus παιδὸς ἐδέξατο... κύπελλον from her son 
she took the cup A596. βάθρων ἵστασθε arise from the steps ἃ. O. T. 142. 


THE ABLATIVE GENITIVE 199 


364. Genitive with Verbs of Inferiority and Superiority. 
— Verbs denoting Inferiority or Superiority (or Com- 
parison, § 563) may be followed by a genitive of separa- 
tion: thus τάχει. . . περιεγένου αὐτοῦ you surpassed him 
in quickness Xn. Cy. 8, 1,19. tTovrov.. Οὐχ, HTTH- 
σόμεθα εὖ ποιοῦντες we do not mean to be outdone by him in 
kindly deeds Xn. A. 2,3, 23. τιμαῖς τούτων ἐπλεονεκτεῖτε 
in honors you had the advantage of these men Xn. A. 3, 1, 37. 
᾿Αβροκόμας δὲ ὑστέρησε τῆς μάχης but Abrocomas was too 
late for the fight Xn. A. 1. 7,12. ἡττῶντο τοῦ ὕδωτος 
they were vanquished by the water Xn. Hell. 5, 2, 5. 


Note. — Observe that the genitive (of separation) with these verbs 
differs from the (partitive) genitive of § 356 in that the accusative can 
never be substituted for it (δ 556, note 1). 


GENITIVE OF SOURCE 


365. The ablative genitive is sometimes used to denote 
the source: thus μάθε δέ μου καὶ τάδε but learn of me this 
also Xn. Cy. 1, 6,44. ἐμοῦ ἀκούσεσθε πᾶσαν τὴν ἀλή- 
θειαν from me you shall hear the whole truth Pl. Ap. 17 Ὁ. 
Δαρείου καὶ Ilapucaridos γίγνονται παῖδες δύο of Darius 
and Parysatis were born two children Xn. A. 1, 1, 1. 


GENITIVE OF CAUSE 


366. The ablative genitive is sometimes used to express 
cause: thus χωόμενος γυναικός angry because of a woman 
A 429. ἐθαύμασα τῆς τολμῆς τῶν λεγόντων . . . 1 have 
wondered at the effrontery of those who say Lys. 12, 41. 
τούτους... οἰκτίρω τῆς ayav χαλεπῆς νόσου I pity them 
For their very serious infirmity Xn. Sym. 4,37. καί σφεας 
τιμωρήσομαι τῆς ἐνθάδε ἀπίξιος 1 shall punish them for 
their coming hither Hdt. ὃ. 1456. The genitive with ἕνεκα 


200 THE ABLATIVE GENITIVE 


concerning, on account of, and χάριν for the sake of, is prob- 
ably a true genitive (ὃ 347): as ἐλευθερίᾶς ἕνεκα for the 
sake of freedom Dem. 18, 100. 


Nore.— Genitive of Exclamation. The genitive of cause is also 
used alone in exclamations: thus ἀλλὰ τῆς ἐμῆς κάκης but (to think 
of) my cowardice! E. Med. 1051. φεῦ τοῦ ἀνδρός alas for the man! 
An. Cy..3, 1, 39. 


367. Genitive of the Charge or Penalty. — The genitive, 
with words of judicial action, is used to denote the Charge 
or Penalty: thus διώξομαί σε δειλίαᾶς Ill prosecute you 
for cowardice Ar. Eq. 368. δώρων ἐκρίθησαν they have 
been convicted of bribery (lit. gifts) Lys. 27,3. τῶν. 
ἀδικημάτων ηὐθύνθη he was acquitted of wrong-doing 
Dh 1 95. 

So with adjectives of similar meaning: ἔνοχος Numota- 
Evou liable for desertion Lys. 14,5. τῆς ἀρχῆς ὑπεύθυνος 
liable to give account of his office Dem. 18, 117. τῆς 
TpoTépas ὀλιγαρχίας αἰτιώτατος ἐγένετο he was most 
to blame for the earlier oligarchy Lys. 12, 65 (ef. § 351). 

Nore. — The origin of the Genitive of the Charge or Penalty can- 
not be surely explained, but most instances can be referred to the 
genitive of cause (§ 366): as διώκω τοῦτον κλοπῆς I am prosecuting 
this man for (1.6. because of) theft. On the other hand a genitive 
like θανάτου in θανάτου τιμώμαι I set the penalty at death (and so 
by extension, θανάτου κρίνειν to try for a capital crime) is almost 
certainly in origin a genitive of value (§ 353). 


PARTICULAR USES OF THE GENITIVE 
368. Two or More Genitives with One Word. —It may 
happen that more than one genitive limits the same word : 
thus τῶν ᾿Ιώνων τὴν ἡγεμονίην τοῦ πρὸς Adpetov πολέμου 
the leadership of the Ionians in the war against Darius 
Πα: 


PARTICULAR USES OF THE GENITIVE 201 


369. The Genitive Absolute. — A substantive and modi- 


fying participle having no grammatical connection with 
the rest of a sentence stand in the Genitive Absolute (see 
§ 001). 


Nore. —No doubt the Genitive Absolute (like the Accusative A bso- 
lute, § 345) arose from the gradual loosening of the grammatical 
connection of a limiting genitive and participle, until such a genitive 
came to be felt as an independent construction. Thus, in sentences 
like οὐδέ τι μῆχος ῥεχθέντος κακοῦ ἔστ᾽ ἄκος εὑρέμεν and no way is 
there to devise a cure for evil done (objective genitive, ὃ 850) I 350, or 
ws δ᾽ ὅτε καπνὸς ἰὼν εἰς οὐρανὸν εὐρὺν ἵκηται ἄστεος αἰθομένοιο as 
when smoke rises and reaches to the broad heavens — (the smoke) of a 
burning city (descriptive genitive, § 552) ® 525, the genitives came to 
be felt as independent constructions, and to mean “evil having been 


99 


done,” “a city being on fire.” 


370. Genitive with Compound Verbs. — Many verbs com- 
pounded with prepositions which can be used with the 
genitive, are thus enabled to take a genitive which, 
unaided, they could not command (ὃ 524, 2): thus ἔκ Baw 
ἀπήνης (= Baty ἐξ ἀπήνης. ὃ 398, note 1) step forth from 
the chariot Aesch. Ag. 906. ampoédpapovtes . . . τῶν 
ὁπλιτῶν running in advance of the hoplites (§ 398, note 1) 
Xn. A. 5, 2, 4. ἠπείρου ἐπιβῆναι to set foot on land 
(= βῆναι ἐπ᾽ ἠπείρου, ὃ 408, 1) ¢ 399. Especially κατά 
in the sense of against (cf. ὃ 409, 1 B): τούτου δειλίαν 
καταψηφίζεσθαι (-ε- ψηφίζεσθαι δειλίαν κατὰ τούτου) to 
vote cowardice against this man (i.e. to condemn him for 
cowardice) Lys. 14,11. κατεβόων τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων they 
cried out against (1.6. decried) the Athenians Th. 1, 67. 
So Katnyopa(-éw) accuse, and similar words (οἵ, ὃ 409, 


1 B). 


Notr. — Observe that the genitive with compound verbs may be 
either a True Genitive (§ 348 ff.), or an Ablative Genitive (§ 361). 


202 THE DATIVE CASE 


371. Prepositions with the Genitive. — The use of the 
Partitive Genitive (of Place or Time, $$ 358, 359) and 
the Genitive of Separation (ὃ 562) or Source (§ 365) is 
often made more clear and definite by the help of prepo- 
sitions (see § 598). The prepositions ἀντί instead of, 
ἀπό from, ἐξ out of, mpo before, and almost all * improper ” 
prepositions (ὃ 418) are used with the genitive only. 
Other prepositions used sometimes with the genitive are 
ἀμφί about, διά through, κατά down, μετά with, ὑπέρ above, 
ἐπί upon, mapa beside, περί around, mpos by, at, ὑπό under. 
For the details of their use see §§ 400-417. 


372. The Genitive of Agent. — The Agent with passive 
verbs (§ 516) is regularly expressed by the genitive with 
ὑπο under, by, sometimes with πρός or παρά at the hands 
of, less often by ἐκ or ἀπό from. 


THE DATIVE 


373. The dative in Greek inherits most of the functions 
of three earlier distinct cases (see § 323): the True Dative 
(8 374), the Locative (§ 583), and the Instrumental 


(§ 386). 
A. THE TRUE DATIVE 


374. The True Dative (which belongs properly with 
verbs or expressions equivalent to a verb) in general de- 
notes that to or for which anything is or is done. (Hence 
words denoting persons are more likely to stand in the 
dative than those denoting things.) Some words and 
phrases require a dative to complete their meaning; to 
others a dative may be added at pleasure. 


THE TRUE DATIVE 203 


DATIVE OF THE INDIRECT OBJECT 


375. The Indirect Object stands in the dative case : 
thus Συέννεσις ἔδωκε Κύρῳ χρήματα πολλά Syennesis gave 
(to) Cyrus a great deal of money Xn. Α. 1. 2, 27. ἐκείνῳ 
αὕτη ἡ χώρα. . . ἐδόθη to him this country had been given 
Xn. Hell. 5.1.0. τῷ ᾿Ασκληπιῷ ὀφείλομεν ἀλεκτρυόνα We 
owe a cock to Asclepius Pl. Phaed. 118 ἃ. θεοῖσι δὲ χεῖ- 
pas ἀνέσχον and to the gods they lifted up their hands T 318. 


376. Many verbs, and circumlocutions equivalent to a 
verb (cf. § 530), normally require a dative (of the indirect 
object) to complete their meaning: thus τοῖς νόμοις 
πείθονται they are obedient to the laws Xn. Mem. 4, 4, 15. 
ἐναυμάχεον ἀνηκουστήσαντες τοῖσι στρατηγοῖσι they 
Fought, in disobedience to (the orders of) the generals 
Hdt. 6, 14. ἐπίστευον αὐτῷ ai πόλεις the cities had 
confidence in him Xn. A.1,9,8. τῷ χρηστηρίῳ πίσυνος 
ἐών being confident in the oracle Hdt. 1, 73. ὠργίζοντο 
ἰσχυρῶς τῷ Κλεάρχῳ they were mightily angry at Cle- 
archus Xn. A. 1, 5, 11. ἐπολέμει τοῖς Opaki he waged 
war with the Thracians Xn. A. 2, 6,5. βασιλεῖ φίλους 
εἶναι to be friends to the king Xn. A. 2,1, 20. οὐ μὴ δυσμε- 
νὴς ἔσῃ φίλοις surely you will not be hostile to your friends 
KE. Med. 1151. εἰ τοῖς πλέοσι ἀρέσκοντές ἐσμεν, Tota δ᾽ 
ἂν μόνοις οὐκ ὀρθῶς ἀπαρέσκοιμεν tf we are in favor with 
(lit. pleasing to) the majority, we could not by any right be 
in disfavor with these alone Th. 1,38. τί οὖν πρέπει ἀνδρὶ 
πένητι ; now what is suitable for a poor man? Pl. Ap. 36d. 


In general, verbs (and verbal expressions) meaning please, profit, 
trust, aid, befit, obey, and their opposites (many of which are rendered 
in English by transitive verbs), require a dative to complete their 
meaning; but the exact usage with each word must be learned from 
the lexicons. 


204 THE DATIVE CASE 


Nore. — Only predicate adjectives regularly take a dative of the 
indirect object (since an attributive adjective commonly has the 
genitive, § 351); rarely such a dative is arrogated by an attributive 
adjective (or even by a substantive, § 393): thus Αἴολος. . . φιλος 
ἀθανάτοισι θεοῖσιν Acolus, dear to the immortal gods κ 2. 


THE DATIVE OF INTEREST 


377. A dative of the Person Interested may be added 
to almost any sentence. 


Nore 1.— Observe that the dative often adds the idea of personal 
interest (Advantage or Disadvantage) to what might otherwise be 
expressed by a genitive. Thus, compare the following: Δαρείου 
καὶ Παρυσᾶἄτιδος γίγνονται παῖδες δύο of Darius and Parysatis two 
children were born (§ 365) Xn. A.1, 1,1. ἦσαν Κροίσῳ δύο παῖδες 
Croesus was blessed with two children (§ 379) Hdt. 1, 34. Aavawy 
ἀπὸ λοιγὸν ἀμῦναι to keep destruction away from the Danaans 11 75. 
Δαναοῖσι. .. λοιγὸν apouvov relieve the Danaans of the pestilence 
A 456. So δέξατό οἱ σκῆπτρον he received the scepter at his hands B 186. 

Nore 2.— It is convenient to subdivide the dative of Interest into 
“ Advantage or Disadvantage” (§ 378), “ Possession ” (8 379), “ Agent” 
(§ 380), “ Reference” (§ 382), and the “ Ethical” dative (§ 381), but 
it must be remembered that no hard and fast lines can be drawn 
between these various uses (§ 324, 3). Thus, in διαμένει ἔτι καὶ νῦν 
τοῖς βασιλεῦσι ἡ πολυδωρία the custom of giving costly gifts lasts 
even to this day for the kings; the dative of Interest (βασιλεῦσι) 
may be explained as dative of Advantage, Possession, or Reference. 


378. Dative of Advantage or Disadvantage. — The dative 
of interest may imply Advantage or Disadvantage: thus 
Tas ἀνὴρ αὑτῷ πονεῖ every man labors for himself S. Aj. 
1366. οἱ τὸ παγχρῦσον δέρος ἸΤ]ελία μετῆλθον who went 
to fetch the golden fleece for Pelias Ἰὰ. Med. Ὁ. στεφανοῦ- 
σθαι πάντας TO θεῷ all to be crowned in honor of the god 
Xn. Hell. 4, 8, 21. Δαναοῖσι ἀεικέα λοιγὸν apuvov ward 
off vile pestilence from the Danaans A 456. (So with ἀμύνω 
alone: TH πόλει. .. apiveryv Kal θεοῖς to defend the State 


THE TRUE DATIVE 205 


and gods Ar. Eq. 517.) τοὺς Θρᾷκας τοὺς τῴ Δημοσ- 
θένει ὑστερήσαντας the Thracians who came too late for 
(i.e. to the disadvantage of) Demosthenes Th. 7, 29. 


379. Dative of Possession. —'The dative of interest (or 
advantage) is used with verbs like εἰμί am, or yéyvo 
aACAVe rapes Σ ts μ Ib, γίγν μαι 
become, to denote possession (cf. in Latin est mzhi filius) : 
thus ἦσαν Kpolcw δύο παῖδες Croesus had two children 
Hdt. 1, 54. εἰσὶν ἐμοὶ ἐκεῖ ξένοι 1 (luckily) have friends 
there Pl. Crit. 45 6. Οὔτις ἐμοί γ᾽ ὄνομα Noman is my 
name t 500. 


380. Dative of Agent. — The dative of interest with the 
perfect or pluperfect passive, or with the verbal in -τέος 
(ὃ 666), comes even to denote regularly the Agent: thus 
πάνθ᾽ ἡμῖν πεποίηται everything has been done by us Xn. 
A.1, 8,12. τοσαῦτά μοι εἰρήσθω let this much have been 
said by me Lys. 24, 4. ἡμῖν. .. πάντα ποιητέα (80. 
ἐστί) everything must be done by us Xn. A. 3, 1, 85: 


381. The Ethical (or Emotional) Dative. — The dative 
of a personal pronoun is often used to denote a lively or 
emotional interest which a person may have in something : 
thus καί μοι μὴ θορυβήσετε and do not, I beg you, make 
any uproar Pl. Ap. 20 e. ᾿Αρταφέρνης ὑμῖν ὙὝστάσπεός 
ἐστι παῖς now Artaphernes, you must know, is the son of 
Hystaspes Hdt. 5, 80. καὶ ὁ ἀνήρ σοι ὁ veavias ἐκεῖνος 
προελθὼν τοῦ λοχαγοῦ πρότερος ἐπορεύετο and, would you 
believe it, that young fellow stepped out in front, and marched 
in advance of the captain! Xn. Cy. 2, 2, T. 


382. Dative of Reference. — Datives expressing a remote 
interest (or merely a point of view) are conveniently 
classed as datives of Reference: thus σφῴν μὲν ἐντολὴ 


200 THE LOCATIVE DATIVE 


Διὸς ἔχει τέλος δή the command of Zeus so far as touches 
you twain, has its end Aesch. Pr. 12, Σωκράτης ἐδόκει 
τιμῆς ἄξιος εἶναι TH πόλει Socrates seemed to be deserving 
of honor from (lit. in reference to) the State Xn. Mem. 1, 
2,62. ὄλωλεν ὡς ὄλωλεν τοῖσιν εἰδόσιν he's dead —as 
dead may ὧε -- for those who know E. 1.1. 575. So in 
the idiomatic expressions like εἰ καὶ ἐκείνῳ βουλομένῳ 
ταῦτ᾽ ἐστί Uf this is agreeable to him also (lit. to him 
wishing) Xn. Hell. 4, 1, 11. ᾿Επίδαμνός ἐστι πόλις ἐν 
δεξιᾷ ἐσπλέοντι τὸν ᾿Ιόνιον κόλπον Epidamnus is a city 
on the right as one sails (lit. to, or with reference to, one 
sailing) into the Ionian Gulf Th. 1,24. So ὡς συνελόντι 
εἰπεῖν to speak briefly (lit. to speak from the point of view 
of one who has condensed the matter) Xn. A. 3, 1, 38. 
Nore. — No hard and fast line can be drawn between the dative 


of Reference and the dative of Advantage or Disadvantage, for a 
good many datives can be referred to either class. 


. 


δ. ΤῊΝ TOCATIVE, DATIVE 


383. As the heir to most of the functions of an earlier 
locative case (ὃ 323) the dative is used in expressions of 
place and time. 


384. Dative of Place. — The dative (in prose regularly 
with the help of a preposition) is used to denote the place 
where (cf. ὃ 384 a): thus ἐν τῇ πόλει in the city. 


384 a. In Homer (and sometimes in other poets) the dative of place 
without a preposition is freely used: thus τόξ᾽ ὥμοισιν ἔχων with the bow 
on his shoulder A 45. εὗδε μυχῷ κλισίης he slept in a corner of the tent 
1663. πεδίῳ πέσε he fell in the plain E82. ἀλλ᾽ οὐκ ᾿Ατρείδῃ ᾿Αγαμέμνονι 
ἥνδανε Ovuw but it pleased not Agamemnon in his heart A 24. 80 κράτος 
ἔσκε μέγιστον πᾶσι Κυκλώπεσσι whose power was the greatest among all 
the Cyclopes a 71. οὐτιδανοῖσι ἀνάσσεις you are lord among nobodies 
A251. ναίειν ὄρεσι to dwell in the mountains ὃ. OT. 1151. 


THE INSTRUMENTAL DATIVE 207 


385. Dative of Time. — The dative (often with the help 
of a preposition) is used to denote time when (cf. § 383): 
thus τῇ ὑστεραίᾳ on the following (day), τετάρτῳ ἔτει the 
fourth year, μιᾷ νυκτί on one night, ἐν τῷ αὐτῷ χειμῶνι 
the same winter Th. 2, 34. 


C. THE INSTRUMENTAL DAT Tyan 


386. The dative performs also the duties (in express- 
ing means, manner, cause, accompaniment) of the earlier 
instrumental case which it has absorbed (ὃ 525). 


387. Dative of Means. — The dative may denote the 
Means or Instrument: thus λίθοις ἔβαλλον they pelted 
(them) with stones Xn. A. 5, 4, 28. ἴησι τῇ ἀξίνῃ he 
threw the axe (lit. with the axe) Xn. Α. 1, ὃ, 12. γνωσθέν- 
Tes TH σκευῇ τῶν ὅπλων known by the make of their 
weapons Th. 1, 8. 

Nore. — The verb χρῶμαι use (1.6. serve one’s self with) regularly 


takes the dative of Means: thus λόγῳ χρῶνται they use reason Xn. 
Mem. 3, 3, 11. 


388. Dative of Degree of Difference. — The dative of 
means with comparatives and expressions implying com- 
parison (sometimes also with superlatives) denotes the 
Degree of Difference: thus τῇ κεφαλῇ μείζω taller by a 
(lit. the) head Pl. Phaed. 100 e. οὐ πολλαῖς ἡμέραις 
ὕστερον not many days later (lit. later by not many days) 
Xn. Hell. 1, 1,1. wort λογίμῳ ἡ ᾿Ελλὰς γέγονε ἀσθενε- 
atépn Greece has become weaker by one famous city Hat. 
6, 106. δέκα ἔτεσι πρὸ τῆς ἐν Σαλαμῖνι ναυμαχίας ten 
years before the sea fight at Salamis Pl. Leg. 698 c. 
TONAG πλεῖστοι by far the most Hdt. 5, 92, 5. 


208 THE DATIVE CASE 


389. Dative of Manner.— The dative may denote 
Manner (sometimes with the help of a preposition): thus 
τούτῳ τῷ τρόπῳ ἐπορεύθησαν in this manner they pro- 
ceeded Xn. A. ὃ, 4, 23. δρόμῳ tevto ἐς τοὺς βαρβάρους 
on the run they rushed against the barbarians Hat. 6, 112. 
So in several adverbial expressions like Bia with violence, 
σιγῇ im silence, τῇ ἀληθείᾳ in truth, τῷ ὄντι in reality, 
λόγῳ in word, ἔργῳ in deed, τῇ ἐμῇ γνώμῃ in my opinion, 
ταύτῃ (SC. ὁδῷ) in this way. 


390. Dative of Respect. — The dative of Manner or 
Means is sometimes used to show in what respect a thing 
is so (but this usage has been greatly encroached on by 
the accusative of specification, ὃ 337): thus εὐρύτερος 
ὦμοισιε broader in shoulders V194. τῇ φωνῇ τραχύς harsh 
in voice Xn. A. 2,6, 9. ἰσχύειν τοῖς σώμασι to be strong 
in their bodies (1.6. with their bodies) Xn. Mem. 2, 7, T. 
ἐγὼ οὔτε ποσίν εἰμι ταχὺς οὔτε χερσὶν ἰσχυρός I am 
neither swift of foot nor strong of arm Xn. Cy. 2, 3, 6. 


391. Dative of Cause. — ‘The dative may be used to 
denote Cause: thus piyes ἀπωλλύμεθα we were dying of 
cold Xn. A. 5, 8, 2. ovdevi otto χαίρεις ὡς φίλοις 
ἀγαθοῖς you delight in nothing so much as in good friends 
Xn. Mem. 2, 6,35. χαλεπῶς φέρω τοῖς παροῦσι πράγμασι 
I am distressed at the present circumstances Xn. A. 1, 8, 3. 


Notr.— The dative usually denotes a more active or immediate 
cause than the genitive of cause (§ 566). 


392. Dative of Accompaniment or Association. — The 
dative (often helped by a preposition) may be used 
with words denoting (or implying) accompaniment, asso- 
ciation, or likeness: thus 


THE INSTRUMENTAL DATIVE 209 


1. With Verbs. —évOaS’ ἱκάνεις νηί τε καὶ ἑτάροισι; are 
you come hither with your ship and crew? X 101. σὺν νηί 
T ἐμῇ καὶ ἐμοῖς ἑτάροισιν ἐλθών going with my ship and 
crew ὁ 173. ἡμῖν ἐφείποντο of πολέμιοι καὶ ἱππικῷ Kal 
πελταστικῷ the enemy followed us with cavalry and pel- 
tasts Xn. A. 7, 6,29. σὺν τῇ ἄλλῃ στρατιᾷ εἰς ᾿Αθήνας 
κατέπλευσε with the remainder of his army he sailed to 
Athens Xn. Hell. 1,4,10. ὡμιλείτην αὐτῷ they associated 
with him Xn. Mem. 1, 2,39. ἀμφισβητοῦμεν ἀλλήλοις 
we dispute with each other Pl. Phaedr. 205 ἃ. τῷ ἡγεμόνι 

. ἕπεσθαι to follow the leader Xn. A. 1, 8, 11. ἀλλή- 
λοις σπονδὰς ἐποιήσαντο they made a truce with each other 
Xn. Hell. 3, 2, 20. ἐμαυτῇ διὰ λόγων ἀφικόμην I have 
been reasoning with myself EK. Med. 872. φιλοσόφῳ 
ἔοικας you seem like a philosopher Xn. A. 2,1, 13. The 
last example may also be explained as a true dative, § 376. 

Nore. — With words meaning to fight the simple dative means to 
Sight against; the dative with σύν to fight on the side of: thus ᾽Α θη- 


valots μάχεσθαι to fight against the Athenians; σὺν ᾿Αθηναίοις 
μάχεσθαι to fight on the side of the Athenians. 


2. With Adjectives. —dmo.os ᾿Α χελλεῖ like Achilles Xn. 
Sym. 4, 6. χώραν ὅμορον τῇ Λακεδαιμονίων a land con- 
tiguous with that of the Lacedaemonians Dem. 15, 22. 
κόμαι Χαρίτεσσιν ὁμοῖαι hair like (that of) the Graces 
(cf. 8 717, 6) P51. πολλοῖς εἰμι διάφορος with many 
I’m at variance E. Med. 579. So with ὁ αὐτός the same: 
TO αὐτὸ τῷ HALOL@ the same thing as (lit. with) foolish- 
ness Xn. A. 2, 6, 22. ὡπλισμένοι ἦσαν τοῖς αὐτοῖς Κύρῳ 
ὅπλοις they were armed with the same weapons as (those of) 
Corus (et. 8. (11, 6) Xn. Cy. T, 1. 

3. With Adverbs. —éropuévas τῷ νόμῳ conformably to 
law Pl. Leg. 844 6. σύμμιγα τῇσι γυναιξί together with 
the women Hdt. 6, 58. ἅμα τῇ ἡμέρᾳ at daybreak (iit. 


BABBITT’S GR. GRAM. — 14 


210 THE DATIVE CASE 


along with the day). So with ὁμοῦ together with, ἐφεξῆς 
neat in order. 

Nore. — As dative of accompaniment is probably to be explained 
the idiomatic use of the dative and αὐτός (§ 475, 3, note 2): as νέας 


τέσσερας αὐτοῖσι τοῖς ἀνδράσι εἷλον they took four ships men and all 
(lit. with the men themselves) Hat. 6, 95. 


PARTICULAR USES OF THE DATIVE 

393. Dative with Substantives. — The verbal idea in a 
verbal substantive sometimes makes it possible to construe 
a dative with it: thus τὴν τοῦ θεοῦ δόσιν ὑμῖν Heaven's 
gift to you (dative of the indirect object, ὃ 375) PI. 
Ap. 80 4. πεμφθέντα ταύρων πυρπνόων ἐπιστάτην ἕεύ- 
γλαισι sent to master (lit. as master of) with the yoke 
(dative of means, ὃ 387) the fiery bulls E. Med. 478. 
κοινωνία τοῖς ἀνδράσι association with the men (dative 
of association, ὃ 892) Pl. Rep. 466 ο. 


394. Dative with Compound Verbs. — Many verbs com- 
pounded with ἐν, σύν. or with other prepositions which 
may be used with the dative (§ 395), are thus assisted in 
taking a dative which the verb of itself could not com- 
mand: thus τοῖς ὅρκοις ἐμμένει ὁ δῆμος (= μένει ἐν τοῖς 
ὅρκοις. See ὃ 398, note 1) the people abides by its oaths Xn. 
Hell. 2, 4, 45. συνεπολέμει Κύρῳ he joined with Cyrus 
in making war Xn. A. 1, 4, 2... . ὡς ἐπιβουλεύοι αὐτῷ 
. . . that he was plotting against him Xn. A. 1, 1, 38. 
ἐπειδὴ προσβάλοιεν ἀλλήλοις when they attacked each 
other Th. 1, 49. So likewise denominative verbs (ὃ 298, 
note) containing these prepositions: as ἐπιχειρῆσαι ἀλλή- 
λοις to lay hands on each other Th. 1, 49. 

Notr.— Such compound verbs as take the dative (§ 394) are 
enabled to do so usually by virtue of the meaning of the preposition 


alone, but sometimes apparently from the general meaning of the 
compound (compare the first two examples above with the fourth). 


PLACE AND TIME Dict 


395. Prepositions with the Dative. — The use of the 
Locative Dative (of Place or Time, δὲ 384, 385), and the 
Instrumental Dative (of Accompaniment, ὃ 392), and 
rarely the True Dative (ὃ 374), is often made more defi- 
nite by the help of prepositions. The prepositions ἐν in, 
and σύν with, are, from their meaning, used with the 
dative only. Other prepositions used sometimes with the 
dative are: ἐπί upon, wapa beside, περί about, pos at, ὑπό 
under. For the details of their use see §§ 400-417. 


PLACE AND TIME (Summary) 


396. 1. Place at which is expressed by the locative 
(§ 76, note) or locative dative (§ 384), the latter usually with 
a preposition: ᾿Αθήνησι at Athens, ἐν τῇ πόλει in the city. 

2. Place within which is expressed by the partitive 
genitive (usually with a preposition or adverb, ὃ 358) : 
τῆς δεξιᾶς on the right, διὰ πεδίου through the plain. 

3. Place from which is expressed by the genitive of 
separation (usually with a preposition, ὃ 362): ἐξ ἄστεως 
From town. 

4. Place towards or to which is expressed by the accu- 
sative of limit of motion (in prose regularly with a 
preposition, ὃ 339) εἰς τὴν πόλιν into the city. 


397. 1. Time at which is expressed by the locative dative 
(§ 385): τῇ τρίτῃ ἡμέρᾳ on the third day. 

2. Time within which is expressed by the partitive 
genitive (ὃ 359): ἡμέρας by day (i.e. at some time within 
the day). 

3. Time during which is expressed by the accusative 
(ὃ 338): τὴν ἡμέρᾶν ταύτην during (the whole of) this day. 


395 a. In poetry ἀνά up(on), ἀμφί about (also in Herodotus), and μετά 
with are also found with the dative. 


a1? PREPOSITIONS WITH THE CASES 


PREPOSITIONS WITH THE- CASES 


398. The Prepositions were originally adverbs modify- 
ing the verb, and serving to define more clearly and 
exactly the adverbial uses of the cases (see § 398 a). 
They early came to be united with the verb (Composition, 
§ 298), or to be used regularly with such cases as their 
meaning would allow; then by a sort of crystallization 
of their usage certain phrases were formed which came to 
have special or idiomatic meanings. 

For the so-called ““ Improper Prepositions” see ὃ 418. 


Note 1.— The preposition in Greek has sometimes become attached 
to the verb where in English it would be rendered with the accom- 
panying substantive: as ἀπεστρατοπεδεύοντο οἱ βάρβαροι τοῦ “EAAn- 
vixov the barbarians encamped away from the Greek army Xn. A. 3, 4, 34. 

Norte 2.— Not infrequently the preposition is used both with the 
verb and with the substantive: as πρὸς τὴν κώμην προσιόντες coming 
forward to the village Xn. A. 3,4, 35. eio Bas εἰς πλοῖον embarking in 
a ship Xn. A.5,7,15. Thus the Greek could say Batvw eis τὴν πόλιν, 
or εἰσ βαίνω τὴν πόλιν, or εἰσ Baivw εἰς τὴν πόλιν go into the city, but 
the tendency was, wherever possible, to join the preposition with the 
verb. 

Norte 3.— Greek (like Latin) sometimes differs from English in 
the point of view from which it uses the cases and the accompanying 
preposition ; especially words suggesting motion (although denoting 
rest) are often used with a case and preposition appropriate to motion 
(to or from), although not so rendered in English: thus κατέστη eis 
τὴν βασιλείαν ᾿Αρταξέρξης Artaxerres was established in power Xn. A. 
1, 1,3. τὴν πόλιν ἐξέλιπον . . . εἰς χωρίον ὀχυρόν they abandoned the 
city (and went) into a stronghold Xn. A. 1, 2, 24. οἱ ἐκ THs ἀγορᾶς 
καταλιπόντες τὰ wvia ἔφυγον the people in the market (lit. from the 
market) abandoned their wares, and fled Xn. A. 1, 2, 18. So with 


398 a. The adverbial use of the prepositions can be seen very clearly 
in Homer (see ὃ 298 a), and in some phrases such as πρὸς δέ and besides 
(found even in Attic prose), ἐν δέ and among the number, μετὰ δέ and 
afterwards ; so πέρι exceedingly in Homer is often an adverb. 


USE AND MEANINGS OF THE PREPOSITIONS 213 


corresponding adverbs: οὐ yap εἶχον οἴκοθεν for I had none (that I 
could bring) from home Ar. Pax 522. 


GENERAL VIEW OF THE PREPOSITIONS 


399. Summary of Usage. —In Attic prose the preposi- 
tions are used as follows: 

With the Accusative only: ava, εἰς. 

With the Genitive only: ἀντί, ἀπό, ἐξ, πρό. 

With the Dative only: ἐν and σύν. 

With the Accusative or Genitive: ἀμφί, διά, κατά, 
μετά, ὑπέρ. 

With the Accusative, Genitive, or Dative: ἐπί, παρᾶ, 
περί, πρός, ὑπό. 

For the special functions of the cases which admit 
the aid of prepositions see $$ 346, 871, 595. 


USE AND MEANINGS OF THE PREPOSITIONS 


[In the following pages only the general facts about 
the meanings and uses of the prepositions (besides a few 
special phrases) are recorded; the exact details about 
each preposition are to be found in a lexicon. ] 


400. ἀμφί about (properly on both sides of, Latin amb-); see § 400 a. 


1. With THE GENITIVE (in origin a Partitive Genitive of Place, 
§ 358) about, concerning (rare in prose, περί being generally used 
instead) audi wv εἶχον διαφερόμενοι quarreling about what they had 
> SO oft a 


399 a. In poetry, ἀνά, ἀμφί, and wera are also used with the dative ; 
and ἀμφί is so used by Herodotus. 

400 a. In Ionic and in poetry ἀμφί is used also with the (locative, 
§ 384) dative, meaning about, and so concerning, because of: ἀμφ᾽ 
ὥμοισιν ἔχει σάκος he has his shield about his shoulders A527. ἀμφὶ 
δίναις about the eddies Ἰὰ. 1.1. 6. ἀμφ᾽ ἐμοὶ στένεις ; are you lamenting 
about me? S. El. 1180. 


214 USE AND MEANINGS OF THE PREPOSITIONS 


2. With THE ACCUSATIVE (of Extent, ὃ 338) about. 

Place: τῶν ἀμφὶ Μίλητον στρατευομένων of those engaged in mili- 
tary operations about Miletus Xn. A. 1, 2, 3. 

Time: ἀμφὶ μέσον ἡμέρας about noon Xn. A. 4, 4, 1. 

Derived Meanings: ἀμφὶ τὰ πεντήκοντα about fifty Xn. A. 2, 6, 15. 


In Composition: about, on both sides of 


401, ἀνά up (opposed to κατά down); see § 401 a. 
Wiru THE ACCUSATIVE: 


A. (of Extent, § 338) up, along. 

Place: ἀνὰ τὸν ποταμόν up the river Hdt. 2,96. ἀνὰ τὴν Ἑλλάδα 
throughout Greece Hat. 6, 131. 

Derived Meanings: ἀνὰ νύκτα along (in) the night Ἐ 80. ἀνὰ 
πᾶσαν ἡμέραν every day Xn. Cy. 1, 2, 8. 


B. (of Limit of Motion, 8 339) upon. 

Place: θῆκεν ἀνὰ μυρίκην he put them up on a tamarisk bush K 466. 

Derived Meanings: ἀνὰ κράτος up to (his) strength (i.e. at full 
speed) Xn. A.1, 10,15. ἀνὰ ἑκατόν up to a hundred (i.e. by hun- 
dreds) Xn. A. 5, 4, 12. 


In Composition: up, back, again. 


402, ἀντί instead of, for, originally over against (Latin ante) (but 
in this use it was supplanted by ἐναντίον). 


1. Wire THE GENITIVE (in origin a Partitive Genitive of Place 
ὃ bs 
§ 358). 

Derived Meanings only: τὰ παρ᾽ ἐμοὶ ἑλέσθαι ἀντὶ τῶν οἴκοι to 
choose the lot with me instead of (i.e. rather than) that at home Xn. 
A.1,7,4. ἀνθ᾽ ὧν εὖ ἔπαθον in return for the favors I have received 

? . . 
7 © / 5 - . . 
Xn. 4.1, 3,4. ἀντὶ ἡμέρης νὺξ ἐγένετο instead of day it became night 
Hat. 7, 37. 


In ComPposiTION: against, instead, in return. 


401 a. In Epic and Lyric poetry ἀνά is sometimes found with the 
(locative) dative: as χρυσέῳ av (ὃ 43, note 3) σκήπτρῳ upon a golden 
staff A 16. 


USE AND MEANINGS OF THE PREPOSITIONS 215 


403. ἀπό from, away from (Latin ab). 

Wir THE GENITIVE (of Separation or Source, $$ 362, 365) only: 

Place: ἀπὸ θαλάσσης μᾶλλον ὠκίσθησαν they were setiled rather (at 
a distance) away from the sea Th. 1,7. Avovto δὲ τεύχε᾽ ἀπ᾿ ὥμων and 
they stripped the armor from their shoulders P 318. ἐθήρευεν ἀπὸ ἵππου 
he used to hunt on horseback (lit. from a horse, § 398, note 3) Xn, 
ee aye 

Time: ἀπὸ τούτου τοῦ χρόνου from this time Xn. A. 7, 5, 8. 

Derived Meanings: of (remote) agency πλούσιον γίγνεσθαι ἀπὸ 
τῆς πόλεως to get rich from the state Dem. 24, 124. So, sometimes, in 
Thucydides: ἀπ᾽ αὐτῶν by them Th. 1, 17. 


In Composition: from, away from. 


404, διά through (cf. Latin dis-). 


1. With THE GENITIVE (originally the Partitive Genitive of 
Place, § 358) through (some part of) : 

Place: ἐξελαύνει διὰ Καππαδοκίας he marched through Cappadocia 
Ran Analy 252.0% 

Time: διὰ νυκτός through the night Xn. A. 4, 6, 22. 

Derived Meanings: δι᾽ ἐτέων εἴκοσι through (1.6. at the end of) 
twenty years Hdt. 6,118. ἔλεγε. . . du” ἑρμηνέως he spoke through an 
interpreter Xn. A. 2,3, 17. διὰ πολέμου αὐτοῖς ἰέναι to go through war 
with them (i.e. to act in a hostile way towards them); so διὰ φιλίας 
ἰέναι to act in friendly fashion Xn. A. 3, 2,8. διὰ χειρὸς ἔχειν to hold 
through (the grasp of) one’s hand (1.6. in one’s power) Th. 3, 15. τὸν 
Κῦρον διὰ στόματος εἶχον they had (the name of) Cyrus on (lit. pass- 
ing through) their lips Xn. Cy. 1, 4,25. διὰ τάχους through speed 
(i.e. speedily) Th. 2, 18. 


2. WirnH THE AccuSATIVE (of Extent, § 358) through, throughout, 
more often through in the sense of because of. 


Place and Time: βάν p ἴμεν... διὰ νύκτα μέλαιναν... διά τ᾽ 
ἔντεα καὶ μέλαν αἷμα they went on their way through the dark night and 
through the weapons and the black blood K 297. 

Cause: διὰ καῦμα through (i.e. on account of) heat Xn. A. 1, 7, 6. 
κακοὶ δοκοῦμεν εἶναι διὰ τοῦτον we appear to be base through (i.e. because 
of) this man Xn. A. 6, 6, 23. 


In Composition: through, also apart (cf. Latin dis-). 


210 USE AND MEANINGS OF THE PREPOSITIONS 


405. εἰς. (οΥ ἐς, see 8 405 a) into, to (for *évs: ef. § 47 and Latin in 
with the accusative). 

Wir tHe Accusative (of Limit of Motion, § 339) only: 

Place: διέβησαν ἐς Σικελίαν they crossed orer into Sicily Th. 6, 2. 
So also with persons: εἰς ὑμᾶς εἰσιέναι to come into the midst of you 
Pl. Ap. 17 ς. ἐλθεῖν εἰς ᾿Αχιλῆα to come into the presence of Achilles 
P 709. 

Time: πρόπαν ἦμαρ ἐς ἠέλιον καταδύντα δαίνυντ᾽ all day long till 
setting sun they feasted A 001. ἐς ἐμέ to my time Hdt. 1, 92. εἰς τὴν 
ὑστεραίαν οὐχ ἧκεν he didn’t come the following day (δ 298, note 3). 

Derived Meanings: εἰς τετρακοσίους up to the number of four 
hundred Xn. A. 3, 3,6. εἰς ζώνην δεδομέναι given for girdle-money 
Xn. A. 1,4, 9. ἐς τέλος finally (§ 298, note 3). 


In Composition: in, into, to. 


406. ἐν in (Latin en-do, in). 
Wit THE (Locative, 8 584) Dative only: 
Se] ΄ ο OY Ἶ 9a > a ΔῈ νὴ, ἊΣ eae 

Place: ἐν Σπάρτῃ in Sparta Th. 1, 198, ἐν πολλῇ δὴ ἀπορίᾳ ἦσαν 
eg Y . . γα ξ Pa 
ot “Ἕλληνες the Greeks were naturally in much perplexity Xn. A. 3, 1, 2. 
ἐν ἐμοί in me (i.e. in my power) Dem. 18, 193. ἐν τοῖς φίλοις in (i.e. 
among) their friends Xn. A. 5, 4,32. ἐν τοῖς ὅπλοις in (1.6. under) 
arms Xn. A. 4, 3, 7. 

Time: ἐν πέντε ἡμέραις in five days Xn. Mem. 3, 13,5. ἐν tats 
σπονδαῖς in (the time of) the truce Xn. A. 3, 1, 1. 


In ΟὈΜΡΟΒΙΤΙΟΝ : in, on. 


407. ἐξ (before consonants ἐκ, ὃ 47) out of, from. 

Witu THE GENITIVE (of Separation or Source, 88. 362, 365) only: 

Place: ἐκ Πύλου ἐλθών going out from Pylos A 269. 

Time: ἐκ παιδός from a child (i.e. since childhood) Xn. Cy. 5, 1, 2. 
ἐκ Tov ἀρίστου from breakfast (i.e. directly after breakfast) Xn. A. 4, 
6, 21. 


405 a. In the earlier Attic prose és is more common than εἰς ; Herodotus 
regularly uses és; the poets use either form at pleasure. 

406 a. Homeric and poetical forms are évi (the older form of ἐν, ef. 
προτί. ὃ 414 a), and (possibly) evi, 


USE AND MEANINGS OF THE PREPOSITIONS 217 


Of Source: καὶ γὰρ τ᾽ ὄναρ ἐκ Διός ἐστιν for a dream, too, is from 
Zeus A 63. So sometimes of the (remote) agent ($372): ἐκ βασιλέως 
δεδομέναι given from (1.6. by) the King Xn. A. 1, 1, 6. 

Phrases: ἐκ δεξιᾶς on (lit. from, § 398, note 3) the right, ἐκ πολλοῦ 
at (lit. from, § 398, note 3) a great distance, ἐξ ἴσου on an equality. 


In ComposiTION: out of, from, out. 


408. ἐπί upon. 


1. With tHe GENITIVE (Partitive Genitive of Place, § 358, or 
Time, § 359) upon (some part of) : 


Place: παρελαύνων ἐφ᾽ ἅρματος riding by (seated) on a chariot 
Xn. A. 1, 2,16. ἐπὲὶ τοῦ εὐωνύμου (sc. κέρως) on the left wing Xn. 
A.1,8,9. With words denoting motion, toward (some part.of), in the 
direction of: ἀπιέναι... ἐπὶ Iwvias to be going away toward Ionia 
oa Al Dold: 

Time: ἐπ᾽ εἰρήνης in time of peace Β 797. ἐπὶ τῶν ἡμετέρων προ- 
γόνων in the time of our forefathers Xn. Cy. 1, 6, 31. 

Derived Meanings: ἐπ᾽ ὀλίγων τεταγμένοι drawn up a few deep Xn. 
Az 4,8; 11, 


2. Wirth THE (Locative, § 384) Dative upon, at (rarely perhaps 
with the True Dative (§ 374) toward, against), αὐτοῦ μίμν᾽ ἐπὶ πύργῳ 
stay here upon the tower (i.e. at this place, cf. § 408, 1) Z 431. ἔστι 
... βασίλεια... ἐπὶ ταῖς πηγαῖς τοῦ Μαρσύου ποταμοῦ there is a 
palace at the source of the Marsyas river Xn. A. 1, 2, 8, ἐπὶ τῇ 
θαλάττῃ at the seashore Xn. A. 1, 4, 1. 

Derived Meanings: ἐπὶ τῷ ἀδελφῷ in the power of his brother Xn. 
A. 1,1, 4. τὸ ἐπὶ τούτῳ the thing (next) upon (i.e. immediately 
following) this Pl. Ap. 27 Ὁ. ἐπὶ τούτοις... ὀμόσας having given an 
oath upon these terms Xn. A. 3, 2,4. (So often ἐφ᾽ ᾧ, ἐφ᾽ ᾧτε on con- 
dition that, § 596), ἔλαβον τῆς ζώνης τὸν ᾿Ορόνταν ἐπὶ θανάτῳ they 
seized Orontas by the girdle upon (determination of) his death (i.e. as ἃ 
sign of condemnation) Xn. A. 1, 6, 10. ἐπὶ τίνι μέγα φρονεῖς ; on 
what do you pride yourself? Xn. Sym. 3, 8. 

In expressions like ὦρσεν ἐπ᾽ ᾿Αργείοισι he roused him against the 
Argives M 293, the dative seems to be in origin a True Dative (§ 374). 


3. Wirth THE AccusATIVE (of Extent, § 538) upon (or of Limit 
of Motion, § 339) toward, ὁράων ἐπ᾽ ἀπείρονα πόντον gazing over the 


218 USE AND MEANINGS OF THE PREPOSITIONS 


boundless deep A 350. ἦλθε θοὰς ἐπὶ νῆας he came to the swift ships 
Α 13. ἐπὶ τὸν ἵππον ἀναβάς mounting upon his horse Xn. A. 1, 8, 3. 
ἐπὶ βασιλέα ἰέναι to be going toward (i.e. against) the king Xn. A. 1, 
3,1. ἐξέρχονται δὲ ἐπὶ τὴν θήραν and they go forth to (i.e. for) the 
hunt Xn. Cy. 1, 2, 11. ἐπὶ πολύ to a great extent Th. 1, 6. 


In Composition: upon (after), over, against. 


409. κατά down (opposed to ava up). 
1. WitTH THE GENITIVE: 
A. (of Separation, § 362) down from. 


Place: ᾧχοντο κατὰ τῶν πετρῶν φερόμενοι they were gone headlong 
down (from) the cliffs Xn. A. 4,7, 14. So κατ᾽ ἄκρης from the top 
down (i.e. completely) N 772. κατὰ νώτου in (lit. down from) the 
rear Th. 4, 33. 

B. (Partitive Genitive of Place) down underneath some part of, 
down over some part of, (down) against a person (cf. § 370). κατὰ 
χθονὸς ὄμματα πήξας fixing his eyes upon (a part of) the ground T 217. 
κατὰ γῆς ὀργυιὰς γενέσθαι to be (buried) fathoms beneath (a part of) 
the earth Xn. A. 7, 1, 50. 

Derived Meanings: κατ᾽ ἐμαυτοῦ ἐρεῖν to be intending to speak 


against myself (cf. § 370) Pl. Ap. 37 Ὁ. 


2. With THE ACCUSATIVE (of Extent, 8 558) down over, down 
along (or of Limit of Motion, ὃ 339), down to. 


Place: kata ῥόον down stream Hat. 2,96. κατὰ πᾶσαν τὴν γῆν 
(down) along over the entire land Hdt. 3,109. κατὰ γῆν καὶ κατὰ 
θάλατταν along over (1.6. by) land and sea Xn. A. 3, 2,13. τὸ καθ᾽ 
αὑτούς the part along by (i.e. opposite) themselves. 

Time: κατ᾽ ἐκεῖνον τὸν χρόνον along (i.e. at) that time Th. 1, 139 
οἱ καθ᾽ ἡμᾶς those along (at) our time (i.e. our contemporaries). 

Derived Meanings: κατὰ πρῆξιν on business y 72. κατὰ φιλῶν 
for friendship Th. 1, 060. κατὰ τὸν αὐτὸν τρόπον according to the 
same fashion Xun. Cy. 8, 2, 5. κατὰ κράτος down to (the limit of) 
strength (i.e. at full speed: cf. ἀνὰ κράτος, ὃ 401) Xn. A. 1, 8, 19. 
κατὰ τὸν νόμον according to law Xn. Hell. 1, 7, 5. 


oF 


Ix Composition: down, against (cf. § 370). 


USE AND MEANINGS OF THE PREPOSITIONS 219 


410, μετά amid, among (and so often close to, close upon). 


1. WirH THE (Partitive, § 354) GENITIVE (probably originally of 
Place) among, in company with: μετὰ Βοιωτῶν ἐμάχοντο they fought 
among the Boeotians N 700. κοινῇ μετὰ σοῦ in common along with you 
Pl. Crit.46d. μετὰ πολλῶν δακρύων amid (i.e. with) many tears PI. 
Ap. 34 ¢. 


2. WirH tHe Accusative (of Limit of Motion, ὃ 339) into the 
midst of, and so, more frequently, close upon, close after, after: ἵκοντο 
μετὰ Τρῶας καὶ ᾿Αχαιούς they came into the midst of the Trojans and 
the Achaeans T 264. βῆ δὲ μετ᾽ ἄλλους and he went among (i.e. close 
after, in pursuit of) others A 392. κάλλιστος μετὰ Πηλείωνα most 
beautiful next (after) Peleus’ son B 674. So often μετὰ ταῦτα (close) 
after this. 


In Composition: with (of sharing), among, after (in quest of). 
Often it denotes change (of state or position): as μετα βαίνω go to a 
new place, μετανοῶ (-€w) change one’s mind, repent. 


411, παρά beside. 


1. With tHE GENITIVE (of Separation, ὃ 362, or Source, § 365) 
from beside, from the side of: παρὰ δὲ βασιλέως πολλοὶ πρὸς Κῦρον 
ἀπῆλθον from beside the king many came away to Cyrus Xn. A. 1,9, 29. 
φάσγανον ὀξὺ ἐρυσσάμενος Tapa μηροῦ drawing his sharp sword from 
beside his thigh A 190. παρ᾽ Αἰγυπτίων μεμαθηκέναι to have learned 
from the Egyptians Hdt. 2, 104. So of the remote agent (§ 372): 
Tapa πάντων ὁμολογεῖται it is agreed on the part of all Xn. A. 1, 9, 1. 


2. WitH THE (Locative, ὃ 3584) Dative at the side of, at, with. 


Place: ἡμένη . . . παρὰ πατρὶ γέροντι sitting beside her aged father 
A 358. τὰ παρὰ θαλάττῃ χωρία the places beside the sea Xn. A. 7, 
2.95 
2, 25. 

Derived Meanings: ἐστρατήγει παρὰ Κύρῳ he was general beside 


(i.e. under) Cyrus Xn. A. 1, 4, 3. 


410a. In Epic (and rarely in other) poetry μετά is found with the 
(Locative, ὃ 384) dative: as θεὸς ἔσκε μετ᾽ ἀνδράσι he was a god among 
men Q 258. 


220 USE AND MEANINGS OF THE PREPOSITIONS 


3. WITH THE ACCUSATIVE: 


A. (of Limit of Motion, § 339) to the side of (usually of persons) : 
πέμπει Tapa ΞἘενοφῶντα τοὺς πελταστάς he sent the peltasts to (the 
side of ) Xenophon Xn. A. 4, 3, 27. 


B. (of Extent, § 338) along beside, alongside of. 


Place: βῆ... παρὰ θῖνα he went along beside the shore A 34. ἣν 
παρὰ τὴν ὁδὸν κρήνη there was a spring alongside the road Xn. A. 1 
2, 13. 

Time: παρὰ πάντα μοι τὸν χρόνον zpoone along (i.e. during) all 
the time he used to come in to see me Pl. Phaed. 116 a. 

Derived Meanings: So in phrases like παρ᾽ οὐδέν (lit. alongside of 
nothing, 1.e.) of no account, παρὰ μικρόν (lit. alongside of little, i.e.) 
nearly, almost, slightly. 


’ 


Often the idea of passing alongside suggests passing beyond ; so παρά 
often means beyond, contrary to: as often παρὰ τὸν νόμον contrary to 
law, Tapa τὴν δόξαν contrary to expectation, ete. 


In Composition: beside, along by, beyond. 


412. περί about, round about (properly on all sides of, cf. ἀμφί, § 400). 
1. WitH THE GENITIVE: 


A. (Partitive Genitive of Place, § 358) about (some part of): περὶ 
σπέεος round about (a part of) the cave ε 68. 

More often in the derived meaning of about, concerning: περὶ τῶν 
ὑμετέρων ἀγαθῶν μαχούμεθα we shall fight about your goodly possessions 
x 4 » 1 12 ΕΣ Ν Lal , a > Ode ᾿ 1 ᾿- 
An. A. 2,1,12. εἰ τις περὶ τῶν τοιούτων σοφός ἐστι if anybody is 
wise about such matters Pl. Ap. 19 ¢. 


B. (of Separation, § 362) all about, surpassing, more than: περὶ 
πάντων ἔμμεναι ἄλλων to be superior to all others A 287. So often 
in prose in phrases like περὶ πολλοῦ ποιεῖσθαι to regard as of great 
importance (lit. more than much), περὶ οὐδενὸς ποιεῖσθαι to regard as 
of no importance, περὶ παντὸς ποιεῖσθαι to regard as of all possible 


importance (as Xn. Cy. 1, 4, 1). 


2. Witn tHe (Locative, ὃ 384) Dative about (not frequent in 
τ See μὴ Ν Ν “ / . 
Attic prose): ἔχοντες ... στρεπτοὺς περὶ τοῖς τραχήλοις with necklaces 


412 a. For πέρι exceedingly as an adverb, see ὃ 398 a. 


USE AND MEANINGS OF THE PREPOSITIONS 221 


about their necks Xn. A. 1, 5, 8. δεδιότες περὶ τῷ χωρίῳ being alarmed 
about the place Th. 1, 60. 


3. WirHh THE ACCUSATIVE (of Extent, § 338) round about, about. 

Place: ἀπέστειλαν τὰς ἑκατὸν ναῦς περὶ Πελοπόννησον they sent off 
the hundred ships around the Peloponnesus Th. 2,23. περὶ Ἑλλήσποντον 
wv being about (i.e. in the neighborhood of) the Hellespont Dem. 8, 3. 
τοὺς περὶ αὐτὸν Πέρσας the Persians about him Xn. A. 1, 5, 8. 

Time: περὶ τούτους τοὺς χρόνους about these times Th. 3, 89. 

Derived Meanings: αἰεὶ περὶ κεῖνον dilve be ever troubled about him 


L408. περὶ θεοὺς μὴ σωφρονεῖν not to be sober-minded about the gods 
Xn. Mem. 1, 1, 20. 


In Composition: around, surpassing (sometimes = Latin per-). 


413. πρό before (Latin pro-). 

With THE GENITIVE (of Separation, § 362) only: 

Place: πρὸ τῶν πυλῶν out in front of the gates Xn. Hell. 2, 4, 34. 

Time: πρὸ τῆς μάχης before the battle Xn. A. 1, 7, 13. 

Derived Meanings: πρὸ ὑμῶν ἀγρυπνήσαντα watching in your be- 
half (i.e. in front of you as a protection), τὸν δὲ 7p 6 δέκα μνῶν ἑλοίμην 
av another I would choose rather than ten minae Xn. Mem. 2, 5, 3. 


In Composition: before (so sometimes in defense of ), forward, forth. 


414, πρός at, by, toward (properly in front of). 


1. With THE GENITIVE (the Partitive Genitive of Place, § 358) 
in front of (some part of), toward, over against: τὸ πρὸς ἑσπέρας 
τεῖχος the wall in front of (i.e. toward) the west Xn. Hell. 4, 4, 18. 
τὰ ὑποζύγια ἔχοντες πρὸς τοῦ ποταμοῦ with the pack animals on the side 
toward the river Xn. A. 2, 2,4. πρὸς τῶν Καρδούχων ἰέναι to go in 
the direction of the Carduchi Xn. A. 4, 3,26. So by extension πρὸς 
πατρός on the father’s side Hdt. 7,99. οὐκ ἣν πρὸς τοῦ Κύρου τρόπου 
it was not in keeping with Cyrus’ character Xn. 4. 1, 3,11. πρὸς θεῶν 
in the sight of the gods, with words of swearing. So sometimes of the 
remote agent (§ 272): ὁμολογεῖται πρὸς πάντων he is acknowledged on 
the part of all people Xn. A.1, 9, 20. (Some of these genitives may 
be explained as Genitives of Separation, § 362.) 


414 a. Homer has also προτί (another form of πρός) and ποτί = πρός. 


222 | USE AND MEANINGS OF THE PREPOSITIONS 


2. Wirn THE (Locative, ὃ 384) Dative at: τὰ δεξιὰ τοῦ κέρατος 
ἔχων πρὸς TO Εὐφράτῃ ποταμῷ with the right of the wing (resting) on 
the Euphrates river Xn. A. 1, 8,4. So, figuratively, πρὸς τούτοις besides 
this (as Xn. Cy. 1, 2, 8). 


3. Wirn THE AccuSsATIVE (of Limit of Motion, § 339) to, toward 
(properly to a position in front of) : 

Place: ὑπεχώρησαν πρὸς τὸν λόφον they retreated toward the hill 
Th. 4, 44. πρὸς βορρᾶν toward the north Th. 6, 2. So often of 
persons: ἔρχονται πρὸς ἡμᾶς they come to us Xn. A. 5, 7, 20. ἰέναι 
πρὸς τοὺς πολεμίους to go toward (i.e. against) the enemy Xn. A. 2, 
6,10. διαβάλλει Κῦρον πρὸς τὸν ἀδελφόν he slandered Cyrus to his 
brother Xn. A. 1,1, 3. So often of feeling toward: ἀθυμοῦσι πρὸς 
τὴν ἔξοδον they feel discouraged in regard to the expedition Xn. A.7,1, 9. 

Derived Meanings: Often πρὸς ταῦτα in view of this, πρὸς χάριν 
in view of favor (i.e. with a view to please), πρὸς βίαν with (a view to) 
violence, ete. 


In Composition: to, toward, in addition. 


415, σύν (also ξύν, cf. Lat. cum) with, in company with ; see § 415 a. 


Wirth rue Dative (of Accompaniment, § 392) only: βασιλεὺς 
σὺν στρατεύματι πολλῷ προσέρχεται the King is advancing with a great 
army Xn. A. 1, 8,1. σὺν θεοῖς with (the help of) the gods Xn. Cy. 6, 
4,19. σὺν τῷ νόμῳ (in accordance) with the law Xn. Cy. 1, 3, 17. 


In Composition: with, together. 


416, ὑπέρ over (Latin super). 


1. Wirn THE GENITIVE (Partitive Genitive of Place, ὃ 358) over 
(some part of), above: ὑπὲρ τῆς κώμης γήλοφος ἦν above the village 
was a hill Xn. A.1,10,12. στῆ δ᾽ ap ὑπὲρ κεφαλῆς and it stood over 
his head (cf. § 358 a, 3d example) B 20. 

Derived Meanings: From fighting over comes the derived meaning 
in behalf of, on account of. πονεῖν ὑπὲρ σοῦ to toil in behalf of you 
Xn. A. 7, 3,31. ὑπὲρ τῆς ἐλευθερίας ὑμᾶς εὐδαιμονίζω I congratulate 
you on account of your freedom Xn. A. 1,7, 5. (Later, sometimes, the 
meaning in behalf of comes to mean little more than about, concerning.) 


415 a. The form ξύν occurs in the older Attic writers ; the poets use 
either form ; elsewhere σύν is regularly found. 


USE AND MEANINGS OF THE PREPOSITIONS 223 


2. Wirn THE AccuSATIVE (of Extent, § 338) over, beyond: ὑπὲρ 
οὐδὸν ἐβήσετο he stepped over the threshold ἡ 135. τοῖς ὑπὲρ Ἑλλήσ- 
ποντον οἰκοῦσι with those who dwell beyond the Hellespont Xn. A. 1, 1, 9. 
ὑπὲρ δύναμιν beyond one’s ability. 


In ComposiITION: over, beyond, in behalf of. 
» 96} ἢ 4 


417, ὑπό under (Latin sub). 


1. With THE GENITIVE: 
A. (of Separation, § 362) from under: ὑπ᾽ ἀπήνης ἡμιόνους ἔλυον 
they loosed the mules from under the wagon 7 5. 


B. (Partitive Genitive of Place, § 358) under. 


Place: under some part of, τὰ ὑπὸ γῆς things under the earth Pl. 
Ap. 18 "Ὁ. ξιφίδια ὑπὸ μάλης ἔχοντας with daggers under their arms 
Xn. Hell. 2, 3,23. νύμφας... δαΐδων ὕπο λαμπομενάων ἠγίνεον ἀνὰ 
ἄστυ under (the light of) torches they were leading the brides through 
the city & 492. 

Agent: from such examples as the last came the regular usage of 
ὑπὸ With the genitive to denote the Agent (§ 372), ie. the person (or 
thing) under whose influence an action takes place : πιεζόμενος ὑπὸ TOV 
οἴκοι ἀντιστασιωτῶν being hard pressed by his political opponents at home 
Xn. A.1,1,10. εὖ ἔπαθον ὑπ᾽ ἐκείνου I was well treated by him Xn. 
A.1,35,4. So not infrequently of things παντελῶς ἂν ὑπὸ λιμοῦ ἀπο- 
λοίμεθα we should utterly perish by starvation Xn. A. 2, 2, 11. 


2. WirH THE (Locative, § 384) Dative under, beneath. 


Place: εἶχον δὲ τὰ δρέπανα... . ὑπὸ τοῖς δίῴφροις they had their scythes 
beneath the chariot boxes Xn. 4.1, 8,10. ὑπὸ τῇ ἀκροπόλει αἱ the foot 
of the acropolis Xn. A. 1, 2, 8. 

Derived Meanings (chiefly poetic): of . . . ὑπὸ βασιλεῖ ὄντες those 
under the power of the King Xn. Cy. 8,1, 6. ἐμῷ ὑπὸ δουρὶ δαμέντα 
subdued beneath my spear ἘΠ 653. 


3. WITH THE ACCUSATIVE: 


A. (of Limit of Motion, § 359) to a position under. 


Place: αὐτὸν ἀκοντίζει τις παλτῷ ὑπὸ τὸν ὀφθαλμόν somebody hit him 
with a javelin under the eye Xn. A. 1, 8, 27. 

Time: ὑπὸ νύκτα toward (1.6. just before) night (cf. Latin sub 
noctem). 


924. USE AND MEANINGS OF THE PREPOSITIONS 


B. (of Extent, § 338) along under. 


Place: dxpwvvxiav ὄρους, b ἣν ἡ κατάβασις ἦν εἰς τὸ πεδίον a spur 
of the mountain, along under which was the descent into the plain Xn. 
A. 3,4, 37. ἐν ταῖς ὑπὸ TO ὄρος κώμαις in the villages along at the foot 
of the mountain Xn. A. 7, 4, 5. 

Time: ὑπὸ τὴν παροιχομένην νύκτα along under (i.e. during) the past 
night Hdt. 9, 58. 


In Composition: under, underhandedly, gradually, slightly (cf. 
Latin sub-). 


IMPROPER PREPOSITIONS 


418. Properly the term preposition is applied only to those (earlier) 
adverbs which can be compounded with a verb into a single word 
(§ 298), but there are also other adverbs (of varying origin) which, 
for one reason or another, are regularly found in company with certain 
cases (mostly the genitive); to these, as a class, is given the name of 
Improper Prepositions (cf. § 362, 3). The most important of these 
are: ἄνευ without, ἀντίον and ἐναντίον opposite, ἐκτός and ἔξω outside, 
ἐντός and εἴσω inside, ἐγγύς and πλησίον near, ἄχρι and μέχρι until, 
μεταξύ between, πέραν across, πλήν except, ἕνεκα on account of, ἔμπροσθεν 
in front of, ὄπισθεν behind, χάριν for the sake of, δίκην in the manner of, 
like, λάθρᾳ without the knowledge of, ἅμα along with, ws to, and others 
(cf. § 418 a). 

Of these, all except ἅμα and ὡς are used with the genitive. ἅμα is 
used with the dative (of Accompaniment, § 392) and ὡς with the 
accusative (of Limit of Motion, § 339) of names of persons only: as 
ὡς βασιλέα to the King. 


Nore. — The genitives used with the improper prepositions are of 
various sorts. For example, ἄνευ is used with the Genitive of Separa- 
tion (§ 362), ἐγγύς with the Partitive Genitive of Place (ὃ 358), and 
χάριν with the Descriptive Genitive (ὃ 352). 


418 a. The following improper prepositions are seldom used except in 
poetry : ἀγχοῦ near, ἄτερ without, δέμας in the form of, like (cf. δίκην, 
§ 418), δίχα apart from, ἑκάς far from, ἕκητι on account of, ἔνερθε(ν) 
beneath, νόσφι(ν) away from, πάρος before, τῆλε far off from, and ulya, 
μίγδα or σύμμιγα (in Herodotus) along with. The last three are used 
with the dative (cf. § 392, 3); all the rest with the genitive. 


bo 
bo 
σι 


SYNTAX OF ADJECTIVES 


SYNTAX OF ADJECTIVES 


419. Adjectives are used to modify substantives (includ- 
ing words used substantively) and substantive pronouns. 


AGREEMENT OF ADJECTIVES 


420. Adjectives (including participles, adjective pro- 
nouns, and the definite article, § 443 ff.) agree in gender, 
number, and case, with the substantives which they 
modify : thus ἀνὴρ σοφός a wise man, ἀνδρὸς σοφοῦ of a 
wise man, ἀνδράσι σοφοῖς to wise men, ὁ παρὼν καιρός the 
present occasion, οὗτος ὁ ἀνήρ this man, ὁ αὐτὸς ἀνήρ the 
same man. 

Nore. — Since an adjective may be equivalent to the genitive case 
of a substantive, it sometimes happens that an adjective is followed by 
a genitive case in apposition (§ 317) with the substantive implied in 
it: as ᾿Αθηναῖος ὧν πόλεως THs μεγίστης being a man of Athens, a 
city the greatest Pl. Ap. 29 d. 


421. A predicate adjective belonging to two or more 
substantives is usually plural (or dual), or it may agree 
with one (usually the nearer) and be understood with the 
rest: as αἰεὶ yap τοι ἔρις τε φίλη. πολεμοί TE μάχαι 
te for always strife, and wars, and battles, are dear to you 
A 177. For examples of the plural see ὃ 422 below. 


422. A predicate adjective belonging to substantives of 
different gender is commonly masculine if the substantives 
are felt to denote persons, and neuter if they are felt to 
denote things: thus ὡς εἶδε πατέρα τε καὶ μητέρα καὶ 
ἀδελφοὺς καὶ τὴν ἑαυτοῦ γυναῖκα αἰχμαλώτους γεγενη- 
μένους when he saw that both his father and mother and 
brother and his own wife had been made captives Xn. Cy. 8. 


BABBITT’S GR. GRAM. —15 


220 SYNTAX OF ADJECTIVES 


1, 7. ἡ τύχη Kal Φίλιππος ἦσαν τῶν ἔργων κύριοι 
Fortune and Philip were masters of the deeds Aeschin. 2, 
118. ἔχω αὐτῶν καὶ τέκνα Kal γυναῖκας . . . φρουρού- 
μενα I have their wives and children safely guarded (i.e. as 
chattels) Xn. A. 1, 4, 8. 


423. A predicate adjective may be used substantively 
(§ 424), and is then neuter, although the subject may be 
masculine or feminine (cf. ὃ 422): thus τερπνὸν. 
τράπεζα πλήρης athing of joy is a well-filled board KE. Hipp. 
109. γυνὴ δὲ θῆλυ κἀπὶ δακρύοις ἔφῦ but woman is a femi- 
nine thing and prone to tears E. Med. 928. So often the 
neuter τί: as τί ἣν τὰ λεχθέντα what was the conversation 2 
(lit. the things said were what?) Pl. Phaed. 58 e. 


Notr.—In tragedy when a woman speaks of herself in the plural 
(8 495, note) she regularly uses the masculine form of the participle: 
thus ἀρκοῦμεν ἡμεῖς ot προθνήσκοντες σέθεν sufficient am I (i.e. Al- 
cestis) who am dying in your stead E. Alc. 383. 


424. Adjectives Used Substantively. — The substantive 
which an adjective modifies is often omitted when it is a 
common word like man, woman, child, thing, land, road, 
day, hand, etc., which can be readily understood. The 
adjective alone then acquires the force of a substantive : 
thus ὁ σοφός the wise man (sc. ἄνθρωπος). ἡ καλή the beau- 
tiful woman (sc. γυνή). ἀγαθόν a good thing (sc. πρᾶγμα). 
οἱ πολλοί the many (sc. ἄνθρωποι), ὁ Δαρείου the son of 
Darius (86. vies), ἡ ᾿Αγαμέμνονος the daughter of Agemem- 
non (sc. θυγάτηρ), Ta τῆς πόλεως the affairs of State (sc. 
πρἄγματα), ἡ ἐμαυτοῦ my own land (sc. yh), τὴν ἐπὶ 
Μέγαρα the road to Megara (sc. ὁδόν). τὴν ταχίστην the 
shortest way (sc. ὁδόν), τῇ ὑστεραίᾳ on the following day 
(sc. ἡμέρᾳ). TH δεξιᾷ with the right hand (86. yepe). 


THE COMPARATIVE DEGREE ἡ 22t 


Nore. — Numerous adjectives have come thus to be used regularly 
as substantives: thus πατρίς fatherland (sc. γῇ), τριήρης trireme (se. 
ναῦς), μουσική music (sc. τέχνη); ἑσπέρα evening time (sc. wpa), and 
many others. 


425. Adjectives with Adverbial Force. —Sometimes in 
Greek (as is so frequent in Latin) an adjective modifying 
a substantive in a sentence may have the effect of modify- 
ing the predicate: thus χθιζὸς ἔβη he went yesterday 
(i.e. χθές) A 424, εὗδον παννύχιοι they slept all night 
long B 2, τριταῖοι ἀφίκοντο they arrived on the third day 
Th. 1. 60, κατέβαινον. . . σκοταῖοι they came down in 


darkness Xn. A. 4, 1, 10. 


THE COMPARATIVE DEGREE 


426. The Comparative Degree denotes more than the 
positive : as σοφώτερος more wise or wiser. The compara- 
tive may be used absolutely, or the person or thing with 
which comparison is made may be expressed. 

1. The comparative used absolutely means rather, some- 
what, and sometimes (by implication) too much: thus 
γελοιότερον rather amusing Pl. Ap. 30 e. χείρους rather 
bad (i.e. rascals), Lys. 16, 8. θᾶττον too quickly. 

2. When the word with which comparison is made is 
expressed it stands either with 7 than, or else in the geni- 
tive case (ὃ 363): thus σοφώτερος ἢ ἐγώ or σοφώτερος 
ἐμοῦ wiser than I. 

Nore 1.— When 7 is used after a comparative, the two objects 
compared regularly stand in the same case, unless the second is the sub- 
ject of a verb (expressed or understood) ; then it is in the nominative : 
thus φιλοῦσα αὐτὸν μᾶλλον ἢ τὸν βασιλεύοντα ᾿Αρταξέρξην lov- 
ing him more than (she did) the king Ανίαχογχος Xn. 4.1,1, 4. ἐπ᾽ 
ἄνδρας στρατεύεσθαι πολὺ ἀμείνονας ἢ Σ κύθα ς to march against men 
much braver than Scythians (“than against Scythians”) Hdt. 7, 10. 
Rarely a feeling that the second word is the subject of a verb 


228 SYNTAX OF ADJECTIVES 


(expressed or understood) causes it to be put in the nominative: 
thus ἀνδρὸς πολὺ duvatwrépov ἢ ἐγὼ υἱόν the son of a man much more 
powerful than I (am) Xn. Cy. 5, 2, 28. 

Nore 2.—The genitive after a comparative is commonly equiva- 
lent to the nominative or accusative with 7 than; less often can it be 
said to represent some other case: thus τοὺς φόρους οὐδὲν ἧττον Tav- 
dpos ἀπεδίδου she used to pay in the taxes no less than (did) her husband 
(i.e. ἢ ὃ ἀνὴρ ἀπεδίδου) Xn. Hell. 3,1, 12. σεῦ ἀμείνονι φωτὶ μά τε- 
σθαι to fight with a better man than you (are) Η. 111. ᾿Ορφέως κάλ- 
λῖον ὑμνῆσαι μέλος to sing a strain more beautiful than (that of) Orpheus 
E. Med. 543 (cf. § 717, 4). 

Notre 3.— When two adjectives or adverbs are compared, 7 is 
always used, and both stand in the comparative degree : thus πρόθυμος 
μᾶλλον ἢ σοφωτέρα more willing than wise KE. Med. 485. 

Nore 4. — The neuter comparative πλέον more, ἔλαττον (or μεῖον) 
less, when used purely as adverbs, sometimes do not affect the con- 
struction of the sentence: thus ἀποκτείνουσι τῶν ἀνδρῶν οὐ μεῖον 
πεντακοσίους they killed at least (lit. not less than) five hundred men 
Xn. A. 6, 4, 24. 

Nore 5.—Comparatives may also be followed sometimes by ἀντι 
instead of (§ 402), or 7 and the infinitive, with or without ὥστε, lit. 
than so that (§ 645, note), or ἢ κατά (with the accusative) than accord- 
ing to (§ 409, 2). 

Nore 6.—A thing may be compared with itself under other cir- 
cumstances; such a comparison is expressed by the genitive of the 
reflexive pronoun (δ 470), often helped by αὐτός in agreement with 
the subject (ὃ 475): thus ἐγένοντο... μακρῷ ἀμείνονες αὐτοὶ 
ἑωυτῶν they far surpassed themselves Hat. 8, 86. This usage is some- 
times found also with the superlative. 


THE: SUPERLATIVE DEGREE 


427. The superlative degree means most: as σοφώτατος 
most wise or wisest. 

1. The superlative may be used absolutely meaning very, 
or it may be followed by a partitive genitive (§ 355, 1): 
thus ἀνὴρ σοφώτατος avery wise man, or σοφώτατος ἀνδρῶν 
wisest (one) of men. 


SYNTAX OF ADVERBS 229 


Nore.—In place of the partitive genitive the words ἐν τοῖς (lit. 
among those who) are also found with the superlative (they do not 
affect the construction) : thus ἐν τοῖς πρῶτοι δὲ ᾿Αθηναῖοι τὸν σίδηρον 
κατέθεντο the Athenians were the first among those who put aside the 
wearing of the sword Th.1,6. ἐν τοῖς βαρύτατ᾽ ἂν ἐνέγκαιμι I should 
bear it most heavily among those (who would bear it heavily) Pl. Crit. 
45 ¢. 


428. Strengthened Superlative. — The superlative may 
be strengthened by ὡς or ὅτε (less often by 7, οἷος, or 
other relative words): thus ὡς τάχιστα as quickly as pos- 
sible, ὅτι πλεῖστοι as many men as possible, χωρίον οἷον 
χαλεπώτατον an extremely difficult spot Xn. A. 4, 8, 2 (cf. 
§ 485, note 2). 

Nore.— Probably a word meaning “possille’”’ has come to be 
omitted in these expressions, since sometimes such a word is found: 


as εἰσεφόρησαν ws ἐδύναντο πλεῖστα they carried in the most (things) 


they could Xn. A. 4, 6, 1. 


SYNTAX OF ADVERBS 


429. Adverbs modify verbs, adjectives, and other ad- 
verbs. 

1. An adverb in the attributive position (8 451) is 
sometimes used with the force of an adjective: thus οἱ 
τότε ἄνθρωποι the men of that time. 


Nore. — An adverb may be modified by a preposition (see § 398): 
as εἰς ἀεί for ever. 


430. Comparative and Superlative of Adverbs. — In gen- 
eral what has been said about the comparative and su- 
perlative of adjectives ($$ 426-428) applies also to the 
comparative and superlative of adverbs: thus σοφώτερον 
more wisely or rather wisely, σοφώτατα most wisely or very 
wisely, σοφώτατα πάντων (ὃ 395, 1) most wisely of all. 


280 SYNTAX OF ADVERBS 


THE NEGATIVE ADVERBS οὐ AND μή 


431. Greek possesses two adverbs, οὐ (οὐκ, ody, ὃ 46, 
οὐχί) and μή, meaning not; of these, od is used in nega- 
tive expressions of fact; in other negative expressions 
μή is used. 

1. Hence it follows that in expressions of negative com- 
mand, wish, purpose, condition (including adjectives and 
participles which imply a condition, § 653, 6), in relative 
clauses with indefinite antecedent (ὃ 620 ff.), and with 
the infinitive used as a substantive (§§ 655, 635) μή is 
regularly used. 

2. But when the infinitive or participle is used in indi- 
rect discourse (§ 671), it retains the negative which it 
would have had in the direct discourse. 

3. A particular word in a sentence may by itself be 
modified by ov, even when the sentence as a whole would 
require μή : so often οὐκ ἐῶ not allow = forbid, od πολλοι 
not many = few, οὔ φημι deny, etc. : as ἐὰν οὐ pate if you 
deny Pl. Ap. 25b. (Cf. § 600, note.) 

4. The distinction between ov and μή applies also to 
their compounds: as οὐδείς, μηδείς nobody ; οὐδέ, μηδέ not 
even, etc. 


Nore. — Irregularities in the use of οὐ and pq. — Occasionally μι is 
used where we should expect οὐ, or vice versa ov where we should ex- 
pect μή. Thus, a participle or adjective depending on a word which 
has (or might have) μή may take μή by attraction (ὃ 316): as κελεύει 
αὐτοῦ μεῖναι... ἐπὶ TOD ποταμοῦ μὴ διαβάντας he bade them stay right 
there at the river without crossing (here οὐ would be proper (ὃ 431, 3), 
but the influence of the infinitive, μεῖναι (8. 431, 1), is too strong) Xn. 
A. 4,3, 28. ἐάν τι τοιοῦτον αἴσθῃ σεαυτὸν μὴ εἰδότα if you perceive your 
self not to be informed on any such matter (here εἰδότα, being in indirect 
discourse (§ 431, 2), would naturally take οὐ, but the influence of the 
conditional clause (δ 431, 1) permits μή to be used) Xn. Mem. 3, 5, 23. 


THE NEGATIVE ADVERBS οὐ AND μή 231 


The infinitive used as a substantive (§ 635 ff.) sometimes appears to 
have ov instead of μη (§ 431, 1), but in such case the negative probably 
did not originally belong with the infinitive, but with the word on 
which the infinitive depends: as χρὴ 8 ovrof . . . παῖδας περισσῶς 
ἐκδιδάσκεσθαι σοφούς one ought never (or never ought) to have his chil- 
dren taught to be too wise E. Med. 295. 

A few rare examples in Classical Greek of the actual misuse of ov 
and μή are probably to be explained simply as grammatical mistakes. 

e 


432. When one simple negative stands next to another 
simple negative, οὐ οὐ or μὴ μή is never found, but always 
μὴ οὐ OF οὐ μή. 


433. Strengthened Negation. —In Greek (unlike Eng- 
lish) two negatives do not always make an affirmative. 
The simple negatives (ov and μή) usually retain every- 
where their separate negative force, but compound nega- 
tives following another negative serve only to strengthen 
the negation: thus καὶ οὐδὲν μέντοι οὐδὲ τοῦτον παθεῖν 
ἔφασαν, οὐδ᾽ ἄλλος δὲ... ἔπαθεν οὐδεὶς οὐδέν however, 
they say that not even this man suffered any harm, nor did 
anybody else suffer any harm whatever Xn. A. 1, 8, 20. 


434. Sympathetic (or Redundant) Negative. — An infini- 
tive (Ganore rarely a participle or a finite mood) depending 
on a word which is modified by a negative, or which in 
itself contains a negative idea (like hinder, forbid, deny, 
etc.) often takes an extra negative (μή or ov) to confirm 
the idea of negation : as πᾶς yap ἀσκὸς δύο ἄνδρας ἕξει τοῦ 
μὴ καταδῦναι for each skin will keep two men from sinking 
(καταδῦναι alone might have been used) Xn. A. 3, 5, 11. 
οὐδεμίαν ὑμέων ἔχω ἐλπίδα μὴ οὐ δώσειν ὑμέας δίκην I have 
no expectation that you will not pay the penalty (μὴ δώσειν 
might have been used) Hdt. 6, 11. So also ὥστε πᾶσιν 
αἰσχύνην εἶναι μὴ ov συσπουδάζειν so that all were 


232 SYNTAX OF ADVERBS 


ashamed not to take hold earnestly (μὴ συσπουδάζειν alone 
might have been used, but αἰσχύνη suggests “thought it 
not right,” and so prepares the way for the extra negative) 
Xn. A. 2,3, 11. εἰνάτῃ δὲ οὐκ ἐξελεύσεσθαι ἔφασαν μὴ 
οὐ πλήρεος ἐόντος τοῦ κύκλου and they said they would not 
march out on the ninth tf the circle of the moon were not full 
(μὴ . . . ἐόντος alone might have been used) Hdt. 6, 106. 
(A negative may also’ be implied in a question, as in the 
second example below. ) 


435. Double Sympathetic Negative. — So also an infini- 
tive depending on a word which contains a negative idea 
(§ 484), and which, at the same time, is modified by a 
negative, may take two extra negatives (μὴ ov), one in 
sympathy with the negative idea in the verb, the other 
in sympathy with the negative adverb: thus ἀλλ᾽ οὐδὲν 
αὐτοὺς ἐπιλύεται ἡ ἡλικία TO μὴ οὐχὶ ἀγανακτεῖν but 
their age does not prevent them from being distressed ΡῚ. 
Crit. 458 ὁ. τί ἐμποδὼν μὴ οὐχὶ. . . ἀποθανεῖν ; what 
is to prevent (i.e. there is nothing to prevent) our being 
put to death? Xn. A. 3, 1, 138. 

Notr.— Observe that the double sympathetic negative (μὴ οὐ, 
which is not to be rendered at all in English) is found only with an 
infinitive dependent on a doubly negative expression; elsewhere (see 


the last three examples under § 434) one of the negatives (μή) always 
retains its negative force. 


THE ADVERB ἄν 
436. The adverb av generally serves to give a tinge of 
indefiniteness to the clause in which it stands. It has no 
equivalent in English, and often cannot be translated. 
(For the sake of completeness a summary of its uses is 
here given. ) 


436 a. In epic poetry xe (enclitic), an equivalent of ἄν, is also found, 


THE ADVERB ἄν Don 


437. In independent clauses av is used with the poten- 
tial optative (ὃ 563) and the potential indicative (δ 565). 


Note. — For the quasi independent use of dv with the infinitive 
and participle not in indirect discourse see §§ 647 and 662. 


438. In dependent clauses ἄν is used regularly with the 
subjunctive in conditional ($$ 604, 609) and relative 
($$ 625, 625) clauses. 


Nore. — With εἰ, ὅτε, ὁπότε, ἐπεί, or ἐπειδή, the adverb ἄν unites to 
5. ” 2 ως ε 4 3 ΄ ye test 2 ΄ 2 , 
form ἐᾶν (nv, av), ὅταν, ὁπόταν, ἐπήν or ἐπὰν (Hdt. ἐπεάν), or ἐπειδάν 


(cf. § 439, note 1). 


439. In indirect discourse ἄν is retained (even though 
the mode is changed) where it originally stood in the 
direct form, except when a dependent subjunctive with ἄν 
is changed to the optative after a secondary tense ; then 
av disappears. See §§ 670, 2; 673. 


Note 1.— Position of av.— The adverb ay never stands at the 
beginning of its clause. It may stand next to the verb it modifies, or 
it may stand immediately after some other prominent word in the 
sentence (as regularly in relative and conditional clauses, § 438). 
Thus it may stand with the negative (οὐκ ἄν) or with any emphatic 
word (πῶς ἄν, μάλιστ᾽ av) or even with the principal verb instead of 
the subordinate one with which it really belongs: as σὺν ὑμῖν μὲν ἄν 
οἶμαι εἶναι τίμιος with you I think that I should be honored (1.6. οἶμαι ἂν 
eitvat) Xn. A. 1, 3, 6. 

Nore 2.— av Repeated.— In a long sentence ἄν is sometimes 
repeated: as ὑμεῖς δ᾽ ἴσως τάχ᾽ ἂν ἀχθόμενοι... κρούσαντες ἄν pe 
... ῥαδίως ἂν ἀποκτείνατε but you perhaps might be vered . .. and 
strike me... and easily kill me Pl. Ap. 31 a. 

Note 3.—Verb Supplied. —Sometimes the verb with which ἄν 
belongs is to be supplied from the context: as δικαίως μὲν ἐν ὀλιγαρχίᾳ 
δίκην δόντος . . . δικαίως δ᾽ ἂν ἐν δημοκρατίᾳ justly did he suffer punish- 
ment at the time of an oligarchy, and justly would he have suffered (se. 
δόντος) at the time of a democracy Lys. 12, 78. 


234 CONJUNCTIONS 


CONJUNCTIONS 


440. Conjunctions may be divided into two classes : 
Coodrdinate and Subordinate. (For “ Postpositives” ef. 
§ 452, note.) 


441. Coordinate conjunctions connect words, phrases, 
or clauses which stand in the same construction. 

The principal codrdinate conjunctions are: καί and 
(Latin et), τε and (Latin -que), ἀλλά, ἄταρ but (Latin sed), 
δέ but (Latin autem), οὐδέ (μηδέ) nor, not even, ἢ or, than, 
dpa, accordingly, so then, yap for, οὖν therefore, accordingly 
(including οὐκοῦν therefore and οὔκουν therefore not), ὥστε 
Son thata( S090), Kal τ = Kal, OF Tels πε πες Το 
both... and, cite. . . ete whether . . . or, ovTe (unre)... 
oUTe (μη πε} neither... nor (§ 431, 4), 4... 7 etther... 
or, μὲν . . . δέ on the one hand . . . on the other. 

Nore 1.— καί often has the meaning also or even. The expression 
ἄλλως τε καί means especially (literally in other ways, and also . . .). 
The expression te . . - καὶ δὴ καὶ means and particularly; thus δὲ 
ἐρήμων τε τόπων ... ἄλλων καὶ δὴ Kal ὑπὸ γῆν through other desert 
places and, in particular, beneath the earth ΕἸ. Phaed. 112 68. 

Nore 2.—yap (=ye+ap) is often used (e.g. in wishes and in 
questions and answers) merely to show a close relation or sequence 
between clauses; it is then often best rendered by why, why then, then, 
ete. The expression καὶ yap ... may often be conveniently translated 
‘yes, for’ and ἀλλὰ yap . . . ‘no, for’ or ‘but enough, for.’ 


441 a. In Epic poetry re is freely used to indicate the connection of 
sentences and clauses where it cannot be rendered in English (it usually 
marks the sentence as general or indefinite) : thus ὅς κε θεοῖς érurelOnrat, 
μάλα τ᾽ ἔκλυον αὐτοῦ whosoever obeys the gods, him they most do hear 
A 218. The words οἷός re able (lit. of such kind as to), ὥστε so that, ἐφ᾽ 
ᾧτε on condition that, are inasmuch as, are the survivals in Attic Greek 
of the Epic usage. 

b. Homer has also ἠμὲν. .. ἠδέ (=H + μέν or δέ) now... and 
now, and sometimes ἠδέ without a preceding judy (cf. dé, ὃ 441). 

c. Homer has also αὔταρ (= drap) but; and dp and pa (encl.) = ἄρα. 


af eta ον.» τὰν» ἶἱ EA ἢ Ὁ... ὁ >. 


THE DEFINITE ARTICLE ὁ, ἡ, τό 255 


442. Subordinate conjunctions connect subordinate 
clauses with the clauses on which they depend. 

The following are the more important subordinate con- 
junctions (most of them are really relative adverbs): ὅτι 
that, because, ὡς how, as, that, εἰ, dav (= εἰ + dv) if, ὅπως 
how, as, in order that, ὥστε so that, ἵνα where, in order that, 
ὅτε, ὁπότε when, since, ἡνίκα, ὁπηνίκα at which time, when, 
ἐπεί, ἐπειδή (= ἐπεί + dy) when, since, ἔστε until, ἕως as 
long as, until (§ 618, note), μέχρι, ἄχρι up to that point, 
until, rpiv before, μή (after expressions of fear) lest. 


Nore. —ovx ὅτι or μὴ ὅτι means not only (literally, perhaps, not to 
say that... .). 


THE DEFINITE ARTICLE, ὁ, 9, τό 


443. Originally ὁ, 7, τό, was a demonstrative pronoun, 
meaning this, and in Homer and other early poets (§ 443 a) 
it commonly has this meaning. In Attic Greek it has come 
to mean the, but in Attic its use as a pronoun has survived 
in the following phrases : 


442 a. In epic poetry are found a few conjunctions which do not occur 
in Attic. The most common are etre when, as, ἦμος when (with indica- 
tive only), ὄφρα as long as, until, in order that (§ 590 a). 

b. Homer often has αἴ (αἴ xe) for Attic ef (ἐάν), and jos (often 
wrongly written efws) for Attic ἕως. (The latter is formed by interchange 
of quantity (§ 17) from the Epic form.) 

443 a. In Homer ὁ, 7, τό, is generally used as a-demonstrative or an- 
aphoric pronoun (substantive or adjective): thus ὃ γὰρ ἦλθε for he (lit. 
that man) came Α 12. τὴν δ᾽ ἐγὼ οὐ λύσω and her Ishall not set free A 29. 
τοῦ δὲ κλύε Φοῖβος Ἀπόλλων and him Phoebus Apollo heard A 43. παῖδα δ᾽ 
ἐμοὶ λῦσαί τε φίλην, τά τ᾽ ἄποινα δέχεσθαι but free my dear child, and accept 
this ransom ἃ 20. ὡς ἔφατ᾽, ἔδεισεν δ᾽ ὁ γέρων thus he spoke, and that 
old man (before mentioned) feared A 55. Yet in Homer ὁ, 74, τό, is some- 
times used in a way that closely approaches the Attic usage: thus 7 
πληθύς the (or this) multitude B 278. τὸν δεξιὸν ἵππον the (or that) 
right-hand horse ¥ 356, τὸ σὸν γέρας that prize of yours (or your prize) 


236 THE DEFINITE ARTICLE ὁ, ἡ, τὸ 


1. δὲν. τ΄. 6 “δέ (Can all the cases) the one .. . the 
other, this . . . that: as 
a \ 3 ΄ Δ > oo 7 

of μὲν ἐπορεύοντο, ol δ᾽ εἵποντο the one party proceeded, 
and the other followed Xn A. 3, 4, 16. τοὺς μὲν 
ἀπέκτεινε, TOUS δ᾽ ἐξέβαλεν some he killed and others 
he banished Xn. A. 1,1, 7. ἐπορεύθησαν τὰ μέν τι 

] μ 
μαχόμενοι, τὰ δὲ καὶ ἀναπαυόμενοι they proceeded, 
sometimes fighting a bit, sometimes resting Xn. A. 4, 
1, 14. 

Very often ὃ δὲ. . . but he, and he, is found without a 
preceding ὃ μέν; it regularly shows a change in the 
subject of the sentence: thus Κῦρος δίδωσιν αὐτῷ 

ΞΡ - ΄ a \ \ \ - +s ῃ 
μυρίους δαρεικούς - ὃ δὲ λαβὼν τὸ χρυσίον στράτευμα 
συνέλεξεν Cyrus gave him ten thousand darics ; and he 
took the money, and collected an army Xn. A. 1, 1, 9. 


2. τὸν Kal τόν this one and that one; neuter also τὸ καὶ 
τό, and Ta Kal Ta: as 
καὶ ἀφικνοῦμαι ὡς τὸν καὶ τόν and TI came to this man 


and that man Lys. 1, 29. 


3. καὶ τόν and he, καὶ τήν and she with an infinitive: as 
ς 


Oo 


καὶ τὸν εἰπεῖν and he said (cf. also the phrase καὶ 


ἔφη and he said, § 144 a). 
4. πρὸ τοῦ before this. 
Often in Homer and Herodotus, and sometimes in Attie 
tragedy, ὁ, ἡ, τό, is used as a relative pronoun (see 


§ 149 a-b). 


A 185. τὸ πρίν the (or that) former time. ᾿Αργείων οἱ ἄριστοι the (or 
those) noblest of the Argives. 

443, 1-8 a. Herodotus has also ὃ yap... forhe.. ., and καὶ τόν in 
other cases than the accusative. 


Δ δι“ ἡ 


ὁ, - ἡ, τό AS AN ARTICLE (THE) 237 


6, ἡ, τό AS AN ARTICLE (the) 


444. As the definite article ὁ, 9, τό, the usually marks 
its substantive as evidently known, or before mentioned : 
thus ἡ μάχη the battle, οἱ "EXXnves the Greeks, τὰ δέκα ἔτη 
the ten years (of the Trojan war) Th. 1, 11. 


445. So‘a substantive modified by an attributive (such 
as an adjective, adjective pronoun, or a limiting genitive) 
may take the article if the speaker feels that the substan- 
tive, because of this limitation, is made well known to 
his hearers: thus αἱ πρῶται τάξεις the foremost ranks, ἡ 
εἱμαρμένη ἡμέρα the fated day, ἡ τῶν πολλῶν δόξα the 
opinion of the multitude, οὗπος ὁ ἀνήρ this man,o ἐμὸς φίλος 
my friend (but φίλος ἐμός a friend of mine). 


446. Article with Proper Names. — So proper names (if 
well known or previously mentioned) often take the 
article : thus ὁ Πλάτων Plato (the famous philosopher), οἱ 
᾿Αθηναῖοι the Athenians; διέβησαν εἰς Σικελίαν. . . €XOov- 
τες δὲ ἐς τὴν Σικελίαν, K.T.r. they crossed to Sicily... And 
when they had come to (the) Sicily (above mentioned) 
MhenG; 2. 


Nore. — Βασιλεύς (the) King (of Persia) was probably felt by the 
Greeks to be a sort of proper name, and so it is often found without, 
the article. 


447. Article with the Force of a Possessive. — The arti- 
cle modifying a substantive (ὃ 444) may acquire the force 
of a possessive pronoun: thus Τισσαφέρνης διαβάλλει τὸν 
Kipov πρὸς τὸν ἀδελφόν Tissaphernes slandered Cyrus to 
his (lit. the) brother Xn. A. 1,1, 8. Κλέαρχος. . . ἔχει 
τὴν δίκην Clearchus has his (lit. the) deserts Xu. A. 2, 5, 38. 


938 THE DEFINITE ARTICLE ὁ, ἡ, τό 


448. Generic Article. — The article is often used to mark 
a substantive as belonging to a well-known class: thus ὁ 
ἄνθρωπος θνητός ἐστιν man is mortal, οἱ γέροντες the old, 
ἡ ἀλήθεια truth. (The fact that the article is generic is 
determined by the context. ) 


449. Article with Predicate Substantive. — The predi- 
cate substantive (unless previously mentioned or well 
known) cannot have the article: thus Κλέαρχος Λακεδαι- 
μόνιος φυγὰς ἣν Clearchus was a Spartan exile Xn. A. 1, 
1,9. θάνατός ἐστιν ἡ ζημία the penalty is death Xn. Mem. 
1, 2, 62 (but τὰς νέας τὸ ξύλινον τεῖχος εἶναι that the ships 
were the wooden wall (mentioned in the oracle) Hdt. 7, 
142). 


Nore. — Thus (§ 449) subject and predicate are clearly distin- 
guished in such sentences as νὺξ ἡ ἡμέρη ἐγένετο the day became night 
Hat. 1, 103. 


POSITION OF THE ARTICLE 


450. The article always precedes the word it modifies. 


451. Attributive Position. — Words or phrases standing 
between the article and its substantive (or immediately 
after the article, if the substantive precedes or is not 
expressed) are said to have Attributive Position: thus 
ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἀνήρ the good man (cf. § 302). 

1. Attributive adjectives (ὃ 3802), and adverbs with 
adjective force (ὃ 429, 1), and, in general, most attribu- 
tive phrases, have attributive position: thus ἡ “EXAnvLK? 
δύναμις the Greek force, οἱ τότε ἄνθρωποι the men of that 
time, Ta στγῇ βουλευόμενα the things planned in silence, 
Tov ἐκ τῶν Ελλήνων εἰς τοὺς βαρβάρους φόβον the fear 
inspired by the Greeks in the barbarians Xn. A. 1, 2, 18. 


oe ee αν 


POSITION OF THE ARTICLE 239 


452. When article and attributive together are used 
with a substantive, three different arrangements are pos- 
sible : thus, — 


(1) ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἀνήρ the good man. 

(2) ὁ ἀνὴρ ὁ ἀγαθός the man (namely) the good (one). 

(3) ἀνὴρ ὁ ἀγαθός (a) man (namely) the good (one). 

Of these three arrangements the first is oftenest found, 
but the second is by no means uncommon, as ἐν τῇ ava- 
βάσει τῇ μετὰ Κύρου on the march inland with Cyrus 
Xn. A. 5,1, 1; the third arrangement is found when the 
substantive alone would stand without the article: thus 
σύνειμι μὲν θεοῖς. σύνειμι δὲ ἀνθρώποις τοῖς ἀγαθοῖς 1 
associate with gods and with men (that is) the good (men) 
Xn, Mem. 2, 1,32: 


Nore. — Postpositives. — The words μέν, δέ, γε, Te, τοι, γάρ. δή, and 
οὖν, being “ postpositive,” cannot stand at the beginning of a sen- 
tence; hence they are often found in the attributive position (§ 451), 
but without being attributives: as ὃ μὲν οὖν πρεσβύτερος παρὼν 
ἐτύγχανε now then the elder happened to be present Xn. A.1,1,2. (In 
poetry 67 sometimes is not postpositive.) 


453. Predicate Position of Adjectives. — A predicate 
adjective (§ 502) cannot stand in the attributive position, 
but either precedes or follows the article and its substan- 
tive: thus ἀγαθὸς ὁ ἀνήρ or ὁ ἀνὴρ ἀγαθός the man is 
good. 

1. By using adjectives in the predicate position, the 
Greeks were able to express frequent subordinate predica- 
tions which are difficult to render into English: thus 
ψιλὴν ἔχων τὴν κεφαλὴν with his head (which was) bare 
Xn. A. 1, 8,6. ἱδροῦντι τῷ ἵππῳ with his horse (which 
was) in a sweat Xn. A. 1, 8, 1. arent 


240 THE DEFINITE ARTICLE ὁ, ἡ, τό 


PECULIARITIES OF POSITION WITH THE ARTICLE 


454. With μέσος. ἄκρος, etc. —The adjectives μέσος 
middle, ἄκρος lit. pointed, sharp, ἔσχατος farthest, ἥμισυς 
half, when used in the predicate position (§ 453) (often 
also without the article) mean middle of, tip of or top of, 
end of, half of (cf. Latin summus mons): thus μέση ἡ 
πόλις OY ἡ πόλις μέση the middle of the city (but ἡ μέση 
πόλις the middle city), ἐπ᾿ ἄκρῳ τῷ dpe on the top of the 
mountain. 


455. With πᾶς and ὅλος. --- The adjectives πᾶς (ἅπᾶς, 
σύμπας) all and ὅλος whole, when used with the article, 
commonly have predicate position (ὃ 453) : thus πᾶσα ἡ 
πόλις the whole city, πάντες οἱ πολῖται all the citizens, ἐν 
ὅλῃ TH πόλει in the whole city. 

1. But when πᾶς and ὅλος are real attributives, mean- 
ing the whole collectively, they have the attributive position : 
thus ἡ πᾶσα Σικελία entire Sicily, οἱ πάντες ἄνθρωποι 
the whole world Xn. A. 5, 0, 7. τὸ ὅλον στράτευμα the 
entire army Xn. A. 6, 2, 10. 


456. With Demonstrative Pronouns, etc. — ἃ substan- 
tive modified by a demonstrative pronoun (οὗτος, ὅδε, ἐκεῖ- 
vos) or by ἄμφω, audotepos both, ἑκάτερος each (of two), 
ἕκαστος each (of several) commonly has the article (cf. 
§ 445), and the pronoun has the predicate position (ὃ 453) : 
thus οὗτος ὁ ἀνήρ this man, ἥ δε ἡ γνώμη this opinion, τὼ 
παῖδε ἀμφοτέρω both the children. 

Norte. — But proper names, and substantives modified by numerals 
or a relative clause, seldom need the article with a demonstrative: 
thus: Αὐτολύκῳ τούτῳ for this Autolycus (here) Xn. Sym. 3, 8. 


οὗτοι οὖς ὁρᾶτε βάρβαροι these barbarians whom you behold. Xn. A. 1, 
5, 16. 


SYNTAX OF PRONOUNS 241 


457. 1. With Limiting Genitives. —Genitives of the per- 
sonal pronouns (including αὐτός used for the pronoun of 
the third person, ὃ 475, 3), when used to limit a substantive 
with the article, have the predicate position (ὃ 453): thus 
ὁ πατήρ μου or ἐμοῦ ὁ πατήρ my father, οἱ στρατιῶται 
αὐτοῦ his soldiers. 

2. Limiting genitives of other (than personal) pronouns 
commonly stand in attributive position: thus ὁ ἐμαυτοῦ 
πατήρ my own father, τὸ ἐκείνων πλοῖον their boat Xn. A. 
1. 4: 8. 

3. The Partitive Genitive modifying ἃ substantive with 
the article nearly always has predicate position (§ 453). 


458. Predicate Position Modified. — Most words which 
regularly have predicate position ($$ 454-457) may, if an 
attributive word follows the article, stand between the 
attributive and the substantive: thus ἡ στενὴ αὕτη ὁδὸς 
this narrow way Xn. A. 4, 2, 6. 


SYNTAX OF PRONOUNS 


459. Pronouns (like nouns, § 73, 2) may be either sub- 
stantive or adjective, and some pronouns (like tis and 
autos) are used both substantively and adjectively. 


460. Antecedent. — The substantive to which a pronoun 
refers is called its Antecedent (from antecedo), since nor- 
mally it precedes the pronoun: thus αἱ κῶμαι ἐν ais 
ἐσκήνουν the villages in which they were encamped Xn. A. 1, 
4, 9. 


461. Antecedent Implied. — An antecedent may be im- 
plied, instead of being expressed, by some preceding word : 
thus ἐλθὼν eis Λακεδαίμονα ἔπειθεν αὐτοὺς στρατεύσα- 


BABBITT’S GR. GRAM. — 16 


949, SYNTAX OF PRONOUNS 


σθαι he went to Sparta, and tried to persuade them (i.e. 
the Spartans) to take up arms Lys. 12,58. ναυμαχία 
παλαιτάτη ὧν ἴσμεν a sea fight the most ancient of the sea 
fights (4.6. τῶν ναυμαχιῶν) of which we know Th. 1, 13. 


462. Agreement of Pronouns (general). — An adjective 
pronoun agrees in gender, number, and case, with the 
substantive it modifies (cf. § 420); a substantive pronoun 
agrees with its antecedent in gender, number, and person 
(so far as these are distinguished in its inflection, cf. 
§ 314 note), but its case depends on the construction of 
the clause in which it stands: thus κεῖνον δ᾽ ἐγὼ θάψω 
but T( Antigone, nom. sing. fem.) will bury him (Polynices, 
acc. sing. masc.) 8. Ant. 71. 


463. A pronoun referring to two or more antecedents 
follows the same principles of agreement as the predicate 
adjective (88. 421-423): as τῇ φωνῇ τε καὶ τῷ τρόπῳ 
ἐν οἷσπερ ἐτεθράμμην in the manner of speech and behavior 


in which I had been brought up Pl. Ap. 18 a. 


464. Construction according to Sense. — A pronoun some- 
times agrees with the real, rather than with the grammati- 
eal, gender of its antecedent (see § 315): as Bim Ηρακλείη 
ὅσπερ. .- - mighty Heracles (lit. might of Heracles) who 

Hm. τὸ ᾿Αρκαδικὸν ὁπλιτικόν, ὧν ἦρχε Κλεάνωρ 
the force of Arcadian hoplites whom Cleanor commanded 
Rony As 458, Ss 

1. So a word in the singular may suggest a plural, 
or vice versa a word in the plural may suggest a corre- 
sponding singular, and the pronoun may agree with the 
implied antecedent (cf. ὃ 461): thus ἢ μάλα τις θεὸς 
ἔνδον, of οὐρανὸν εὐρὺν ἔχουσιν surely a god is within (one 
of the gods) who hold the broad heavens τ 40 (cf. τις. .. 


PERSONAL PRONOUNS 243 


βροτῶν ot one of mortals, who Z 142). ἀνθρώπους 
τίνυσθον, 6 τίς κ᾽ ἐπίορκον ὀμόσσῃ you punish mankind 
(every single one) whoever swears falsely T 279. 


465. Attraction. — A pronoun may be attracted (§ 316) 
to the gender and number of its predicate substantive : 
thus σκοπεῖν. . . εἰ δίκαια λέγω ἢ μή" δικαστοῦ μὲν yap 
αὕτη (i.e. for τοῦτο) ἀρετή to see whether I speak fairly or 
not, for this is the merit of ajudge Pl. Ap. 18 ἃ. (Cf. hoe 
opus, hic labor est Verg. Aen. 6, 129.) 


PERSONAL PRONOUNS 


466. Agreement. — A personal pronoun agrees with its 
antecedent in person and number ; it has no distinction of 
gender, and its case depends on the construction of the 
clause in which it stands (ὃ 462): thus σὺ δ᾽ εἰπέ μοι 
but do you (Antigone, 2d pers. nom. sing. fem.) tell me 
(Creon, Ist pers. dat. sing. masc.) 5. Ant. 446. 


467. The personal pronouns in the nominative case are 
not expressed unless emphatic (see § 305). 


468. In Attic the pronoun of the third person οὗ, οἵ, 
etc. (§ 139, 2) is always reflexive (see § 472); to supply 
its place as a personal pronoun of reference the corre- 
sponding forms of αὐτός are used (δ8 140, 1 and 475, 5). 


REFLEXIVE PRONOUNS 


469. Agreement. — A reflexive pronoun agrees with its 
antecedent in gender, number, and person; its case 
depends on its construction in the clause in which it 
stands, 


944 SYNTAX OF PRONOUNS 


470. Direct Reflexive. — A reflexive pronoun regularly 
refers to the most importart word in the sentence—usually 
the subject : thus γνῶθι σαυτόν know thyself; KX€éapyos 

3 LA 5 \ \ e a ΄ 
. ἀφιππεύει ἐπὶ τὴν ἑαυτοῦ σκηνήν Clearchus rode back 
to his own tent Xn. A. 1, ὃ, 12. τοὺς περιοίκους ἀφῆκεν 
ἐπὶ τὰς ἑαυτῶν πόλεις the perioeci he dismissed to their 
own cities Xn. Hell. 6, 5, 21. 


471. Indirect Reflexive. — In dependent clauses a reflex- 
ive pronoun may sometimes refer back to the subject of 
the principal verb (cf. se in Latin): thus ἐβούλετο δὲ καὶ 
Κλέαρχος ἅπαν τὸ στράτευμα πρὸς ἑαυτὸν ἔχειν τὴν 
γνώμην moreover, Clearchus wished the entire army to give 
its mind to him(self) Xn. A. 2, 5, 29. 

1. But αὐτοῦ, αὐτῷ, etc., (8 475, 3) is also frequently 
found in dependent clauses referring to the subject of the 
principal verb (cf. ews in Latin); thus τῶν παρ᾽ ἑαυτῷ 
βαρβάρων ἐπεμελεῖτο ws . . . εὐνοϊκῶς ἔχοιεν αὐτῷ he was 
careful of the barbarians with him(self) that they should be 
well disposed toward him(self) Xn. A. 1, 1, 5. 


ΝΌΤΕ 1.—Sometimes the reflexive pronoun of the third person is 
used in referring to the first or second person (cf. ὃ 143 a) : thus εὑρή- 
σετε σφᾶς αὐτοὺς ἡμαρτηκότας you will find that you have made a 
mistake Xun. Hell. 1, 7, 19. 

Nore 2.—The plurals of the reflexive pronouns sometimes have 
the foree of a reciprocal (8 142) pronoun: thus ἡμῖν αὐτοῖς 
διαλεξόμεθα we shall converse with one another (lit. with ourselves) 
[Dem.] 48, 6. 


470 a. In Homer the personal pronouns alone are sometimes used 
reflexively ; more often the reflexive meaning is made clearer by the addi- 
tion of αὐτός in agreement with the pronoun: thus ἐγὼν ἐμὲ λύσομαι I 
will ransom myself K 378. €€ δ᾽ αὐτὸν ἐποτρύνει μαχέσασθαι he rouses 
himself to battle Ὑ 171. 


aie 


THE INTENSIVE PRONOUN αὐτός 245 


472. The personal pronoun of the third person (οὗ, οἵ, 
etc.) is in Attic always used as an indirect reflexive 
(§ 471); rarely the personal pronouns of the first and 
second persons are so used: thus λέγεται ᾽Α πόλλων ἐκδεῖ- 
pat Mapovav νϊκήσας ἐρίζοντά οἱ περὶ σοφίας Apollo is said 
to have flayed Marsyas when he had outdone him in a con- 
test with himself in skill Xn. A. 1, 2, 8. So in the phrase 
δοκῶ wot I seem to myself. 


473. The use of the reflexive pronouns may be made 
more emphatic by adding αὐτός (ὃ 475, 2) in agreement 
with the subject: thus αὐτοὶ ἐν αὑτοῖς στασιάζοντες being 
at variance among themselves Xn. Hell. 1, 5, 9 (cf. the 
similar use of zpse . . . se in Latin). 


THE INTENSIVE PRONOUN αὐτός 


474. Agreement. — The pronoun αὐτός is used both sub- 
stantively and adjectively. When used as an adjective it 
follows the rules of agreement for adjectives (ὃ 420) ; 
when used as a personal pronoun of the third person 
(8 475, 3) it follows the rules for agreement of such 
pronouns (§ 462). 


475. Uses of αὐτός. --- There are three different uses of 
αὐτός as follows : — 

1. As an adjective in the attributive (§ 451) position 
αὐτός means same: thus ὁ αὐτὸς ἀνήρ the same man, ταὐτά 
(ὃ 43) the same things (sc. πράγματα). 


472 a. Homer uses ἕο, οἷ, etc., also as a direct reflexive ; when so used 
it regularly has written accent (ὃ 139, 2). 

475, 1 a. In Homer αὐτός without the article may mean the same: 
thus αὐτὴν ὁδόν the same road K 263. 


240 SYNTAX OF PRONOUNS 


2. As an adjective.in the predicate position (ὃ 453), or 
without the article, αὐτός means self (myself, yourself, him- 
self, etc.): thus αὐτὸς ὁ ἀνήρ or ὁ ἀνὴρ αὐτός the man 
himself, σὺ αὐτός you yourself, ete. 


Norr.— Frequently in the nominative case (less often in the 
other cases) the substantive is to be supplied from the context, so 
that αὐτός appears to stand alone meaning self. αὐτός τε καὶ οἱ σοὶ πρό- 
γόνοι (you) yourself and your ancestors Pl. Crit. 50 6. αὐτὸν ἐλέησον 
(sc. ἐμέ from the context) pity me myself Q 503. καὶ ᾿Αθηναῖοι πάλιν 
és EvBouav διαβάντες... κατεστρέψαντο πᾶσαν... Ἑστιαιᾶς δὲ ἐξοι- 
κίσαντες αὐτοὶ τὴν γῆν ἔσχον the Athenians again crossed over into 
Euboea and entirely subdued it... and, after driving the Histiaeans 
from their homes, took possession of their land themselves Th. 1, 114. So 
αὐτὸς ἔφη he himself (i.e. the master) said it. 


9 


3. In cases other than the nominative, αὐτός may be 
used substantively as a personal pronoun of the third per- 
son (§ 468) him, her, it, them. In Attic this is the regu- 
lar usage: thus αὐτὸν σατράπην ἐποίησε he made him 
satrap Xn. A. 1,1, 2. οὐδὲν ἤχθετο αὐτῶν πολεμούντων 
he was not at all disturbed because they were fighting. Xn. 
51. 10}: 58: 


IDIOMATIC USES OF αὐτός 


Nore 1.— With an ordinal numeral αὐτός is best translated with 
(n —1) others: thus ἡρέθη πρεσβευτὴς... δέκατος αὐτός he was 
chosen ambassador with nine others (lit. he himself the tenth) Xn. Hell. 2, 
25.17 

Nore 2.— Combined with a substantive in the dative case (§ 392, 
note) αὐτός is best translated and all: thus τέτταρας ναῦς ἔλαβον αὐτοῖς 
ἀνδράσι they took four ships, crews and all (lit. with the men themselves) 
Men Τρ 5 ἢ. Ὁ; 19. 


475. a. In Homer αὐτός seldom does duty as a personal pronoun, but 
is usually intensive (sometimes only by contrast): thusavrods δὲ ἑλώρια 
τεῦχε κύνεσσιν and made themselves (i.e. their bodies, in contrast with 
their souls) ὦ prey for dogs A 4. 


POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS QAT 


POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS 


476. Agreement. — A possessive pronoun is an adjec- 
tive, agreeing in gender, number, and case, with the word 
it modifies, but its stem conforms to the person and num- 
ber of its antecedent. Thus, in ὁ ἐμὸς πατήρ my father, 
ἐμός agrees with πατήρ in gender, number, and case, but 
its stem ἐμο- corresponds with that of the pronoun of the 
first person singular. 


477. An equivalent of the possessive pronoun often 
found is the genitive of the personal pronouns pov, σου, 
ἡμῶν, ὑμῶν (and for the third person αὐτοῦ, αὐτῆς. αὐτῶν, 
§ 468), always in the predicate position (§ 457, 1): thus 
ὁ πατήρ μου my father, ὁ ἀδελφὸς αὐτοῦ his brother, ὁ ader- 
φὸς αὐτῆς her brother. 

ΝΟΤΕ. --- Since a possessive pronoun is equivalent to a genitive case, 
a word in the genitive may stand in apposition (8 317) to a possessive 
pronoun: thus δαὴρ αὖτ᾽ ἐμὸς ἔσκε κυνώπιδος my brother by marriage 


was he also — of shameless me 1180. αὐτῶν yap σφετέρῃσιν atacba- 
Ainow ὄλοντο for by their own perversity they perished a7 (cf. § 420, note). 


478. The possessive pronouns (except ὅς and σφέτερος. 
which are always reflexive) may or may not refer to the 
subject of the sentence; usually in referring to the 
subject the genitive of the reflexive pronouns (ἐμαυτοῦ, 
σεαυτοῦ, ἑαυτοῦ, etc.), in the attributive (ὃ 457, 2) posi- 
tion, is used. This is the regular prose usage with the 
third person singular, since ὅς is poetic only : thus Κλέαρ- 


477 a. In Tonic ev and σφέων may be used where Attic would use αὐτοῦ, 
αὐτῆς, or αὐτῶν (ct. § 468). 

478 a. In Homer ὅς (éés) usually refers to the subject, but sometimes 
to a more prominent word in the sentence (cf. ὃ 470) : as γόον Ἕκτορα ᾧ 
ἐνὶ οἴκῳ they mourned for Hector in his own house Z 500, 


2.8 SYNTAX OF PRONOUNS 


χος τοὺς αὑτοῦ στρατιώτας ἐβιάζετο ἰέναι Clearchus tried to 
force his own soldiers to proceed Xn. A. 1, 3, 1. 


479. A possessive pronoun is sometimes made clearly 
reflexive by the addition of αὐτός in the genitive case 
(ef. § 477 note); in the singular this usage is poetic only, 
but in the plural it is very common: thus ἐμὸν αὐτοῦ 
χρεῖος my own need B45. ἑὸν αὐτοῦ χρεῖος his own need 
α 409. τοῖς σοῖσιν αὐτοῦ to your own (friends) ὃ. O. R. 
416. ἀπὸ τῆς ἡμετέρᾶς αὐτῶν far from our own (land) 
ΠῚ Ὁ. 21. 


DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS 


480. Agreement.— The demonstrative pronouns are 
used both adjectively (§ 420), as οὗτος ὁ ἀνήρ this man, 
and substantively, as οὗτος this (man), ἐκείνη that (woman), 
τάδε these (things) (cf. § 459). 


481. Of the demonstrative pronouns οὗτος this, that, is 
the most general in meaning, and is most frequently used. 
"Ode this (here) refers to something near the speaker ; 
ἐκεῖνος that (over there) refers to something remote : thus 
οὗτος γ᾽ ᾿Ατρείδης this man (οἵ whom you ask) is Atreus’ 
son L178. “Ἕκτορος 7 δε γυνή. this (woman here) is Hector’s 
wife Z 460. εἰ κεῖνον. . . ἰδοίατο if they should see 
that man (i.e. Odysseus, who is now far away) a 163. 

For the predicate position of demonstrative pronouns 
see § 456. 


482. Generally in referring backward (to something 
previously mentioned) οὗτος (less often ἐκεῖνος.) is used, 
while in referring forward (to something about to be 
mentioned) ὅδε (sometimes οὗτος ) is employed : as τεκμή- 


RELATIVE PRONOUNS 249 


ρίον δὲ τούτου καὶ τόδε a proof of that (which I have said) 
is also this (which I am now going to state) Xn. A. 1,9, 29. 

So also τοιοῦτος, τοσοῦτος, usually refer back, while 
τοιόσδε and τοσόσδε usually refer forward. 

Nore. —The demonstrative ὅδε is often equivalent to a possessive, 
or even a personal, pronoun of the first person; this use is especially 
common in tragedy: thus σκήπτρῳ τυπεὶς ἐκ τῆσδε χειρός struck by 
the staff held in this hand (of mine) ὃ. O. R. 811. νυμφευθεῖσα δὲ παρ᾽ 
ἀνδρὶ τῷδε but wedded with this man (1.6. with me) E. Med. 1337. 
ὅδε τοι πάρειμι Here am I, Sir Hat. 1, 115. 


RELATIVE PRONOUNS 


483. Agreement. —A relative pronoun agrees with its 
antecedent (ὃ 460) in gender and number, but its case 
depends on the construction of the clause in which it 
stands: as ἀνὴρ ὃς ἦλθεν a man who came, ἀνὴρ ὃν εἴδομεν 
a man whom we saw. 


484. Attraction. —1. A relative pronoun is often at- 
tracted (§ 316) into the case of its antecedent, especially 
from the accusative into the genitive or dative: thus 
ἄξιοι τῆς ἐλευθερίας ἣς κέκτησθε worthy of the freedom 
which you possess (ys, 11 not attracted, would be ἥν) Xn. 


re 


A.1,7,3. εἰ τῷ ἡγεμόνι πιστεύσομεν ᾧ ἂν [Κῦρος διδῷ if 
we intend to trust the guide that Cyrus gives (ᾧ, if not 
attracted, would be ὅν) Xn. A. 1, 3, 16. 

2. Much more rarely the antecedent is attracted into 
the case of the relative: as πάντων ὧν δέονται πεπρᾶ- 
yotes having accomplished everything that they need (for 
πάντα ὧν) Xn. Hell. 1,4, 2 (ef. in Latin urbem quam 
statwo vestra est Verg. Aen. 1, 573). 


485. ‘*Incorporation.’? —The antecedent is often made 
a part of the relative clause (usually only when the ante- 
cedent is indefinite). Both relative and antecedent then 


250 SYNTAX OF PRONOUNS 


stand in the same case: thus ἀδικεῖ Σωκράτης obs μὲν 
ἡ πόλις νομίζει θεοὺς οὐ νομίζων Socrates commits an offense 
in not believing in the gods which (or what gods) the State 
believes in Xn. Mem. 1, 1,1. εἰς δὲ ἣν ἀφίκοντο κώμην 
μεγάλη ἣν the village at which they arrived was large (i.e. 
ἡ κώμη εἰς ἣν) Xn. A. 4,4, 2. εἰ δέ τινα ὁρῴη. . . KaTa- 
σκευάζοντα ἣς ἄρχοι χὠρᾶς if he saw any one improving the 
country he governed (1.6. τὴν χώρᾶν js, ὃ 484, 2) Xn. A. 1, 
9,19. τούτους καὶ ἄρχοντας ἐποίει ἣς κατεστρέφετο χώρᾶς 
these he made rulers of the territory he subdued (i.e. τῆς 
χώρᾶς ἥν, ὃ 484, 1) Xn. A. 1,9, 14. ἐπορεύετο σὺν ἡ εἶχε 
δυνάμει he proceeded with what force he had (i.e. σὺν τῇ 
δυνάμει ἥν, ὃ 484, 1) Xn. Hell. 4, 1, 23. 

Observe that attraction into the genitive or into the 
dative (§ 484) usually takes place if either antecedent or 
relative would stand in one of those cases. Cf. in English 
“he gave to what persons he could.” 


Nore 1.— Here belongs the phrase οὐδεὶς ὅστις od (lit. nobody 
who... not=) every one, in which οὐδείς is regularly attracted to 
the case of the relative (οὐδενὸς ὅτου οὐ, ovdevi ὅτῳ ov, etc.): thus 
κλαίων καὶ ἀγανακτῶν οὐδένα ὅντινα οὐ κατέκλασε by his weeping 
and wailing he broke down the fortitude of everybody Pl. Phaed. 117 ἃ. 
So similarly θαυμαστός ὅσος lit. wonderful how much, θαυμαστοῦ ὅσου, 
ete. (adverbially θαυμαστῶς os): as μετὰ ἱδρῶτος θαυμαστοῦ ὅσου with 
a wonderful amount of sweat (= θαυμαστόν ἐστι μεθ᾽ ὅσου) Pl. Rep. 350d. 
This attraction is sometimes (rarely) found with other adjectives. 

Nore 2.— A peculiar attraction and condensation commonly takes 
place with οἷος, ὅσος, ὁστισοῦν, and a few other relatives, by which 
both the relative and a following nominative are attracted to the case 
of the antecedent: thus χαριζόμενον οἵῳ σοι ἀνδρί doing favor to a 
man like you (the full form would be τοιούτῳ οἷος σὺ εἶ) Xn. Mem. 2, 

9,3. τὴν δὲ γυναῖκα εὗρον ὅσην τ᾽ ὄρεος κορυφήν and his wife they 
found as huge as a mountain peak «x 113. Sometimes even with the 
article: τοῖς οἵοις ἡμῖν to such as we are Xn. Hell. 2, 3, 25. So often 
with superlatives (see § 428). 


RELATIVE PRONOUNS O51 


486. Antecedent not Expressed. — An antecedent denot- 
ing the general idea of persons or things is seldom ex- 
pressed, since its gender, number, and case are usually 
made clear by the context: thus ἐγὼ δὲ... Kai ὧν ἐγὼ 
κρατῶ μενοῦμεν but I and those (nom. plur. masc.) whom 
I command will remain Xn. Cy. 5, 1, 206. στυγῶν μὲν 7 
μ᾽ ἔτικτεν hating her (acc. sing. fem.) who bore me KE. Ale. 
338. εἰδέναι τὴν δύναμιν ἐφ᾽ ods av ἴωσιν to know the 
strength of those (gen. plur. masc.) against whom they are 
going Xn. A. 5,1, 8. δεῖταί cov τήμερον τοῦτον ἐκπιεῖν 
σὺν ois μάλιστα φιλεῖς he desires you to drink this up 
to-day in company with those (dat. plur. masc.) whom: you 
most love (§ 484, 1) Xn. A. 1, 9, 25. So with relative 
adverbs: ἄξω ὑμᾶς ἔνθα τὸ πρᾶγμα ἐγένετο I will conduct 
you to the place where the affair occurred Xn. Cy. 5, 4, 21. 
Cf. in English “he gave to whom he could.” 

Nore. — Here belong the phrases ἔστιν ὅστις (or ὅς)... there is 
some one who (i.e. somebody), εἰσὶν of . . . there are those who (1.6. some), 
but in other cases in the plural regularly ἔστιν ὧν, ἔστιν ots, ἔστιν 
οὕς: thus ἔστι δ᾽ ὅστις κατελήφθη and one man was taken off 
his guard Xn. A. 1, 8, 20. εἰσὲ δὲ οἵ λέγουσι and some (lit. there 
are those who) say Hdt. 3, 45. πλὴν ᾿Ιώνων καὶ ᾿Αχαιῶν καὶ ἔστιν Ov 
ἄλλων ἐθνῶν except the Ionians and Achaeans and some other nations Th. 
3,92. Rarely ἦν (ἦσαν) is found: ἣν δὲ τούτων τῶν σταθμῶν οὕς πάνυ 
μακροὺς ἤλαυνεν some of these days’ marches he made very long Xn. A. 
1, 5, 7. So also with relative adverbs: ἔστιν ov (or ὅπου) . . . (lit. 
there is where) somewhere, ἔστιν ὅπως (lit. there is how) somehow, ἔστιν 
ὅτε (lit. there is when) sometimes, etc. 


487. Relative not Repeated. —In a compound (§ 312) 
relative sentence the relative (pronoun or adverb) is sel- 
dom repeated (ef. ὃ 312, 1) with the succeeding verbs : 
thus ᾿Αριαῖος δέ, ὃν ἡμεῖς ἠθέλομεν βασιλέα καθιστάναι, καὶ 
ἐδώκαμεν καὶ ἐλάβομεν πιστά but Ariaeus, whom we wished 
to make king and to whom we gave and from whom we 


ἌΣ SYNTAX OF PRONOUNS 


received pledges Xn. A. 8, 2,5. εἶπεν ὅτι οὐδὲν αὐτᾷ μέλοι 
. . . ἐπειδὴ πολλοὺς μὲν ᾿Αθηναίων εἰδείη τοὺς τὰ ὅμοια 
πρἄττοντας αὑτῷ, δοκοῦντα δὲ Λυσάνδρῳ καὶ Λακεδαιμονίοις 
λέγοι he said that he didn’t care . . ., since he knew of many 
Athenians who were acting in concert with him and since 
what he proposed was agreeable to Lysander and the Spar- 
tans Lys. 12, 14, 

Norr. — Preposition not Repeated. — A preposition belonging with 
both antecedent and following relative is seldom repeated with the 
relative. 


488. Use of Relatives. — The indefinite relatives (ὅστις 
ὁπόσος, ὁποῖος, etc.) are regularly used when the antece- 
dent is indefinite, but the simple relatives (ὅς, ὅσος, etc. ) 
not infrequently refer to an indefinite antecedent; as ἃ 
μὴ οἶδα οὐδὲ οἴομαι εἰδέναι what(ever) I don't know I don't 
even think that [know ΕἸ. Ap. 21 d. 


Norr. — Relatives in Exclamations. — Relatives (οἷος, ὅσος. ws) are 
sometimes used in exclamations: as ὦ πάππε, ὅσα Tpaypata ἔχεις how 
much trouble you have, grandpa! (lit. so much trouble as you have ! 
ef. § 485) Xn. Cy. 1, 3, 4. ὡς καλός μοι ὃ πάππος how handsome 
grandpais! Xn. Cy. 1, 3, 2. 


INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS 


489. Agreement. — The interrogative pronouns are used 
both substantively and adjectively (see ὃ 462): as τές who? 


τίς ἀνήρ what man? 


490. Use. — The interrogatives (pronouns and adverbs, 
§ 151) are used both in direct and in indirect questions, but 
in indirect questions the indefinite relatives ($$ 150-151) 
are commonly preferred: as βουλεύεσθαι 6 τι χρὴ ποιεῖν 
to consider what must be done Xn. A. 1, 3, 11. 


INDEFINITE PRONOUNS 253 


INDEFINITE PRONOUNS 


491. The indefinite pronoun τὶς, τὶ, is used both sub- 
stantively and adjectively (see ὃ 462) as ἦλθέ τις some- 
body came, ἀνήρ τις ἦλθε some man came. (Observe that 
it does not stand at the beginning of a sentence. ) 


Note 1.— The indefinite τὶς is often best rendered by ‘a, an’: as 
ἕτερός τις δυνάστης another nobleman ; sometimes it can be rendered 
by “a sort of” or “something like”: as} γραφὴ . . . Toade τις ἢν the 
indictment was something like this Xn. Mem. 1, 1, 1. τριάκοντά τινες 
somewhere about thirty. So τὶ with adverbs: σχεδόν τι pretty nearly. 

Note 2.— Sometimes tis meaning anybody implies everybody: as 
εὖ μέν τις δόρυ θηξάσθω let every one sharpen well his spear B 382; 
but usually this meaning is expressed by πᾶς τις or ἕκαστός τις. 


THE ADJECTIVE PRONOUNS ἄλλος AND ἕτερος 


492. ἄλλος other (of several), and ἕτερος other (of two), 
are sometimes loosely used, one of them being employed 
when we might properly expect the other. 


IDIOMATIC USES OF ἄλλος AND ἕτερος 


Nore 1.— By a peculiar idiom in Greek ἄλλος other, rest, often pre- 
cedes that with which it is contrasted: as τά te ἄλλα ἐτίμησε Kal 
μῦρίους ἔδωκε δαρεικούς he gave me ten thousand darics and honored me 
in other ways Xu. A. 1, 3,3. 

Norte 2.— Not infrequently ἄλλος or ἕτερος expresses merely a con- 
trast without being strictly logical, and so can be best rendered by 
hesides: as οὐ yap ἣν χόρτος οὐδὲ ἄλλο οὐδὲν δένδρον for there was no 
grass, and not even a tree besides (lit. no grass or other tree) Xn. A. 1, 5, 5. 


ΝΟΤΕ 3.—dAAos . . . ἄλλος (also ἕτερος . . . ἕτερος MEansone. . . 

5 . aA a QO/ > . 
another (but this is usually expressed by ὃ μὲν . . . ὃ δέ, § 443, 1). 
Insaying one... one... ,another .. another... ,thesecond half 


of the expression, being but a repetition of the first half, is left unsaid, 
and ἄλλος with itself in a different case (or an adverb from its stem) 
is sufficient (cf. Latin alius . . . aliud): thus ἄλλος ἄλλα λέγει one 
says one thing, another (says) another Xn. A. 2, 1, 15. 


254 SYNTAX OF THE VERB 


SYNTAX OF THE VERB 


493. Transitive and Intransitive Verbs. — A transitive 
verb can take an object in the accusative case (§ 329); an 
intransitive verb cannot. Thus, γράφω (ἐπιστολήν) 7 write 
(a letter) is transitive; καθεύδω 7 sleep is intransitive. 

1. In Greek many transitive verbs are used absolutely 
as intransitive: thus λείπω leave, also fail; ἐλαύνω drive, 
also march; ἔχω hold, also hold one’s self, be. 

Nore. — In many of these verbs an object is easily supplied: thus 
ἐλαύνω (ἵππον) drive (a horse), τελευτῶ (τὸν βίον) finish (one’s life), i.e. 
die; but this is not the case with all. 


2. Some intransitive verbs when compounded with a 
preposition become transitive (see ὃ 345 and cf. ὃ 324, 2): 
thus Baivw go (intransitive) ; but δια- βαίνω cross (transi- 
tive), wapa-Baive transgress (transitive). 


494. Transitive and Intransitive Tenses— In a few verbs 
which have at the same time (§ 162, 1) both the first and 
the second aorist (active and middle), or the first and the 
second perfect, the first tenses are transitive, and the sec- 
ond intransitive (cf. ὃ 207, note 3). The most important 
of these are the following (the others are given in the lst 
of verbs, § 729) :— 


1. PRESENT Ist AORIST 2d Aorist 

βαίνω go ἔβησα caused to go ἔβην went 

δύω enter ἔδυσα caused to enter ἔδυν entered 
ἵστημι cause to stand ἔστησα caused to stand, ἔστην stood 

erected 
σβέννυμι put out, ex-  ἔσβεσα put out ἔσβην went out 
tinguish 
φύω produce ἔφυσα produced ἔφυν grew 


Norr. — The future active follows the first aorist in being transitive 
(cf. § 212): as βήσω shall cause to go, φύσω shall produce. 


AGREEMENT OF VERBS ARS 


2. PRESENT Ist PERFECT 2p PERFECT 
ὀλλῦμι destroy ὀλώλεκα have destroyed ὄλωλα am ruined 
πείθω persuade mereka have persuaded πέποιθα trust 


3. On the same principle, in some transitive verbs the 
perfect (usually the second perfect) is intransitive ; 
thus : — 

PRESENT 2p PERFECT PRESENT lst PERFECT 


ἄγνυμι break ἔαγα am broken ἵστημι cause to ἕστηκα stand 

πήγνυμι fir πέπηγα am fixed; stand 

φαίνω show πέφηνα have ap-| pow produce πέφυκα am by 
peared nature 


AGREEMENT OF VERBS 


495. A finite verb (8 159) agrees with its subject in 
person and number; thus (seis) ἤλθομεν we came, Kopos 
ἐξελαύνει Cyrus marches, δύο ἄνδρε τέθνατον two men are 


dead Xn. A. 4, 1, 19. 


Nore. — Plural for Singular.— In Greek, as in other languages, the 
first person plural (modestly) is sometimes used for the singular 
(sometimes called in English “the editorial we”): as οὐ δικαίως, ἢν 
θάνω, θανούμεθα unjustly shall I die if I am (lit. we are) put to death 
E. Tro. 904. 


496. Agreement with Two or More Subjects. — Two or 
more subjects taken together, of course, count as a plural 
(or dual) and so may take a plural (or dual) verb: thus 
ἀπολελοίπασιν ἡμᾶς Ξενίας καὶ Wacliwv Xenias and 
Pasion have abandoned us Xn. A. 1, 4, 8. ἧχι poas 
Σιμόεις συμβάλλετον ἠδὲ Σκάμανδρος where Simois 
and Scamander join their streams E 774. 

1. But with two or more subjects the verb often agrees 
only with the nearer or more important: thus βασιλεὺς 
καὶ οἱ σὺν αὐτῷ εἰσπέπτει εἰς τὸ στρατόπεδον the king and 


his followers forced their way into the camp Xn. A. 1, 10,1. 


256 SYNTAX OF THE VERB 


497. Subjects of Different Persons. — When the subjects 
are of different persons the verb is of the first person if 
possible, otherwise of the second: i.e. 

you and I (or we) Ὶ 

ΒΕ: πος | =we you and he (or they) = you 

(or we) J 
as, Kal ἐγὼ, ἔφη, καὶ σὺ πολλὰ... εἴπομεν Both you and 


I, said he, have said a good deal Xn. Hell. 2, 3, 15. 


PECULIARITIES IN. AGREEMENT 


498. Neuter Plural Subject. — A neuter plural subject 
regularly has a singular verb: thus τὸν δ᾽ οὔποτε κύματα 
λείπει this the waves never leave B 396. καλὰ ἣν τὰ 
σφάγια the sacrifices were favorable Xn. A. 4, 3, 19. 

Nore. —A neuter plural subject denoting persons, or used distribu- 
tively, may take a plural verb: thus τοσάδε μὲν μετὰ ᾿Αθηναίων ἔθνη 


ἐστράτευον 80 many nations were active on the Athenian side Th. 7, 57; 
ἦσαν ταῦτα δύο τείχη these were two walls Xu. A. 1, 4, 4. 


499. Dual and Plural. — A subject in the dual often 
takes a verb in the plural; less often a subject in the 
plural, suggesting a dual, takes a verb in the dual: thus 
τὼ δὲ τάχ᾽ ἐγγύθεν ἦλθον and soon the two came near 
E 275. ai δὲ οἱ ἵπποι ἀμφὶς ὁδοῦ δραμέτην and his 
steeds ran apart along the way Ψ 992. 

Nore. — Not infrequently dual and plural verbs are found in the 


same sentence: thus ἱκέσθην, τὸν δ᾽ ηὗρον they came, and found him 
1 185. 


500. Collectives. — Words like πᾶς everybody, πλῆθος a 
multitude, δῆμος people, στρατός army, etc. (collective 
nouns, § 321), when used to denote persons usually take a 
plural verb (cf. § 315): thus ὧς φάσαν ἡ πληθύς thus 


VOICE Jor 


spoke the multitude B 278. ὁ ἄλλος στρατὸς ἀπέβαινον 
the rest of the army began to disembark Th. 4, 32. 


501. Agreement with Predicate Substantive. — The verb 
sometimes agrees with the predicate substantive when the 
latter is more prominent than the subject (cf. § 316): 
thus ἅπαν δὲ τὸ μέσον τῶν τειχῶν ἦσαν στάδιοι τρεῖς the 
entire distance between the walls was three stades Xn. A. 1, 


4, 4. 
VOICE 


502. The Greek verb has three voices (ὃ 158): active, 
middle, and passive. 


THE ACTIVE VOICE 


503. The active voice represents the subject as acting 
or being: thus λέγω say, πάσχω experience, εἶμι go, εἰμί be. 
Note.— The context may sometimes show that the active voice 
means to cause a thing to be done (by others) : as ᾿Αρταξέρξης συλ- 
λαμβάνει Κῦρον Artaxerxes caused Cyrus to be arrested Xn. A. 1, 1, 3. 


So often ἀποκτείνω kill or cause to be put lo death, oikodop build or 
cause to be built, and many others. 


THE MIDDLE VOICE 


504. The middle voice represents the subject as inter- 
ested in the action of the verb. It has a variety of mean- 
ings which shade off into one another, and may indicate 
that the subject acts with or within his own means or 
powers, or for himself, or (less often) upon himself: thus 


504 a. In Homer (and sometimes in other poets) some verbs are used 
in the middle voice (implying an interest on the part of the subject) which 
in Attic are regularly used only in the active: thus ἀκούετο he heard (Attic 
ἤκουε), φάτο he said (Attic ἔφη), ἰδέσθαι to see (Attic ἰδεῖν). 

BABBITT’S GR. GRAM. — 17 


258 THE VERB— VOICE 


λούομαι τοὺς πόδας wash (one’s own) feet, παρέχομαι fur- 
nish (from one’s own resources), λύομαί (twa) loose for 
one’s self, ransom (as ἦλθε λυσόμενος θύγατρα he came to 
ransom his daughter A 13), περιτίθεμαι put on (one’s self), 
ἄγομαι γυναῖκα marry (1.6. lead to one’s own house) a wife, 
περὶ πολλοῦ ποιοῦμαί τι make anything of much importance 
(in one’s own eyes), λύομαι loose one’s self (as πρῶτος ὑπ᾽ 
ἀρνειοῦ λυόμην, ὑπέλῦσα δ᾽ ἑταίρους first I loosed myself 
from beneath the ram, and then I freed my companions 
t 463), τρέπομαι turn one’s self, παύομαι stop one’s self, 
cease, πείθομαι (lit. persuade one’s self ) believe, obey. 


505. The middle voice often means to get a thing done 
either to one’s self or to another person or thing (cf. ὃ 503 
note): thus διδάσκομαι get taught, διδάσκομαι τὸν υἱόν 
get one’s son taught, ἀπογράφομαι tas ναῦς have a list of 
the ships made. 


Nore. — From this use of the middle it is but a slight step to the 
use of the middle as passive (§ 514). 


506. Active and Middle differently Translated. — The 
active and the middle voices of the following verbs 
usually must be differently rendered in English (other 
similar verbs may be found, and they are to be explained 
in similar manner): 


aip® take αἱροῦμαι choose (take for one’s self) 

ἀποδίδωμι give back ἀποδίδομαι sell (give for value re- 
ceived) 

ἅπτω fasten ἅπτομαι touch 

βουλεύω take counsel βουλεύομαι consider one’s own plan 

γαμῶ marry (of the man) γαμοῦμαι marry (of the woman) 

γράφω write or propose a law γράφομαι indict (i.e. have the suit 
entered in writing) ’ 

δανείζω make a loan δανείζομαι borrow (i.e. have a loan 


made to one’s self) 


THE PASSIVE VOICE 259 


δικάζω judge δικάζομαι go to law 
ἔχω hold : ἔχομαι (w. gen.) hold to, and so be 
close to 
θύω sacrifice θύομαι sacrifice (for omens) 
μισθῶ let μισθοῦμαι hire (ie. have let to 
one’s self) 
* πολιτεύω be a citizen πολιτεύομαι perform one’s duty as a 
citizen 
πρεσβεύω be an ambassador πρεσβεύομαι negotiate 
τίθημι νόμον establish a law (for τίθεμαι νόμον enact a law (i.e. of the 
others to obey) State, for itself) 
φυλάττω (w. ace.) watch, guard φυλάττομαι (w. acc.) be on guard 
against 


507. Middle Form in Future only. —On account of the 
greater natural interest in future events, many active verbs 
regularly use the middle voice in the future tense: thus 
ἀκούω hear, future ἀκούσομαι. aorist ἤκουσα. etc., ἁμαρτάνω 
miss, future ἁμαρτήσομαι, aorist ἥμαρτον, etc. (cf. ὃ 504 a). 


508. Deponent Verbs. — Deponent verbs (δ 158, 3) show 
the various uses of the middle voice, and differ from other 
verbs only in having no active forms: thus ὑπισχνοῦμαι 
(hold one’s self under) obligate one’s self, promise, δέχομαι 
receive (for one’s self), αἰσθάνομαι perceive (with one’s 
own senses), etc. 


THE PASSIVE VOICE 


509. The passive voice represents the subject as acted 
upon: thus ἐλύθην was loosed, or was ransomed. 

1. Observe that the passive voice is the passive of the 
middle as well as of the active, and the context must 
determine which voice it represents: thus the passive 
form ἐλύθην may need to be translated (δ 506) was loosed 
(Ato) or was ransomed (λύομαι). ἡρέθην was taken (aipa@) 


> 


260 THE VERB— VOICE 


or was chosen (aipovpat), ἐγράφην was written (γράφω) or 
was indicted (ypapopat), and so in other tenses (see 8 510 
note). 


510. Passive of Deponent Verbs. — From the preceding 
section it follows that deponent verbs (§ 508) may have ἃ ἡ 
passive : thus τοιαῦτα αὐτοῖς. . . εἴργασται such things 
have been done by them (ἐργάζομαι do) Lys.12, 1. ἐκ σοῦ 
βιάζονται τάδε this is done with violence by you (βιάζομαι 
act with violence) ὃ. Ant. 1073. ἐωνήθη was bought 
(ὠνοῦμαι buy) Xn. Mem. 2, 7, 12. 

Nots. — The passive meaning usually can be determined only by 


the context, since there can be no difference of form except in the 
aorist and future of middle deponents (§ 158, 5). 


511. Object of Active Becomes Subject of Passive. — The 
object of the verb in the active (or middle) regularly 
becomes the subject when the verb is changed to the pas- 
sive form (but see ὃ 515, 3): thus ἐτάχθησαν οἱ "EXXANVES 
the Greeks were drawn up (active ἔταξε τοὺς Ἵ λ λ Vas). 


512. Cognate Accusative Retained with Passive. — A cog- 
nate accusative (§ 331) or an accusative of the part affected 
(ὃ 335) used with the active is regularly retained in the 
same case in the passive form; see § 340, 1 (cf. in Latin 
rogatus est sententiam): thus γραφεὶς τὸν ἀ γῶνα τοῦτον 
having been indicted in this suit Dem. 18, 103 (cf. Μέλητος 
με ἐγράψατο τὴν γραφὴν ταύτην Meletus brought this in- 
dictment against me Pl. 4. 19 ἃ). οἵ τε ὑπὸ τοῦ ψύχους 
τοὺς δακτύλους τῶν ποδῶν ἀποσεσηπότες and those who 


had their toes frozen off by the cold Xn. A. 4, 5, 12. 


Nore. — Sometimes intransitive verbs (such as can take only a cog- 
nate accusative) are used in the passive; when so used the cognate 
accusative of the active becomes the subject of the passive: as ὃ κίυ- 


THE PASSIVE VOICE 261 


δῦνος κινδυνεύεται the risk is run, τὰ χρήματα κινδυνεύεται the 
money is risked Dem. 34, 28. Often the passive participles of these 
verbs are found: as εἰς ἔλεγχον τῶν αὐτοῖς βεβιωμένων καταστῆναι 
to submit to an examination of their past lives Lys. 16, 1. 


513. Active Forms with Passive Force. — The passive 
of some verbs is supplied by the active voice of a different 
(intransitive) verb: thus: — 


ἀποκτείνω kill ἀποθνήσκω (die) be killed 

εὖ ποιῶ benefit εὖ πάσχω be benefited 

εὖ (or κακῶς) λέγω speak well εὖ (or κακῶς) ἀκούω (poetic κλύω) 
(or il) of be well (or ill) spoken of 

ἐκβάλλω cast out ἐκπίπτω be cast out or banished 

διώκω pursue, prosecute φεύγω (lit. flee) be prosecuted (ἀπο- 


φεύγω escape, be acquitted) 


1. So also intransitive second aorists (§ 494, 1) are often 
equivalent to the passive of the corresponding (transitive) 
first aorists; as ἀναστάντες ὑπὸ Θεσσαλῶν having been 


forced to migrate by the Thessalians Th. 1, 12. 


514. Origin of the Passive. — Greek originally had no 
passive voice, and in most tenses the middle voice served 
also to express the passive meaning. In the aorist an 
originally intransitive form (cf. ὃ 494, 1, and 8 513,1) of 
some verbs came to be felt as a passive, and by analogy 
other aorists passive were formed later. The future 
passive (with the middle endings) was formed from the 
aorist passive by adding the regular future suffix (-o%): 
thus φαίνω show, ἔφηνα showed, ἐφάνην appeared, i.e. was 
shown, future φανήσομαι shall appear or be shown. 


515. The statement of § 514 will serve to explain the 
following facts : — 

1. The future (rarely the aorist) middle is often used 
with a passive meaning: thus d& you shall be led Aesch. 


t 


202 THE VERB— VOICE 


Ag. 1632, ἡ γῆ . .. εὖ φυλάξεται the land will be well 
guarded Xn. Occ. 4,9. See § 519, note 2. 

2. Many (intransitive) verbs which are regularly fol- 
lowed by the genitive (§ 356) or the dative (§ 376) may 
be used in the passive voice. In such case the genitive 
or dative used with the active voice is represented by 
the nominative as subject in the corresponding passive 
construction: thus οὐκέτι ἀπειλοῦμαι ἀλλ᾽ ἤδη ἀπειλῶ 
ἄλλοις I am no longer threatened, but now I threaten others 
(active ἀπειλῶ tive) Xn. Symp. 4, 31. μανθάνουσιν ἄρχειν 
τε καὶ ἄρχεσθαι they learn to govern and to be governed 
(active apy@ τινός). 

Notre. — A cognate accusative used with the active is retained 
in the passive construction (see ὃ 512): thus πρὸς σοῦ τὰ δείν᾽ ἐκεῖν᾽ 
ἐπηπειλημένοι threatened by you with those dread threats (active ἐπειλῶ 


δεινά τινι) S. Ant. 408. 


3. Finally, even an accusative of the direct object is 
sometimes retained in the same case in the passive con- 
struction, while a genitive or dative denoting a person 
becomes the subject of the passive verb: thus οὗ ézrte- 
τραμμένοι τὴν φυλακὴν those intrusted with the guard 
(active ἐπιτρέπω τὴν φυλακήν tive) Th. 1,126. ἀπετμή- 
θησαν tas κεφαλᾶς they were beheaded Xn. Cy. 8, 8, 3 
(cf. τοῦ adeX Hod ἀπέτεμε τὴν κεφαλήν Xn. A. 3, 1, 17). 

Nore. — But of course the accusative may become the subject 
(according to § 512), while the genitive or dative remains in the same 
case; as ἁπάντων θάνατος κατεγιγνώσκετο the sentence of death was 
passed on all Lys. 13, 38. ἐμοί. .. σκῆπτρον καὶ δύναμις πᾶσα 
ἡ Πολυκράτεος ἐπιτέτραπται to me Polycrates’ scepter and power entire 


515, 1 a. In Homer, the future middle is (almost) always used also as 
passive, and the aorist middle not infrequently has the passive meaning : 
as παρ᾽ ἄμμι φιλήσεαι with us you shall be welcomed a 123. ἔβλητο was 
hit Il 758. 


USE OF THE TENSES 263 


has been intrusted Hdt. 3, 142 (cf. in English “the duty was intrusted 
to him” and “he was intrusted with the duty”). 


516. Agent.— The Agent with passive verbs is regu- 
larly expressed by the genitive (§ 372) with ὑπό under, 
by (ὃ 417, 1), sometimes with πρός (ὃ 414, 1) or παρά 
(§ 411, 1) at the hands of, more rarely with ἐκ (ὃ 407) or 
ἀπό (§ 403) from. 


1. Often with the perfect or pluperfect passive, and 
regularly with the verbal in -réos (§ 666), the agent is 
expressed by the dative (§ 380). With the verbal in 
-réos, the accusative of agent is also sometimes found (see 
§ 666, note). 


USE OF THE TENSES 


517. Primary and Secondary Tenses. —The Primary 
Tenses are the Present, the Perfect, the Future, and the 
Future Perfect. 

The Secondary Tenses are the Imperfect, the Aorist, and 
the Pluperfect. 

1. The Historical Present (§ 525) counts as a secondary 
tense, and the Gnomic Aorist (§ 530) as a primary tense. 
The imperfect indicative with av, referring to present 
time (§ 565), counts as a primary tense. 

2. The subjunctive, optative, and imperative modes 
(§§ 554; 557; 560) in their independent uses normally 
look toward the future and so have in all tenses the value 
of a primary tense. 


516 a. In Homer and sometimes in other poets (very rarely in prose 
with names of persons) the agent may be expressed by the dative with ὑπό: 
as’Ayal . . . ἐφόβηθεν bf Ἕκτορι the Achaeans were put to flight by 
Hector O 637. 


264 THE TENSES OF THE INDICATIVE 


518. Special Meanings of Tenses from the Context. — 
The context may sometimes add a special meaning to a 
tense. Thus, the present or imperfect may be used to 
describe an action merely attempted (δὲ 523; 527), the 
present may be used in describing an action which is to 
be completed in the future (§ 524), and the aorist may 
sometimes express a general truth (Gnomie aorist, ὃ 530). 

1. Imaginative Use of the Tenses.— A tense may refer 
to a time other than that which it denotes, if the speaker’s 
(or writer’s) imagination carries him into that time; so 
the present tense may be used in describing events actually 
past (§ 525), and the aorist or the perfect may be used in 
describing events which have not yet taken place (δὲ 531; 


537). 


THE TENSES OF THE INDICATIVE 


519. In independent clauses the tenses of the indicative 
express time absolutely ; in dependent clauses they express 
time relatively to that of the verb on which they depend 
(69 nol, 1). 


Nore 1.— The Greeks, unlike the English and, more particularly, 
the Romans, were not careful to distinguish with exactness the tem- 
poral relations of subordinate clauses (as is done in Latin by the 
pluperfect and future perfect), but often employed the same or similar 
tenses in both subordinate and principal clauses, leaving the exact 
relation of time to be inferred from the context (cf. also ὃ 676 a): 
as σχεδὸν δ᾽ ὅτε ταῦτα HV Kal ἥλιος €dvETO about the time that this was 
going on the sun was setting (i.e. at the same time) Xn. A. 1, 10, 15. 
ἡγεῖτο δ᾽ αὐταῖς Ταμὼς ... ἔχων ναῦς ἑτέρας... ais ἐπολιόρκει 
Μίλητον Tamos conducted them, with other ships with which he had been 
besieging Miletus (i.e. at a prior time) Xn. A. 1, 4, 2. 

This fact will help to explain the frequent use of the aorist where 
we might expect the pluperfect (§ 528, 1). 


THE PRESENT TENSE 26 


σι 


SUMMARY 


Notre 2. — The tenses of the indicative from the point of view of 
time, and the manner of viewing the action, may be grouped as 
follows : — 


PRESENT Past FuTURE 
CONTINUED Present Imperfect Future (active 
and middle) 
COMPLETED AND LASTING Perfect Pluperfect Future Perfect 
SIMPLY BROUGHT TO PASS — Aorist Future (passive) 


Occasionally the future active shows a distinction between action 
‘continued’ and action ‘brought to pass’: as ἕξω shall hold (cf. ἔχω 
hold), σχήσω shall obtain (cf. ἔσχον obtained, ὃ 529). 


THE PRESENT TENSE 
520. The present tense represents an action as going on 
at the present time: thus γράφω 7 write or Iam writing. 
1. So the present often expresses a customary action or 


a general truth: thus νέα yap φροντὶς οὐκ ἀλγεῖν φιλεῖ the 
heart of youth is free from care E. Med. 48. 


521. Present Denoting a Continued State. — The present 
may denote a continued state as well as a single act. So 
the present of some verbs may admit two different Eng- 
lish translations: thus βασιλεύω rule or be ruler, νικῶ 
conquer ov be victorious, φεύγω flee or be in exile, ἀδικῶ 
do wrong or be a wrong-doer, αἰσθάνομαι perceive or be 
cognizant of. 

Nore. — So ἥκω am come, arrive, and οἴχομαι am gone, may regularly 
be translated as perfects. 

522. Present with Adverbs like πάλαι. --- When adverbs 
like πάλαι long ago are used with the present tense they 


519 a (note 2). Homer occasionally forms a future directly from a 
second aorist (reduplicated) stem to emphasize the action as merely 
‘brought to pass’: thus πεπιθήσω I will persuade him (i.e. convince his 
mind once for all) X 229. 


200 THE TENSES OF THE INDICATIVE 


mean that the action is continued from the past into the 
present (cf. in Latin tam dudum): as πάλαι σπεύδομεν 


we have long been eager Xn. A. 4, 8, 14. 


SPECIAL MEANINGS OF THE PRESENT FROM THE CONTEXT 


523. Attempted Action. — The context (§ 518) may 
imply that the present denotes only an attempted action 
(cf. § 527). Thus, δίδωμι give may mean also offer, 
πείθω may mean try to persuade: as σοὶ δ᾽ ᾿Αγαμέμνων ἄξια 
δῶρα δίδωσι Agamemnon offers you worthy gifts 1 261, 
ἐξελαύνετε ἡμᾶς ἐκ τῆσδε τῆς χώρας you are trying to drive 
us out of this country Xn. A. T, 7, 7. 


524. Present with Future Meaning. — It may be implied 
by the context (§ 518) that an action expressed by the 
present tense will be completed in the future: thus εἰ 
αὕτη ἡ πόλις ληφθήσεται, ἔχεται Kal ἡ πᾶσα Σικελίᾳ if this 
city shall be captured, all Sicily as well is (1.6. is going to 
be) in their power Th. 6, 91: so ἀπόλλυμαι I am going to be 
put to death Lys. 12, 14. 

Norr.— The present indicative of εἶμι am going (and its com- 
pounds) regularly has a future meaning. This meaning extends to 
other modes when used to represent the indicative in indirect dis- 
course, and sometimes also to the participle when used to express 
purpose (§ 653, 5). 


525. Historical Present. — In vivid narration the speaker 
may for the moment feel that he is living the past over 
again, and so may use the present tense in describing 
events already past (ὃ 518, 1): thus Θρασύβουλος. 
Φυλὴν χωρίον καταλαμβάνει ἰσχυρόν. . . ἐπιγίγνεται 
τῆς νυκτὸς χιὼν παμπληθής Thrasybulus took (lit. takes) 


5294 a. In Homer εἶμι has both the present and the future meaning. 
525 a. In Epic poetry the historical present is never found, 


THE IMPERFECT 267 


possession of Phyle, a stronghold. There came (lit. comes) 
on during the night a great snowstorm Xn. Hell. 2, 4, 2-3. 
Δαρείου καὶ ἸΠαρυσἄτιδος γίγνονται παῖδες δύο of Darius 
and Parysatis were (lit. are) born two sons Xn. A. 1, 1, 1. 

Norte. — The historical present is freely interchanged with the past 
tenses, and should be regularly translated by a past tense in English: 
as kat ὃ Λύκιος ἤλασ έτε καὶ ἰδὼν ἀπαγέλλει ανεὶ Lycius rode (away), 
and, when he had seen, reported Xn. A. 1, 10, 15. 


THE IMPERFECT 


526. The Imperfect represents an action as going on 
in past time: thus ἔγραφον I was writing. 

1. Hence the imperfect often expresses a customary 
past action: thus ἐπειδὴ δὲ ἀνοιχθείη, εἰσῆμεν but when 
[the prison] was opened, we used to go in Pl. Phaed. 59 d. 


SPECIAL MEANINGS OF THE IMPERFECT FROM THE 
CONTEXT 

527. Attempted Action. — The context (ὃ 518) may 
imply that the imperfect denotes only an attempted action 
(ef. ὃ 525) or what was likely to happen: thus Κλέαρχος 
τοὺς αὑτοῦ στρατιώτας ἐβιάζετο ἰέναι: οἱ δ᾽ αὐτὸν ἔβαλλον 
Clearchus tried to force his own soldiers to move; but they 
pelted him with stones Xn. A. 1, 3,1. €xatvounv ζίφει - 
ἀλλ᾽ ἐξέκλεψεν. . . ΓἌρτεμις I was like to be slain with 
the sword ; but Artemis stole me thence E. I. T. 27. 


Notre.— The Imperfect of a truth just realized, and the “ Philo- 
sophical Imperfect.” — The imperfect in some expressions may be best 
rendered in English by the present: thus καὶ τοῦτ᾽ ἄρ᾽ ἣν ἀληθὲς. 
ἡσθόμην. φίλαι this then is true, as I perceive, my friends (lit. was 
true, but all the time I did not realize it) E. 1.7. 351. διαφθεροῦμεν 
ἐκεῖνο... ὃ TO μὲν δικαίῳ βέλτιον ἐγίγνετο we shall destroy that 
which (as we agreed) becomes better by justice Pl. Crit. 47 ἃ. 


268 THE TENSES OF THE INDICATIVE 


PE AORIST 


528. The aorist (ἀόριστος undefined) represents the 
action as one that simply took place in past time: thus 
ἔγραψα I wrote. 

1. Aorist instead of Perfect or Pluperfect. — Since the 
perfect and pluperfect in Greek are used only when the 
result of the action is lasting (§ 534), the aorist is often 
used where English would employ the perfect or pluperfect 
(especially in relative and temporal clauses): thus τῶν 
οἰκετῶν οὐδένα κατέλιπεν, ἀλλ᾽ ἅπαντα πέπρακεν of his 
servants he (has) left not one, but has sold everything 
Aeschin 1, 99. Κῦρον δὲ μεταπέμπεται ἀπὸ τῆς ἀρχῆς ts 
αὐτὸν σατράπην ἐποίησεν he sent for Cyrus from the 
government of which he had made (lit. made) him satrap 
Xn. A. 1, 1, 2. ἐπεὶ δὲ ἐτελεύτησε Δαρεῖος but when 
Darius (had) died Xn. A. 1, 1, 3. 


529. Inceptive Aorist. — The aorist of verbs whose 
present can denote a continued state (δ 521) may express 
the entrance into that state: thus βασιλεύω rule or be 
king, ἐβασίλευσα ruled or became king; so ἔσχον held or 
got possession of (ἔχω hold) ἐδάκρυσα wept or burst into 
tears (δακρύω weep, be in tears). 


Nore. — Aorist rendered by the Present. — The Greeks sometimes 
used the aorist with an exactness which admits no English equivalent, 
and such examples must usually be rendered in English by the present 
tense: as οὐκ ἂν δυναίμην, τὸ δὲ πρόθυμον ἤνεσα I could not do it, but I 
still approve your zeal (lit. approved at the time you showed your zeal) 
E. 1.7. 1023. So often ἥσθην am pleased (lit. was pleased, ἔγελασα 
laugh(ed), ᾧμωξα lament(ed), and similar words. So also sometimes 
in impatient questions: as τί οὖν . . . οὐ καὶ τὴν δύναμιν ἔλεξάς μοι 
why don’t you tell me (lit. why didn’t you tell me) about their force? Xn. 
Cy. 2, 1, 4. 


THE FUTURE 269 


SPECIAL MEANINGS OF THE AORIST FROM THE CONTEXT 


530. Gnomic Aorist. — From the context the aorist 
indicative may often be seen to express a general truth 

« ES er Oeics Vere  θὼν δέ , y 
(“once true always true”’’): thus παθὼν δέ τε νήπιος ἔγνω 
even a fool learns by experience Hes. O.D. 218. ἢν δέ τις 

7 , i > “ > / ‘Pp 
τούτων τι παραβαίνῃ ζημίαν αὐτοῖς ἐπέθεσαν but if anybody 
transgresses any one of these laws they impose a penalty 
upon such persons Xn. Cy. 1, 2, 2. 


531. Aorist Imagined as Future.— The time of the 
aorist is sometimes vividly imagined as future (§ 518): 
thus ἀπωλόμην ap εἴ pe δὴ λείψεις 7 perish if you leave 
me E. Ale. 386. 


THE FUTURE 
532. The future denotes that an action will take place 
at a future time: thus γράψω J shall write-Cor shall be 
writing). 
Norte. — For the second person of the future implying a permission 
or a mild command see § 585, note 1. 


533. Periphrastic Future. — A periphrastic future (de- 
noting a present intention) is formed by combining the 
various forms of μέλλω be about to with the present or 
future (rarely the aorist) infinitive (§ 549, 1): thus ὑμᾶς 
μέλλω ἄγειν I am going to lead you Xn. A. 5, T, ὃ. 
μέλλω yap ὑμᾶς διδάξειν for I am going to inform you 
PlAp. 21}. 

1. So the past tenses of μέλλω are similarly used to 
express a past intention: as πορεύεσθαι ἔμελλον they 


530 a. Homer sometimes uses the (gnomic) aorist in similes: thus 
ἤριπε δ᾽ ὡς ὅτε τις δρῦς ἤριπεν he fell as when an oak falls (lit. fell). 


270 THE TENSES OF THE INDICATIVE 


were intending to proceed Xn. A. 3,5, 17. ἔμελλε κατα- 
λύειν he was about to halt for the night Xn. A. 1, 8, 1. 
Nore. — The simple future appears from the context sometimes to 
be used like the periphrastic future to express a present intention: as 
αἶρε πλῆκτρον, εἰ μα χῇ raise your spur if you're going to fight Ar. Av. 
759. εἰ... πιστεύσομεν if we are going to trust Xn. A. 1, 3, 16. 


THE PERFECT AND THE PLUPERFECT 


534. The perfect, in Greek, represents an action as 
completed and lasting at the present time; the pluperfect 
as completed and lasting at a past time: thus γέγραφα I 
have written (and the writing now stands), éyeypadn 1 had 
written (and the writing stood completed). ἐτύγχανε yap 
ep ἁμάξης πορευόμενος διότι ἐτέτρωτο for he happened to 
be traveling on a wagon because he had been (and still was) 
wounded Xn. A. 2, 2, 14. 


535. Perfect with Present Meaning. — In the perfect 
system of many verbs the duration of the result (§ 534) 
rather than the completion of the act is the more promi- 
nent, so that the perfect is best rendered in English by 
the present (and the pluperfect by the English imperfect): 
thus 
βέβηκα (Baivw) be gone or stand (have stepped) 
δέδοικα (root dou-, δει-, di-) be afraid (have been frightened, cf. § 494, 3) 
κέκτημαι (κτῶμαι) possess (have acquired) 
μέμνημαι (μιμνήσκω) remember (have reminded myself) 
οἶδα (cf. εἶδον saw) know (have seen or perceived) 
ἕστηκα (ἵστημι) stand (have set myself, cf. § 494, 3) 
πέποιθα (πείθω) trust (have persuaded myself, cf. § 494, 2 
πέφυκα (pw) am by nature (have been produced, οἷ. ὃ 494, 3), 

and many others. 


536. Periphrastic Perfect. —1. Other forms of the per- 
fect, besides those already noted (δὲ 226; 227; 221, 1), 


oo & cities, 


THE FUTURE PERFECT ZT A: 


are sometimes found expressed periphrastically: thus τὸ 
mpayu εἰμὶ τοῦτο δεδρακώς Lam the one who has done 
this deed Dem. 21, 104. 

2. The aorist (rarely the perfect) participle with the 
present or imperfect of ἔχω have is sometimes used as the 
equivalent of the perfect or pluperfect: thus ὅς ode νῦν 
ἀτιμάσας ἔχει who has now dishonored her E. Med. 33. 
πολλὰ χρήματα ἔχομεν ἀνηρπακότες we have plundered 
much property (lit. have, having plundered) Xn. A. 1. 3, 14. 


SPECIAL MEANINGS OF THE PERFECT FROM THE CONTEXT 


537. Perfect Imagined as Future. — The time of the per- 
fect is sometimes vividly imagined as future (§ 518, 1): 
thus κἂν τοῦτ᾽, ἔφη. νικῶμεν, πάνθ᾽ ἡμῖν πεποίηται “if we 
are victorious in this,” he said, ‘everything has been accom- 
plished (4.6. will have been accomplished) by us” Xn. A. 
1 9: 12. 


THE FUTURE PERFECT 


538. The future perfect denotes that an action will be 
completed (and lasting) at a future time: as γεγραφὼς 
ἔσομαι I shall have written, γεγράψεται it will have been 
written (and will stand written). 

For the periphrastic forms of the future perfect see 
§ 230. 


Nore. — The future perfect (as well as the other portions of the 
perfect system) may emphasize the duration of the result of an action 
(8 534); hence a good many verbs, because of their meaning, regularly 
employ the future perfect instead of the future (see ὃ 729): as νομίζετε 

. ἐμὲ κατακεκόψεσθαι you must believe that I shall be cut to pieces 
Xn. A. 1,5, 106. ὅταν δὴ μὴ σθένω, πεπαύσομαι when I have not 
strength, then shall I stop S. Ant. 91. 

So also commonly with the verbs whose perfect has present meaning 
(8 535) μεμνήσομαι shall remember (μέμνημαι remember), ἑστήξω shall 
stand (ἕστηκα stand) ete. 


272 TENSES OF OTHER MODES THAN THE INDICATIVE 


TENSES OF OTHER MODES THAN THE 
INDICATIVE 


539. The tenses of the indicative mode only (and of 
other modes representing the indicative in indirect dis- 
course, § 551) really denote time; in the other modes, 
the tenses (with the very limited exception of the future, 
see § 548) do not denote time, but only the manner of 
viewing the action, whether continued (present), or com- 
pleted (perfect), or simply brought to pass (aorist). 

Time may be implied either by the mode (see §§ 554; 
557; 560) or by the context (see §§ 541-547, and cf. 519 
note 1) but it is not denoted by the tense. 


THE. PRESENT 


540. The present tense in modes other than the indica- 
tive represents an action as going on (at any time); as 
γράφειν to be writing, ἐὰν γράφω if I be engaged in writing, 
ypade be writing (in the future, § 560), γράφων writing. 


TIME IMPLIED BY THE CONTEXT 


541. Relation of time with the principal verb may be 
indicated by the context (§ 539): as ὁπότε θύοι ἐκάλει 
whenever he was engaged in sacrifice he used (i.e. at the 
same time) to invite his friends Xn. Mem. 2, 9,4. εἰ δὲ 
παρὰ ταῦτα ποιοῖεν, κολάζειν but if they act contrary 
to this, to punish them (i.e. afterwards) Xn. Cy. 1, 


6, 33. 


THE AORIST AGS 


542. Present Participle. — Especially with the present 
participle the context usually shows that its time is the 
same as that of the principal verb: as ἔχων ὁπλίτας ἀνέβη 
he went up with Clit. having) hoplites Xn. A. 1, 1, 2. 
παρὼν ἐτύγχανε he happened to be present Xn. A. 1, 1, 2. 

1. But sometimes the context shows that the present 
participle refers to a time prior to that of the principal 
verb (the so-called “ Participle of the Imperfect”): as 
of Κύρειοι πρόσθεν σὺν ἡμῖν ταττόμενοι νῦν ἀφεστήκασιν 
the troops of Cyrus who were formerly marshaled with us 
have now deserted Xn. A. 3, 2,17. παρὼν ἐρῶ since I 
was present, 1 will tell S. Ant. 1192. 


THE AORIST 


543. The aorist tense in modes other than the indicative 
represents the action simply as brought to pass (at any 
time): as γράψαι to write, ἐὰν γράψω if I write, γράψον 
write Gmpv., ὃ 560), γράψας having written (or writing): 
thus εἶπε δ᾽ ἐπευξάμενος he spoke in prayer ΖΦ 415. οὗτος 
οὔτε τοὺς θεοὺς δείσας οὔτε Κῦρον τεθνηκότα αἰδεσθεὶς... 
ἡμᾶς κακῶς ποιεῖν πειρᾶται this man, without any fear of 
the gods, or respect for Cyrus, who is now dead, is trying 
to inure us Xn. A. 3, 2,5. βουλοίμην δ᾽ dv... λαθεῖν 
αὐτὸν ἀπελθών 1 should like to get away without his knowl- 
edge Κα. Ἀ01. 9: 1]. 


TIME IMPLIED BY THE CONTEXT 


544. Relation of time with the principal verb may be 
indicated by the context (ὃ 539): as τῷ ἀνδρὶ ὃν ἂν 
ἕλησθε πείσομαι I shall obey the man whom you choose 
G.e. shall have chosen) Xn. A. 1, 8, 15. θαυμαστὸν 


BABBITT’S GR. GRAM. — 18 


274 TENSES OF OTHER MODES THAN THE INDICATIVE 


δὲ φαίνεταί μοι καὶ TO πεισθῆναί τινας it seems to me 
wonderful too that some people have been persuaded (iit. 
the being persuaded of some people) Xn. Mem. 1, 2, 1. 


545. Aorist Participle.— Especially with the aorist 
participle the context often shows that it refers to a time 
prior to that of the principal verb: as ταῦτα δὲ ποιήσας 
διέβαινε when he had done this he proceeded to cross Xn. 
A. 1, 4,17. καταβὰς δὲ διὰ τούτου τοῦ πεδίου ἤλασε 
when he had come down (from the mountains) he marched 
through this plain Xn. A. 1, 2, 25 (but cf. § 543, last three 
examples ). 


THE PERFECT 


546. The perfect tense in modes other than the indica- 
tive represent an action as completed (at any time): as 
γεγραφέναι to finish writing, ἐὰν yeypadw if 1 shall finish 
writing, γεγράφθω let it stand written, γεγραφώς having 
written, Ta γεγραμμένα the things written, τῆς yap ἐπιούσης 
νυκτὸς πάντα ταῦτα δεῖ πεπρᾶχθαι to-night all this must 


be completed Pl. Crit. 46 a. 


TIME IMPLIED BY THE CONTEXT 


547. It usually happens that an action described by the 
perfect as completed has taken place at a time preceding 
that of the principal verb (cf. ὃ 539): thus οὐδὲ βου- 
λεύεσθαι ἔτι ὥρα, ἀλλὰ βεβουλεῦσθαι wt ws time no 
longer to deliberate, but to decide Pl. Crit. 46 ἃ. ἔλεγον 
πάντα τὰ γεγενημένα they told all that had happened 
(4.6. previously) Xn. A. 6, 8, 11 (cf. § 546, last example). 


THE FUTURE (AND FUTURE PERFECT) 275 


THE FUTURE (AND FUTURE PERFECT) 


548. The modes of the future (and future perfect) other 
than the indicative are devoted almost wholly to repre- 
senting the future indicative in indirect discourse (δ 551); 
this is the only use of the future optative (which is a 
comparatively late development, see § 548 a); the future 
infinitive is almost always so used, and the future parti- 
ciple often. Yet a desire to emphasize the idea of futur- 
ity (or present intention) has led to the occasional use of 
the future infinitive as a substantive, and, more often, 
of the future participle as an ordinary adjective. 


549. Future Infinitive as a Substantive. — The future 
infinitive (denoting future time relative to the principal 
verb) is sometimes used as a substantive when it is desired 
to emphasize the idea of futurity; as πολλοῦ δέω ἐμαυτόν 
ye ἀδικήσειν I am certainly far from intending to wrong 
myself Pl. Ap. 37 b. 

1. With μέλλω. --- ὅο often the future infinitive is used 
with μέλλω am about to to emphasize the future idea (as 
in English many people say incorrectly “1 meant to have 
written” for “I meant to write” from a feeling that 
“meant” does not sufficiently express the past idea): 
thus μέλλω γὰρ ὑμᾶς διδάξειν for I am about to inform 
you Pl. Ap. 21 b. 

2. With Verbs of Promising, ete.—So with verbs (and 
verbal expressions) meaning to hope, expect, promise, swear, 
and the like, the idea of a future realization of the hope 
or promise often leads to the use of the future infinitive. 
Both the present and aorist, however, are also found with 
these verbs. The negative is regularly μή (ὃ 431, 1): thus 


548 a. In Epic poetry the future optative is never found. 


276 TENSES IN INDIRECT DISCOURSE 


ὑπισχνεῖται ἡμιόλιον πᾶσι δώσειν he promised to give to all 
half as much again Xn. A. 1, 3, 21. τὸν ἐκ ποίας πόλεως 
στρατηγὸν προσδοκῶ ταῦτα πράξειν from what city is the 
general to come whom I expect to do this? Xn. Ay 13, ΣΊΡΕ: 
ἠγγυᾶτο μηδὲν αὐτοὺς κακὸν πείσεσθαι he pledged himself 
that they should suffer no harm Xn. A. 7, 4, 15. ἐλπίδας 
ἔχει καλῶς ἔσεσθαι he has hopes that all will be well Xn. 
A. 4, 3,8. (Cf. μία [érris] σωθῆναι one hope of being 
saved Xn. A. 2, 1, 19.) 

Notrr.— The future infinitive with verbs of promising, ete. (§ 549, 2 
is often explained as indirect discourse (§ 671), but the fact that it 
takes μή as its regular negative points to its use here as the ordinary 
object infinitive. 


550. Future Participle. — The future participle is used 
only when it is desired to emphasize the idea of future 
time (or present intention, ὃ 553, note) relatively to the 
principal verb: thus ἦλθε... λυσόμενός τε θύγατρα he 
came to ransom his daughter (lit. about.to ransom) A 19. 
ὁ ἡγησόμενος οὐδεὶς ἔσται there will be nobody who will 


lead us Xn. A. 2, 4, 5. 


TENSES IN INDIRECT DISCOURSE 


551. .When the optative, infinitive, or participle stands 
in indirect discourse (§ 670 ff.), each tense represents the 
same tense of the direct discourse, except that the present 
infinitive or participle may stand for the imperfect indic- 
ative, and the perfect infinitive or participle for the 
pluperfect indicative, since those tenses have only the 
indicative mode; cf. also § 675, note: thus (PRESENT) 
éyvooav ... ὅτι κενὸς ὁ φόβος εἴη they learned that their fear 
was groundless (i.e. ἔστι) Xn. A. 2, 2,21. ἀπιέναι φησίν 
he says he 18 going away (i.e. ἄπειμι) Xn. A. 2, 2, 1. 
ἰᾶσθαι αὐτὸς τὸ τραῦμά φησιν he says that he himself treated 


USES OF THE FINITE MODES Paw 


the wound (i.e. ἰώμην, impf.) Xn. A. 1, 8, 26. ἤκουσε 
Κῦρον ἐν Κιλικίᾳ ὄντα he heard that Cyrus was in Cilicia 
(i.e. éor’) Xn. A. Ἵν 4,.5. οἶδα δὲ κἀκείνω σωφρονοῦντε 
ἔστε Σωκράτει συνήστην I know that even they two kept within 
bounds so long as they associated with Socrates (1.6. ἐσωφρο- 
νείτην, impf.) Xn. Mem. 1, 2, 18. 

(AorIsT) Μένωνι δὲ καὶ δῶρα ἐλέγετο πέμψαι he was 
said actually to have sent presents to Menon (1.6. ἔπεμψεν) 
xen A, 4017: 

(PERFECT) ὋὉμολογεῖς οὖν περὶ ἐμὲ ἄδικος γεγενῆσθαι 
do you admit that you have been a wrong-doer against me ? 
(i.e. γεγένησαι) Xn. A. 1, 6, 8. καταλαμβάνουσι. . . 
Ta πλεῖστα διηρπασμένα they found that most things had 
been plundered (ite. διήρπασται) Xn. A. 1, 10, 18. 

(FUTURE) ἔλεγεν ὅτι ἡ ὁδὸς ἔσοιτο πρὸς βασιλέα μέγαν 
he said that the advance would be against the great king 
(i.e. ἔσται) Xn. A. 1, 4,11. ἡγεῖτο yap ἅπαν ποιήσειν 
αὐτὸν εἴ τις ἀργύριον διδοίη for he thought that [ Theognis | 
would do anything, if anybody offered him money (i.e. 
ποιήσει, ἐάν τις. . . διδῷ he will do, if anybody offers Lys. 
12, 14. 

1. When verbs stand in indirect discourse they denote 
the same time relatively to the verb on which they depend 
as was denoted by the tense (§ 539) of the direct dis- 
course which they represent. See the preceding examples. 


USES OF THE FINITE MODES 


552. In the following pages the various uses of the 
finite modes are described in detail, but, for the sake of 
completeness, a brief summary of the uses of each mode 
is here given. 


bo 
--- 
οο 


USES OF THE FINITE MODES 


THE INDICATIVE MODE 


553. The indicative mode is used in statements of fact: 
thus βασιλεύω I am king, Δαρεῖος ἠσθένει Darius was ill. 

1. A fact may be assumed for purposes of argument : 
thus καὶ δὴ τεθνᾶσι (suppose that) they are dead E. Med. 
3886. So regularly in conditions εἴπερ ἣν ἀνὴρ ἀγαθός if 
G.e. assuming that) he was a good man, ete. Lys. 12, 48. 

For the semi-dependent indicative in object clauses and 
clauses of fearing see 88. 593 and 594, 1. 

2. The past tenses of the indicative, probably from their 
use in conditions contrary to fact (§ 606) (although 
there was originally no such idea in the usage, ef. § 553, 1), 
have come to be used also to express hopeless wishes (§ 588) 
and unaccomplished purpose (§ 590, note 4). 

3. Further, av (or ce) may be added to the past tenses 
of the indicative to give them a potential meaning (§ 565). 


THE SUBJUNCTIVE MODE 


554. The Subjunctive mode looks always toward the 
future (thus having the value of a primary tense, when 
it is used independently, § 517, 2). 


555. The uses of the subjunctive may be grouped under 
two great divisions: the Volitive Subjunctive Qvhich 
expresses an action as welled), and the Anticipatory Sub- 
junctive (which anticipates an action as an immediate 
future possibility ), a use in which the subjunctive is closely 
related to the future indicative (see § 562a and compare 
§§ 563 a; 576a; 594, 1 note). 

No hard and fast line, however, can be drawn between 
these two uses of the subjunctive. 


THE OPTATIVE MODE 279 


Nore. —In the earlier language (i.e. in Homer) the anticipatory 
subjunctive (with or without xe or ἄν) was not infrequently used in 
independent clauses (§ 562 a), but in this use it was soon crowded 
out by the future indicative, and only a few relics of this use are to 
be found in Attic Greek, but in dependent clauses (e.g. conditions 
and relative clauses) it continued to be regularly used. 


556. The uses of the subjunctive may be summarized 
as follows : — 


INDEPENDENT 


In exhortations (§ 585) and prohibitions (§ 584). 

In deliberative questions (§ 577). 

In cautious future assertions with μή and μὴ οὐ (δ 569,1). 
In strenuous future denials with οὐ μή (δ 569, 2). 


DEPENDENT 


In purpose clauses (§ 590). 

After words of fearing (§ 592). 

In the protasis of a future more vivid (§ 604) ora 
present general condition (§ 609). 

In relative clauses of anticipation (future, §§ 623 ; 526-7) 
or of general possibility (present, § 625). 


THE OPTATIVE MODE 


557. The optative mode may be briefly characterized 
as a more remote subjunctive. Hence, in its independent 
uses, and in most of its dependent uses, it commonly looks 
toward the future, but more remotely than the subjunctive, 
and often from the point of view of past time (cf. § 517, 2). 


556 a. For the independent use of the (anticipatory) subjunctive in 
Homer see § 562 a. 


280 USES OF THE FINITE MODES 


558. The uses of the optative may be grouped under 
three heads: (1) the Optative of Wish (corresponding to 
a remote volitive subjunctive, ὃ 555) which expresses an 
action as desired, but not actually willed to happen ; 
(2) the Potential Optative (corresponding to a remote 
anticipatory subjunctive, § 555), which expresses what 
the speaker regards as a more or less remote possibility 
(see note 1); (5) the Optative in Indirect Discourse, 
which is a development peculiar to Greek. 

Note 1.—In earlier Greek the simple optative could be used 
potentially, but very soon the adverb ἄν (epic κε) came to be regularly 
used with it, and the use of the potential optative was extended far 
beyond its original bounds (cf. § 563 and the examples). 


Nore 2.— The name optative comes from the use of the mood in 
wishes (Latin opto wish). 


559. The following are the various uses of the optative 
in Attic Greek : — 
INDEPENDENT 
In wishes (§ 587). 
Potential optative with ἄν (or ce) (§ 563). 


DEPENDENT 


In future less vivid conditions (ὃ 605). 

In past general conditions (§ 610). 

In relative clauses of remote possibility (future, 88 624 ; 
626-7), or of general possibility (past, § 625). 


In indirect discourse (including indirect questions) after 


a secondary tense (§ 673). 
In purpose clauses after a secondary tense (§ 590). 
In clauses of fearing after a secondary tense (§ 592). 


559 a. For the potential optative without κε or ἄν in Homer, see 563 a. 


—— δ μονσν δῶν νι ὦ Ὁ 


THE IMPERATIVE MODE 281 


THE IMPERATIVE MODE 


560. The imperative mode (in all tenses) refers always 
to the future. It is used in commands (δ 5838) and pro- 
hibitions (§ 584). 


STATEMENTS 


561. 1. Statements of fact (what is, was, or will be) 
stand in the indicative mode. 

2. Statements of opinion (what may be, can be, might be, 
could have been, and the like) stand in the optative mode 
with ἄν, or in a past tense of the indicative with ἄν. 

The details of usage are given in the following sections 


(88 562-568). 


-Notr. — Two special forms of statement are described in § 569. 


562. Statements of Fact.— A statement of fact is in 
the indicative mode; the negative is οὐ : thus ἀνα βαίνει 
ὁ Κῦρος Cyrus goes up, ἠσθένει Δαρεῖος Darius was ill, 
ἔσται ἐπὶ τῷ ἀδελφῷ he will be in the power of his brother, 
οὐκ ἠσθάνετο he did not perceive. 


563. Potential Optative. — A statement of a future pos- 
sibility, propriety, or likelihood, as an opinion of the 


562 a. In Homer the subjunctive is sometimes used like the future 
indicative (cf. § 555) in (anticipatory) statements of fact (negative ov): 
thus οὐ γάρ πω τοίους tov ἀνέρας οὐδὲ ἴδωμαι for never yet did I see such 
men, nor shall I ever see them A 262. 

563 a. The epic language is very rich in forms of future statement, for 
besides the future indicative and the optative with ἄν (or ce) we have also 
the subjunctive alone, the optative alone, the subjunctive with κε (or ἄν). 
and even sometimes the future indicative with xe (or dv). By this 
variety many shades of meaning are expressed which have no equivalent 
in English. The subjunctive in this use comes very close to the future 
indicative (§ 562 a), but seems rather to anticipate the future possibility 


2982 USES OF FINITE MODES 


speaker, stands in the optative mode with ἄν (Potential 
Optative); the negative is οὐ: thus πολλὰς ἂν εὕροις 
μηχανάς many devices you could find E. And. 85. ἴσως av 
οὖν δόξειεν ἄτοπον εἶναι now perhaps it may seem strange 
Pl. Ap. 31 ὁ. οὐκ ἂν οὖν θαυμάξοιμι now 1 shouldn't 
wonder Xn. A. 8, 2,35. οὐκ ἂν μεθείμην τοῦ θρόνου I 
couldn’t (i.e. won't) give up the throne Ar. Ran. 830. 

The apodosis of a future less vivid condition (§ 605) is 
regularly expressed by the potential optative. 

Nore. — Observe that the potential optative may express all shades 


of opinion, from mere suggestion of possibility to ideal certainty, and 
the English rendering should be made to suit the context. 


564. But a statement of a future (or present) possi- 
bility, necessity, or likelihood, can be expressed more 
exactly as a fact (§ 562) by a present or future tense of 
the indicative of a verb meaning be possible or necessary, 
and a dependent infinitive denoting what is possible or 
necessary to be or to be done: thus δύναμαι συνεῖναι 
τοῖς πλουσιωτάτοις I can associate with the very richest 
(but as an opinion συνείην av) Lys. 24,9. ἔξεστιν ὑμῖν 
πιστὰ λαβεῖν παρ᾽ ἡμῶν it is possible for you to receive 
pledges from us (λάβοιτε ἄν) Xn. A. 2, 3, 26. ὑμᾶς δ᾽ αὖ 
ἡμῖν δεήσει ὀμόσαι it will be necessary for you to swear 
to us (ὀμόσαιτε ἄν) Xn. A. 2, 8, 27. 


than to state the future fact. Examples are: (Fut. indic.) ὥς ποτέ τις ἐρέει 
thus some one shall say Z 402. (Fut. indic. with xe) καί κέ τις ὧδ᾽ ἐρέει 
and thus some one may say A 176. (Subjunctive) καί ποτέ τις εἴπῃσιν 
and some day some one may say Z 459. (Subjunctive with κε or ἄν) καὶ 
δέ κέ τοι εἴπῃσι and he will tell to you 6 891. (Optative) οὐ μὲν γάρ τι 
κακώτερον ἄλλο πάθοιμι for nothing else more sad could I endure T 821. 
(Optative with κε or ἄν) ἐμοὶ δὲ τότ᾽ ἂν πολὺ κέρδιον εἴη but for me then 
*twould be better far X 108, 

563 b. The optative without ἄν in a potential use is rarely found in 
other poets besides Homer: see 8. Ant. 605, 


STATEMENTS 283 


Notre 1. — Observe that the difference between ἔξεστί σοι ἰδεῖν and 
ἴδοις ἄν you can see is that the former states the possibility as a fuct, 
the latter states what the speaker thinks is a possibility. 

Nore 2.— Observe that if ἄν is used with the optative of a verb 
denoting possibility, propriety, or the like, it shows that the possi- 
bility or propriety is stated as something which, in the opinion of the 
speaker, might or could exist (ef. § 567 note): as οὐκ ἂν δυναίμεθα 
ἄνευ πλοίων διαβῆναι we could not have the power to cross (i.e. could not 
possibly cross) without boats Xn. A. 2, 2, 3. 


565. Potential Indicative. — A statement of a past or 
present possibility or necessity, as an opinion of the 
speaker, stands in a past tense of the indicative with av 
(Potential Indicative) ; the negative is od: thus θᾶττον ἢ 
ὥς τις ἂν ᾧετο quicker than anybody would have thought 
nA Lb, 8. ὕπο κεν ταλασίφρονά περ δέος εἷλεν fear 
might have seized even a stout-hearted man A 421. ἐβου- 
λόμην av I could wish. 

The apodosis of a condition contrary to fact (§ 606) is 
regularly expressed by the potential indicative or an 
equivalent statement (§ 567). 


566. But a statement of a past possibility, necessity, or 
likelihood, can be expressed more exactly as a fact (δ 562) 
by a past tense of the indicative of a verb meaning be pos- 
sible or necessary and a dependent infinitive denoting what 
was possible or necessary to be or to be done: thus ἔδει 
popovvta πίνειν ὥσπερ βοῦν it was necessary to drink in 
gulps like an ox Xn. A. 4, 5, 82. χρῆν yap KavdavrAn 
γενέσθαι κακῶς for Candaules was bound to get into trouble 


565 a. In Homer the context sometimes shows that the potential opta- 
tive, usually with the help of an adverb, may be used in stating a past 
possibility (which in Attic would be expressed by the potential indicative, 
§ 565) : as ἔνθ᾽ οὐκ ἂν βρίζοντα ἴδοις ᾿ΑὙαμέμνονα δῖον then you could not see 
(i.e. would not have seen) god-like Agamemnon slumbering A 223. (Cf. 
§ 606 b.) 


284 USES OF THE FINITE MODES 


Hdt. 1, 8. διαφυγεῖν οὐκ ἐδύνατο he could not escape 


Toys: 120. 


567. But nine times out of ten the existence of a past 
possibility or necessity is stated only to show that what 
“might have been” or “ought to have been done” did 
not actually take place; hence such statements usually 
imply a “contrary to fact” idea (as, “he might have 
gone,” but the fact is he did not go). (Such a statement 
is often used as the apodosis of a condition contrary to 
fact, ὃ 606): thus τῷ δὲ ᾿Ερατοσθένει ἐξῆν εἰπεῖν ὅτι 
οὐκ ἀπήντησεν it was possible for Kratosthenes to say (i.e. 
“ Kratosthenes might have said”) that he had not met him 
Lys. 12,31. ἐχρῆν τὸν Σωκράτην μὴ πρότερον τὰ πολιτικὰ 
διδάσκειν τοὺς συνόντας ἢ σωφρονεῖν Socrates ought not to 
have taught his associates politics in preference to self-control 
Xn. Mem. 1, 2, 17. χρῆν yap ἄλλοθέν ποθεν βροτοὺς 
παῖδας τεκνοῦσθαι mortals ought to beget children from some 
other source (but they do not) E. Med. 573. 

Observe that in such expressions the aorist infinitive 
refers always to a single act (usually in past time), while 
the present infinitive refers to continued or repeated action 
either present or past (cf. § 539). 

Nore. — Observe that the mere statement of a past possibility or 
necessity may always suffice to imply that the possible or necessary 
event did not oceur: as εἶδες av you might have seen (if you had been 
present), or ἐξῆν ἰδεῖν it was possible to see (if you had been present). 
If ay is used with a past tense of the indicative of a verb denoting 
possibility, propriety, or the like, it shows that the possibility or pro- 
priety is stated not as a fact, but as something which might or could 
have existed (cf. § 564 note 2): as ἐξῆν ἂν ἰδεῖν it would (or might) 
have been possible to see. Compare οὐκ ἂν ἑτέρων ἔδει σοι μαρτύρων 
you would not have any need of other witnesses (but as it is, you do need 
them) Lys. 7, 22, and εἴπερ ἦν ἀνὴρ ἀγαθός, ἔχρην ἂν... μὴ Tapa- 
νόμως ἄρχειν if he had been a good man, he would have had to rule with- 


STATEMENTS 285 


out transgressing the laws (but a bad man is under no such obligation) 
Lys. 12, 48, with χρῆν δ᾽ αὐτὸν... προθυμίαν ἔχειν he ought to have 
had zeal (but did not have) Lys. 12, 50. 

1. The expressions which may be used to denote a past 
possibility or necessity (without av) are very numerous ; 
some of the most common of them are the following: ἔδει, 
χρῆν or ἐχρῆν it was necessary, εἰκὸς ἣν it was likely, προσ- 
ῆκε, ἔπρεπε it was fitting, ἐξῆν it was possible, ἔμελλον was 
likely to, and many adjectives with ἦν, such as δίκαιον ἣν 
it was just, ἄξιον ἣν it was proper, αἰσχρὸν ἣν it was shameful, 
οἷος 7 ἣν was possible, and many others (cf. oportebat, 
decebat, and the like, in Latin). 


568. Statements of Past Recurrent Action. — A state- 
ment of an indefinitely recurrent past action, which would 
take place only under certain circumstances, stands in a 
past tense of the indicative with av: thus ἀναλαμβάνων 
οὖν αὐτῶν τὰ ποιήματα. . . διηρώτων ἂν αὐτοὺς τί λέγοιεν 
so, taking up their compositions, I would ask (it ever an oppor- 
tunity occurred) them what they meant Pl. Ap. 22. Ὁ. εἴ 
Tis αὐτῷ δοκοίη... βλακεύειν, ἐκλεγόμενος τὸν ἐπιτήδειον 
ἔπαισεν av if any one seemed to him to be lazy, he would 
pick out the proper man, and strike him Xn, A. 2, 3, 11. 

Notr.— Observe that this form of statement does not necessarily 
express the occurrence as a fact, but only as what could or would take 
place (and undoubtedly did take place) if circumstances demanded. 


Hence it is easily explained as a special use of the potential (§ 565) 
indicative. 


569. 1. Subjunctive with μή and μὴ ov. — In Plato, and sometimes 
in other writers, a cautious suggestion is occasionally expressed by the 
subjunctive with μή (negatively μὴ οὐ, ὃ 432): thus μὴ ὡς ἀληθῶς 
ταῦτα σκέμματα ἢ τῶν ῥᾳδίως ἀποκτιννύντων may not these really 
prove to be the considerations of those who thoughtlessly put men to death ? 
Pl. Crit. 48 c. ἀλλὰ μὴ od τοῦτ᾽ ἢ χαλεπόν but possibly this may not 
be so difficult Pl. Ap. 39 a. 


bo 


86 USES OF THE FINITE MODES 


In origin these expressions are doubtless questions (§ 576 a), but 
they are usually printed without the mark of interrogation. 

2. οὐ μή with the Subjunctive (or Future Indicative). — An emphatic 
future denial (which sometimes borders on a prohibition, § 584) may 
be expressed by the subjunctive (or rarely the future indicative) with 
ov py: thus οὐκέτι μὴ δύνηται βασιλεὺς ἡμᾶς καταλαβεῖν the king 
will no longer be able to overtake us Xn. A. 3, 3, 12. οὐ μὴ δυσμενὴς 
ἔσῃ φίλοις you shall not be hostile to your friends Τὰ. Med. 1151. οὐ yap 
μὴ ἀπώσεται for she will not possibly reject it Hdt. 1, 199. 


QUESTIONS 
DIRECT QUESTIONS 


570. Direct Questions may be divided into two classes : 
(1) ‘Yes’ or ‘No’ Questions, in which the question is 
asked by the verb, and (2) Word Questions, in which the 
question is asked by some interrogative pronoun, adjec- 
tive, or adverb. The latter class cannot be answered by 
ΟΕ POF! NOs, 

‘YES’ OR ‘NO’ QUESTIONS 


571. A ‘yes’ or ‘no’ question may sometimes have 
the same form as a statement, and the fact that it is a 
question is determined wholly by the context : thus ἔστιν 
ὅ τι σε ἠδίκησα ; is there any matter in which I have wronged 
you? Xn. A. 1, 6, 7. 

1. More often the interrogative meaning is made clearer 
by means of certain adverbs (ἢ, dpa): thus ἢ καὶ περὶ 
ἵππους οὕτω σοι δοκεῖ ἔχειν ; Do you really think this 7s the 
case also with horses? Pl. Ap. 25 ἃ. ap εἰσίν; ap’ οὐκ 
εἰσί; Are they (living)? Are they not? E. 1.17. 577. 


571 a. In Homer the regular interrogative word in ‘ yes’ or ‘ no’ ques- 


Ly 


tions is ἢ : thus ἢ ἔτι καὶ χρυσοῦ ἐπιδεύεαι; Do you yet lack for gold 
besides ? B 229. 


DIRECT QUESTIONS 287 


Such questions merely ask for information and do not 
imply any previous assumption on the part of the speaker. 


572. Questions with ov and py. — The negative adverbs 
ov and μή (ὃ 431) either alone or combined with other 
interrogative adverbs are used also in questions. 

1. A question introduced by οὐ (or by ἄρ᾽ οὐ or οὐκοῦν) 
asks whether a fact is not so, and expects the answer ‘ yes’: 
thus οὐχ οὕτως ἔχει; Is it not so? (1.6. “1 think it is so ; 
pray tell me if it is not so”) Pl. Ap. 27 Ὁ ovd« édas; 
Won't you move on? (1.6. “1 think you will”) Ar. Δικ. 1298. 

2. A question introduced by μή, apa μή, or μῶν (-- μὴ 
οὖν). implies uncertainty (or even apprehension) on the 
part of the speaker: thus dpa ye μὴ ἐμοῦ προμηθῇ; Are 
you not perhaps concerned for me? (1.6 “I don’t think 
you ought to be, but I have a feeling that you possibly 
are”) Pl. Crit. 44e. μῶν προσῆκέ σοι; Is it not perhaps 
possible that he was related to you? EK. I. T. 550. 


Nore. — When οὐ is used in a question introduced by μή it modi- 
fies some particular word (8 451, 3): thus μῶν οὐ πέποιθας - Is it 
possible that you don’t believe me? E. Med. 732. 


573. Rhetorical Questions. — The context often shows 
that a question is asked merely for effect, with the knowl- 
edge that the answer must be ‘no.’ Such questions are 
often (but not always) introduced by μή: as μὴ αὐτὸν 
οἴῃ φροντίσαι θανάτου καὶ κινδύνου; Think you that he con- 
sidered death and danger? (“Of course you do not’) 
Pl. Ap. 28 d. ἄλλοι δέ dpa αὐτἄς οἴσουσι ῥᾳδίως; Will 
others then bear them easily ? (**Far from it!”) Pl. Ap. 37d. 


Notr.— The words ἄλλο τι ἤ (or sometimes only ἄλλο τι, the 7 
being omitted), meaning literally (Js it) anything else than, are not 
infrequently used to introduce a question which the speaker feels must 
be answered by ‘Yes’: thus ἄλλο τι ἢ οὐδὲν κωλύει παριέναι; There’s 


288 USES OF THE FINITE MODES 


nothing to stop our passing along, is there? Xn. A. 4, 7,5. ἄλλο τι 
φιλεῖται ὑπὸ τῶν θεῶν ; Isn’t it loved by the gods? Pl. Euthyphro 10 ἃ. 


ALTERNATIVE QUESTIONS 


574. Direct alternative questions are commonly intro- 
duced by πότερον (πότερα). . . 7 (Latin, utrum .. . an) 
whether . . . or, or separated by 7 alone: thus πότερον 
ἐᾷς ἄρχειν ἢ ἄλλον καθίστης ; Do you let him rule or do 
you appoint another? Xn. Cy. ὃ, 1, 12. dys ἢ ov; Do 
you say yes or no? Pl. Ap. 27 ἃ. 

Nore. — The first part of a double question is sometimes omitted 
(cf. Latin an in questions): thus ἐπιστάμενος πάλαι ἀπεκρύπτου" ἢ 
oxvels, ἔφη, ἄρξαι; “ You have been concealing your knowledge this long 


time. (Is there some hidden reason for this) o7 do you hesitate to 
begin?” said he. Xn. Mem. 2, 3, 14. 


WORD QUESTIONS 


575. A question may be expressed by any interroga- 
tive pronoun, adjective, or adverb: thus τίς ἀγορεύειν 
βούλεται; who wishes to speak? ti εἶπε; what did he say ? 
τίνος ἕνεκα καλεῖ μέ TIS; what will anybody invite me for ? 
ποίας συμμαχίας δεόμεθα ; what kind of alliance do we 
want? πότε ἦλθεν; when did he come? 

Nore 1.— In Greek, unlike English, the interrogative word is often 
connected with some subordinate word of the sentence instead of with 
the principal verb: thus τὸν ἐκ ποίας πόλεως στρατηγὸν προσδοκῶ 
ταῦτα mpagev; From what sort of a city must the general be whom I 
expect to do this? (lit. the general from what sort of a city do I expect 
will do this?) Xn. A. 3,1, 14. For τί μαθών and τί παθών, see 
§ 653, note 4. 


574 a. Homer, in alternative questions (both direct and indirect) uses 
ἢ (ἠέ)... ἢ (he) (never πότερον... #); and ἢ (fe) may also be used 
alone: thus ἤ ῥά τι ἴδμεν ἐνὶ φρεσίν, He καὶ οὐκί; Do we know at all, or do 
we not? ὃ 632. ψεύσομαι ἢ ἔτυμον ἐρέω; shall I speak falsely or speak the 
truth ὁ K 634. 


MODES IN DIRECT QUESTIONS 289 


Nore 2.— Greek sometimes condenses two interrogatives into one 
sentence: thus τίς πόθεν εἰς ἀνδρῶν ; Who are you, and from where 
among men do you come? a170. πῶς ἐκ Tivos vews ... ἥκετε; In 
what way and from what ship have you come? KE. Hel. 1543. 


MODES IN DIRECT QUESTIONS 


576. Questions are distinguished from statements usually 
by some interrogative word, but sometimes only by the 
context (§ 571); hence the modes used in statements 
are used also in questions: thus (INDICATIVE) σοὶ δοκεῖ; 
Do you think 803 τίσοι δοκεῖ; What do you think? οὔ σοι 
δοκεῖ; Don't you think so? μή σοι δοκεῖ; Is it not per- 
haps possible that you think so? (POTENTIAL OPTATIVE) 
τίς οὐκ ἂν ὁμολογήσειεν; Who would not admit? Xn. 
Mem. 1. 1. ὃ. (POTENTIAL INDICATIVE) πῶς ἂν πολλοὶ 
μὲν ἐπεθύμουν τυραννεῖν ; How could many wish to rule ? 
Xn. Mier. 1, 9. “πῶς av... eyo τί σ᾽ ἠδίκησα; How 
could I have done you any wrong? Dem. 37, 57. 


577. Deliberative Questions. — Questions expressing 
doubt or deliberation stand in the subjunctive mode 
(Deliberative Subjunctive). The negative is μή. Such 
questions are often made more explicit by the addition of 
βούλῃ or βούλεσθε do you wish? thus ποῖ τράπωμαι; ποῖ 
πορευθῶ; whither shall I turn? whither go? E. Hee. 1099. 
εἴπω τι τῶν εἰωθότων, ὦ δέσποτα; Shall 1 make one of the 
stock jokes, Sir? Ar. Ran. 1. μηδ᾽ ἐάν τι ὠνῶμαι 
ἔρωμαι ὁπόσου πωλεῖ; And, if I am marketing, am I not 
to ask the price of anything? Xn. Mem. 1, 2,36. βούλῃ 


576 a. In Homer the anticipatory subjunctive is also found in ques- 
tions (cf. ὃ 562 a): as ὦ μοι ἐγώ, τίπάθω; Alas! what will become of me? 
ε 465. μή τι χολωσάμενος ῥέξῃ κακὸν υἷας ᾿Αχαιῶν; may he not, perhaps, in 
anger, harm the sons of the Achaeans? B 195. 


BABBITT’S GR. GRAM. 19 


290 USES OF THE FINITE MODES 


σκοπῶμεν; Shall we consider, if you please? Xn. Mem. 
2: 
ε ? 


INDIRECT QUESTIONS 


578. Indirect ‘yes’ or ‘no’ questions are introduced by 
εἰ whether, if (sometimes by dpa or μή): thus ἠρώτησεν 
εἰ ἤδη ἀποκεκριμένοι εἶεν he asked if they had already given 
their answer Xn. A. 2, 1, 15. 


579. Alternative indirect ‘yes’ or ‘no’ questions are 
introduced by πότερον (πότερα)... ἢ or by εἰ... 7 Or 
by εἴτε. . . εἴτε; as διηρώτα τὸν Κῦρον πότερον βούλοιτο 
μένειν ἢ ἀπιέναι she asked Cyrus whether he wanted to stay 
or to go back Xn. Cy. 1, 3,15. ἐβουλεύετο... εἰ πέμποιέν 
τινας ἢ πάντες ἴοιεν he considered whether they should send 
some, or all should go Xn. A. 1, 10, 5. 


580. In indirect word-questions (§ 575) the interroga- 
tive of the direct form may be retained (τίς, ποῦ, etc. ), 
or it may be represented by the corresponding indefinite 
relative (ὅστις, ὅπου, ete., ὃ 490): as βουλεύεσθαι 6 τι χρὴ 
ποιεῖν to consider what must be done (direct τί χρὴ ποιεῖν ; ) 


An A. 453, UL; 


MODES IN INDIRECT QUESTIONS 


581. Indirect questions follow the rules for indirect 
discourse (§§ 675 ff.); after a secondary tense their verbs 
may be changed from the indicative or subjunctive to the 
optative of the same tense, or they may be retained in 
their original mode. For examples see § 673. 


579 a. In Homer, alternative indirect questions are introduced in the 
same way as direct alternative questions (see § 574 a). 


COMMANDS AND EXHORTATIONS 291 


COMMANDS AND EXHORTATIONS 


582. The modes used in expressing commands and 
exhortations are the imperative and the subjunctive. In 
the first person the subjunctive is used (since there is no 
imperative of the first person); in the other persons the 
imperative is commonly used (but see ὃ 584). 


Nore. — ἄγε, ἴθι, φέρε, etc. — Commands and exhortations are often 
preceded by aye (ayere), εἰ δ᾽ ἄγε, ἴθι, φέρε, come now (often with δή or 
νυν), and sometimes by δεῦρο or δεῦτε (lit. hither): as dye by... 
εἶπέ come now, tell us Xn. A. 2, 2,10. φέρ᾽ ἴδω come, let me see Ar. 
Nub. 21. These words are often used without regard to the person 
and number of the accompanying imperative or subjunctive (as aye 
μίμνετε come stay B 331). 


583. Commands. — A command is regularly expressed by 
the imperative mode: thus ἐμοὶ πείθου καὶ σώθητι take my 
advice, and be saved Pl. Crit. 44 Ὁ. θεοὶ δ᾽ ἡμῖν μάρτυρες 
ἔστων and let the gods be our witnesses Xn. Cy. 4, 6, 10. 
τοσαῦτά μοι εἰρήσθω let so much have been said by me 
Lys. 24, 4. (The perfect active or middle imperative is 
rare. ) 


Note 1.—In Greek, as in English, a polite command (or request) 
may be implied in a future statement: as πάντως δὲ τοῦτο δράσεις 
at all events you will do this (1.6. “ you will be kind enough to do this’’) 
Ar. Nub. 1352. χωροῖς ἂν dow you might go within (i.e. “ go within”) 
S. El. 1491. 

Nore 2.— Infinitive in Commands. — A command may be suggested 
by the infinitive used independently (§ 644). A person addressed 
stands in the vocative case, but a predicate word referring to this 
vocative is in the nominative (cf. § 631); otherwise the subject is in 
the accusative (8 629): as παῖδα δ᾽ ἐμοὶ λῦσα τε φίλην, τά τ᾽ ἄποινα 
δέχεσθαι ἁζόμενοι Διὸς υἱόν but set my dear child free, and take 
this ransom, in holy fear of Zeus’ son A 20. ἀκούετε EewW* τοὺς 
γεωργοὺς ἀπιέναι Oyez, Oyez, Oyez! the husbandmen (are) to de- 
part Ar. Paz 551. 


292 USES OF THE FINITE MODES 


Nore 3.— A command is sometimes expressed by ὅπως (negative 
ὅπως py, ὃ 431, 1) and the future indicative, or (less often) a subjune- 
tive: thus ὅπως οὖν ἔσεσθε ἄνδρες ἄξιοι τῆς ἐλευθερίας Hs κέκτησθε 
prove yourselves men worthy of the freedom which you possess Xn. 4.1. 
7,3. ὅπως μὴ φήσῃ τις (take care to) let no one say Xn. Symp. 4, 8. 


584. Negative Commands (Prohibitions). — A negative 
command is expressed regularly by μή (ὃ 451, 1) with the 
present imperative or the aorist subjunctive (the present, 
as usual, referring to a continued action, while the aorist 
represents a single act, ὃ 539): thus (PREs. IMPv.) μὴ 
οὖν οἴου now don't entertain the idea Xn. A. 2, 1, 12. 
μὴ κτεῖνε Κροῖσον (stay) don't kill Croesus (i.e. don’t 
continue what you are now doing) Hdt. 1, 85. 

(Aor. SUBJ.) μὴ ποιήσῃς ταῦτα don't do this Xn. A. 
7, 1, 8. μηδενὶ τοῦτο παραστῇ let not this occur to the 
mind of anybody Lys. 12, 62. 

Norre.— The third person of the aorist imperative is occasionally 


found in prohibitions (e.g. μηδεὶς. . . προσδοκησάτω let nobody expect 
Pl. Ap. 17 ὁ); other exceptions to the rule of § 584 are very rare. 


585. Exhortations. — Exhortations are expressed by the 
first person of the subjunctive mode; if negative, by the 
subjunctive with μή (ὃ 451, 1): thus ἴω μεν let us go, φέρ᾽ 
ἤδω come, let me see Ar. Nub. 21. μή μέλλωμεν let us 
not delay Xn. A. 8, 1, 46. 


4 


WISHES 


586. Wishes are either hopeful or hopeless. 
587. Hopeful Wishes. — A hopeful wish (future) stands 
in the optative mode, and may be introduced by εἴθε or εἰ 


586 a. In Homer (and less often in other poets) wishes are sometimes 
preceded by ws: as ws ὠφελες αὐτόθ᾽ ὀλέσθαι would you had perished there 
Γ 428. 


WISHES 293 


yap: thus τούτους μὲν of θεοὶ ἀποτείσαιντο these may 
the gods repay Xn. A. 3, 2,6. εἴθε σὺ. .. φίλος ἡμῖν 
γένοιο would that you might become a friend to us Xn. 
Hell. 4, 1, 38. So often ὄλοιτο curse him (lit. may he 
perish). 

Nore 1.— A wish (future) may be expressed in a roundabout way 
by βουλοίμην (ἐθέλοιμι) av 1 could wish with an infinitive (cf. § 588, 
note): as βουλοίμην μὲν οὖν ἂν τοῦτο οὕτω γενέσθαι [ could wish 
that this might so happen Pl. Ap. 19 a. 

Note 2.— A wish (future) may sometimes be implied in a ques- 
tion asked by the potential optative (ὃ 576): as πῶς ἂν ὀλοίμην how 
might I die (i.e. ‘I wish I might die’) E. Supp. 796. 

Nore 3.— The infinitive used independently (§ 644) may suggest 
a wish (the construction is rare in prose): as Zed πάτερ, ἢ Αἴαντα 
λαχεῖν ἢ Τυδέος υἱόν Father Zeus, may Ajax get the lot, or Tydeus’ 
son! H179. ὦ Zed, ἐκγενέσθαι μοι ᾿Αθηναίους τείσασθαι Grant me, 
Zeus, to take vengeance on the Athenians Hat. 5, 105. 


588. Hopeless Wishes. — A hopeless wish (present or 
past) is expressed either (1) by a past tense of the indica- 
tive with εἴθε or εἰ yap, or (2) by some form of ὥφελον 
(aorist indicative of ὀφείλω owe) with the present or aorist 
infinitive : thus — 

(1) εἴθε σοι, ὦ ἹΠερίκλεις, τότε συνεγενόμην I wish, 
Pericles, that I had been with you then Xn. Mem. 1, 2, 40. 
εἴθ᾽ ἣν ᾿Ορέστης πλησίον would that Orestes were near! 
EK. Hl. 282. 

(2) “AAN were μὲν Κῦρον ζῆν Would that Cyrus were 


587 a. In poetry, wishes are sometimes introduced by εἰ alone (e.g. εἴ 
μοι γένοιτο I wish I might have ἘΣ. Hec. 856). In Homer αἴθε and at γάρ 
(cf. § 600, 1 a) are also found. 

588 a. In Homer a hopeless past wish is expressed only by ὠφελον 
(sometimes also the imperfect ὠφελλον). A hopeless present wish is some- 
times expressed also by the optative (cf. § 606 b): as εἴθ᾽ ὡς ἡβάοιμι, 
βίη δέ μοι ἔμπεδος εἴη 1 would that I were young ugain, and that my strength 
were sound H 187, 


204 USES OF THE FINITE MODES 


alive! (lit. Cyrus ought to be alive) Xn. A. 2,1, 4. Such 
wishes also may be preceded by εἴθε or εἰ yap: εἰ yap 
ὦφελον, ὦ Κρίτων, οἷοί τ᾽ εἶναι οἱ πολλοὶ τὰ μέγιστα 
κακὰ ἐργάζεσθαι would that the common herd, Crito, were 
capable of doing the greatest harm Pl. Crit. 44 ἃ. 

Observe that the aorist in hopeless wishes refers to a 
single act (in past time), while the imperfect refers to a 
continued act (in present, seldom in past, time). Cf. § 606. 
The same principle applies to the present or aorist infini- 
tive with ὥφελον. Cf. 8 567. 

Nore. — A hopeless wish is sometimes expressed in a roundabout 
way by ἐβουλόμην (or ἤθελον) av I could wish (cf. § 587 note 1): as 
ἐβουλόμην ἂν αὐτοὺς ἀληθῆ λέγειν I could wish that they spoke the 
truth Lys. 12, 22. 


589. Negative Wishes. — All negative wishes take the 
negative μή (ὃ 431, 1). (This is true even with ὥφελον, 
where we should expect od; cf. § 431 note) : thus ὡς δὴ μὴ 
ὄφελον νικᾶν would that I had not been victor X 548. Ζεῦ, 
μηκέτ᾽ εἴην may I no longer live, O Zeus E. Hipp. 1191. 

Norr.— With ὥφελον the negative μή probably belonged originally 


with the infinitive (§ 431, 1), but later came to precede the whole 
sentence (cf. § 431 note). 


FINAL CLAUSES 
PURPOSE 


590. Purpose Clauses. — Purpose clauses regularly take 
the subjunctive after a primary tense and the optative (or 
subjunctive, § 674) after a secondary tense. They are 
introduced by ἵνα, ws, or ὅπως that, in order that, and if 


590 a. Homer has also ὄφρα (Sometimes also ἕως, ὃ 626 a) in purpose 
clauses: aS κατανεύσομαι ὄφρα πεποίθῃς I will bow my head so you 
shall not doubt A 524. 


PURPOSE 295 


negative they add the negative μή (§ 431, 1): thus Εἰς 
καιρὸν ἥκεις, ἔφη. ὅπως τῆς δίκης ἀκούσῃς “you have come 
in good time,” he said, “that you may hear the trial” Xn. 
Cy. 3,1, 8. διανοεῖται αὐτὴν λῦσαι... ὡς μὴ διαβῆτε 
he has in mind to destroy it [the bridge] so that you may 
not cross Xn. A. 2, 4, 11. 

λαβὼν ὑμᾶς ἐπορευόμην iva . . . ὠφελοίην αὐτόν I pro- 
ceeded with you in order to help him Xn. A. 1, 3, 4. τὴν 
δὲ “λληνικὴν δύναμιν ἤθροιζεν ws μάλιστα ἐδύνατο ἐπικρυ- 
TTOMEVOS, ὅπως ὅτι ἀπαρασκευότατον λάβοι βασιλέα he col- 
lected the Greek force as secretly as πον so as to take the 
Ug IAT) unpr Les DG os ee ἢς ; 

a... κατέκαυσεν ἵνα μὴ Κῦρος τὰς which [vessels | 
he had burned, so that Cyrus should not cross Xn. A. 1, 
4, 18. 


PECULIARITIES IN PURPOSE CLAUSES 


Note 1. Optative by Attraction. — A purpose clause depending on 
an optative (potential or of wishing) commonly stands in the opta- 
tive by attraction (§ 316) : thus βασιλεὺς ἡμᾶς ἀπολέσαι περὶ παντὸς ἂν 
ποιήσαιτο iva καὶ τοῖς ἄλλοις Ἕλλησι φόβος εἴη the king would regard 
our destruction as all important, so that the rest of the Greeks may be 
afraid Xn. A. 2, 4, 3. 

Nore 2.— av— The adverb ἄν is sometimes used with ὡς or ὅπως 
and the subjunctive — probably a survival from the time when the 
purpose clause partook somewhat of the nature of a relative clause of 
anticipation (§ 623): thus ὡς 6 ἂν μάθῃς .. . ἀντάκουσον but in 
order that you may learn, listen to the other side of the case Xn. A. 2, 5, 16. 

Nore 3. Future Indicative. — The future indicative with ὅπως is 
sometimes found in purpose clauses (cf. 88. 593 and 555). 

Nore 4. Unattained Purpose. — When a purpose clause depends on 
an expression which shows that the purpose was not attained, it 
takes a past tense of the indicative: thus ἔδει τὰ ἐνέχυρα τότε λαβεῖν, 
ὡς pnd εἰ ἐβούλετο ἐδύνατο ἐξαπατᾶν security ought to have been taken 


590 Ὁ (note 2). —In Homer ὄφρα xe (or ἄν) is not infrequently found 
in purpose clauses, 


296 USES OF THE FINITE MODES 


at the time so that he would not have been able to play false, even if he 
had wished to do.so Xn. A. 7, 6, 23. 


591. Relative Clause of Purpose. A relative clause with 
the future indicative may be used so as to express pur- 
pose (negative μή): as ἡγεμόνα αἰτεῖν Κῦρον ὅστις. 
ἀπάξει to demand of Cyrus a guide who will lead us back 
Xn. A. 1, 3, 14. κρύψω τόδ᾽ ἔγχος. .. ἔνθα μή τις 
ὄψεται I'll hide this sword where none shall see it S. 
Aj. 658. 

592. Infinitive of Purpose. — Purpose may be expressed 
also lsy the infinitive (ὃ 640), but usually only with words 
which can take an indirect object (§ 875): as τὸ δὲ ἥμισυ 
κατέλιπε φυλάττειν TO στρατόπεδον the other half (of the 
army) he left to guard the camp Xn. A. 5, 2,1. ταύτην 
τὴν χώρᾶν ἐπέτρεψε διαρπάσαι τοῖς “Ελλησιν this country 
he turned over to the Greeks to plunder Xn. A. 1, 2, 19. 

For purpose suggested by the infinitive with ὥστε see 
§ 595, note. For the participle see § 653, 5. 


593. Object Clauses.—An object clause differs from a 
purpose clause in being in apposition with the object Cor 
subject) of a verb denoting care, attention, or effort. 

Object clauses take the future indicative with ὅπως 
(rarely after a secondary tense the future optative, 
§ 677); a negative clause adds the negative μή (§ 431, 1): 
as ὅπως δε Kal ὑμεῖς ἐμὲ ἐπαινέσετε ἐμοὶ μελήσει it shall be 
my care that (lit. how that) you, in turn, shall commend me 
Xn. A. 1, 4, 10. τοῦτο δεῖ παρασκευάσασθαι. ὅπως ws 
κράτιστα μαχούμεθα this we must arrange, namely how we 


593 a. Homer does not distinguish so closely as Attic between pur- 
pose and object clauses, and he often uses the subjunctive with ὡς or ὅπως 
(often with κε also) in object clauses: as φράσσεται ὡς κε vénrac he will 
contrive (how) that he shall return a 2065. 


PURPOSE = i 


shall best fight Xn. A. 4,6, 10. (Fur. Opt.; rare) διε- 
πράττοντο ὅπως ἐν TH ἑαυτῶν ἕκαστοι ἡγήσοιντο they 
arranged that they should be severally leaders in their own 
countries Xn. Hell. T, 5, 3. 

1. The (present or aorist) subjunctive or optative 
(§ 677) is sometimes found in object clauses instead of 
the future indicative (cf. ὃ 555): thus 6pa . . . ὅπως μὴ 
παρὰ δόξαν ὁμολογῇς see to it that you do not make any 
admission contrary to what you really think Pl. Crit. 49 ο. 
ἀπεκρίνατο ὅτι αὐτῷ μέλοι ὅπως καλῶς ἔχοι he replied that 
he was taking care that all should go well Xn. A. 1, 8, 13. 


Nore. — Instead of ὅπως μή; sometimes μή is found with the sub- 
junctive after words like ὁρῶ and σκοπῶ see to it. 


594. Clauses of Fearing. — A fear that something may 
happen (in the future), depending on words of fearing and 
the like, is expressed by the subjunctive with μή after a 
primary tense and the optative (or subjunctive, § 674) 
with μή after a secondary tense. If negative, od is added 
(ὃ 482): thus δέδοικα... μὴ ἐπιλαθώμεθα τῆς οἴκαδε 
ὁδοῦ I fear we may forget the homeward way Xn. A. 3, 2, 25. 
ov τοῦτο δέδοικα μὴ οὐκ ἔχω 6 τι δῶ 7 am not afraid that 
1 shall not have anything to give Xn. A. 1, T, T. 

ἔδεισαν οἱ “EXAnves μὴ προσάγοιεν πρὸς TO κέρας the 
Greeks were in terror lest they should lead against their 
yank Xo, Ai. 1 10,9: 

ὑπερεφοβεῖτο μή οἱ ὁ πάππος ἀποθάνῃ he was more than 
afraid that his dear grandfather might die Xn. Cy. 1, 4, 2. 

Norr. — Rarely the future indicative is found after words of fear- 
ing; sometimes also ὅπως μή (instead of μή) with the future indicative 
or the subjunctive (cf. §§ 595 and 555). 

1. A fear concerning the present or past stands in the 
indicative, with μή or μὴ οὐ: as φοβούμεθα μὴ ἀμφοτέρων 


208 USES OF THE FINITE MODES 


ἅμα ἡμαρτήκαμεν we fear that we have failed of both at 
once Th. 3, 53. δείδω μὴ δὴ πάντα θεὰ νημερτέα εἶπεν 
I fear that all the goddess said is true ε 500. 

Norr.— The construction after words of fearing (§ 594) is best 
explained as derived from the use of μή in questions (8 572, 2) with 
the indicative or the anticipatory subjunctive (8 576 a). Thus, 
originally δέδοικα pn ἔρχεται (or ἦλθεν) ; meant 7 am afraid; may he 
not possibly be coming (or have come) ?, and δέδοικα: μὴ ἔλθῃ; meant 
I am afraid ; may he not perhaps come? Later the second clause came 
to be regarded as dependent on the first. 

As fears mostly concern the future rather than the present or past, 
the subjunctive is of course much more common than the indicative. 
The optative after a secondary tense is due to the influence of the 
principle of indirect discourse (§ 677). 


RESULT 


595. Clauses of result are regularly introduced by ὥστε 
so that (sometimes by ὡς or an equivalent relative). If 
the result is regarded purely as result (without stating its 
actual attainment), the infinitive mode is used (§ 645) ; 
if the attainment of the result is emphasized, the indicative 
mode (or some other form of independent sentence) is 
employed: thus (INFINITIVE) τίς οὕτως ἐστὶ δεινὸς λέγειν 
ὥστεσε πεῖσαι; whois so clever at speaking as to persuade 
you? Xn. A. 2,5,15. ἤλαυνεν ἐπὶ τοὺς Μένωνος. Oa τ᾽ ἐκεί- 
νους ἐκπεπλῆχθαι he advanced against Menon’s soldiers so 
that they were panic-stricken Xn. A. 1, 5,13. ἐνετύγχανον 
τάφροις καὶ αὐχῶσιν ὕδατος πλήρεσιν, ὡς μὴ δύνασθαι δια- 
βαίνειν they came upon ditches and conduits full of water, so 
that they were (lit. so as to be) unable to cross Xn. A. 2,3, 10. 

(INDICATIVE) ἡ μήτηρ cuvérpattev αὐτῷ ταῦτα: ὥστε 
βασιλεὺς τὴν μὲν πρὸς ἑαυτὸν ἐπιβουλὴν οὐκ ἠσθάνετο his 
mother codperated with him in this, so that the King was not 
aware of the plot against him Xn. A. 1, 1, 8, 


CAUSAL. CLAUSES 299 


(PorENTIAL OPTATIVE) πλοῖα δ᾽ ὑμῖν πάρεστιν ὥστε 
ὅπῃ ἂν βούλησθε ἐξαίφνης ἂν ἐπιπέσοιτε you have boats, 
so that you could make a sudden descent on any place you 
choose Xn. A. 5, 6, 20. So also the imperative as well as 
other forms of statement, wish, question, ete., are occa- 
sionally found with ὥστε. 

Nore. — A result not yet attained, expressed by ὥστε and the infini- 
tive, may sometimes come very near denoting purpose: as μηχαναὶ 


πολλαί εἰσιν... ὥστε διαφεύγειν θάνατον there are many devices 
so as to escape (i.e. for escaping) death Pl. Ap. 39 ἃ. 


596. ἐφ᾽ ᾧ. ἐφ ᾧτε (and dote). —A clause introduced 
by ἐφ᾽ ᾧ, ἐφ᾽ ore (and sometimes ὥστε) on the ground that 
with the infinitive or (less often) the future indica- 
tive, regularly implies a proviso: as αἱρεθέντες δὲ ἐφ᾽ ᾧτε 
Evyypawat νόμους but having been chosen so that (“with 
the proviso that”) they should compile laws Xn. Hell. 2, 
3,11. ποιοῦνται κοινῇ ὁμολογίαν... date’ Αθηναίοις μὲν 
ἐξεῖναι βουλεῦσαι they made a general agreement, so that 
G.e. “with the proviso that”) the Athenians should be 
allowed to consider measures Th. 5, 28. 


597. Relative Clause Implying Result. — Result may 
also be implied by a relative clause with the indicative 
(§ 619, note): as τίς οὕτω μαίνεται ὅστις οὐ βούλεταί σοι 
φίλος εἶναι; who is so mad as not to (lit. who does not) 
wish to be a friend to you? Xn. A. 2, 5, 12. 


CAUSAL CLAUSES 


598. Causal clauses are introduced by ὅτι (διότι) because ; 
less often by ἐπεί (ἐπειδή) or ὅτε when, since (cf. the Latin 


598 a. Homer has also 6 and 6 re (§ 441 a) in the sense of the Attic 
ὅτι because. 


900 USES OF THE FINITE MODES 


cum), ὡς as, since, or by a relative pronoun (ὃ 619, 
note). 

The mode of the verb in a causal clause is regularly the 
indicative (although a potential form of statement is some- 
times possible): as ἐπεὶ noOero . . . καὶ ὅτι. .. ἤκουε 
since he had learned, and because he heard Xn. A. 1, 
221. 

Cause may also be implied by a circumstantial parti- 
ciple (see § 653, 4, and § 656, 1). 

Nortr. — After a secondary tense causal clauses are subject to the 
principles of indirect discourse, and may have the optative (§ 677). 


1. εἰ after words of wondering, etc. — After words ex- 
pressing surprise, joy, sorrow, anger, and the like, a cause 
is sometimes more delicately put as a mere supposition: 

> \ > ’ , \ i > / Sri} = 
as οὐ θαυμαστὸν δ᾽ εἰ τότε Tas popias ἐξέκοπτον it’s not 
wonderful that (lit. if) at that time they destroyed the sacred 
olive trees Lys. 7, 1. 


CONDITIONS 


599. 1. In Greek, as in other languages, a simplé condi- 
tion (in which nothing is implied as to the fulfillment) 
stands in the indicative mode (§ 602). 

2. A condition in which something is implied as to the 
fulfillment (1.6. as not likely to take place, not taking 
place, or not having taken place) has in Greek, as in 
other languages, a special conditional form. See Future 
Less Vivid (§ 605) and Contrary to Fact Conditions 
(§ 606). 

3. In addition to the conditional forms common to other 
languages, Greek has also a special form of future condi- 
tion (§ 604), and in present and past time a special form 
for general conditions (ὃ 608). 


CONDITIONAL SENTENCES 301 


CONDITIONAL SENTENCES 


600. A conditional sentence consists regularly of two 
parts: the Protasis (or Condition), which states the con- 
dition, and the Apodosis (er Conclusion), which states 
what happens (or would happen) under that condition. 

1. The protasis is introduced by some word meaning or 
implying if (εἰ, ἐάν, or a relative, ὃ 620); the regular 
negative of the protasis is μή (ὃ 431, 1). 

(For εἰ after words of wondering, etc., see ὃ 598, 1.) 

Nore. —If οὐ is used in the protasis, it usually modifies some par- 
ticular word of the protasis (cf. § 431, 3): thus εἰ τοὺς θανόντας οὐκ 
ἐᾷς θάπτειν if you don’t allow (i.e. forbid) the burial of the dead 8. Aj. 
1151. 


601. In classifying conditional sentences, it is conven- 
ient to refer them to certain normal forms which repeatedly 
occur, but the Greek did not hesitate to employ that form 
of protasis or apodosis which should best express his mean- 
ing (see § 612). 

Nore. — Apodotic δέ. -- Originally the two parts of a conditional 
sentence were codrdinate, and could be connected by coordinate con- 
junctions (like δέ and ἀλλά). Traces of this earlier usage still appear 
sometimes in the use of δέ (rarely ἀλλά) in the apodosis, as if to con- 
nect it with the protasis: thus ἐάν τ᾽ αὖ λέγω ὅτι καὶ τυγχάνει μέγιστον 
ἀγαθὸν ὃν ἀνθρώπῳ τοῦτο .. .. ταῦτα δ᾽ ἔτι ἧττον πείσεσθε if, on the 
other hand, I say that this happens to be the greatest good for a man, then 
you will even less believe this Pl. Ap. 38 a. 


602. Simple Conditions.—In Greek, as in other lan- 
guages, a simple condition (in which nothing is implied as 
to the fulfillment) takes the indicative mode in both prota- 
sis and apodosis: thus εἰ δέ τις οἴεται ἕνα αἱρετὸν εἶναι 


600, 1 a. Homer sometimes has ai for εἰ (cf. ὃ 587 a). 


902 USES OF THE FINITE MODES 


ὀφθαλμὸν βασιλεῖ, οὐκ ὀρθῶς οἴεται but if anybody. thinks 
that one chosen man is Eye for the King, he doesn’t think 
rightly Xn. Oy. 8, 2, 11. εἰ μὲν θεοῦ Hv, ok Av... 
αἰσχροκερδής if he was a god’s son, he was not basely greedy 
of gain Pl. Rep. 408 ὁ. εἰ Tipwpynoecs Πατρόκλῳ. 
τὸν φόνον καὶ “Ἕκτορα ἀποκτενεῖς, αὐτὸς ἀποθανῇ if you 
avenge the murder of Patroclus, and slay Hector, you your- 
self shall die Pl. Ap. 28 ο. 

1. Protasis and apodosis need not be in the same tense : 
thus εἰ. . . €dve τὰς σπονδὰς, τὴν δίκην ἔχει if he broke 
the truce, he has his deserts Xn. A. 2, 5, 41. 


Nore 1.— Equivalents of the Indicative in Simple Conditions. — 
Equivalents of the indicative may be substituted for it in the apodosis 
(and rarely in the protasis). Thus, the optative of wishing (= ἐλπίζω 
I hope, § 587), the imperative (= κελεύω I command, ὃ 582), the sub- 
junctive of exhortation (= δεῖ or χρή it is necessary or proper), or 
even the potential optative or indicative (= ἐμοὶ δοκεῖ it seems to me) 
($$ 563, 565) may stand for the indicative: as σοὶ δ᾽ εἴ πῃ ἄλλῃ δέδο- 
κται, λέγε καὶ δίδασκε but if you have come to any different conclusion, 
(1 beg you) speak and explain Pl. Crit. 49 e. καὶ εἴτε μηδεμία αἴσθησίς 
ἐστιν ... θαυμάσιον κέρδος ἂν εἴη ὃ θάνατος and if it is unconscious- 
ness, (it seems to me) death would be a wondrous gain Pl. Ap. 40 ο. 

Nore 2.—Future Indicative in Present Conditions.— Rarely the 
future indicative is used in the protasis with the force of a periphras- 
tic future (see ὃ 533 note) to express a present intention. Such condi- 
tions are better classed as present conditions: thus εἰ δὴ ὁμοῦ πόλεμός τε 
Sapa καὶ λοιμὸς ᾿Α χαιούς if war and plague together are to lay the Achae- 
ans low A 61. Sod... πιστεύσομεν if we are going to trust Xn. 
eins 16: 


FUTURE CONDITIONS (MORE VIVID AND LESS VIVID) 


603. In future conditions the Greeks usually preferred 
not to assume the condition as a fact (δ 602), but to an- 
ticipate it as a more or less remote possibility (ef. §§ 555, 
5098); hence we find two special forms of future condi- 
tions, the Future More Vivid and the Future Less Vivid. 


FUTURE CONDITIONS 303 


604. Future More Vivid. — A Future More Vivid Con- 
dition, anticipating an immediate future possibility, has: 
In the protasis, 
the subjunctive with ἐάν (ἤν or av). 
In the apodosis, 
the future indicative (or its equivalent) : 


thus ἢν yap τοῦτο λάβωμεν, οὐ δυνήσονται μένειν for 
if we capture this, they will not be able to stay Xn. A. ὃ, 
4,41. ἐὰν σωφρονῆτε, ov τούτου ἀλλ᾽ ὑμῶν αὐτῶν φεί- 
σεσθε if you are discreet, you will spare not him, but your- 
selves Xn. Hell. 2, 3, 34. 


Nore. — Equivalents of the future indicative, such as the impera- 
tive, hortatory subjunctive, subjunctive with οὐ μή (§ 569, 2), and 
the like (cf. § 602, note 1) may take the place of the future indicative 
in the apodosis: as καὶ χρῶ αὐτοῖς ἐαν δέῃ τι and use them, if you need 
them at all Xn. Cy. 5, 4, 30. κἂν φαινώμεθα ἄδικα αὐτὰ ἐργαζόμενοι, 
μὴ οὐ δέῃ, κτλ. and if we shall appear to do this unjustly, will it not per- 
haps be necessary, etc., Pl. Crit. 48 ἃ. 


605. Future Less Vivid. — A Future Less Vivid condi- 
tion, implying that the supposition is a somewhat remote 
possibility, has: 


604 a. In Homer, and sometimes in the Attic poets, a future more 
vivid condition is expressed by the subjunctive with εἰ alone (without ἄν 
or ke, cf. §§ 623 a; 609 a): as οὔ τοι ἔτι δηρόν ye φίλης ἀπὸ πατρίδος αἴης 
ἔσσεται οὐδ᾽ εἴ πέρ ἑ σιδήρεα δέσματ᾽ Ex yorv be sure that not for long will 
he be absent from his native land, no, not if bonds of tron restrain him 
a 204. So κεἴ τις ἢ σοφός even if one be wise ὃ. Ant. 710. 

b. Homer uses in the apodosis also the other forms of future statement 
(such as the subjunctive with or without ἄν or xe) described in ὃ 563 a; 
as εἰ δέ κε μὴ δώῃσιν, ἐγὼ δέ Kev αὐτὸς ἕλωμαι and if he do not give τε then 
I myself may seize her A 324, 

605 a. Homer sometimes uses εἴ κε (instead of εἰ) with the optative in 
the protasis of a future less vivid condition: as εἰ δέ κεν “Apyos ἱκοίμεθ᾽ 
.. . and if ever we should come to Argos I 141. 


904 USES OF THE FINITE MODES 


In the protasis, 
the optative with εἰ. 


In the apodosis, 
the potential optative (i.e. optative with ἄν, ὃ 563): 


thus ὁδοποιήσειέ γ᾽ ἂν αὐτοῖς καὶ εἰ σὺν τεθρίπποις 
βούλοιντο ἀπιέναι he would make roads for them even if 
they should want to depart with chariot-and-four Xu. A. 
3, 2, 24. ἐφ᾽ dv ἔλθοιτε ἄν, εἰ τὸν Ἅλυν διαβαῖτε to 
which [i.e. the Parthenius] you would come, if you should 


cross the Halys Xn. A. 5, 6, 9. 


Nore. — Observe that the less vivid condition of future time cor- 
responds to the contrary to fact condition of present or past time. 


CONDITIONS CONTRARY TO FACT 


606. In a condition contrary to fact the supposition 
stated in the protasis is contrary to the existing facts. 
Such conditions have: 

In the protasis, 

a past tense of the indicative with ec. 


In the apodosis, 
the potential indicative (§ 565) (i.e. a past tense 
of the indicative with av), or its equivalent 

(ὃ 566). 


606 a. In Homer the imperfect in a condition contrary to fact refers 
always to past time. 

b. In Homer a condition contrary to fact is sometimes thought of 
as still possible, and so is expressed as a future less vivid (opt. with εἰ, 
opt. with ἄν (ὃ 565 a); cf. the similar use of the present subjunctive in 
earlier Latin). Usually only the apodosis is expressed in this form: as 
οὔ κε θανόντι περ ὧδ᾽ ἀκαχοίμην, εἰ μετὰ ols ἑτάροισι δάμη Τρώων ἐνὶ δήμῳ 
I should not have been (lit. could not be) so distressed at his death, if he 
had perished with his companions amidst the people of the Trojans a 290 
(cf. also § 588 a). 


CONDITIONS CONTRARY TO FACT 305 


The aorist in these conditions denotes a single act, and 
hence refers regularly to past time ; the imperfect denotes 
a continued action (or state), and refers either to present 
or to past time; the pluperfect is used only when the 
completion and continuance of the result of the act (§ 534) 
are emphasized, and refers usually to present time. Prot- 
asis and apodosis need not stand in the same tense: thus 

Aorist (PAST TIME) οὐκ av ἐποίησεν ᾿Αγασίας ταῦτα, 
εἰ μὴ ἐγὼ αὐτὸν ἐκέλευσα Agasias would not have done this, 
if I had not told him to Xn. A. 6, 6,15. καὶ ἴσως ἂν διὰ 
ταῦτ᾽ ἀπέθανον, εἰ μὴ ἡ ἀρχὴ διὰ ταχέων κατελύθη and 
perhaps I should have been put to death for this, if the gov- 
ernment had not soon been overthrown Pl. Ap. 82 ἃ. (An 
aorist (ἂν. . . εἶπες) of asingle act in present time (rare) 
is in Pl. Rep. 337 b.) 

Imperfect (PRESENT TIME) ταῦτα δὲ οὐκ ἂν ἐδύναντο 
ποιεῖν, EL μὴ καὶ διαίτῃ μετρίᾳ ἐχρῶντο they would not have 
the power to do this, if they did not also lead a temperate life 
χα Cy. 1. 2.10: 

(PAST TIME) οὐκ ἂν οὖν νήσων... ἐκράτει, εἰ μή τι καὶ 
ναυτικὸν εἶχεν now he would not have been master of islands, 
if he had not possessed also some naval force Th. 1, 9. 

Pluperfect (PRESENT TIME) with aorist (past time) εἰ 
τριάκοντα μόναι μετέπεσον TOV ψήφων, ἀπεπεφεύγη ἄν 
if only thirty of the votes had been cast on the other side, 
I should (now) be free Pl. Ap. 36 a. 

Aorist (PAST) and Imperfect (PRESENT) εἰ μὴ ὑμεῖς 
ἤλθετε, ἐπορευόμεθα av ἐπὶ βασιλέα if you had not come 
we should (now ) be marching against the King Xn. A. 2, 1, 4. 

Imperfect (PAST) and Aorist (PAST) εἰ μὲν πρόσθεν 
ἠπιστάμην, οὐδ᾽ ἂν συνηκολούθησα σοι if 1 had under- 
stood this before, I should not have followed with you Xn. A. 
0, 11- 


BABBITT’S GR. GRAM. — 20 


900 USES OF THE FINITE MODES 


607. In place of the potential indicative in the apodosis 
of a condition contrary to fact may be substituted a state- 
ment of fact expressed by the imperfect indicative (without 
dv) of a verb denoting possibility, propriety, necessity, and 
the like (ἐξῆν, ἔδει, χρῆν, etc.). See § 567 and note: thus 

With Aorist INFINITIVE (past time) ἐξῆν σοι φυγῆς 
τιμήσασθαι, εἰ ἐβούλου it was possible for you to propose 
the penalty of exile, if you so desired Pl. Crit. 52 ο. 

Wirth Present INFINITIVE (present time) χρῆν σ᾽ 
εἴπερ ἦσθα μὴ κακὸς, πείσαντά με γαμεῖν γάμον τόνδ᾽ you 
ought, if you were not so base, to win my sanction to contract 
this. marriage K. Med. 586. 

WirH PRESENT INFINITIVE (past time) ἐχρῆν yap 
αὐτοὺς, εἴπερ ὑμῶν ἕνεκα ἔπραττον ταῦτα, φαίνεσθαι τῆς 
αὐτῆς τιμῆς πολλὰς ἡμέρᾶς πωλοῦντας for, if they were doing 
this on your account, they ought to have been observed to sell 
at the same price for many days Lys. 22, 12. 


GENERAL CONDITIONS 


608. In present and past time the Greeks had a special 
form for a general condition (to state what always happens 
(or happened) if the condition is (or was) ever fulfilled). 

609. Present General. — In a Present General condition 
the usage is: 

In the protasis, 

the subjunctive with ἐάν (ἤν or ἄν). 


In the apodosis, 
the present indicative (or the equivalent) : 


609 a. In Homer, present general conditions usually have in the prota- 
sis the subjunctive with εἰ alone (without xe or ἄν, cf. ὃ 604 a; 625 a): as 
οὐ δέ τις ἡμῖν θαλπωρή, εἴ πέρ Tis. . . φῇσιν ἐλεύσεσθαι and to us it is no 
joy if (ever) some one say that he will come a 167. This usage is some- 
times found in other poets. 


GENERAL CONDITIONS 307 


thus ἢν δ᾽ ἐγγὺς €XOn θάνατος, οὐδεὶς βούλεται θνήσκειν 
if Death comes near, nobody wants to die Ἰὰ. Ale. 671. 

x \ ἄρσενα 4 \ > ἰὴ yy ΄ ΄ 
τὰς δὲ ὠτίδας, ἄν τις ταχὺ ἀνιστῇ, ἔστι λαμβάνειν τέ 
is possible to catch bustards vf one starts them up suddenly 
May AS 1-5; 9} 


Nore 1.—In place of the present indicative in the apodosis may 
be substituted the gnomie aorist (§ 530). See § 530 and the second 
example there quoted. 

Nore 2.— Observe that the present general condition differs from 
the future more vivid (§ 604) only in the apodosis, which states what 
always takes place (instead of what will take place), in case the antici- 


pation expressed in the protasis is realized. 


610. Past General. —In a Past General condition the 
usage 1s: 
In the protasis, 
the optative with εἰ. 
In the apodosis, 
the imperfect indicative (or the equivalent) : 


thus εἴ πού τι ὁρῴη βρωτόν, διεδίδου if he saw anywhere 
anything eatable, he distributed it Xn. A. 4, 5, ὃ. εἴ τι 
ἄλλο Tpattev βούλοιντο. κύριοι ἦσαν if (ever) they wished 
to do anything else, they had authority Lys. 12, 44. 


Note 1.— As an equivalent of the imperfect indicative in the 
apodosis, the imperfect or aorist indicative with av (§ 568), or the 
aorist modified by “ never,” “often,” and the like may be used: as εἰ δέ 
τινος TOD κλήρου ὃ ποταμός TL παρέλοιτο, ἐλθὼν ἂν πρὸς αὐτὸν ἐσ ή- 
μαινε τὸ γεγενημένον if (ever) the river carried away any portion of a 
man’s lot, he would come before him [the king] and relate what had hap- 
pened Hadt.2,109. For an example of the aorist with ἄν as the apodosis 
of a past general condition, see § 568. For the aorist with a negative 
see Xn. A. 1, 9, 18. 


610 a. In Homer there is but one example of the optative in a past 
general condition, namely 2 768 εἴ τις. . . ἐνίπτοι. . . . KaTépuxes if ever 
any one spoke harshly . . . you restrained (him). 


908 USES OF THE FINITE MODES 


Nore 2.— Observe that the past general condition differs from the 
future less vivid (§ 605) only in the apodosis, which states what regu- 
larly took place (instead of what would take place), in case the possi- 
bility suggested in the protasis came true. 


SUMMARY OF CONDITIONAL FORMS 


611. The normal usage in conditions may be summarized 
as follows : 


TIME Form PROTASIS APODOSIS 
Η Simple (ormost Fut. Indic. with εἰ Fut. Indic. (or equivalent) 
Ξ [ vivid) 
Ξ | More Vivid Subj. with ἐάν Fut. Indic. (or equivalent) 
Less Vivid Opt. with εἰ Opt. with dv 

( Simple Pres. (or Perf.) Indic. Pres. (or Perf.) Indic. (or 
2 | with εἰ equivalent) 
2 | General Subj. with ἐάν Pres. Indic. (or equivalent) 
# | Contrary to Fact Imperf.(or Pluperf.) Imperf. (or Pluperf.) Indic. 
Fe Indic. with εἰ with ἄν (or equivalent, 

§§ 566-567) 


( Simple Past tense of Indic. Past tense of Indic. 
with εἰ 
> | General Opt. with εἰ Imperf. Indic. (or equiva- 
a lent) 
ἐπ Contrary to Fact Aorist or Imperf.In- Aorist or Imperf. Indic. 
dic. with εἰ with ἄν (or equivalent, 


§§ 566-567) 


VARIATIONS FROM THE NORMAL FORMS OF 
CONDITIONAL SENTENCES 


612. Besides the combinations given above, other com- 
binations are not infrequent. The most common are: 

1. Protasis Simple (§ 602) or More Vivid (§ 604) with 
Apodosis Less Vivid (§ 005), ---Οαχλδικοίην μὲν av εἰ μὴ 
ἀποδώσω unjustly should I act if I do not restore her E. 
Hel. 1010. οὐδὲ yap ἄν πολλαὶ γέφῦραι ὦσιν, ἔχοιμεν 


CONDITIONS — VARIATIONS FROM NORMAL FORMS 309 


ἂν ὅποι φυγόντες ἡμεῖς σωθῶμεν for not even if there be 
many bridges, should we have anywhere to escape and save 
ourselves Xn. A. 2, 4, 19. 

2. Protasis Less Vivid (§ 605) with Apodosis Simple 
(ὃ 002). -- τοῦτό γέ μοι δοκεῖ καλὸν εἶναι, εἴ τις olds T εἴη 
παιδεύειν ἀνθρώπους this certainly seems to me to be ἃ fine 
thing, uf anybody should be able to educate men Pl. Ap. 19e. 
τί τῷ πλήθει περιγενήσεται εἰ ποιήσαιμεν ἃ ἐκεῖνοι 
προστάττουσιν ; what advantage will result for the people, 
if we should do what they insist on ? Lys. 84, 6. 

Nore.— Potential Optative or Indicative in Protasis. — Rarely a po- 
tential optative or indicative is used in a protasis, retaining, of course, 
its regular force: as εἴ ye μηδὲ δοῦλον ἀκρατῆ δεξαίμεθ᾽ av if we 
would not take even a slave who is intemperate Xu. Mem. 1, 5, 3. 

613. The protasis sometimes depends remotely on an 
idea contained in the apodosis, in which case it is best 
translated “in case that” or “on the chance that”: as ὅρα δὲ 
δὴ τῆς σκέψεως THY ἀρχήν, ἐάν σοι ἱκανῶς λέγηται now 
consider the beginning of our investigation, in case rt be stated 
to your satisfaction Pl. Crit. 48 6. 


614. Implied Conditions. — A condition may be implied 
in a participle (§ 653, 6), adverb, or adverbial phrase, or a 
relative clause (§§ 621; 622): as σὺν ὑμῖν μὲν ἂν οἶμαι 
εἶναι τίμιος. . . ὑμῶν δὲ ἔρημος ὧν οὐκ ἂν ἱκανὸς εἶναι 
οἶμαι οὔτ᾽ ἂν φίλον ὠφελῆσαι οὔτ᾽ ἂν ἐχθρὸν ἀλέξασθαι with 
you (1.6. εἰ σὺν ὑμῖν εἴην if I should be with you) I think I 
should be honored (i.e. εἴην av), but deprived of you (i.e. 
εἰ ὑμῶν ἔρημος εἴην) I think I should not be able (1.6. εἴην 
av) either to help a friend or to defend myself against a 
foe Xn. 1, 8, 6. 


615. Verb not Expressed. — The verb in the protasis or 
apodosis sometimes is not expressed if it can be readily 


910 USES OF THE FINITE MODES 


felt from the context: as εἴ τις καὶ ἄλλος ἀνήρ, καὶ 
Κῦρος ἄξιός ἐστι θαυμάζεσθαι if any other man is worthy to 
be admired, Cyrus, too, is worthy to be admired Xn. Cy. 
5,1, 6. εἰ δή τῳ σοφώτερός του φαίην εἶναι, τούτῳ av if 1 
should say that Iam wiser than anybody in any respect, it 
would (1 should say) be in this respect Pl. Ap. 29 Ὁ. 


616. Irom the regular suppression of the verb of the 
apodosis have arisen the following idiomatic expressions : 

1. εἰ μή if not, i.e. except: as οὐ yap δὴ . . . ὁρῶμεν εἰ 
μὴ ὀλίγους τούτους ἀνθρώπους for we do not see any one 
except (lit. if not) these few men Xn. A. 4, T, 5. 

2. εἰ μὴ διά 9 not on account of, 1.6. except for: as ἀπολέ. 
σαι παρεσκευάζοντο τὴν πόλιν, εἰ μὴ OL ἄνδρας ἀγαθούς they 
were making ready to destroy the State (and they would 
have destroyed it) if it had not been for some good men 
Lys. 12, 60. 

3. εἰ δὲ μή but if not, 1.6. otherwise (a supposition con- 
trary to what immediately precedes): as ἀἄπήτει Ta. . . 
χρήματα" εἰ δὲ μή, πολεμήσειν ἔφη αὐτοῖς he demanded 
restoration of the property ; otherwise (lit. but if they should 
not restore it) he said he should make war on them Xn. 
Hell. 1, 3, 8. So also εἰ δὲ μὴ is used even when the 
preceding clause is negative: as μὴ ποιήσῃς ταῦτα᾽ εἰ δὲ 
μή, . . . αἰτίαν ἕξεις don't do this; otherwise (i.e. if you 
persist in doing it) you will be blamed Xn. A. 7,1, 8. So 
also εἰ δὲ μή is regularly used where ἐὰν δὲ μή (owing to 
a preceding ἐάν) would be more logical. 

4. ὥσπερ Gv εἰ just as would be if, i.e. like as: thus 
ἠσπάζετό TE αὐτὸν ὥσπερ ἂν εἴ τις πάλαι συντεθραμμένος . . . 
ἀσπάζοιτο he greeted him just as one would greet another 
if he should greet him after being long associated with him 


χη ἡ. 1. 9.2: 


CONCESSIVE CLAUSES oir 


CONCESSIVE CLAUSES 


617. Concessive clauses are introduced by εἰ καί (ἐὰν καί) 
if even or καὶ εἰ (καὶ éav, and by crasis ὃ 43 Kav) even if ; 
otherwise they do not differ from conditional clauses : as 
ἱκανοί εἰσι... τοὺς μικροὺς κἂν ἐν δεινοῖς ὦσι, σῴζειν εὐπε- 
Tas they (the gods) are able easily to save lowly men, even 
if (i.e. although) they are in great straits Xn. A. 3, 2, 10. 

Concession may also be implied by the circumstantial 


participle (§ 655, 7). 


RELATIVE (AND TEMPORAL) CLAUSES 


618. Relative clauses are introduced by relative pro- 
nouns (substantive and adjective) and relative adverbs. 

Nore. —tws means both “while,” “so long as,” and “all the while 
till,” i.e. until: as ἕωσπερ ἐμπνέω . . . ov μὴ παύσομαι so long as I live 
and breathe, I shall not stop Pl. Ap. 39 ἃ. μέχρι yap τούτου νομίζω 
χρῆναι κατηγορεῖν, ἕως ἂν θανάτου δόξῃ τῷ φεύγοντι ἄξια εἰργάσθαι for 
so far do I think one should continue his impeachment, until it shall appear 
that acts deserving death have been committed by the defendant Lys. 12, 37. 

1. Negative Relative Clauses. — A relative clause that 
states a fact, if negative, takes the negative οὐ (8 451, 1): 
other relative clauses (of anticipation, purpose, etc.) take 
the negative μή (ὃ 451, 1). 


RELATIVE CLAUSES WITH DEFINITE 
ANTECEDENT 


619. A relative clause whose relative refers to a definite 
antecedent may have any of the constructions of an inde- 
pendent sentence (statement, question, wish, command, 


88. 562-589). 


618 a (note). ὄφρα in Homer (like ἕως in Attic, ὃ 618 note) means 
both while and until. He has also εἰς 6 κε = wntil, 


ole USES OF THE FINITE MODES 


Nore. — Such clauses containing a statement in the indicative may 
imply cause (§ 598) or result (§ 597); if negative, they have ov. 


RELATIVE CLAUSES WITH INDEFINITE 
ANTECEDENT 


620. Relative clauses in which the relative refers to 
an indefinite antecedent take the same modes as the 
protases of conditional sentences (88 602-610). If nega- 
tive, they have always μή (ὃ 431, 1). 


621. A relative clause containing the indicative may 
sometimes imply the protasis of a simple condition (negative 
μή): as ἃ μὴ οἶδα οὐδὲ οἴομαι εἰδέναι what (ever) I don’t 
know I don't even think that I know Pl. Ap. 21 ἃ. οἱ μὴ 
ἔτυχον ἐν ταῖς τάξεσιν ὄντες, εἰς Tas τάξεις ἔθεον those who 
did not happen to be in line ran to their lines Xn. A. 2, 2, 14. 


Nore.— More commonly such clauses are conceived as general in 
nature, and so take the subjunctive or the optative according to § 625. 


622. Rarely a relative clause containing a past tense of 
the indicative is so used as to imply the protasis of a 
condition contrary to fact (δ 606): as καὶ ὁπότερα τούτων 
Ω ΄ ᾽ x x a 5) ΄, ΄ 5 
ἐποίησεν, ovdevos av ἧττον ᾿Αθηναίων πλούσιοι ἦσαν and 
whichever of these he did (1.6. assuming that he had done 
one of them, § 553, 1) they [the children] would have been 
as rich as any one of the Athenians Lys. 32, 23. 


623. A relative clause which merely anticipates a future 
event or a future possibility has the subjunctive with ἄν 
(cf. the future more vivid condition, ὃ 604): thus 6 τι ἂν 


623 a. Often in Homer, and not infrequently in other poets, a relative 
clause of anticipation has the subjunctive alone (without xe or dv); οἵ, § 555, 
note, and §§ 604a; 625 ἃ. 


RELATIVE CLAUSES 313 


δέῃ πείσομαι Twill endure whatever may be necessary Xn. 
A. 1,3,5. τῷ ἀνδρὶ dv ἂν ἕλησθε πείσομαι I will obey 
whatever man you shall elect Xn. A. 1, 3,15. ἐπειδὰν δὲ 
διαπράἄξωμαι ἃ δέομαι, ἥξω as soon as I shall have accom- 
plished my purpose I shall return Xn. A. 2, 3, 29. περι- 
μένετε ἔστ᾽ ἂν ἐγὼ ἔλθω wait till I come Xn. A. 5, 1, 4. 


624. A relative clause which anticipates a more remote 
future possibility has the optative (cf. the future less 
vivid condition, § 605): thus ὀκνοίην μὲν ἂν εἰς τὰ πλοῖα 
ἐμβαίνειν ἃ ἡμῖν δοίη I should hesitate to go on board the 
vessels which he might give us Xn. A. 1, 3, 11. ἀλλ᾽ ὃν 
TONS στήσειε, τοῦδε χρὴ κλύειν but whomsoe'er the State 
might set in station o'er us, him we must obey ὃ. Ant. 666. 


625. Relative clauses which suggest a general or repeated 
possibility have the subjunctive with av when dependent 
on a present (or future) tense, and the optative when 
dependent on a past tense (cf. the general conditions 
§§ 609-610): thus 

Present General. — ἕως μὲν ἂν παρῇ τις, χρῶμαι as long 
as any one is present, I avail myself of his services Xn. A. 
1,4,8. ὅς κε θεοῖς ἐπιπείθηται, μάλα 7 ἔκλυον (ὃ 530) 
αὐτοῦ whosoever obeys the gods, him they most do hear A 
218. 

Past General.— σφοδρὸς [ἣν Χαιρεφῶν] ἐφ᾽ 6 τι ὁρμήσειε 
Chaerephon was very enthusiastic in whatever he undertook P|. 
Ap. 21a. ἐθήρευεν ἀπὸ ἵππου ὁπότε γυμνάσαι βούλοιτο 
ἑαυτὸν τε καὶ τοὺς ἵππους he hunted on horseback whenever 


625 a. Usually in Homer, and not infrequently in other poets, general 
relative clauses (present) have the subjunctive alone (without κε or ἄν). 
Compare ὃ 623 a and §609a: thus τὰ φράζεαι ἅσ σ᾿ ἐθέλῃσθα you consider 
whatsoever you desire A 554, 


314 USES OF THE FINITE MODES 


he wanted to exercise himself and his horses Xn. A. 1, 2, 1. 
περιεμένομεν οὖν ἑκάστοτε ἕως ἀνοιχθείη τὸ δεσμωτήριον" 
᾽ \ ΝΞ / wins . ΚΤ ΤΟ 
ἐπειδὴ δὲ ἀνοιχθείη, εἰσῇμεν so we waited each time 
until the prison should be opened; and when (ever) it was 
opened we went in Pl. Phaed. 59 d. 
ΝΟΤΕ. ---ὅ τι μή and ὅσον μή. ---ὖ τι μή and ὅσον μή are used 
elliptically, like εἰ μή (ὃ 610, 1), in the meaning except: as οὐ παρ- 


ἐγένοντο ὅ τι μή ὀλίγοι they were not present, with the exception of a few 
(lit. what was not the few who were present) Th. 4, 94. 


626. Temporal Clauses with Words Meaning ‘ until.’? — 
Temporal clauses introduced by words meaning “ until” 
are sometimes used so as to imply purpose (cf. ὃ 624 
and § 625 last example). The suggestion of purpose 
makes no difference in the mode of the verb, which is 
regularly the subjunctive with ἄν in connection with 
a primary tense, and the optative in connection with a 
secondary tense (δὲ 624, 625). 

Nore. — Rarely, for the sake of vividness (cf. § 674) the subjunc- 
tive is used in a temporal clause after a secondary tense: as ἕως δ᾽ ἂν 


ταῦτα διαπράξωνται φυλακὴν . .. κατέλιπε he left a garrison until 
they [the people] should carry out these measures Xn. Hell. 5, 3, 25. 


627. wmpiv.— The temporal conjunction πρίν (in origin 
a comparative adverb from the root of πρό before) meaning 
sooner than, before (until) is used with the indicative (619), 


626 a. In Homer ἕως (fos), like ὄφρα (§ 590 a) is sometimes used in a 
purpose clause where it is better translated ‘‘in order that”: as δῶκεν... 
ἔλαιον Hos χυτλώσαιτο [her mother] gave her oil that she might bathe and 
anoint herself ᾧ 80. 

627 a. In Homer πρίν (likewise πάρος before) is used regularly with 
the infinitive after both negative and affirmative sentences. Rarely πρὶν 
ὅτε (πρίν γ᾽ ὅτ᾽ dv), literally before the time when, is found with the indica- 
tive (or subjunctive). Rarely also πρίν is found with the subjunctive 
(without xe or dv), but only after a negative clause. 


THE INFINITIVE ole 


subjunctive (§$ 623; 625), and optative (§ 624) in the 
same way as other relative adverbs of time, but usually 
only after a negative sentence ; after an affirmative sen- 
tence, πρίν is commonly used with the infinitive (ὃ 645): 
thus 

(INDICATIVE) οὔτε τότε... ἰέναι ἤθελε πρὶν ἡ γυνὴ 
αὐτὸν ἔπεισε. απο he was not then willing to go until his 
wife persuaded him Xn. A. 1, 2, 26. 

(SUBJUNCTIVE) δεῖται αὐτοῦ μὴ πρόσθεν καταλῦσαι. .. 
πρὶν ἂν αὐτῷ συμβουλεύσηται he desires him not to come 
to terms before (i.e. until) he shall advise with him Xn. A. 
ied 10. 

(OPTATIVE) ἐδέοντο μὴ ἀπελθεῖν πρὶν ἀπαγάγοι τὸ 
στράτευμα they wanted him not to go away before (i.e. until) 
he should lead back the army Xn. A. 7, T, 57. 

(INFINITIVE) διέβησαν πρὶν τοὺς ἄλλους ἀποκρίνασθαι 
they crossed before the rest replied Xn. A. 1, 4, 16. 

Nore. — The adverbs πρόσθεν or πρότερον are sometimes used in 
the principal clause as forerunners of πρίν (see the second example 


in ὃ 627). Both πρὶν 7 aud πρότερον 7 sooner than are sometimes used 
like πρίν. 


THE INFINITIVE 


628. The infinitive is a verbal substantive (originally 
a dative or a locative case). It retains its verbal char- 
acter, however, in so far that it has voice and tense, is 
modified by adverbs (not by adjectives), and takes its 
object in the same case as a finite verb. 


SUBJECT OF THE INFINITIVE 
629. Subject Accusative. —The subject of the infinitive, 
if expressed, is always in the accusative case (ὃ 342 and 
note). A predicate substantive or adjective belonging to 


316 THE INFINITIVE 


the subject then agrees with it in case: as τοὺς φυγάδας 
ἐκέλευσε σὺν αὐτῷ στρατεύεσθαι he bade the exiles take the 
field with him Xn. A. 1, 2, 2. dv ᾧετο πιστόν οἱ εἶναι 
whom he thought to be faithful to himself Xn. A. 1, 9, 29. 
νομίζω yap ὑμᾶς ἐμοὶ εἶναι καὶ πατρίδα καὶ φίλους καὶ 
συμμάχους for I think you are to me both country, friends, 
and allies Xn. A. 1, 8, 6. 

Nore. — So also predicate words referring to an indefinite subject 
(not expressed) stand in the accusative case: as ἃ ἔξεστιν ἀριθμή- 
σαντας ... εἰδέναι things which it is possible (for people) to know by 
counting Xn. Mem. 1, 1, 9. 


630. Subject not Expressed. — If the subject of the infini- 
tive is expressed or indicated in connection with the word 
(or words) on which the infinitive depends, it is not ex- 
pressed again with the infinitive; as ἔφη ἐθέλειν he said 
he was willing (but in Latin dixit sE velle) Xn. A. 4, 1, 27. 

᾿ νομίζει ὑπ᾽ ἐμοῦ ἠδικῆσθαι he thinks he has been wronged by 
me Xn. A. 1, 3; 10. 
Norte. — Exceptions to the rule of § 630 are comparatively rare, but 


if the subject is again expressed with the infinitive, it of course stands 
in the accusative (8 629). 


631. Agreement of Predicate Words. — When the sub- 
ject of the infinitive is expressed or indicated not with 
the infinitive, but in connection with the word on which 
the infinitive depends (§ 630), a predicate substantive or 
adjective commonly stands in the same case with the sub- 
ject as expressed: thus (NOMINATIVE) Πέρσης μὲν ἔφη 
εἶναι he said that he was a Persian Xn. A. 4, 4,17. τοῦτο 
δ᾽ ἐποίει ἐκ τοῦ χαλεπὸς εἶναι he accomplished this by being 
severe Xn. A. 2, 6, 9. 

(GENITIVE) τῶν φασκόντων δικαστῶν εἶναι of those who 


say that they are judges Pl. Ap. 41 ἃ. Κύρου ἐδέοντο ὡς 


USES OF THE INFINITIVE 317 


προθυμοτάτου πρὸς τὸν πόλεμον γενέσθαι they begged 
Cyrus to become as zealous as possible toward the war Xn. 
Hell Moy 2. 

(DATIVE) ἔδοξε τοῖς στρατηγοῖς βουλεύσασθαι συλλε- 
γεῖσιν it seemed best to the generals to meet together and 
consider Xn. A. 4, 8, 9. 

(ACCUSATIVE) πάντας οὕτω διατιθεὶς ἀπεπέμπετο ὥστε 
αὐτῷ μᾶλλον φίλους εἶναι ἢ βασιλεῖ he sent them all back, 
so disposing them that they were more friendly to himself 
than to the King Xn. A. 1, 1, 5. 

1. Sometimes, however, the influence of the infinitive 
causes a predicate noun referring to a genitive or dative 
(rarely a nominative) to stand in the accusative (cf. § 316): 
as ᾿Αθηναίων ἐδεήθησαν σφίσι βοηθοὺς γενέσθαι they 
wanted the Athenians to come to their assistance Hdt. 6, 100. 


‘Elevia.. . ἥκειν παραγγέλλει Xa βόντα τοὺς ἄλλους he sent 


instructions to Xenias to take the rest of the men, and come 


ne As). 2, 1. 


USES OF THE INFINITIVE 


632. The infinitive has two distinct uses: (1) as a sub- 
stantive (not in indirect discourse), and (2) in indirect 
discourse. 

Norr.— The use of the infinitive (with subject accusative) was 
developed from its substantive use, thus ἀγγέλλω Κῦρον νικᾶν origi- 
nally meant J report Cyrus in regard to being victorious, which amounts 
to saying 7 report that Cyrus is victorious, and (Κῦρον) νικᾶν is felt to 
represent (Κῦρος) vixa, the present indicative (cf. § 342, note). 


633. Negative with the Infinitive. — The infinitive used 
as a substantive has regularly as its negative μή (δ 431, 1); 
the infinitive in indirect discourse retains the negative of 
the direct discourse (usually ov, ὃ 451, 2). 


318 THE INFINITIVE 


634. Personal and Impersonal Construction. — In Greek, 
as in English, both the personal and the impersonal con- 
structions are found with words of saying and the like. 
Thus, the Greeks said both Κῦρος λέγεται ἀναβῆναι Cyrus — 
is said to have gone up, and λέγεται Κῦρον ἀναβῆναι tt is 
said that Cyrus went up, but the tendency was to employ 
the personal construction more freely than in English. 
Hence some of the Greek personal constructions (espe- 
cially with δῆλος evident, δίκαιος just, and the like) have 
to be rendered in English as impersonal: thus δῆλος ἣν 
avimpevos it was evident that he was distressed (lit. he was 


evident) Xn. A. 1, 2, 11. 


THE INFINITIVE AS A SUBSTANTIVE 


635. The use of the infinitive soon extended far beyond 
its original bounds (as a dative or locative case) and it 
was felt that the infinitive could stand in any case (nomi- 
native, genitive, dative, or accusative), but unless it is 
modified by the article (§ 636) it is often impossible to 
say definitely in what case the infinitive stands. 


636. Articular Infinitive. — The infinitive may be modi- 
fied by the neuter of the definite article, τό, τοῦ, τῷ 
(§ 444); when so modified, its substantive character 
appears even more clearly. 


637. Infinitive as Subject. — The infinitive (with or with- 
out the article) may stand as the subject of a verb (or as 
a predicate substantive): as κόσμος καλῶς τοῦτο δρᾶν to 
perform this as it should be done is a credit Th. 1,5. τὸ 
yap τοι θάνατον δεδιέναι... οὐδὲν ἄλλο ἐστὶν ἢ δοκεῖν 


636 a. Homer never uses the article with the infinitive. 


THE INFINITIVE AS A SUBSTANTIVE 319 


σοφὸν εἶναι μὴ ὄντα for to fear death is nothing else than to 
seem to be wise when one is not Pl. Ap. 29 a. 

If the infinitive is the subject of a finite verb, it is of 
course in the nominative case; if it is the subject of an 
infinitive, it is of course in the accusative case. 

1. Infinitive as (Apparent) Subject. — With many im- 
personal verbs and similar expressions, such as δεῖ or χρή 
it is necessary, δοκεῖ it seems best, ἔστι it is possible, ἔξεστι tt 
is allowed, πρέπει or προσήκει wt is fitting, καλόν ἐστι it is a 
fine thing, δίκαιον tt ἐδ right, and the like, the infinitive stands 
in the relation of subject or quasz-subject (cf. ὃ 305, note): 
as ὧδε οὖν χρὴ ποιεῖν thus then we must act Xn. A. 2, 2, 4. 
τί δεῖ αὐτὸν αἰτεῖν ; why must he make demand? Xn. A. 2, 
1,10. ἐξεστιν ὁρᾶν it is possible to see Xn. A. 3, 4, 39. 
ἔδοξεν οὖν αὐτοῖς... προϊέναι so it seemed best to them 
to proceed Xn. A. 2, 1,2. δίκαιον yap ἀπόλλυσθαι τοὺς 
ἐπιορκοῦντας for it is right for perjurers to perish Xn. A. 
2, 5, 41. For the personal construction, instead of the 
impersonal, in examples like the last see § 634. 

Here belongs also the infinitive in indirect discourse 
(§ 646) with passive verbs of saying and thinking, like 
λέγεται, νομίζεται, etc. (cf. § 634). 


638. Infinitive as Object or Cognate Accusative. — The 
infinitive with or without the article is used with great 
frequency as an object ($329) or cognate accusative ($331). 
When used as a cognate accusative it is often called the 
Complementary Infinitive. Examples are: ἤθελον αὐτοῦ 
ἀκούειν they were willing to listen to him Xn. A. 2, 6, 11. 
ov δυνάμενοι καθεύδειν not being able to sleep Xn. A. 3, 1, 8. 
οὐκ εἶχον ἱκανὰς [χιμαίρᾶς εὑρεῖν they had not (the power) 
to find enough [goats] Xn. A. 3, 2, 12. μανθάνουσιν 
ἄρχειν τε καὶ ἄρχεσθαι they learn to govern and to be 


320 THE INFINITIVE 


governed Xn. A. 1, 9, 4. ηὔχοντο αὐτὸν εὐτυχῆσαι they 
prayed for him to have good luck Xn. A. 1, 4,17. τοὺς 
μὲν ὁπλίτας αὐτοῦ ἐκέλευσε μεῖναι he bade the hoplites 
remain on the spot Xn. A. 1. ὃ, 19. οὐκ ἐκώλυε βασιλεὺς 
τὸ Κύρου στράτευμα διαβαίνειν the King did not hinder 
Cyrus’ army from crossing Xn. A. 1, 7, 19. dverrpaEato 
πέντε μὲν στρατηγοὺς ἰέναι he managed to have five generals 
go Xn. A. 2, 5, 30. 

Here belongs also the infinitive in indirect discourse 
after verbs of saying and thinking (δ 669). For the 
infinitive with verbs of promising and the like see ὃ 549, 2. 

(WITH THE ARTICLE) φοβούμενοι ody ἡμᾶς μόνον, ἀλλὰ 
καὶ TO καταπεσεῖν in fear not only of us, but also of fall- 
ig of XMscA ὁ 2. 10. 

(WiTH PREPOSITIONS) πρὸς TO μετρίων δεῖσθαι πεπαι- 
δευμένος trained to having only moderate wants Xn. Mem. 
te als 


639. Infinitive in the Genitive Case. — ‘The infinitive 
(usually with the article) may stand in the genitive case : 
as οἱ δὲ ζῶντες αἴτιοι θανεῖν the living are the cause of his 
death ὃ. Ant. 1178. 

(WITH THE ARTICLE) τοῦ πιεῖν ἐπιθυμία the desire to 
drink Th. 7, 84. ἀμελήσας τοῦ συλλέγειν πλοῖα having 
neglected to collect vessels Xn. A. 5,1, 15. ἄρξαντες τοῦ 
διαβαίνειν taking the lead in crossing Xn. A. 1, 4, 15. 

(WITH A PREPOSITION) ἀντὶ τοῦ τοῖς πλείοσι πείθεσθαι 
instead of obeying the majority Xu. Hell. 2, 8, 34. 

Nore. — For the infinitive with τοῦ expressing purpose (mostly in 
Thucydides) see § 352, 1, note. 


640. Infinitive in the Dative Case. — The infinitive (with 
or without the article) is often found in the dative case : 
as τὸ δὲ ἀσφαλὲς καὶ μένειν... καὶ ἀπελθεῖν ai νῆες 


THE INFINITIVE AS A SUBSTANTIVE A | 


παρέξουσι security both for staying and for going away, our 
ships will provide Th. 6, 18. Here doubtless are to be 
classed the infinitive expressing purpose (see § 592) and 
the infinitive with most adjectives and substantives (see 
§ 641). 

(WITH THE ARTICLE) Μένων ἠγάλλετο τῷ ἐξαπατᾶν 
δύνασθαι Menon rejoiced in being able to deceive Xn. A. 2, 
6, 26. 

(WitH PREPOSITIONS) ἐν yap τῷ κρατεῖν ἐστι καὶ TO 
λαμβάνειν τὰ τῶν ἡττόνων in being victorious is included 
also the right to take the property of the vanquished Xn. 
A. 5, 6, 32. 


641. Infinitive with Adjectives and Substantives. — 
Adjectives (adverbs) and substantives, denoting abzlity, 
fitness, power, sufficiency, and the like, and their opposites, 
may be followed by the infinitive: as δυνατὴν καὶ ὑποζυ- 
γίοις πορεύεσθαι ὁδὸν a road practicable even for pack 
animals to travel Xn. A. 4,1, 24. ὁπόσοι ἱκανοὶ ἦσαν Tas 
ἀκροπόλεις φυλάττειν aS Many as were sufficient to guard 
the citadels Xn. A.1,2,1. δεινὸς λέγειν clever at speak- 
ing Pl. Ap. 17 Ὁ. χαλεπὰ εὑρεῖν hard to find Pl. Rep. 
412b. οἷοί τε ἔσεσθε ἡμῖν συμπρᾶξαι you will be able 
to codperate with us Xn. A. 5, 4, 9. 

ὥρα ἀπιέναι it’s time to go away Pl. Ap. 42a. ἀνάγκη 
ἐστὶ μάχεσθαι it is necessary to fight Xn. A. 4, 6, 10. 
ὄκνος ἣν ἀνίστασθαι there was a disinclination to get up 
Xn. A. 4, 4, 1]. θαῦμα ἰδέσθαι a wonder to behold 
θ 366. 


Nore. — As in English, the active infinitive is commonly used with 
adjectives and substantives, even though the meaning may be passive : 
as ἄξιος θαυμάσαι worth admiring, worthy to be admired Th. 1, 138. Cf. 
in English “a house to let.” 

BABBITT’S GR. GRAM. — 21 


Sp THE INFINITIVE 


642. Adverbial Use of the Infinitive. — The infinitive 
(with or without the article) may be used adverbially, like 
the dative of Respect (§ 390), or the Adverbial Accusa- 
tive (δ 336): as τὸ δὲ Bia πολιτῶν δρᾶν Edw ἀμήχανος 
but as for acting in defiance of the State, I am too weak for 
that ὃ. Ant. 19. os... σχολὴ ἡ ἡμῖν TO κατὰ τοῦτον 
εἶναι that we may have freedom so far as this man is con- 
cerned Xn. A. 1, 6, 9. 

1. With the article τό the adverbial infinitive is most 
frequently found after words denoting hindrance and the 
like (ὃ 645); without the article it is most frequently 
found in certain set phrases (often preceded by ὡς): ὡς 
εἰπεῖν OY ὡς ἔπος εἰπεῖν as one might say, (ws) συνελόντι 
εἰπεῖν (ὃ 382, last example) to speak concisely, (@s) ἐμοὶ 
δοκεῖν as it seems to me, ἑκὼν εἶναι willingly (lit. in respect to 
being willing), ὀλίγου δεῖν or μικροῦ δεῖν almost (lit. in regard 
to lacking little). 

Nore. — The infinitive δεῖν is often omitted from ὀλίγου δεῖν and 
μικροῦ δεῖν, leaving ὀλίγου or μικροῦ alone to mean almost: as ὀλίγου 
ἐμαυτοῦ ἐπελαθόμην I almost forgot who I was Pl. Ap. 17 a. 

643. Construction after Words of Hindering. — Words 
meaning (or suggesting) hinder may be followed by either 
(1) the simple infinitive (§ 638), or (2) the infinitive with 
τοῦ (ὃ 639), or (3) the simple infinitive with μή (δ 434) or 
(4) the infinitive with τοῦ μή (ὃ 454), or (5) the infinitive 
with τὸ μή (ὃ 642, 1 and § 434). Thus, he hinders me from 
speaking may be expressed in Greek by (1) κωλύει pe 
λέγειν, (2) κωλΐὔει με τοῦ λέγειν, (3) κωλύει με μὴ λέγειν, 
(4) Korie με τοῦ μὴ λέγειν, (5) κωλΐὔει με τὸ μὴ λέγειν. 

If the word of hindering is itself modified by a negative 
(see § 435), we may have also (6) οὐ κωλύει με μὴ οὐ λέγειν, 
and (7) οὐ κωλύει we TO μὴ οὐ λέγειν. For other examples 
see §§ 434-5. 


THE INFINITIVE IN INDIRECT DISCOURSE ΞΔ) 


644. Infinitive of Suggestion. — The infinitive may be 
used independently to suggest an action, but without stat- 
ing it asa fact. An infinitive so used may suggest a wish 
(see § 587 note 3), or command (see § 585 note), or it 
may be used as an exclamation (usually with the article): 
as τῆς μωρίας: τὸ Δία νομίζειν Stupidity! to think of 
having a belief in Zeus! Av. Nub. 819. 

Nore.—Some of the so-called independent infinitives, it can be 


seen, were earlier dependent on words like δός grant (that) or ἔδοξε 
it was voted (that) and the like. 


OTHER USES OF THE SUBSTANTIVE INFINITIVE 


645. The infinitive is used with ὥστε (sometimes with 
ws), ἐφ᾽ ᾧ, ἐφ᾽ ᾧτε, to denote result (see 88 595; 596), and 
with πρίν meaning before (see ὃ 627). 

Nore. — The infinitive, with or without ὥστε or ὡς (ὃ 595) is some- 
times used with 7 after a comparative (ὃ 426, note 5): as νόσημα 
μεῖζον ἢ φέρειν a disease too great to bear ὃ. O.T. 1293. ἐλάττω 


ἔχοντα δύναμιν ἢ ὥστε τοὺς φίλους ὠφελεῖν having a force too small 
to (lit. smaller than so as to) help his friends Xn. Hell. 4, 8, 23. 


THE INFINITIVE IN INDIRECT DISCOURSE 


646. When the infinitive is used in indirect discourse, 
each tense represents the same tense (of the indicative 
or optative) of the direct discourse (the present including 
also the imperfect, and the perfect the pluperfect; see 
§§ 551 and 671). If ἄν was used in the direct discourse, 
it is retained in the indirect (§ 439): thus ἔφη ἐθέλειν 
he said he was willing (i.e. ἐθέλω I am willing) Xn. A. 4, 
1,27. ἰᾶσθαι αὐτὸς τὸ τραῦμά φησι he says that he him- 
self treated the wound (i.e. ἰώμην I treated) Xn. A. 1, 8, 26. 
οἰόμεθα av καὶ τῇ ἀρετῇ χρῆσθαι we think we could make 
some use also of our valor (i.e. χρῴμεθα ἄν we could use) 


324 THE PARTICIPLE 


Xn. 4. 2, 1, 12. λέγεται οἰκοδομῆσαι he is said to have 
built (i.e. φκοδόμησε he built) Xn. A. 1, 2,9. For addi- 
tional examples see §§ 551 and 671. 


647. Infinitive with av. — The infinitive with ἄν usually 
represents in indirect discourse a potential optative or 
indicative of the direct discourse (§ 646), but the infinitive 
used as a substantive may sometimes take ἄν -to give it 
a potential meaning (cf. ὃ 436): as παντάπασιν ἀπεστε- 
ρηκέναι. . . μὴ ἂν ἔτι σφᾶς ἀποτειχίσαι to have deprived 
them completely of any possible power of walling them in 


AMoke 1. Ὁ: 
THE PARTICIPLE 


648. The participle is a verbal adjective (§ 159, 1), and 
follows the same principles of agreement as other adjec- 


tives (§§ 420-423). 


649. The uses of the participle may be classed under 
three heads: Attributive, Circumstantial, and Supple- 
mentary, but these uses shade off into one another, and 
the same participle may sometimes be referred to two 
classes. Thus, in μαχόμενοι διετέλεσαν they continued 
fighting, μαχόμενοι is supplementary to διετέλεσαν, but it 
also denotes the circumstances under which they continued. 


A. THE ATTRIBULIVE BAR TICE 


650. The participle is used to modify a substantive 
exactly like any other adjective (§ 419): thus πόλις 
οἰκουμένη an inhabited city, ὁ παρὼν καιρός the present 
occasion, ὁ μὴ δαρεὶς ἄνθρωπος (ὃ 431, 1) the unflogged man. 

1. The substantive which a participle modifies may be 
omitted, and the participle alone then has the value of a 


THE CIRCUMSTANTIAL PARTICIPLE 325 


substantive (cf. ὃ 424): thus of παρόντες the persons 
present, τὸ μέλλον the future (lit. the thing about to be), 
τὸ θαρσοῦν courage (lit. the thing not afraid) Th. 1. 36. 
τῶν ἐργασομένων ἐνόντων since there were in the country 
those who would cultivate it Xn. A. 2, 4, 22. ἔπλει. 
ἐπὶ πολλὰς ναῦς κεκτημένους he sailed against men pos- 
sessed of many ships Xn. Hell. 5, 1, 19. 

Nore 1.—A participle, like any other adjective (§ 424), used sub- 
stantively, may sometimes be modified by a genitive, if its verbal 
force is no longer felt: as βασιλέως προσήκοντ ἔς τινες some relatives 
of the king Th. 1, 128. 

Nore 2.— Greek uses the participle much more freely than Eng- 
lish does, and the attributive participle must often be rendered in 
English by a substantive or a relative clause: as of πεπεισμένοι 
(lit. the persuaded persons) those who have been persuaded or the converts, 
oi ἐνοικοῦντες the inhabitants Xn. A. 1,5, 5. 6 τὴν γνώμην ταύτην 
εἰπών the man who advanced this opinion Th. 8, 68. τὰ δέοντα the 
duties, ete. 


651. Participle as a Predicate Adjective. —The participle, 
like any other adjective, may stand in the predicate with 
a copula (ὃ 307): as οὔτε yap θρασὺς οὔτ᾽ οὖν προδείσας 
εἰμί for I am neither bold nor timorous ὃ. O.T. 90. Many 
other examples are to be seen in the mass of periphrastic 
forms in the perfect system (§§ 226; 227; 221,1; 230; 
536). 


B&B. THE CIRCUMSTANTIAL PARTICIPLE 


652. The participle may serve to define the circum- 
stances under which an action takes place: as πρὸς δὲ 
oe rae n&étou_sending to the king he demanded 
Xn. A. 1,1, 8. συλλέξας στράτευμα ἐπολιόρκει Μέλητον 
collecting an_army he besieged Miletus Xn. A. 1, 1, 1. 
> ese τ γ΄ ἢ A a » ᾿ ἢ 
ἀκούσασι τοῖς στρατηγοῖς ταῦτα ἔδοξε τὸ στράτευμα 


326 THE PARTICIPLE 


συναγαγεῖν when the generals heard this, they decided to 
marshal their forces Xn. A. 4, 4, 19. 


653. In Greek circumstantial participles are many times 
as frequent as in English, and very often they cannot be 
properly translated by a corresponding English participle; 
usually they are best rendered by an English clause or 
phrase expressing time, means, manner, cause, purpose, 
condition, concession, or merely an attendant circumstance, 
as best accords with the Greek context: thus 

1. Time. —akovoas ταῦτα ἔλεξεν when he had heard this, 
he said Xn. A. 1,7, 6. ἔτι παῖς ὧν while still a boy Xn. 
A. 1, 9, 2 (ee also ὃ 655). 

. Means. ---λῃζόμενοι ζῶσι they live by plundering 
xa Cy. 3, 2, 25. 

3. Manner. τ Re ee τεταγμένοι they marched by 
an order Xn. AY 1, 2,16. (Cf. also ὃ 655, 1.) 

4. Cause. rag μήτηρ ὑπῆρχε TO aon φιλοῦσα αὐτὸν 
μᾶλλον ἢ τὸν βασιλεύοντα ᾿Αρταξέρξην Cyrus’ mother took 
his side, because she loved him more than she did the king 
Artaverves Xn. A. 1, 1, 4. ἠξίου ἀδελφὸς ὧν αὐτοῦ he 
demanded on the ground that he was his brother Xn. A. 1, 
1,8. (Cf. also § 655, 1 and § 656, 1.) 

Purpose. — "To express purpose the future participle 
is regularly used, but the present is sometimes found (cf. 
δ. 524): thus πέμψαι δὲ καὶ προκαταλη ψομένους τὰ ἄκρα 
to send men to occupy the heights in advance Xn. A.1,3,44— 
aviotavto of μὲν... λέξοντες ἃ ἐγίγνωσκον, οἱ δὲ... ἐπ ε- 
δεικνύντες οἵα εἴη ἡ ἀπορία some arose to tell what they 
thought, and others (with the purpose of ) pointing out what 
the difficulty was Xn. A. 1, 8,13. (Cf. also 8 656, 3.) 

6. Condition. — οὐδὲ χρήματα μὲν λαμβάνων διαλέγομαι, 
μὴ λαμβάνων δ᾽ ov moreover, I do not converse on condition 


THE CIRCUMSTANTIAL PARTICIPLE ool 


of receiving money, and refrain from conversation Uf I receive 
none Pl. Ap. 33 a. 

Observe that if a participle implying a condition is 
negatived, μή is always used (ὃ 431, 1). 

7. Concession (“ although” ).—pécov τῶν ἑαυτοῦ ἔχων 
τοῦ Κύρου εὐωνύμου ἔξω ἣν although he commanded the 
center of his own forces, he was beyond Cyrus left wing 
Xn. A. 1, 8, 13. οὐδὲν ὑπ’ ἐμοῦ ἀδικούμενος... κακῶς 
ἐποίεις. τὴν ἐμὴν χώραν although you were in nowise wronged 
by me, you did damage to my land Xn. A. 1,6, 7. (CE. 
also § 655, 1 and § 656, 2.) = τὰ 

8. Any Attendant Circumstance. —curr€Eas στράτευμα 
ἐπολιόρκει Μίλητον having collected an army he laid siege 
to Miletus Xn. A.1,1,7. Such participles are often best 
rendered in English by a coordinate verb: as καταπηδήσ ἂς 
ἀπὸ τοῦ ἅρματος Tov θώρακα ἐνέδυ he leapt down from his 
chariot, and put on his breastplate Xn. A. 1, 8, 8. 


Nore 1.—It is important to remember that these relations (of 
time, manner, etc., § 653, 1-8) are not expressed by the participle, 
but only implied by the context. Often the same participle may be 
rendered in English in several different ways. Thus ἐπολέμει ἐκ 
Χερρονήσου ὁρμώμενος (he waged war, using the Chersonese as a base 
of operations Xn. A. 1,1, 9), taken by itself, might be rendered he waged 
war while using the Chersonese, etc. (time, ὃ 653, 1) or he waged war by 
using the Chersonese, etc. (means, ὃ 655, 2) or he waged war, thus using, 
etc. (manner, § 655, 5) or he was enabled to wage war because he used, 
etc. (cause, § 653, 4), or he waged war with the idea of using, ete. 


(purpose, 8 653, 5), or he did wage war, if he used, ete. (condition, 


§ 653, 6), or he waged war although he used, etc. (concession, ὃ 653, 7), 
or he waged war with the Chersonese as a base of operations (attendant 
circumstance, § 653, 8); but in every case that form of English 
translation should be chosen which best suits the Greek context. 
Nore 2. —Some idiomatic uses of the circumstantial participle are 
often best rendered by a different idiom in English. Thus, ἀρχόμενος 
(lit. beginning) is often best rendered at first, in the beginning, τελευτῶν 


328 THE PARTICIPLE 


(lit. ending) finally, ἔχων (lit. holding on) persistently, ἀνύσας (lit. having 
completed) quickly, θαρρῶν boldly, λαθών (lit. escaping notice) secretly, 
χαίρων (lit. rejoicing) with impunity, κλαίων (lit. weeping) to one’s sorrow, 
φθάσας (lit. anticipating) before. (Many of these are to be explained 
as adjectives used with adverbial force, § 425): thus ὅπερ ἀρχόμενος 
ἐγὼ ἔλεγον as I said in the beginning Pl. Ap. 24a. ἄνοιγ᾽ ἀνύσας make 
haste and open Ar. Nub. 181. 

Nore 3.— Participles like ἔχων having, ἄγων leading, φέρων carry- 
ing, χρώμενος using may often be rendered “with”: as ἔχων ὁπλίτας 
χιλίους with a thousand hoplites Xn. A. 1, 2,9. ποίᾳ δυνάμει συμμάχῳ 


χρησάμενοι with what force as allies Xn. A. 2, 5, 13. 

Nore 4.—The phrases τί (6 τι) παθών (lit. having experienced 
what?), and τί (6 τι) μαθών (lit. having learned what?), are best trans- 
lated “what possessed you to...” (πάσχω) or “what put it in your head 


to...” (μανθάνω), or loosely “why in the world”: as τί παθόντε 


λελάσμεθα what has possessed us to forget? A 515. 


ADVERBS WITH THE CIRCUMSTANTIAL PARTICIPLE 


654. The relations of time, manner, cause, etc., often 
implied in the circumstantial participle (δ 653), may be 
made clearer (1) by means of adverbs modifying the prin- 
cipal verb, or (2) they may be definitely stated by means 
of adverbs modifying the participle itself. 


655. Adverbs Modifying the Principal Verb. — The ad- 
verbs εὐθύς straightway, αὐτίκα immediately, ἅμα at the 
same time, τότε (ἐνταῦθα) then, ἤδη already, εἶτα then, 
ἔπειτα thereupon, and a few others, modifying the princi- 
pal verb, often serve to make clearer a temporal relation 
implied in the participle. Cf. § 653, 1. (The first four 
are often more closely connected in sense with the vartici- 
ple than with the principal verb): thus τῷ δεξιῷ κέρᾳ τῶν 
᾿Αθηναίων εὐθὺς ἀποβεβηκότι. . . ἐπέκειντο they attacked 
the right wing of the Athenians as soon as it was disem- 
barked (lit. when the right wing was disembarked, they 
straightway attacked it) Th. 4,43. ἐμάχοντο ἅμα πορευό- 


i ὦ 


THE CIRCUMSTANTIAL PARTICIPLE 3829 


μενοι they fought and marched at the same time Xn. A. 6, 3, 
5. πολλαχοῦ δή με ἐπέσχε λέγοντα μετα ξύ it often checked 
me in the very act of speaking Pl. Ap. 40 ". ἐκελευσεν 
αὐτὸν συνδιαβάντα ἔπειτα οὕτως ἀπαλλάττεσθαι he advised 
him to cross with the rest, and then withdraw Xn. A. T, 1. 4. 
1. In like manner ὅμως nevertheless, οὕτως thus, εἶτα, or 
ἔπειτα, with the principal verb, may help ἃ participle 
implying concession (ὃ 653, 7), οὕτως may help a partici- 
ple implying manner (ὃ 653, 3), and οὕτως or διὰ ταῦτα 
(τοῦτον) may help a participle implying cause (§ 653, 4): 
as ἄπειροι ὄντες αὐτῶν. . . ὅμως ἐτολμήσατε.. . . ἰέναι 
εἰς αὐτούς although you knew nothing about them, yet you 
dared to go against them Xn. A. 3, 2,16. νομίζων ἀμείνους 
καὶ κρείττους πολλῶν βαρβάρων ὑμᾶς εἶναι. διὰ τοῦτο προσ- 
ἔλαβον because I thought you better and braver than many 
barbarians (for this reason) I enlisted you Xn. A. 1, 7, 5. 


656. Adverbs Modifying the Participle. — The following 
adverbs modify the participle itself: 

1. The adverb ἅτε (also οἷον, ofa) inasmuch as (ὃ 441 a) 
gives the participle a causal meaning : thus ὁ δὲ Κῦρος ἅτε 
παῖς ὧν... ἥδετο TH στολῇ and Cyrus, inasmuch as he was 
a child, was pleased with the equipment Xn. Cy. 1, 3, 3. 
ἅτε θεωμένων τῶν ἑταίρων inasmuch as their companions 
were looking on Xn. A. 4, 8, 28. 

2. Καίπερ although (sometimes also καί or καὶ ταῦτα, 
§ 312 note) gives the participle a concessive meaning: thus 


656, 1 a. In Herodotus wore is used with participles meaning inasmuch 
as (like Attic dre): as ὥστε δὲ ταῦτα νομίζων but inasmuch as he believed 
this Hat. 1, δ. 5 

656, 2a. In Homer (and sometimes in tragedy) καί and περ (cf. ὃ 71 
note) are often separated by the participle or other emphatic word: as οἵ 
δὲ καὶ ἀχνύμενοί περ ἐπ᾽ αὐτῷ ἡδὺ γέλασσαν but they, though troubled, 
laughed joyously at him B 270; sometimes περ alone means although: as 
ἀχνύμενοί περ although distressed x 174. 


33 THE PARTICIPLE 

καὶ τότε προσεκύνησαν καίπερ εἰδότες OTL ἐπὶ θάνατον ἄγοιτο 
even then they did homaye to him, although they knew that 
he was being led to death Xn. A. 1, 6, 10. 

3. ‘Os shows that the participle states the reasons of 
somebody else without implicating the speaker or writer. 
(The context sometimes shows that the reason is only 
pretended): thus Ipofevov .. . ἐκέλευσε... παραγενέσθαι, 
ὡς εἰς Πίσιδας βουλόμενος στρατεύεσθαι, ὡς πράγματα 
παρεχόντων τῶν [Πἰσιδῶν τῇ ἑαυτοῦ χώρᾳ he bade Proxenus 
join him, on the (pretended) ground that he wished to 
undertake an expedition against the Pisidians, since the 
Pisidians (as he said) were causing trouble for his territory 
Xn. 4. 1,1,11. ταύτην τὴν χώρᾶν ἐπέτρεψε διαρπάσαι 
τοῖς “Ελλησιν ὡς πολεμίαν οὗσαν this country he turned over 
to the Greeks to plunder since (in his opinion) ¢ was hos- 
tile Xn. A. 1, 2,19. συλλαμβάνει Kopov ὡς ἀποκτενῶν 
he arrested Cyrus with the (avowed) intention of putting 
him to death Xn. A. 1, 1, 3. 


Nore. — ὥσπερ as, just as, with the participle (as elsewhere) merely 
denotes comparison: as κατακείμεθα ὥσπερ ἐξὸν ἡσυχίαν ἄγειν we lie 
inactive as though it were possible to take our ease Xn. A. 3, 1, 14. 
ὥσπερ πάλιν τὸν στόλον Κύρου ποιουμένου as if Cyrus were moving 
backwards on his expedition Xn. A. 1, 3,16. Cf. ὥσπερ ὀργῇ ἐκέλευσε 
he ordered, just as if in anger Xn. A. 1, 5, 8. 


GENITIVE AND ACCUSATIVE ABSOLUTE 


657. Genitive Absolute. — A substantive (noun or pro- 
noun) and modifying participle having no grammatical 


656, 3 a. In Homer ὡς τε, ws εἰ, and ws εἴ τε are used with the parti- 
ciple with much the same meaning as ὥσπερ (or ws) in Attic: thus Κίρκῃ 
ἐπήιξα ws τε κτάμεναι μενεαίνων I sprang upon Circe as if I meant to 
slay her x 322. ὀλοφῦρόμενοι ws εἰ θανατόνδε κίοντα bewailing him as 
though he were going to death Q 527, 


oe 


GENITIVE AND ACCUSATIVE ABSOLUTE Dol: 


connection with the rest of the sentence stand in the 
Genitive Absolute (δ 369): as ἀνέβη ἐπὶ τὰ ὄρη οὐδενὸς 
κωλύοντος he went up on the mountains, no one hindering 
Xn. A. 1, 2, 22. σπεισαμένου Κύρου ἐπίστευε μηδὲν 
ἂν παρὰ τὰς σπονδὰς παθεῖν when Cyrus made a treaty [an 
enemy | was confident that he should experience nothing con- 
trary to vis terms Xn. A. 1, 9, ὃ: 

1. The genitive absolute can seldom be rendered in 
English by a corresponding nominative absolute ; usually 
it must be translated like other circumstantial participles 
(§ 653, 1-8) by some phrase or clause which best accords 
with the Greek context: as ἀνέβη. . . οὐδενὸς κωλύ- 
οντος he went up, since no one hindered, or without opposi- 
tion Xn. A. 1, 2,22. κακῶς yap TOV ἡμετέρων ἐχόντων, 
πάντες οὗτοι. . . βάρβαροι πολεμιώτεροι ἡμῖν ἔσονται 
for ὁ our mutual relations are unpleasant, all these barba- 
rians will be more hostile tous Xn. A. 1,5, 16. οὐδὲ μὴν 
βοηθῆσαι, πολλῶν ὄντων πέραν, οὐδεὶς αὐτοῖς δυνήσεται 
λελυμένης τῆς γεφύρας moreover, though there be many 
on the opposite bank, not a single soul will be able to come to 
their aid vf the bridge is destroyed Xn. A. 2, 4, 20. 

Nore 1.— Substantive not Expressed.— The substantive in the 
genitive absolute sometimes is not expressed when it can be easily 
supplied from the context (cf. § 505): as ἐντεῦθεν προϊόντων edar 
veto ἴχνη ἵππων as they (i.e. the Greeks) were proceeding from that place, 
there appeared the tracks of horses Xn. A.1,6,1. οὕτω δ᾽ ἐχόντων since 
(the above-mentioned) things are so Xn. A. 3, 2,10. ὕοντος while it 
was raining (cf. § 305) Xn. Hell. 1, 1, 16. 

Nore 2.— The genitive absolute is sometimes employed when its 
use is not strictly logical: as ἐκ δὲ τούτου θᾶττον προϊόντων . -. 
δρόμος ἐγένετο τοῖς στρατιώταις thereupon, as the soldiers advanced 
faster and faster, they fell to running Xn. A.1,2,17. διαβεβηκότος 
non Uepixréovs - . . ἠγγέλθη αὐτῷ . .. when Pericles had already 
crossed over, the news was brought to him Th. 1, 114 (cf. also § 661, 
note 4). 


332 THE PARTICIPLE 


658. Accusative Absolute. — The participle of an imper- 
sonal verb having no grammatical connection with the 
main construction of the sentence stands in the Accusa- 
tive Absolute (§ 348): as ἀλλὰ τί δὴ, ὑμᾶς ἐξὸν ἀπολέσαι, 
οὐκ ἐπὶ τοῦτο ἤλθομεν but why, when it was in our power to 
destroy you, did we not proceed to do so? Xn. A. 2, 5, 22. 
οἵτινές σε οὐχὶ ἐσώσαμεν οὐδὲ σὺ σαυτὸν, οἷόν τε ὃν καὶ 
δυνατὸν for we did not save you, nor did you save yourself, 
although it was possible and practicable Pl. Crit. 46 a. 
δῆλον yap ὅτι οἶσθα, μέλον γέ σοι for of course you know, 
since it is a matter of interest to you Pl. Ap. 24 ἃ. 

Nore. — After ὡς or ὥσπερ (8 656, 3, and note) the accusative 
absolute is sometimes found where we should expect the genitive: thus 
τοὺς υἱεῖς οἱ πατέρες... ἀπὸ TOV πονηρῶν ἀνθρώπων εἴργουσιν, ὡς THY 
μὲν τῶν χρηστῶν ὁμιλίαν ἄσκησιν οὖσαν τῆς ἀρετῆς fathers keep their 
sons away from base men with the idea that association with the good is a 
training in virtue Xn. Mem. 1, 2,20. Rarely without a preceding ὡς or 
ὥσπερ: as δόξαντα δὲ ταῦτα but when this had been decided on Xn. 
Hell. 3, 2, 19. 


CO. THE SUPPLEMENTARY PARTICIPLE 


659. The circumstantial participle sometimes forms an 
essential part of the predicate, which, without it, would 
hardly be complete. A participle so used is called Sup- 
plementary. Verbs whose meaning is of a general nature 
may take a supplementary participle to define a particular 
thing to which their action relates. 

The supplementary participle may belong either to the 
subject or the object, —as shown by its agreement (§ 648). 


I. THE SUPPLEMENTARY PARTICIPLE NOT IN INDIRECT 
DISCOURSE 


660. The supplementary participle may be used with 
words meaning begin, continue, endure, cease, happen, escape 


THE SUPPLEMENTARY PARTICIPLE 333 


notice, anticipate, and the like: ἄρχεται ἀπολείπουσα tt 
[the soul] begins to leave Xn. Cy. 8, T, 26. μαχόμενοι 
διετέλεσαν they continued fighting (i.e. “fought continu- 
ously”) Xn. A. 4, 3,2. οὔποτε ἐπαυόμην ἡμᾶς μὲν οἰκτίρων 


I never ceased pitying ourselves Xn. A. ὃ. 1, 19. 


Nore. — With some verbs, especially τυγχάνω (poetic κυρῶ) happen, 
λανθάνω escape notice, φθάνω anticipate, the supplementary participle 
is often best rendered in English by a finite verb, while the finite 
Greek verb is translated as an adverbial modifier: thus παρὼν érvy- 
χανε he was by chance present, or he happened to be present Xn. A. 1, 1, 2. 
τρεφόμενον ἐλάνθανεν αὐτῷ τὸ στράτευμα the army was secretly sup- 
ported for him (lit. escaped notice being supported) Xn. A. 1, 1, 9. 
φθάνουσιν ἐπὶ TO ἄκρῳ γενόμενοι τοὺς πολεμίους they reached the height 
before the enemy (lit. they anticipated the enemy in reaching the height) 
Xn. A. 3,4,49. So likewise δῆλος ἣν ἀντώμενος he was evidently dis- 
turbed Xn. A. 1, 2, 11 (8 634). 


1. Verbs expressing emotion (vexation, anger, trouble, 
shame, joy, displeasure, or disgust, and the like) may be 
supplemented by a participle implying the cause (§ 653, 4): 
thus ἥδομαι... ἀκούων σου φρονίμους λόγους 7 am pleased 
at hearing sensible remarks from you Xn. A. 2, 5, 16. 
ἐλεγχόμενοι ἤχθοντο they were vexed at being exposed Xn. 
Mem. 1, 2,47. οὔτε viv μοι μεταμέλει οὕτως ἀπολογησα- 
μένῳ and I do not now repent of having made (i.e. * because 
I made”) such a defense Pl. Ap. 38 e. καὶ τοῦτο μὲν οὐκ 
αἰσχὔνομαι λέγων and I am not ashamed to say this Xn. 
Cid, 1.21: 


ΝΟΤΕ. -- With some of the verbs which take the supplementary 
participle the infinitive may also be used, but commonly with a dif- 
ference of meaning (cf. § 661 note 3),— the participle implying that 
the action takes place, while the infinitive implies that it has not yet 
taken place (and perhaps never will occur): thus αἰσχύνομαι (or 
αἰδοῦμαι) λέγων I am ashamed to say (what I am saying), αἰσχύνομαι 
λέγειν I am ashamed to say (and so shall not say). 


994 THE PARTICIPLE 


Il. Tue PARTICIPLE IN INDIRECT DISCOURSE 


661. When the participle is used in indirect discourse 
(after words meaning know, perceive, hear, remember, for- 
get, appear, announce, etc., § 669, 3) each tense represents 
the same tense of the indicative or optative of the direct 
discourse (§ 551), the present representing also the imper- 
fect indicative, and the perfect the pluperfect indicative. 
If ἄν was used in the direct discourse, it is retained also 
in the indirect (§ 439). 

(The participle may belong either to the subject or 
object, —as shown by its agreement, ὃ 648): thus οὐ yap 
ἤδεσαν αὐτὸν τεθνηκότα for they did not know that he was 
dead (i.e. τέθνηκεν) Xn. A. 1, 10, 16. ἤκουσε Κῦρον ἐν 
Κιλικίᾳ ὄντα he heard that Cyrus was in Cilicia (1.6. ἐστι) 


Xn. A. 1, 4. δ. ἴσθι μέντοι ἀνόητος ὧν know, however, that 
you are a fool (i.e. ἀνόητος et) Xn. 4. 2, 1.18. αὐτῷ Κῦρον 
ἐπιστρατεύοντα πρῶτος ἤγγειλα I was the first to announce 
to him that Cyrus was marching against him (1.6. ἐπιστρα- 
reve.) Xn. A. 2, 3,19. ἐπιβουλεύων ἡμῖν φανερός ἐστιν 
he is plainly plotting against us (i.e. ἐπιβουλεύει, cf. § 634) 
Xn. A. 3, 2, 20. εὑρίσκω δὲ ὧδε ἄν γινόμενα ταῦτα εἰ 
λάβοις τὴν ἐμὴν σκευήν I find that this would thus come to 
pass if you should take my garments (i.e. γίνοιτο av) Hat. 
7,15. (Other examples in § 551 and § 671.) 

Note 1.— The participle in indirect discourse is plainly, in origin, 
a circumstantial participle. Thus such a sentence as ἔγνων γάρ μιν 

. οἰωνὸν ἐόντα for I knew him being, as he was, a bird of omen 0532 
(in which μὲν is the object of ἔγνων, and ἐόντα a circumstantial parti- 
ciple agreeing with μὲν). soon came to be felt to mean “I knew the 
fact of his being (i.e. that he was) a bird of omen.” With this meaning 
established it is but a slight step to such expressions as ἡμεῖς ἀδύνατοι 
ὁρῶμεν ὄντες we see that we are unable (“being unable, we see that 
fact”), where the participle may truly be said to represent ἐσμέν. 


THE PARTICIPLE IN INDIRECT DISCOURSE 335 


Hence it cannot always be determined with certainty whether a 
participle is, or is not, in indirect discourse, but the context will 
usually decide. With some verbs (ἀκούω hear, πυνθάνομαι, perceive) 
the participle in indirect discourse is regularly in the accusative, while 
the ordinary participle with these verbs stands in the genitive: as ὡς 
ἐπύθοντο τῆς Πύλου κατειλημμένης when they heard of the capture of 
Pylus Th. 4,6. ὅτι πύθοιτο... τὸ Πλημμῦριον . . . ἑαλωκός that 
he had heard that Plemmyrium had been captured 'Th. 7, 31. 

Nore 2.— Construction with σύνοιδα. -- - When σύνοιδα or συγγι- 
γνώσκω be conscious is used with a reflexive pronoun the participle may 
be either nominative, agreeing with the subject, or dative, agreeing 
with the reflexive pronoun: as ἐγὼ yap δὴ οὔτε μέγα οὔτε σμικρὸν 
ξύνοιδα ἐμαυτῷ σοφὸς ὧν for I am not conscious to myself of being wise 
in either great or small degree Pl. Ap. 21 b. ἐμαυτῷ yap Evvydy οὐδὲν 
ἐπισταμένῳ for I was conscious to myself of possessing no knowledge 
Pl. Ap. 22 d. 

Nore 5, — Infinitive instead of Participle.— Some of the verbs which 
regularly have the participle in indirect discourse (§ 661) are used also 
with the infinitive with little, if any, difference of meaning (cf. § 660, 1 
note): as ἀκούω δὲ καὶ ἄλλα ἔθνη πολλὰ τοιαῦτα εἶναι 1 hear that there 
are also many other such nations Xn. A. 3, ὅ, 15. φαίνομαι appear with 
the participle usually means to appear to be (what one is), and with 
the infinitive to appear to be (what one perhaps is not): as evvoos 
ἐφαίνετο ἐών he was plainly well-disposed Hat. 7,173. κλαίειν ἐφαίνετο 
he appeared to be weeping (but really was not) Xn. Sym. 1, 15. 

(But when with these verbs an object infinitive (δ 658) is used, the 
meaning is of course different (cf. § 660, 1, note) as μάθον ἔμμεναι 
ἐσθλός 1 have learned to be brave Z 414. μεμνήσθω ἀνὴρ ἀγαθὸς εἶναι 
let him remember to be a brave man Xn. A. 3, 2, 39.) 

Nore 4.— ὡς with the Participle in Indirect Discourse. — With the 
participle in indirect discourse ὡς as may be used with the same mean- 
ing as with any circumstantial participle (§ 656, 3), but it is often hard 
to render in English: thus δῆλος ἣν Κῦρος ὡς σπεύδων Cyrus made 
it evident that he was in haste Xn. A. 1,5, 9 (but δῆλος ἦν σπεύδων 
was evidently in haste). So the genitive absolute with ws is sometimes 
used as a practical equivalent of the participle in indirect discourse 
(sometimes even with verbs which could not take such a participle, 
οἵ, § 657, note 2): as ὡς πολέμου ὄντος παρ᾽ ὑμῶν ἀπαγγελῶ; shall I 
report from you (on the assumption) that there is war? Xn. A. 2, 1, 21. 


990 THE VERBAL ADJECTIVES 


ε > A > 9. 7 a AY ok a 2 ς ,ὔ Ν᾽ 

ὡς ἐμοῦ οὖν ἰόντος ὅπῃ ἂν καὶ ὑμεῖς, οὕτω τὴν γνώμην ἔχετε (ὁπ the 
assumption) that I am going wherever you go you can make up your minds 
(i.e “be sure that I am going wherever you go”) Xn. A. 1, 3, 6. 


662. “Av with the Participle. —'The adverb ἄν may be 
used with the participle, not in indirect discourse, to give 
it a potential meaning (cf. ὃ 436): thus εἰς δὲ τὸ πόλισμα 
ἄν γενόμενον οὐκ ἐβούλοντο στρατοπεδεύεσθαι but the 
soldiers were unwilling to encamp on ground which might 
be made a city (1.6. ὃ av γένοιτο ὃ 563) Xn. A. 6, 4, 1. 
ῥᾷδίως ἂν ἀφεθεὶς. . . προείλετο μᾶλλον τοῖς νόμοις 
ἐμμένων ἀποθανεῖν although he might easily have been ac- 
quitted, he preferred to abide by the laws and be put to death 
G.e. ἀφέθη ἄν, ὃ 565) Xn. Mem. 4, 4,4. αἰτεῖ αὐτὸν εἰς 
δισχιλίους ξένους... ὡς οὕτω περιγενόμενος ἂν TOV 
ἀντιστασιωτῶν he asked him for two thousand mercenaries 
on the ground that he could thus get the better of his oppo- 
nents Xn. A. 1, 1, 10. 


THE VERBAL ADJECTIVES 
THE VERBAL IN -τέος 


663. The verbal adjective in -τέος, -réa, -réov (ὃ 235), 
is passive in meaning, and expresses necessity (like the 
Latin gerundive). It is used with a copula, εἰμί (§ 307), 
in either a personal or an impersonal construction. 


Nore. — The copula (ἐστί, εἰσί) is often omitted (§ 308). 


664. Personal Construction. — In the personal construc- 
tion the verbal agrees with the subject in gender, number, 
and case: as ποταμὸς δ᾽ εἰ μέν τις Kal ἄλλος ἄρα ἡμῖν ἐστι 
δια βατέος οὐκ οἶδα whether we must cross any other river I 


THE VERBAL ΙΝ -tos 337 


do not know Xn. A. 2,4,6. ὠφελητέα σοι ἡ πόλις ἐστίν 
the State must be aided by you Xn. Mem. 3, 6, 3. 


665. Impersonal Construction. — In the impersonal con- 
struction (which is the more common) the verbal stands 
in the nominative neuter (usually singular, but sometimes 
plural), and takes an object (or cognate accusative) in the 
same case which would follow any other form of the same 
verb: thus τὴν πόλιν ὠφελητέον the State must be aided 
Xn. Mem. 2,1, 28. τῶν βοσκημάτων ἐπιμελητέον the 
flocks and herds must be taken care of Xn. Mem. 2, 1, 28. 
πορευτέον δ᾽ ἡμῖν τοὺς πρώτους σταθμοὺς ws ἂν δυνώμεθα 
μακροτάτους we must make the first days’ marches as long as 
we can Xn. A. 2, 2, 12. ovs οὐ παραδοτέα τοῖς ᾿Αθηναίοις 
ἐστίν who must not be surrendered to the Athenians Th. 1, 86. 


Nore. — Observe that verbals of intransitive verbs can be used in 
the impersonal construction only. 


666. Agent with Verbals in -téos. — The agent (1.6. the 
person on whom the necessity rests) with verbals in -τέος 
stands regularly in the dative case (ὃ 380). 

Nore.— The accusative of the agent is sometimes found with the 
impersonal construction ($665). It seems to denote rather the person 
to whom the necessity extends rather than on whom it rests: as οὐδενὶ 
τρόπῳ φαμὲν ἑκόντας ἀδικητεόν εἶναι; do we say that it in no way 
devolves on us to do wrong willingly? Pl. Crit. 49 a. 


THE VERBAL IN -τός 

667. The verbal adjective in -τός, -τή, -τόν (ὃ 235, 2), 
denotes both what has been done and (more often) what 
may be done: as dp οὖν βιωτὸν ἡμῖν ἐστι; is life endurable 
gorus? Pl. Crit. 47 e. 

Many verbals in -τός have acquired an independent 
existence as adjectives, as θαυμαστός (admired, admirable) 
wonderful. 


BABBITT’S GR. GRAM. —22 


338 INDIRECT DISCOURSE 


INDIRECT DISCOURSE 
(Oratio Obliqua) 


668. A direct quotation repeats the exact words of the 
speaker: as Καὶ ταῦτ᾽, ἔφη. ποιήσω “ This, too, I will do,” 
said he; τί ποιήσωμεν, λέγετε “* What shall we do?” you say. 

An indirect quotation adapts the words of the speaker to 
the construction of the sentence in which they stand: as 
ἔφη καὶ ταῦτα ποιήσειν he said that he would do this also, 
ἠρωτήσατε ὅ τι ποιήσαιτε you asked what you should do. 


669. Indirect discourse is introduced by some word or 
expression meaning say, know, think, perceive, and the like 
(verba sentiendi et declarand:). 

1. Of the three common verbs meaning say, when used 
to introduce indirect discourse 

φημί is followed by the infinitive, 

εἶπον is followed by ὅτε or ws with a finite verb, 

λέγω admits either construction, but in the active voice 

it is more often followed by ὅτε or ὡς and a finite 
verb. 

Note. — When εἶπον is used with the infinitive it regularly means 
command, order, advise: thus etre... στρατηγοὺς μὲν ἑλέσθαι ἄλλους 
he advised them to choose other generals Xn. A. 1, 3, 14. 

2. Most verbs meaning think or believe (νομίζω, οἴομαι, 
ἡγοῦμαι, δοκῶ seem, and the like) are followed by the 
infinitive. 

5. Most verbs meaning know, perceive, hear (οἶδα, aic@a- 
vomal, ἀκούω, also ἀγγέλλω announce, δῆλος εἰμι be evident, 


669, 1 a. Homer sometimes uses simple 6 (Attic ὅτι) meaning that. 
b. In poetry οὕνεκα and ὁθούνεκα (lit. wherefore) are sometimes used 
to mean that. 


INDIRECT DISCOURSE—GENERAL PRINCIPLES 339 


and the like) are more frequently followed by the parti- 
ciple (ὃ 661), but any of them may take ὅτε or ws with a 
finite mode, and some of them may take the infinitive 
(§ 646) with little, if any, difference of meaning (cf. 
roughly in English “1 know of its being good,” “1 know 
that itis good,” “1 know it to be good”’). 

For the future infinitive after verbs of promising, hoping, 
and the like, see § 549, 2. 


GENERAL PRINCIPLES OF INDIRECT 
DISCOURSE 


670. In changing from direct to indirect discourse, the 
MODE may be changed, but not the TENSE. 

1. Verbs may be changed to the optative only after a 
secondary tense (§ 517). Only a principal verb of the 
direct discourse may be changed to the infinitive or parti- 
ciple (§ 671). 

2. If the adverb av (§§ 456-459) was used in the direct 
discourse, it is retained also in the indirect, except when 
a dependent subjunctive with ἄν is changed to the opta- 
tive after a secondary tense (§ 439). 

3. Thesame negative (οὐ or μήν which stood in the direct 
discourse is retained in the indirect (§ 451, 2). 


PRINCIPLES OF INDIRECT DISCOURSE (IN 
DETAIL) 
THE INFINITIVE AND PARTICIPLE 
671. After a word which takes the infinitive or participle 
(§ 669, 2-5) the principal verb in indirect discourse is 


changed to the infinitive or participle of the same tense, the 
present including also the imperfect, and the perfect the 


340 INDIRECT DISCOURSE 


pluperfect (see § 551). If av was used in the direct dis- 
course, it is retained also in the indirect: thus ἀπιέναι 
φησίν he says he is going away (1.6. ἄπειμι Tam going away) 
Xn. A. 2, 2,1. ἔφη βούλεσθαι ἐλθεῖν he said that he 
wanted to go (i.e. βούλομαι ἐλθεῖν 7 want to go Xn. A. 1, 
3,20. οὐ μεμνήσεσθαί σέ φασιν they say you will not 
remember (1.6. οὐ μεμνήσῃ you will not remember) Xn. A. 
1,7, 5. od yap ἤδεσαν αὐτὸν τεθνηκότα for they did not 
know that he was dead (1.6. τέθνηκεν he is dead) Xn. A. 
1, 10,16. σὺν ὑμῖν μὲν ἂν οἶμαι εἶναι τίμιος in your com- 
pany I think I should be honored (i.e. εἴην ἄν I should be) 
Xn. A. 1. 3,6. ὁρῶ δὲ καὶ σοὶ τούτων δεήσον and TI see 
that you, too, will have need of these (i.e. δεήσει there will 
be need) Xn. Mem. 2, 6, 29. 

Nore. — Sometimes a relative or temporal clause is felt to be of 
equal importance with the principal clause, and so has the infinitive 
where we might expect a finite mode: as .. . ὅτι πολλοὺς φαίη ᾿Αριαῖος 
εἶναι Uépoas ἑαυτοῦ βελτίους, ovs οὐκ ἂν ἀνασχέσθαι αὐτοῦ Bact 
λεύοντος that Ariaeus said there were many Persians better than himself, 
who would not endure his being king Xn. A. 2, 2, 1. 


672. After a primary tense (§ 517) all verbs of indi- 
rect discourse, unless changed to the infinitive or partici- 
ple (according to ὃ 671), are retained (with change of 
person, if necessary) in the mode and tense of the direct 
discourse: thus λέγει δ᾽ ὡς ὑβριστής εἰμι he says that I am 
an insolent person (1.6. ὑβριστὴς εἶ you are an insolent per- 
son) Lys. 24,15. οὐκ οἶδα 6 τι ἄν TIS χρήσαιτο αὐτοῖς 
I don't know what use anybody could make of then (1.6. τί 
av τις χρήσαιτο what use could anybody make?) Xn. A. 
3,1, 40. Bovrevoual ye ὅπως ce ἀποδρῶ Tam planning 
how I can run away from you (i.e. πῶς ce ἀποδρῶ; how 
shall Trun away, deliberative subjunctive, ὃ 577) Xn. Cy. 
1, 4, 18. 


INDIRECT DISCOURSE —OPTATIVE 341 


OPTATIVE 


673. After a secondary tense (§ 517) any indicative not 
changed to the infinitive or participle (ὃ 671), or any sub- 
junctive of the direct discourse, may be changed to opta- 
tive of the same tense, unless the change would cause 
ambiguity : thus (OPTATIVE FOR THE INDICATIVE) ἀπήγ- 
yerrev ὅτι σπένδοιτο he announced that he made a truce 
G.e. σπένδομαι I make a truce) Xn. A. 2, 3,9. τοῖς δὲ 
ὑποψία μὲν ἣν ὅτι ἄγοι πρὸς βασιλέα the others had a suspi- 
cion that he was leading them against the King (i.e. ἄγ εἰ ἐξ 
leading) Xn. A. 1, 3,21. ἔλεγεν ὅτι ἡ ὁδὸς ἔσοιτο πρὸς 
βασιλέα μέγαν he said that the advance would be against 
the great King (4.6. ἔσται will be) Xn. A. 1,4, 11. εἶπεν 
ὅτι Δέξιππον μὲν οὐκ ἐπαινοίη εἰ ταῦτα πεποιηκὼς εἴη 
he said that he did not approve Dexippus tf he had done this 
(i.e. οὐκ ἐπαινῶ, εἰ πεποίηκε I do not approve if he has 
done this) Xn. A. 6, 6, 25. 

OPTATIVE FOR A DEPENDENT SUBJUNCTIVE (ἄν dis- 
appearing, ὃ 670, 2) ἡγεῖτο yap ἅπαν ποιήσειν αὐτὸν, εἴ τις 
ἀργύριον διδοίη for he thought that [ Theognis| would do 
anything, if anybody offered him money (i.e. ἐάν τις διδῷ tf 
anybody offers) Lys. 12,14. ὥὦμοσεν ᾿Αγεσιλάῳ εἰ σπεί- 
σαιτο ἕως ἔλθοιεν ods πέμψειε πρὸς βασιλέα ἀγγέλους. 
διαπράξεσθαι, κιτ.λ. he swore to Agesilaus that if he would 
make a truce until the messengers that he should send to the 
King should arrive, he would bring it about, etc. (i.e. ἐὰν 
σπείσῃ ἕως ἂν ἔλθωσιν ods ἂν πέμψω if you will make 
α truce until the messengers that I send arrive) Xn. Ages. 
ial 


673 a. In Homer the use of the optative in indirect discourse is 
practically unknown, except sometimes in indirect questions. See 
§ 676 ἃ. 


342 INDIRECT DISCOURSE 


Indirect Questions. — OPTATIVE FOR THE INDICATIVE. 
-- ἤρετο. . . εἴ τις ἐμοῦ εἴη σοφώτερος he asked whether there 
was anybody wiser than I (i.e. ἔστι τις is there anybody 3) 
Pl. Ap. 21 ἃ. ἠρώτησεν εἰ ἤδη ἀποκεκριμένοι εἶεν he 
asked if they had already given their answer (i.e. ἀποκέ- 
κρισθε have you given your answer?) Xn. A. 2, 1, 15. 

OPTATIVE FOR THE (DELIBERATIV E) SUBJUNCTIVE. — 
ἐβουλεύετο. . . εἰ πέμποιέν τινας ἢ πάντες ἴοιεν he de- 
liberated whether they should send some, or whether all should 
go (i.e. πότερον πέμπωμεν. .. ἢ ἴωμεν had we better 
send or go?) Xn. A. 1, 10, 5. 


674. The change to the optative mode after a secondary 
tense (8 673) is never obligatory, and, for the sake of 
vividness, an indirect quotation of this sort can always 
be expressed in the mode employed by the original speaker. 
Not infrequently both forms of quotation are found in 
the same sentence : as οὗτοι ἔλεγον ὅτι Kopos μὲν τέθνηκεν, 
᾿Αριαῖος δὲ πεφευγὼς ἐν τῷ σταθμῷ εἴη these said that Cyrus 
was dead, and that Ariaeus had fled, and was at the halting 
place Xan. =A. 2 1.9: 


675. In order to avoid ambiguity (ὃ 673), the follow- 
ing forms of expression are not changed to the optative 
after a secondary tense : 

1. The imperfect and pluperfect indicative are seldom 
changed to the optative in indirect discourse, since if they 
were changed to the present and perfect optative respec- 
tively, it could not be told that they did not represent 
the present or perfect indicative or subjunctive of the 
direct discourse: thus εἶχε yap λέγειν Kal ὅτι μόνοι τῶν 
Ἑλλήνων βασιλεῖ συνεμάχοντο ἐν Ἰ]λαταιαῖς, καὶ ὅτι 
ὕστερον οὐδεπώποτε στρατεύσαιντο ἐπὶ βασιλέα for he was 
able to say that they alone of the Greeks had fought on the 


INDIRECT DISCOURSE — OPTATIVE aie 


side of the King at Plataeae, and that never since then had 
they made a hostile move against him (observe that the 
imperfect, συνεμάχοντο for συνεμαχόμεθα of the direct 
discourse, remains unchanged, while the aorist, στρατεύ- 
σαιντο for ἐστρατευσάμεθα, is changed to the optative) 


nin Hele te seco: 


Nore. — Rarely, when no possible ambiguity could arise, an imper- 
fect indicative is changed to the present optative (δ 673): as ἔλεγον 
ὅτι κατίδοιεν στράτευμα, καὶ νύκτωρ πολλὰ πυρὰ φαίνοιτο they said that 
they had caught sight of an army, and that at night many watchfires had 
been visible (i.e. κατείδομεν we caught sight of, aorist, aud ἐφαίνετο were 
visible, imperfect) Xn. A. 4, 4,9. Still more rare is the use of the 
perfect optative to represent the pluperfect indicative. 


2. The potential indicative with ἄν (ὃ 565) cannot 
be changed to the optative in indirect discourse, since then 
it could not be distinguished from the potential optative 
(ὃ 563) : as ἀπελογοῦντο ὡς οὐκ ἄν ποτε οὕτω μῶροι ἦσαν 
... εἰ ἤδεσαν they said in their defense that they should 
never have been so foolish if they had known (i.e. οὐκ ἂν 
ἣ μεν, εἰ no μεν we Should not have been, if we had known, 
§ 606; whereas οὐκ ἂν εἶεν, εἰ εἰδεῖεν would represent οὐκ 
av εἶμεν, εἰ εἰδεῖμεν we should not be, if we should know, 
§ 605) Xn. Hell. 5, 4, 22. 

3. The aorist indicative in a subordinate clause is not 
changed in indirect discourse, since if it were changed 
to the aorist optative, the optative might be thought to 
represent an aorist subjunctive of the direct discourse : 
thus ἔλεγον ws ὁ Ἐενοφῶν οἴχοιτο ὡς LevOnv ... a 
ὑπέσχετο αὐτῷ ληψόμενος they said that Xenophon had 
gone to Seuthes to receive what he had promised him (the 
optative ὑπόσχοιτο would mean what he might promise him, 
representing ἃ av ὑπόσχηται (ὃ 673) of the direct dis- 


course) κα. Ἢ 11 00. 


944 INDIRECT DISCOURSE 


676. Inserted Statements of Fact. — Statements or expla- 
nations of fact in the indicative mode may be inserted by 
the writer, even though the rest of the sentence stands in 
indirect discourse: as ἐκέλευσε σὺν αὐτῷ στρατεύεσθαι, ὑπο- 
σχόμενος αὐτοῖς, εἰ καλῶς καταἀπράξειεν ἐφ᾽ ἃ ἐστρατεύετο, 
μὴ πρόσθεν παύσεσθαι πρὶν, κτὰ. he bade them join his 
expedition, promising them that if he should successfully 
accomplish the object for which (as 1 say) he was making the 
expedition, not to stop until, etc. Xn. A. 1, 2,2. ἐν πολλῇ 
δὴ ἀπορίᾳ ἦσαν οἱ “EXXnves, ἐννοούμενοι μὲν OTL ἐπὶ ταῖς 
βασιλέως θύραις ἧσαν the Greeks were naturally in great 
perplexity, reflecting on the fact that they were (as I say) at 
the King’s gates Xn. A. 3, 1, 2. 


677. Implied Indirect Discourse. —In Greek (as in 
Latin) a clause expressing the thought of another person 
may take the construction of indirect discourse (i.e. the 
optative after a secondary tense) although not formally 
introduced by any words of saying, thinking, or the like : 
οἱ © ὥκτιρον εἰ ἁλώσοιντο others pitied them Uf they should 
be captured (i.e. εἰ ἁλώσονται ἐ they are going to be cap- 
tured) Xn. A. 1,4, 7. ἐστρατεύσαμεν δὲ ἐπ᾽ αὐτὸν ds... 
ἀποκτενοῦντες, εἰ δυναίμεθα but we have proceeded against 
him with the avowed intention of killing him if we could 
(i.e. ἐὰν δυνώμεθα if we can) Xn. A. 8, 1, 17. σπονδὰς 
ἐποιήσαντο, ἕως ἀπαγγελθείη τὰ λεχθέντα they made a 


676 a. In Homer, where the use of the optative in indirect discourse 
after a secondary tense is practically unknown (except sometimes in in- 
direct questions), facts are regularly stated from the point of view of the 
speaker, and it is left to be inferred that they may have been at the same 
time the thought of another: as γίγνωσκον ὃ δὴ κακὰ μήδετο δαίμων I 
knew some power was planning ill (Attic ἐγέγνωσκον ὅτι κακὰ μήδοιτο, Or 
μήδεται) y 166. ἤδεε yap κατὰ θυμὸν ἀδελφεὸν ws ἐπονεῖτο for he knew 
in his heart full well how his brother was toiling B 409, 


»“»υ»υνυσ νυν 


INDIRECT DISCOURSE— SUMMARY 345 


truce (which they agreed should last) until what had been 
said should be reported (i.e. ἕως av ἀπαγγελθῇ until it 
ts reported) Xn. Hell. 3, 2, 20. 

It is on this principle that the optative is used in final 
clauses dependent on a secondary tense (δὲ 590-594). 


SUMMARY OF THE USAGE OF INDIRECT 
DISCOURSE 


678. For the sake of completeness for reference a sum- 
mary of the regular usages of indirect discourse is here 
given: 

OpTATIVE (after secondary tenses) ! 


IN INDIRECT DISCOURSE OF DIRECT DISCOURSE 


Pres. indic, (independent or dependent) 
Pres. opt. may represent | Pres. subj. w. ἄν (dependent) 
Pres. (interrog.) subj. (independent) 
Aorist indic. (independent) 
Aorist opt. may represent | Aorist subj. w. dv (dependent) 
Aorist (interrog.) subj. (independent) 
Perf. indic. (independent or dependent) 
Perf. opt. may represent | Pert subj. w. dv (dependent) 
Perf. (interrog.) subj. (independent) 


Fut. opt. represents Fut. indic. (independent or dependent) 


INFINITIVE AND PARTICIPLE 


IN INDIRECT DISCOURSE OF DIRECT DISCOURSE 

; Ἔ ieee ; . 
Pres, infin. or partic. οἷ { Pres. indie. (independent) or 
Imperf. indic. (independent) 


_ § Pres. opt. w. ἄν (independent) or 


Pres. infin. or partic. w. ἄν 
UImperf. indic. w. ἄν (independent) 


1 Any optative with ἄν is unchanged from the direct discourse (in 
which it was originally independent, § 563). 


346 INDIRECT DISCOURSE — SUMMARY 


IN INDIRECT DISCOURSE OF DIRECT DISCOURSE 


Aorist infin. or partic. = Aorist indic. (independent) 


Aorist infin, or partic. w. ἄν = (ee indic. w. ἄν (independent) or 
Aorist opt. w. ἄν (independent) 
_ J Pert. indic. (independent) or 


Perf. infin. or partic. = ARTES ; 
Pluperf. indic. (independent) 


Jar Η 
πέΨέοΠΠιΨΕοΠηὋἘὁἘΠἔνς"ἔἘἐἘέν. es opt. w. ἄν (independent) or 


Pluperf. indic. w. ἄν (independent) 1 


Fut. infin. or partic. = Fut. indic. (independent) 


Notre.— The imperative is regularly represented in indirect dis- 
course by the substantive infinitive (§ 638) dependent on a word 
meaning command, order, or the like: as ἥκειν παραγγέλλει he bids 
him come (i.e. ἧκε come) Xn. A. 1, 2,1. Rarely can it be said that the 
imperative is changed to the infinitive in indirect discourse: as ἔλεγε 
θαρρεῖν he told him not to be alarmed (i.e. θάρρει don’t be alarmed) 


Rated, 8: 


1 Rarely. 


APPENDIX A 


VERSIFICATION 


679. Greek verse was dependent on the quantities 
($$ 52-54) of the syllables, and not, like English, on 
word-accent or on rhyme. 


680. Kinds of Poetry. — Greek poetry in general may 
be grouped under two heads: (1) that which was recited 
(Recitative), and (2) that which was sung (Lyric), but 
it should always be remembered that recited poetry was 
developed from poetry composed to be sung. 


Notr.—The Doric of the Drama:— The Lyric portions of the 
Attic drama, out of regard for its Doric origin, were regularly com- 
posed in a conventional Dorie dialect, formed by writing a for 7 in 
all words in which the Attic ἡ represents an original ἃ (ὃ 15): as 


ἈΝ δ 
ἔκλυον φωνᾶν, ἔκλυον δὲ βοᾶν 
τᾶς δυστάνου. --- Ε. Med. 131. 


681. Metre (μέτρον measure) is the measurement of 
verse by feet, lines, strophes, etc. 


682. In treating of metre it is customary and con- 
venient to employ certain arbitrary signs as follows: 


1. wu indicates a short syllable (also called a mora, assumed to be 
equal to 2 
947 


548 


6. 


=I 


10. 


Qe 


T | 


FEET 


indicates a long syllable (= two morae, or ). 
(triseme) indicates a long syllable prolonged to equal three 


morae (i.e. ὦ or By » 

(tetraseme) indicates a long syllable prolonged to equal four 
morae (5.8: — oF |). 

(irrational syllable) indicates a long syllable used in the place 
where a short normally occurs. 

indicates two short syllables used in the place where one 
short normally occurs: thus —_ Wo (cyclic dactyl) indi- 
cates a dactyl used as an equivalent of a trochee ὦ» 
(8 705); so also UW _ (cyclic anapaest) indicates an 
anapaest used in iambic rhythm. (These are also written 
—v vy and ὦ u—.) 

short perpendicular lines are used to indicate the divisions 
between the feet (§ 683). 

indicates the divisions between cola (§ 686). 

indicates a pause at the end of a verse equal to one mora (VU). 

indicates a pause at the end of a verse equal to two morae (_). 
(So also & indicates a pause of three morae, and of 
four morae.) 

standing below the line is used to indicate a caesura (§ 690). 
A comma (, ) is sometimes used for the same purpose. 

is used to indicate a diaeresis (§ 690). 


is used to indicate anacrusis (§ 706). 


FEET 


683. A group of syllables having a fixed metrical form 
is called a foot. The most common kinds of feet are the 
following : 


FEET OF THREE MORAE ( time) 


Trochee IN ἢ Ἐν λεῖπε 
Tambus aes i λέγω 
Tribrach Ue Pee λέγετε 


FEET 949 


FEET OF FOUR MORAE (3 time) 


Dactyl LOLS ἢ Ai. a λείπομεν 
Anapaest pio ies op "ἢ ᾿ λεγέτω 
τς  Spondee Rn pee 4 λείπων 


Cretic ΞΕ Ὁ AP δ x λειπέτω 
Bacchius eee Ἂν ὦ Ἱ λιποιμὴν 


FEET OF SIX MORAE (ἢ time) 


Ionic a minore UU _ Pipe 4 ἐλελοίπη 
Tonic a maiore - -ὔὧὖὔὖ Ἶ 4Ζ By λειπώμεθα 
Choriambus Ne wee 3 ee λειπομένων 


1. Many other kinds of feet! are mentioned by the 
ancient grammarians, but they may all be explained as 
variations of the forms already described (cf. § 685). 


684. Thesis and Arsis. —'That part of the foot on which 
the ictus or rhythmical accent falls is called the Thesis ; 
the rest of the foot is called the Arsis. 


685. Substitution.— In many kinds of verse two short 
syllables-(U U) may be substituted for a long (_), or a 
long syllable may take the place of two short syllables. 

Nore. — When a long syllable in the thesis is resolved into two 


short (8 685), the ictus properly belongs to the two, but is usually 
placed on the first. 


1 For example: Proceleusmatic U UU u, First Paeon ὡὼ ὦ» 
Fourth Paeon | uw ὦ.» Molossus _ _ _, ete. 


550 THE VERSE 


COLA 


686. Colon.— A group of feet (never more than six) is 
called a Colon, or a Rhythmical Series. 

1. A colon of two feet is called a Dipody, of three feet 
a Tripody, of four feet a Tetrapody, of five feet a Pen- 
tapody, of six feet a Hexapody. 

2. But trochaic, iambic, and anapaestic rhythms are 
measured not by single feet but by the dipody; hence 
four feet of such a rhythm férm a Dimeter, six feet a 
Trimeter, and eight feet a Tetrameter. 


THE VERSE 


687. The Verse.— A verse is composed of one, two, or 
even three cola (§ 686), and is usually written and printed 
as a single line. 


688. Syllaba Anceps.— The last syllable of any verse 
may be counted as long or short, as the rhythm may 
demand, without any regard to its actual quantity. 


Norr.—In the metrical schemes given below the existence of the 
syllaba anceps is taken for granted. 


1. Hiatus (ὃ 42) is allowed only at the end of a 
verse (but cf. § 2 8). 


689. Catalexis.— A verse in which the last foot is in- 
complete is said to be Catalectic (καταληκτικὸς stopping 
short). A verse in which the last foot is complete is 
called Acatalectic. 

1. A part or the whole of the last arsis is omitted in 
catalexis. If the omitted arsis formed the last part of the 


STROPHE AND SYSTEM 991. 


foot its place is filled by the pause (A, ὃ 682, 9-10); if it 
formed the first part of the foot its place is filled by pro- 
longing (§ 682, 3-4) the thesis of the preceding foot: as 


ΕΞ | for [Keren ee [fe 


690. Caesura and Diaeresis. — A Caesura (lit. cutting) 
occurs whenever a word ends inside a foot. A Diaeresis 
occurs when the end of a word coincides with the end of 
a foot. 

1. The principal caesura or The Caesura is one which 
marks also a break in the sense, and which occurs repeat- 
edly at a fixed point in the verse. 


Norr.—In antiquated language a caesura in the second foot is 
sometimes called trithemimeral, because it comes after three half-feet 
(τριθ-ημι-μερής of three half-portions), a caesura in the third foot 
penthemimeral, ete. 


For the Masculine and Feminine Caesuras see ὃ 701, 
note. 


STROPHE AND SYSTEM 


691. Strophe.— A group of lyric verses recurring in 
fixed form is called a Strophe. An Antistrophe is a 
corresponding strophe immediately following. Strophe 
and Antistrophe are sometimes followed by an Epode 
(not metrically corresponding). 


692. System.— Verses are sometimes arranged in a 
system, in which the syllaba anceps and hiatus are allowed 
only at the end. Such a system may be regarded as one 
long verse. For examples see §§ 696; 703, 2. 


9502 TROCHAIC RHYTHMS 


RHYTHMS 


693. Rhythms are named (trochaic, iambic, dactylic, 
etc.) from their fundamental feet. 


TROCHAIC RHYTHMS 


694. Trochaic rhythms are usually measured by dipodies 
(§ 686, 2) consisting of two trochees | 7 ὦ. ὦ |, and they 
admit the irrational syllable (>, ὃ 682, 5) in the second 
foot of any dipody. Moreover two shorts may be sub- 
stituted (§ 685) for the long syllable of the trochee in 
any foot except the final foot of the verse. 


695. Trochaic Tetrameter. — The most common trochaic 
rhythm (used by the line) is the Trochaic Tetrameter 
catalectic (consisting of two cola, ὃ 686). Its scheme 
according to (§ 694) is as follows: 


LS ay, LOG, Ey LG PIG ZARS ἘΞ 
7 ΄ 7 7 
DADRA IDR | OOD δἷυμῃιμσ ιν PDA wa ww 
a ΕΥ̓ τ: ἘΔ τ ΚΡ ΝΟΣ τ AW) AO 
> UE VvuUuUS 
as: 
τς τὰ als |) LOD GOOG τὺ w& BRE (Ne, LIN 


τἄλλα δ᾽ ov λέ 


> a τς ΑΞ a yaw 
EUTUXELS ὃ ἢ μεις ἐσόμεθα. 


ΕΠ 1 
γουσ ὅμως 


LPT GS, ΣΞΣ 


ἀλλὰ μεταβου 


ΡΥ ΕΘΝ 


λῶς λέγεις." 


EEG STR το ΠΕ ΘΕ ses 
λευσόμεσθα. || τοῦτο δ᾽ οὐ κα 
“Téll me not in | mournful numbers, # life is but an | émpty dréam.” 

Nore. — Rarely in proper names a cyclic dactyl (_ Wu, 8 682, 6) is 


used in place of a trochee. More freedom of substitution is usual in 
the first colon than in the second. 


1H. LT. 1282. 2K. Or. 1526. 


IAMBIC RHYTHMS 353 


696. Trochaic rhythms are also found sometimes in 
systems (§ 692) ending in a catalectic dimeter ; as 


fi 


rs YU Ls 


SO 
> 


cal Ν Ν 9 / 5 
ταῦτα μὲν πρὸς ἀνὸρός ἐστι 


ΖΑ 


LARTER | le eS eas eS 


Len) ” \ 4 Ν 
νοῦν €XOVTOS | καὶ φρένας καὶ 


ERG, SN 


πλευκότος." 


BG ΟΣ; 


πολλὰ περιπε 


For lyric trochaic rhythms see ὃ 707, 2. 


IAMBIC RHYTHMS 
(Cf. § 706, note) 


697. Iambic rhythins are usually measured by dipodies 
(§ 686, 2) consisting of two iambi 1.2 ὦ. 1. and they 
admit the irrational syllable (>, § 682, 5) in the first foot 
of any dipody. Moreover, two shorts may be substituted 
(§ 685) for the long syllable of the iambus in any foot 
except the final foot of the verse. 


698. Iambic Trimeter.— The most common iambic 
rhythm (used by the lne) is the iambic trimeter. The 
iambic trimeter of tragedy is metrically much more strict 
than that of comedy, and, although the irrational syllable 
is frequent, the resolution of the long syllable (§ 697) is 
comparatively infrequent. In comedy, however, not only 
are resolutions numerous, but an anapaest (cyclic, § 682, 6) 
may stand in place of the iambus in any foot except the 
last, and the apparent dactyl (> ὦ ὦ) may stand in the 
fifth foot as well as in the first and third. 

The principal caesura usually comes in the third foot. 


1 Ar. Ran. 534-6. 


BABBITT’S GR. GRAM. — 23 


904 IAMBIC RHYTHMS 


The scheme of iambic trimeter (showing all possible 
variations) is as follows: 


(Oe Ὁ ΞΞ WZ Wh WP Vice 
4 ha i 
YU Wy) WW Ne VEE ων PN NY KS NY wl Naa Ws 
racic % “5 See ee 
S Dy ΣΞ 
RELL 
Comedy [ Ξ νυ 
allows also CRI LE I S= I LE A λοι ἐς: 


ΝΌΤΕ. --- In proper names the tragedians sometimes allow the cyclie 
anapaest (ὃ 682, 6) in other feet than the first. 


= eee of iambic trimeter are: 


ELI Ἐς το |) gb ae pe eae 
we oper ᾽Αρ γοῦ n διαπτάσθαι σκάφος 
Tragic ise ae Laas ead 2 
| Ng A ERG Ga Se 
| Κό ὄλχων ἐς αἷαν κυανέας | Ξυμπληγάδας." 
Ὦ Ζεῦ βασιλεῦ" τὸ χρῆμα τῶν | νυκτῶν ὅσον 
: | REARS SORT) ELEC aN ee 
Comic 


, 
γενήσεται 5 


LS 


r 7 
λῶν ovveKa. 


᾿ ᾿Απέραντον > οὐ δέποθ᾽ ἡμέρα 


ORT Un τὸ 


| 
| w De Np ἘΞ 
le 2 


Απόλοιο δῆτ᾽, 


ὦ πόλεμε, πολ 


39 


La fe th 
“ Which, like a wound|ed snake, drags its | slow length along. 


Norr.— The Choliambus, or “limping trimeter” (σχάζων) has a 
spondee instead of an iambus in the last foot. 


699. Iambic Tetrameter Catalectic. — The iambic tetram- 
eter catalectic, consisting of two cola (§ 686), is often 
used in comedy. Its scheme 


COAG  υ] pacar ἢ Oa eer == ||) we Ἢ 


1]. Med. 1-2. 2 Ar. Nub. 2, 3, 6. 


DACTYLIC RHYTHMS 350 


admits the same variations as the iambic trimeter (§ 698): 


thus 
= REA SEN te τὰν a) τὸ ΔΙ ΖΈΟΝ 
ἐγὼ γὰρ ἥτ των μὲν ye δι αὐτὸ τοῦτ᾽ ἐκλήθην 


ites ἘΠΝ 
1 


ἘΞ AT «- Ὁ 


> tal 
ἐν τοῖσι pov 


KG RIS | AO) IS 


,ὔ 
πρώτιστος ἐπε 


τισταῖσι ὅτι νόησα 


δος captain bold | of Halifax, ## who lived in coun|try quarters.” 


1. Iambic rhythms are sometimes found in system 
(8 692). For lyric iambic rhythms see ὃ 707, 2. 


DACTYLIC RHYTHMS 


700. The fundamental foot of dactylic rhythms is the 
dactyl (_ u uv), but the spondee (_ _) may be substituted. 


701. Dactylic Hexameter. — The hexameter is the most 
common dactylic rhythm. It contains six feet, of which 
the last is always a dactyl lacking the last syllable, _ ὦ A 
(§ 689). The fifth foot is usually a dactyl, but may be a 
spondee, in which case the verse is called Spondaic. The 
other feet may be either dactyls or spondees, but dactyls 
predominate. 

1. The principal caesura is usually in the third foot, 
less often after the thesis in the fourth foot (in which 
case there is often a corresponding caesura in the second 
foot). A diaeresis at the end of the fourth foot (Bucolic 
Diaeresis) is also very common. 

Norte. — Masculine and Feminine Caesuras. — A caesura immediately 


following the long syllable of the thesis is called masculine, a caesura 
between the two short syllables of the arsis is called feminine. 


1 Ar. Nub. 1058-9. 


356 DACTYLIC RHYTHMS 


2. The scheme of the dactylic hexameter is as follows: 


Lise ἢ set PA ee | oes | Zs |b 4 JN ν᾿ 
Ξ 
Examples are: 
LENG RG) RD) ea Le aa UYU ERG /N 
a » 24 , 3 a 1 
νιν ἄειδε, Oe ι Αχι λῆο 
μῆνιν , θεά, Πηλη ά δεω Xe λῆος 
σὺ Ὁ ΞΘ ΞΞ τ ΟΣ γ) ΕΝ 
ἄνδρα μοι ἔννεπε, Μοῦσα, πολύτροπον, ὅς μάλα πολλά" 
ΕΞ ze LG | ANF OGD EEN ERAN 
τίπτ᾽ αὖτ, | αἰγιόχοιο Διὸς τέκος εἰλή λουθας ; ὃ 
8 Ἐς HG, Ξε Ὁ eo] ΣΝ 
ἃ δ᾽ τ] > © A N ΄ | > \ > ἘΠ 
ἡ ἀέκουσ᾽ ἅμα τοῖσι γυ νὴ κίεν. αὐτὰρ ᾿Α χιλλεύς 


For the synizesis of ew in the first example see ὃ 19, note 2; for the 
shortening of μοι in the second see ὃ 52a. Observe that the third 
example is a spondaic line, and the fourth shows the bucolic diaeresis. 
For explanations of some other peculiarities of the Homeric verse 
see §§ 2a; 18 ἃ; 29 ἃ; 36a; 44a; 44,2 a; 53, a,b; 84 ἃ. 


702. The Elegiac Distich. — The Elegiac distich consists 
of a dactylic hexameter followed by two catalectic dactylic 
tripodies (which form the so-called pentameter). 

The scheme entire is as follows: 

ΖΞ 


Ἐπ] 2 τῷ 2132: [1 "9 τ 


Lise) Asses | Le ree | 22 IN 


Nore. —In the pentameter the end of the first tripody always 
coincides with the end of a word, and neither hiatus (§ 668, 1) nor 
syllaba anceps (§ 688) is allowed at this point. Observe also that the 
second tripody does not admit spondees. 


1. The Elegiac distich is a favorite metrical form for 
enomic and didactic poetry. It is but once used in the 


HINA. Tova 3 A 202. 4A 848, 


ANAPAESTIC RHYTHMS Shy! 


extant tragedy, the first two lines of the passage being as 
follows : 


LARS S)\ ELT PS TO 1. 95 Fl eI 
“ | | ἋἝ ς-ὕἜὌ 
Ἰλίῳ αἰπεινᾷ Πάρις οὐ γάμον ἀλλά τιν᾽ ara 
LE TRG (RE 1 ES υ LS GG) Zo IR 
2 > - = 
ayayer | εὐναί ἂν | eis Bada μους “EXé var." 


ANAPAESTIC RHYTHMS 
(Cf. 8 706, note) 

703. The basis of anapaestic rhythms is the anapest 
(uv uv 2). but for this the spondee (_ 7) or.even the dac- 
tyl (- Ὁ vu) may be substituted. A dactyl (or the last 
of two or more dactyls) is regularly followed by a spon- 
dee (_ uU U__), since a dactyl followed by an anapaest 
(_Uvuvv_) would bring four short syllables together. 

1. Anapaestic rhythms are usually measured by dipodies 
(ἢ 686, 2), and the most common forms are the monometer 
(of two feet), the dimeter (of four feet), and the dimeter 
catalectic or Paroemiac. The schemes are as follows: 


ΓΞ τ τὺ ΞΞ 
(Monometer) ae ek fees 
' 7 
GAO, 
ΓΞ ee NN 
(Dimeter) ae ae ee 5: ea eee ee 
PRE ace ty pine are 


Cf. “ And the 6live of peice || sends its branches abroad.” 


Lie 


NAN sae 
ae 


| fa 
Sh gear ον της 


Ὲ 
e ! 
(Paroemiac) + Seen 
ae a7. | 

ἱ τ We — 


Cf. “ The Lord is advan||cing. Prepare ye!” 
2. Anapaestic Systems. — Anapaestic rhythms were 
much used by the dramatists in systems (§ 692), a system 
1K. And. 105-104. 


358 ANAPAESTIC RHYTHMS 


consisting of a series of anapaestic monometers (usually 
printed as dimeters, with an occasional monometer) end- 
ing with a paroemiac (8 703, 1). Hiatus and the syllaba 
anceps are allowed only at the end of the system (1.6. the 
last syllable of the paroemiac). ‘There is usually a diaer- 
esis (δ 690) at the end of each monometer. 

The following is a short anapaestic system : 


“4 
Ξξ- τ YU a 


ἀλλά σ᾽ 6 Matas 


IR LL) τ Ἐπ 


3:4 NEE SANS if 


A 7 
TOT OALOS avac 


7 
— SWS) -Ξ Ξ- 


e ϑὺ et ὁ 5. 
ων Τ επινοίιαν 


πελάσειε δόμοις, 


SO) ne 


σπεύδεις κατέχων 


ἘΞ ENS κε, 


EES, Op ee 
£ € > \ 
πρᾶξειας, ἐπεὶ 


tal ’ 
γενναῖος ἀνὴρ; 


EEE τ αν τ ἘΠ 


Αἱ a 3 > \ 
iyev, Tap ἐμοι 


7 
WW) [LE | —— 


δεδόκησαι." 


Nore. — Observe that the last syllable in the second line (short by 
nature) is long by position (§ 53), owing to the following consonauts. 


704. Anapaestic Tetrameter.— The anapaestic tetrame- 
ter, consisting of one anapaestic dimeter followed by the 
paroemiac, is much used by the line in comedy. 

The scheme is as follows: 


PAL GRIN GL OGG GU aluv a 
fee τ δ τ A Zs ee el | ΥΌΝ 
ἐσ ihe Se 
SGM τοι τ RIG ||| Ss Ὁ 
ἣ Ζ; ἊΣ # 
Examples are 
΄ 
ἘΞΑ ΕΒ εν cj 2) ΠΕ τ πὸ ale ie 
΄ Ν a a 2 / con a S/N 2A 
IIpooyxere τὸν νοῦν | Tots ἀθανάτοις ἡμῖν, τοῖς αἱ ἐν ἐοῦσι, 
i 
Bee LAM εξ, απ; pee) es ee 1 
Ποῖ ἰθε an aA Ratko A " θ ὃ , 2 
is αἰθερίοις, τοῖσιν ἀγήρῳς, τοῖς ἄφθιτα μη δομεένοισιν. 


110. Med. 759-763. 2 Ar. Aves, 688-689. 


LYRIC RHYTHMS 359 


For lyrie anapaestic rhythms (which usually admit 
more freedom of substitution) see § 709, 2. 


LYRIC RHYTHMS 


705. Lyric rhythms in general differ from recitative 
rhythms only in allowing much greater freedom of substi- 
tution. Their most notable characteristic is the Procrus- 
tean habit of frequently employing feet which are either 
longer or shorter than the fundamental foot of the verse, 
but which, by an arbitrary shortening or lengthening, 
are made to fit the rhythm (cf. ὃ 682, 8-6). Thus, a 
long syllable of two morae (_) by being lengthened (_), 
or a dactyl ( ὦ wv) of four morae by being shortened 
(_ w) is often employed in a rhythm whose fundamental 
foot is the trochee (_ wv) of three morae. Likewise a 
trochee (_ wu) of three morae may be used in a dactylic 
(— vv) rhythm of four morae (as__u). But the char- 
acter of the rhythm may always be determined by the 
preponderance of the fundamental foot. 


706. Anacrusis.—In the lyric rhythms each line does 
not always begin with a complete foot. The extra sylla- 
ble (or syllables) at the beginning of such a line has 
received the name of anacriisis (avaxpovots upward beat). 

1. The anacrusis must not be greater than the arsis. 
Hence we may have ὦ or > or ~w as the anacrusis of a 
logaoedic verse (8 707, 1) and ὦ u, or _, or ὦν as the ana- 
crusis of a dactylo-epitritic verse (§ 709). 

Anacrusis is indicated by :. 

Note. — Some writers on meter recognize only those feet in which 
the ictus falls on the first part of the foot (i.e. trochees, dactyls, ete.). 


By this theory an iambic verse (ὦ. | u _) 15 regarded as a catalectic 
trochaic with anacrusis (ὦ : ὦ | — ΔΛ), an anapaestic verse as a 


900 LYRIC RHYTHMS 


catalectic dactylic with anacrusis, ete. But the ancients recognized 
rhythms in which the ictus falls on the second part of the foot, as well 
as the other kind, and such rhythms are often constructed on a differ- 
ent principle from the others. Hence it seems best to limit anacrusis 
to the strictly lyric rhythms, where the great variety and complexity 
of the verses demand the adoption of some simple working hypothesis, 
although it is not certain that such rhythms were so treated by the 
ancients. 


LYRIC RHYTHMS IN 3 TIME 


707. The fundamental foot of lyric rhythm in 3 time 
is the trochee (_ uv), but in place of the trochee may be 
substituted the tribrach (ὦ UU), the irrational trochee 
(_ >, § 682, 5), the cyclic dactyl (_ VW, § 682, 6), or the 
triseme (L, ὃ 082,8). The cyclic dactyls are found before 
or between trochees, but trochees are not found between 
dactyls in the same verse. Anacrusis (§ 706) is frequent. 

1. Logaoedic Rhythms. — Rhythms in 2 time containing 
both trochees and (cyclic) dactyls have received the name 
of Logaoedic (λόγος speech, prose, ἀοιδή song). 

2. Occasionally lyric verses in 3 time are found without 
cyclic dactyls or trisemes, and such verses by themselves 
might be explained as lyric trochaic, or Gif they have ana- 
crusis, cf. ὃ 706, note) as lyric iambic rhythms; but 
since such verses are seldom found except in connection 
with other, logaoedic, verses, it is better to treat them all 
under one general head. 


Nore 1.—“ Basis.” — The first foot of a logaoedic verse allows great 
freedom. It may be a trochee (7 ὦ); ἃ tribrach (ὦ ὦ uv), an irra- 
tional trochee (7 >), or even an apparent iambus (© _) or anapaest 
(Ou >). For an example see § 708, 6. 

Nore 2.—Logaoedic Rhythms are measured by the single foot. 
Some of them have acquired special names, which, however, are not 
particularly important, for a verse can always be described as a dipody, 
tripody, ete., according to the number of feet it contains, 


LYRIC RHYTHMS IN ὃ TIME 361 


708. It follows from § 707 that the lyric rhythms in 3 
time may have great variety of form. Some examples of 
single verses are given below, but it must be remembered 
that these verses are thus severed from their connection in 
strophes of which they are an integral part. 


1. Drieopy (LOGAOEDIC) 
CASI AG 
ὦ tov ΓΑ δωνιν (Adonic) 


2 TRIPODIES 


Trochaic tripody (with resolved foot) : 
“7: La 
WOW | — 
φρενομό 
Trochaic tripody with anacrusis (§ 706) : 
τ: ΞΕ |S 
τέλος θά νοιμι 
Trochaic tripody ecatalectic, with anacrusis (“ Iambic,” see § 707, 2) : 
ERE Koh lige aco Lay 
τί τῶνδ᾽ ἄνευ κα κῶν 3° 
Trochaie tripody catalectic, with anacrusis, containing a triseme 


(§ 682, 3): 


|! PA 


3 ΄ 1 
pws α κουσῃ 


LORS, 
3 L219 
KQUTOS 


wal | 


4 


Chae 4 
ROG YE τὺ 


φίλαν dpov* με 


νεῖ. 
Logaoedic tripodies : 
LE SLD EG, 


ELE NS 
. , 
Βιβαύι νὸν κύ 


κλωμα (First Pherecratean) 


ney 


ἢ πόλις ἢ φί λων" (First Pherecratean catalectic) 
ἐπ 2 RE τ, ΖΞ Ὁ 
παιδὸς | δύσφορον | arav’ (Second Pherecratean) 


Logaoedic tripody (containing two dactyls) catalectic, with ana- 


crusis: 
LE or) IN 
8 


πος, 


of 3 ε 
πως ουν LE 


ρῶν ποτα μῶν. 


15, Aj.626. % Aesch. Ag. 211. 5 E. Bacchae, 123. 7S. Aj. 643. 
28. Aj. 390. 4 Aesch. Septem, 901. 6 KE, Med. 847. 8 E. Med. 846, 


902 LYRIC RHYTHMS 


Logaoedic tripodies containing a triseme (§ 682, 3): 
τὰς ΖΞ ἢν 
χων 


ἐλπίδ᾽ é 
ΕΝ 


7 
a2 
μῷ 


ι-- 
θυ 
The last example might be scanned as a dipody (Adonie εὐ]. ὦ); 
but the scansion of such lines is determined by the character of the 
strophe in which they stand. 


aL 
7s | 


΄ς 
KQAKQV 


ERTS, 


τλάμονι 


ὃ. TETRAPODIES 


The following will serve as examples of tetrapodies, 
although many more varieties are found : 


EIR) ὡἰξ EN 
βάξις εἰ δ᾽ ἐτήτυμος * 
νῦν γὰρ ἐμοὶ μέ λει χορεῦσαι, (First Glyconic) 
LEGG EPA τ ANOKA 
Svpopev|a σὸν | εὐνέταν (First Glyconic catalectic) 
5 τὴ | ERS OP IAA SONA 
ηὗρον | οὐδέ τι φάρμα κον ἢ (Second Glyconic catalectic) 
vitu| Zu! Zw!|ZA (Third Glyconic catalectic, 
ΠῚ Ξ INN a = 7 Ε > 
ἔτλα δὲ σοῖσι | μηλονόϊμας with anacrusis) 
Up eA, 5 Se -ὴ ἜΝ 
μένει δ᾽ ἀ κοῦ σαί τί μου ὃ 
τ έν fee Aneel IN 
povorrats | ἀλλ᾽ ἔμπας." 
4. PENTAPODIES 

ZN Ls τ | NG), ZT ne 
ἐν μύρτου κλαδὶ τὸ ξίφος φορήσω 
τὰν ὃ μέγας μῦθος aj έ Se." 

18. Aj. 606. 2S. Aj. 700. 7K. Ale. 5738. 10 Scolium. 

2K. Med. 865. 5K. Med. 159. 8 Aesch. Ag. 459. 11 5. 4). 226. 


8 Aesch. Ag. 477. 6K. Alc. 966. 9E. Alc. 906. 


LYRIC RHYTHMS IN 3 TIME 363 
5. HEXAPODIES 
inns 


εὐδαίμονες 


zo Le. τά 


υ] =e υ 
οἷσι κα κῶν ἄγευστος 
aN 


av σει 


ών 
BIN 


Tas 


5 
αἱ 
LEAS La 
e ‘\ 
οἷς γὰρ 
LRG oh | LE we WwW 


ἐλλείπει γενεᾶς ἐπὶ 


΄ 17 


LW or] ἼῈΕΞΞ 


a6 θεό 


θεν δόμος | a 


uae Ζ LEG, = υ 
πλῆθος ἕ 


1 


οὐδὲν ἕρπον.᾿ 
6. Some verses contain more than one colon. Examples 
are: 

(EuPOLIDEAN) 


eS re 


LES; = 


ὦ Oe 
tap 


7 
OUTW 


ρῶ ᾿πρὸς ὑμᾶς é 


ὥς ΩΝ 
λευθέ ρως 
ΞΘ EET aN 
Kal vo μιζοί μην σο pos " 
Observe the basis (8 707, note 1) at the beginning of the second 
colon of the first line. 


ὦμεν οἱ KATE 
ΞΕ: 


viky 


LSS, | 


, ? > Ν 
σαιμί T € YO 


(GREATER ASCLEPIADEAN) 
Ζ 


—— τὸ 


La 


U ΖΞ 


4 


Fi 


ἄλλο py τεύ͵ 


MOSES 


AT 
do? 
7. The following examples show lyric verses in 3 time 
combined to form a strophe (ὃ 691): 
He Ὁ 
᾿Αργεί 


ΞΕ 


μηδὲν 


σῃς πρότερον δένδριον 


3 , 
αμπε 


Valk 35 WwW 


aN 


a 


καὶ σὲ 
me ie 
TEVTY 
oe 


συρί 


΄ / > 
μέν, πότνι, 


WT τον ᾿Ξ ERD 


ἀξει" 
eas ate IN 
ane ss 
ZEN 


Ν 
νος 


, > 
KOVTOPOS | OLKOV 


AES at SES 
lov δ᾽ ὃ 
a ee 
otpe ov Ha 
ΖΞ Ν 


feu 


ONY, 


κάλαμος 
΄ 3 oh 
κώπαις ἐπιίθω ὕ 


-.ὕ.ν. υ͵-... 
4.4.4.444 
18. Ant. 582-5. 2? Ar. Nub. 518, 520. 


3 Alcaeus. 2 Be EE W237, 


364 LYRIC RHYTHMS 


LG ἘΞ τυ | ec | 

ὺ δ᾽, ὦ TAA D ) δε μὰ Ἵ 
σὺ δ᾽, ὦ τάλαν, ὦ κακοόνυμῴφε || κηδεμὼν τυράννων, 

Ξε ἘΞ OT. Te eh aN 

Ν 3 \ 

παισὶν οὐ κατ εἰ δὼς 
»” a / > ΄΄ “ 
ὄλεθρον βιοτᾷ προσάγεις ἀλόχῳ TE || TA στυγερὸν θάνα τον. 
Ξε Ὁ Neg Za iar ia ae, 
δύστᾶνε, μοί ρᾶς ὅσον παρ οί xn. 


Fo 
3) 4.4.4 δ Ὁ 


DACTYLO-EPITRITIC RHYTHMS (2 TIME) 


709. The fundamental foot of the dactylo-epitritic 
rhythm is the dactyl ( ὦ vu) or its equivalent spondee 
(___), occurring commonly in groups of two dactyls and 
a spondee (_Uu_wvw~—_). The lengthened trochee 
(_ u, ὃ 682, 3) is also found, followed always by a spondee, 
the two together forming the so-called Epitrite @_U_— _). 
Either of these two combinations may be catalectic (§ 689), 
and anacrusis (δ 706) is frequent. Occasionally the tetra- 
seme (14, ὃ 682, 4), oceupying the time of a whole foot, is 
found. 

An example of this rhythm is: 


τς τ ἘΞ 


ΞΞ ΑΘ 4 


Ee NEN 


ρῶν χωροῦσι 


be / 
παγαί, 
ΖΦ ΑΝ 
2 
ται. 


Μ “ ε 
Ἄνω ποτα μῶν le 


ay τ} Be Sus UYU 


καὶ δίκα Kal πάντα πάλιν στρέφε 
1. Other lyric dactylic rhythms are occasionally found, 
but they require no further explanation than has already 
been given. 
2. Lyric anapaests also sometimes occur, but they may be 


explained as dactylic verses with anacrusis (see § 706, note). 


1K. Med. 990-5. 2K. Med. 410-11. 


OTHER RHYTHMS IN Ε AND 3 TIME 365 


OTHER RHYTHMS IN 3? AND § TIME 


710. Choriambic Rhythms. — ‘The fundamental foot of 
choriambic rhythms is the choriambus (7 UU _). Such 
rhythms are rare. An example is: 

LEGG) 
ὠνοθέτας." 


LER, RIM ΕΞ SEARO ROS) es 


δεινὰ μὲν οὖν, δεινὰ ταράσ 


LR OS) -ὰ 


σει σοφὸς οἱ 


711. Ionic Rhythms. — Ionic rhythms have the ionic 
(___uwv) as their fundamental foot, for which occasion- 
ally uu ὦ (ὃ 682, 4) is found. Such rhythms are regu- 
larly catalectic (δ 689) with anacrusis (δ 706), and by some 
they are explained as ionic a minore (see ὃ 706 note). 

An example is: 


SE | CPOE OMS ἢ Len TS 
, = \ ε , Εν 
πεπέρακεν μὲν ὁ περσέπτολις ἤδη 


ΘΕ τ μεθ σε κΝ 

’, DD 
βασίλειος στρατὸς εἰς avtirol|pov γείτονα | χώραν." 
χα πὶ Ὁ ΕΞ τ κ 


πολύγομφον ὅ δισμα ὃ 


ΝΌΤΕ. — Anaclasis. — The last long syllable and the first short syl- 
lable of any foot may be transposed. This is called anaclasis (ἀνά- 
κλασις breaking up): thus 


Oe Ory as | Zen 
Ny ΄ “ 4 
LOLOLS VO/LOLS Kpa TUVWMV 


(instead of WI τῶ) SMS a | Pee aN) 


712. Dochmiac Rhythms. —In some of the lyric por- 
tions of tragedy, where great excitement is expressed, a 
peculiar but unmistakable rhythm, called dochmiac, is 
often found. The exact nature of this is very uncertain, 
but it is based on a dipody ὦ 2. ὦ 4, which is thought 
to have a broken rhythm, with alternating 3 and 3 time. 


1S. 0.T. 484. 3 Aesch. Persians, 71. 
2 Aesch. Persians, 65-6. 4 Aesch. Pr. 403. 


900 OTHER RHYTHMS IN 3 AND 3 TIME 


It allows the irrational long (§ 682, 5) in place of either 
of the two short syllables, and also freely resolves any one 
of the three long syllables into two shorts. Hence many 
variations are possible, but only nineteen are actually 
found, and some of these very seldom. The following are 
the most common forms: 

δαϊχθεὶς χερῶν 

κατολοφύρομαι 7 
Oia We 
᾿Αργόθεν ὦ φίλος ὃ 
"ΞΘ > 5 


53 ΄ “4 
ὦ σχέτλιοι πομπαί 


4 Ζ 
WINE REN NEN Ξ - 
Ν oN (ὃ 5 
χθονὸς ἀπὸ πατρίδος 
4 a4 
IIS, NII IIIS 
τὸν ἔτι βρέφος ἔλιπον.“ 


Dochmiaes are often found in systems (§ 692). A good example is 
E. Med. 1258-60. 


713. Bacchiac Rhythms. — Bacchiac Rhythms (based on 
the bacchius, ὦ 4 _) are seldom found except in connec- 


tion with other rhythms (usually dochmiac). An example 
ismineNes chs 77. 170: 


714. Cretic Rhythms. — Cretic rhythms occasionally 
occur with the cretic (7 ὦ. _) as the fundamental foot, 
which may be resolved (ὃ 685) into 7 ὦ ὦ u Cfirst paeon) 
or 6 uu (second paeon). An example is 


CLG DOO) a ae EBT SOS) 
ὅστις ἡ μῶν μόνος σπεισάμενος.ἷ 
ΤῊ JETS 879. 3K. LT. 880. 5K. 7.7. 829. 7 Ar, Ach. 888. 


2. 1 JEAN, 045: Ἐν 77. θδ0ὲ ID 7.7. PANE 


APPENDIX B 


TABLE OF VOWEL CONTRACTIONS 


715. 
ata =a (§ 18, 2) 
a+oac=at(§$ 19; 88) 
a+¢ =¢ (8 19) 
ate =a (§ 18, 6) 


{εἰ (real) = (Ὁ. 19) 
(ee (apparent) = a (8 19) 
Be ἢ πα (Ὁ 8 O-aeranelyi, ἢ) 


8 170, 2 


a+y =a (§ 19, rarely yn, § 170, 
2) 

a+e =at(§ 18, 1) 

Gt a(S 19. 1) 

a+o =w (§ 18, 4) 


a + oc = w (ὃ 19) 

a + ov (apparent) = w (8 19) 
a+o—@ (§ 18:1} 

€+a =7 (ὃ 18, 6, sometimes a, 
89. 9 15 106, 2); 11851; 120):3) 
+at=7n (§ 19, rarely a, § 118, 
1; or εἰ, § 170, note 3) 


faa) 


ἘΠ — εἰ (ὃ 19, 9) 

εἰ Ἢ εἰ ΞΞ εἰ (8 19) 

ἘΠ ΠῚ ΞΞιη (sy 18: ὦ 
εἜῃ =9 (8 19) 

e+e =e (9 18,1; cf. § 6, 3) 
€ +0 =ov(§ 18, 5) 

ἘΠῚ ot = ot (§ 19; 1) 

€ + ov=ov (ὃ 19) 


367 


CS SS ey) 


Ἔν =ev (8 18, 1) 
+w =o (§ 18, 4) 
TiS (SL) 
ob — (5.19) 
+e = (ὁ 18;2) 
{εἰ (real) = 77) (Sl) 


le (apparent) = η (8 19) 
ae U Ξ- (paisa 1) 
+e =1 ($18, 2) 
Ch ὦ (ἡ 15. Ὁ taney, 
§ 118, 1) 
+e =ov (§ 18, 5) 
{εἰ (veal) =ot (§ 19, 2) 
( εἰ (apparent) = ov (ὃ 19, 2) 


ὁ ἡ =o ($18, 4) 


ORO Onn One 


=e) OF (ὦ ὦ Ὁ: 
§ 170, 2 

+t Ξοι (8 18, 1) 
+o Ξε ου (8 18, 3) 
οὐ ΞΞ οι (ὃ 1971) 
+ ov = ov (ὃ 19) 
+o =w (§ 18, 2 


rarely a, 


οὐ ὦ ΞῸ (ν10} 
ἢ ΞΘ ῦ (ἢ 211: aD) 
ota =o (8 18, 4) 
wte =w (§ 18, 4) 
wo+t =o (8 18,1) 
wt+o =w (§18,2 


APPENDIX C 


THE PRONUNCIATION 
NAMES IN 


OF GREEK 
ENGLISH 


PROPER 


716. Nearly all Greek proper names came into the 


English language through the medium of Latin. 


Hence 


the following rule for pronouncing such names : 


Write the Greek name in 


the equivalent Latin letters 


(see § 1) and pronounce as an English word} with Latin 


accent. 


Note. — In addition to the equivalents given in § 1, the following 


should be mentioned : 


Gk. Lat. Gk. Lat. 

a= ae (ai)>> ev ΞΞ eu 

εὖ ΞΞῚ (ore) οὐ ΞΞ τ 

Οὐ =oe(oi) ynasal (§ 11,1) =n 

av = au Final -οι = ~ 
Examples are: 


Αἴγινα = Ae-gi'-na 
᾿Αθήνη = A-thé’-né 
Βοιωτία = Boe-o'-ti-a 
Βυζάντιον = By-zan'-ti-um 
Δαρεῖος = Da-ri'-us 
Δελφοί = Del'-phi 


Διόσκουροι = Di-os-ci'-ri 


Εὐρώτας = Eu-ro'-tas 


Gk. Lat. 
Final -os, -or, 
of 2d deel., aie jee 
p with rough) _ τῇ 


breathing (p) ) 


Θουκυδίδης = Thi-cyd'-i-des 
Μέλητος = Mi-lé'-tus 
᾿Οδυσσεύς = O-dys'-seus 
Ξενοφῶν = Xen'-o-phon 
Σφίγὲ = Sphinx 

Τιμόθεος = Ti-mol-the-us 
Χάρων = Cha'-ron 


1 See Bennett and Bristol, The Teaching of Latin and Greek, pp. 287-9. 


368 


APPENDIX D 


SOME ADDITIONAL GRAMMATICAL TERMS 


717. The following grammatical terms are still occa- 
sionally employed by editors. Most of them explain them- 
selves, but for completeness they are here catalogued. 


1. Anacoluthon occurs when the construction of a sentence is 
changed from that with which it began: as καὶ διαλεγόμενος αὐτῷ, 
ἔδοξέ μοι οὗτος 6 ἀνὴρ εἶναι σοφός and conversing with him,—this man 
seemed to me (instead of “I thought him’”’) to be wise Pl. Ap. 21 ο. 

2. Aphaeresis. — If the second of two words between which synize- 
sis (§ 43, note 2) takes place begins with e-, some editors regard the ε 
as elided, and so indicate it: as μὴ ᾽γώ for μὴ ἐγώ. 

3. Asyndeton is the omission of conjunctions between connected 
words or phrases. It is comparatively rare in Greek, —a language in 
which conjunctions were very numerous. 

4. Brachylogy (brief expression) makes one word do double duty : 
as κόμαι Χαρίτεσσιν ὁμοῖαι hair like (the hair of) the Graces P 51. 
ὡπλισμένοι ἦσαν Tots αὐτοῖς Κύρῳ ὅπλοις they were armed with the same 
weapons as (those of) Cyrus Xn. Cy. 7, 1, 2. 

5. Chiasmus (from the letter yx) inverts the 
order of the second pair of two pairs of words: 
as βασιλεύς τ᾽ ἀγαθὸς κρατερός τ᾽ αἰχμητής a 
goodly king and warrior bold T 179. 

6. Ellipsis (Jack) is the omission of words which would be requi- 
site for a full logical expression of the thought. A good example is 
ὥσπερ ἂν εἰ just as (one would do) if, ete. Other examples of ellip- 
tical expressions are mentioned in §§ 439, note 2; 615; 616; 625, 
note. 


βασιλεύς τ᾽ ἀγαθὸς 


κρατερός T αἰχμητής 


BABBITT’S GR. GRAM. —24 369 


910 SOME ADDITIONAL GRAMMATICAL TERMS 


7. Hendiadys (one through two) is the use of two codrdinate words 
to express what might have been expressed by one word and an attrib- 
utive: as κράτη καὶ θρόνοι power and throne (i.e. throne of power) S. 
Ant. 1738. 

8. Hypallage (interchange) gives to the less important of two words 
the construction appropriate to the more important: as ὀδύνῃσι πελά- 
few to bring him upon troubles (instead of ‘bring troubles upon him’) 
E 776. 

9. Hyperbaton (overstepping) is a transposition (for the sake of 
emphasis) of the natural order of words: as wap’ οὐκ ἐθέλων be. 
λούσῃ unwilling by her willing side & 155. 

10. Hypotaxis (opposed to parataxis) is the subordination of one 
construction to another (cf. § 594, 1 note). 

11. Hysteron proteron is ‘putting the cart before the horse’: as 
εἵματα τ᾽ ἀμφιέσασα θυώδεα Kat λοέσασα having clothed him in fragrant 
garments and given him a bath € 264. 

12. Litdtes (plainness) and Meidsis (/essening) are forms of under- 
statement: as οὐ πολλοί not many (i.e. = ὀλίγοι a few). 

13. Metonymy (change of name) is the use of one word in place of 
another which it suggests: as ἀσπὶς μῦρία ten thousand shield (i.e. 
soldiers, or men with shields) Xn. A. 1, 7, 10. 

14. Oxymoron (keen foolishness) is a combination of apparently 
contradictory terms such as ‘painful pleasure’ or ‘living death’: thus 
ψευσάμενον πιστὸν γενέσθαι to be belicved for his falsehood ! Th. 3, 43. 

15. Parataxis (opposed to hypotaxis) is the use of coérdinate con- 
structions (cf. § 594, 1 note). 

16. Paronomasia is a play on words of similar sound: as ἐπα- 
νέστησαν μᾶλλον ἢ ἀπέστησαν they have revolted rather than 
rebelled Th. 3, 39. 

17. Pleonasm is unnecessary fullness of expression: as πειράσομαι 
TO πάππῳ, . .. κράτιστος ὧν ἱππεύς, συμμαχεῖν αὐτῷ to my grand- 
Sather I shall try, by being a very good horseman, to be an ally to him Xu. 
Cy. 1, 3, 15. Other examples are mentioned in 88 434; 601 note; 
657, note 2. 

18. Prolepsis (anticipation) is properly the use of an adjective which 
by its meaning anticipates the action of the verb: as δικαίων ἀδίκους 
φρένας παρασπᾷς you lead astray the unjust minds of righteous men, 1.6. 
“so that they become unjust” S. Ant. 791. 

More commonly prolepsis is used of the position of a substantive or 


ami 


SOME ADDITIONAL GRAMMATICAL TERMS oul 


a pronoun, which is transferred (usually with a change of case) from 
a (later) subordinate clause to an (earlier) principal clause: as 7dee 
yap κατὰ θυμὸν ἀδελ φεὸν ὡς ἐπονεῖτο for he knew in his heart full well 
how his brother was toiling (lit. “knew his brother how he was toil- 
ing”) B409. de αὐτὸν ὅτι μέσον ἔχοι he knew that he commanded 
the center Xn. A. 1, 8, 21. 

19. Zeugma (yoking) is the forcing of one verb to do the duty of 
two (dissimilar) verbs: as οὔτε φωνὴν οὔτε Tov μορφὴν βροτῶν ὄψῃ you 
shall not (hear) the voice or see the form of any mortal man Aesch. 
Pi ΘΔ. 


APPENDIX E 


WEIGHTS, MEASURES, AND TIME 


718. LINEAR MEASURE 
EQUIVALENT 
1 δάκτυλος (finger breadth) = almost 3 inch 


4 δάκτυλοι = 1 παλαιστή (palm) =2.9+ inches 
3 παλαισταί = 1 σπιθαμή (span) -- 8.79 inches 
11 σπιθαμαί = 1 πούς ( foot) = 11.65 inches 
1} πόδες = 1 πῆχυς (cubit) = 17.46 inches 
4 πήχεις (or 6 πόδες) = 1 ὀργυιά (fathom) = 5 feet, 10— inches 
162 ὀργυιαί (or 100 πόδες) = 1 πλέθρον ( plethrum) = 97+ feet 
6 πλέθρα = 1 στάδιον (stade) = 582+ feet 
a ὃ 
9 στάδιοι = 1 mile (+ 7 feet) 
30 στάδιοι = 1 rapacayyns ( para- 
sang) = 3} miles 
719. SQUARE MEASURE 


The Greeks measured small areas by the square foot, and 
larger areas (like land) by the square plethrum (= 10,000 
square πόδες, i.e. 97+ x 97+ = 9412 sq. feet, or a little 
over one-fifth of an acre). 


720. LIQUID MEASURE 
τ΄. 5. LIQUID MEASURE 
1 ὀξύβαφον = 0.144+4 pint 
4 ὀξύβαφα = 1 κοτύλη = 0.578 pint 
12 κοτύλαι = 1 χοῦς = 3.468 quarts 
12 yoes --] ἀμφορεὺς μετρητής = 10.4 + gallons 


372 


(SY) 
Os 


WEIGHTS AND MONEY 


721. DRY MEASURE 
U. 8. DRY MEASURE 
1 κύαθος -- .Ο8 + pint 
6 κύαθοι =1 κοτύλη = } (0.49+) pint 
4 κοτύλαι = 1 χοῖνιξε =1 (0.99+) quart 
4 χοίνικες = 1 ἡμίεκτον = 1 (0.49 -Ε ) peck 
2 ἡμίεκτα = 1 ἑκτεύς -- 1 (0.99+) peck 
6 ἑκτεῖς == 1 μέδιμνος = 14 (1.49+) bushels 


Nore.— Both the liquid and the dry xotvAy had the same value, 
but the difference between liquid and dry measure in the United 
States causes the apparent difference in the tables. 


WEIGHTS AND MONEY 


722. The tables of Greek weights and of money are 
identical, coins being named and valued by the weight 
of silver (or gold) that they contained. The standards, 
however, were considerably different in different parts of 
Greece. 

In Attica two standards were in use, corresponding to 
our Troy and Avoirdupois weights. The former consti- 
tutes the basis of the Attic coinage, and it was used also 
in weighing precious metals, drugs, etc. The second was 
used in ordinary commercial transactions. The approxi- 
mate values of these were as follows: 


723. TABLE OF WEIGHTS 
ATTIC COMMERCIAL OR 
AEGINETAN 
1 6BorAds ΞΞ 4, 07. 
6 ὀβολοί --] δραχμή = “, oz. ee 
100 δραχμαί = 1 pra = 15.4+ oz. 1 lb. 6} oz. 
60 μναῖ = 1 τάλαντον = 58 lbs. 83 Ibs. 


914 WEIGHTS AND MONEY 


724. - TABLE OF ATTIC MONEY 
VALUE IN U.S. MONEY 
8 χαλκοῖ (copper) = 1 ὀβολός (obol) $ .03 
6 ὀβολοί = 1 δραχμή (drachma) 18 
100 δραχμαί = 1 μνᾶ (mina) 18.00 
60 μναῖ = 1 τάλαντον (talent) 1080.00 


Nore. — These values are only approximate, and are determined 
by the value (in gold) of the weight of the silver in the coins. The 
present great depreciation in the value of silver is not considered, but 
it is reckoned as being to gold as 16:1. The purchasing power of 
money was much greater in antiquity than at present. Cf. Xn. 4.1, 
3, 21, where the pay of the soldiers (already very high) is raised from 
4 obols ($0.12) to a drachma ($0.18) a day. 


1. The Attic coins (with the exception of the χαλκοῦς, 
which was of copper) were made of unalloyed silver, and 
ran from the 1 obol to the four-drachma piece (retpadpay- 
pov). The daric (dapexos), a Persian gold coin containing 
about 125.5 grains of gold, circulated at the value of 
20 drachmae. ‘The Cyzicene stater (of electrum, a mix- 
ture of gold and silver) was regarded as equivalent to 
28 drachmae. 


GREEK CHRONOLOGY 


725. The Era. — Any particular year was known at 
Athens by the name of the Archon Eponymus (and in ἡ 
other places by the name of some other important civil or 
religious official). 

Later came the general practice of numbering the years 
by Olympiads (periods of four years each), the first year 
of the first Olympiad (Ol. 1, 1) beginning in the middle 
of the summer of 776 B.C. 


GREEK CHRONOLOGY ΘΟ 


Nore. — Observe that the first half of Ol. 1, 1 falls in B.c. 776, and 
the second half in 8.6. 775: thus 
Ol. [Male le (PTR ese ee 9: ΕἼ Dee ONS 


Bey S770) 775. ΠΆΙΣ aD 15 1135} 6 πὶ 7, ἼΤΩ] 


ete. 


1. Hence the following rule for changing Olympiads 
into years B.C. : multiply the number of the Olympiad by 
4, and subtract the product from 780. The remainder 
will be the year B.c. in which the first year of that 
Olympiad began. 


726. The Year. — Besides the ordinary divisions of the 
year into spring (7p), summer (θέρος). autumn (ὀπώρα). 
and winter (χειμών). the year was divided into twelve 
months, containing alternately 30 (μῆνες πλήρεις.) and 29 
(μῆνες κοῖλοι) days each. But such a year ((6 x 80) + 
(6 x 29) = 304) had only 354 days, and hence was roughly 
114 days too short. In eight years (8 x 111 = 90) the 
difference would amount to 90 days, or three months of 
30 days each. So in every cycle of eight years (évveaern- 
pis) an extra month of 30 days (Iloc(e)idemv δεύτερος) was 
inserted in the 3d, 5th, and 8th year, thus making those 
years to contain 384 days. The slight error remaining 
was variously equated. 

1. The year in Attica began theoretically with the sum- 
mer solstice (June 21), although actually it varied from 
the middle of June to the first week in August. The 
months followed one another in the following order : 


1. “Βκατομβαιών (about July) 7. Ταμηλιών (about January) 
2. Μεταγειτνιών (August) 8. ᾿Ανθεστηριών (February) 
3. Βοηδρομιών (September) 9. ᾿Ελαφηβολιών (March) 

4. ἸΤυανοψιών (October) 10. Μουνιχιών (April) 

5. Μαιμακτηριών (November) 11. Θαργηλιών (May) 

6. Ποσ(ε)λιδεών (December) 12. Σκιροφοριών (June) 

(6%. Ποσ(ελ)ιδεών δεύτερος, in leap 


years only) 


910 GREEK CHRONOLOGY 


Notre.— The names of the Attic months in their order may be 
readily recalled by the following nonsense: Hector Met a Boy with a 
Pie. “My Poor Gamin!” Answered with A~Mlaugh “ Money, There, 
Skip!” 


"727. The Month. — The days of the month were usually 
reckoned as follows : 


1. νουμηνία. 

2-10. δευτέρα (τρίτη, etc.! § 152) ἱσταμένου, --- δεκάτη ἱσταμένου. 

11. ἑνδεκάτη. 

12. δωδεκάτη. 

13-19. τρίτη (ete. § 152) ἐπὶ δέκα --- ἐνάτη ἐπὶ δέκα. 

90. εἰκάς, or δεκάτη προτέρα. 

21. δεκάτη φθίνοντος or δεκάτη ὑστέρα. 

22-29. ἐνάτη (ὀγδόη, ete.! § 152) φθίνοντος --- δευτέρα φθίνοντος. 

90. ἕνῃ καὶ νέα. 

In the months of 29 days the δευτέρα φθίνοντος was omitted. 

Nore. — Later the days 22-29 were also designated as δευτέρα 
(τρίτη. ete.) μετ᾽ εἰκάδας. 


728. The Day. — The Greeks had no accurate divisions 
of the day (which was reckoned from sunrise to sunset), 
but employed the usual rough divisions of morning (πρωί). 
mid-day (μεσημβρίαν). and afternoon (δείλη). Other desig- 
nations such as ὄρθρος dawn, περὶ πλήθουσαν ayopav about 
the time the market place is crowded (10 or 11 o'clock), 
περὶ ἄριστον about lunch time, etc., were also used. 

The early part of the night was called ἑσπέρα evening, 
and midnight was μέση νύξ. 

For measuring a definite lapse of time (as in the law 
courts) the water clock (κλεψύδρα) was employed. 


1 Τὴ Attica τετράς was commonly employed instead of τετάρτη fourth. 


APPENDIX F 


729. LIST OF VERBS 


[Attic principal parts in full-faced type. Ionic and poetic forms at the 
bottom of the page.] 


In the following list, as a rule, only those tenses are given which actually 
oceur in the works of the classical writers which have been preserved, but 
there is good reason to believe that, in most verbs, the other tenses, not listed 
here, were also in use; but, by chance, no instance of such use happens to 
survive. Nor is it at all certain that some of the verbs classed as poetic or 
Ionic may not have been used also in prose. Such a classification is neces- 
sarily arbitrary, and it is made only for convenience. 


ἀγάλλω (ἀγαλ-. ὃ 195, 3) adorn, fut. ἀγαλῶ, Ist aor. ἤγηλα. 

ἄγα-μαι admire, aor. ἠγάσθην (§ 158, 3), vb]. ἀγαστός (8 189). 

ἀγγέλλω (dyyeA-, § 195, 3) announce, fut. ἀγγελῶ, Ist aor. ἤγγειλα, Ist 
perf. ἤγγελκα, perf. mid. ἤγγελμαι, Ist aor. pass. nyyéAOnv. 

ayelpw (ayep-, ὃ 195, 4, cf. ἀγορά) collect, 150 aor. ἤγειρα. 

ἄγ-νυ-μι (§ 196, 5, theme dy-, for fay-, ὃ 2 a) break (in composition 
also ἀγνύω), fut. (κατ)άξω, Ist aor. (κατ)έαξα (8 172, 2), 2d pf. 
(xar)éaya ($$ 180; 494, 3), 2d aor. pass. (Kar )eaynv (8 172, 2). 

ay-o ($ 193) lead, fut. ἄξω (ef. § 515, 1), 2d aor. ἤγαγον (ὃ 208, 1), 
2d perf. Axa (8 219, 1), perf. mid. ἦγμαι, Ist aor. pass. ἤχθην, vbl. 
ἀκτέος. 


[ἀάω] harm, infatuate (da-), epic and poetic only, Ist aor. daca and aca, 
Ist aor. pass. ἀάσθην. 

ἄγαμαι, epic fut. ἀγάσ(σγομαι, epic Ist aor. ἠγασ(σ)άμην. 

ἀγάομαι (epic) = ἄγαμαι. Homer has also dyaloua envy. 

ayelpw, Homer has 2d aor. 3d sing. ἤγρετο (Mss. ἔγρετο). 3d pl. ἤγροντο 
(Mss. ἀγέροντο), infin. ἀγρέσθαι (Mss. ἀγέρεσθαι), partic. ἀγρόμενος 
(§ 208), plpf. mid. 3d pl. dynyéparo (§ 226 a), Ist aor. pass. ἠγέρθην. 
For ἀγερέθονται (Mss. ἠγ-) and ἠγερέθοντο. see ὃ 191 a. 

ἄγω, Homer has Ist aor. ΡΥ. déere, infin. ἀξέμεναι. See 8 201 Ὁ. 

377 


378 ' LIST OF VERBS [8 729 
[Attic principal parts in full-faced type. Ionic and poetic forms at the 
bottom of the page. ] 
ἀγωνίζομαν (8 292, 6) contend (middle deponent, § 158, 3), fut. ἀγωνιοῦ- 
par (§ 215), 150 aor. ἠἡγωνισάμην, perf. ἠγώνισμαι, vbl. ἀγωνιστέος. 

aS-w (dd-, § 193) sing, fut. ἄσομαι (§ 507), Ist aor. yoo, Ist aor. pass. 
ἤσθην, vbl. ἀστέος. 

αἰδοῦμαι (-έομαι) (αἰδεσ-, § 188) fear, respect, fut. αἰδέσομαν and αἰδε- 
σθήσομαι (see § 519, note 2), aor. ἠδέσθην (less often ηδεσάμην, 
§ 158, 3), perf. ἤδεσμαι. 

alkifopar (§ 292, 6; middle deponent, § 158, 5) outrage, fut. αἰκιοῦμαι 
(§ 215), aor. ἠκισάμην, perf. ἤἥκισμαι, Ist aor. "pass. ηκίσθην (δ 510). 

αἰνῶ (-ἔω, § 188) praise (usually in composition), fut. αἰνέσω, and also 
fut. mid. -atvéropar (§ 507), Ist aor. -ἥνεσα, perf. -ἤνεκα, perf. pass. 
ἤνημαι (8. 188, 1), Ist aor. pass. ῃνέθην, vbl. aiveréos. 

αἱρῶ (-ἔω) (aipe-, § 193) take (mid. choose), fut. αἱρήσω (§ 187), aor. 
supplied (§ 164) by 2d aor. εἶλον (δ 172, 2, from stem €A-, subj. 
ἕλω, opt. ἕλοιμι, etc.), Ist perf. ἥρηκα, perf. mid. ἥρημαι, Ist aor. 
pass. ἠρέθην (ὃ 188, 1), vbl. aiperéos (ὃ 158, 1). 

αἴρω (for *ap-ww (ap-) § 195, 4) raise, fut. apd (§ 215), Ist aor. ἦρα 
(subj. apw, opt. ἄραιμι, ete.), perf. ἦρκα, perf. mid. ἦρμαι, Ist 
aor. pass. ἤρθην (fut. pass. ἀρθήσομαι), vb. ἀρτέος. 

αἰσθ-άν-ομαι (§ 196, 2, theme aic6-) perceive (middle deponent, § 158, 
3), fut. αἰσθήσομαι, 2d aor. ῃσθόμην, perf. ἤσθημαι. 

αἰσχύνω ($$ 292, 9; 195, 4, theme αἰσχυν-) disgrace (mid. feel 
ashamed), fut. αἰσχυνῶ, Ist aor. ἤσχυνα (perf. mid. partic. epic 
noxvppevos), Ist aor. pass. ἠσχύνθην, vbI. αἰσιχυντέος. 

αἰτιῶμαι (-douat, § 193) blame, fut. αἰτιάσομαι, etc. (§ 187), middle 
deponent (ὃ 158, 5) regular. 


[root ὧδε- be sated, epic aor. opt. ἀδήσειε, pf. partic. ἀδηκότες. 

ᾷἄδω, Ionic and poetic ἀείδω. 

[root de-], Ist aor. (epic) deoa and aca slept. 

ἀέξω, see αὔξω. 

ἄη-μι (8 193; theme de-, ἀη-) blow (poetic, mostly epic), pres. 8d dual 
ἄητον (ὃ 200 a), 3d pl. ἀεῖσι (§ 200 b), impf. 3d sing. dy, infin. ἀήμεναι 
and ἀῆναι (§ 200 a), partic. ἀείς (-évros), impf. mid. θα sing. ἄητο 
(§ 200 a), partic. ἀήμενος (8. 200 a). 

αἴρω, Ionic and poetic delpw, 1st aor. Hepa, Ist aor. pass. ἠέρθην, plpf. mid. 
94 sing. dwpro (or dopto). 

aipS, Herodotus has 1st pf. ἀρ-αίρηκα, and pf. mid. dp-alpnua (δ 179). 

diw hear (Ionic and poetic), impf. dior, Ist aor. ἐπ-ήϊσα. 


§ 729] LIST OF VERBS 379 
[Attic principal parts in full-faced type. Ionic and poetic forms at the 
bottom of the page.] 
ἀκοῦμαι (-έομαι, ὃ 188, theme ἀκεσ-) heal (middle deponent, § 158, 3), 
aor. ἠκεσάμην, vVbI. ἀκεστός (ὃ 159). 

akov-w (ὃ 195) hear, fut. mid. ἀκούσομαι (§ 507), 1st aor. ἤκουσα, 2d 
perf. ἀκήκοα (8 179; for ξΞάκήκορα, § 21), Ist aor. pass. ἠκούσθην 
(§ 189), vbls. ἀκουστός, -τέος. 

ἀκροῶμαι (-ἄομαι, ὃ 193) listen, fut. dxpoaropar (ὃ 187), etc., middle 
deponent (ὃ 158, 3) regular. 

ἀλαλάζω (ὃ 195, 2, dAaday-) raise the war-cry, fut. ἀλαλάξομαι (ὃ 507), 
Ist aor. ἡλάλαξα. 

ἀλείφ-ω (8 193, 2; theme ἀλειφ-, ἀλιφ-, § 14, 2) anoint, fut. ἀλείψω, 
Ist aor. ἤλειψα, 2d perf. ἀλήλιφα (8 179, § 219, note 2), perf. mid. 
ἀλήλιμμαι (ὃ 247), Ist aor. pass. ἠλείφθην, vbl. ἀλειπτέος. 

ἀλέξω (ὃ 193; theme ἀλεξ-, ἀλεκ-, ἀλκ-, § 14, 1) fut. ἀλέξομαι, Ist aor. 
ἠλεξάμην. 

(ἀλίνδω) roll, 150 aor. ἤλισα, Ist perf. ἤλικα, perf. pass. part. ἠλινδη- 
μένος (ὃ 190). 

ἁλ-ίσκομαι (§ 197, theme ad-, ado-) be taken (used as pass. of αἱρῶ), 
fut. ἁλώσομαι, 2d aor. ἑάλων or ἥλων (ὃ 172, 2, subj. add, etc., 
opt. ἁλοίην, ete., inf. ἁλῶναι, partic. ἁλούς, § 256), Ist perf. ἑάλωκα 
or ἥλωκα, vb]. ἁλωτός. 


ἀκ-αχ-ίζω (§ 292, 6; reduplicated (§ 179 a) theme from root dx-) pain, 
distress. Other presents of similar meaning from the same root are 
ἀχ-εύω, ἀχ-έω, ἄχ-ομαι, ἄχ-νυ-μαι be distressed. All other tenses are 
formed from the theme ἀκαχ- or ἀκαχε- (ὃ 190) ; thus fut. ἀκαχήσω 
(8 519 a), Ist aor. (rare) ἀκάχησα, 2d aor. ἤκαχον, pf. mid. ἀκάχημαι 
be distressed (§ 585, doubtful is ἀκηχέδ-αται 3d pl.), partic. as adj. 
ἀκαχήμενος distressed. (Doubtful is ἀκηχέμενος.) 
ἀκ-αχ-μένος (epic pf. partic. from root dk-) sharpened. 
ἀλδαίνω and ἀλδάνω nourish (poetic only), impf. (or 2d aor. ?) ἤλδανον. 
λέξω, Ionic and poetic are fut. ἀλεξήσω and ἀλεξήσομαι, Ist aor. ἠλέξησα, 
epic 2d aor. ἄλαλκον (ὃ 208). 
ἀλεύω avert (poetic), mostly in mid. ἀλεύομαι and ἀλέομαι (ὃ 21) avoid, 
Ist aor. ἀλευάμην (ὃ 207, note 1) and ἀλεάμην (ὃ 21). 
adjvat, see εἴλω. 
ἄλθομαι be healed (Ionic and poetic), fut. ἀλθήσομαι (ὃ 190). 
ἁλίσκομαι, Epic 2d aor. subj. ἁλώω, adwys, etc. 
ἀλιτ-αίνομαι (§§ 196, 2; 195, 4) stn (poetic, mostly epic), 2d aor. ἤλιτον, 
pf. partic. ἀλιτήμενος (ὃ 190), 


&. 


980 LIST OF VERBS [8 729 


[Attic principal parts in full-faced type. Ionic and poetic forms at the 
bottom of the page.] 

ἀλλάττω (8 195, note 2; ἀλλαγ-) change, fut. ἀλλάξω, Ist aor. ἤλλαξα, 
2d perf. -ἤλλαχα (8 219, 1), perf. mid. ἤλλαγμαι, aorists pass. 
ἠλλάχθην (Ist) and ἠλλάγην (2d), vbl. ἀλλακτέος. 

ἅλλομαι (ὃ 195, 3, theme aA-) leap, fut. ἁλοῦμαι, Ist aor. ἡλάμην (8 204). 

ἀλοῶ (-dw, § 193) thrash, 150 aor. ἡλόησα, perf. mid. ἡλόημαι, 

GAG (-€w, ὃ 188) grind, fut. ἀλῶ (ὃ 212, 1), Ist aor. ἤλεσα (ὃ 188), 
pf. mid. ἀλήλε(σ)μαι (ὃ 179). 

ἁμαρτάνω (§ 196, 2; theme ἁμαρτ- and dpapre-, ὃ 190) err, fut. ἁμαρτή- 
σομαι (8 507), 2d aor. ἥμαρτον, Ist perf. ἡμάρτηκα, perf. mid. 
ἡμάρτημαι, lst aor. pass. ἡμαρτήθην, vbls. -αμάρτητος, -réos. 

ἀμβλ-ίσκω (8 197, ἀμβλ- and dyPBro-) miscarry, 150 aor. τήμβλωσα, 1st 
perf. -7pBroxa, perf. mid. ἤμβλωμαι [1st aor. pass. ἡμβλώθην, late]. 

ἀμπ-έχω and ἀμπ-ίσχω (audit exw, § 40) have about, put about, clothe, like 
ἔχω and ἴσχω, q.v., but for the augment (ἠμπειχόμην) see § 175, note. 

ἀμύνω (8 195, 4: ἀμυν-) ward off (mid. defend, § 506), fut. ἀμυνῶ, Ist 
aor. Hpvva, VbI. ἀμυντέος. For ἠμὔναθον see § 191 a. 

ἀμύττω (ὃ 195,15; ἀμυχ-) scratch, fut. ἀμύξω, Ist aor. ἤμνξα. 

ἀμφιγνοῶ (-έω, ὃ 193) doubt, regular, but impf. ἡμφεγνόουν (ὃ 175, 
note), Ist aor. ἠμφεγνόησα (ὃ 175, note). 

ἀμφιέννυμι clothe, see ἕννυμι. 

ἀμφισβητῶ (-έω, § 193) dispute, regular, but impf. ἡμφεσβήτουν (ὃ 175, 
note), Ist aor. ἠμφεσβήτησα (ὃ 175, note). 

ἀναίνομαι (8 195, 4) refuse, mostly poetic; see below. 


ἅλλομαι, epic 2d aor. without vowel Ὁ (§ 207 a) ἄλσο, ἄλτο, partic. ἄλμενος. 


dado, poetic ἀλοιάω. 

ἀλυκτῶ (-€w) and ἀλυκτάζω be troubled, pf. mid. ἀλαλύκτημαι (δ 179 a). 

ἀλύ-σκω (§ 197) avoid (poetic), other tenses from ἀλυκ-, fut. ἀλύξω, Ist 
aor. ἤλυξα. 

ἀλφ-άνω (§ 196, 2) acquire (poetic), epic 2d aor. ἤἦλφον. 

ἀλῶμαι (-dowar) wander, epic impy. 2d sing. dddov (Mss. ἀλόω, §.199 bd), 
pf. ἀλάλημαι ($179 Ὁ and § 5385). Otherwise regular, but mostly poetic. 

ἁμαρτάνω, epic 2d aor. ἤμβροτον (for ἠμίβγ)ροτον, $$ 14; 88, with sympa- 
thetic B, as in βλίττω and βλώσκω). 

ἀμείρω (for *dpuep-ww, ὃ 195, 4) and ἀμέρδω (cf. ἔρδω) deprive (poetic), Ist 
aor. ἤμερσα (ὃ 204 a), Ist aor. pass. ἠμέρθην. 

ἀμπλακ-ίσκω (§ 197) err (poetic), 2d aor. ἤμπλακον, partic. ἀμπλακών (also 
written ᾿ἅπλακών metri gratia), pf. mid. ἠμπλάκημαι (ἢ 190). 

ἀναίνομαι, 1st aor. ἠνηνάμην (poetic). 


§ 729] LIST OF VERBS 381 
[Attic principal parts in full-faced type. Ionic and poetic forms at the 
bottom of the page.] 
ἀναλ-ίσκω (for dva-pad-ioKw, ὃ 2a; theme avad-, § 197), also ἀναλῶ 
(-0w, theme ἀνᾶλο-) expend, fut. ἀναλώσω, Ist aor. ἀνήλωσα, Ist perf. 
ἀνήλωκα,. perf. mid. ἀνήλωμαι, Ist aor. pass. ἀνηλώθην, vb. ἀναλωτέος. 

ἁνδάνω (ὃ 196, 2; theme ἐδ- for ἔσραδ-, § 36 a), mostly epic and Ionic 
(see below), but partic. ἄσμενος pleasing is much used as an 
adjective. 

ἀνέχω hold up, ἀνέχομαι endure, like ἔχω, but for the augment (ἠνειχό- 
μὴν) see § 175, note. 

ἀν-οίγω open, see olyw. 

ἀντιβολῶ (-ew) meet, beseech, often has two augments (§ 175, note), as 
150 aor. ἠντεβόλησα. 

ἀντιδικῶ (-ew) be a defendant, sometimes has two augments (8 175, 
note), as Ist aor. ἠντεδίκησα. 

avi-o (8 193) and dvitw (§ 194) accomplish, fut. ἀνύσω, 150 aor. ἤνυσα, 
Ist perf. ἤνυκα, perf. mid. ἤνυσμαι, vbl. ἀνυστός. 

ἅπτω (8 194; theme ἀφ- ὃ 25) fasten, kindle, fut. &po, Ist aor. ἥψα, 
perf. mid. ἥμμαι, 150 aor. pass. ἥφθην. 

ἀράττω (ἢ 195, note 2; theme dpay-) strike, fut. ἀράξω, Ist aor. ἤραξα, 
Ist aor. pass. ἠράχθην. 


ἁνδάνω, impf. ἑάνδανον (ὃ 172, 2), ἅνδανον (§ 171 a), and ἥνδανον (Hat.). 
Homeric Mss. give (probably wrongly) ἑήνδανον for ἑάνδανον, and ἥνδα- 
νον for ἅνδανον. fut. ἁδήσω (ὃ 190), 2d aor. ἕαδον (Hdt.), epic ἅδον 
(8 171 a) and εὕαδον (for *éofadov, Ἐἐρραδονὶ), 2d pf. ada (ὃ 180). 

ἀνήνοθε grows or grew (epic 2d pf.). 

aviw, epic future ἀνύω (ὃ 216). 

ἄνω (poetic) = ἁνύω. 

ἄνωγα, epic 2d pf. command (ὃ 535), Ist pl. ἄνωγμεν, impv. ἄνωχθι and 
(with middle endings), 3d sing. ἀνώχθω, 2d pl. ἄνωχθε, plupf. ἠνώγεα. 
Also pres. ἀνώγω to which all forms with the variable vowel Ξ᾿ in- 
cluding the subj. ἀνώγω, and the opt. ἀνώγοιμι, are to be referred ; 
fut. dvwéw, 150 aor. ἤνωξα. 

ἀπ-αφ-ίσκω (δ 197) deceive (poetic), 2d aor. ἤπαφον (partic. ἀπαφών). 

ἀπηύρων (contr. from -aov), epic impf. took away, partic. ἀπούρας are 
probably traditional Mss. readings embodying ἀπ-έρρων and amo-rpas 
(§ 2a). 

ap-ap-icxw (§$§ 197, 1; 179; theme dp-) fit (poetic), Ist aor. (trans. § 494, 1) 
ἦρσα (ὃ 204 a), 2d aor. (trans. and intrans.) ἤραρον, partic. mid. ἄρμε- 
vos fitting (δ 210 a), 2d pf. dpapa (ὃ 179) (Tonic ἄρηρα. ὃ 15 a). 


382 LIST OF VERBS [§ 729 


[Attic principal parts in full-faced type. Ionic and poetic forms at the 
bottom of the page.] 

ἀρέ-σκω ($197; theme dpe-, ὃ 188) please, fut. ἀρέσω, Ist aor. ἤρεσα, vbl. 
ape Tos. 

ἀρκῶ (-έω, § 188) assist, suffice, fut. ἀρκέσω (ὃ 188), 150 aor. ἤρκεσα ($188). 

ἁρμόττω (8 195, note 2, dpyoy-), also ἁρμόζω (ὃ 195, 2, ἁρμοδ-) fit, 
fut. ἁρμόσω. Ist aor. ἥρμοσα, perf. mid. ἥρμοσμαι (§ 189), Ist aor. 
pass. ἡρμόσθην (ὃ 189), vbl. dppooréos. 

ἀρνοῦμαι (-έομαι, ὃ 187) deny; passive deponent (8 158, 3) regular. 

ἁρπάζω (ὃ 195, 2; theme dpzray-, but see § 195, 2 a) seize, snatch, fut. 
ἁρπάσομαι (ὃ 507), seldom ἁρπάσω, Ist aor. ἥρπασα, Ist perf. 

ἥρπακα, perf. mid. or pass. ἥρπασμαι, Ist aor. pass. ἡρπάσθην. 

(dptivw) ἀρτύ-ω (§ 193) prepare, fut. ἀρτύσω; Ist aor. ἤρτυσα, 180 perf. 
-hptuka, perf. mid. ἤρτυμαι, Ist aor. pass. ἡρτύθην. 

dpv-w (§ 193) and ἀρύ-τω (8 194) draw (water), Ist aor. ἤρυσα, Ist 
aor. pass. ἠρύθην, vb. -αρυστέος (§ 189). 

apx-w (ὃ 193) begin, command, fut. ἄρξω, Ist aor. ἦρξα, 2d perf. ἦρχα, 
perf. mid. ἤργμαι, Ist aor. pass. ἤρχθην, vb. ἀρκτέος. 

ἀρῶ (-όω, 8 188) plow, Ist aor. ἤροσα (ὃ 188), Ist aor. pass. ἠρόθην 
(8 188). 

ἀρῶμαι (-ἄομαι, § 187) pray (middle deponent, § 158, 3), fut. -αράσομαι, 
Ist aor. ἠρασάμην, perf. -ἡρᾶμαι. 

avatvw (for *avav-vw, § 195, 4) dry, fut. abave, 150 aor. ninva, Ist aor. 
pass. ηὑάνθην. 

αὐλίζομαι encamp (middle and passive deponent, § 158, 3), aor. ηὐλίσθην 
and ηὐλισάμην. 

αὐξάνω (ὃ 196, 2, avé-) and αὔξ-ω (§ 193) make to increase, grow, fut. 
αὐξήσω (§ 190), 150 aor. ηὔξησα (ὃ 190), Ist perf. ηὔξηκα (§ 190), 
perf. mid. ηὔξημαι, 150 aor. pass. ηὐξήθην. 


ἀρημένος (epic pf. mid. partic.) oppressed (derivation unknown). 

ἀρνοῦμαι, also as middle deponent (ὃ 158, 5), poetic and Ionic. 

ἄρ-νυ-μαι (§ 196, 5; theme dp-) win, fut. dpoduar, 2d aor. ἠρόμην (infin. 
᾿ἄρέσθαι). 

ἁρπάζω. epic fut. ἁρπάξω (§ 195, 2a) and Ist aor. usually ἥρπαξα (§ 195, 2 ἃ). 

aca, see [ddw] ; ἄσαμεν, see [de-]. 

avéw, epic and Ionic present also ἀέξω. 

apdoow feel, 150 aor. ἥφασα (lonic). 

ἀφύσσω dip up (poetic), fut. ἀφύξω, Ist aor. ἤφυσα (from ἀφύω). 

[root a-] satiate, satiate one’s self (epic), pres. infin. ἄμεναι, fut. infin, 
doe, Ist aor, subj. doy, Ist pl. ἕωμεν ἢ sic), opt. ἄσαιμι, infin. aca 


§ 729] LIST OF VERBS 383 
{Attic principal parts in full-faced type. Ionic and poetic forms at the 
bottom of the page. ] 
ἄχθ-ομαι (ὃ 195, theme ἀχθ- and ἀχθεσ-) be oppressed in spirit, displeased 
(passive deponent, ὃ 158, 3), fut. ἀχθέσομαι (ὃ 188) and ἀχθεσθήσο- 

μαι (δ 519, note 2), Ist aor. ἠχθέσθην (ὃ 188). 


βαδίζω (cf. § 292, 6) go, fut. βαδιοῦμαι (ὃ 215 and ὃ 507), vbl. βαδιστέον. 

βαίνω (for ἔβαν-ιω, ὃ 195, 4; theme βα-, in the present Ba-v-, § 196) 
go, fut. βήσομαι (δ 507), βήσω shall cause to go (cf. § 494, 1, note), 
Ist aor. ἔβησα caused to go (δ 494, 1), 2d aor. ἔβην went (ὃ 494), 
Ist pf. βέβηκα, pf. mid. BéBapar, Ist aor. pass. -ἐβάθην, vbls. Bards, 
-βατέος. 

βάλλω (for ἔβαλ-ιω, § 195, 8, theme βαλ-) throw, fut. βαλῶ (rarely 
βαλλήσω (§ 190) of continued action; ef. § 519), 2d aor. ἔβαλον, 
Ist pf. βέβληκα (§ 218, 3), pf. mid. βέβλημαι (8 224, 1), Ist aor. 
pass. ἐβλήθην (ὃ 251, 2), vbl. βλητέος. 

᾿ βάπ-τω (δ 194; theme Bad-) dip, fut. Bao, Ist aor. Baya, pf. mid. 
βέβαμμαι, 2d aor. pass. ἐβάφην, vbl. βαπτός. 

βιάζομαι force, middle deponent (ὃ 158, 3), regular, has also aor. pass. 
ἐβιάσθην was forced (§ 510). 

βιβάζω make go, fut. βιβάσω and βιβῶ (8 212, 1), Ist aor- ἐβίβασα, vbl. 
βιβαστέος. 

βι-βρώ-σκω (ὃ 197,1; theme βρω-) eat, Ist pf. βέβρωκα (2d pf. partic. 
BeBpares, § 220), pf. mid. BéBpwpar, other forms supplied from 
ἐσθίω, q.v. 

Bid (-όω, § 292, 1) live, fut. βιώσομαι (§ 507), 2d aor. ἐβίων (rarely Ist 
aor. €Biwoa), Ist pf. βεβίωκα, pf. mid. βεβίωμαι, vbls. βιωτός, βιωτέος. 

(βιώ-σκομαι) ἀνα-βιώσκομαι (§ 197) revive, Ist aor. ἀνεβιωσάμην (ὃ 207, 
note 3), and 2d aor. ἀνεβίων (ὃ 207, note 5). 

βλάπτω (8 194; theme Braf-) hurt, fut. Brae, Ist aor. Barapa, 2d pf. 
βέβλαφα (ὃ 219, 1), pf. mid. βέβλαμμαι, aorists pass. ἐβλάφθην (1st) 
and ἐβλάβην (2d). 

βλαστάνω (ὃ 196,2; theme βλαστ-) sprout, 2d aor. ἔβλαστον, Ist pf. 
βεβλάστηκα (ὃ 190) and sometimes ἐβλάστηκα (cf. § 178, 1). 


βάζω speak (poetic), fut. βάξω. 

Baivw, Homer has Ist aor. with variable vowel ἐβήσετο (§ 201 b); also a 
pres. βά-σκω (§ 197) = βαίνω. 

βάλλω, epic 2d aor. forms βλή-την, βλῆ-το (§ 207 a). 

Bi-Ba-w, βί-βη-μι (δ 195, 8; Ba-, epic = βαίνω go), pres. partic. βιβάς. 

βιβρώσκω, epic poetry has also 2d aor. ἔβρων, Ist aor. pass. ἐβρώθην. 


984 ᾿ LIST OF VERBS [8 729 


[Attic principal parts in full-faced type. Ionic and poetic forms at the 
bottom of the page.] 

βλέπ-ω (§ 193) see, fut. βλέψομαι (§ 507), Ist aor. ἔβλεψα. 

βλίττω (for ἔἜμ(β)λιτ-ιω, § 195, 1, from theme μλιτ- (μέλι, μέλιτ-ος 
honey) with sympathetic 8, before which yz disappears) take honey, 
Ist aor. ἔβλισα. 

βόσκω feed, fut. βοσκήσω (ὃ 190), vbl. βοσκητέος (ὃ 190). 

βούλ-ομαι (8 193; theme βουλ- and βουλε-, § 190), passive deponent 
(§ 158, 3) will, wish, fut. βουλήσομαι (ὃ 190), Ist aor. ἐβουλήθην 
and ἠβουλήθην, perf. βεβούλημαι, ν}}]. βουλητός. 

βοῶ (-άω, § 292, 3) cry out, fut. βοήσομαι (§ 507), Ist aor. ἐβόησα. 

βυνῶ (-vé-w, 8 196,4; theme Bv-) stop up, fut. βύσω, Ist aor. Buca, 
pf. pass. βέβυσμαι (ὃ 189), vbl. βυστός. 


γαμῶ (-έω, 88. 190; 193) marry (see ὃ 506), fut. γαμῶ (§ 215), 1st aor. 
éynpa, pf. γεγάμηκα (ὃ 190), pf. mid. and pass. γεγάμημαι (δ 190), 
vbls. γαμετός (ὃ 188, 1) and yapnréos. 

γελῶ (-dw, § 193) laugh, fut. γελάσομαι ($$ 188; 507), 150 aor. ἐγέλασα 
(§ 188), Ist aor. pass. ἐγελάσθην (ὃ 159). 


βλώ-σκω (§ 197; for u(8)d\w-oxw, from theme μλω- (ὃ 38, 1) with sympa- 
thetic 8, before which μ is lost ; theme μολ- or u(8)Aw-) go (poetic), 
fut. μολοῦμαι, 2d aor. ἔμολον, Ist pf. wé-uBw-ka (with sympathetic β). 

βούλομαι, Homer has also βόλομαι and a 2d pf. act. mpo-Bé-Bovd-a prefer. 

βοῶ, epic and Ionic fut. βώσομαι, Ist aor. ἔβωσα, pf. mid. βέβωμαι, Ist aor. 
pass. ἐβώσθην (ὃ 189). 

[root Bpax-] only 2d aor. ἔβραχε resounded (infin. βραχεῖν), epic. 

βρίζω slumber (epic), Ist aor. ἔβριξα (cf. ὃ 195, 2 a). 

[root Bpox] swallow (epic), lst aor. ἔβροξα, 2d pf. βέβροχα, 2d aor. pass. 
partic. -βροχείς. 

Bpvx Guar (-άομαι) roar (poetic), 1st aor. mid. ἐβρυχησάμην, Ist aor. pass. 
partic. βρυχηθείς, 2d pf. (from theme Bpvx-) βε-βρῦχ-α. 


γά-νυ-μαι (8 196, 5) rejoice (poetic), the epic fut. γανύσσομαι (cf. § 201 a) 
retains -νυ- of present stem. 

yé-ywv-a 2d pf. as pres. (§ 535) shout (poetic), only partic. γεγωνώς 
(cf. ἄνωγα). Other forms are from pres. γεγώνω or yeywréw, fut. 
γεγωνήσω, Ist aor. ἐγεγώνησα. Also a present yeywy-loxw (ὃ 197). 

yelvouae (ὃ 195, 4) be born (poetic), deponent, but Ist aor. ἐγεινάμην 
begat, bore (see § 508). 

γέντο seized, epic 2d aor. 


§ 729] LIST OF VERBS 5385 
[Attic principal parts in full-faced type. Ionic and poetic forms at the 
bottom of the page. ] 

(γηθῶ (-éw)) rejoice (οἴ. § 190), 2d pf. γέγηθα (ὃ 535). 

γηρά-σκω (8 197) and ynp@ (-dw, § 292, 3) grow old, fut. γηράσομαι 
(§ 507) rarely γηράσω, Ist aor. ἐγήρασα, Ist pf. γεγήρακα. 

yi-yv-opat (ὃ 193, 3; theme yov-, yev-, yv-, ὃ 14) become, be, fut. γενή- 
σομαι (8 190), 2d aor. ἐγενόμην (ὃ 158, 3), pf. γεγένημαι, 2d pf. 
yéyova (§ 494, 2). 

γι-γνώ-σκω (ὃ 197, 1; yvw-) know, fut. γνώσομαι (ὃ 507), 2d aor. ἔγνων 
(subj. γνῶ, opt. γνοίην, impy. γνῶθι, inf. γνῶναι, partic. γνούς, cf. 
§ 256), Ist pf. ἔγνωκα, pf. mid. ἔγνωσμαι (ὃ 189), Ist aor. pass. 
ἐγνώσθην (§ 189), vbls. γνωστός, γνωστέος (ὃ 189). 

γλύφ-ὦ grave, regular, but pf. mid. yéyAvppar and ἔγλυμμαι (cf. § 178, 1). 

ypad-w (§ 193) write, fut. γράψω, Ist aor. ἔγραψα, 2d pf. γέγραφα, pf. 
mid. yéypappat, 2d aor. pass. ἐγράφην. vbl. γραπτός. 

γρύζω (ὃ 195, 2; ypvy-) grunt, fut. γρύξομαι (rarely ypvéw, § 507), Ist 
aor. ἔγρυξα. 


δάκ-νω (8 196, 1; theme dax-, δηκ-, § 13) bite, fut. δήξομαι (δ 507), 2d aor. 
ἔδακον (ὃ 208), pf. mid. δέδηγμαι, 150 aor. pass. ἐδήχθην. 


779, in poetry also fut. γηθήσω. and Ist aor. ἐγήθησα. 

γίγνομαι, Ionic γίνομαι. For the forms of the 2d pf. (ye-yd-aor, γε-γά-την, 
ye-ya-via, etc.) with the’ weak root ya- (for *yv-, ὃ 14 note) see 
§ 219 ἃ. Ionic has also an aor. pass. ἐγενήθην (ὃ 510). 

γιγνώσκω, Ionic γινώσκω, Herodotus has Ist aor. ἀνέγνωσα convinced. 

γοάω bewail (epic), fut. γοήσομαι (ὃ 507), 2d aor. (from theme γο-) γόον 
(§ 171 a). 


[root da-] teach (poetic, cf. δι-δά-σκω), 2d aor. δέδαον (ὃ 208, 1 a) and 
ἔδαον (infin. δεδαέσθαι, §§ 208, 1a; 199 b), Ist pf. δεδάηκα (ὃ 190), 
and 2d pf. partic. dedads (8 220), pf. mid. δεδάημαι (ὃ 190), 2d aor. 
pass. as intrans. (see ὃ 514) ἐδάην learned, fut. pass. as intrans. 
δαήσομαι shall learn (ὃ 514). 

δαΐζω (ὃ 195, 2; daiy-) rend (epic and lyric), fut. δαΐξω, Ist aor. ἐδάϊξα, 
pf. mid. deddiyuar, Ist aor. pass. édatx Any. 

δαί-νῦ-μι (8 196, 5) entertain (poetic), mid. feast (for opt. δαινῦτο see 
§ 211, 2a), fut. δαίσω, Ist aor. ἔδαισα, Ist aor. pass. partic. δαισθείς 
(§ 189). 

δαίομαι divide (epic, cf. daréouac), pres. subj. δά (ι)ηται, pf. mid. δέδαιμαι. 

δαίω (for ἔδαρ-ιω, §§ 2 ἃ; 195, 4) kindle (poetic), 2d pf. δέδηα blaze 
(§ 494, 3). 


BABBITT’S GR. GRAM. — 25 


386 LIST OF VERBS [8 729 
[Attic principal parts in full-faced type. lIonic and poetic forms at the 
bottom of the page.] 
Sapatw (cf. § 292, 6) subdue, Ist aor. ἐδάμασα, Ist aor. pass. ἐδαμάσθην. 
(dap6-av-w) (ὃ 196, 2) sleep (usually κατα-δαρθάνω), 2d aor. κατ-έδαρθον, 
Ist pf. partic. κατα-δεδαρθηκώς (ὃ 190). 

(δατέομαι) (cf. δαίομαι) divide, Ist aor. mid. (ἀνγεδασάμην, pf. mid. 
(ἀνα)δέδασμαι (ὃ 189), vbl. (dva)Sacros. 

δέδοικα he afraid, see [dw]. 

δείκ-νυ-μι (§ 196, 5) show (also δεικνύω), fut. δείξω, Ist aor. ἔδειξα, etc., 
regular. See § 254. 

δέρω (also Seipw, § 195, 4; theme dep-, dap-, ὃ 14.1) flay, fut. Sepa, Ist 
aor. Sepa, pf. mid. δέδαρμαι (ὃ 224, note), 2d aor. pass. ἐδάρην 
(§ 232, 2). 

δέχ-ομαι (8 195) receive, fut. δέξομαι, Ist aor. ἐδεξάμην, rarely ἐδέχθην 
(§ 158, 5). pf. SeSeypar, Ist aor. pass. (δ 510) ἐδέχθην (usually in 
composition), vbl. Sexréos. 

δέω (for *der-w, § 2 a, § 193, 2 note) need, lack (cf. § 199, 2), fut. 
δεήσω (ὃ 190), Ist aor. ἐδέησα (§ 190), Ist pf. δεδέηκα (ὃ 190), 
pf. mid. δεδέημαι (§ 190), Ist aor. pass. ἐδεήθην (δ 190). Im- 
personal δεῖ zt is necessary. 

διαιτῶ (-aw, ὃ 195) regulate (life), arbitrate, fut. διαιτήσω, Ist aor. διή- 
τησα and -εδιήτησα (ὃ 175, 1 and note), Ist pf. δεδιήτηκα (§ 181), 
pf. pass. δεδιήτημαι, 150 aor. pass. διῃτήθην. 


δάμ-νη-μι (ὃ 196, 3) and (doubtful) δαμνάω subdue (poetic), pf. mid. 
δέ-δμη-μαι (ὃ 38, 1), 2d. aor. pass. ἐδάμην and rarely Ist ἐδμήθην 
(§ 38, 1). Other forms are supplied from δαμάζω ; as fut. daudw or 
δαμῶ (ὃ 212, 1), Ist aor. ἐδάμασα or epic ἐδάμασσα (§ 201 a), ete. 

δαρθάνω, Homer has 2d aor. ἔδραθον (ὃ 38). 

δατέομαι, Homer has also fut. δάσομαι and Ist aor. ἐδασσάμην (δ 201 a). 

δέαται appears (epic), 150 aor. ἐδοάσσατο. 

δέδια (epic δείδια) fear. See [diw]. 

δείκνυμι, Ionic is fut. δέξω, Ist aor. ἔδεξα, etc. 

déu-w (§ 195) build (onic and poetic), Ist aor. ἔδειμα, pf. mid. δέ-δμη-μαι 
(§ 38, 1). 

δέρκ-ομαι (ὃ 193; theme δορκ-, depx-, δρακ-, §§ 14, 1; 38) look (poetic), 
2d aor. ἔδρακον (§ 208), 2d pf. δέ-δορκ-α (δ 219, 3), aorists pass. with 
active meaning (150) ἐδέρχθην, and (2d) ἐδράκην (ὃ 282, 2). 

δέω need, epic usually devouar, fut. δευήσομαι, Ist aor. ἐδεύησα. 

δηριάομαι (active rare) contend. Other tenses from δηρίομαι, fut. δηρίσο- 
μαι, Ist aor. ἐδηρισάμην, and 1st aor. pass. ἐδηρίνθην (as if from ἔδηρίνω). 


8 729] LIST OF VERBS 387 
[Attic principal parts in full-faced type. Ionic and poetic forms at the 
bottom of the page. ] 
δι-δά-σκω (8 197, 1; root δα-, q.v., but the present theme (διδαχ- 7, οἵ. 
διδαχή teaching) has been carried into the other tenses) teach, fut. 
διδάξω, Ist aor. ἐδίδαξα (see § 515, 1), 2d pf. δεδίδαχα, pf. mid. δε- 
SiSaypar, Ist aor. pass. ἐδιδάχθην, vbls. διδακτός, διδακτέος. 

δι-δρά-σκω (§ 197, 1; theme dpa-), only in composition, run away, fut. 
δράσομαι (8 507), 2d aor. ἔδραν (subj. -δρῶ, -ἄς, -ᾧ, etc., opt. -δραίην 
(like σταίην, § 257), infin. -δρᾶναι, partic. -dpas, -ἄσα, -av), Ist 
pf. -δέδρακα. 

δί-δω-μι (8 195, 5; for the inflection see ὃ 252) give, fut. δώσω, aor. 
ἔδωκα (ὃ 211, 3; for the inflection see ὃ 256), 180 pf. δέδωκα, pf. mid. 
δέδομαι (ὃ 188, 1), Ist aor. pass. ἐδόθην (ὃ 188, 1), vbls. δοτός, δοτέος. 

[δίω] theme δοι-, det-, δι-, § 14, 2 (for ἔδροι-, etc.), Ist aor. ἔδεισα, Ist 
pf. δέδοικα, and 2d pf. δέδια, rare in the singular (cf. §§ 219 a; 220; 
and the inflection of ἕστατον ὃ 258). 

διώκ-ω (ὃ 193) pursue, fut. διώξω or διώξομαι (§ 507), etc., regular. For 
διωκάθω see § 191 a. 

δοκῶ (-éw, § 190) seem, think, fut. δόξω, 1st aor. ἔδοξα (Ist pf. δεδόκηκα), 
pf. mid. δέδογμαι, Ist aor. pass. ἐδόχθην. 

δρῶ (-dw, § 193) do, fut. δράσω, etc., regular, but Ist aor. pass. ἐδράσθην 
(8 189), vbl. δραστέος (ὃ 189). 

δύνα-μαι (8 193) be able (augment sometimes 7-; for accent of pres. 
opt. see § 200 note), fut. δυνήσομαι, aor. pass. ἐδυνήθην (and ἠδυνή- 
Onv), pf. δεδύνημαι, vbl. δυνατός. 


δήω, epic fut. (ὃ 216) shall learn; cf. [δα-]. 

διδράσκω, Ionic διδρήσκω, δρήσομαι, ἔδρην, etc. (δ 15 8). 

δίδωμι, Homer has an unexplained fut. διδώσω. 

δίζη-μαι seek (Ionic and poetic) keeps ἡ throughout the present (ctf. ὃ 200 a), 
fut. διζήσομαι. Ist aor. ἐδιζησάμην. 

[δίη-μι] make flee, act. only in impf. 3d pl. ἐν-δίεσαν set on; mid. flee, 
pres. 3d pl. δίενται, subj. δίωμαι (cf. § 200 note), opt. 3d sing. δίοιτο 
(§ 170, 4), infin. δίεσθαι. 

[root dux-], only 2d aor. ἔδικον threw. 

[δίω] fear (epic), impf. δίον (§ 171, a), epic Ist aor. ἔδδεισα (ὃ 22 a), 
epic 180 pf. δείδοικα (for ἔἜδε-δροι-κα, ὃ 16), 2d pf. δείδια (ὃ 16). 

δοκῶ, poetic forms are fut. δοκήσω, Ist aor. ἐδόκησα, pf. mid. δεδόκημαι, 
Ist aor. pass. ἐδοκήθην (see § 190). 

dour (-éw) sound (mostly poetic), fut. δουπήσω, etc. regular (§ 187), 2d 
pf. δέδουπα. (Originally Ἐγδουπῶ, as shown by epic aor. ἐ-γδούπησαν.) 


588 LIST OF VERBS [§ 729 
[Attic principal parts in full-faced type. Ionic and poetic forms at the 
bottom of the page.] 
δύτω (ὃ 193) cause to enter, enter (§ 493, 1) (also rarely dv-vw (δ 196, 1) 
sink), fut. δύσω, Ist aor. ἔδυσα (trans., § 494, 1), 2d aor. iv 
(intrans. § 494, 1, for the inflection see ὃ 257), Ist pf. δέδυκα (§ 494, 
3), sometimes also dd0xa transitive, pf. mid. δέδυμαι, 150 aor. pass. 
ἐδύθην, vbl. δυτέος. 

δῶ (δέω, § 199, 3 note) bind, fut. δήσω, Ist aor. ἔδησα, Ist pf. δέδεκα 
(δ 188, 1), pf. mid. δέδεμαι (fut. pf. δεδήσομαι, ὃ 228), Ist aor. pass. 
ἐδέθην (ὃ 188, 1), vbls. Serds, δητός (ὃ 188, 1) and Seréos. 


éye(pw (for Ἐέγερ-ιω, § 195, 4; theme ἐγορ-. ἐγερ-- éyp-, ὃ 14) wake, rouse, 
fut. ἐγερῶ, Ist aor. ἤγειρα, 2d aor. mid. ἡγρόμην awoke, 2d pf. ἐγρή- 
yopa (with sympathetic p for *éy-nyopa, ὃ 179), Ist aor. pass. 
ἠγέρθην, vbl. ἐγερτέος. 

ἐγκωμιάζω praise, takes its augment and reduplication after the prepo- 
sition (ὃ 175, 1). 

ἐγχειρῶ, attempt, ἐγχειρίζω put in one’s hands, augment after the prepo- 
sition (ὃ 175, 1): as ἐνεχείρησα. 

[root ἐδ for *oed-, $36] ἕζομαι sit, usually καθέζομαι, fut. καθεδοῦμαι (cf. 
§ 212, 1), [1st aor. εἶσα] Ist aor. mid. εἱσάμην (8 172, 2). 

ἐθέλ-ω (§ 195), or less often θέλτ-ω wish (impf. ἤθελον). fut. ἐθελήσω or 
θελήσω (ὃ 190), Ist aor. ἠθέλησα (§ 190, but subj. ἐθελήσω or 
θελήσω, opt. ἐθελήσαιμι or θελήσαιμι. etc.), Ist pf. ἠθέληκα (δ 190). 

ἐθίζω (§ 292, 6; theme σρεθ-, ὃ 36 a) accustom, fut. ἐθιῶ (§ 215), 
Ist aor. εἴθισα (§ 172, 2), Ist pf. εἴθικα (δ 150), pf. mid. εἴθισμαι 
(δ 189, note), 1st aor. pass. εἰθίσθην (8 172, 2). 

[ἔθω (for ἔσρεθω, ὃ 36 a)] be accustomed, 2d pf. εἴωθα am accustomed 
(for ἔσεσροθα, cf. $$ 16; 36; 37; 219, 3), 2d plupf. εἰώθη. 

εἶδον saw (2d aor.), see [id-]. 


ἐάφθη, epic 150 aor. pass., probably from root fam- (§ 172, 2) was tumbled. 

éyeipw, Homeric forms of 2d pf. are 3d pl. indic. ἐγρηγόρθαᾶσι (?), 2d pl. 
impy. mid. ἐγρήγορθε (for *-yopode, ὃ 35), infin. mid. ἐγρηγόρθαι (for 
Ἔνγορσθαι, ὃ 35). 

ἔδω eat, poetic for ἐσθίω. g.v., 2d pf. partic. ἐδηδώς. 

{root ἐδ] epic fut. infin. ἕσσεσθαι, Ist aor. εἶσα or ἕσσα (ὃ 201a). See also 
ἵζω. 

ἔθω. pres. only in partic. ἔθων being accustomed (epic). εἴωθα, epic and 
Ionic also ἔωθα. 

εἴδομαι scem (poetic), Ist aor, εἰσάμην and ἐεισάμην (ὃ 172, 2). 


§ 729] LIST OF VERBS 389 
[Attic principal parts in full-faced type. Ionic and poetic forms at the 
bottom of the page.] 

εἰκάζω liken, guess (regular) augments usually to 7- (ef. § 173, 1). 

εἴκω yield (regular). For εἴκαθον see § 191 a. 

[root εἰκ-, also ix- and oik-, § 14, 2 (for *rec-, etc., § 2 a)], fut. εἴξω (cf. 
§ 519 note 2), 2d pf. ἔοικα (§ 180) with 3d pl. εἴξασι = ἐοίκασι, 2d 
plupf. ἐῴκη (for *é-pefouxy) and ἤκη (cf. plupf. of οἶδα, § 259). 

εἴλλω see dw. 

(€iA@(-ew) ) press hard, drive together, 1st aor. pass. (ἀν-)ειλήθην. 

εἶμι go, see § 261; εἰμί be, see § 262. 

εἶπον said (2d aor.), see [ἐπ-]. 

εἴργω (ὃ 193) shut in or out, also eipyvope and (rarely) εἱργνύω (δ 196, 5) 
shut in, fut. εἴρξω, Ist aor. εἶρξα, pf. mid. εἴργμαι, Ist aor. pass. εἴρχ- 
θην, vbls. eipxrds, εἰρκτέος. With a rough breathing (eipy-) the 
word is said to mean shut in, and with a smooth breathing (εἰργ-) 
shut out, but the distinction is not always observed. 

(elpopar) ask, fut. ἐρήσομαι (S 190), 2d aor. ἠρόμην. 

(εἴρω) theme ἐρ- (for *fep-, § 2 a) and βη- (for *¢pn, § 38, 1) say, fut. 
ἐρῶ, aor. supplied by εἶπον said, Ist pf. εἴρηκα (δ 178, 2 for ἔρε- 
Fpr-Ka, ὃ 16), pf. pass. εἴρημαι (fut. pf. εἰρήσομαι), Ist aor. pass. 
ἐρρήθην (fut. pass. ῥηθήσομαι), vbls. ῥητός, -τέος. 

εἴρω (δ 195, 4 : theme ἐρ- for Ἔσερ-) knit, join, 150 aor. -εἶρα, Ist pf. -εἶρκα, 
pf. mid. εἶρμαι (§ 180). 

ἐκκλησιάζω call an assembly, augment ἤκκλη- and ἐξεκλη- (§ 175, 1). 


{root εἰκ-} fut. εἴξω (§ 519, note 2) shall resemble. For epic ἐΐκτην, ἠΐκτο, 
etc., see § 219 a. Herodotus has also oika = ἔοικα. 

εἰλύτω (ὃ 199) roll (poetic), fut. εἰλύσω ete. regular, but Ist aor. pass. 
εἰλύσθην (ὃ 189). 

εἰλῶ and εἴλω (poetic, mostly epic). Other tenses from root εεὰλ- point to 
Ἔρελλω as perhaps the proper epic form; Ist aor. ἔλσα (ἔελσα) 
(§ 204 a), pf. pass. ἔελμαι, 2d aor. pass. εὐχὴν (8 252, 2). Herodotus 
has Ist aor. -είλησα, pf. mid. -είλημαι, Ist aor. pass. -ειἰλήθην. 

εἵμαρται it is fated. See μείρομαι. 

eipyw, epic pres. always éépyw shut in or out, other tenses from tae €py-; 
*eepy-,§ 2a). For pf. mid. ἔρχ-αται, plupf. (é)épy-aro, see § 226 a. 
For εἴργαθον, see ὃ 191 a. Herodotus commonly has épyw. 

elpoua ask (Ionic), fut. εἰρήσομαι (ὃ 190) ; cf. ἐρέω. 

εἴρω say (epic only), fut. ἐρέω, also Ist aor. pass. εἰρήθην (δ 172, 2). 

elpw join, epic Ist aor. ἕρσα (ὃ 204 a), epic pf. mid. partic. ἐερμένος. 

elaa. See [€6-]. 


990 LIST OF VERBS [8 729 


[Attic principal parts in full-faced type. Ionic and poetic forms at the 
bottom of the page.] 

ἐλαύνω (for *éAa-vu-w, § 196, 5, theme €Aa-) drive, fut. ἐχῶ (212, 1), Ist 
aor. ἤλασα, Ist pf. ἐλήλακα, pf. pass. ἐλήλαμαι, Ist aor. pass. 
ἠλάθην, vbI. ἐλατέος. 

ἐλέγχ-ω (§ 193) examine, confute, fut. ἐλέγξω, etc., regular, but pf. mid. 
ἐλήλεγμαι ($$ 179, 247). 

ἐλελίζω raise the war-cry, [st aor. ἡλέλιξα. 

ἐλίττω. εἰλίττω (ὃ 195,15; ἐλικ-) roll, fut. ἐλίξω, Ist aor. εἴλιξα (§ 172, 2), 
pf. pass. εἴλιγμαι (δ 180), Ist aor. pass. εἰλίχθην (δ 172, 2), vbI. ἐλικτός. 

€&x-w (§ 193), draw, fut. Age, other tenses from theme ἑλκυ-, Ist aor. 
εἵλκυσα (ὃ 172, 2), Ist pf. εἵλκυκα (δ 180), pf. mid. εἵλκυσμαι 
($§ 180; 189), Ist aor. pass. εἱλκύσθην ($§ 172,25; 189), vbls. ἑλκτέος, 
ἑλκυστέος. 

[root ἐλυθ-, ἐλθ-, § 20], only 2d aor. ἦλθον (impyv. ἐλθέ, § 210, note), 
and 2d pf. ἐλήλυθα (§ 179). See ἔρχομαι. 

ἐμῶ (-€w) vomit, fut. ἐμοῦμαι ($$ 507; 212, 1), Ist aor. ἤμεσα (ὃ 188). 

ἐν-εδρεύω, waylay, lie in ambush, augment ἐν-ηδ- (δ 175, 1). 

[root évex-] ἤνεγκα, ἐνήνοχα, ἐνήνεγμαι, etc., ct. φέρω. 

ἐνθυμοῦμαι (-έομαι) consider, augment ἐν-εθυμ- (ὃ 175, 1). 

(ἕν-νῦ-μι, § 196, 5, note) in prose regularly ἀμφιέννυμι clothe, fut. ἀμφιῶ, 
Ist aor. ἠμφίεσα (8 174, 1), pf. mid. ημφίεσμαι (ἢ 181). 


ἑλεῖν, See aipd. 

ἐλελίζω turn round (poetic), Ist aor. ἐλέλιξα (ὃ 171 a), Ist aor. pass. 
ἐλελίχθην (δ 171 a). 

ἐλίττω, Ionic ἐλίσσω and ἑλίσσω (ὃ 22). 

ἔλπω cause to hope (mid. hope) epic, 2d pf. ἔολπα (for *fe-fod7-a, δὲ 180 ; 
219, 3), 2d plupf. ἐώλπεα (for *e-pe-podmea, ὃ 17). 

[root ἐλυθ-, poetic 2d aor. ἤλυθον (cf. § 20), epic 2d pf. εἰλήλουθα and 
ἐλήλουθα (§ 219 note 1), Ionic and poetic fut. ἐλεύσομαι (ὃ 507, for 
*éNevb-couat §§ 30; 186, 2). 

ἐναίρω (ὃ 195, 4; évap-) kill (poetic), 2d aor. ἤναρον. 

év-érw and év-vérw (ὃ 193; theme cem-, o7-, ὃ 14) tell, say (poetic), fut. 
ἐνι-σπήσω (§§ 406 a; 38, 1), 2d aor. ἔνι-σπον (δὲ 406 a; 208; 171 a), 
subj. évl-crw, opt. ἐνί-σποιμι, impv. ἐνί-σπες (§ 170, note 1, ἔνισπε), 
2d pl. impv. ἔσπετε (for *év-orere; ὃ 34), infin. ἐνι-σπεῖν. 

év-laaw (§ 195, 1) also ἐν-ίπ-τω (§ 194) chide (epic), 2d aor. év-€y-trov 
(§ 208, 1 a, cf. § 181) and ἠνίπαπον. 

ἕννῦμι, epic fut. row, Ist aor. ἕσσα (8 171 a) and ἕεσα (for *é-feooa, ὃ 172, 
2), pf. mid. ἕσμαι and εἶμαι (partic. eiuévos also in Attic tragedy). 


—— 


§ 729] LIST OF VERBS 391 
[Attic principal parts in full-faced type. Ionic and poetic forms at the 
bottom of the page. ] 

ἐνοχλῶ (-ἔω), harass, augment usually qv-wx- (ὃ 175, note). 

ἔοικα am like, see [eix-]. 

ἑορτάζω keep a festival, augment ἕωρ- (for ἥορ-. § 17). 

[root ἐπ- (for ρεπ-, § 2 a)] say, only 2d aor. εἶπον (δ 208, 1), or (seldom 
in prose) εἶπα (§ 207, note 1), subj. εἴπω, opt. εἴποιμι, impv. εἰπέ 
(§ 210, note), infin. εἰπεῖν, partic. εἰπών. 

ἐπίσταμαι (ὃ 193) know, understand (impf. ἠπιστάμην ; for accent of 
pres. opt. see ὃ 200, note), fut. ἐπιστήσομαι, aor. ἠπιστήθην 
(§ 158, 9). 

ἐπιστατῶ (-ew) oversee, augment ἐπεστ- (§ 175, 1). 

ἐπιτηδεύω practise, augment ἐπετη- (ὃ 175, 1). 

ἐπιτροπεύω be a guardian, augment ἐπετροπ- (δ 175, 1). 

ἕπ-ομαι (ὃ 193; theme ἐπ- for ἔσεπ-, § 36, and σπ-, § 14), follow (impf. 
εἱπόμην, ὃ 172, 2 with irregular breathing), fut. ἕψομαι, 2d aor. ἑσ-πό- 
μὴν (ὃ 208, with irregular breathing, subj. σπῶμαι, opt. σποίμην, etc.). 

ἐπριάμην bought, see [πρια-]. 

(ἔρα-μαι, § 193; deponent passive, § 158, 3), present in prose supplied 
by €p@(-dw) love, 1st aor. ἠράσθην, fell in love (§ 529), fut. épac- 
θήσομαι shall fall in love (§ 519, note 2), vbl. ἐραστός. 

ἐργάζομαι (§ 292, 6; theme fepy-, ὃ 2 a) work; augment εἰ- (§ 172, 2) 
rarely 7-; reduplication always ei- (δ 180), Ist aor. εἰργασάμην, pf. 
εἴργασμαι (8 189), Ist aor. pass. εἰργάσθην (ὃ 510), vbl. ἐργαστέος. 


ἕπω be busy about, handle (lonic and poetic), fut. ἕψω, 2d aor. ἔ-σπον 
(subj. σπῶ, etc., infin. σπεῖν, partic. σπών). For 2d aor, mid., subj., 
opt., etc., Homeric Mss. often have ἕσπωμαι, ἑσποίμην, etc., following 
an elided vowel, but these can always be read σπῶμαι, orolunv, with- 
out the preceding elision; as ἅμα σπέσθαι for ἅμ᾽ ἑσπέσθαι. Some 
editors contend for a reduplicated aorist without augment, *ce-o7-, 
giving ἑσπ-. Homer has 2d sing. impy. ometo(?). Herodotus has Ist 
aor. pass. περι-έφθησαν (δ 171 b). 

ἔραμαι love (poetic), in poetry also aor. mid. ἠρασ(σ)άμην. 

ἔργω. See εἴργω. 

ἔρδω (ὃ 195, 2, for Ἔρξεργ-ιω = Ἔρξερζω (i.e. ἔξερσδω, ὃ 11) = εέρδω, ὃ 35) 
do (Ionic and poetic, cf. ῥέζων), fut. ἔρξω, Ist aor. ἔρξα (§ 171 a), 2d pf. 
ἔοργα (for *re-fopy-a, ὃ 180), 2d plupf. ἐώργεα (for *é-Fe-popyea, ὃ 17). 

ἐρείδ-ω (§ 195) support, prop (mostly poetic), regular, but pf. mid. ἐρ-ήρεισ- 
μαι (§§ 179, 189), Homeric 2d pl. ép-npid-arar (ὃ 226 a), plupf. ἐρ-ηρίδ- 
ato (Mss. ἐρηρέδαται, -έδατο ; see § 219 a). 


SY) 


5392 LIST OF VERBS [ὃ 729 
[Attic principal parts in full-faced type. Ionic and poetic forms at the 
bottom of the page. ] 

ἕρπ-ω creep (impf. εἷρπον ὃ 172, 2), fut. ἕρψω. 

épp-w (8 193), go away, perish, fut. ἐρρήσω (ὃ 190), Ist aor. ἤρρησα 
(ὃ 190), Ist pf. (εἰσ-)ήρρηκα (ὃ 190). 

ἔρχομαι (8 193) go, come, only in pres. and impf.; fut. supplied (ὃ 164) 
by pres. of εἶμι go (ὃ 261, 2), aor. supplied (§ 164) by 2d aor. 
ἦλθον, and pf. by 2d pf. ἐλήλυθα. See [edv6-]. 

[root ép-] ask, see (εἴρομαι). 

ἐσθίω (probably for *€6-A-w, §§ 26; 191 a; 195) eat (impf. ἤσθιον), 
fut. ἔδομαν (§ 216), aor. supplied by 2d aor. ἔφαγον, Ist pf. ἐδήδοκα 
($179), pf. mid. ἐδήδεσμαι, Ist aor. pass. ἡδέσθην, vbls. ἐδεστός,- τέος. 

ἑστιῶ (-aw) entertain, augments to εἷ- (ὃ 172, 2). 

(evdo, § 193) usually καθ-εύδω, sleep (impf. καθηῦδον and ἐκάθευδον, 
§ 174, 1), fut. καθευδήσω (ὃ 190), vbl. καθευδητέον (ὃ 190). 

εὑρ-ίσκ-ω (ὃ 197; εὗρ-, evpe-, ὃ 190) Jind, fut. εὑρήσω (ὃ 190), 2d aor. 
ηὗρον (impv. εὑρέ, ὃ 210, note), Ist pf. ηὕρηκα (§ 190), pf. mid. 
εὕρημαι (§ 190), Ist aor. pass. εὑρέθην (δ 188, 1), vbls. εὑρετός, -τέος 
(§ 188, 1). 

εὐφραίνω (§ 195, 4; etdpav-) cheer, fut. εὐφρανῶ, Ist aor. ηὔφρανα 

(§ 204, note 2), Ist aor. pass. ηὐφράνθην. 


épeix-w (ὃ 198, 2) tear (Ionic and poetic) 1st aor. ἤρειξα, also 2d aor. (both 
trans. and intrans., ὃ 207 note 3) ἤρικον, pf. mid. ἐρ-ήριγ-μαι (δ 179 ; 
219 a). 

épelrw overthrow, epic 2d pf. ἐρτήριπα (§§ 179; 219, note 2), pf. mid.. 
3d sing. ἐρ-έριπτο (ὃ 179 a). 

ἐρέσσω (ὃ 195, 1; éper-) row (poetic) epic Ist aor. pec (c)a. 

ἐρέω ask (epic). 

ἐρίζω (8 195, 2; épd-) contend, epic 150 aor. ἤρισ(σ)α (§ 201 a). 

ἕρπω poetic also ἑρπύζω, 150 aor. eipruaa (ὃ 172, 2). 

éppvy-av-w (ὃ 196, 2) eruct, 2d aor. ἤρυγον. 

ἐρύκω (§ 193) and ἐρῦκ-άν-ω (§ 196, 2) hold back, epic 2d aor. ἠρύκακον. 

ἔρῦ-μαι and εἴρυ-μαι (for *érpuuar) protect, watch (Ionic and poetic), pres. 
84 pl. εἰρύταται (§ 167 d), impf. εἰρύατο (ὃ 167 d), fut. ε() ρύσ (σγομαι, 
Ist aor. ε(ἰ)ρυσ(σγάμην. Forms often coincide with those of épvw. 

ἐρύ-ω (8 193; theme fepu-, ὃ 2 a) draw (Ionic and poetic), fut. ἐρύω (§ 216), 
fut. mid. ἐρύσσομαι, 150 aor. εἴρυσα (ὃ 172, 2) and ἔρυσα (δ 171 a), pf. 
mid. εἴρῦμαι and εἴρυσμαι (ὃ 189), 3d pl. εἰρύ-αται (§ 220 ἃ). Forms 
often coincide with those of ἔρῦμαι. 

ἔσθω, poetic for ἐσθίω eat, epic 2d pf. partic. ἐδηδώς. 


i, - ὦ 


§ 729] LIST OF VERBS 393 
[Attic principal parts in full-faced type. Ionic and poetic forms at the 
bottom of the page.] 
εὔχ-ομαι (δ 193, edyx-) pray, boast, middle deponent (ὃ 158, 3), fut. εὔξομαι, 

Ist aor. ηὐξάμην, pf. ηὖγμαι. 

(ἔχθω) hate (ἀπ-)εχθ-άνο-μαι (§ 196, 2) make oneself hated (middle de- 
ponent, § 158, 3), fut. (ἀπ-)εχθήσομαι (ὃ 190), 2d aor. (ἀπ-)ηχθό- 
μην, pi. (ἀπ-)ήχθημαι (ἢ 190). 

éx-w (8 193, stem ἐχ- for ἔσεχ- $$ 90; 40, cx-, ὃ 14, oye, $35) have (impf. 
εἶχον, ὃ 172, 2), fut. & or σχήσω (ὃ 519, note 2), 2d aor. ἔσχον 
(ὃ 208, subj. σχῶ, opt. σχοῖμι or σχοίην, impy. σχές. § 170, note 1, 
infin. σχεῖν, partic. σχών), Ist pf. ἔσχηκα, pf. mid. ἔσχημαι, as aor. 
pass. ἐσχόμην is used (δ 515, 1), [1st aor. pass. ἐσχέθην, late], 
vbls. ἑκτός, σχετός. and ἑκτέος, σχετέος. 

ἕψω (§ 193) cook, fut. ἑψήσω (§ 190), Ist aor. ἥψησα (ὃ 190), vbl. 
ἑφθός (for *éW-Tos, ὃ 35), ἑψητός (ὃ 190). 

ἐῶ (-dw, ὃ 193) let alone, allow, fut. ἐάσω (§ 187; for ἐάσομαι as pass. 
see 88 515, 1; 519, note 2), Ist aor. εἰᾶσα, etc., regular, but aug- 
ment and reduplication et- (88 172, 2; 180). 


Ledy-vi-pe (§ 196, 5; theme Cevy-, ζυγ-. ὃ 14, 2), yoke, join, fut. ζεύξω, 
Ist aor. ἔζευξα, pf. mid. evypor, 2d aor. pass. ἐζύγην (ὃ 252, 2). 

ζέω (§ 199, 2) boil, fut. ἱέσω (§ 188), Ist aor. ἔζεσα (ὃ 188). 

ta (Cis, ζῇ, ete., § 199, 3) live, fut. ζήσω (and ζήσομαι, ὃ 507). Other 
forms supplied (δ 164) by βιῶ Jive. 

Lov-vi-pe (δ 196, note) gird, 150 aor. ἔζωσα, pf. mid. ἔζωμαι. 


HBS (-aw) be vigorous, also ἡβά-σκω (δ 197) to come to man’s estate, fut. 
ἡβήσω, etc. regular. 

ἥδ-ομαι (§ 193) be pleased, Ist aor. ἥσθην (§ 158, 3), fut. ἡσθήσομαι 
(§ 158, 3). 

ἦλθον came, see [éAv6-]. 

qpar sit, see § 265. 

mpi say, see ὃ 266. 

ἤνεγκον bore, cf. [evex-] and φέρω. 

ἡττῶμαι (-dopar) be vanquished, regular passive deponent (158, 3) ; fut. 
both ἥττήσομαι and ἡττηθήσομαι (ὃ 519, note 2). 


ἐῶ, pres. εἴω (doubtful) occurs in Homer according to the Mss. 
ζεύγνυῦμι, Ist aor. pass. (mostly poetic and Ionic) ἐζεύχθην. 


NBS (-dw) be vigorous. Homer has ἡβάω with longa. (See ὃ 199 b.) 
ἡττῶμαι. Herodotus has ἑσσοῦμαι (1.6. -douar), etc. 


905 LIST OF VERBS [§ 729 
[Attic principal parts in full-faced type. Ionic and poetic forms at the 
bottom of the page. ] 
θάπ-τω ($194; theme θαφ-, § 41) bury, fut. θάψω, 1st aor. ἔθαψα, pf. 
mid. τέθαμμαι, 2d aor. pass. ἐτάφην, vbl. θαπτέος. 

θαυμάζω (ὃ 292, 6) admire, fut. θαυμάσομαι (ὃ 507), otherwise regular. 

θέλω wish, see ἐθέλω. 

θερμαίνω (ὃ 195, 4) warm, regular, but Ist aor. ἐθέρμηνα (ὃ 204, note 2). 

θέω (ὃ 193, note) run, fut. θεύσομαν (δ 507), other forms supplied by 
other verbs (§ 164). 

OrAtB-w (ὃ 193, 1) press, fut. θλίψω, Ist aor. ἔθλιψα, 2d perf. τέθλιφα 
($219, 1), (pf. mid. re6Atppar), Ist aor. pass. ἐθλίφθην. 

(ἀπο-)θνήσκω (ὃ 197, suffix -ἰσκ- contrary to § 197; theme θαν-, θνη-. 
§ 38, 1) die, fut. (ἀπο-)θανοῦμαι, 2d aor. (az-)@avov, Ist pf. 
τέθνηκα, but often 2d pf. ré-Ova-rov, etc., see ὃ 220 (2d pf. partie. 
τεθνεώς is for τεθθνη-ώς, cf. § 17), fut. pf. τεθνήξω (§ 230). In 
prose regularly ἀποθνήσκω, but pf. τέθνηκα. 

θράττω (§ 195, 1; Opay-), disturb, Ist aor, @paga, 150 aor. pass. ἐθράχθην ; 
see ταράττω. 

θραύ-ω (8 193) bruise, fut. θραύσω, Ist aor. ἔθραυσα, pf. mid. τέθραυμαι, 
and τέθραυσμαι (§ 189), Ist aor. pass. ἐθραύσθην (ὃ 189). 

θρέξομαι, 566 τρέχω. 

θρύπ-τω (ὃ 194; theme θρυφ-, ὃ 41) crush or weaken, fut. mid. θρύψομαι 
(ist aor. ἔθρυψαν, pf. mid. τέθρυμμαι, Ist aor. pass. ἐθρύφθην. 

θρῴσκω (ὃ 197, suffix -ἰσκ- contrary to § 197; theme Oop-, θρω-, ὃ 38, 1) 
leap, fut. seas (ὃ 507 De 2d aor. ener es 


θάλλω (§ 195, 3), bloom ἜΔΕΕ 24 δ τέθηλα be in bloom (§ 585), For 
θαλ-έθω see § 191 a. 

θάπτω, Ist aor. pass. ἐθάφθην, rarely in Herodotus. 

θείνω (§ 195, 4; Oev-) smite (poetic), fut. θενῶ, Ist aor. ἔθεινα (epic), 2d 
aor. ἔθενον. 

θέρομαι warm one’s self (poetic), fut. θέρσομαι (cf. § 215 a), 2d aor. pass. 
as intrans. (§ 514) ἐθέρην (only subj. depéw, ὃ 255, 1 a). 

[root @y-] milk, only pres. infin. θῆσθαι (δ 200 a) and Ist aor. ἐθησάμην. 

θηέομαι gaze at, admire (epic for θεῶμαι (-douac)), fut. θηήσομαι, Ist aor. 
ἐθηησάμην. 

θιγγ- άν-ω (§ 100, 2 ; Ay-) touch (poetic, rare in prose), fut. θίξομαι (§ 507), 
2d aor. ἔθιγον. 

O\G(-dw) bruise (Ionic and poetic), Ist aor. ἔθλασα, pf. mid. τέθλασμαι 
(8 189), Ist aor. pass. ἐθλάσθην (ὃ 189). 

θρύπτω, Homer has 2d aor. pass. ἐτρύφην (ὃ 41). 


§ 729] LIST OF VERBS 395 
[Attie principal parts in full-faced type. Ionic and poetic forms at the 
bottom of the page. ] 
θύω (ὃ 195, 1) sacrifice, fut. θύσω, Ist aor. ἔθυσα, Ist pf. τέθυκα, pf. mid. 

τέθυμαι, Ist aor. pass. ἐτύθην (ὃ 40). 


[root id- for *¢id, § 3. ἃ) see, 2d aor. εἶδον saw (for ξέριδον, ὃ 172, 2; 
impv. ἰδέ, § 210, note), 2d pf. οἶδα know (οἰδ-, εἰδ-, id-; for the in- 
flection see ἃ 259), fut. εἴσομαι, vbl. ἰστέος. 

ἱδρῶ(-όω) sweat, sometimes contracts to ὦ instead of ov (as partic. dat. 
sing. ἱδρῶντι), fut. ἱδρώσω, ete., regular. 

te-por (δ 193, theme *¢ie-, cf. Latin in-vi-tus) strive, desire, usually in 
composition as wapteuo beg. Its forms cannot be distinguished 
from those of fn. 

ito (for ἔσισδω, § 193, 3) usually καθ-ίζω, seat or sit (impf. ἐκάθιζον, 
§ 174, 1), fut. καθιῶ (§ 215), Ist aor. καθῖσα and ἐκάθισα (§ 174, 1). 

type (for ἔσι-σητμι, § 193, 3) send; for the inflection see § 260, fut. ἥσω, 
aor. ἧκα (see § 211, 3), Ist pf. etka (δ 180), pf. mid. εἶμαι (δ 180), 
Ist aor. pass. εἴθην (8 172, 2). 

(ἀφ-)ἱκνοῦμαι (-couar) (§ 196, 4; ἱκ-) come (middle deponent, § 158, 3), 
fut. (ἀφ-)ίξομαι, 2d aor. (ad-)ikopny, pf. (ad-)iypar. 

ἱλά-σκομαι (ὃ 197) propitiate (middle deponent, § 158, 3), fut. ἱλάσομαι, 
Ist aor. ἱλασάμην, Ist aor. pass. ἱλάσθην (8 510). 

ἴλλω (§ 195, 3) roll, Ist aor. ἴλα (sometimes printed εἴλλω and eda). 

ἵστημι (ὃ 193, 3; for *ow-orn-pys, § 36) set, place (for the inflection see 
§ 253), fut. στήσω, Ist aor. ἔστησα caused to stand (§ 207, note 3), 
2d aor. ἔστην stood (§ 207, note 3; inflection § 257), Ist pf. ἕστηκα 
(for ἔσεσστη-κα, § 36; plupf. εἱστήκη for *e-ce-ornKy), with 2d pf. 
ἕστατον, etc. (§ 258), Ist aor. pass. ἐστάθην, vbls. στατός, στατέος. 


θύω and θύνω (§ 196, 1) rush (poetic). 


ἰάλλω, Attic ἑάλλω (ὃ 195, 3) put forth, send (poetic), fut. ἰαλῶ, 150 aor. ἔηλα. 

teuar (for *pteuar) desire. In Homer always with long « and almost always 
with initial -, (epic) Ist aor. (ἐγεισάμην. 

inut (see ὃ 260 a), for Ionic μεμετιμένος see μεθίημι. 

ἱκνοῦμαι, poetic are also ἵκω and ἱκ-άνω (δ 196, 2), epic 1st aor. ἵἴξον (δ 201 b). 

ἱλάσκομαι, epic is also pres. ἱλάομαι (and possibly ἵλαμαι),. Ist aor. ἱλασσάμην 
(δ 201 a), Ist pf. ἕληκα (ὃ 494, 3) be propitious, 2d pf. impy. only 
ἔλη-θι (δ 220). 

ἱμάσσω (ὃ 195, 1; iwavr-) epic Ist aor. ἵμασα (ὃ 171 ἃ) and tuacca (ὃ 201 a). 

ἱμείρω (ὃ 195, 4; ivep-) long for (Ionic and poetic), also deponent ἱμείρο- 
μαι, AOL. ἱμειράμην (epic), aor. ἱμέρθην (Ionic) ; see ὃ 158, 3. 


396 LIST OF VERBS [§ 729 
[Attic principal parts in full-faced type. Ionic and poetic forms at the 
bottom of the page.] 
ἰσχναίνω (ὃ 195, 4) make lean or dry, fut. ἰσχανῶ, Ist aor. texvava 

(§ 204, note 2), Ist aor. pass. ἰσχνάνθην. 
ἴσχω (ὃ 193, 3, for ἔσεσχοω, §§ 36, 40) have, hold, οἵ. ἔχω. 


καθαίρω (ὃ 195, 4; καθαρ-) purify, fut. καθαρῶ, Ist aor. ἐκάθηρα and 
ἐκάθαρα (ὃ 204, note 2), pf. mid. κεκάθαρμαι, Ist aor. pass. 
ἐκαθάρθην. 

καθ ἐζομαι sit down, see ἕζομαι ; for impf. ἐκαθεζόμην see § 174, 1. 

καθ-εύδω slecp, see εὕδω. 

καθ-(ζω set, sit, see ito. 

καίνω (ὃ 195, 4; theme κον-, xav-, ὃ 14, 1) ill, fut. κανῶ, 2d aor. ἔκανον, 
2d pf. κέκονα (δ 219, 3). 

καίω (for καριω, § 195, 4; theme καὺ- or kag-, § 2a), also kaw (§ 21) 
burn, fut. καύσω. Ist aor. ἔκαυσα, Ist pf. κέκαυκα, pf. mid. κέκαυμαι, 
Ist aor. pass. ἐκαύθην. 

καλινδοῦμαι (-έομαι) wander about, cf. κυλίνδω. 

καλύπ-τω (ὃ 194; καλυβ-} cover, fut. καλύψω, Ist aor. ἐκάλυψα, pf. mid. 
κεκάλυμμαι, Ist aor. pass. ἐκαλύφθην. 

KaA@(-ew) call, fut. καλῶ (ὃ 212, 1), Ist aor. ἐκάλεσα (ὃ 158), Ist pf. 
κέκληκα (δ 218, 3), pf. mid. κέκλημαι (δ 224, 1), Ist aor. pass. ἐκλή- 
θην (ὃ 38, 1), vbls. κλητός, κλητέος. 

κάμενω (ὃ 190, 1; Kap-) labor, fut. καμοῦμαι (§ 507), 2d aor. ἔκαμον, Ist 
pf. κέκμηκα (8 218, 5). 

κάμπ-τω (ὃ 194; Kapz-) bend, fut. κάμψω, Ist aor. kappa, pf. mid. κέ- 
καμμαι (δ 247), Ist aor. pass. ἐκάμφθην, vbl. καμπ-τός. 

κατηγορῶ (-έω) accuse, for the augment κατη- see ὃ 175, 1. 

κεῖ-μαι (8 193) lie (for the inflection see § 264), fut. κείσομαι. 

κείρω (8 195, 4; theme κερ-, καρ-) shear, fut. κερῶ, Ist aor. ἔκειρα, pf. 

mid. κέκαρμαι (§ 224, note), 2d aor. pass. ἐκάρην (ὃ 252, 2). 


καί-νυ-μαι (8 196, 5) excel (poetic), pf. κέκασμαι (ὃ 595). 

καίω, epic Ist aor. ἔκηα (1.6. *é-Kne-a, ὃ 204) and Ist aor, partic. κέᾶς 
(poetic), also 2d aor. pass. as intrans. (§ 514) ἐκάην burned (epic and 
Ionic). 

κεάζω split (epic), fut. κεάσσω, Ist aor. éxéac(c)a. 

κείρω, epic Ist aor. ἔκερσα (§ 204 a), also poetic Ist aor. pass. ἐκέρθην. 

κέ-καδον, epic 2d aor. (§ 208, 1 a) only partic. act. κεκαδών depriving, 

and 8d pl. mid. as pass. (δ 515, 1 a) κεκάδοντο were made to retire. 

Fut. from aor. stem (ὃ 519 a) κε-καδή-σω (§ 190) shall deprive. 


§ 729] LIST OF VERBS 397 
[Attic principal parts in full-faced type. Ionic and poetic forms at the 
bottom of the page. ] 
κελεύτω (§ 195) command, fut. κελεύσω, Ist aor. ἐκέλευσα, Ist pf. κεκέ- 
Aevka, pf. mid. κεκέλευσμαι (δ 181), Ist aor. pass. ἐκελεύσθην (ὃ 159). 

κεράν-νυ-μι and Kepav-vi-w (δ 196, note; theme κερα-, possibly for 
*xepao-) mix, Ist aor. ἐκέρασα, pf. mid. κέκραμαι (ὃ 38, 1), Ist aor. 
pass. ἐκεράσθην, and ἐκράθην (ἢ 38, 1). 

κερδαίνω (ὃ 195, 4) gain, fut. κερδανῶ, Ist aor. ἐκέρδανα (ὃ 204, note 2). 

κηρύττω (ὃ 195, 1; κηρῦκ-) proclaim, fut. κηρύξω, Ist aor. ἐκήρυξα, 2d 
pf. κεκήρυχα, pf. mid. κεκήρυγμαι, Ist aor. pass. ἐκηρύχθην. 

κίιχρη-μι (ὃ 193, 3; ypa-, xpyn-, ὃ 15) lend (mid. borrow, § 506), fut. 
χρήσω, Ist aor. ἔχρησα, Ist pf. κέχρηκα. pf. mid. κέχρημαι. 

κλάζω (ὃ 195, note 1; KAayy-) also κλαγγιάνω (8 196, 2), resound, 
scream, fut. κλάγξω, Ist aor. ἔκλαγξα, 2d pf. κέκλαγγα. 

κλαίω (for *xAag-ww, ὃ 195, 4; theme κλαυ- or KAag-, ὃ 2 a), also Khaw 
(ὃ 21) weep, fut. κλαύσομαι ($ 507) rarely κλαυσοῦμαι (8. 214) or 
κλαήσω (ὃ 190); Ist aor. ἔκλαυσα, pf. mid. κέκλαυμαι. 


κέλλω (ὃ 195, 3) land (of ships) ; poetic for ὀκέλλω, fut. κέλσω (ὃ 215 a), 
Ist aor. ἔκελσα (ὃ 204 a). 

κέλομαι order (poetic = κελεύω), fut. κελήσομαι (§ 190), Ist aor. ἐκελησάμην 
(δ 190), and epic 2d aor. &Ke-KA-duny ($$ 208 ; 208, 1 a). 

KevT @(-€w) prick (with a goad) Ionic and poetic ; fut. κεντήσω, ete., regu- 
lar, but Homer has Ist aor. infin. κένσαι (for *xevt-car, cf. § 204 a). 

κεράννυμι, Ionic and poetic also κίρ-νη-μι and xipyG(-dw) and epic pres. impv. 
κέραιε. 

κερδαίνω Ionic 1st aor. ἐκέρδηνα (cf. § 204, note 2). Herodotus has also 
forms from a stem κερδε- ; as fut. κερδήσομαι (δ 507), Ist aor. ἐκέρδησα. 

κεύθω (§ 195) hide (poetic), fut. κεύσω, Ist aor. ἔκευσα, 2d aor. ἔκυθον, 
with subj. κεκύθω (§ 208, 1 a), 2d pf. xéxevd-a (ὃ 219, note 1) with 
pres. meaning (§ 535). 

κήδω make concerned (poetic), mid. be concerned, fut. κηδήσω (δ 190) and 
κεκαδήσω (ὃ 519 a), Ist aor. ἔκηδησα (§ 190) and aor. mid. (once) 
ἐκηδεσάμην (§ 188), 2d pf. κέ-κηδ-α (ὃ 535) be concerned (§ 494, 3). 

κιγχάνω (§ 196, 2; theme xx-), also epic κιχάνω come upon, reach (poetic), 
fut. κιχήσομαι (88 190; 507), 2d aor. ἔκιχον, also 2d aor. pass. as 
intrans. (§ 514) ἐκίχην (subj. κιχήω, pl. κιχήομεν, etc., § 253, 1 a; 
Mss. κιχείω, etc.). A mid. partic. κιχήμενος is perhaps to be referred 
to a theoretical *xix nue. 

κίδνημι scatter = σκίδνημι, q.v. 

κίρνημι. See κεράννῦμι. 

κλάζω, poetic 2d aor. ἔκλαγον, poetic 2d pf. κέκληγα (ὃ 219, 2). 


398 LIST OF VERBS [§ 729 


[Attic principal parts in full-faced type. Ionic and poetic forms at the 
bottom of the page. ] 

κλέπ-τω (ὃ 194; KAoz-, κλεπ-- κλαπ-, ὃ 14, 1) steal, fut. κλέψω, Ist aor. 
ἔκλεψα, 2d pf. κέκλοφα (ὃ 219, 1 and 3), pf. mid. κέκλεμμαι, 2d aor. 
pass. ἐκλάπην (§ 252, 2). 

κλῃ-ω, later κλείω (δ 195) shut, fut. κλήσω, Ist aor. ἔκλῃσα, 150 pf. κέκλῃκα, 
pf. mid. κέκλῃμαι, Ist aor. pass. ἐκλήσθην (ὃ 189). 

κλίνω (for *xAw-ww, § 195, 4) bend, incline, fut. κλινῶ (ὃ 213), Ist aor. 
ἔκλινα (§ 204), pf. mid. κέκλιμαι, Ist aor. pass. ἐκλίθην, and some- 
times 2d aor. pass. ἐκλίνην. 

κλῶ (-aw) break, (fut. κλάσω), Ist aor. ἔκλασα, pf. mid. κέκλασμαι 
(8 189), Ist aor. pass. ἐκλάσθην (ὃ 189). 

kvaiw (§ 193) scrape, fut. κναίσω, Ist aor. ἔκναισα, Ist pf. κέκναικα, pf. 
mid. -κέκναισμαι (§ 189), Ist aor. pass. τἐκναίσθην (§ 189). 

κνῶ (Kvys, Kv, ete., § 199, 3) = κναίω scrape, Ist aor. ἔκνησα, pf. mid. 
κέκνησμαι (ὃ 159), Ist aor. pass. ἐκνήσθην (ὃ 189). 

κομίζω (ὃ 195, 2; κομιδ-} care for, carry, fut. κομιῶ (§ 215), Ist aor. ἐκό- 
μισα, Ist pf. κεκόμικα, pf. mid. κεκόμισμαι (ὃ 189, note), Ist aor. 
pass. ἐκομίσθην (ὃ 189, note). 

κόπ-τω (8 194; κοπ-) cut, fut. κόψω (but fut. pf. κεκόψομαι is often used 
instead, ὃ 538, note), Ist aor. ἔκοψα, 2d pf. κέκοφα (δ 219, 1), pf. 
mid. κέκομμαι, 2d aor. pass. ἐκόπην. 

κράζω (§ 195, 2; Kpay-, Kpay-, § 13) ery out, 2d aor. ἔκραγον, 2d pf. 
κέκραγα, fut. pf. kexpagopat (ὃ 538, note). 


κλέπτω, Ist aor. pass. ἐκλέφθην (Ionic and poetic). 

KAW fw (epic κληΐζω) celebrate in song (poetic), fut. κλήσω, Ist aor. ἔκλῃσα, 
rarely ἐκλήϊξα (ὃ 195, 2 a). 

κλύω hear (poetic), 2d aor. ἔκλυον (impv. κλῦθι, κλῦτε; see ὃ 210 a): also 
reduplicated aor. impv. (epic) κέκλυθι, κέκλυτε (ὃ 208, 1 a). 

κορέν-νῦ-μι (§ 196, note) satiate (Ionic and poetic; rare in prose), fut. 
κορέσω (ὃ 188) and (epic) κορέω (ὃ 87), Ist aor. ἐκόρεσα (ὃ 188), epic 
2d pf. partic. κεκορηώς satisfied (δ 494, 38), pf. mid. κεκόρεσμαι (ὃ 189) 
and (epic) κεκόρημαι (ὃ 188, 1). 

κορύσσω (ὃ 195, 1; κορυθ-} equip (poetic), Ist aor. partic. mid. κορυσσά- 
μενος (ὃ 201 a), pf. mid. partic. κεκορυθμένος. 

κοτέω be angry (epic), Ist aor, ἐκότεσα (ὃ 188), and 2d pf. partic. κεκοτηώς. 

κραίνω (§ 195, 4) and κρᾶαίνω (ὃ 195, 4, Mss. kpatatvw) accomplish (poetic) 
are from theme κραν- and κρᾶαν- (see the declension of κάρη. ὃ 115, 
9a, and cf. § 292,8 note); fut. κρανῶ, 150 aor. €xpava, epic ἔκρηνα and 
éxpanva (Mss. éxpynva), pf. mid. 3d sing. κέ-κραν-ται (ὃ 247) and epic 
κε-κρᾶαν-ται, Ist aor. pass. ἐκράνθην and ἐκρᾶάνθην. 


§ 729] LIST OF VERBS 599 


[Attic principal parts in full-faced type. Jonie and poetic forms at the 
bottom of the page.] 

κρέμα-μαι (ὃ 193) hang (used as a passive of κρεμάννυμι), fut. κρεμή- 
copa. (For accent of pres. opt. see ὃ 200, note.) 

κρεμάν-νυ-μι (ὃ 195, note) suspend, fut. κρεμῶ (ὃ 212, 1), Ist aor. ἐκρέ- 
paca, Ist aor. pass. ἐκρεμάσθην (ὃ 159), vbl. κρεμαστός (ὃ 189). 

κρίνω (for ἔκριν-ιω, ὁ 195, 4) judge, fut. κρινῶ (δ 215), Ist aor. ἔκρινα 
(8 204), Ist pf. κέκρικα (§ 218, 1), pf. mid. κέκριμαι, Ist aor. pass. 
ἐκρίθην. 

κρού-ω (ὃ 199) beat, regular, but Ist aor. pass. ἐκρούσθην (8 189). 

κρύπ-τω (ὃ 194; κρυφ-) conceal, fut. κρύψω, Ist aor. ἔκρυψα, pf. mid. 
κέκρυμμαι, Ist aor. pass. ἐκρύφθην, vbls. κρυπτός, κρυπτέος. 

(ἀπο-)κτείνω (for ἔκτεν-ιω, ὃ 195, 4; theme κτον-, κτεν-, κταν- (ὃ 14, 1) 
kill, fut. (ἀπο-)κτενῶ, Ist aor. (ἀπ-)ἔκτεινα, 2d pf. (ἀπ-)έἔκτονα 
($219, 5). For the passive, (ἀπο- )θνήσκω is regularly used (§ 513). 

(ἀπο-)κτείνυμι and (ἀπο-)κτεινύω = (ἀπο-)κτείνω Kill. (These are some- 
times printed κτείννῦμι, -ύω, OY κτίννυμι, -ύω.) 

κτῶμαι (-άομαι) acquire, fut. κτήσομαι, Ist aor. ἐκτησάμην (§ 158, 3), pf. 
κέκτημαι (reduplication contrary to § 178, 1) possess (δ 535) (fut. pf. 
κεκτήσομαι siiall possess, § 538, note), Ist aor pass. ἐκτήθην (8 510). 

κυλίνδω (ὃ 193) roll (cf. καλινδοῦμαι), Ist aor. ἐκύλισα (δ 34), pf. mid. 
κεκύλῖσμαι (ὃ 159), Ist aor. pass. ἐκυλίσθην (ὃ 189). From ἐκύ- 
λῖσα a present κυλίω was later formed. 

κύπ-τω (ὃ 194; κυφ-) sloop, fut. κύψω, Ist aor. ἔκυψα, 2d pf. κέκυφα. 


κρεμάννῦμι, also κρίμνημι (mid. κρίμναμαι be suspended), usually printed 
κρήμνημι. 

κρίζω (§ 195, 2; κριγ-) creak, squeak, 20 aor. ἔκρικον (cf. § 195, 2, note 2), 
2d pf. xéxptya (ὃ 219, 2). 

κρύπτω, poetic 2d aor. pass. (rare) ἐκρύφην. 

κτείνω, Ionic fut. κτενέω (Mss. sometimes xravéw), 2d aor. (poetic) ἔκτανον 
and ἔκταν (for *é-xtv-v, § 14, note), ἔκτας, etc. (subj. Mss. κτέωμεν, 
§ 211, 1 a-b, infin. κτάμεναι, partic. crds), Ist aor. pass. (epic) ἐκτάθην 
(for *é-xrv-@nv, contrary to ὃ 231, 4). Homer uses the fut. mid. and 
aor. mid. as passive also (§ 515, 1 a). 

κτίζω (δ 292, 6) found, epic 2d aor. partic. as pass. (§ 515, 1 a) ev-Kri-pevos. 

κτυπῶ (-€w) resound (poetic), regular, but 2d aor. ἔκτυπον. 

κτῶμαι, Ionic perf. mid. ἔ-κτημαι (ὃ 178, 1). 

κυνῶ (-éw) kiss, fut. κυνήσω, etc., regular, but poetic Ist aor. ἔκυσα. 

κύρω (ὃ 198) meet with, happen (poetic), fut. κύρσω (8 213 a), Ist aor. 
éxupoa (ὃ 204 a). κυρῶ (-éw) = kipw, fut. κυρήσω, etc., is regular, 


400 LIST OF VERBS [§ 729 
[Attic principal parts in full-faced type. Ionic and poetic forms at the 
bottom of the page. ] 
λαγχάνω (ὃ 196, 2; theme λαχ- Anx-, § 15) obtain by lot, fut. Χήξομαι 
(ἢ 507), 2d aor. ἔλαχον (ὃ 186, 1), 2d pf. εἴληχα (ὃ 178, 2), pt. mid. 

εἴληγμαι, lst aor. pass. ἐλήχθην, Vb. ληκτέος. 

λαμβάνω (ὃ 196, 2; theme λαβ-, ληβ- § 13) tuke, fut. λήψομαι (§ 507), 
2d aor. ἔλαβον (δ 186, 1; impy. λαβέ, § 210, note), 2d pf. εἴληφα 
(8 178, 2), pf. mid. εἴλημμαι, Ist aor. pass. ἐλήφθην, vbls. ληπτός, 
-τέος. 

λάμπ-ω (ὃ 193) shine, fut. λάμψω, Ist aor. ἔλαμψα, 2d pf. λέλαμπα. 

λανθάνω (ὃ 196, 2; theme AaG-, ληθ-, § 13) lie hid, escape notice (mid. 
forget, usually ἐπι-λανθάνομαι), fut. λήσω, 2d aor. ἔλαθον (δ 186, 1), 
2d pf. λέληθα, pf. mid. λέλησμαι (ὃ 159). 

Aéy-w (ἢ 193, 2) say, fut. λέξω, Ist aor. ἔλεξα, pf. act. supplied (ὃ 164) 
by εἴρηκα, pf. mid. λέλεγμαι (but διαλέγομαι, converse, has διείλεγ- 
μαι, οἷ. § 178, 2), Ist aor. pass. ἐλέχθην. 

λέγω (ὃ 193, 2) select, count, gather, fut. Χέξω, Ist aor. ἔλεξα, 2d pf. 
εἴλοχα (δὲ 178, 2; 219, 5), pf. mid. εἴλεγμαι and sometimes λέλεγ- 
pat, Ist aor. pass. ἐλέχθην and rarely 2d aor. pass. ἐλέγην. 

λείπ-ω (ὃ 193, 2; theme λοιπ-, λειπ-, λιπ-, § 14, 2) leave, fut. λείψω, 2d 
aor. ἔλιπον (δ 208), 2d pf. λέλοιπα (ὃ 219, 3), pf. mid. λέλειμμαι, 
1st aor. pass. ἐλείφθην. 

λεύ-ω (ὃ 195) stone, fut. λεύσω, etc., regular, but Ist aor. pass. ἐλεύσθην 
(8 189). 


λαγχάνω, Ionic fut. λάξομαι, epic 2d aor. subj. λελάχω (§ 208, 1 a), Ionic 
and poetic 2d pf. λέλογχα (ὃ 219, 3). 

λάζομαι (§ 195, 2; theme Aay-, cf. AaB-) and λάζυμαι = λαμβάνω take. 

λαμβάνω, Ionic forms are fut. λάμψομαι (better AdWouar), Ist pf. λελάβηκα 
(§ 190), pf. mid. λέλαμμαι, Ist aor. pass. ἐλάμφθην. Epic 2d aor. mid. 
infin. λελαβέσθαι (§ 208, 1 a). Poetic pf. mid. λέλημμαι. 

λανθάνω. epic 2d aor. λέλαθον ($$ 208, 1 a; 171 a) and pf. mid. λέλασμαι 
($§ 27, 3; 219 a). 

λάσκω (for ἔλακ-σκω, ἃ 197) speak (poetic), fut. λακήσομαι ($$ 190; 507), 
2d aor. ἔλακον (epic mid. λελακόμην, 88 208, 1 a; 171 a), 2d pf. λέ- 
ληκ-α (§ 219, 2) with fem. partic. λελακυῖα (δ 219 a). 

[root λεχ-, ef. λέχος bed] only in epic poetry, Ist aor. ἔλεξα laid to rest, 
mid. ἐλεξάμην went to rest (impv. λέξεο, ὃ 201 Ὁ). 2d. aor. ἐλέγμην 
(8 207 a) went to rest (impv. λέξο (i.e. *Xex-co), infin. λέχθαι (for 
Ἄλεχ-σθαι, § 35), partic., λέγ-μενος, § 207 a). 

λήθω (poetic) = NavOdvw escape notice. 


§ 729] LIST OF VERBS 401 
[Attic principal parts in full-faced type. Ionic and poetic forms at the 
bottom of the page. ] 

Aqto (8 292, 6) plunder (fut. λήσομαι). Ist aor. mid. ἐλῃσάμην, pf. 

mid. λέλῃσμαι (ὃ 159). (The active is rare.) 

λιμπάνω (ὃ 196, 2; λιπ-) = λείπω leave. 

Aov-w (ὃ 195) wash, often drops v (δ 21) before a short vowel and is 
then contracted like δηλῶ (8 250): as Aodpev (for Ao(vd)oper), 
λοῦσθαι (for λο(ύ)εσθαι); otherwise the verb is regular; fut. 
λούσω. Ist aor. ἔλουσα, ete. 

Ad-w (ὃ 195; theme λῦ-, Av-, § 15), fut. λύσω, Ist aor. Aiea, Ist pf. 
λέλυκα, pf. mid. λέλυμαι, Ist aor. pass. ἐλύθην. 


μαίνω (8 195, 4; theme par-, pyv-, § 13), madden (mid. be mad, fut. 
mid. μανοῦμαι), Ist aor. funva, 2d pf. μέμηνα am mad (ὃ 494, 5), 2d 
aor. pass. ἐμάνην (see ὃ 514). 

μανθάνω (§ 196, 2; μαθ-) learn, fut. μαθήσομαι ($$ 190; 507), 2d aor. 
ἔμαθον, Ist pf. μεμάθηκα (ὃ 190). 

patra (ὃ 195, note 2, theme pay-) knead, fut. μάξω, etc., regular, but 
2d pf. μέμαχ-α (8 219, 1) and 2d aor. pass. ἐμάγην. 

μάχ-ομαι (ὃ 195) fight (middle deponent, § 158, 3), fut. paxotpar (for - 
μαχέσομαι, §§ 190, 212, 1), Ist aor. ἐμαχεσάμην (ὃ 190), pt. μεμάχη- 
μαι (8 188, 1). 

μεθύ-σκ-ω (8 197) make drunk, 1st aor. ἐμέθυσα, Ist aor. pass. ἐμεθύ- 
σθην became drunk. 


λήζω, Ionic and poetic is ληίζω. 

λίσσομαι (ὃ 195, 1; Au7-) rarely λίτομαι supplicate (mostly epic, rare in 
prose), epic Ist aor. ἐλλισάμην (§ 172, 1a). An epic 2d aor. ἐλιτόμην 
is doubtful. 

λούω, epic λόω (§ 21) and λοέω (8 190), fut. λοέσσω (§ 201 a), Ist aor. ἐλόεσσα. 

iw, epic also with ὕ. Epic 2d aor. ἐλύμην (ὃ 209). 


μαίομαι (theme wac-?) seek, strive (poetic), fut. μάσσομαι, Ist aor. ἐμασσά- 
μην (ὃ 201 a). 

μάρ-να-μαι (§ 196, 3) fight (poetic), only pres. and impf.; pres. subj. 
μάρνωμαι (cf. § 200, note). 

μάρπ-τω (§ 194; μαρπ-Ὸ) seize (poetic), fut. udpyw, Ist aor. ἔμαρψα (epic 
2d aor. €uaprov), 2d pf. μέμαρπα. 

μάχομαι, epic is also μαχέομαι (§ 190) and μαχείομαι (ὃ 292, 2 a), fut. 
μαχέσσομαι (Mss. also μαχήσομαι), Ist aor. ἐμαχεσσάμην (ὃ 201 a). 

μεθ inue send away, like ἕημι, but Herodotus has pf. mid. partic. μεμετιμένος 
(§ 181). 


BABBITT’S GR. GRAM. — 26 


402 LIST OF VERBS [8 729 
[Attie principal parts in full-faced type. Ionic and poetic forms at the 
bottom of the page. ] 
μεθύ-ω (δ 193) be drunk, only pres. and impf. Other tenses supplied 
from μεθύσκω 

pely-vo-pe (ὃ 196, 5; theme pecy-, pry-, § 14, 2) mix, fut. μείξω, Ist aor. 
ἔμειξα, pf. mid. μέμειγ-μαι, Ist aor. pass. ἐμείχθην, 2d aor. pass. 
ἐμίγην (ὃ 232, 2), vbls. μεικτός, petkréos. (Sometimes wrongly 
written μίγνυμι.) 

μείρομαι (ὃ 195, 4; theme pop-, wep-, wap-, ὃ 14, 1, probably for cpop-, 
etc.) obtain part in, pf. mid. 3d sing. εἵμαρται (for Ἔσε-σμαρτ-ται, 
§ 224, note, = *€opapras, ὃ 36, = εἵμαρται, § 16) it is fated. 

μέλλ-ω intend, fut. μελλήσω (ὃ 190), Ist aor. ἐμέλλησα (8 190), seldom 
augments to 7-. 

péd-w (ὃ 193) concern, care for, 3d sing. impersonal μέλει zt is a care, fut. 
μελήσω (ὃ 190), Ist aor. ἐμέλησα (8 190), Ist pf. μεμέληκα (8 190), 
pf. mid. pepéAnpor (ὃ 190), Ist aor. pass. ἐμελήθην (ὃ 190), vbl. 
μελητέος (ὃ 190). Also ἐπι-μέλομαι and ἐπι-μελοῦμαι (passive de- 
ponents, § 158, 3) care for. 

μέν-ω (ὃ 195) remain, fut. μενῶ, Ist aor. ἔμεινα, Ist pf. μεμένηκα (ὃ 190). 

μιαίνω (for ἔμιαν-ιω, ὃ 195, 4; theme puav-) stain, fut. pravd, Ist aor. 
ἐμίανα (ὃ 204, note 2), pf. mid. μεμίασμαι (ὃ 247), Ist aor. pass. 
ἐμιάνθην. 

μιμνήσκω (ὃ 197, suffix -ἰσκ- contrary to ὃ 197) remind (mid. remember), 

fut. μνήσω, Ist aor. ἔμνησα, pf. mid. μέμνημαι remember (ὃ 535; for 

the subj. and opt. see § 227, note) (fut. pf. μεμνήσομαι shall remember, 

§ 538, note), Ist aor. pass. ἐμνήσθην (ὃ 189) mentioned (ὃ 158, 5). 


μείγνῦμι, epic 2d aor. 8d sing. ἔ-μικ-το (ὃ 207 a). 

μείρομαι obtain part in (epic), 2d pf. ἔμμορε (ὃ 219, 3, for *éopope ?, cf. 
§ 178, 1) have a share in (§ 535). 

μέλω epic 2d pf. μέ-μηλ-α (§ 219, 2). Homer has also pf. mid. 3d sing. 
μέμβλεται and plupf. μέμβλετο (for Ἔμε-μλεται and *ye-urero, with 
sympathetic β). 

μενοινάω be eager (epic). See ὃ 199 a-b. 

μερμηρίζω ponder (poetic), epic fut. -ἰξω and epic aor. -véa (8 195, 2 a). 

μήδομαι (ὃ 193), contrive (poetic), fut. μήσομαι, Ist aor. ἐμησάμην (δ 205), 

[root μηκ-, μακ- (§ 13)] bleat. (A present μηκῶμαι is doubtful.) Epic 
2d aor. partic. μακ-ών, epic 2d pf. partic. μεμηκώς (fem. με-μακευῖα, 
§ 219 a), 2d plupf. with variable vowel (ἐ) μέμηκον. 

μητιάω plan (poetic), other tenses from μητίομαι ; as fut. μητίσομαι. Ist 
aor. ἐμητίσαμην. 


§ 729] LIST OF VERBS 403 
[Attic principal parts in full-faced type. Ionic and poetic forms at the 
bottom of the page.] 

pote (ὃ 195, 2; μυγ-) grumble, mutter, 1st aor. ἔμυξα. 
μυκῶμαι (-doua) bellow, Ist aor. ἐμυκησάμην (ὃ 158, 3). 
pow shut the lips or eyes, Ist aor. ἔμυσα, Ist pf. μέμυκα. 


véep-w (ὃ 193, 2) distribute, fut. vepd, Ist aor. ἔνειμα, Ist pf. νενέμηκα 
(ὃ 190), pf. mid. νενέμημαι (δ 190), Ist aor. pass. ἐνεμήθην (ὃ 190). 

νέω (δ 195 note; theme vev-, § 21), swim, fut. νεύσομαι (ὃ 507) or 
νευσοῦμαι (ὃ 214), Ist aor. ἔνευσα, Ist pf. vévevka, vbl. νευστέος 
(8 189). 

νέω ($§ 193; 199, 2) heap up, Ist aor. ἔνησα, pf. mid. νένημαι. 

vitw (for *vy-ww, ὃ 195,2) wash; other tenses from a stem νιβ- (which 
give a later pres. νίπ-τω, § 194), fut. νίψω, Ist aor. ἔνιψα, pf. mid. 
vévippar ($$ 27, 1; 247), vbl. νυιπτός. 

νομίζω (ὃ 292, 6) think, fut. νομιῶ (ὃ 215), Ist aor. ἐνόμισα, Ist pf. 
νενόμικα, pf. mid. νενόμισμαι (ὃ 189), Ist aor. pass. ἐνομίσθην 
(ὃ 159), vbl. νομιστέος. 

v (vis, vy, ete., § 199, 3) spin, fut. νήσω, Ist aor. ἔνησα, Ist aor. pass. 
ἐνήθην. ; 


μί-μν-ω (§ 199,39) remain (poetic) = μένω. 

μίσγω (for Ἔμιγ-σκω, ὃ 197; cf. radoxw) mix (lonic) = μείγνῦμι. 

μύζω suck, has epic Ist aor. ἐμύζησα (δ 190). 

[root μυκ- (cf. μυκῶμαι)} bellow, epic 2d aor. μύκον (§ 171 a), epic 2d pf. 
μέ-μῦκ-α (ὃ 219, 2). 


ναίω (for *vag-w, §§ 195; 37) dwell (poetic), Ist aor. ἔνασσα (epic) set- 
tled (trans., cf. § 494, 1), Ist aor. pass. ἐνάσθην (§ 189) was settled or 
dwelt (§ 514). 

νάττω (ὃ 195, 1), Ionic νάσσω (§ 22) stuff (mostly poetic and Ionic), 1st 
aor. évata, pf. mid. vévacuar (rarely vévaypac). 

νεικέω OY νεικείω (ὃ 292, 2a; theme veixeo-) chide (Ionic, mostly epic), fut. 
νεικέσω (ὃ 188), Ist aor. ἐνείκεσα (ὃ 188), or ἐνείκεσσα (ὃ 201 a). 

véouat go, come (poetic), only pres. and impf. The present sometimes 
has future meaning (§ 524). 

νίζω, Homer has a doubtful pres. mid. infin. ἀπονίπτεσθαι. 

νίσομαι (for Ἔνι-νστομαι, ὃ 193, 3; theme veo-, νσ-. ὃ 14) go (poetic), only 
pres. and impf. The present often has future meaning (§ 524). 

νοῶ (-€w) think, perceive (regular in Attic), in Ionic contracts -o7n- to w; 
as Ist aor, ἔνωσα (Attic ἐνόησαν), Ist pf. νένωκα (Attic vevonka), etc. 


404 LIST OF VERBS [8 729 
[Attic principal parts in full-faced type. Ionic and poetic forms at the 
bottom of the page. ] 
ξέω (usually contracted to ξῶ, etc., § 199, 2, note; theme ξε- for *£ec-) 

scrape (Ast aor. ἔξεσα, § 188), pf. mid. ἔξεσμαι (ὃ 189), vbl. ἕεστός. 
ξηραίνω (ὃ 292, 8; cf. ξηρός dry) dry, fut. ξηρανῶ (§ 213), Ist aor. 
ἐξήρανα (ὃ 204, note 2), pf. mid. ἐξήρασμαι (ὃ 247), Ist aor. pass. 
ἐξηράνθην. 
ξύτω (ὃ 195) polish, Ist aor. toa, lst aor. pass. ἐξύσθην (ὃ 189). 


Slo (ὃ 195, 2; 68-) smell, fut. ὀζήσω as if from *6Léw, Ist aor. ὠὦζησα. 

oly-w (ὃ 195), oty-vd-we (δ 196, 5), usually ἀν-οίγω, ἀν-οίγνυμι open, fut. 
ἀν-οίξω. Ist aor. ἀντέῳξα (ὃ 172, note 1), 2d pf. ἀντέῳγα (ἀνέῳχα). pf. 
mid. dv-€wypar (δ 150), Ist aor. pass. ἀνεῴχθην (δ 172, note 1). 

οἶδα (2d pf.) know (§ 259). See [ἰδ-]. 

οἰδῶ (-€w) swell, 1st aor. ῴδησα, Ist pf. ᾧδηκα. 

οἰκτίρω (8 195, 4; οἰκτιρ-) pity, Ist aor. ῴκτιρα (δ 204). 

οἴομαι (8 193), Ist per. often οἶμαι, impf. ᾧμην (probably pf. and 
plupf.), think, fut. οἰήσομαι ($ 190), Ist aor. pass. φήθην (§ 158, 5). 

οἴσω shall bear. Cf. φέρω. 

οἴχ-ομαι (δ 193) be gone, fut. οἰχήσομαι (δ 190), 2d pf. οἴχωκα ($§ 179; 
40). 

ὀκέλλω (8 195, 3; ὀκελ-) run ashore, 1st aor. ὥκειλα (ὃ 204). 

odio O-dv-w (ὃ 196, 2; ὀλισθ-) slip, 2d aor. ὦλισθον. 

(ἀπ-) ὄλλυμι (for *6A-vd-pw, ὃ 196, 5; theme 6A- and ὀλε-) also ἀπ-ολλύω 
destroy, lose (mid. perish), fut. (a7-) 0X (§ 212, 1, for drAEow, § 188), 
Ist aor. (ἀπ-) ὥλεσα (δ 188), 2d aor. (ἀπ-)ὠλόμην perished, 1st pf. 
(ἀπ-)ὀλώλεκα, 2d pf. (ἀπ-) ὄλωλα δὲ lost, perish (ὃ 494, 2). 

ὀλοφύρομαι (§ 195, 4) bewail, fut. ὀλοφυροῦμαι, Ist aor. ὠλοφυράμην (ὃ 158, 
3), Ist aor. pass. partic. ὀλοφυρθείς made to lament (δ 510). 


ξέω, epic Ist aor. ἔξεσσα (δ 201 a). 


[root ὀδυ- (for édvc-)] enrage (poetic), only Ist aor. mid. ὠδυσάμην 
(ὠδυσσάμην, ὃ 201 a) was enraged, and pf. mid. ὀδ-ώδυσ-μαι (δὲ 179; 
189). 

ὄζω, poetic 2d pf. ὄδ-ωδ-α (δ 179), plupf. ὁδώδη (δ 171 a). 

ofyw, poetic fut. offw, 1st aor. ὥϊξα and @éa (or οἶξα, § 171 a). 

οἰδ-άν-ω (§ 196, 2) swell (poetic) = οἰδῶ. 

οἰνοχοῶ (-€w) pour wine, in Homer augments to é-o.v- (for é-fo-, § 172, 2. 
Mss. éwr-). 

οἴομαι, Homer often has Ist sing. ὀΐω (ὀΐω). and mid. ὀΐομαι, Ist aor. ὀισά- 
μην (§ 171 a), 1st aor. pass. ὠΐσθην (§ 189). 


§ 729] LIST OF VERBS 405 
[Attie principal parts in full-faced type. Ionic and poetic forms at the 
bottom of the page. | 
ὄμ-νυ-μι and ὀμ-νύτω (8 196, 5; theme ὁμ- and ὁμο-) swear, fut. ὀμοῦμαι 

(8 507, for ὀμόσομαι, §§ 212, 1; 188), Ist aor. ὥμοσα (ὃ 188), Ist 
pf. ὀμώμοκα ($$ 179; 188); pf. mid. ὀμώμο(σ)μαι, Ist aor. pass. 
apd (o) Onv. 
opopy-vi-pe (δ 196, 5) wipe, fut. ὀμόρξομαι, Ist aor. ὥμορξα, Ist aor. pass. 
(a7r-) @pdpx Onv. 
d-vi-vy-pe (δ 193, 3; reduplicated without regard to the 0; theme ov7, 
éva-, § 13) benefit, fut. ὀνήσω, Ist aor. ὥνησα, 2d aor. mid. ὠνήμην 
derived benefit (opt. ὀναίμην, ὃ 211, note, infin. ὄνασθαι), Ist aor. 
pass. ὠνήθην. 
ὀξύνω (8 195, 4) sharpen, usually in the compound παρ-οξύνω provoke, 
irritate, fut. (παρ-)οξυνῶ (ὃ 213), Ist aor. (παρ-)ώξυνα (ὃ 204), 
pf. mid. (παρ-)ώξυμμαι (§ 35), Ist aor. pass. (παρ-)ωξύνθην. 
[root ὀπ-] see, fut. ὄψομαι (§ 507), pf. mid. ὦμμαι, Ist aor. pass. ὥφθην, 
cf. ὁρῶ. ᾿ 
ὀργίζω (§ 292, 6, οἵ. ὀργή anger) enrage, regular, with fut. mid. ὀργιοῦμαι 
(§$ 215), fut. pass. ὀργισθήσομαι (cf. § 519, note 2). 
opéy-w (ὃ 193) reach, fut. ὀρέξω, Ist aor. ὥρεξα, Ist aor. pass. apex Onv. 
ὀρύττω (ὃ 195, 1; theme dpvy-) dig, fut. ὀρύξω, Ist aor. dpvga, 2d pf. 
᾿ ὀρτώρυχ-α (ὃ 179), pf. mid. ὀρώρυγμαι, Ist aor. pass. ὠρύχθην. 
6pa(-aw) (ὃ 164) see (impf. ἑώρων, § 172, note 1), fut. supplied by 
ὄψομαι [dz-], aor. supplied by 2d aor. εἶδον [7d-], Ist pf. ἑόρακα 
(plupf. ἑωράκη, for jop-, ὃ 17), pf. mid. ἑώραμαι, or supplied by 
ὦμμαι [ὁπ-], Ist aor. pass. (supplied) ὥφθην [ὁπ-], vbl. ὁρᾶτός or 
(supplied) ὀπτέος. 


ὄνο-μαι (ὃ 195; dyo-), inflected like δίδομαι (ὃ 252) with pres. opt. ὄνοιτο 
(§ 170, 4) insult (Tonic and poetic), epic fut. ὀνόσσομαι (ὃ 201 a), Ist 
aor. ὠνοσάμην, also aor. pass. subj., in same sense, κατ-ονοσθῇς (Hat. ). 

[root ὀπ-] 2d pf. (lonic and poetic) ὄπ-ωπ-α (§ 179). 

ὀπυίω take to wife (poetic), fut. dricw. 

dpéyw, epic also ὀρέγνυῦμι (ὃ 196, 5), epic pf. mid. dp-dpey-wac (δ 179) with 
3d pl. ὀρωρέχ-αται, plupf. dpwpéx-aro (ὃ 226 a). 

ὄρ-νυ-μι (δ 196, 5, dp-) rouse (poetic), fut. ὄρσω (mid. dpoduar, ὃ 215), Ist 
aor. dpoa (ὃ 204 a, with impv. ὄρσεο, ὃ 201 Ὁ), 2d aor. (trans. and ° 
intrans.) ὥρορον (δ 208, 1 a), 2d aor. mid. ὠρόμην (but several forms 
without variable vowel, ὃ 207 a; as 3d sing. ὦρτο, impv. ép-ao, infin. 
ὄρ-θαι for *dp-cbar, ὃ 35, partic. dp-wevos), 2d pf. dp-wp-a (δ 179) am 
aroused (§ 494, 5), pt. mid. 3d sing. ὀρώρεται (epic). 


400 LIST OF VERBS [8 729 
[Attic principal parts in full-faced type. Ionic and poetic forms at the 
bottom of the page. ] 
ὀσφραίνομαι (8 292, 8; dadp-) smell, fut. ὀσφρήσομαι (ὃ 190), 2d aor. 
mid. ὠσφρόμην, Ist aor. pass. ὠσφράνθην. 

οὐρῶ (-€w, ὃ 292, 2) mingo, fut. οὐρήσομαι (ὃ 507), Ist aor. ἐούρησα 
(8 172, 2), Ist pf. ἐούρηκα (ὃ 180). 

ὀφείλω (ὃ 195, 4; ὀφελ-} owe, fut. ὀφειλήσω (ὃ 190), Ist aor. ὠφείλησα 
(8 190), 2d aor. ὥφελον (see § 585), Ist pf. ὠφείληκα (ὃ 190), Ist 
aor. pass. partic. ὀφειληθείς (ὃ 190). 

ὀφλ-ισκ-άν-ω ($$ 197; 196,2; ὀφλ-) be guilty, incur, fut. ὀφλήσω (§ 190), 
2d aor. ὦφλον (1st aor. ὥφλησα is doubtful), Ist pf. ὥφληκα. 


παίζω (§ 195, 2; mad-) sport (fut. παίσομαι, § 507), 150 aor. ἔπαισα, Ist 
pf. πέπαικα, pf. mid. πέπαισμαι (ὃ 189). 

παλαίω (ὃ 193) wrestle, regular, but Ist aor. pass. ἐπαλαίσθην (ὃ 189). 

παρα-νομῶ(-έω) transgress law, augments to παρ-εν- (ὃ 175, 1). 

mapo.ve(-ew) commonly has double augment and reduplication (δὲ 175, 
note; 181); as Ist aor. ἐ-παρ-ῴνησα, Ist pt. πε-παρ-ῴνηκα. 

πάσχω ($197; for ἔπαθ-σκω, ὃ 30; the 6 leaves its aspiration with the 
x; theme zrov6-, πενθ-, παθ-, § 14,1) experience, suffer, fut. πείσομαι 
(for ἔπενθ-σομαι. § 34), 2 aor. ἔπαθον, 2 perf. πέπονθα (ὃ 219, 5). 

παύ-ω (ὃ 193) stop, cause to cease, regular, but vbl. παυστέος (ὃ 189). 

πείθ-ω (§ 193, 2; theme ποιθ-, πειθ-, πιθ-. § 14, 2) persuade, fut. πείσω, 
Ist aor. ἔπεισα, Ist pf. πέπεικα (ὃ 494, 2), 2d pf. πέποιθα. trust 
(δ 494, 2), pf. mid. πέπεισμαι (§ 159, note), Ist aor. pass. ἐπείσθην 
(ὃ 189, note), vbls. πισ-τός, πεισ-τέος. 


ὀφείλω, epic pres. usually ὀφέλλω. 


[root ma-] acquire (poetic, but used by Xenophon), fut. πάσομαι, Ist aor. 
ἐπασάμην (ὃ 158, 3), pf. πέπᾶμαι possess (δ 53d). 

malw strike, regular, has poetic fut. παιήσω (ὃ 190; cf. § 519, note 2). 

πάλλω (§ 195, 3; mad-) brandish (mostly poetic), Ist aor. ἔπηλα (ὃ 204, 
note 2), 2d aor. partic. (epic) (ἀμ-)πε-παλών (ὃ 208, 1 a), 2d aor. 
mid. 3d sing. (epic) ἔ-παλτο (§ 207 a), pf. mid. πέπαλμαι. 

πάσχω, for epic 2d pf., 2d pl. πέπασθε (for ἔπε-παθ-τε, cf. πάσχω for ἔπαθ- 
okw), partic. fem. πεπαθυῖα. see ὃ 219 a. 

πατέομαι (ὃ 193; πατ-, ὃ 190) eat (Ionic and poetic), fut. πάσομαι. Ist aor. 
ἐπασάμην, epic plupf. πε-πάσ-μην (δὲ 171 a; 189, note). 

πάττω (§ 195, 1, rar-), Ionic πάσσω (ὃ 22), sprinkle (mostly poetic), fut. 
πάσω, Ist aor. éraca, Ist aor. pass. ἐπάσθην (ὃ 189, note). 

πείθω, poetic 2d aor. (€)miBov (mid, ἐπιθόμην) with subj. πεπίθω, opt. πεπί- 


8 729] LIST OF VERBS 407 
[Attic principal parts in full-faced type. Ionic and poetic forms at the 
bottom of the page. ] 

teva (ἧς, -ἢ, ete., ὃ 199, 3) hunger, fut. πεινήσω, etc., regular. 

πέμπ-ω (ὃ 193, 2; theme πομπ-; πεμπ-, ὃ 14), send, fut. πέμψω, Ist aor. 
ἔπεμψα, 2d pf. πέπομφα (ὃ 219, 1 and 3), pf. mid. πέπεμμαι, Ist aor. 
pass. ἐπέμφθην. vbls. πεμπτός, πεμπτέος. 

πεπαίνω (ὃ 293, 8) make soft, 1st aor. ἐπέπανα (§ 204, note 2), 150 aor. 
pass. ἐπεπάνθην. 

πέπρωται if is fated, see [πορ-]- 

περαίνω (ὃ 292, 8, cf. πέρας end) accomplish, fut. περανῶ, Ist aor. érépava 
(ὃ 204, note 2), pf. mid. πεπέρασμαι (ὃ 247), 150 aor. pass. ἐπεράνθην, 
vbls. περαντός, περαντέος. 

πέρδιομαι (ὃ 193; πορδ-, περὸ-, παρδ-, § 14, 1) pedo, fut. παρδήσομαι 
($$ 190; 507), 2d aor. ἔπαρδον (ὃ 208), 2d pf. πέπορδα (8 219, 3). 

metav-vi-pe (§ 196, 5, for ἔπετασ-νῦμι). usually ἀνα-πετάννυμι expand, 
fut. πετῶ (cf. § 212, 1), 150 aor. ἐπέτασα, pf. mid. πέπταμαι (redupli- 
cation contrary to ὃ 178, 1), Ist aor. pass. ἐπετάσθην (§ 189, note). 


θοιμι, etc. (ὃ 208, 1 a), fut. from aor. stem (ὃ 519 a) πε-πιθ-ήσω shall 
persuade, epic 2d plupf., 1st pl. ἐ-πέ-πιθ-μεν (δ 219 a), impv. πέ-πισ-θι 
(Aesch.). Also afut. πιθήσω shall obey and aor. partic. πιθήσας obey- 
ing, trusting, as if from a pres. *béw obey. 

πείκτω (ὃ 195; probably for *mexpw, ὃ 16) comb, shear (poetic), also a 
denominative (ὃ 292, 2) πεκτῶ(-έω), Ist aor. ἔπεξα, Ist aor. pass. 
ἐπέχθην. 

πείρω (ὃ 195, 4; theme περ-, παρ-, ὃ 14, 1) pierce (Ionic and poetic), Ist 
aor. ἔπειρα, pf. mid. πέ-παρ-μαι (ὃ 224, note), 2d aor. pass. er dee 
(§ 232, 2). 

πελάζω (ὃ 292, 6; cf. πέλας near) bring near (Ionic and poetic), fut. 
πελάσω and πελῶ (§ 212, Ἐν Ist aor. ἐπέλασα, also epic 2d aor. mid. 
od sing. ἔ-πλη-το and 3d pl. ἔ-πλη-ντο (ὃ 207 a) approached, pf. mid. 
πέ-πλη-μαι (cf. ὃ 38, 1), Ist aor. pass. ἐπελάσθην (ὃ 189) and 
ἐπλάθην (8 38). 

πέλ-ω (ὃ 195 ; πελ-, πλ-, ὃ 14) and πέλομαι (lit. go, come) be (poetic equiv- 
alent of εἰμί or γίγνομαι), 2d aor. ἔπλον, mid. ἐπλόμην (§ 208). 

πέρθ-ω (δ 195; theme περθ-, πραθ-, ὃξ 14, 1; 38) sack (poetic), fut. πέρσω 
(with πέρσομαι as pass., ὃ 515, 1), Ist aor. ἔπερσα (for *é-rep6-ca, 
§ 205), 2d aor. ἔπραθον (ὃ 38). (Doubtful is infin. πέρθαι, for ἔπερθ- 
ga? (δὲ 30; 35). 

πέρ-νημι (§ 196, 3; περασ- 3) sell (poetic), fut. repdw (cf. § 212, 1), 1st 
aor. ἐπέρασ(σ)α (ὃ 201 a), pf. mid. partic. πεπρημένος (ὃ 38, Mss. 
πεπερημένοΞ). 


408 LIST OF VERBS [8 729 


[Attic principal parts in full-faced type. Jonic and poetic forms at the 
bottom of the page. ] 

mér-opar (8 193, 2; theme πετ-, πτ-, § 14) fly, fut. πτήσομαι (ὃ 38), 2d 
aor. ἐπτόμην (ὃ 208). 

πέττω (8 195, 1; πεπ-) cook, fut. πέψω, Ist aor. ἔπεψα, pf. mid. πέπεμμαι 
(88 27, 1; 247), 1st aor. pass. ἐπέφθην, vbl. πεπτός. 

ahy-vo-pe (§ 196, 5; theme wny-, παγ-, § 15), fiz, fut. πήξω, Ist aor. 
ἔπηξα, 2d pf. πέπηγα be fixed (§ 494, 3), 2d aor. pass. as intrans. 
(ef. § 514) ἐπάγην (§ 292, 1). 

πιαίνω (ὃ 292, 8) futten, fut. πιανῶ, Ist aor. ἐπίανα (ὃ 204, note 2), pt. 
mid. πεπίασμαι (ὃ 247). 

(ἐμ-)πί-μ-πλη-μι (8. 193, 3; for ἔπεπλη-μι with sympathetic 4; theme 
my, πλα-, § 13) fill, fut. (ἐμ-)πλήσω, Ist aor. (ἐν-)ἔπλησα, Ist 
pf. (ἐμ-) πέπληκα, pf. mid. (ἐμ-)πέπλησμαι (ὃ 159), Ist aor. pass. 
(ἐν-)ἐπλήσθην (ὃ 189), vbl. (ἐμ-)πληστέος (ἢ 189). 

(ἐμ)πίμπρημι (8 193, 3; for ἔπεπρηςμι with sympathetic μι; theme 
mpy, πρα-, ὃ 13) burn, fut. (ἐμ-)πρήσω, Ist aor. (ἐν-)ἔπρησα, pf. 
mid. (ἐμ-) πέπρημαι, Ist aor. pass. (ἐν-)ἐπρήσθην (ὃ 189). 

mi-v-w (δ 196,1; theme πι-, also related theme zo-, πω", § 15) drink, 
fut. πίομαι (§ 216), 2d aor. ἔπιον, Ist pf. πέπωκα, pf. mid. πέπομαι 
(8 188, 1), Ist aor. pass. ἐπόθην (ὃ 188, 1), vbls. πο-τός, ποτέος 
(8 188, 1). 

m-mpa-okw (ὃ 197, 1; πρᾶ-) sell, Ist pf. πέπρακα,᾽ pf. mid. πέπραμαι, 
Ist aor. pass. ἐπράθην, other forms supplied by other verbs (δ 164). 

πί-πτ-ο (δ 193, 3; theme (zor-), πετ-, πτ-, § 14, and rrw- (πτη-): ὃ 38, 1) 
fall, fut. πεσοῦμαι (for ἔπετεομαι), 2d aor. ἔπεσον (for *€zreror), 1st 
pt. πέπτω-κα (reduplication contrary to ὃ 178, 1). 


πέτομαι, poetic fut. πετήσομαι (ὃ 190), 2d aor. ἔπτην (as if from stem πτα-. 
inflected like ἔστην, ὃ 257) and mid. ἐπτάμην (like ἐπριάμην, ὃ 257) ; 
poetic also are ποτάομαι and ποτέομαι (ὃ 292, 2 and 3), regular. 

πεύθομαι (δ 193, 2) learn (poetic) = πυνθάνομαι. 

πέφνον slew, see [φεν-]. 

méppadov indicated, see φράζω. 

πήγνῦμι, epic 2d aor. 3d sing. κατ-έ-πηκ-το (§ 207 a), poetic is 1st aor. 
pass. ἐπήχθην. 

πίλ-νη-μι (§ 196, 3) approach (epic), only pres. and impf. = πελάζω. 

πινύ-σκω (§ 197 ; theme πιο) νυ-, cf. rvéw) make wise, epic 1st aor, ἐπίνυσσα 
(§ 201 a), pf. mid. rérviparam wise (§ 535) with partic. πεπνυμένος wise. 

πίπτω. epic 2d pf. partic. πε-πτητώς (ὃ 220), in Attic poetry contracted to 


TENT WS, 


Je. 


§ 729] LIST OF VERBS 409 
[Attic principal parts in full-faced type. Ionic and poetic forms at the 
bottom of the page. ] 
πλάττω (8 195, 1; πλατ-) mold, form (fut. πλάσω), Ist aor. ἔπλασα, 
pi. mid. πέπλασμαι (δ 189, note), Ist aor. pass. ἐπλάσθην (ὃ 189, 
note), vbl. πλαστός (ὃ 159, note). 

mréx-w (8 193; theme zAok-, πλεκ-» πλακ-, § 14, 1) plait, knit (fut. 
πλέξω), Ist aor. ἔπλεξα, 2d pf. πέπλοχα (ὃ 219, 1 and 3), pf. mid. 
πέπλεγμαι, Ist aor. pass. ἐπλέχθην, 2d aor. pass. ἐπλάκην (ἢ 252, 2). 

πλέω ($$ 193, note; 199, 2; wAev-, πλυ-, $$ 14, 2; 21) sail, fut. πλεύσομαι 
or πλευσοῦμαι (δ 214), Ist aor. ἔπλευσα, Ist pf. πέπλευκα, pf. mid. 
πέπλευσμαι (ξ 189) (1st aor. pass. ἐπλεύσθην, § 189, late), vbl. 
πλευστέος (ὃ 159). 

πλήττω (ὃ 195, note 2; theme πληγ-, πλαγ- ὃ 15) strike, fut. πλήξω, Ist 
aor. ἔπληξα, 2d pf. πέπληγα, pf. mid. πέπληγμαι, 2d aor. pass. 
ἐπλήγην (contrary to ὃ 232, 1), but in composition regularly 
-επλάγην (ὃ 252, 1). 

πλύνω (ὃ 195, 4) wash, fut. πλυνῶ, Ist aor. ἔπλῦνα (ὃ 204), pf. mid. 
πέπλυμαι, Ist aor. pass. ἐπλύθην. ᾿ 

πνέω ($§ 193, note; 199, 2; avev-, πνυ-. 88 14, 2; 21) breathe, blow, 
fut. πνεύσομαι and πνευσοῦμαι (ὃ 214), 150 aor. érvevoa, Ist pf. 
πέπνευκα. 

πνίγτω (8 193; mviy-, πνιγ-, ὃ 13) choke, fut. πνίξω, Ist aor. ἔπνιξα, pf. 
mid. πέπντγμαι, 2d aor. pass. ἐπνίγην (ὃ 252, 1). 

ποθῶ(-ἔω) desire, has forms both with ε and ἡ (cf. ὃ 188), as fut. 
ποθήσω or ποθέσομαι (ὃ 507), Ist aor. ἐπόθησα or ἐπόθεσα. 


πίτ-νη-μι (§ 196, 5) spread (poetic) = “πετάννυμι. 

πίτ-νω (δ 196, 1) fall (poetic) = πίπτω. 

πλάζω (§ 195, note 1) cause to wander (Ionic and poetic), fut. mid. πλάγ-- 
ἕομαι shall wander, 1st aor. ἔπλαγξα, Ist aor. pass. ἐπλάγχθην wan- 
dered (§ 158, 3). 

πλάττω, Ionic πλάσσω (§ 22), epic Ist aor. ἔπλασσα (ὃ 201 a). 

πλέω, epic also πλείω. Tonic and poetic rAd, fut. πλώσομαι (ὃ 507), 
Ist aor. ἔπλωσα, 2d aor. ἔπλων (8 209), Ist pf. πέπλωκα, VbI. πλωτός. 

πλήττω, epic plupf. with variable vowel (ἐ) πέπληγον, poetic and rare is 
Ist aor. pass. ἐπλήχθην. 

πνέω, epic also πνείω, epic 2d aor. 3d sing. ἄμ-πνῦτο (§ 209) and impvy. 
ἄμ-πνυο (Mss. ἄμπνυε). 

ποιῶ(-έω) do, poetic is ποῶ (ὃ 21). 

[root πορ-, tpw-, § 38, 1] give, allot (poetic), 2d aor. ἔπορον, pf. mid. 3d 
sing. rérpwra it is fated, and partic. πεπρωμένος fated. 


410 LIST OF VERBS [§ 729 
[Attic principal parts in full-faced type. Ionic and poetic forms at the 
bottom of the page.] 
πρᾶττω (ὃ 195, note 2; apay-) do, fut. πράξω, 1st aor. ἔπραξα. 2d pf. 
πέπραγα, rarely πέπραχα (ὃ 219, 1), Ist aor. pass. érpaxOny, vbl. 
πρᾶκ-τέος (ὃ 25). 

[root πρια- (cf. πέρνημι)} buy, only 2d aor. ἐπριάμην (see § 257 and 
§ 211, note). 

πρίω (ὃ 193) saw, Ist aor. ἔπρῖσα, pf. mid. wémpiopar (8 189), Ist aor. 
pass. ἐπρίσθην (ὃ 189). 

πτάρ-νυ-μαι (ὃ 196, 5) sneeze, 2d aor. ἔπταρον. 

πτήσσω (ὃ 195, 1; theme πτηκ-, πτακ-, ὃ 13) cower, Ist aor. ἔπτηξα, 2d 
pt. ἔπτηχα (8 219, 1). 

πτύσσω (ὃ 195, 1; arvy-) fold, fut. πτύξω, Ist aor. ἔπτυξα, pf. mid. 
ἔπτυγμαι (ὃ 247), Ist aor. pass. ἐπτύχθην. 

πυνθάνομαι (ὃ 196, 2; theme πευθ-, πυθ-, § 14, 2) learn, inquire, fut. 
πεύσομαι (for ἔπευθισομαι, ὃ 30), 2d aor. ἐπυθόμην (§ 158, 3), pf. 
πέπυσμαι (ὃ 189, note), vbl. πευστέος. 


ῥάπ-τω ($194; pad-) stitch, fut. ῥάψω, Ist aor. ἔρραψα, pf. mid. ἔρραμμαι 
(§ 27, 1), 2d aor. pass. ἐρράφην, vbl. ῥαπτός. 

άττω = ἀράττω q.v., fut. ῥάξω, Ist aor. éppaga, Ist aor. pass. ἐρράχθην. 

ew (ὃ 193, note; theme pev-, pu-, §§ 14, 2; 21) flow, fut. ῥεύσομαι and 
ῥυήσομαι (§ 519, note 2), Ist pf. ἐρρύηκα (ὃ 190), 2d aor. pass. as 
intrans. (§ 514) ἐρρύην. vbl. ῥυτός. 


ῥ 
ῥέ 


πράττω, Lonic πρήσσω (δὲ 15a; 22). 


πτήσσω (Ionic and poetic also πτώσσω), poetic 2d aor. ἔπτακον (§ 208). 
Homer has also from theme πτα-, 2d aor. dual πτή-την (ὃ 209) and 
2d pf. partic. me-rrn-ws (§ 220). 

πτίσσω pound (Ionic, poetic, and late), Ist aor. ἔπτισα, pf. mid. ἔπτισμαι 
(ὃ 189 note), 1st aor. pass. ἐπτίσθην (ὃ 189, note). 


palyw (for *pav-w, ὃ 195, 4) sprinkle (onic and poetic), fut. pave, Ist aor. 
épava (§ 204, note 2), pf. mid. ἔρρασμαι (ὃ 247), Ist aor. pass. ἐρράνθην. 
Homer has also forms as if from root ῥαδ- : 150 aor. éppacca, and pf. 
od pl. ἐρράδ-αται, plupf. ἐρράδατο (ὃ 226 a). 

pal-w (ὃ 193) strike (poetic), fut. palow, Ist aor. ἔρραισα, Ist aor. pass. 
ἐρραίσθην (δ 189). 

ῥέζω (§ 195, 2; for Ἐ(ρ)ρεγ-ειω, § 2 ἃ, cf. ἔρδω and ἔργον work) do (poetic), 
fut. ῥέξω, Ist aor. ἔρρεξα and ἔρεξα, Ist aor. pass. partic. pex Gels, vbl. 
ῥεκτός. 


§ 729] LIST OF VERBS 411 
[Attic principal parts in full-faced type. Ionic and poetic forms at the 
bottom of the page.] 
[root ῥη-] pf. εἴρηκα have said, pf. mid. εἴρημαι, Ist aor. pass. ἐρρήθην, 
see εἴρω. 

pjy-vv-pe (δ 196, 5; theme fny-, pay-, ὃ 15, and a stronger form pwy-) 
break, fut. ῥήξω, Ist aor. ἔρρηξα, 2d pf. ἔρρωγα am broken (δ 494, 3), 
pf. mid. (rare) ἔρρηγμαι, 2d aor. pass. ἐρράγην (ὃ 232, 1). 

ῥιγῶ(-όω ?) shiver, in pres. contracts to ὦ and w instead of ov and οι; 
as opt. ῥιγῴην, infin. ῥιγῶν, cf. δηλῶ (§ 250), fut. ptydow, Ist aor. 
ἐρρίγωσα. 

ῥίπττω (8 194; ῥῖπ-: ῥιπ-. § 15) and ῥτιπτῶ (-έω, § 190) throw, fut. ῥίψω, 
Ist aor. ἔρριψα, 2d pf. ἔρριφα (ὃ 219, 1), pf. mid. épptppor (ὃ 27, 1), 
2d aor. pass. ἐρρίφην. 

ῥών-νυ-μι (ὃ 196, note) strengthen, [st aor. tppwoa, pf. mid. ἔρρωμαι 
(partic. ἐρρωμένος strong, as an adjective), Ist aor. pass. ἐρρώ- 
σθην (ὃ 189). 


σαίρω (ὃ 195, 4; theme onp-, cap-, ὃ 13) clean off, 2d pf. σέσηρα (ὃ 535) 
show the teeth, grin. 

σαλπίζω (ὃ 195, note 1; σαλπιγγ-) sound a trumpet, Ist aor. ἐσάλπιγξα. 

σάττω (ὃ 195, note 2; cay-) pack, load, 150 aor. traga, pf. mid. σέσαγμαι. 

σβέν-νυ-μι (δ 196, note) extinguish, fut. σβέσω (δ 188), Ist aor. ἔσβεσα 
(ὃ 188), Ist pf. (ἀπ-)ἔσβηκα (ὃ 218, 2) intrans. have gone out 
(ὃ 494, 3), Ist aor. pass. ἐσβέσθην, and 2d aor. pass. as intrans. 
(8 514), (ἀπ-)ἔσβην went out. 


ῥιγῶ(-ἔω) shudder (poetic), fut. pryjow, 150 aor. éppiynoa, 2d pf. Eppiy-a 
(δὲ 190 ; 535). 

imTw, poetic Ist aor. pass. ἐρρίφθην. 

ὕομαι (ὃ 193) defend, protect (poetic) = ἔρῦμαι, q.v., fut. ῥύσομαι, 150 Por. 
ἐρρυσάμην, 2d aor. mid. 3d sing. ép(p)iro (8 209), 3d pl. ῥύ-ατο 
(δὲ 167 d; 171 a), pf. mid. εἴρῦμαι ? (referred also to gptuac). 

purée soil, epic pf. mid. partic. pe-purw-uévos (contrary to § 178, 1). Also 
a pres. ῥυπάω be dirty (cf. § 292, 1 and 3). 


ῥ 
ῥ 


σαίνω (ὃ 195, 4 ; cav-) fawn upon (poetic), Ist aor. ἔσηνα (8 204, note 2). 
σαόω (ὃ 292,1 ; cf. σάος safe) save (poetic), fut. cadow, Ist aor. ἐσάωσα, Ist 
aor. pass. ἐσαώθην (epic. pres. subj. 2d sing. ca@s (cf. $ 170, 2 ; Mss. σόης, 
coos), 3d sing. cag (cf. § 170, 2; Mss. σόω, σόῃ, σόοι). 3d pl. σαῶσι 
(Mss. σόωσι, cf. § 199 b), epic. impf. 38d sing. σάου (ὃ 171 a; Mss. σάω, 
cf. ὃ 199 b), epic impv. 2d sing. σάου (for *cace ; Mss. σάω, cf. § 199 b). 


412 LIST OF VERBS [8 729 
[Attic principal parts in full-faced type. Ionic and poetic forms at the 
bottom of the page.] 
σέβ-ω (8 193) more often σέβομαι (ὃ 158, 3) revere, Ist aor. ἐσέφθην 
(8 158, 3). 

ocl-w (§ 193) shake, fut. σείσω, etc., regular, but pf. mid. σέσεισμαι 
(8 189) and Ist aor. pass. ἐσείσθην (ὃ 189). 

σημαίνω (ὃ 292, 8; cf. σῆμα sign) show, fut. σημανῶ (ὃ 215), lst aor. 
ἐσήμηνα (ὃ 204, note 2), pf. mid. σεσήμασμαι (ὃ 247), 150 aor. pass. 
ἐσημάνθην. 

σήπ-ω (ὃ 199,1; theme onz-, σαπ-, § 13) rot (fut. enw), 2d pf. σέσηπα 
be rotten (ὃ 494, 2), 2d aor. pass. as intrans. (ὃ 514) ἐσάπην. 

σκάπ-τω (ὃ 194; cxad-) dig, fut. σκάψω, Ist aor. ἔσκαψα, 2d pf. ἔσκαφα 
(§ 219, 1), pf. mid. ἔσκαμμαι (ὃ 247), 2d aor. pass. (κατ-)ἐσκάφην. 

σκεδάν-νυ-μι (§ 196, note) scatier, fut. σκεδῶ (cf. ὃ 212, 1), 150 aor. 
ἐσκέδασα, pf. mid. ἐσκέδασμαι (ὃ 189), Ist aor. pass. ἐσκεδάσθην 
(8 189). 

σκέπ-τομαι (ὃ 194; σκεπ-) view (in Attic prose the present is usually 
supplied (§ 164) by σκοπῶ(-έω), regular), fut. σκέψομαι, Ist aor. 
ἐσκεψάμην (ὃ 158, 5), pf. ἔσκεμμαι (ὃ 247), vbl. σκεπτέος. 

σκήπ-τω (ὃ 194; σκηπ-) prop, fut. σκήψω, Ist aor. ἔσκηψα, pf. mid. 
ἔσκημμαι (ὃ 247), Ist aor. pass. ἐσκήφθην. 

σκώπ-τω (ὃ 194; σκωπ-) jeer, fut. σκώψομαι (§ 507), Ist aor. ἔσκωψα 
(pf. mid. ἔσκωμμαι, § 247), Ist aor. pass. ἐσκώφθην. 

THO (Tus, Tu, etc., § 199, 5) smear, otherwise regular, fut. cpAce, ete. 


σεύω (ὃ 193; theme cev-, ov-, ὃ 14, 2) drive on, urge (poetic), aor. ἔσσευα 
($§ 172, 1 a; 207, note 1), aor. mid. 2d sing. ἔσσυο, 3d sing. ἔσσυ-το 
(σύτο). and partic. σύ-μενος (§ 211 a), pf. mid. ἔσσυμαι be in haste 
(δ 555), Ist aor. pass. ἐσσύθην or ἐσύθην rushed (cf. § 514). Also a 
pres. σοῦμαι (from *codouar ?), etc., impv. σοῦ, σούσθω., infin. σοῦσθαι. 
(For σεῦ-ται, assumed to be a -uw form, perhaps codrac should be 
read. ) 

σίνομαι (δ 195, 4; owv-) injure, 150 aor. éotvduny (Tonic). 

σκέλλω (ὃ 195, 33 σκελ-, σκλα-, §§ 14,1; 388) dry wp (Tonic and poetic), 
epic Ist aor. éoxnda (with ἡ. ὃ 204), 2d aor. intrans. (§ 294, 1), 
ἔσκλην (§§ 207 a; 209), Ist pf. ἔ-σκλη-κα (§ 218, 3). 

σκευά ζω make ready, regular, Herodotus has pf. 3d pl. ἐσκευάδ-αται, plupf. 
ἐσκευάδ-ατο (ὃ 226 a). 

σκίδνη-μι (§ 193, 3) scatter (poetic) = σκεδάννυμι, q.v. 

σμήχω (lonic and poetic, = cud), 1st aor. ἔσμηξα, 150 aor. pass. ἐσμήχθην, 

σοῦμαι. See cevw. 


§ 729] LIST OF VERBS 413 
[Attie principal parts in full-faced type. Ionic and poetic forms at the 
bottom of the page. ] 
σπείρω (ὃ 195, 4; theme σπερ-, orap-, § 14, 1) sow, fut. σπερῶ, Ist aor. 
ἔσπειρα, pf. mid. ἔσπαρμαι (ὃ 224, note), 2d aor. pass. ἐσπάρην 
(ἢ 252, 2), vbl. σπαρτός. 

σπένδ-ω (ὃ 193), pour libation, fut. σπείσω (for *orevd-cw, ὃ 34), Ist 
aor. ἔσπεισα, pf. mid. ἔσπεισμαι (§ 159, note). 

σπῶ(-ἄάω, § 188) draw, fut. σπάσω, Ist aor. ἔσπασα, Ist pf. ἔσπακα, 
pf. mid. ἔσπασμαν (ὃ 189), Ist aor. pass. ἐσπάσθην (ὃ 189), vbl. 
σπαστός (ὃ 189). 

στέλλω (ὃ 195, 9; theme στελ-, σταλ-, ὃ 14, 1) send, fut. στελῶ (§ 213), 
Ist aor. ἔστειλα (ὃ 204), Ist pf. ἔσταλκα (8 218, 4), pf. mid. 
ἔσταλμαι (ὃ 224, note), 2d aor. pass. ἐστάλην (§ 232, 2). 

στενάζω (ὃ 195, 2; orevay-) groan, fut. στενάξω, Ist aor. ἐστέναξα. 

orépy-w (ὃ 193,25; theme oropy-, orepy-, ὃ 14) love, fut. στέρξω, Ist aor. 
ἔστερξα, 2d pt. ἔστοργα (ὃ 219, 3). . 

(ἀπο-)στερῶ (-έω, ὃ 292, 2) and στερ-ίσκω (§ 197) deprive, also a pres. 
nid. στέρομαι be deprived, be in want, fut. στερήσω, etc., regular. 

στίζω (ὃ 195, 2; orty-) prick, fut. στίξω, Ist aor. ἔστιξα, pf. mid. 
ἔστιγμαι, vbl. στικτός (ὃ 25). 

στόρινυ-μι (δ 190, 5) spread, in prose usually στρώννυμι (δ 38, 1) αν.» 
fut. στορῶ (for στορέσω, ὃ 212, 1), 1st aor. ἐστόρεσα (8 188). 

στρέφ-ω (ὃ 193, 2; theme ortpod-, otped-, στραφ-, § 14, 1) turn, fut. 
στρέψω. Ist aor. ἔστρεψα, 2d pf. ἔστροφα (ὃ 219,35), pf. mid. ἔστραμ.- 
μαι (§ 224, note), Ist aor. pass. ἐστρέφθην (mostly epic, rare in 
prose), usually 2d aor. pass. as intrans. (δ 514) ἐστράφην (ὃ 252, 2), 
vbl. στρεπτός. 

στρών-νυ-μι (ὃ 196, note) sprend (cf. στόρνυμι). fut. στρώσω, Ist aor. 
ἔστρωσα, pf. mid. ἔστρωμαι, Ist aor. pass. ἐστρώθην. 


στάζω (§ 195, 2; oray-) drop (Ionic and poetic, rare in prose), [fut. 
στάξω], Ist aor. ἔσταξα, pf. mid. ἔσταγμαι, aorists pass. ἐστάχθην (1st) 
and ἐστάγην (2d). 

στείβω (§ 193, 2) tread (mostly poetic), fut. στείψω, etc., regular, Also 
στιβῶ (-éw), pf. mid. ἐστίβημαι. 

στείχ-ω (§ 193, 23 στειχ-: στιχ-. ὃ 14, 2) march, Ist aor. ἔστειξα, and epic 
2d aor. intrans. ἔστιχον (ὃ 208). 

στέρομαι, poetic 2d aor. pass. ἐστέρην (contrary to ὃ 252, 2). 

στεῦται. στεῦνται, and στεῦτο (poetic) set one’s self at, promise, threaten 
(only pres. and impf.). 


414 LIST OF VERBS [8 729 
[Attic principal parts in full-faced type. Ionic and poetic forms at the 
bottom of the page.] 

συρίττω whistle, see συρίζω below. 

σύρ-ω (§ 193) draw (fut. cvp@), Ist aor. értpa, Ist pf. σέσυρκα, pf. mid. 
σέσυρμαι [2d aor. pass. ἐσύρην, late]. 

σφάζω (ὃ 195, 2; opay-), in prose commonly σφάττω (ὃ 195, note 2) 
slay, fut. σφάξω, Ist aor. ἔσφαξα, pf. mid. ἔσφαγμαι, 2d aor. pass. 
ἐσφάγην, vb. σφακτός. 

σφάλλω (§ 195, 3; σφαλ-) trip, deceive, fut. σφαλῶ, Ist aor. ἔσφηλα 
(8 204, note 2), pf. mid. ἔσφαλμαι, 2d aor. pass. ἐσφάλην. 

σῴζω (for *cw-rlw, ὃ 292, 6; cf. σῶς safe) save, fut. σώσω (contr. from 
σαώσω, See gadw), Ist aor. ἔσῳσα (and ἔσωσα, contr. from ἐσάωσα, 
see cadw), pf. σέσῳκα (and σέσωκα, from σαόω), pf. mid. σέσῳσμαι 
(8 189, and σέσωμαι, contr. from σεσάωμαι, see gaow), Ist aor. 
pass. ἐσώθην (contr. from ἐσαώθην, see σαόω), vb1. σῳστέος (ἢ 189). 


ταράττω (8 195, 1; ταραχ-) disturb, fut. ταράξω (fut. mid. often pass., 
§ 515, 1), Ist aor. ἐτάραξα, pf. mid. terdpaypat, Ist aor. pass. 
ἐταράχθην. 

τάττω (§ 195, note 2; ταγ-) arrange, fut. τάξω, Ist aor. ἔταξα, 2d γῇ. 
τέταχα (ὃ 219, 1), pf. mid. τέταγμαι, Ist aor. pass. ἐπαχθῆ: vbls. 
τακτός, TaKTéos (ὃ 25). 

τείνω (8 195, 4; theme τεν-, ταν; ὃ 14, note) stretch, fut. τενῶ, Ist aor. 
ἔτεινα, Ist pf. τέτακα (ὃ 218, 4), pf. mid. τέταμαι (§ 224, note), 


στυγῶ (-éw, ὃ 190) hate (Ionic and poetic), fut. mid. (as pass. § 515, 1) 
στυγήσομαι, Ist aor. ἐστύγησα, and trans. ἔστυξα made hateful, 20 aor. 
(epic) ἔστυγον, Ist pf. ἐστύγηκα (ὃ 535), Ist aor. pass. ἐστυγήθην. 

συρίζω (ὃ 195, note 1; cupryy-), Attic συρίττω (ὃ 195, note 2) whistle, Ist 
aor. ἐσύριξα. 

σφάζω, Ionic and poetic is the rare Ist aor. pass. ἐσφάχθην. 

σχεθεῖν, ἔσχεθον, etc. See ἔχω. 


[root ray-] only epic 2d aor. partic. τεταγών seizing (§ 208, 1 a). 

τα-νύ-ω (ὃ 196, 5, for *rv-yu-w, § 14, note; cf. relyw) stretch (poetic and 
Ionic), also pres. mid. τά-νυ-μαι (pres. theme is carried into the other 
tenses), fut. τανύω (§ 216), Ist aor. ἐτάνυσα and ἐτάνυσσα (ὃ 201 a), 
pf. mid. τετάνυσμαι, Ist aor. pass. ἐτανύσθην. 

ταράττω, Ionic ταράσσω (ὃ 22), epic 2d pf. intrans. (8 494, 3) ré-rpnx-a 
(§ 38) be disturbed. 

[root rap- (for ἔθαφ, ὃ 41), θηπ- (ὃ 13)] (poetic), only 2d aor. ἔταφον, 
2d pf. τέθηπα (ὃ 219, 2), epic plupf. ἐ-τε-θήπεα (§ 222 a). 


§ 729] LIST OF VERBS 415 
[Attic principal parts in full-faced type. Ionic and poetic forms at the 
bottom of the page.] 

Ist aor. pass. éra@nv (for ξέττν-θην, § 14, note, contrary to ὃ 251, 4), 
vbls. τατός, τατέος (ὃ 14, note). 

τεκμαίρομαι judye, infer, fut. rekpapodpat, Ist aor. ἐτεκμηράμην (ὃ 153, 3). 

(ἀνα-)τέλλω (ὃ 195, 3; theme τελ-, ταλ-, ὃ 14, 1) cause to rise, rise, 1st 
aor. (ἀν-)ἔτειλα, pf. mid. (ἐν-)τέταλμαι (ὃ 224, note). 

τελῶ (-€w for ἔτελεσ-ιω, αὶ 292, 2; cf. τέλος end) finish, fut. τελῶ (§ 212, 1), 
150 aor. ἐτέλεσα (§ 188), pt. τετέλεκα (ὃ 155), pf. mid. τετέλεσμαι 
($ 189), Ist aor. pass. ἐτελέσθην (ἢ 189), vbl. τεχεστέος (ὃ 159). 

τέμ-νω (ἢ 196, 1; Tep-, Tap, 5. 14,1) cut, fut. repo, 2d aor. ἔτεμον, Ist 
pt. τέτμηκα (8 2138, 3), pf. mid. τέτμημαι (ὃ 224, 1), Ist aor. pass. 
ἐτμήθην (§ 38, 1), vb. τμη-τέος (ἢ 33, 1). 

τέρπ-ω (ὃ 193, 2; τερπ--. ταρπ-. § 14, 1) delight, fut. τέρψω, Ist aor. ἔτερψα, 
150 aor. pass. ἐτέρφθην. 

τετραίνω ( 195, 4, rerpav-) bore ; also tenses from theme τερ-, τρη-- 
§ 38, 1, Ist aor. érérpava (ἢ 204, note 2), also ἔτρησα, pf. mid. 
τέτρημαι (Tp7-)- 

τήκ-ω (§ 193, 1; theme ryx-, tax-, § 13) melt, fut. τήξω. Ist aor. ernga, 
2d pf. τέτηκα am melted ($494, 2), 2d aor. pass. as intrans. (δ 514), 


ἐτάκην (ὃ 252, 1) melted, vbl. τηκ-τός. 


τεκμαίρομαι, act. Texualpw set a mark is poetic. 

[root reu-, tTu-] encounter, only epic 2d aor. é-re-ru-ov (§ 208, 1 a) and 
τέ-τμ-ον (§ 171 a). 

téuvw, Ionic and poetic τάμνω, 2d aor. ἔταμον (§ 208). See also τμήγω. 

téprw, epic 2d aor. mid. τε-ταρπ-όμην (§§ 208; 208, 1a; 171 a), subj. 
τετάρπωμαι and τάρπωμαι, Ist aor. pass. also ἐτάρφθην, and 2d aor. 
pass. (cf. § 514) ἐτάρπην, with subj. Ist pl. τραπήομεν (δὲ 98; 233, 
la; Mss. τραπείομεν). 

τερσαίνω (ὃ 195, 4) dry, epic 1st aor. τέρσηνα (ὃ 171 a). 

τέρσομαι (poetic) become dry, 2d aor. pass. as intrans. (ὃ 514) ἐτέρσην 
became dry. 

τεταγών having seized. See [ray-]. 

τετίησθον, τετιηώς, τετιημένος. See [τιε-]. 

τέτμον. See [{τεμ-]. 

τεύχ-ω (§ 193, 2; theme revy-, τυχ-. ὃ 14, 2) make ready (poetic), fut. 
τεύξω, Ist aor. ἔτευξα, 2d aor. infin. (from theme ruk-) τετυκεῖν, 3d pl. 
mid. τετύκοντο (8 171 a), 2d pf. rérevxa be ready (ὃ 494, 3), pf. mid. 
τέ-τυγ-μαι (§ 224, note ; for 84 pl. τετύχ-αται, τετύχ-ατο, See ὃ 226 a), 
epic 1st aor. pass. ἐτύχθην (contrary to § 231, 4). Cf. τυγχάνω. 

τήκω, rare and mostly poetic is Ist aor. pass. ἐτήχθην was melted. 


410 LIST OF VERBS [§ 729 


[Attic principal parts in full-faced type. Ionic and poetic forms at the 
bottom of the page. ] 

τίτθη pe (ὃ 193,3; theme θη-, θε-, ὃ 13) put (inflection § 251), fut. θήσω, 
aor. ἔθηκα (ὃ 211, 3, inflection § 255), Ist pf. τέθηκα, pf. mid. τέθει- 
μαι, but usually supplied by κεῖμαι (§ 264), Ist aor. pass. ἐτέθην 
(ὃ 40), vbls. θετός, θετέος. 

τίκτω (for *terTK-w, ὃ 199, 3; theme τοκ-, τεκ-, τκ-, § 14) beget, bring 
Jorth, fut. τέξω, 2d aor. ἔτεκον, 2d pt. τέτοκα (ὃ 219, 3), Ist aor. 
pass. ἐτέχθην. 

tivo (ὃ 196,1; theme re-, τι-, ὃ 14, 2) pay, fut. relow, Ist aor. ἔτεισα, 
Ist pf. τέτεικα, pf. mid. τέτεισμαι (§ 189), Ist aor. pass. ἐτείσθην 
(ὃ 189), vbl. τειστέος (ὃ 189). 

τι-ττρώ-σκω (ὃ 197, 1; τρω-} wound, fut. τρώσω, Ist aor. ἔτρωσα, pf. mid. 
τέτρωμαι, Ist aor. pass. ἐτρώθην. 

τρέπ-ω (ὃ 193, 2; theme τροπ-. τρεπ-, τραπ-, ὃ 14, 1) turn, fut. τρέψω, 
Ist aor. ἔτρεψα, 2d aor. mid. ἐτραπόμην (δ 208) turned, fled, 2d pf. 
τέτροφα (sometimes possibly rérpada), pf. mid. τέτραμμαι (§ 224, 
note), Ist aor. pass. ἐτρέφθην and 2d aor. pass. usually as intrans. 
(ὃ 514) ἐτράπην (ὃ 252, 2) turned, vbl. τρεπτέος. 

tpép-w (ὃ 193, 2; theme tpod-, τρεφ-, tpad-, § 14, 1; for *6pod-, etc., 
δ 41) support, feed, rear, fut. θρέψω (ὃ 41), Ist aor. ἔθρεψα (§ 41), 


[root rue-] only epic 2d pf. partic. τετιηώς troubled, dual. mid. τετίη-σθον, 
mid. partic. τετιημένος troubled. 

τίλλω (§ 195, 3; TiA-) pluck (mostly poetic) fut. TAG, Ist aor. ἔτιλα, pf. 
mid. τέτιλμαι, Ist aor. pass. ἐτίλθην. 

tivw, Homer has rivw (with long c) ; in pres. and impf. τίτω (δ 198) give 
what is due, honor (poetic), fut. τίσω, Ist aor. rica, pf. mid. τετιμένος. 

τι-ταίνω (ὃ 195, 4; theme ταν- reduplicated ; cf. τείνω) stretch (epic), 1st 
aor, ἐτίτηνα (ὃ 204). 

[root τλη-, TAa-, Tada-] endure (poetic), fut. τλήσομαι, Ist aor. ἐτάλασσα 
(rada-), 2d aor. ἔτλην (like ἔστην, ὃ 257), Ist pf. τέ-τλη-κα, also 2d pf. 
without suffix (§§ 220; 258) τέτλαμεν, opt. τετλαίην, impy. τέτλαθι, etc. 

τμήγω (ὃ 198, 1; Tuny-, Tuay-) cut (poetic = réurw), fut. τμήξω, Ist aor. 
ἔτμηξα, 2d aor. ἔτμαγον (ὃ 208), 2d aor. pass. ἐτμάγην (ὃ 232, 1). 

Top@(-ew) pierce (poetic), fut. τορήσω, and from redup. aor. stem (ὃ 519, 
note 2) reropjow, Ist aor. ἐτόρησα, 2d aor. ἔτορον (cf. ὃ 190). 

rpérw, Ionic has sometimes τράπω, poetic 2d aor. act. érparov, Homer 
and Herodotus have Ist aor. pass. ἐτράφθην. 

τρέφω, epic 2d aor. (intrans.) ἔτραφον grew up (ὃ 494, 1), poetic Ist 
aor. pass. ἐθρέφθην. 


§ 729] LIST OF VERBS 417 
[Attic principal parts in full-faced type. Ionic and poetic forms at the 
bottom of the page. ] 

2d pf. rérpoda (§ 219, 3), pf. mid. τέθραμμαι (ὃ 224, note), 2d aor. 
pass. ἐτράφην (ὃ 252, 2). 

tpéx-w (8 195; theme Opex-, ὃ 41) run; other tenses supplied (δ 164) 
from theme dpap-; fut. Spapotpar, 2d aor. ἔδραμον, pt. δεδράμηκα 
(§$ 190), pf. mid. δεδράμημαι (δ 190), but vb]. θρεκτέος. 

τρέω (ὃ 199, 2) tremble, 1st aor. ἔτρεσα (ὃ 188). 

tptB-w (ὃ 195; rpiB-, τριβ-}) rub, fut. τρίψω, Ist aor. ἔτριψα, 2d pf. 
rérpipa, pf. mid. rérpippor (ὃ 247), Ist aor. pass. ἐτρίφθην, but 
more often 2d aor. pass. ἐτρίβην. 

TpvXx-w, τρυχῶ(-όω), and tpt-w wear away, exhaust, all regular, but see 
§ 164. 

τρώγ-ω (ὃ 195; tpwy-, Tpay-) gnaw, fut. τρώξομαι (δ 507), 2d aor. ἔτρα- 
γον, pf. mid. térpwypat, vbl. τρωκτός. 

τυγχάνω (ὃ 196, 2; theme revy-, τυχ-- § 14, 2) hit, happen, fut. τεύξομαι 
(8 507), 2d aor. ἔτυχον (ὃ 208), Ist pf. τετύχηκα (ὃ 190). 

τύπ-τω (ὃ 194; τυπ-) strike, fut. τυπτήσω ($$ 190; 519, note 2), other 
tenses usually supplied (ὃ 164) from παίω or πατάσσω; pass. 
supphed from πλήττω. 

τύφ-ὦ (§ 193; theme θυφ-. ὃ 41) raise smoke, smoke, pf. τέθυμμαι, 2d aor. 
pass. as intrans. (ὃ 514) ἐτύφην. 


ὑπισχ-νοῦμαι (-έομαι, ὃ 196, 4) promise (δ 508), fut. ὑποσχήσομαι, 2d 
aor. ὑπεσχόμην, pi. ὑπέσχημαι ; cf. ἔχω and ἴσχω. 

ὑφαίνω (ὃ 195, 4: ὕφαν-) weave, fut. ὑφανῶ, Ist aor. ὕφηνα (ὃ 204, 
note 2), pf. mid. ὕφασμαι (8 247), Ist aor. pass. ὑφάνθην, vbl. 
ὑφαντός. 

ὕτω (8 193) rain, fut. vow, Ist aor. toa, pf. mid. ὕσμαι (ὃ 189), Ist 
aor. pass. ὕσθην (ὃ 189). 


τρέχω. poetic fut. θρέξομαι (ὃ 507), Ist aor. ἔθρεξα (ὃ 41). 

τρίζω (δ 195, 2; rpty-) squeak (Ionic and poetic), 2d pf. ré-rpiy-a (§ 535) 
with Epic partic. τετριγώς, -yaros, fem. τετριγυῖα. 

τρώω wound (epic, rare) = τιτρώσκω. 

τυγχάνω, epic also Ist aor. éréxnoa, Ionic and late is 2d pf. rérevya. 
Homer often uses τέτυγμαι, ἐτύχθην (from revxw) in almost the sense 
of τετύχηκα, ἔτυχον. 

τύπτω. epic and Ionic Ist aor. ἔτυψα, poetic 2d aor. ἔτυπον, pf. mid. (Ionic 
and poetic) τέτυμμαι (ὃ 27, 1), poetic 2d aor. pass. ἐτύπην. 


ὑπισχνοῦμαι, Ionic and poetic usually ὑπίσχομαι. 
BABBITT’S GR. GRAM. —27 


418 LIST OF VERBS [§ 729 
[Attic principal parts in full-faced type. Ionic and poetic forms at the 
bottom of the page. ] 
φαίνω (for *parv-w, § 195, 4; theme φαν-) show, fut. φανῶ, Ist aor. 
ἔφηνα (ὃ 204, note 2), Ist pf. πέφαγκα, 2d pf. πέφηνα have appeared 
(δ 494, 2), pf. mid. πέφασμαι (see § 247), 2d aor. pass. as intrans. 
(δ 514) ἐφάνην appeared. 

da-ok-w (ὃ 197) say, only pres. and impf.; see φημί. 

eiS-opar (δ 193, 2; theme φειδ-, φιδ-) spare, fut. φείσομαι (for *ped- 
copat, § 30), Ist aor. ἐφεισάμην, vbl. φεισ-τέος (ἢ 26). 

hép-w (ὃ 193, 2) carry (see § 164), fut. supplied by οἴσω, aor. supplied 
by ἤνεγκα (ὃ 207, note 1) or 2d aor. ἤνεγκον (theme éveyx-), 2d pf. 
év-nvox-a (S$ 179; 219, 1 and 3), pf. mid. ἐν-ήνεγ-μαι (ὃ 224, note), 
Ist aor. pass. ἠνέχθην, vbls. οἰστός, oloréos. Cf. [evex-]. 

hevy-w (§ 195, 2; hevy-, φυγ-. § 14, 2), also rarely φυγγάνω (δ 196, 2) 
flee, fut. φεύξομαι or φενξοῦμαι (ὃ 214), 2d aor. ἔφυγον (ὃ 208), 
2d pf. πέφευγα (ὃ 219, note 1). 

φη-μί ( 193; dy, pa-, § 15) say (inflection ὃ 263), fut. φήσω, Ist aor. 
ἔφησα, vbls. φατός, φατέος. 

φθάνω (§ 196, 2; φθη-. φθα-, § 13) anticipate, fut. φθήσομαι (ὃ 507; 
doubtful is φθάσω), Ist aor. ἔφθασα, 2d aor. ἔφθην (like ἔστην. 
§ 257). 

φθείρω (ὃ 195, 4; theme φθορ-. φθερ-. φθαρ-. § 14, 1) corrupt, fut. φθερῶ, 
Ist aor. ἔφθειρα, Ist pf. ἔφθαρκα (ὃ 218 » 4)» but commonly 2d _ pf. 
δι-ἐφθορα (ὃ 219,35), pf. mid. ἔφθαρμαι (8 224, note), 2d aor. pass. 
(cf. § 514), ἐφθάρην (ὃ 252, 2). 


φαίνω, epic also φαείνω appear, shine, 1st aor. pass. ἐφαένθην (Mss. ἐφαάν- 
θην, cf. ὃ 199 Ὁ). Homer has also from shorter root φα- 2d aor. Pde 
(δ 171 a) appeared, and fut. pf. πεφήσεται. For φάνεσκον see ὃ 191 Ὁ. 

φείδομαι, epic 2d aor. πεφιδόμην (δὲ 208 ; 208, 1 a; 171 a), fut. from aor. 
stem (ὃ 519 a) πεφιδήσομαι. 

[root φεν-, φν-, pa (for φν-, ὃ 14 note) ] kill (epic), 2d aor. ἔ-πε-φῴν-ον ($§ 208 
208, 1 a) and πέφνον (ὃ 171 a) slew, pf. mid. πέ-φα-μαι (ὃ 224, aan 
fut. pf. πεφήσομαι (ὃ 228). 

φέρω, epic 2d pl. impyv. φέρτε (for φέρετε). for Ist aor. impv. οἶσε see 
§ 201 Ὁ. (Herodotus has (once) Ist aor. infin. ἀν-οἶσαι.) Ionic forms 
from theme éveck- are 1st aor. ἤνεικα (δ 207, note 1), 2d aor. ἤνεικον, pf. 
mid. ἐνήνειγμαι, Ist aor. pass. ἠνείχθην. 

φεύγω, epic pf. mid. partic. πε-φυγ-μένος (ὃ 219 a), and pf. act. partic. 
πε-φυζ: ότες (as if from *pvf-w). 

φθάνω, epic 2d aor. mid. partic. φθάμενος (ὃ 211 a). 


§ 729] LIST OF VERBS 419 
[Attic principal parts in full-faced type. Ionic and poetic forms at the 
bottom of the page. ] 
φθίτνω (δ 196, 1), waste, decay, fut. φθίσω, 150 aor. ἔφθισα, 2d aor. mid. 
ἐφθίμην perished, pf. mid. ἔφθιμαι. 

φιλῶ(-ἐω) love (inflection ὃ 249), fut. φιλήσω, etc., regular. 

dpay-vv-pe (ὃ 196, 5) fence = patra, q.v. 

pate (ὃ 195, 2; dpad-) point out, declare, tell (mid. consider), fut. 
φράσω (ὃ 30), Ist aor. ἔφρασα. Ist pf. πέφρακα, pf. mid. πέφρασμαι 
(δ 189, note), Ist aor. pass. ἐφράσθην (ὃ 189, note), vbl. φραστέος 
(δ 189). 

φράττω (ὃ 195, 1; theme φρακ- and dpay-, ὃ 195, note 2) fence [fut. 
φράξω or φάρξω (ὃ 38) ], Ist aor. ἔφραξα or ἔφαρξα (ὃ 38), pf. mid. 
πέφραγμαι Or πέφαργμαι (ὃ 38), Ist aor. pass. éppaxOnv, vbl. φρακ-τός 
or φαρκ-τός (ὃ 35). 

φρίττω (ὃ 195, 1; φρῖκ-) shudder [fut. dow], Ist aor. ἔφριξα, Ist pf. 
πέφρικα am in a shudder (§ 535). 

dpvy-o (ὃ 193) roast, fut. φρύξω, Ist aor. ἔφρυξα. pf. mid. πέφρυγμαι, vb. 
φρυκτός. 

φυλάττω (ἢ 195, 1; φυλακ-) guard, fut. φυλάξω. Ist aor. ἐφύλαξα, 2d pf. 
πεφύλαχα. pf. mid. πεφύλαγμαι. Ist aor. pass. ἐφυλάχθην. vbl. 
φυλακτέος. 

φύρ-ω (ὃ 193) mix, pf. mid. πέφυρμαι ; also φυρῶ(-άω) regular. 

φύ-ω (ὃ 193; φῦ- φυ- § 15) produce, fut. φύσω. Ist aor. ἔφυσα, 2d aor. 
ἔφυν grew, be by nature (§ 494, 1), 150 pf. πέφυκα be (§ 494, 3), 
vbl. φυτός. 


φθίνω, Homer has φθίνω with longt. (Two supposed occurrences of a 
pres. φθίω in Homer (φθίῃς, ἔφθιεν) are easily corrected to the cor- 
responding forms (φθίεαι, ἔφθιτο) of the aor. mid.) For the epic 
2d aor. opt. φθίμην, etc. (for Ἐφθι-ι-μηὴν) see ὃ 211, 2 a. For pf. 
3d pl. ἔ-φθι-ατο see ὃ 220 ἃ. Epic Ist aor. pass. ἐφθίθην (3d pl. ἔφθι- 
θεν, ὃ 255 a). 

φιλῶ. epic Ist aor. mid., from stem φιλ- (cf. ὃ 190), ἐ-φιλ-άμην (δ 204). 

= For epic pres. infin. φιλή-μεναι see ὃ 199 ἃ. 

φλεγ-έθω (ὃ 191 a) burn (poetic) = φλέγω. 

φράζω, epic 2d aor. ἐ-πέ-φραδ-ον (ὃ 208, 1 a) or πέφραδον (ὃ 171 a). 

φρύγω, aorists pass. (Ionic and late) ἐφρύχθην Ist, ἐφρύγην 2d. 

pipw, epic Ist aor. ἔφυρσα (ὃ 204 a), poetic Ist aor. pass. ἐφύρθην. 

gow, in Homer usually with v, in epic also 2d pf. (8 220) 3d pl. πε-φύ-ἄσι, 
partic. we-du-ws (fem. éu-regduvia), 1st plupf. with variable yowel 
ἐ-πέ-φῦκ-ον. 


420 LIST OF VERBS [§ 729 


[Attic principal parts in full-faced type. Ionic and poetic forms at the 
bottom of the page.] 

(ἀνα-γχάζω (8 195, 2; yad-) withdraw (fut. χάσομαι, ὃ 507), 150 aor. 
ἔχασα. The verb is mostly poetic; cf. κέκαδον. 

χαίρω (ὃ 195, 4; yap-) rejoice, fut. χαιρήσω (δ 190), Ist pf. κεχάρηκα 
(ξ 190), pf. mid. kéxappar and κεχάρημαι (ὃ 190), 2d aor. pass. as 
intrans. (8. 514) ἐχάρην rejoiced, vbl. xaprés. 

XaAG(-aw, ὃ 188) loosen, Ist aor. ἐχάλασα, Ist aor. pass. ἐχαλάσθην 
(§ 189). 

χέζω (ὃ 195, 2; theme yxod-, χεδ-, § 14) caco, fut. χεσοῦμαι (for Ἀχεδ- 
σοῦμαι, $$ 30; 214), Ist aor. ἔχεσα, rarely with variable vowel 
(cf. § 201 b) ἔχεσον, 2d pf. κέχοδα (ὃ 219, 9). 

χέω (§ 193, note; ὃ 199, 2; theme yev-, χυ- ὃ 14, 2) pour, fut. χέω 
(ἢ 216), aor. ἔχεα (ὃ 207, note 1), Ist pf. κένχυ-κα, pf. mid. κέχυμαι 
(§ 224, note), Ist aor. pass. ἐχύθην, vbl. χυτός. 

χρή it is necessary, see § 267. 

χρίω (δ 193) anoint, sting, fut. xptow, 1st aor. expioa, pf. mid. Kéxpipar, 
Ist aor. pass. ἐχρίσθην (ὃ 189), vbl. χρῖστός (ὃ 189). 

χρῳΐζω (for χρω-ίζω, § 292, 6, ef. χρώ-ς complexion) color, stain, pf. mid. 
κέχρῳσμαι (ὃ 189), Ist aor. pass. ἐχρῴσθην (ὃ 189). 

χρῶ (ὃ 199, 3) give oracles, fut. χρήσω, Ist aor. ἔχρησα, Ist pf. κέχρηκα, 
pf. mid. κέχρημαι, Ist aor. pass. ἐχρήσθην (ὃ 189). ἀποχρῶ be suffi- 
cient (usually impersonal dzroyp7), like χρῶ. 


> 9 


χρῶμαι (χρῇ: χρῆται, etc., § 199, 8) use (middle deponent, § 158, 3), 


χαίρω, epic Ist aor. mid. 3d sing. χήρατο (δὲ 204; 171 a), epic 2d aor. 
mid. κεχαρόμην (δὲ 208, la; 171 a). 

xavddvw (ὃ 196, 2; theme xovd-, xevd-, χαδ- (for xvd-, § 14, note) contain 
(Ionic and poetic), fut. χείσεται (for ἔχενδσεται, ὃ 54), 2d aor. ἔχαδον, 
2d pf. κέχανδα Mss. (better κέχονδα, ὃ 219, 5). 

χάσκω (for ἔχαν-σκω Ὁ, ὃ 197; theme χην-, xav-, ὃ 13) gape (Ionic and 
poetic), fut. χανοῦμαι, 2d aor. €xavor, 2d pf. κέχηνα be agape (δ 535). 

xéw, epic pres. rarely yelw, epic aor. also ἔχευα ; for epic 2d aor, mid. 
as pass. éxuro see §§ 211 a; ὃ 516, 1. 

[root χραισμ-} help, avert (epic), only 2d aor. ἔχραισμον ; also from 
χραισμε- (§ 190), fut. χραισμήσω, Ist aor. éxpalounoa. , 

χρῴζω, poetic χροΐζω. 

χρῶ, χρῶμαι, in Ionic contract to ἃ where Attic has ἡ ; as 3d sing. χρᾶται. 
infin. χρᾶσθαι, etc.; pres. subj. χρέωμαι, etc. (cf. § 199 ce) ; partic. 
χρεώμενος (cf. ὃ 199 c). 


§ 729] LIST OF VERBS 421 
[Attic principal parts in full-faced type. Ionie and poetic forms at the 
bottom of the page. ] 

fut. χρήσομαι, Ist aor. ἐχρησάμην, pf. κέχρημαι, Ist aor. pass. 
(δ 510) ἐχρήσθην (ὃ 189), vbls. χρηστός, χρηστέος (ὃ 159). 

χῶ (-όω) heap up, fut. χώσω, Ist aor. ἔχωσα, Ist pf. κέχωκα. pf. mid. 
κέχωσμαι (ὃ 189), Ist aor. pass. ἐχώσθην (ὃ 189), vbl. χωστός 
(§ 189). 


ψεύδ-ω (8 195, 2) deceive (mid. lie), fut. ψεύσω (ὃ 30), Ist aor. ἔψευσα 
(8 30), pf. mid. ἔψευσμαι (ὃ 189, note), Ist aor. pass. ἐψεύσθην 
(8 189, note). 

ψύχ-ω (ὃ 195) cool, fut. ψύξω, Ist aor. ἔψυξα, pf. mid. ἔψυγμαι, Ist aor. 
pass. ἐψύχθην and 2d aor. pass. as intrans. (§ 514) ἐψύχην cooled. 

Yo (Wys, Wy, ete., § 199,53) rub (usually in composition: as ἀπο-ψῶ), 
fut. ψήσω, etc., regular; pf. mid. usually supplied from ψήχω 
(regular), ἔψηγμαι. 


006 (-έω, § 190; theme ὧθ-, for ἔρωθ-, ὃ 2 a) push (impf. ἐώθουν, 
§ 172, 2), fut. dew (for *H6-cw, § 30), Ist aor. ἔωσα (ὃ 172, 2), pt. 
mid. ἔωσμαι ($$ 180; 189, note), Ist aor. pass. ἐώσθην (S$ 172, 2; 
189, note), vbl. ὠστέος (§ 189). 

ὠνοῦμαι (-έομαι) buy (impf. ἐωνούμην. ὃ 172, 2), fut. ὠνήσομαι, aor. sup- 
plied (§ 164) by ἐπριάμην (ὃ 257), pf. ἐώνημαι (§ 150), Ist aor. 
pass. ἐωνήθην (ὃ 172, 2), vbls. ὠνητός, ὠνητέος. 


08, poetic fut. sometimes ὠθήσω (ὃ 190), Ionic Ist aor. (contracted) 
ὦσα, pf. mid. ὦσμαι. 


ENGLISH 


INDEX 


[THE REFERENCES ARE TO SECTIONS] 


Verb forms, as a rule, are not listed in the Greek index, but they are 
to be sought in the List of Verbs (§ 729). 


Ablative genitive 361 ff. 

Absolute construction, accusative 
348, 658 ; genitive 369, 657. 

Abstract for concrete 322; substan- 
tive suffixes 282. 

Acatalectic verse 689. 

Accent 55 ff. ; position of 57; rules 
for 58 ff.; recessive accent 64; 
accent of contracted syllables 65 ; 
of elided words 66 ; proclitics 69 ; 
enclitics 70; accent in declension 
77; stems of one syllable in 3d 
decl. 100; of neuter participle 129, 
2-3; of adjectives 117, 2; 118, 3; 


and part’? 335 a; adverbial uses 
336 ff.; of specification 337; of 
extent 338; of limit of motion 
339 and a; two accusatives with 
one verb 340 ; predicate accusative 
341; subject of infinitive 342 and 
note ; 629; of swearing 344 ; with 
compound verbs 345 ; prepositions 
with 346; 899; with verbs that 
usually take genitive 356 note 1; 
by attraction from genitive or 
dative 631, 1; accusative absolute 
343; after ὡς and ὥσπερ instead of 
genitive absolute 658 note. 


119, 1; 120, 1-2; 122, 2; of per-| Action, suffixes denoting 279. 
sonal pronouns 139, 1-2 and notes | Active infinitive with passive mean- 


1-2; of the verb 184; of infini- 


ing 641 note. 


tive, participle, and verbals 185 ;| Active voice 503 ; endings of 166, 1; 


of contract verbs 185 note ; of ἐστί 


167; 170 notes 1 and 2. 


2625 ΤΣ Acute accent 56; changed to grave 


Accompaniment, dative of 392. 


67. 


Accusative, singular of Attic 2d decl. | Adjectives, declension of 116 ff. ; of 


92, 3; in 3d decl. 97; of -o.-stems 
in Hdt. 112a; Epic -éa for -ὖν 
125 a; plural of Ist decl. 84 note ; 
of stems in -- and -v- 110, 4; 
110 e; plural of Bods 111 c; of 
comparatives 121, 2. 

Accusative case, syntax of 328 ff. ; 
direct object 829 ff.; cognate 331 ff.; 
of part affected 335; ‘* whole 

422 


Ist and 2d decl. 117; contract 118 ; 
of two endings 119; of 3d decl. 
120 ff. ; of Ist and 3d decl. 122 fi. ; 
stems in -v- 123; stems in -y7- 
125 ; of one ending 126 ; of irregu- 
lar declension 127-128; compari- 
son of adjectives 132 ff.; in -wy 
and -ovs 133; by μᾶλλον, μάλιστα 
135; irregular comparison 186 ; 


ENGLISH INDEX 423 


[THE REFERENCES ARE TO SECTIONS] 


correlation of pronominal adjec- 
tives 151 ; numeral adjectives 152 ; 
formation of adjectives 287-289 ; 
syntax of adjectives 419 ff. ; agree- 
ment of 420 ff. ; predicate 421 ff. ; 
used substantively 424; with ad- 
verbial force 425; comparative 
426; superlative 427 ; position of 
with article 451 ff.; objective geni- 
tive with 351 ; 367 ; partitive geni- 
tive with 357; genitive of sepa- 
ration with 362, 2; dative with 
376 note; 392, 2; infinitive with 
641. 


Adonic verse 708, 1. 


Advantage, dative of 377 note 1; 378. 


Adyerbial use of prepositions in 


Homer 398 a; adverbial force of 
appositive 318 note; adverbial 
accusative 336 ff. ; adjectives with 
adverbial force 425; adverbial in- 
finitive 642. 


Adverbs, form of 157 ; comparison 


of 138; correlation of pronominal 
151; numeral adverbs 152; for- 
mation of 290. 


Adverbs, syntax of 429 ff. ; attribu- 


tive — adjective 429, 1; οὐ and μή 
431-435; ἄν 486-459; use of 7 
with comparative adverbs 426 note 
3 ; 430; partitive genitive with 360 
and note; genitive of separation 
with 362, 3; dative with 392, 3; 
adverbs with circumstantial par- 
ticiple 654 ff. 

Aeolic dialect, Introduction, page 
12; Aeolic forms in Homer 139 a ; 
199 d. 

Agent, suffixes denoting 278; geni- 
tive of 8372; 516; dative of 380; 
516, 1; 5160 ἃ ; accusative of 516, 1. 
Agreement 314; of substantives 
317 ff.; of adjectives 420 ff. ; of 
pronouns 462; personal 466 ; re- 


flexive 469 ; αὐτός 474 ; possessive 
476 ; demonstrative 480; relative 
483 ff. ; interrogative 489 ; indefi- 
nite 491 ; agreement of verbs 495, 

Alphabet 1. 

Alternative questions, direct 574 and 
a; indirect 579 and a. 

Anaclasis 711 note. 

Anacoluthon 717, 1. 

Anacrusis 706. 

Analogy, in word formation 275; 
283, 1 2845 1.- 287. 5; 292: 

Anapaest 683; anapaestic rhythms 
703 ff. ; 709, 2. 

Anastrophe 68. 

Antecedent 460; implied 461; not 
expressed 486. 

Antepenult 51. 

Anticipatory subjunctive 555 note ; 
562 a; in questions 576 a. 

Antistrophe 691. 

Antonomasia 322. 

Aorist tense 161 note: First aorist, 
formation of 201 ff.; inflection of 
206 ; in -ξα in Homer 195, 2a; in 
-coain Homer 201 a; with varia- 
ble vowel 201 b; in -ρσα in Homer 
204 a: Second aorist, reduplica- 
tion of 183; 208, 1 a; formation 
of 207 ff.; inflection of 210 ff.; 
207 note 1; epic peculiarities 
207 a> 2085 fas 210a 5 911 jas 
subjunctive of, in Homer 211, 1a; 
in Herodotus 211, 1 b; epic opta- 
tive of -.- and -u-stems 211, 2 a: 
First aorist passive, formation of 
231; inflection of 233; 245: 
Second aorist passive, formation 
of 232 ; inflection of 253 ; 246. 

Aorist, use of 528 ff. ; inceptive 529 ; 
rendered by present 529 note; 
gnomic 530; of the future 531; 
in other modes than indicative 
543 ff. ; in indirect discourse 551 ; 


424 


ENGLISH INDEX 


[THE REFERENCES ARE TO SECTIONS] 


aorist middle as passive 515, 1 and 
a; aorist indicative in subordinate 
clauses not changed in indirect 
discourse 675, 3. 

Aphaeresis 717, 2. 

Apocope 48 note ὃ, 

Apodosis 600; apodotie δέ 601 note. 

Apparent compounds 297. 

Apposition 317 ff. ; genitive case in 
apposition with adjective 420 
note; with possessive pronoun 477 
note. 

Arsis 684. 

Article, 6, 7, 76, declined 144; epic 
forms of 144 a. 

Article, syntax of 448 ff.; use as 
a demonstrative. 443; in Homer 
443 a; with proper names 446; 
with possessive force 447 ; generic 
448; with predicate substantive 
449; position of article 450 ff. ; 
attributive 451; predicate 453; 
with μέσος, ἄκρος, etc. 454; with 
mas and ὅλος 455 ; with demonstra- 
tive pronouns 456; with limiting 
genitive 457; predicate position 
modified 458. 

Articular infinitive 636 and a. 

Asclepiadean verse 708, 6. 

Aspiration, rejection of 40; 44,4 a; 
transfer of 41; in Ionic 41 a; in 
elision 44, 4. 

Assimilation of consonants 25 ; 27; 
31; 383; in contracted verbs in 
Homer 199 b-c. 

Association, dative of 392. 

Asyndeton 717, 3. 

Attempted action 523 ; 527. 

Attic dialect, Introduction, page 12 ; 
ἢ for original a in 15; Attic 2d 
decl. 92; in Ionic 92 a; Attic re- 
duplication 179 ; augment of 176a; 
Attic future 215. 

Attraction 316 ; of adjectives 631, 1; 


of pronouns 465; 484; of verbs 
501; 590 notes 1 and 4. 

Attributive, the 802; adverb = ad- 
jective 429, 1; attributive posi- 
tion of adjectives 451 ff. ; of αὐτός 
475, 1; attributive participle 650 ; 
rendering of 650 note 2. 

Augment 171 ff. ; omission of 171a; 
syllabic 172 ; doubling of liquids 
after 172, 1 a; temporal 173; of 
compound verbs 174; of denomi- 
native verbs 175 ; double augment 
172 note 1; 175 note; of pluper- 
fect 176. 


Bacchius 683 ; Bacchiae rhythms 713. 
Basis (metrical) 707 note 1. 
Brachylogy 717, 4. 

Breathings 8; smooth for rough in 
Tonic 8 a; always rough with p 
and v9; 10. 

Bucolic diaeresis 701, 1. 


Caesura 690; masculine and femi- 
nine 701 note. 

Case endings 76 ; Homeric 76 a-c. 

Cases, formation of in 3d decl. 94 ff. 

Cases, syntax of 323 ff. ; nominative 
3825; vocative 327; accusative 
328 ff.; genitive 347 ff.; dative 
373 ff.; prepositions with the 
cases 398 ff. 

Catalexis 689. 

Causal clauses 598. 

Cause, genitive of 866; dative of 
391 and note ; implied by circum- 
stantial participle 653, 4. 

Charge or penalty, genitive of 367. 

Chiasmus 717, 5. 


| Choliambus 698 note. 


Choriambus 683; choriambic 
rhythms 710. 
Chronology 725 ff. 


Circumflex accent 56, 


ENGLISH INDEX 


[THE REFERENCES ARE TO SECTIONS] 


Circumlocution in wishes 587 note 1 ; 
588 note. 

Circumstantial participle 652 ff. ; 
translation of 653; adverbs with 
654 ff. ; in genitive and accusative 
absolute 657-658. 

Cognate accusative 331; retained 
in the passive 340 ; 512; 515 note. 

Cognate mutes 12, 2. 

Collectives 315 ; 321; agreement of 
verbs with 500. 

Colon 686. 

Commands 582 ff. ; in indirect dis- 
course 678 note. 

Common Greek (κοινή) Introduction, 
page 12; common, quantity of 
syllables 54; gender 78 note. 

Comparative degree, syntax of 426. 

Comparatives, declension of 121; 
genitive with 363 ; 426, 2. 

Comparison of adjectives 152 ff. ; by 
-Tepos, -Tatos 132; by -ἴων, τιστος 
134; by μᾶλλον, μάλιστα 135; 
irregular comparison 136; com- 
parison of adverbs 158. 

Compensative lengthening 16. 

Complementary infinitive 638. 

Complex sentences 313. 

Compound negatives 435. 

Compound sentences 312. 

Compound verbs, augment of 175, 
1; reduplication of 181; accent 
of 184, 1; accusative with 345 ; 
genitive with 370; dative with 
394; some transitive by composi- 
tion 495, 2. 

Compound words, formation of 
294 ff. ; inflection of 294, 1; ap- 
parent compounds 297 ; compound 
verbs 298 ; meaning of compound 
words 300 ; accent of 300 note. 

Concession, implied by circumstan- 
tial participle 653, 7. 

Concessive clauses 617. 


Conclusion (of condition). See 
Apodosis. 

Conditions 599 ff.; simple 602 ; 
more vivid 604; less vivid 605; 
contrary to fact 606; general 
608 ff. ; summary of conditions 
611; variations in 612; implied 
conditions 614; implied in parti- 
ciple 655, 6. 

Conjugation of -w verbs 237 ff. ; of 
-μι verbs 251 ff.; of irregular 
verbs 258 ff. 

Conjunctions, syntax of 440 ff. 

Conjunctive mode. See Subjunctive. 

Consonants 12; sounds of 11; all 
sounded 11 note; double conso- 
nants 12, 3; consonant changes 
22-37 ; doubled consonants 22-24 ; 
in Homer 22 a; with vowels 98-- 
39; with « 39; final 48. 

Construction according to sense 314 ; 
with collective substantives 321; 
500 ; with neuter words, etc. 422 ; 
464. 

Context, meanings of tenses from 
518; 528; 524; 527; 530; time 
implied by 541; 544; 547. 

Contract adjectives 118; participles, 
declined 190. 

Contract verbs, accent of 185 note; 
inflection of 199; in Homer 199 
a-d; in Herodotus 199 e; para- 
digms of 248-250 ; contraction of 
verbs of two syllables in -éw 199, 2. 

Contracted substantives in 1st decl. 
88; in Ionic 88 a; in 2d decl. 91. 

Contracted syllables, accent of 65. 

Contraction of mode suffix. See 
160, 2. 

Contraction of names in -κλέης 108 
and a. 

Contraction of vowels 18; table of 
715; contraction of three vowels 
19 note 1. 


420 
[THE REFERENCES 


Co-ordinate mutes 12, 2. 

Copula 307 ; omission of 908, 

Coronis 45. 

Correlation of pronouns 151. 

Crasis 45 ; accent in 66 note. 

Cretic 683 ; Cretic rhythms 714. 

Customary action 520, 1; 626, 1; 
568. 

Cyclic feet 682, 6. 


Dacty] 683 ; dactylic rhythms 700 ff. ; 
709, 1; dactylo-epitritic rhythms 
709. 

Daric, value of 724, 1. 

Dative case, accent of 77, 2 ; in Attic 
2d decl. 92, 1; dative plural, end- 
ing of in Homer 76 b; 99 a; of 
1st decl. in Ionic 84 Ὁ ; of 2d deel. 
in Homer 90 c; of 3d decl. 99; 
Homeric 99 a; 106 b-c; of βοῦς 
111 Ὁ. 

Dative case, syntax of 373 ff. ; indi- 
rect object 375; of interest 377 ; 
of advantage or disadvantage 378 ; 
of possession 379; of agent 580 ; 
ethical (or emotional) 581; of 
reference 3882; of place 384 anda; 
of time 3885; instrumental 386 ; 
of means 387; of degree of dif- 
ference 388; of manner 389; of 
respect 390; of cause 391; of 
accompaniment 392; with sub- 
stantives 893; with compound 
verbs 394 and note ; prepositions 
with 395 ; 399. 

Days, names of 727 ; divisions of 728. 

Declension of nouns 75 ; of substan- 
tives 78 ff. : First declension 80 ff. : 
Second declension 89 ff. ; Homeric 
peculiarities 90 a-c : Third declen- 
sion 93 ff.; irregular declension 
114-115 ; declension of adjectives 4 
116 ff. ; of pronouns 139 ff. ; of | 


numerals 158. 


ENGLISH INDEX 


ARE TO SECTIONS] 


Degree of difference, dative of 388. 

Deliberative questions (subj.) 577. 

Demonstrative pronouns 144 ff. ; 
adjectives and adverbs 151; pro- 
nouns, syntax of 480 ff.; article 
with 456 and note. 

Denominative verbs 165; 291-292 ; 
formation of 292 ; not compounds 
298 note. 

Denominative words 269. 

Deponent verbs 158, 5 ; 508. 

Depriving, genitive after words of 
362 note ; two accusatives after 340. 

Derivative words 269 ff. See Sutiix. 

Descriptive genitive 352. 

Desiderative verbs 293. 

Diaeresis 7 ; in versification 690. 

Dialects, Introduction, pages 11-12. 

Digamma. See Vau. 

Dimeter 686, 2. 

Diminutives, suffixes forming 283. 

Diphthongs 5; improper 5, 1; 
sounds of 6, 1-8; interchange of 


14, 2; contraction of 19; how 
augmented 179, 1; diphthong 


stems in 3d 460]. 111. 

Dipody 686, 1. 

Direct questions. See Questions. 

Disadvantage, dative of 378; 877 
notes 1 and 2. 

Dochmiac rhythms 712. 

Doric dialect, Introduction, page 12; 
of the drama 680 note; Doric 
future 214. 

Double consonants 12, 3. 

Doubled consonants 22-24. 

Drama, Doric of 680 note. 

Dry measure 721. 

Dual, forms of 74 note 1; ending 
of genitive and dative of 2d decl. 

- in Homer 90 b; accent of nomi- 
native in 2d decl. contracts 91, 2 ; 
epic form of in genitive and dative 
3d decl. 99 b; feminine of 117, ὃ. 


 ~y 


ENGLISH INDEX 


427 


[THE REFERENCES ARE TO SECTIONS] 


BHlegiac distich 702. 

Elision 44; in Homer 44 a; 44, 2a; 
in formation of compounds 295, 1 ; 
accent of elided words 66; halt 
elision 52 a. 

Ellipsis 717, 6. 

Emotional dative 381. 

Enclitics 70 ; accent when retained 
71; enclitic forms of personal 
pronouns 159, 1. 

Endings, personal. See Person. 

Epic case endings 76 a-c. 

Epic dialect, peculiarities of. See 
footnotes throughout the book. 

Epic Shortening 52 a. 

Epitrite 709. 

Epode 691. 

Era, the. See Year. 

Ethical dative 381. 

Eupolidean verse 708, 6. 

Exclamations, genitive in 366 note ; 
use of relatives in 488 note. 

Exhortations 582 ff. 

Expectation, future infinitive with 
verbs of 549, 2. 

Extent, accusative of 338. 


Fact, statements of 562 ; in indirect 
discourse 676. 

Fearing, clauses of 594. 

Feet 685. 

Feminine caesura 701 note. 

Figures of syntax 717. 

Final clauses 590 ff. ; purpose 590 ff. ; 
fearing 594 ; result 595. 

Finite modes 159; uses of 552 ff. 
See Modes. 

First person. See Person. 

Fullness, suffix -ev7- denoting 289, 1. 

Future conditions 603 ff. ; forms of 
in Homer 604 a, b; 605 a. 

Future passive, formation of 254 ; 
inflection of 284, 1; 245; 246, 1. 

Future perfect, formation of 228 ; 


inflection of 229; 244 ; future per- 
fect active 230 ; use of 538. 

Future tense (active), formation of, 
212 ff. ; of liquid verbs 213 ; Doric 
214; Attic 215; without suftix 
216 ; inflection of 217 ; 238-239. 

Future, use of 552 ff.; implying 
permission or command 583 note 
1; periphrastic 533; future mid- 
dle as passive 515, 1 and a; aoristic 
future 519 note 2; 519 a; future 
indicative in present conditions 
602 note 2; future and future 
perfect in other modes than in- 
dicative 548 ff.; in indirect dis- 
course 551. 


Gender, general rules for 78 ; indi- 
cated by ὁ, 7, τό 79; rules for, in 
3d decl. 94. 

General conditions 608; forms of, in 
Homer 609 a; 610 a. 

Generic article 448. 

Genitive absolute 869; 657; trans- 
lation of 657, 1; substantive not 
expressed with 657 note 1; irregu- 
lar use of 657 note 2. 

Genitive, accent of 77, 2; in Attic 
2d decl. 92,1; singular of 1st 460]. 
masculine 87 note; in Homer 
87 a; of 2d decl. in Homer 90 a; 
of stems in -v- 110 d; genitive 
(and dative) dual, ending in 2d 
decl. in Homer 90 b; in 38d deel. 
99 b; genitive plural Ist decl. ac- 
cent of 84; ending in Homer 84a ; 
of stems in -- and -v- 110, 3; of 
adjectives in Ionic 117, 1a; accent 
of, in adjectives in -ὖς 122, 2; of 
αὐτός in Ionic 140 a. 

Genitive case, syntax of 347 ff. ; 
possessive 348; subjective 349 ; 
objective 550; descriptive 352 ; of 
value 353; partitive 354-360 ; of 


428 ENGLISH INDEX 


[THE REFERENCES ARE TO SECTIONS] 


place 358 and a-b; of time 989 ; 
with adverbs 360; of separation 
362 and a; with comparatives 
263; with verbs of inferiority and 
superiority 364; of source 565 ; 
of cause 366 ; of exclamation 566 
note; of charge or penalty 367 ; 
two or more genitives with one 
word 868; with compound verbs 
370; prepositions with 371; 599 ; 
of agent 372; article with limiting 
genitives 457. 

Gentile (or place name) suffixes 286. 

Glyconic verses 708, 5. 

Gnomie aorist 530; in Homeric 
similes 530 a. 

Grave accent 56. 


Half elision 52 a. 

Hendiadys 717, 7. 

Herodotus, dialect of. See foot- 
notes throughout the book. 

Hexameter, dactylic 701. 

Hexapody 686, 1. 

Hiatus 42; in verse 688, 1. 

Hindering, construction after words 
of 648. 

Historical present 525. 

Homer, books of, how numbered 
156 note. See also Epic. 

Hoping, future infinitive with verbs 
of 549, 2. 

Hortatory subjunctive 585. 

Hypallage 717, 8. 

Hyperbaton 717, 9. 

Hypotaxis 717, 10. 

Hysteron proteron 717, 11. 


Iambus 683 ; Iambic rhythms 697 ff. ; 
107, 2. 

Ictus 684. 

Imperative mode, endings of 167 and 
note 4; perfect imperative 221, 2 ; 
aorist passive imperative -re for -@ 


238, 3; uses of the imperative 560 ; 
in commands 583 ; in prohibitions 
584; imperative in indirect dis- 
course 678 note. 

Imperative, tenses of 589 ff. ; pres- 
ent 540; aorist 5483; perfect 546. 
Imperfect, formation of. See Pres- 
ent system ; augment of 171; use 
of 526 ff.; of customary action 
526, 1; of attempted action 527 ; 
translated by present 527 note ; in 
condition contrary to fact 606 ; in 
Homer 606 a; not changed to 
optative in indirect discourse 

675, 1. 

Impersonal construction, origin of 
305 note; with infinitive 634; 
with verbal adjective 665. 

Improper diphthongs 5, 1; sounds 
of 6, 1. 

Improper prepositions, use of 418 ; 
genitive with 418 note. 

Inceptive aorist 529. 

‘¢ Incorporation,’’ with relative pro- 
nouns 485; with οὐδεὶς ὅστις οὐ 
and θαυμαστὸς ὅσος 485 note | ; 
with οἷος, ὅσος, etc. 485 note 2. 

Indefinite pronouns 148; 150; ad- 
jectives and adverbs 151; pro- 
nouns, syntax of 491. 

Indicative mode, endings of 166, 2 ; 
uses of 553 ; in statements of fact 
562; potential indicative 566 ; 
future with οὐ μή 569, 2; in ques- 
tions 576; potential in questions 
576 ; indicative in hopeless wishes 
588; with dy (potential) of re- 
current action 568 ; simple indica- 
tive instead of potential optative 
564; instead of potential indica- 
tive 566-567 ; future indicative in 
purpose clauses 590 note 5; past 
tense in unattained purpose 590 
note 4; future in relative clause 


‘se i Ὁ 


—" 
a ee ὕ. 


.” Met le ea 


2 


ENGLISH INDEX 


429 


[THE REFERENCES ARE TO SECTIONS] 


of purpose 591; in object clauses 
593; in clauses of fearing 594 
note ; present or past in clauses 
of fearing 594, 1; origin of this 
construction 594 note; in result 
clauses 595 ; 597 ; in causal clauses 
598 ; in simple conditions 602 ; in 
more vivid conditions 604 ; in con- 
ditions contrary to fact 606 ; with- 
out ἄν in conditions contrary to 
fact 607; in general conditions 
608 ff. ; in relative and temporal 
clauses 619 ; 621 ; 622 ; past tenses 
of, not changed in indirect dis- 
course 675; equivalents of indica- 
tive in simple conditions 602 
note 1. 

Indirect discourse 668 ff. ; princi- 
ples of 670 ff. ; infinitive in 551 ; 
646 ; 671; participle in 551 ; 661 ; 
671; optative in 678; verbs not 
changed to optative 674 ff.; in- 
serted statement of fact 676 ; im- 
plied indirect discourse 677; 
summary 678. 

Indirect questions 578 ff. ; ‘yes’ or 
‘no’ 578; alternative 579 ; word 
580; modes in 581; 673 ff. See 
also Questions. 

Indo-European group of languages, 
Introduction, page 11. 

Infinitive 159, 1; endings of 167; 
epic 167 e; accent of 185, 1; ac- 
cent of epic form 185, 1 a; tenses 
of 539 ff.; present 540; 541; 
aorist 548; perfect 546; 547; 
future 548 ff. ; future infinitive as 
substantive 549: Uses of 628 ff. ; 
subject accusative 342 ; 629; sub- 
ject not expressed 630 ; agreement 
of predicate words 631; negative 
with 633; personal and imper- 
sonal construction 634 ; use as a 
substantive 635 ff. ; in commands 


583 note 2; in wishes 587 note 3; 

of purpose 592; of purpose with 

τοῦ 352, 1 note; 639, note; with 

adjectives and substantives 641 ; 

| adverbial use 642; after words of 
hindering 643 ; of suggestion 644 ; 
with ὥστε 595 ; with ἐφ᾽ ᾧ, ἐφ᾽ ᾧτε 
596; with πρίν 627; after a com- 
parative 426 note 5; 645 note; in 
indirect discourse 646 ; 671; with 
ἄν 647 ; instead of participle 660, 
1 note; 661 note 3; in relative 
cJause in indirect discourse 671 
note. 

Inflection, general 753; of nouns 

general) 74; of substantives 

78 ff.; of adjectives 116 ff.; of 
pronouns 139 ff.; of verbs 157 ff. ; 
of compound words 294, 1. 

| Inseparable prefixes 299. 

|Instrument, suffix -7po- denoting 
role le 

Instrumental dative 386 ff. 

Intensive pronoun αὐτός. 
in Greek Index. 

Interchange of vowels 13; 15a; 14; 
of diphthongs 14, 2 ; of quantity 17. 

Interest, dative of 377. 

Interrogative pronouns 148 ; adjec- 
tives and adverbs 151; pronouns, 
syntax of 489 ff. 

Intransitive verbs 493 ; tenses 494. 

Tonic dialect, Introduction, page 12 ; 
ἢ for a in 15 a; contraction infre- 
quent in 18 a; aspiration in 41a; 
44, 4 ἃ. ᾿ 

Tonic feet 683 ; rhythms 711. 

Iota class of verbs 195. 


See αὐτός 


Iota subscript 5, 1. 

Trrational syllable 682, 5. 

Irregular substantives 114-115 ; ad- 
jectives 127; comparison 136; 
verbs 164; conditions 612. 

Iterative forms 191 b. 


4350 
[THE REFERENCES 


Koppa 156. 


Labial mutes 12, 2 ; before » 27,1; 
with σ 28; labial stems in 3d decl. 
101; labial verbs, formation of 
tenses of 203); 219) 15 231, 1; 
241,1. 

Linear measure 718. 

Lingual mutes 12, 2; before another 
lingual 26 ; before μ 27,3; before 
σ 30; assimilated in Homer 90 a; 
lingual stems in 3d decl. 102-108 ; 
lingual verbs, formation of tenses 
of 203 ; 218, 1; 231, 1; 247, 3. 

Liquids 12, 1; doubled after aug- 
ment 172, 1 a; liquid stems in 
3d decl. 104; liquid verbs, present 
of 195, 3-4 ; 1st aorist of 204; in 
Homer 204 a; epic 2d aorist of 
207 a; future of 213; in Homer 
213 a; Ist perfect of 218, 3; in- 
flection of future 239. 

Liquid measure 720. 

Litotes 717, 12. 

Local adverb endings 137, 2 and a. 

Locative case 76 note; locative 
dative 383 ff. 

Logaoedic rhythms 707, 1. 

Lyric rhythms 705 ff. 


Manner, dative of 389; implied by 
circumstantial participle 653, 3. 
Masculine for feminine in first per- 
son plural in tragedy 423 note; 

masculine caesura 701 note. 

Material, adjective suffixes denoting 
288; genitive of 352 note. 

Means, suffix -rpo- denoting 281, 1; 
τιο- 284, 1; dative of 387 ; implied 
by circumstantial participle 653, 2. 

Measure, genitive of 352 note. 

Measures 718 ff. 

Metathesis 38 ; of quantity 17. 

Metonymy 717, 13. 


ENGLISH INDEX 


ARE TO SECTIONS] 


Metre 681 ff. 

Middle mutes 12, 2; middle depo- 
neuts 158, 3. 

Middle voice, ending of 166, 1; 167; 
170 note 5; 504; translation of 
506 ; in future only 507. 

Mode of the verb 159. See Indica- 
tive, Subjunctive, Optative, Im- 
perative, Infinitive, and Participle. 

Mode suffixes 160 anda; contracted 
with vowel of stem 160, 2; 170, 
2-3; 200, 1; 211, 1-2; 238, 1-2. 

Modes, uses of the finite 552 ff. ; of 
infinitive 628 ff.; of participle 
648 ff. 

Modern Greek, Introduction, page 12. 

Molossus 683 footnote. 

Money, table of 724. 

Months, names of 726, 1; divisions 
of 727. 

Mood. See Mode. 

Mora 682, 1. 

Movable consonants 45-47. 

Mutes, classified 12, 2; changes in 
25-34; mutes before mutes 25- 
26; smooth in Herodotus 44, 4 a. 

Mute verbs. See Labial, Lingual, 
Palatal. 


Negatives 431 ff. ; strengthened 438 ; 
sympathetic 454-455; negative 
wishes 589 ; negative with infini- 
tive 633; in indirect discourse 
670, 3. 

Neuters, nominative, vocatiye, and 
accusative alike 74 note 3; neu- 
ter words of 3d dec]. 95; neuter 
plural, agreement of verb with 
498. 

Nominative singular in -ra (1st decl.) 
85 a; in 3d decl. 96. 

Nominative case, syntax of 325-6 ; 
in address and exclamations 326 
note, 


ENGLISH INDEX 


431 


[THE REFERENCES ARE TO SECTIONS] 


Nouns (substantives and adjectives), 
inflection of 74 ff. 

Noun stems, changes of, in derived 
words 274. 

Nu class of verbs 196. 

Number of the verb. See Singular, 
Dual, Plural. 

Numerals 152; declension of 155; 
notation 156. 


Object, direct 329; indirect 375 ff. ; 
direct object sometimes retained 
with passive 515, 3. 

Object clauses 593 and a. 

Objective genitive 350. 

Olympiad 725. 

Optative mode, suffix of 160; end- 
ings of 166, 4; 170 notes 2-3; 
accent of, see 160, 2; optative of 
2d aorist of -ι- and -v- stems 211, 
2a; of the perfect 221, 1; 227; 
of the aorist passive 299, 2. 

Optative mode, uses of 557 ff. ; po- 
tential (with ἄν) 563; without ἄν 
in Homer 563 a, b; optative in 
wishes 587; in hopeless wishes 
(epic) 588 a; in purpose clauses 
590; by attraction 590 note 1; in 
object clauses 593; in causal 
clauses 598 note; in conditions 
605; 610; in relative and tem- 
poral clauses 624-627 ; in indirect 
discourse 670, 1; 6783. 

Optative, tenses of 539 ff. ; present 
540; aorist 543; perfect 546; fu- 
ture 548; in indirect discourse 
551. 

Oxymoron 717, 14. 

Oxytone 62. 


Paeons 685 footnote. 

Palatal mutes 12, 2; before u 27, 2; 
with o 29; palatal stems in 3d 
decl. 101; palatal verbs, forma- 


tion of tenses of 203 ; 219, 1; 251, 
1: 275 2. 

Parataxis 717, 15. 

Paroemiac 705, 1. 

Paronomasia 717, 16. 

Paroxytone 62. 

Participles 159, 1; declension of 
129; endings of 167; accent of 
185, 1; tenses of 539 ff. ; present, 
540; 542; aorist 543; 545; per- 
fect 546 ; future 548 ; 550; in in- 
direct discourse 551. 

Participle, syntax of, 648 ff. ; attrib- 
utive 650; as predicate adjective 
651; circumstantial 652 ff. ; ad- 
verbs with 654 ff. ; genitive and 
accusative absolute 657-658 ; sup- 
plementary participle 659 ff. ; in 
indirect discourse 661 ; 671 ; with 
ἄν 662; with ἔχω = perfect 536, 2. 

Partitive apposition 319. 

Partitive genitive 354 ff.; of place 
358; of time 359; with adverbs 
360 and note; predicate position 
of 355 note. 

Passive aorists and futures 231 ff. 

Passive deponents 158, 3. 

Passive voice, endings of 166, 1. 

Passive voice, uses of 509 ff. ; of de- 
ponent verbs 510 ; object of active 
becomes subject of 511; cognate 
accusative retained with 512 ; 515, 
2 note; supplied by active verb 
518; origin of 514 ff.; middle 
as passive 515, 1; of intransitive 
verbs 515, 2; agent with 516. 

Patronymics 285. 

Pause (metrical) 682, 9-10. 

Pentapody 686, 1. 

Penult 51. 

Perfect active participle, declension 
of 131. 

Perfect (and pluperfect), use of 
534 ff. ; perfect with present mean- 


432 ENGLISH INDEX 


[THE REFERENCES ARE TO SECTIONS] 


ing 585; periphrastic 536; of fu- 
ture time 537; in other modes 
than indicative 546 ff.; in indirect 
discourse 551. 

Perfect middle system, formation 
of 224; inflection of 225; 244; 
247 ; Ionic, 3d plural 226 a. 

Perfect, reduplication of 178 ff. ; 
first perfect system, formation of, 
218 ; inflection 221 ; 242-243 ; sec- 
ond perfect system, formation of, 
219; without suffix 220; inflec- 
tion 221; 243; 258. 

Periphrastic perfect 536; 
533. 

Perispomenon 62. 

Person of the verb 166; personal 
endings 167 ; First person, singular 
endings 167; 170 a; 170 notes 
1-2; dual endings 167 and note 1 ; 
plural endings 167 and note 2; 
Second person, singular endings 
167; 167 a; 170 notes 1 and 3; 
170 c; dual endings 167; plural 
endings 167 ; Third person, singu- 
lar endings 167; 170, note 1; 
170 a; dual, endings of 167 , 107 Ὁ ; 
plural, endings of 167 and notes 
3-4; 167 c-d; 170 notes 1-2; of 

» perfect and pluperfect 226 and a. 

Personal construction with infini- 
tive and participle 634; with 
verbal adjectives 664. 

Personal pronouns, declension of 
139 ; in Homer 139 a; in Herodo- 
tus 139 Ὁ ; syntax of 466 ff. ; some- 
times not expressed in nominative 
467 ; sometimes reflexive in Homer 
470 a; genitive case of = pos- 
sessive 477. 

Pherecratean verses 708, 2. 

Philosophical imperfect 527 note. 

Place, suffixes denoting 284; how 
expressed 396; genitive of 358; 


future 


dative of 384 ; place toward which 
339 ; locative case 76 note. 

Pleonasm 717, 17. 

Pluperfect active, formation of 222 
and a; inflection of 225 ; 226 and 
a; 242-243, 

Pluperfect, augment of 176. 

Pluperfect, use of 554 ff.; not changed 
to optative in indirect discourse 
675, 1. 

Plural for singular, first person 495 
note. 

Poetry, kinds of 680. 

Position, syllables long by 43. 

Possession, dative of 379. 

Possessive genitive 348 ; substantive 
sometimes omitted with 348 note ; 
possessive force of article 447. 

Possessive pronouns 145 ; syntax of 
476 ff. 

Postpositive words 452 note. 

Potential indicative 565; in ques- 
tions 576; as apodosis of con- 
dition contrary to fact 606; in 
protasis 612 note; not changed 
to optative in indirect discourse 
675, 2. 

Potential optative 563 ; 565a; with- 
out ἄν 563 b; in questions 576 ; 
implying wish 587 note 2 ; as apo- 
dosis 605 ; in protasis 612 note ; 
in indirect discourse 671 ; 678, 1. 

Predicate 302; of sentence 306 ; 
verb omitted 308; predicate en- 
larged 311; not repeated in com- 
pound sentence 312, 1; genitive 
in predicate 348, 1 ; 352, 1; 356, 2. 

Predicate adjective 421 ff. 

Predicate position of 
453 ff. ; of αὐτός 475, 2. 

Predicate substantive, agreement of 
320; agreement of verb with 501 ; 
article with 449. 

Predicate words, agreement of 631. 


adjectives 


—< ΘΡΌΝ 


ENGLISH INDEX 


[THE REFERENCES 


Prefixes, inseparable 299. 

Prepositions, apocope 48 note ὦ; 
anastrophe 68 ; originally adverbs 
298 a. 

Prepositions with the accusative 
346 ; 899; with the genitive 371; 
399 ; with the dative 395; 399; 
with adverbs 429 note. 

Prepositions with the cases 398 ff. ; 
attached to verb 398 note 1; re- 
peated with verb and substantive 
398 note 2; peculiarities in the 
use of 398 note 3; adverbial use 
of, in Homer 898 a; infinitive with 
638-640. 

Present tense, reduplication of 182 ; 
193, 3 ; 197,1 ; formation of 192 ff. ; 
simple class 198; 7 class 194; 
class 195; ν class 196; ox class 
197; inflection of present 198; 
τω form 198; contracts 199; -μι 
form 200 ; paradigms 237 ; 248-254. 

Present tense, use of 520 ff.; of a 
continued state 521; with adverbs 

like πάλαι 522; of attempted ac- 
tion 523; with future meaning 
524; historical 525; in other 
modes than indicative 541 ; in in- 
direct discourse 551. 

Primary tenses 161, 1; 517; end- 
ings of 166, 2; 170 notes 1-3. 

Primitive words 269 ; primitive verbs 
165; 291 ; formation of tenses of 
186 ; 193, 1-3 ; 218, 4; 219, 2-3; 
219 a; 224 note ; 231,4; 232, 1-2. 

Principal parts of verbs 162, 2. 

Proceleusmatic 683 footnote. 

Proclitics 69. 

Prolepsis 717, 18. 

Prolonged syllables 682, 3-4. 

Promising, future infinitive with 
verbs of 549, 2. 

Pronouns, declension of 139 ff. ; per- 
sonal pronotns 1389; in Homer 


BABBITT’S GR. GRAM. — 28 


433 


ARE TO SECTIONS] 


139 a; in Herodotus 139 Ὁ ; av- 
ros 140; reflexive 141; reciprocal 
142; possessive 145 ; demonstrative 
144 ff. ; interrogative and indefinite 
148 ; relative 149-150 ; correlation 
of pronouns 151. 

Pronouns, syntax of 459 ff. ; agree- 
ment of (general) 462 ff.; at- 
traction 465; personal pronouns 
466 ff. ; reflexive 469 ff. ; αὐτός 474- 
475; possessive 476 ff.; demon- 
strative 480 ff.; relative 483 ff. ; 
interrogative 489-490; indefinite 
491; ἄλλος and ἕτερος 492. 

Pronunciation 4; 6; 11; of Greek 
proper names in English 716. 

Proparoxytone 62, 

Properispomenon 62. 

Protasis 600. 

Punctuation 72. 

Purpose, how expressed 590 ff. ; by 
participle 653, 5. 


Quality, suffixes denoting 282. 

Quantity 52-54 ; in Homer 53 a, b; 
54 a; interchange of 17. 

Questions, direct 570 ff. ; yes or no 
571; rhetorical 573; alternative 
574; word 575; modes in direct 
576 anda; deliberative 577; indi- 
rect 578 ff.; modes in indirect 
581; 673 ff.; use of relatives in 
indirect 490; 580. 


Recessive accent 64; in adjectives 
120, 1-2 ; 121, 1; in verbs 184. 

Reciprocal pronoun 142. 

Recurrent action 568. 

Reduplication 177 ff. ; of the perfect 
178; Attic 179 and a; with e- be- 
fore a vowel 180; of compound 

~verbs 181; of the present 182 ; 
193, 3; 197, 1; of the 2d aorist 
183 ; 208, 1 and a. 


451 
[THE REFERENCES 


Reference, dative of 382. 

Reflexive pronouns 141; in Homer 
141 ἃ. 

Reflexive pronouns, syntax of 469 ff. ; 
in Homer 470 a; direct 470; in- 
direct 471 ; 3d person for Ist or 2d 
471 note 1; plural for reciprocal 
471 note 2; αὐτός with 473. 

Relative clauses 618; expressing 
purpose 591 ; implying result 597 ; 
implying cause 598 ; implying con- 
dition 621 ; 622; of anticipation 
623 and a; 624; general 625; 
625 a. 

Relative pronouns 149; adjectives 
and adverbs 151. 

Relative pronouns, syntax of 483 ff. ; 
attraction of 484; ‘‘incorpora- 


tion ’’ of 485; antecedent not ex- | 


pressed 486 ; relative not repeated 
487. 

Respect, accusative of 337 ; 
of 990. 

Result, how expressed 595 ff. 

Result of action, suttixes denoting 
280. 

Rhetorical questions 573. 

Rhythmical series 686. 

Rhythms 693 ff. 

Romaic, Introduction, page 12. 

Roots 270; changes of, in derived 
words 272. 

Rough breathing 8. 

Rough mutes 12, 2. 


dative 


Sampi 156. 
Second aorist. 
Second perfect. See Perfect. 
Second person. See Person. 
Secondary tenses 161, 1; 517; end- 
ings of 166, 2; 170 notes 1-3. 
Semivowels 12, 1. 
Sentences 805 ff.; simple 309 ff. ; 
compound 312; complex 919, 


See Aorist. 


- 


ENGLISH INDEX 


ARE TO SECTIONS] 


Separation, genitive of 362. 

Sibilant 12, 1, 

Singular verb with plural subject 
496, 1; 498. 

Smooth breathing 8. 

Smooth mutes 12, 2; for rough 40; 
41; 44,4 ἃ. 

Source, genitive of 365. 

Specification, accusative of 337 ; da- 
tive of 390. 

Spondee 683 ; spondaic verse 701. 

Square measure 719. 

Statements 561 ff.; in epic poetry 
563 a. 

Stater, value of Cyzicene 724, 1. 

Stems 73, 1; of pronouns 139 note ; 
of verbs 165 ; changes of stems in 
derived words 273-274. 

Strophe 691. 

Subject of sentence 804; not ex- 
pressed 805; enlarged 310; not 
repeated in compound sentence 
312, 1; in nominative case 325; 
agreement of verb with 496 ff. 

Subject of infinitive 629; not ex- 
pressed 630; agreement of predi- 
cate words with 091. 

Subjective genitive 349. 

Subjunctive mode 159; sign -w- or 
-y- 160; with short vowel in 
Homer 160 a; 211, 1a; endings 
of 166, 3; of 2d aorist in Homer 
211, 1a; in Herodotus 211, 1 b; of 
the perfect 221, 1; 227; of aorist 
passive 233, 1 ; 233, 1a: Tenses of 
539 ff.; present 540; aorist 543 ; 
perfect 546: Uses of 554 ff. ; with 
μή and μὴ οὐ 569, 1; with od μή 
569, 2; in deliberative questions 
577 ; in prohibitions 584; in ex- 
hortation 585 ; in purpose clauses 
590; in object clauses 598, 1; in 
clauses of fearing 594; in con- 
ditions 604 ; 609; in relative and 


ENGLISH INDEX 


[THE REFERENCES 


temporal clauses 625; 625-627 ; 
changed to optative in indirect dis- 
course 673, 

Substantives, declension of 78 ff.; 
formation of 276-286; have no 
distinction of person 314 note: 
Syntax of 317 ff.; apposition 
317 ff.; predicate substantive 
320; 326; 541; peculiarities in 
the meaning of 321-322; genitive 
With 348-555; dative with 393; 
infinitive with 641. 

Substantive use of adjectives 424. 

Substitution (metrical) 685. 

Suffixes, substantive 277-286; ad- 
jective 287-289 ; adverb 290 ; verb 
292-293. 

Suggestion, infinitive of 644, 

Superlative degree, syntax of 427; 
genitive with 355, 1. 

Superlative ending -τατος 132 ; -ἰστος 
134. 

Supplementary participle 659 ff. 


Suppositions. See Conditions. 
Swearing, accusative of 344; fu- 
ture infinitive with verbs of 


549, 2. 

Syllaba anceps 688. 

Syllables 49 ; division of words into 
50; quantity of 52-54; Homeric 
peculiarities 53 a,b; 54 a; pro- 
longed 682, 3-4. 

Syncope 20. 

Synizesis 19 note 2; between two 
words 43 note 2. 

Syntax 501 ff.; of substantives 
315 ff.; of prepositions 398 ff. ; 
of adjectives 419 ff. ; of adverbs 
429 ff.; of conjunctions 440 ff. ; 
of the article 448 ff. ; of pronouns 
459 ff. ; of verbs 493 ff. 

System, tense 162; metrical, 692; 
trochaic 696 ; iambic 699, 1 ; ana- 
paestic 703, 2. 


ARE TO SECTIONS] 


Tau class of verbs 194. 

Temporal clauses 618 ; 626 and a; 
627 and a. 

Tenses of the verb 161; primary 
and secondary 161, 1; tense sys- 
tems 162; formation of 186 ff. 

Tense stems 162 ; formation of 186 ff, 

Tenses, use of 517 ff. ; primary and 
secondary 517 ; meanings of from 
context 518 ; tenses of indicative, 
present, future, ete. 519 ff.; of 
other modes 513 ff. See Present, 
‘Future, Aorist, Perfect, Pluper- 
fect, Future Perfect. 

Tetrameter 686, 2; trochaic 695; 
iambic catalectic 699 ; anapaestic 
704. 

Tetrapody 686, 1. a 

Tetraseme 682, 4. 

Theme of verbs 163. 

Thesis 684. 

Third person. See Person. 

Time, how expressed 397 ; accusa- 
tive of 338; genitive of 359; 
dative of 385; implied by cir- 
cumstantial participle 653, 1; 
reckoning of 725 ff. 

Tmesis 298 a. 

Transitive verbs 493 ; tenses 494. 

Tribrach 685. 

Trimeter 686, 2; iambic 698. 

Tripody 686, 1. 

Triseme 682, 3. 

Trochee 685; trochaic rhythms 
694 {{ 71075, 2: 


Ultima 51. 
Unreal conditions. 
contrary to fact. 


See Conditions 


Value, genitive of 352 note; 353. 

Variable vowel 169, 

Vau 2 and 2 a. See also ¢ in the 
Greek Index. 


436 ENGLISH INDEX 


[THE REFERENCES ARE TO SECTIONS] 


Verbal adjectives 159, 2; accent of 
185, 2; formation of 255; syntax 
of 663 ff. ; agent with 666. 

Verbs 157 ff.; voices 158; deponent 
verbs 158, 3; modes 159; tenses 
161; principal parts 162; irregu- 
lar verbs 164; primitive and 
denominative verbs 165 ; 291-292 ; 
person and number 166 ; personal 
endings 167; forms of inflection 
168 ff. ; augment 171 ff. ; redupli- 
cation 177 ff.; accent 184-185 ; 
formation and inflection of tense 
stems 186 ff. ; synopsis of παιδεύω 
236 ; paradigms of -w verbs 237 ff. ; 
paradigms of -μὲ verbs 261 ff. ; ir- 
regular -u verbs 259 ff.; formation 
of 291-292; desiderative 293; 
compound 298 ; verb of predicate 
omitted 308; verb has no dis- 
tinction of gender 514 note; not 
expressed in conditions 615; 616. 

Verbs, syntax of 493 ff. ; transitive 
and intransitive 493 ff. ; agreement 
495 ff. ; voice of 502 ff.; use of 
tenses 517 ff. ; uses of finite modes 
552 ff. ; infinitive 628 ff.; parti- 
ciple 648 ff.; verbal adjectives 
663 ff. ; list of verbs 729. 

Verse 687 ff. 

Versification 679 ff. 

Vocative, often like nominative 74 

* notes 2 and 3; sing. in Ist decl. 
masculine 87 ; in 8d decl. 98; like 
nominative 98, 1; peculiar voca- 
tives 104 note; 107, 1. 


Vocative case, syntax of 327. 

Voice of the verb 158; 502 ff.; 
active 503; middle 504 ff.; pas- 
sive 509 ff. See Active, Middle, 
and Passive. 

Vowels, short and long 3; sounds 
of 4; 4,1; interchange of short 
and long 13; long for short in 
Homer 13a; interchange of short 
14; contraction of 18; table of 
contractions 715; contraction of 
three vowels 19 note 1; omission 
of 20; 21; long form before a 
suffix 274 note; lengthened in 
forming compounds 296. 

Vowel verbs, formation of tenses of 
187-189 ; aorist of 202; 207; per- 
fect of 218, 2; future perfect of 
228 ; aorist passive of 231, 2; in- 
flection of 236 ff. 


Waterclock 728. 

Weights, table of 723. 

‘Whole and part’ construction 335 a. 

Wishes 586 ff. 

Words, formation of 268 ; derivative 
269 ff.; word groups 271; com- 
pound words 294 ff. ; word ques- 
tions. See Questions. 


Year, name of 725; divisions of 726. 
‘Yes or no’ questions. See Ques- 
tions. 


Zeugma 717, 19. 


GREEK INDEX 


[THE REFERENCES ARE TO SECTIONS] 


Verb forms, as a rule, are not listed in this index, but they are to be 


sought in the List of Verbs (§ 729). 


a, sound of 4; developed from ad- 
jacent consonants 14, 1; vowel 
equivalent of ν 14 note; short in 
Ist decl. 82; absorbs short vowel 
aly, We 

a-privative 299, 1. 

d-conjunctive 299, 2. 

a, = 7 in Attic 15; a in Ionic 15 a; 
for a by compensation 15, 1; in 
Ist decl. after ες 1, or p83; 86; in 
fem. of adjectives 117, 1. 

-a-, substantive suffix 277, 2. 

-a declension 80 ff. 

g, sound of 6, 1. 

ἀγαθός, compared 136. 

ἄγε, ἄγετε, with subj. and impv. 582 
note. 

dyvum, augment 172, 2; redupli- 
cation 180; perfect intransitive 
494, 3. 

ἀγχοῦ 418 a. 

-a6a-, -a6-, patronymic suffixes 285, 2. 

-afw, formation of verbs in 195, 2; 
292, 6. 

Αθήναζε 137, 2. 

ac, sound of 6. 

ai (for εἰ) in Homer 587 a; 600, 1a. 

ai, ai κε (Epic) = εἰ, ἐάν 442 Ὁ. 

-at final, effect on accent 63; elision 
of 44 a. 

αἰδώς, declined 109. 

Αἰθιοπῆας 114, 2 a. 

-a.vw, formation of verbs in 292, 8. 


-a.os, as suffix 275. 

αἱροῦμαι choose 506, 

αἰσθάνομαι, construction with 669, 3. 

αἰσχρός, compared 134. 

αἰσχύνομαι, With partic. 660, 1; with 
infin. 660, 1 note. 

-axis, adverbial suffix 290, 4. 

ἀκούω, construction with 669, 3; with 
genitive 900 ; εὖ (κακῶς) ἀκούω 513. 

ἄκρος, position of article with 454. 

ἀλγεινός, compared 136. 

ἀλλά in apodosis 601 note. 

ἀλλὰ yap 441 note 2. 

ἀλλήλων, declined 142. 

ἄλλοθι 137, 2. 

ἄλλος, declined 140; idiomatic uses 
of 492 notes. 

ἄλλο τι ἤ ἴῃ questions 573 note. 

ἄλλως τε καί 441 note 1. 

ἅμα, aS improper preposition 418; 
with circumstantial participle 655._ 

ἀμαχεί 137, 1. 

ἀμείνων 136. 

ἄμμες 139 a. 

duds 143 a. 

ἀμύνω. construction with 378. 

audi, use of 400 and a. 

av for ἀνά 43 note 3. 

ἄν, use of 436 ff. ; position of 439 
note 1; repeated 439 note 2; with 
future indicative (Hm.) 563a ; not 
used with ἔδει, χρῆν, etc. 567 ; 607 ; 


? 


in purpose clauses 590 note 2; 


437 


438 GREEK 


[THE REFERENCES 


not always used with dependent 
subj. 604a; 609a; 623 a; 6254; 
with infinitive 647 ; with participle 
662; in indirect discourse 459 ; 
670, 2. 

ἄν = ἐάν 438 note. 

ἀν-, inseparable prefix 299, 1. 

-av%-, present suffix 196, 2. 

avd, use of 401 and a. 

ἀνάγκη ἐστί with infinitive 641. 

ἁνδάνω, augment 172, 2; reduplica- 
tion 180. 

dvev 418. 

avéxw, augment of 175 note. 

ἀνήρ, declined 105 and a. 

ἀνοίγω, augment 172, 2and note 1; 
reduplication 180. 

ἀντί, use of 402; after comparative 
426 note 5; ἀντίον 418. 

ἀνύσας quickly 653 note 2. 

ἄνω, compared 158, 1. 

ἄξιος with genitive of value 353, 1. 

ao becomes ew 17. 

ao, aw, Sometimes changed to eo, ew, 
in Herodotus 199 e. 

ἀπό, use of 403. 

ἀποδίδομαι sell 506. 

"Απολλον, Vocative 104 note. 

ἅπτομαι touch 506. 

apa in questions 571, 1. 

ἀρήν, declined 115, 2. 

”Apys, declined 115, 1 and a. 

dp.-, inseparable prefix 299 a. 

ἄριστος 136. 

ἀρχήν as adverb 336. 

ἀρχόμενος 653 note 2. 

ἄσσα 148 a. 

ἅσσα (relative) 150 a. 

ἄστυ, declined 110 and d. 

-atat, -aro, 3d plural ending 167 d; 
200 ¢c; 226 a. 

dre 441 a; with participle expressing 
cause 656, 1. 

ἄτερ 418 ἃ. 


INDEX 
ARE TO SECTIONS] 


ἄττα 148 note 1. 

av, sound of 6. 

αὕτη. See οὗτος. 

αὐτίκα with circumstantial participle 
655. 

αὐτός, declined 140; as 3d personal 
pronoun in Attic 140, 1; syntax 
of 474 ff. ; with reflexives 470 a; 
473; in Homer 475, 1 a and 3a; 
idiomatic uses 475, 3 notes; in 
genitive case with possessive pro- 
nouns 479. 

αὑτοῦ 141, 1. 

ἄχρι 418. 

-dw, formation of verbs in 292, 3. 

-aw, verbs in (Homeric) 199 b ; 292, 
3a. 


B, sound of 11. See Labial Mutes. 

Balvw, €Barov 211 a; Ist and 2d 
aorist of 494, 1; future transitive 
494 note ; βέβηκα 535. 

βασιλεύς, declined 111 and a; with- 
out article 446 note. 

βελτίων, βέλτιστος 136, 

Βορρᾶς, declined 88. 

βουλεύω, meaning of middle 506. 

Bods, declined 111 and c. 


y, sound of 11; y nasal, sound of 
11, 1. See also Palatal Mutes. 

γάλα 103. 

γαμῶ, meaning of middle 506. 

γάρ, καὶ γάρ, ἀλλὰ γάρ 441 note 2. 

γαστήρ, declined 105 and a. 

-yy-, present of verbs with themes 
in 195 note 1; perfect middle 
947, 2. 

γεγάτην 219 a. 

γεραιός, comparison of 182, 2. 

-yi- apparently = -rr- 195 note 2. 

γίγνομαι as copula 3807. 

yv-, reduplication of 178 note. 

γόνυ, declined 115, 8 and a. 


GREEK INDEX 


[THE REFERENCES 


γραῦς, declined 111 and Ὁ. 
γράφομαι indict 506. 
γυνή, declined 115, 4. 


δ, sound of 11. 
Mutes. 

davelfoua borrow 506. 

das, declined 115, 5. 

δέ in apodosis 601 note. 

-de, adverbial ending 137, 2. 

δέδοικα fear 535. 

δείκνυμι, inflection of 254. 

δεῖνα 148 note 2. 

δέμας like 418 a. 

δέπα 106 c. 

δέσματα 114, 2 a. 

δή, δή wore, added to indefinite rela- 
tives 151 note. 

δῆλός εἰμι. construction with 669, 3 ; 
personal 634 ; 660 note. 

-dnv, adverbial suffix 290, 2. 

διά, use of 404. 

δῖα γυναικῶν 355, 1. 

δίδωμι, inflection of present 252; of 
aorist 256; contract forms δίδου, 
édidous, etc. 170, 4; 170, 4a; δι- 
δοῦσι 200 Ὁ ; δός 170 note 1. 

δικάζω. meaning of middle 506. 

δίκην 336 ; 418. 

διότι in causal clauses 598. 

δίχα 418 a. 

duds, declined 115, 7. 

Sool, δοιώ 155 a. 

δοκῶ. construction with 669, 2. 

-dov, adverbial suffix 290, 1. 

δόρυ, declined 115, 6 and a. 

δός 170 note 1. 

din, δῦμεν (optative) 211, 2 a. 

δύναμαι, accent of optative 200 note. 

δύο, declension of 155; δυοῖσι 155 Ὁ. 

duvo-, inseparable prefix 299, 3. 

δύω. inflection of 2d aorist ἔδυν 257 ; 
din 211, 2a; 1st and 2d aorist of 
494, 1. 


See also Lingual 


439 


ARE TO SECTIONS] 


δύω, δυῶν, δυώδεκα 155 a-b; 152 Ὁ. 
δῶ, contraction of 199 note. 


e, sound of 4; absorbed before οἱ 
19, 1; in tense formation 190. 

ἕ 139. 

-€a for -eta in Herodotus 125 a. 

ea for na 17. 

ea contracted to a 91, 1; 106, 2. 

eat contracted to ac 118, 1; 120, 3. 

ἐάν = εἰ ἄν 438 note; use of in con- 
ditions 600, 1. 

ἑαυτοῦ 141 ; syntax of 469 ff. 

ἐγγύς 418. 

ἐγώ. declined 139. 

ἔδει, Without ἄν 567, 1; 607. 

ἔδυν. See δύω. 

ee, contraction of 18, 3. 

ée 139 a. 

ἕης 149 a. © 

ἕθεν. 139 a. 

ἐθίζω, augment 172, 2; reduplica- 
tion 180. 

ει, sound of 6 and 6, 3; for e by 
compensation 16, 1. 

ei, in wishes 587 a; after words of 
wondering 598, 1; in conditions 
601; with subjunctive in Homer 
604 a; 609 a. 

εἰ γάρ in wishes 587; 588. 

εἰ δὲ μή 616, 3. 

εἶδον, augment 172, 2. 

εἴθε in wishes 587 ; 588. 

εἰλήλουθα 219 note 1. 

εἴληφα, εἴληχα, εἴλοχα, εἵμαρται 178, 
2. 

εἷλον, augment 172, 2. 

εἰ μή 616, 1; εἰ μὴ διά 616, 2. 

εἶμι, inflection of 261 ; future mean- 
ing of present 524 note ; in Homer 
524 a. 

εἰμί, inflection of 262; 
262, 1. 

εἰνάκις, etvatos 152 ἃ--Ὁ. 


accent of 


440 GREEK 
[THE REFERENCES 


eivi 406 a. 

eio 139 a. 

-evos, aS suffix 275. 

εἶπον 208, 1; construction with in 
indirect discourse 669, 1; with 
infinitive 669 note. 

εἴρηκα 178, 2. 

eis, declined 155. 

eis, use of 405 and a; sometimes 
accented in Homer 68 a; els 6 
κε = until 618 a. 

eioa, augment 172, 2. 

εἴσω 418. 

εἶτα with circumstantial participle 
655. 

-εἰω, formation of verbs in 292, 2 a. 

εἴως 442 Ὁ. 

ἐκ. See ἐξ. 

ἑκάς 418 a. 

ἐκεῖνος, declined 146 ; use of 480 ff. 

ἕκητι 418 a. 

ἐκτός 418. 

ἑκών, declined 129; ἑκὼν εἶναι 642, 1. 

ἐλάττων, ἐλάχιστος 136 ; ἔλᾶττον with 
comparatives 426 note 4. 

ἐλαύνω = march 493, 1. 

ἐλίττω, augment 172, 2; reduplica- 
tion 180. 

é\xw, augment 172, 2; reduplication 
180. 

ἐμαυτοῦ 141. 

ἐμέθεν 139 a. 

ἐμός 143. 

ἐμοῦ 139. 

ἔμπροσθεν 418, 

ἐν. use of 406 and a; sometimes 
accented in Homer 68 a; ἐν τοῖς 
427 note. 

ἐναντίον, ἕνεκα 418. 

ἔνερθε(ν) 418 ἃ. 

ἐνθαῦτα 41 ἃ. 

ἐνί 400 ἃ. 

-εντ- adj. suffix (fullness) 289, 1. 

ἐντός 418, 


INDEX 
ARE TO SECTIONS] 


ἐξ, ἐκ 47; use of 407; sometimes 
accented in Homer 68 a. 

ἐξῆν, without ἄν 567, 1; 607. 

ἔξω 418. 

eo, contraction of 18, 5; contracted 
to ev in Hdt. 170 ο. 

€0, eov, contraction of in Ionic 18 a. 

€0, ew, from ao, aw, in Hdt. 199 6, 

ἑοῖ 139 a. 

ἑός 145 a. 

ἐπᾶν (ἐπεάν), ἐπήν, ἐπειδάν 438 note. 

ἐπεί, ἐπειδή, in causal clauses 598. 

ἔπειτα With circumstantial partici- 
ple 655. 

éri, use of 408. 

ἐπίσταμαι, accent of subj. and opt. 
200 note. 

ἕπομαι, augment of 172, 2. 

ἐπριάμην 257. ' 

ἐργάζομαι, augment 172, 2; redupli- 
cation 180. 

ἕρπω, augment 172, 2; reduplica- 
tion 180. , 

-eo-, substantive suffix 277, 8; adjec- 
tive suffix 287, 2. 

-eot, dative plural ending (epic) 99 a. 

eoo.(v), dative plural ending (epic) 
76b; 99 a. 

ἕσταμεν 220, 

ἕστηκα stand 535. 

ἐστί, accent of 262, 1. 

ἔστιν (εἰσί) of 486 note. 

ἑστιῶ, augment of 172, 2. 

ἑστώς. declined 131 and note. 

ἔσχατος, article with 454. 

érepos, idiomatic uses of 492 notes, 

ev, sound of 6. 

-ev-, stems in 111 anda; contracted 
Toe 

εὖ (Ionic), use of 477 a. 

-ev-, substantive suffix (agent) 278, 
1; gentile suffix 286, 1. 

εὐθύς With circumstantial partic, 655, 

etre 442 ἃ. 


—" δ“... 


GREEK 
[THE REFERENCES 


-evw, formation of verbs in 292, 4. 

ἐφ᾽ ᾧτε 441 a; ἐφ᾽ ᾧ, ἐφ᾽ ᾧτε, use of 
596. 

ἐχθρός. compared 134. 

ἐχρῆν 267 ; without ἄν 567, 1 ; 607. 

éxw, augment of 172, 2; meaning 
of middle 506 ; with participle = 
perfect 5386, 2; = be 493, 1. 

ἔχων persistently 653 note 2; with 
653 note 3. 

ew for ao or no 17. 

-éw, formation of verbs in 292, 2. 

ἐῶ, augment 172, 2. 

ἕως 618 note. 


Ε 2 and 2 a; prevents elision in 
forming compounds 295, 1. 
¢ (numeral) 156. 


{ 12, 3; sound of 11. 

¢a-, inseparable prefix 299 a. 
Ζεύς. declined 115, 8 and a. 
ζῶ, contraction of 199, 3. 


ἡ: sound of 4; as long form of a 13 
note ; Attic = original a 15; in 
Tonic 15 a. 

-y in Ist decl. 83; Ionic 83 a; ἡ in 
feminine of adjectives 117, 1. 

ἢ from a in 1st aorist of liquid verbs 
204 note 2. 

-n-, Subjunctive sign 160. 

ἢ in questions 571, 1; 
574 a. 

4H, use of with comparative 426, 2 
and notes; interrogative 574 a; 
xara 426 note 5. 

ἡ. noe. See ὁ and ὅδε. 

n, sound of 6, 1. 

ἡ 151 ; with superlative 428. 

na becomes ea 17. 

-nac contracted to -y in Hdt. 170 c. 

ἡγοῦμαι, construction with 669, 2. 

ἤδη With circumstantial partic. 655. 


571 a; 


INDEX 441 


ARE TO SECTIONS] 


ἡδύς, compared 134. 

ἠέ, ne, in questions 574 a. 
ἡλίκος 151. 

juat, inflection of 265. 
ἦμαρ 103, 1. 

ἡμεῖς 139, 

ἠμὲν. . . ἠδέ 441 Ὁ. 
ἡμετερόνδε 137, 2 a. 
ἡμέτερος 145. 

jut 200. 

nuc-, inseparable prefix 299, 4. 
Hutv, ἥμων 139 note 2. 
ἥμισυς, article with 454. 
ἦμος 442 ἃ. 

ἤν = ἐᾶν 438 note. 

ἡνίκα 151. 

ἡνιοχευ- in Homer 114, 2 ἃ. 
no becomes ew 17. 

jos 442 b. 

ἧπαρ 103, 1. 

Ἡρακλῆος 108 a. 

ἥρως 113 and a. 

της, adjectives in 120 and a. 
ἥτις. See ὅστις. 

ἥττων 130. 

nu, sound of 6, 2. 

ἠχώ 112. 

ἠώς, declined 109 a. 


6, sound of 11. See Lingual mutes ; 
θ in tense formation 191 a. 

θανάτου κρίνειν 3867 note. 

θάπτω 41. 

θαρρῶν boldly 653 note 2. 

θάττων 134. 

-θεν, case ending in Homer 76 a; 
adverbial ending 137, 2. 
τ-τθι, adverbial ending 137, 

perative ending 167 ; 200 c. 
θοἰμάτιον 43. 
θρίξ 41 ; declined 101. 
θυγάτηρ, declined 105 and a. 
θύω, meaning of middle 506 ; ἐτύθην 
40, 


9. 
a9 


im- 


442 GREEK 


[THE REFERENCES 


t, sound of 4; subscript 5, 1; con- 
traction of 18, 1; dropping of 21 ; 
with consonants 39, 1-4. 

-t, locative ending 76 note. 

-.- stems in 8d decl. 110; proper 
names 110, 2. 

--, optative suffix 160, 1 (cf. 199; 
233 note). 

ι class of verbs 195. 

-.%-, denominative verb suffix 292. 

-i, added to demonstrative pronouns, 
147. 

va one 155 a. 

-ιᾶ-, -ca-, Substantive suffixes 282, 1-2. 

-.6-, gentile suffix 286, 1. 

-.0a-, -L6-, patronymic suffixes 285, 1. 

ἔδιος With possessive genitive 348, 2. 

ἱδρώς in Tonic 102 ἃ. 

ἱερός with possessive genitive 348, 2. 

-.¢w, formation of verbs in 195, 2; 
292, 6; future 215. 

-in-, Optative suffix 160, 1 (cf. 199 
note ; 255 note). 

inm, augment of 172, 2; reduplica- 
tion of 180 ; inflection of 260. 

ἔθι with imperative 582 note. 

-iko-, adjective suffix 287, 6. 

ἵλεως, declined 119 and a. 

iva in purpose clauses 590. 

-.vo-, adjective suffix (material) 288, 2. 

-.o-, diminutive suffix 283, 1; place 
suffix 284, 1 ; adjective suffix 287, 5. 

-ισκο-,ισκᾶ-, diminutive suffixes 285, 2. 

-.rk%- present suffix 197. 

ἵστημι, ἱστᾶσι 167 note 33; στήετον 
211,1a; στέωμεν 211,1b; inflec- 
tion of present 253; of 2d aorist 
257; 1st and 2d aorist of 494, 1; 
perfect intransitive 494, 3. 

πιστος, superlative ending 134 ; more 
frequent in poetry 134 b. 

ἰχθύς, declined 110 and e. 

-iwy, comparative ending 134 ; more 
frequent in poetry 134 b. 


INDEX 
ARE TO SECTIONS] 


«x, sound of 11; for π in Herodo- 
tus 151 b. See also Palatal 
Mutes. 

-xa, Ist perfect suffix 218; in aorist 
205. 

κάθημαι, inflection of 265, 1. 

καί, καὶ δὴ καί, meaning of 441 note 
1; καὶ γάρ 441 note 2. 

καί, καίπερ, kal ταῦτα with participle 
expressing concession 656, 2 and 
a; καὶ ταῦτα 312 note ; 
443, 3. 

κακός, compared 136. 

κάλος 92 a, 

καλός, compared 136. 

κἂν for καὶ ἐν 43 note 1. 

κἄν for καὶ ἐάν 617. 

κάρα, κάρη declined 115, 9 and a. 

κατά, use of 409. 

κατηγορῶ with genitive 370. 

κεῖμαι, inflection of 264. 

κεῖνος 146 a. 

κέκτημαι possess 535. 

κέρᾶς, declined 115, 10; 103, 2 and 
a; 106. 

κιθών 41 a. 

«ts, declined 110, 2. 

κλαίων to one’s sorrow 653 note 2. 

κλέα 106 a. 

-κλέης, names in 108 and a. 

κόθεν 151 Ὁ. 

Κοινή (common dialect), Introduc- 
tion, page 12. 

κοῖος 151 Ὁ. 

κόρυς, declined 115, 11 ἃ. 

κόσος. κοτέ, κοῦ 151 Ὁ. 

κρείττων 136. 

κρέμαμαι, accent of subjunctive and 
optative 200 note. 

κυρῶ, Supplementary participle with 
660 note. 

κύων, declined 115, 12. 

κώεσι 100 ο. 

κῶς 151 Ὁ. 


καὶ τόν 


GREEK 
[THE REFERENCES 


dX, sound of 11. See Liquids. 

λαγός, λαγωός 92 a. 

λαγχάνω, λαμβάνω, reduplication of 
perfect 178, 2. 

λάθρᾳ 418. 

λανθάνω, Supplementary participle 
with 660 note; λαθών = secretly 
653 note 2. 

λαός 92 a. 

λᾶς, declined 115, 13. 

λέγω (collect), reduplication of per- 
fect 178, 2. 

λέγω (say) construction with, in in- 
direct discourse 669, 1 ; εὖ (κακῶς) 
λέγω τινά 390. 

λείπω fail 493, 1. 

λιθοβόλος, λιθόβολος 300 note. 

-\Aw, formation of verbs in 292, 7. 

-do-, adjective suffix 287, 9. 

λογογράφος, λογοποιός 300. 

λῴων, λῷστος 136. 


p, sound of 11. See Liquids. 

-ua-, substantive suffix 280, 3. 

-μαίνω, verbs in 292, ὃ note. 

μάλα, comparison of 138, 2. 

μᾶλλον, μάλιστα, in comparison of 
adjectives 135. 

μάρτυς, declined 115, 14 and a. 

-ματ-, Substantive suffix 280, 1. 

μέγας, declined 127; compared 134. 

-μεθον, dual ending 167 note 1, 

μείων 136; μεῖον with comparatives 
426 note 4. 

μέλᾶς, declined 124. 

μέλι 103. 

μέλλω With infinitive 533; 
future infinitive 549, 1. 

μέμνημαι remember 535 ; subjunctive 
and optative of 227 note. 

-μεναι, -μεν, infinitive ending (epic) 
167 6 ; accent of 185, 1 a. 

-μέσθα. Ist plural ending 167 note 2. 

μέσος, position of article with 454. 


with 


INDEX 443 


ARE TO SECTIONS] 


pera, use of 410 and a. 

μεταξύ 418 ; with circumstantial par- 
ticiple 655. 

μέχρι 418. 

μή, Syntax of 431 ff. ; instead of οὐ 
431 note; μή (apa μή, μῶν) in 
questions 572, 2; μή in wishes 
589; after ὁρῶ, σκοπῶ, etc. 593 
note; ὅτι μή, ὅσον μή 625 note; 
μὴ ὅτι 442 note; μὴ οὐ 432; 435 
and note. 

μηδείς, declension of 155, 1. 

μήτηρ, declined 105 and ἃ. 

μητροκτόνος, μητρόκτονος 300 note. 

-ye personal ending 167; 170 a; 170 
note 1. 

-μι verbs, inflection of 170; para- 
digms 251 ff.; irregular 259 ff. ; 
like contract verbs 170, 4 and a. 

pla. See εἷς. 

μίγα, μίγδα 418 a. 

μικρός, compared 136; μικροῦ (δεῖν) 
= almost 642, 1 and note. 

μιν 139 Ὁ. 

μισθοῦμαι hire 506. 

-μο-, Substantive suffix 280, 2. 

-pov-, adjective suffix 287, 3. 

μοῦ 139. 

-μπ-, perfect middle of themes in 
247, 1. 

μῶν in questions 572, 2; μῶν οὐ 572 
note. 


v, sound of 11 (see Liquids) ; re- 
placed by a 14 note; changes in 
before other consonants 31-34; 
assimilated 83; dropped before o 
34; dropped in dative plural 5d 
decl. 99 ; vy movable 45. 

-ν 3d plural ending for -σαν 167 c; 
170 b; 233 a. 

ν class of verbs 196. 

va, vyn- present suffix 196, 3. 

vais, declined 111 and b. 


444 GREEK 


[THE REFERENCES 


ve%-, present suffix 196, 4. 

νη-. inseparable prefix 299 a. 

νηός 92 a. 

νηῦς, νηός 111 Ὁ. 

νιν 139 note 1. 

-vo-, adjective suffix 287, 7. 

-v%-, present suffix 196, 1. 

νομίζω, construction with 669, 2. 

νόσφι(ν) 418 a. 

yr dropped in dative plural 3d 460]. 
99, 1. 

-vT-, adjective stems 125. 

-vu-, present suffix 196, 5. 

νώ 139; vwirepos 145 ἃ. 


12, 3; sound of 11. 
See σύν. 
, contraction of 199 note. 


o, sound of 4; absorbed before οἱ 
ORs 

-o-, Substantive suffix 277, 1; adjec- 
tive suffix 287, 4; adjective suffix 
(material) 288, 1. 

ὁ- relative stem 151. 

6, 7, τό, declined 144 ; demonstrative 
in Homer 144 a; in Herodotus 
144b; as relative in Homer 149 a; 
in Herodotus 149 b; use with ap- 
positive in Homer 317 a; epic uses 
of 443 a; as a relative 443 Ὁ; ὃ 
μὲν -.. ὃ δέ 448. 1. See Article. 

ὅ, 6 τε in causal clauses (epic) 598 ἃ. 

oa contracted to a 118, 1. 

ὅδε, declined 145; use of 480 ff.; =a 
possessive 482 note. 

ddovs 102. 

oe, contraction of 18, 5. 

oe, contraction of 19, 2. 

on, contraction of 19, 2; 170, 2. 

ὅθεν 151. 

ὁθούνεκα, introducing indirect dis- 
course 669, 1 b. 

οἱ, sound of 6; absorbs ¢ or o 19, 1. 


INDEX 
ARE TO SECTIONS] 


τοι final, effect on accent 63. 

-o.-Stems 112 and a. 

of (pron.) 139; of (ady.) 151. 

οἴγω. See ἀνοίγω. 

οἶδα, inflection of 259; meaning of 
535 ; construction with 669, 5. 

Οἰδίπους, declined 115, 15 and ἃ. 

-ouv in dual of 2d decl. (Homer) 90 Ὁ. 

οἴκαδε 137, 2. 

οἰκεῖος With possessive genitive 348, 2. 

οἴκοθεν 137, 2. 

οἴκοθι 137, 2 a. 

οἴκοι 137, 1. 

τοῖο, ending of genitive singular 2d 
decl. in Homer 90 a. 

οἴομαι. construction with 669, 2. 

οἷος 151; with superlative 428; at- 
traction of 485 note 2; οἷός τε 
441 a; οἷον, ofa, with participle 
expressing cause 656, 1. 

ois, declined 115, 16 and a. 

ὁκόθεν, Oxolos, ὁκόσος, ὅκου, ὅκως 151 Ὁ. 

ὀλίγον (δεῖν) = almost 642, 1 and 
note. ; 

ὄλλῦμι, Ist and 2d perfect of 494, 2. 

ὅλος, article with 455. 

ὅμως With circumstantial partic.6585, 1. 

ὀναίμην, accent of 211 note. 

ὀνειρατ- 114, 2. 

oo, contraction of 18, 3. 

-oo, ending of genitive singular 2d 
decl. in Homer 90 a. 

bo (dov) 149 a. 

ὅπῃ. ὁπηλίκος, ὁπηνίκα, ὁπόθεν. ὅποι, 


. 


ὁποῖος, ὁπόσος, ὁπότε, Grow 15]. 

ὄπισθεν 418 

ὅπποιος, ὁππότε, etc. 151 ἃ. 

ὅπως 151 ; with subjunctive or future 
indicative in commands 583 note 
3; with future indicative in pur- 
pose clauses 590 note 3 ; in object 
clauses 593; ὅπως μή, instead of 
μή 04 note. 

i ὄρνις, declined 115, 17. 


GREEK 
[THE REFERENCES 


ὁρῶ, augment of 172, 2 and note 1; 
reduplication of 180; with μή and 
subjunctive 593 note. 

és, 7, 6 (relative) 149. 

és as demonstrative 144 a. 

és (possessive) 143 and 1; use of 
143 a; 478 and a. 

és, ὅσος, etc., referring to indefinite 
antecedent 488. 

ὅσος 151; attraction of 485 note 2; 
ὅσον μή 625 note. 

ὅστις, declension of 150 ; οὐδεὶς ὅστις 
ov 485 note 1. 

ὅταν 438 note. 

ὅτε 151. 

ὅτι. With superlative 428; in causal 
clauses 598 ; introducing indirect 
discourse 669 ; ὅτι μή 625 note. 

ὅτις, ὅτεο, ὅττι. etc., in Homer and 
Herodotus 150 a—b. 

ὅτου. ὅτῳ 150, 1. 

ov, sound of ὁ and 6, 8; for o by 
compensation 16, 1. 

ov, οὐκ, οὐχ 46; οὐ, Syntax of 431 ff. ; 
instead of μή 431 note ; οὐ (ap’ οὐ, 
οὐκοῦν) in questions 572, 1; οὐ μή 
432. 

οὗ, of, €, declined 139 ; accent of 139, 
1-2; use of, in Attic 468 ; 472; in 
Homer 472 a. 

οὗ (where) 151. 

οὐδαμοῦ 137, 1. 

οὐδείς. declension of 155, 1; οὐδεὶς 
ὅστις οὐ 485 note 1. 

ovdeos 106 ο. 

οὖν, added to indefinite relatives 151 
note. 

οὕνεκα, introducing indirect discourse 
669, 1 b. 

ods, declined 115, 18 and a. 

οὗτος. declined 145; use of 480 ff. ; 
καὶ οὗτος 312 note. 

οὕτως, with circumstantial participle 
655, 1. 


INDEX 445 


ARE TO SECTIONS] 


ὄφρα 618 a; ὄφρα and ὄφρα ke in pur- 
pose clauses 590 a, b. 

οὐχ ὅτι 442 note. 

-6w, formation of verbs in 292, 1. 


a, sound of 11; doubled in general 
relatives in Homer 151 a. See 
Palatal Mutes. 

πάθος 14 note. 

mats, declined 115, 19. 

πάλαι With present tense 522. 

παρά, use of 411. 

πάρος 627 a. 

mas, declined 125 ; article with 455. 

πᾶσα 125 note 1. 

πάσχω. εὖ πάσχω 515. 

πατήρ. declined 105 and a. 

Πατροκλεεσ- in Homer 114, 2 a. 

πειθώ 112. 

πείθω. Ist and 2d perfect of 494, 2. 

ΠΕειραιεύς. declined 111, 2. 

πέλεκυς. declined 110. 

πέπασθε 219 a. 

πέποιθα trust 535. 

mep With participle 656, 2 a. 

πέραν 418. 

πέρας 103, 2. 

περί, use of 412 and ἃ. 

πέφυκα am 535. 

πῇ, πῃ 151. 

πήγνῦμι, perfect intransitive 494, 3. 

πηλίκος. πηνίκα 151. 

πῆχυς, declined 110 and d. 

πίσυρες 152 a. 

πλέα feminine of πλέως 119, 2. 

πλείων (πλέων), πλεῖστος 136; πλέον 
with comparatives 426 note 4. 

πλέω. contraction of 199, 2. 

πλήν. πλησίον 418. 

Πνύξ. declined 115, 20. 

mo- interrogative stem 151. 

πόθεν, ποθέν 151. 

mot 137,-1. 


ποῖ, ποι, ποῖος, ποιός, 151, 


446 GREEK 


[THE REFERENCES 


ποιῶ, εὖ ποιῶ τινα, etc. 350. 

πόλις, declined 110 and a-c. 

πολιτεύω, Meaning of middle 506. 

πολύ 137, 1. 

πολύς, declined 127 and a; com- 
pared 156. 

Πόσειδον. vocative 104 note. 

πόσος. ποσός, πότε, ποτέ 191]. 

ποτί 414 ἃ. 

ποῦ 137, 1; mov, που 151. 

πρᾷος, declined 128. 

πρεσβεύομαι negotiate 506. 

πρεσβευτής, declined 115, 21. 

πρίν 627 and a; πρίν ἤ 627 note. 

πρίωμαι. πριαίμην, accent of 211 note. 

πρό, use Of 413; πρὸ τοῦ 445, 4. 

πρός, use of 414 and a. 

πρόσθεν... πρίν, πρότερον... 
πρότερον ἤ 627 note. 

προτί 414 ἃ. 

πρῷ 137, 1. 

mop, declined 115, 22. 

mas, πως 151. 


. πρίν, 


Ὁ ° 156. 


p, sound of 11. 

p (initial), sound of 11, 2; rough 
breathing of 9; doubled 23. See 
Liquids. 

ῥᾷδιος, compared 136. 

-po-, adjective suffix 287, 8. 

pp for ps 24. 5 


σ' S,, ΤΟΥ ΡΟ τῶ» sound ὩΓ 11- 
disappearance of 35-37 ; changed 
to rough breathing 36; doubled in 
future and aorist in Homer 201 a. 

-s imperative ending 170 note 1. 

σ in perfect middle and aorist pas- 
sive 189. 

-σ- stems in 3d decl. 106-109; in 
Ionic 106 a-c; 108 a; 109 a. 

σαυτοῦ 141, 1. 


INDEX 
ARE TO SECTIONS] 


σβέννυμι, Ist and 2d aorist of 494, 1. 

σεαυτοῦ 141. 

of, lost at the beginning of some 
words 36 a. 

-σθα, personal ending 167 a. 

-σθωσαν, imperative ending 167 note 4. 

-o., locative ending 76 note ; dative 
plural ending 99 and a; 3d person 
ending 167; 170 a; 170 note 1. 

-σι-, Substantive suffix (action) 279, 2. 

-o.a-, substantive suffix 279, 3. 

σῖτος, σῖτα 114, 3. 

-ok%-, iterative suffix 191 Ὁ. 

σκοπῶ with μή and subj. 593 note. 

σκότος, declined 114, 1. 

σός 145. 

σπουδῇ 137, 1. 

oo, in Homer 80 a; 35 a; in Ist 
aorist 201 a. 

στάδιον, στάδιοι 114, 3. 

ot, declined 139. 

σύμμιγα 418 a. 

σύν, use of 415 and a. 

-cuva-, Substantive suffix (abstract), 
282, 4. 

συνελόντι εἰπεῖν 382 ; 642, 1. 

σύνοιδα, construction with 661 note 2. 

σῦς, declined 110. 

ode 139 note 1. 

σφεῖς 139. 

σφέτερος 143; use of 478. 

σφέων (Ionic), use of 477 a. 

σφός 145 ἃ. 

σφώ 139. 

σφωΐτερος 143 ἃ. 

σχές 170 note 1. 

Σωκράτης, declined 107; 114, 1. 

σῶτερ, vocative 104 note. 


τ᾿ sound of 11. See Lingual Mutes. 

-7 final dropped 95. 

τ Class of verbs 194. 

-ra, nominative ending of 1st decl. 
in Homer 85 a. 


. GREEK 
[THE REFERENCES 


-ra-, Substantive'suffix (agent) 278, 4. 

-ra-, gentile suffix 286, 2. 

ταί 144 ἃ. 

τάλας, declined, 124. 

-τατος, Superlative ending 132. 

ταὐτό 45. 

ταχύς, compared 134. 

τἄων 144 a. 

Te, epic use of 441 ἃ. 

-re, adverbial suffix 290, 3. 

τεθνάναι 220. 

tely 139 a. 

-τειρα, feminine substantives in 282, 2. 

τελευτῶν finally 653 note 2. 

τέο, τέοισι, τεῦ, etc. 148 ἃ. 

τέος 143 ἃ. 

-τέος, ending of verbal adjective 235. 

τέρας, 103, 2 and a. 

-Tepos, comparative ending 132. 

τέσσαρες, τέσσερες 152 a—b. 

τέτταρες, declension of 155. 

τέῳ, τέων, etc. 148 a. 

τῆ-δε, τηλικοῦτος, τηλίκος, τηλικόσδε, 
τηνίκα, τηνικάδε, τηνικαῦτα 151. 

τῆλε 418 ἃ. 

-Tnp-, Substantive suffix 278, 2. 

-τηριον 284, 1. 

τῇσι 144 a—b. 

-TnT-, Substantive suffix 282, 3. 

τί. See ris; τί μαθών, τί παθών 653 
note 4. 

τ-τι-, Substantive suffix (action) 279,1. 

-7.6-, substantive suffix (agent) 278, 
4; gentile suffix 286, 2. 

τίθημι, inflection of present 251 ; of 
aorist 255; contract forms éri- 
Gets, τιθοῖτο, etc. 170, 4; 170, 46: 
τιθήμεναι 200 a; τιθεῖσι 200 Ὁ : 
ἐτέθην 40. 

τίς, τὶς 148; accent of 148, 1; τὶς, 
added to relatives 150 and note ; 
use and rendering of 491 notes. 

ro-, demonstrative stem 151. 

τό, τόδε. See ὁ and ὅδε. 


INDEX 447 


ARE TO SECTIONS] 


τόθεν 151. 

τοι (dative singular) 139 ἃ. 

τοί (nominative plural) 144 ἃ. 

Totiv, Toto 144 a. 

τοῖος, τοιόσδε, τοιοῦτος 151; use of 
482, 

-τορ-, Substantive suffix (agent) 278, 
3 3 τοίσδεσι. τοίσδεσσι, τοισίδε 145 ἃ. 

τοῖσι, τῇσι 144 ἃ-Ὁ. 

τὸν καὶ τόν 445. 2. 

-τος, ending of verbal adjective 235. 

τόσος, τοσόσδε, τοσοῦτος 151; use of 
482. 

τότε 151; τότε with circumstantial 
participle 655. 

τοῦ = Tivos 148. 

τοῦτο. See οὗτος. 

τρεῖς, declension of 155. 

τρέφω 41. 

τρία, τριῶν. τρισί 155, 

-τριδ-. Substantive suffix 278, 4. 

τριχός 41. 

-Tpo-, Substantive suffix 281, 1. 

τρόπον (adverbial accusative) 336. 

Tpws, declined 115, 23. 

ττ = Ionic oo 22; apparently from 
γι 195 note 2. 

-7Tw, formation of verbs in 195, 1; 
202. 5. 

τυγχάνω supplementary participle 
with 660 note. 

τύνη 139 a. 


τῷ = τίνι, τινί 148. 
τώς 151, 


-τωσαν, imperative ending 167 note 
4. 


v, sound of 4 and 4, 1; initial al- 
ways with rough breathing 10; 
dropping of 21; contraction of 
LS ele 

-v-, adjective suffix 287, 1. 

-v- stems in 3d decl. 110, 1. 

ὕδωρ, declined 115, 24. 


448 GREEK 
[THE REFERENCES 


νι, sound of 6. 

υἱός, declined 115, 25 and a. 

ὑμεῖς 139; ὗμας, ὕμων 139 note 2. 
ὑμέτερος 143. 

ὕμμες 139 a. 

ὑμός 143 a. 

-vvw, formation of verbs in 292, 9. 
ὑπέρ, use of 416. 

ὑπό, use of 417. 


¢, sound of 11. See Labial Mutes. 

φαίνω, inflection of perfect middle 
247 ; perfect intransitive 494, 3; 
φαίνομαι as copula 307. 

φέρε with imperative 582 note. 

φημί, inflection of 263; accent of 
263, 1; construction with in in- 
direct discourse 669, 1. 

φθάνω, supplementary participle with 
660 note; φθάσας = before 653 
note 2. 

φθίμην, φθῖτο (optative) 211, 2 a. 

-φι(ν), epic case ending 76 c. 

φίλος, comparison of 132, 2; 135. 

φυλάττω, meaning of middle 506. 

gow, Ist and 2d aorist of 494, 1; 
future transitive 494 note; per- 
fect intransitive 494, 3. 

φῶς 103, 2 and a. 


x, sound of 11. See Palatal Mutes. 

χαίρων with impunity 655 note 2. 

χάριν for the sake of 890 ; 418. 

xelp, declined 115, 26 and a. 

χείρων, χείριστος 136. 

χέω, ἔχυτο 21] ἃ. 

χοῦς, declined 111. 

χρή 267; χρῆν without ἄν 567, 1; 
607. 


INDEX 
ARE TO SECTIONS] 


χρῶμαι, contraction of 199, 3 ; dative 
with 387 note ; χρώμενος with 653 
note 3. 

xpws in Ionic 102 a. 


wW 12,3; sound of 11. 


ω, sound of 4. 

-w- stems in 92; -w- (or wf) stems 
115 and a. 

-w-, Subjunctive sign 160. 

ῳ, sound of 6, 1. 
-w verbs, inflection of 169; synop- 
sis of 236; paradigms of 237 ff. 
#06, augment of 172, 2; reduplica- 
tion of 180. 

ὧν. declined 129. 

-wy-, place suffix 284, 2. 

ws 151; sometimes accented in 
Homer 68 a; as improper prepo- 
sition 418 ; with superlative 428 ; 
in wishes 586 a ; in purpose clauses 
590 ; in causal clauses 598 ; accu- 
sative absolute after 658 note ; ὡς 
with participle 656, 3; with par- 
ticiple in indirect discourse 661 
note 4; introducing indirect dis- 
course 669 ; ὡς ἔπος εἰπεῖν 642, 1; 
ὡς εἰ, ws εἴ τε with participle in 
Homer 656, 3 a. 

ὥσπερ With participle 656 note ; ac- 
cusative absolute after 658 note ; 
ὥσπερ ἂν εἰ 616, 4. 

ὥστε 441 a; expressing result 595 ff. ; 
with participle in Herodotus 656, 
1 ἃ. ὲ 

wu, diphthong in Herodotus ὃ ἃ. 

ωὑτός 140 a. 

ὥφελον in wishes 588 and a. 


== 


vs 
f 
4 


HOME USE a 
CIRCULATION DEPARTMENT sis 
MAIN LIBRARY & 


This book is due on the last date stamped below. | i 
1-month loans may be renewed by calling 642-3405. 
6-month loans may be recharged by bringing books | 
to Circulation Desk. πῇ 
Renewals and recharges may be made 4 days prior 
to due date. La 
ALL BOOKS ARE SUBJECT TO RECALL 7 DAYS 
AFTER DATE CHECKED OUT. es 


ΝΟΥ 28 1974 3 4 | 


BEG, GR, νον 1 


LD21—A-—40m-5,’74 General Library 
(R81911L) University of California 
Berkeley 


BERKELEY LIBRARIES 


€O47037775 


᾿ ἔ ᾿ 


Hey ΣΉΝ 
; Ol i Wa 
ἢ μ ἡ ΠΝ τς 
"ἢ ἢ 
i Hh ii ᾿ ΤῊ "ἢ 
Fy} ] f f if 7) ἐξ ἢ 
Ἢ He Hs pith fe 


4 fs Ι “ee 
pi be Fis 


iste 
fiy 


ἢ 


VE 


ἢ 


ἢ 
ΚΠ 
4 vis 
ogre δι ΣΙΝ 
stay ft ΚΗ 


Γἐ ἢ: 
ΓΤ 


Σ ἌΝ 
i) if} i] gies 
ιν : Biles Hy if f 
CU HG 


iret 


2 
‘nn, 
ay 


ἂν 


πῶς 
mn 
ona ng 


nee 
“ole, 


